Α 
0 
0 
0 
1 

3 
4 
9 
8 
9 
3 


— 

SS 

ἘΞΞΞ 
ΞΞΞΞΞΞΞΞΞΞΞ () 
—-_ 
δον () 
SSS 
ΞΞΞΞΞΞΞΞΞΞΙ —! 
—— 
SSS = 
——<$—— Ξῷ 
—— = 
Se 

--- 
eee τοὶ 
ΞΞΞΞ-- 
SSS 
ΞΞΞΞτΞ-Ξ 
ΞΞΞΞΞΞΞΞΞΞΡ 
ΞΞΞΞΞΞΞΞΞΞῚ 
ΞΞ- 
SS === 
SSS == 
SSS = 
—— «Ὁ 
= < 
ΞΞΞΞ-.------ 
SSS 
—_ 2 
ΞΞΞΞΞ- 
SSS FF 
.- -- -- το 
ss 

SSS 


THuCYoIDES. 
Book VIL 


5 ΜΙΤῊ ῖ 


| 


< 
2 
On 
eS | 
ἘΞῚ [πὶ 
9 
ΟΞ 
Ga 
Own 
ag) 
Bae 
= 
Zz 
>) 


SOUTHERN BRANCH, 
UNIVERSITY: OF CALIFORNIA, 


LIBRARY, ἐ 
ΟΒ ANGELES, CALIF. 


AD (pel | 


fh, 


Ἣν ΟΝ Ἢ at 
eet iia ERS BI Ὁ 


COLLEGE SERIES OF GREEK AUTHORS 


EDITED UNDER THE SUPERVISION OF 


JOHN WILLIAMS WHITE anp THOMAS D. SEYMOUR. 


moe OY DI DES 


BOOK, VEEL 


EDITED 
ON THE BASIS OF CLASSEN’S EDITION 
BY 


CHARLES FORSTER SMITH 


PROFESSOR OF GREEK IN VANDERBILT UNIVERSITY. 


GINN & COMPANY 


BOSTON - NEW YORK - CHICAGO - LONDON 


Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1886, by 
JOHN WILLIAMS WHITE AND THOMAS D. SEYMOUR, 


in the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington, 


110.2 
Me < « « 
ee gee . e4s 9 . « εἷς G66 οὶ ς ; 
Gita. ec ee o. 70a ε ΞΟ ς (Oye ΝΕ 
ἴθ 66 ὦ σον 2 «ε- ε « < © Ge é 
ἢ ον δ᾽. ae ee eset @ 0 CG oe δχ δ 
« 
«ε « 
ε ΣῊ aim « 06 ΣΎ τα Chee e = 
εε ε . 8 ες 
ee 68 - « « 
eee < « 
« ἐς €<« « « 
ε « «ες ee «ε « « ες 
«ἃ « « Φ . « 
«< « ee δα iSee «ε « « 


The Atheneum Press 


GINN & COMPANY - PRO- 
PRIETORS + BOSTON - U.S.A. 


fone 


eene 


STACK ANNEX 
PA 
pe Se 
AST 
IS Ξ 6 


PRE PACE. 


Tus edition of Book VII. of Thucydides is based on Classen’s 
second edition, Berlin, 1884. 

The few variations from Classen’s text — which, with two or 
three exceptions, are restorations of the Ms. reading — are fully 
explained in the notes. 

Classen’s exegetical notes have generally been closely followed ; 
but much material has been taken from other commentaries, 
especially from the excellent edition of Stahl.  Kriiger’s and 
Arnold’s editions: have also been of great service. 

Most of Classen’s critical notes are given in full, and consider- 
able additions have been made. The careful discussion of 
difficult passages, in elucidating so profound an author as 
Thucydides, is indispensable. 

The editor gratefully acknowledges his indebtedness to Pro- 
fessor White, whose kind assistance and invaluable suggestions 
have extended far beyond what was required by his position as 
one of the editors-in-chief of the Series of which this book is a 
part. Professor Goodwin has had the ereat kindness to examine 
all the notes, and his candid criticism and wise suggestions have 
proved of the utmost value. Nearly all of the first proof has 
come also under the practised eye of Professor Humphreys. 

CHARLES FORSTER SMITH. 


VANDERBILT UNIVERSITY, 
October, 1886, 


ἀπεινις J 


* Pp 
pilav 
v) 
~~ 
᾿ 


ΤῈ 
δὼ ν᾿ ‘i ΠΣ 
- ΠΑ fa ey “4 
‘ ΒΙΣ ἢ A 
ia if 
7a) eae 
pe 
β 
ἣν . Ὁ ᾿ 
a) Fig ie » 
a ie 3 ‘ 
. oe 
ει i 
Γ 
"! ? 
ΓΞ 
rc 
ἢ ὙΠ 
{ j 


UC DOES. VIL, 


1 


ὋὉ δὲ Γύλιππος καὶ ὁ Πυθὴν ἐκ τοῦ Τάραντος, ἐπεὶ 1 


\ nw 
ἐπεσκεύασαν τὰς ναῦς, παρέπλευσαν ἐς Λοκροὺς τοὺς 


᾿Επιζεφυρίους, καὶ πυνθανόμενοι σαφέστερον ἤδη ὅτι οὐ 


» 5 » ε ’ὔὕ , > 5 > 
παντελῶς πω ἀποτετειχισμέναι αἱ Συράκουσαί εἰσιν, ἀλλ 


¥ er \ Ν > N a > , 
 Ε͵ν OLOVY TE KATA Tas Επιπολὰς OTPAaTLa ἀφικομένους 


ἐσελθεῖν, ἐβουλεύοντο ett ἐν δεξιᾷ λαβόντες τὴν Σικε- 


λίαν διακινδυνεύσωσιν ἐσπλεῦσαι, εἴτ᾽ ἐν ἀριστερᾷ ἐς 


ε , lal , Ν 5 , > / \ 
Ipepav TT P@TOV πλεύσαντες και αὐτους TE EKELVOUS και 


ἊΝ > ’ ἃ “ἡ ’, Ν lol 
στρατιὰν ἄλλην προσλαβόντες, ods ἂν πείθωσι, κατὰ γῆν 


1. After refitting his four ships, 
Gylippus leaves Tarentum, and, receiv- 
ing at the Epizephyrian Locri more 
favourable news of the situation at Syra- 
cuse, proceeds undisturbed by Attic ships 
through the strait to Himera. From 
this point he enters into communication 
with Selinus and Gela and various Sicel 
localities, and with seven hundred men 
of his own troops, and over two thousand 
who joined him from Himera and the 
allied places, begins his march through 
the interior towards Syracuse. 

1. ἐπεὶ ἐπεσκεύασαν : the comple- 
tion of the ἐπεσκεύαζεν of vi. 104. 
20.— 3. πυνθανόμενοι σαφέστερον: 
opp. to vi. 104. 5, ὡς αὐτοῖς αἱ ἀγγελίαι 
ἐφοίτων... : ἐψευσμέναι. The pres. 
partic. here implies repeated inquiry, 
corresponding to ὡς ἐφοίτων in the 
passage quoted. — 5. κατὰ τὰς Ἔϊπιπο- 
Ads: the high triangle-shaped plateau 
northwest of the city. See on vi. 96. 
3.—6. λαβόντες : either λαβών or ἔχων 


is usual with the verb in this connex- 
ion, when the destination is remote. 
See on vi. 62. 7. The partic. is to be 
supplied also in 7 with ἐν ἀριστερᾷ. ---- 
7. διακινδυνεύσωσιν, ἔλθωσι: delib- 
erative subjvs., which are often re- 
tained even after an historical tense 
(ef. 1. 107. 25; 1. 4. 285 ili. 112. 22), 
but sometimes change to the opt. (ef 
i, 25. 4; 63. 8; iv. 19. 6). G. 1490; 
H. 932,2; Kr. Spr. 54, 7, 1. — ἐσπλεῦ- 
σαι: into the great harbour, from 
which point they would perhaps have 
been able, united with the Syracusans, 
to force their way into the gap in the 
Athenian line of circumvallation (ef. 
c. 2.17 ff.). Gylippus preferred, how- 
ever, the way by land because he 
wanted first to get allies. — 8. αὐτούς 
τε ἐκείνους : Schol. τοὺς Ἱμεραίους 
δηλονότι. Kr. Spr. 58, 4, 1.— 9. στρα- 
τιάν, ovs: rel. in pl. referring to a 
collective noun. (ἃ. 1021, ὃ; H. 629. 
Cf. iii. 67.11, ἡλικίαν, ὧν, 


2 


10 ἔλθωσι. 


4 Ν , 5 “A 5 ε , 
15 γίῳ Kal Μεσσὴνῃ ἀφικνοῦνται ἐς Ipepar. 


»» nw » 4 
20 Tav TAVOTPATLA ες TL χώωριον. 


25 


THUCYDIDES VII. 1. 


Ν lal 5 lal , lol » an 
τε καὶ των ATTLK@V TEO OAPWV VEWV OUTW 7 APOVO WV cv 


“ ε ᾽,ὔὕ ἃ - - ’ἅ , 5 Ἀ ν 5 
τῳ Ρηγίῳ, as o Νικιας πυνθανόμενος GQUTOUS ομως ἐν 


Λοκροῖς εἶναι ἀπέστειλε. 


φθάσαντες δὲ τὴν φυλακὴν 


ταύτην περαιοῦνται διὰ τοῦ πορθμοῦ, καὶ σχόντες Pye 


5 Ay 
εκει δὲ οντες 


, ε , Μ» A Ν 5 ΄, 9 
Tous τε Ipepatous ἐπεισαν ξυμπολεμεῖν Kal αὐτούς TE ἔπε- 


QA nw 5 » nw wr »Ἥ 4 σ 
σθαι και τοις εκ τῶν νέῶν Των σφετέρων ναυταις οσοι 


Q > -΄ A \ Ν A 5 ’ 5 
μη εὐυχον ὄπλα TAPAT NEW (τὰς γάρ VQUS ἀνείλκυσαν εν 


ε ’ \ ἈΝ πον ’, , > , > 
Ἱμέρᾳ), καὶ τοὺς Σελινουντίους πέμψαντες ἐκέλευον ἀπαν- 


ε ΄ Ν > \ \ ε A \ An 
ὑπέσχοντο στρατιὰν ov πολλὴν καὶ ot Τέλῳοι καὶ τῶν 


= λῶ = A »,\ 0 , nw ec nw 
alLKEAWVY τινες, Ob πολὺ 7 po ULOTEPOV TT POO XW PEW €TOL- 


> A 3 - ἘΝ θ , ἃ A 
μοι σαν TOU TE Apxovt OU VEWOTL TE VY KOTOS, OS τῶν 


ταύτῃ Σικελῶν βασιλεύων τινῶν Kal ὧν οὐκ ἀδύνατος 


~ > 4 nn 
τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις φίλος ἦν, Kat τοῦ Γυλίππου ἐκ Aake- 


12. πυνθανόμενος αὐτοὺς ὅμως ἐν 
“Λοκροῖς εἶναι : the reading of the Vat. 
Ms., instead of the vulgate ὅμως πὺυν- 
θανόμενος xté. Nicias had paid little 
attention to the first report of the 
approach of Gylippus, καὶ λῃστικώ- 
τερον ἔδοξε παρεσκευασμένους πλεῖν (Vi. 
104. 22). He recognized, however, 
that Gylippus was in earnest on learn- 
ing that the ships had, after all (con- 
trary to his expectation), got so far 
on their voyage to Sicily (ὅμως ἐν 
Λοκροῖς εἶναι), and that, therefore, help 
for Syracuse was really intended. He 
had immediately, thereupon, sent out 
the four Attic ships (ἀπέστειλε, aor. 
in dependent clause); but these came 
too late to prevent the Peloponnesian 
ships from passing through the strait. 
—14. σχόντες ‘Pnyiw: touching at; 
dat. after σχεῖν, as in ili. 29. 5; 33. ὃ, 


instead of the more usual és with the 
ace. (8. 26. 7; ii 25. 10. Ξ5. 19 em 
34. 1; iv. 3.4; 25.405 Ὑἴ 2 δ ΤΡ Ὁ 
5; 62. 8). κατά with ace. in same 
const. occurs in i. 110. 11; iv. 129. 12; 
vi. 97. 3. Kr. Spr. 48, 1,2; Kuhn: 
423, 5. 

16. τούς re ‘Ipepatous: Vat. omits τε, 
but it is better to follow the rest of the 
Mss., τούς τε Ἱμεραίους, explaining, as 
St. does: “To these words correspond 
καὶ τοὺς Σελινουντίους ἐκέλευον in 19, 
and the correlatives τε καί show that 
ἐκεῖ ὄντες belongs to both clauses.” 
See App.—17. ὅπλα: see 
App. 

20. τινα οὐ πολλήν : ef. li. 79. 16.— 
23. tov ᾿Αρχωνίδου : this Archonidas 
is doubtless the prince of Herbita., 
whom Diod. (xii. 8) mentions as ally 
of the powerful Sicel leader Duce- 


“ 
οσοι... 


καὶ ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς ἐπὶ τῆς Ἱμέρας πλεῖν, ἄλλως 2 


eo 


, nw 
πέμψειν δέ Twa αὐτοῖς 4 


90 


2 


Ἂν 4 
Tas Συρακού σας. 


THUCYDIDES VII. 1, 2. 


, A , ν Ν ε \ ΄ὔ 
δαίμονος δοκοῦντος προθύμως ἥκειν. καὶ ὁ μὲν Γύλιπ- 
πος ἀναλαβὼν τῶν σφετέρων ναυτῶν καὶ ἐπιβατῶν τοὺς 
ε , ε ’ / ε ’ὕ Ν = ,ὕ 
ὡπλισμένους ἑπτακοσίους μάλιστα, Ἱμεραίους δὲ ὁπλίτας 

Ν τὸν , / Ν ε ld ε Ν 
καὶ ψιλοὺς ξυναμφοτέρους χιλίους καὶ ἱππέας ἑκατὸν 

ὮΝ 
καὶ Σελινουντίων τέ τινας ψιλοὺς καὶ ἱππέας καὶ Γελῴων 
ὀλύ ΕΞ Χο λῶ > re Ν ’ 5 / Ν 
ὀλίγους, Σικελῶν τε ἐς χιλίους τοὺς πάντας, ἐχώρει πρὸ: 
ε > A = A 
ot δ᾽ ἐκ τῆς Λευκάδος Κορίνθιοι tats 

" \ > 
τε ἄλλαις ναυσὶν ws εἶχον τάχους ἐβοήθουν καὶ Voyyv- 

- Lal , A Lal 
λος, εἷς τῶν Κορινθίων ἀρχόντων, μιᾷ νηὶ τελευταῖος ὁρ- 


\ A A , 
μηθεὶς πρῶτον μὲν ἀφικνεῖται ἐς τὰς Συρακούσας, ὀλί- 


Ν Ν Ν Ν Ν Ν 5 
γον δὲ πρὸ Γυλίππου: καὶ καταλαβὼν αὐτοὺς περὶ ἀπαλ- 
tius. After the latter’s death (439 &. In the meantime the Corinthian 
B.c.), his political course toward — Gongylus, sailing from Leucas with one 


Syracuse and Agrigentum was doubt- 
less continued by Archonidas, who 
died at an advanced age, 415 τος 
See Holm, Geschichte Siciliens, I. p. 
260; II. p. 389.— 26. δοκοῦντος προθύ- 
pos ἥκειν : (so Vat. instead of προθύ- 
pws δοκοῦντος ἥκειν) referring to πολὺ 
προθυμότερον ἑτοῖμοι ἦσαν ἴῃ 22. The 
bold example of Gylippus, report of 
which spread far and wide (}oxo0dvTos), 
had inspired the Sicels with courage. 

καὶ ὁ μὲν TvAumrmos ... πάντας: 
sums up in ἀναλαβών the result of the 


efforts detailed in 15 ff. — 27. σφετέ- 


ρων: refers to Gylippus and Pythen. 
isnnspr 638, 4,3. Cf c. 4. 10; 8. 3. 
—Tovs ὡπλισμένους : those who had 


been armed by the help of the Hime- , 


raeans (17,18). Diod. (xiii. 7) gives 
the force of Gylippus as τοὺς ἅπαντας 
τρισχιλίους μὲν πείούς, διακοσίους δ᾽ 
ἱππεῖς. — 31. τοὺς παντας : in all, 
added perhaps because the Sicels 
were of various tribes. Kr. Spr. 50, 
11,15. Cf. viii. 21. 4. — ἐχώρει : com- 
menced his march towards Syracuse 
(impf.), the further course of which 
is related c. 2. 11. 


ship, arrives at Syracuse, where he re- 
vives the sinking courage of the inhab- 


itants by the news of the approach of 


Gylippus. The latter reaches Epipolae 
without opposition, ascends it on the side 
of Euryelus, and then immediately ad- 
vances, in union with the Syracusans, 
against the wall of the Athenians, which 
had been almost completed on the side 
toward the great harbowr. 

1. οἱ ἐκ Λευκάδος Κορίνθιοι: cf vi. 
104. ὃ 1.—2. ὡς εἶχον τάχους : part. 
gen. depending on adv. of condition. 
Ge 1092) Ebi) a ike Spore Ae 
10,5. Cf c. 57. 5; i. 22. 14.— kal 
Toyyvdos: as if αἱ ἄλλαι τῶν Κορινθίων 
νῆες had gone before. Acc. to Plut 
Nic. 19, this Gongylus fell in the first 
conflict with the Athenians. On the 
accent, Γόγγυλος, see App. — 3. μιᾷ 
... Γυλίππου : he had let the remain- 
ing ships (which, ace. to vi. 104. ὃ 1, 
were to follow Gylippus) set out be- 
fore himself; but he arrived at Syra- 
cuse first of all — probably because 
he touched at no point on the voyage 
—and even a little before Gylippus. 


> , m am δ τς -. A ͵7 
5. αὐτούς: sc. τοὺς Συρακοσίους. --- 


1 


10 


THUCYDIDES VIL. 2. 


~ ~ > 
λαγῆς Tov πολέμου μέλλοντας ἐκκλησιάσειν διεκώλυσέ TE 
‘\ , 7 - ns » » , 
καὶ παρεθάρσυνε, λέγων ὅτι νῆές τε ἄλλαι ἔτι προσπλέ- 
,ὔ r , 
ουσι καὶ Τύλιππος ὁ Κλεανδρίδον Λακεδαιμονίων ἀπο- 
ς | 
στειλάντων ἄρχων. Kal οἱ μὲν Συρακόσιοι ἐπερρώσθη- 
σάν τε καὶ τῷ Τυλίππῳ εὐθὺς πανστρατιᾷ ὡς ἀπαντη- 
, por ¥ Ν Ay 3s \ ¥ > , 
σόμενοι ἐξῆλθον: ἤδη yap καὶ ἐγγὺς ὄντα ἠσθάνοντο 
. ~ 5 “~ ~ 
avrov. ὁ δὲ “leras τότε τι τεῖχος ἐν τῇ παρόδῳ τῶν 
Σικελῶν ἑλὼν καὶ ξυνταξάμενος ὡς ἐς μάχην ἀφικνεῖται 
Ν Ν 5 ΄ \ > Ν x Ν > ΄ 
πρὸς τὰς ᾿Ἐπιπολάς, καὶ ἀναβὰς κατὰ τὸν Ἑϊὐρύηλον, 
ἧπερ καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι τὸ πρῶτον, ἐχώρει μετὰ τῶν Συ- 
΄ ΠΑ ΡΝ ΔΝ ΄ πον Ὁ ΄ ¥ Soe. ἈΝ 
ρακοσίων ἐπὶ τὸ τείχισμα τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων. ἔτυχε δὲ κατὰ 
A A ol > Ν 5 @ e Ν Ν a Ν ΄, 
τοῦτο τοῦ καιροῦ ἐλθὼν ἐν ᾧ ἑπτὰ μὲν ἢ ὀκτὼ σταδίων 


ἀπαλλαγῆς: the subst. from ἀπαλλάτ- 
τεσθαι (not from the act.), as in iv. 
61. 24.—7. νῆες ἄλλαι: which had 
started before him. See on 3, above. 
—9. ἄρχων: not as commander of 
the ships merely, but also of the Syra- 
cusans (τοῖς Συρακοσίοις, Vi. 93. 9). 

10. ἀπαντησόμενοι : the mid. form 
only in the fut. So also c. 80, 25.— 
11. ἠσθάνοντο: cf. Plut. Nic. 19, ἧκεν 
ἄγγελος παρὰ τοῦ Τυλίππου κελεύοντος 
ἀπαντᾶν. ---12. Ἴεταάς: see App. — 
tote tt: (the reading of Vat.) τότε is 
to be taken with ἐν τῇ παρόδῳ ἑλών, 
and refers to the decision of Gylip- 
pus κατὰ γῆν ἐλθεῖν, c. 1. 9. ---τῶν Σικε- 
λῶν: belongs to τεῖχος. As to these 
Sicels, cf. c. 32. § 1; vi. 88. § 4.— 
13. ἑλὼν καὶ ξυνταξάμενος : both par- 
tics. represent actions which follow 
one after the other but precede ἀφικ- 
νεῖται πρὸς τὰς Ἐπιπολάς, and there- 
fore can prop. be connected by καί. 
v. H. and St. reject καί. See App. 

14. κατὰ τὸν Εἰὐρύηλον ἧπερ καὶ οἱ 
᾿Αθηναῖοι: cf. τὶ. 97- 11. ---15. μετὰ 
τῶν Συρακοσίων: who had gone out 
to’ meet him, and, since the largest 


part of the Athenian army was occu- 
pied in building the double wall (vi. 
103. § 1), had been able to pass 
through the incomplete fortifications 
of the Athenians to the western part 
of Epipolae. That the advance of Gy- 
lippus and his union with the Syracu- 
sans was effected without hindrance, 
shows how much the energy and watch- 
fulness of Nicias had already abated 
since the death of Lamachus. See 
Grote, Hist. of Greece, V11.¢.59, p. 106 f. 
—16. τὸ τείχισμα: the διπλοῦν τεῖχος 
of vi. 103. 7, the condition of which at 
this time is immediately explained. — 
ἔτυχε ἐλθών: see App.—Kata τοῦτο 
τοῦ καιροῦ: part. gen. depending on 


_ κατὰ τοῦτο, as in 6. 69. 16, ἐν τῷ τοιού- 


τῳ τοῦ καιροῦ. G. 1088; Kr. Spr. 47, 
10, 3.- 17. ἑπτὰ μὲν ἢ ὀκτὼ σταδί- 
ων: gen. of measure with τεῖχος. 
G. 1085, 5; H. 729d. The correla- 
tive of μέν is δέ in τῷ δὲ ἄλλῳ in 20. 
Since the shortest distance from the. 
cliff (of Epipolae) to the recess of 
the great harbour adjacent to the 
Agrigentine gate was not less than 
eight stadia, it seems clear that in 


THUCYDIDES VII. 2, 3. 


ἤδη ἀπετετέλεστο τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις ἐς τὸν μέγαν λιμένα 


διπλοῦν τεῖχος πλὴν παρὰ βραχύ τι τὸ πρὸς τὴν θάλασ- 


lal bec 5 ’ὔ 
20 σαν" τοῦυτο ὃ ετι ὠκοδόμουν. 


τῷ δὲ ἄλλῳ [τοῦ κύκλου 


πρὸς τὸν Τρώγιλον] ἐπὶ τὴν ἑτέραν θάλασσαν λίθοι τε 


A » > a 
παραβεβλημένοι τῷ πλέονι NON ἦσαν, Kal ἔστιν ἃ καὶ 


pa? Ν ὯΝ ΝΆ , ΄ 
ἡμιέεργα, τα δὲ και ἐξειργασμένα κατελείπετο. 


παρὰ ΤΟ- 


σοῦτον μὲν Συράκουσαι ἦλθον κινδύνου. 


Οἱ δὲ ᾿Αθηναῖοι αἰφνιδίως τοῦ τε Γυλίππου καὶ τῶν 
Uf] 


, , 3 , > , ea \ A 
Συρακοσίων σφίσιν €7 LOVT@V ἐθορυβήθησαν μεν TO TT PW - 


this measure was included only that 
part of the wall of circumvallation of 
the Athenians which was in the low 


ground by the sea. Leake (in 
Bloomf. p. 680). Cl. brackets the 
words without sufficient reasons. 


See App.—18. ἀπετετέλεστο: on the 
form see App. —19. παρὰ βραχύ τι: 
so with Vat., instead of κατὰ βραχύ τι, 
because it indicates more sharply the 
small remnant that was still unfin- 
ished: “ the wall was finished except 
a small portion next to the sea.” 
παρά as in 23, mapa τοσοῦτον, by so 
much. But St., who reads κατά, ob- 
jects that the addition of πλήν is opp. 
to taking παρὰ βραχύ τι with the force 
of παρὰ τοσοῦτον. ---τὸ πρὸς τὴν θά. 
λασσαν: adv., not in appos. with 
διπλοῦν τεῖχος. --- 20. τοῦτο δέ: refers 
to βραχύ τι. ---ἰτοῦ κύκλου πρὸς τὸν 
Τρώγιλον] : St. and Cl. consider these 
words a gloss, added through recollec- 
tion of vi. 99. 2; though there, as in 
vi. 98.9; to1.1; 102.5, κύκλος means 
the ring-shaped fort (see on vi. 98. 9)» 
nowhere the wall of circumvallation, 
as seems to be intended here acc. to 
the common reading. See App.— 
21. λίθοι τε... TH πλέονι ἤδη ἦσαν : 
τῷ πλέονι is in part. appos. to τῷ 
ἄλλῳ, along-the greater part of the re- 


struction). 


mainder. G. 914; H. 624 ἃ. So 
far the preparations for building 
mentioned in vi. 99. 2 (λίθους . .. 
παρέβαλλον) had been completed. 
Some parts of the wall were already 
quite finished or only half finished, 
and when Gylippus arrived were left 
in this condition. Hence the impf. 
κατελείπετο, which Herbst (Gegen Co- 
bet, p. 40) rightly defends against 
Cobet’s conjecture 
23. παρὰ τοσοῦτον κτέ. : such εἰ narrow 
escape had Syracuse from danger (de- 
This const., which occurs 
also in ili. 49. 18, is to be explained 
ace. to the analogy of παρὰ τοσοῦτον 
ἐγένετο or ἦλθε with the inf. (iv. 106, 
18; viii. 33. 12; 76. 15) “by so much 
(by so slight a deficiency) it hap- 
pened, it came to—” (it came so 
near to). Just so ὅσον οὐ ‘by how 
much not,’ ze. by how little not, 
means ‘almost.’ That to which “it 
had almost come” stands, when ex- 
pressed by a clause, in the inf.; when 
by a subst., in the gen., which is to 
be construed just as the gen. with 
G, 1149:.ΗῈ:. 


κατελέλειπτο. --- 


ἐγγύς, πλησίον, etc. 
151. 

ὃ. The hostile armies are arrayed 
against one another, but do not come to 


On the next day, 


an engagement. 


for) 


10 


15 


THUCYDIDES VII. 3. 


, , ε Ν ’, Ἀ. Ψ 5 Ν ΄ 
τον, παρετάξαντο δέ. ὁ δὲ θέμενος τὰ ὅπλα ἐγγὺς κήρυκα 
’, > “a 4 > pA > id > a 
προσπέμπει αὐτοῖς λέγοντα, εἰ βούλονται ἐξιέναι ἐκ τῆς 
A Ν “- nm 
Σικελίας πέντε ἡμερῶν λαβόντες τὰ σφέτερα αὐτῶν, ETOL- 


μος εἶναι σπένδεσθαι. 


\ > \ > , 5 4 
και οὐδὲν αποκρινάμενοι ἀπέπεμψαν. 


> / > ’ὔ ε 2 , 
ἀντιπαρεσκευάζοντο ἀλλήλοις ὡς ἐς μάχην. 


ε \ > 5 ’ὕ 5 »" 
οἱ δὲ ἐν ὀλιγωρίᾳ τε ἐποιοῦντο 


ἂν x nw 
καὶ μετὰ τοῦτο 

Ἂς ε ,ὕ 
kat o [v- 


A Ν A 
λιππος ὁρῶν τοὺς Συρακοσίους ταρασσομένους καὶ οὐ 


ε , ld 5 A Ν ie, ὃ 5» Ν 
ῥᾳδίως ξυντασσομένους, ETAVNYVE TO OTPAaTOTrE OV ἐς THE 


εὐρυχωρίαν μᾶλλον. 


’, “- 3 ε , Ν ou [2 A , 
vatovs, ἀλλ ἡσύχαζε πρὸς τῳ εαυτῶων τειχει. 


τ “A Ἀ 3 
καὶ ὁ Νικίας οὐκ ἐπῆγε τοὺς ᾿Αθη- 


ὡς 8 


» c , > / 5 ’ὔ 39 4 x 
εγνω oO Γύλιππος ου προσιοντας αυτους, απΉγαγε ΤῊΨ 


Ἂς Ν » Ν A = 
στρατιὰν ἐπὶ τὴν ἄκραν τὴν Τεμενῖτιν καλουμένην καὶ 


5 ~ 5 , 
αὑτου ηὐλίσαντο. 


however, Gylippus with a small detach- 
ment surprises Labdalum, the fort on 
the of Epipolae, 


and puts the Athenian garrison to the 


northernmost height 


sword. 

3. παρετάξαντο δέ: Thuc. 
nothing about the place where the 
Athenians took their position. But 
since the larger part of the army, acc. 
to vi. 103. 6, was engaged in building 
the double wall next to the great 
harbour, it must be supposed that the 
two armies confronted each other in 
the low ground between the abrupt 
declivity of Epipolae and the Anapus, 
near the Athenian fortifications. — 
θέμενος τὰ ὅπλα ἐγγύς : halting under 
arms near by. Cf. ii. 2. 22; iv. 44. 5; 
68. 10; 90. 20; viii. 22; 93. 6.— 
κήρυκα προσπέμπει λέγοντα: so Vat. 
(for προπέμπει of most of the Mss.), 
ace. to the usage of Thuc., ili. 52. 10; 
iv. 114.5. λέγοντα is pres. part. of pur- 
pose. See onc. 25.40. In force and 
const. the phrase is equiv. to the 
simple λέγει; hence the following 
nom, ἑτοῖμος with εἶναι, See App. on 


says 


25. 


“A δ᾽ ε , »» τ Ν Xs X ’ 
τῇ ὃ VOTEPala αγων τὴν μεν πλειστὴν 


iii. 52. 11.—5. πέντε ἡμερῶν : within 
Jive days. Gen. of time with ἐξιέναι, as 
in c. 28. 19; v. 14. 13. “Gaia 
199; Kr. "Spr. 4%, 2,01 

6. ἐν ὀλιγωρίᾳ ἐποιοῦντο: without 
expressed obj., as in iv. 5. 2.—7. 
οὐδὲν ἀποκρινάμενοι: Plut. Nic. 19 
adds: τῶν δὲ στρατιωτῶν τινες καταγε- 
λῶντες ἠρώτων εἰ διὰ παρουσίαν ἑνὸς τρί- 
βωνος καὶ βακτηρίας Λακωνικῆς οὕτως 
ἰσχυρὰ τὰ Συρακοσίων ἐξαίφνης γέγονεν 
ὡς ᾿Αθηναίων καταφρονεῖν. 

9. ταρασσομένους : in confusion, 
since they had not expected a battle 
so soon. — 10. ἐς τὴν εὐρυχωρίαν : i.e. 
toward the east into the low ground 
next to the coast. From there the 
ascent to the ἄκρα Teweviris, when not 
opposed by hostile troops, was short 
and easy.—12. τῷ ἑαυτῶν τείχει: 
the almost completed διπλοῦν τεῖχος 
of ο. 2. 19.—13. ἀπήγαγε: off to the 
side (northward).—14. τὴν ἄκραν 
τὴν Τεμενῖτιν : the temple of Apollo 
Temenites and the suburb around it, 
the later Neapolis. CF. vi. 75. 2. 

15. ἄγων: contrasted with πέμψας 


THUCYDIDES VII. 3, 4. 


τῆς στρατιᾶς παρέταξε πρὸς τὰ τείχη τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, 


ὅπως μὴ ἐπιβοηθοῖεν ἄλλοσε, μέρος δέ τι πέμψας πρὸς 


τὸ φρούριον τὸ Λάβδαλον αἱρεῖ, καὶ ὅσου: ἔλαβεν ἐν 


5 “A , > A ΩΝ Ν 5 5 ‘ “ 3 
QUT@ TAVTAS ἀπέκτεινεν " ἣν δὲ οὐκ ἐπιφανὲς τοῖς ᾿Αθη.- 


& NS , 
20 VQLOLS TO χωριον;: 


καὶ τριήρης τῇ αὐτῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἁλίσκεται : 


n° A , Geen n 3 ΄ > A an 
Tov A HVALWVY ὕπο των “«υρακοσιῶν ἐφορμοῦσα τῳ με- 


γάλῳ λιμένι. 


Καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα ἐτείχιζον ot > ) ὶ οἱ ξύ 
ἢ ΠῚ χιζον οἱ Συρακόσιοι καὶ οἱ Evp- 


μαχοι διὰ τῶν ᾿Επιπολῶν ἀπὸ τῆς πόλεως ἀρξάμενοι 


» Ν N 5 , A ε a 9 cae A 
ἄνω πρὸς TO ἐγκαρσιον τεῖχος ἄπλουν, ὁπως οἱ Αθηναῖοι, 


in 17; here he commanded in person. 
- τὴν πλείστην τῆς στρατιάς : AssimMi- 
lation of the articular adj. to the 
gender of the part. gen. G. 1090; 
H. 730e; Kr. Spr. 47, 28, 9; Kihn. 
ADS oie.) C7. 1. 2. 13; 5.85; 30. 10; vi. 
. ὃ; τοῦ: 9; Vili. 3. 5.—17. μὴ... 
ἄλλοσε: esp. not to the defence of 
Labdalum. — 19. οὐκ ἐπιφανὲς τοῖς 
᾿Αθηναίοις : since the Athenians were 
now on the southern declivity of 
Epipolae, and the fort lay on the 
extreme northern edge of the plateau 
(ἐπ᾽ ἄκροις τοῖς κρημνοῖς ; See ON Vi. 97. 
24), the place could be surprised with- 
out their knowing it. The loss was 
the more serious because Labdalum 
was, acc. to vi. 97. 27, τοῖς Te σκεύεσι 
καὶ τοῖς χρήμασιν ἀποθήκη. 

21. ἐφορμοῦσα τῷ μεγάλῳ λιμένι: 
(μεγάλῳ from Vat. only) the Att. fleet, 
which had sailed down into the great 
harbour (vi. 102. 17), lay now in its 
innermost recess near the shore (ἐν 
μυχῷ τοῦ λιμένος, c. 4. 21). Guard- 
ships were sent out to the entrance of 
the harbour, which was a consider- 
able distance off; and one of these 
fell into the hands of the Syracusans, 
who from their side could overlook 
every movement of the Athenians. 


4. The Syracusans undertake to 
build a third counter-wall against the 
northern part of the Athenian wall of 
circumvallation, and make an unsuccess- 
Sul attack on a weak point of the southern 
part of their wall. Nicias determines to 
fortify Plemmyrium at the entrance to 
the great harbour, and to unite there the 
fleet and the main body of the land 
army. But the removal of the army ex- 
poses the foragers to the Syracusan 
cavalry. Twenty triremes are sent to 
intercept the Corinthian ships which had 
sailed from Leucas after Gylippus. 

2. διὰ τῶν ᾿Εἰπιπολῶν. ... τεῖχος 
ἁπλοῦν : the cross-wall described in 
vi. 99. § 3 had been taken and de- 
stroved by the Athenians (vi. 100), 
and the second Syracusan counter- 
wall in the low ground (vi. 101. 6) had 
immediately thereafter (vi. τοι. 16) 
fallen into their hands. The Syracu- 
sans now make the third attempt to 
hinder the Athenian circumyallation 
by means of a cross-wall, and as in vi. 
99. 14, ἀπὸ τῆς (σφετέρας) πόλεως ἀρξά- 
μενοι. It did ποῖ run, however, as there, 
κάτωθεν τοῦ κύκλου τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, but 
ἄνω, i.e. along the northern height of 
Epipolae (τὸ πρὸς βορέαν τοῦ κύκλου, Vi. 
99. 1), where the Athenians λίθους καὶ 


10 


15 


THUCYDIDES VII. 4. 


εἰ μὴ δύναιντο κωλῦσαι, μηκέτι οἷοί TE ὦσιν ἀποτειχίσαι. 
Ν 2 5 A 5 , »” »” Ν 33, ενν “ 
καὶ οἵ τε ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἀναβεβήκεσαν ἤδη ἄνω, τὸ ἐπὶ τῇ 
, A > ΄ ΕΣ , > , 
θαλάσσῃ τεῖχος ἐπιτελέσαντες, καὶ ὁ Τύλιππος (ἢν γάρ 
a 5 4 ἴων 4 » Ἄ Ν 3 
τι τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις τοῦ τείχους ἀσθενές) νυκτὸς ἀναλα- 
Ν Ν Ἂ > / Ἂς 5 / ε > 5 a 
βὼν τὴν στρατιὰν ἐπήει πρὸς αὐτό" -ot δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναῖοι 
ΕἾ Ν yy & 5 ,ὔ ε ν 5 / 
(ἔτυχον yap ἔξω αὐλιζόμενοι), ws ἤσθοντο, ἀντεπήεσαν" 
ὁ δὲ γνοὺς κατὰ τάχος ἀπήγαγε τοὺς σφετέρους πάλιν. 
> » Ν Cer Cae “A ε ΄, > 
ἐποικοδομήσαντες δὲ αὐτὸ οἱ Αθηναῖοι ὑψηλότερον αὐ- 
A \ , 5» , Ν \ »” / A 
TOL μὲν ταύτῃ ἐφύλασσον, τοὺς δὲ ἄλλους ξυμμάχους κατα 
τὸ ἄλλο τείχισμα ἤδη διέταξαν ἥπερ ἔμελλον ἕκαστοι 
χισμα Ἠθὴ ὭΠΕΡ εμ 


φρουρεῖν. 


watt \ ,ὕ 
To δὲ Νικίᾳ ἐδόκει τὸ Πλημμύριον καλούμενον τει- 


ἋἍ » δὲ μὰ 5 ψ, a / Y , 
χισαι" εστι Ἐ ακρα QAVTLTTEPAS ΤῊΣ πόλεως, HTEP πρου- 


ξύλα ξυμφοροῦντες παρέβαλον. In vi. 99. 
16, moreover, the direction of the wall 
to be built was indicated by the adj. 
ἐγκάρσιον; here it is expressed ady., 
πρὸς τὸ ἐγκάρσιον, cross-wise, the wall 
itself being defined as τεῖχος ἁπλοῦν, 
as also in the letter of Nicias, ¢c. 11. 
14. The wall here begun is contin- 
ued, ¢. 5.1, διὰ τῶν ᾿Επιπολῶν, and fin- 
ished inc. 7.4, ξυν ετείχισαν τὸ λοιπὸν 
See on 6. 7. 4. 
—4. ἀποτειχίσαι: to complete the 


τοῦ ἐγκαρσίου τείχους. 


circumvallation (aor.). 

5. οἵ re’ Αθηναῖοι. . . ἐπήει: vivid 
effect of the paratactic structure: 
“scarcely had the Athenians, after 
finishing the lower part of the wall of 
circumyvallation, again occupied their 
former position on Epipolae, when 
Gylippus advanced against a weak 
point of the wall.” Notice also 
the parallelism of the members in 
this and the next sent.: the par- 
enthetical insertion of both causal 
clauses with γάρ, and the correspond- 
ing form of the main clauses, ἐπήει, 


ἀντεπηεσαν. ---Ἴ. τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις : in- 
tentionally added to avoid a misun- 
derstanding; therefore wrongly sus- 
pected by v. H. 

9. ἔτυχον . .. αὐλιζόμενοι: they 
happened to be in bivouac outside (of 
the walls).— 10. τοὺς σφετέρους :. 
see on 6. 1. 27. —11. ἐποικοδομήσαν- 
τες αὐτό: Sc. τὸ ἀσθενὲς τοῦ τείχου», 
they made the wall higher at this 
weak point. The pred. adj. ὑψηλότε- 
pov indicates the effect. G. 1081; 
Kr, Spr. δῖ, 4, 25. ὉΠ ἢ σαν 
71.273 90. 21; ii. 75. 2.) vie 
—avrol μέν: the Athenian main 
body, since experience had shown 
that here the danger of a breach was 
greatest. —12. τοὺς δὲ ἄλλους ξυμμά- 
χους: the rest (viz.) allies, not opp. to 
any preceding ξύμμαχοι. ἃ. 966, 2; 
H. 705; Kr. Spr; δῦ, 4) ΡΠ 
2,12): 128. 21 5.11. 14.35 77. ΤΟ ΤΟΣ 
8; iv. 100. 12.—13. τὸ ἄλλο τείχισμα: 
the wall running across Epipolae, on 
both sides of the κύκλος. 


15. τὸ Πλημμύριον : this place, the 


20 


THUCYDIDES VII. 4. 


4, i ~~ , “ 
χουσα τοῦ μεγάλου λιμένος τὸ στόμα στενὸν ποιεῖ, καὶ 


5 ἦν ee > “A > ’ ε 5 Ν “ > 
ει τειχισθείη, βᾷον αὐυτῳ ἐφαίνετο 7) ἐσκομιδὴ των επι- 


τηδείων ἔσεσθαι: δι ἐλάσσονος ya ὃς τῷ λιμέ 2 
n ς yap πρὸς τῷ λιμένι τῷ 


Lal ’ 5 , Lal 4 5 Y a 
τῶν Συρακοσίων ἐφορμήσειν σφᾶς, Kal οὐχ ὥσπερ νῦν 


ἐκ μυχοῦ τοῦ λιμένος τὰς ἐπαναγωγὰς ποιήσεσθαι, ἦν 


τι ναυτικῷ κινῶνται. 


Ὁ » lal a \ 
προσεῖχέ TE ἤδη μᾶλλον τῷ κατὰ 


id , ε A Ν 5 A “A , > XN 
θάλασσαν πολέμῳ, ὁρῶν τὰ ἐκ τῆς γῆς σφίσιν ἐπειδὴ 


Γύλιππος ἧκεν ἀνελπιστότερα ὄντα. διακομίσας οὖν στρα- 


situation of which Thue. describes so 
exactly, becomes henceforth the criti- 
cal point in the siege of Syracuse. 
“The loss of Plemmyrium had for 
the Athenians the same consequences 
as that of Fort L’Eguillette for the 
English, when General Dugommier 
(with Bonaparte’s assistance) drove 
them from the heights (Siege of Tou- 
lon, 1793).” Niebuhr, Ancient History, 
Il. p. 155.—17. τὸ στόμα στενὸν 
ποιεῖ: cf. Cc. 59.6, τὸ στόμα ὀκτὼ στα- 
δίων μάλιστα. --- καὶ εἰ τειχισθείη : acc. 
to Greek usage the influence of the 
rel. pron. (ἥπερ) is more strongly felt 
in the second clause than in English. 
We should begin an independent 
sent. with these words.—18. fdov 
ες ἔσεσθαι : the unusual adv. for the 
adj. is in accordance with the usage 
of Thuc. Cf. c. 28. 3, θᾶσσον οὖσα; 
iv. 10.13, μὴ ῥᾳδίως αὐτῷ πάλιν οὔσης 
τῆς ἀναχωρήσεως. The adv. is to be 
const. as if we had ῥᾷον αὐτῷ ἐφαίνετο 
τὰ ἐπιτήδεια ἐσκομισθήσεσθαι. Kr. Spr. 
62, 2, 3.—19. δι᾽ ἐλάσσονος γὰρ πρὸς 
τῷ λιμένι τῷ τῶν Συρακοσίων ἐφορμή- 
σειν σφᾶς: sc. τοῦς ᾿Αθηναίους, they 
themselves would keep watch upon the 
harbour of the Syracusans at a less dis- 
tance (7.6. from the Syracusan ships) 
than before. δι ἐλάσσονος also in vi. 
75. 3. πρὸς τῷ λιμένι τῷ τῶν Συρακο- 
σίων refers to the part of the great 


harbour near the city where the Syr- 
acusan fleet lay. Kr. and St. strike 
out τῷ τῶν Συρακοσίων. Cl. wrongly 
takes ἐφορμήσειν to mean “lie on 
watch” (of ships esp. detailed for 
this purpose), as in c. 3. 21. The 
main point here is the blockade which 
the whole Athenian fleet would be 
able to make from this nearer point, 
not being obliged, as heretofore, to 
put oat from the further corner of 


the great harbour, whenever the en- 


emy moved. The Schol. apparently 
understands it thus: τειχισθέντος δὲ 
Tov Πλημμυρίου τὴν ἐφόρμησιν αὐτόθεν 
δι᾿ ὀλίγου χωρίου ἔσεσθαι. --- 21. ἔπανα- 
γωγὰς ποιήσεσθαι: (with Vat., as in 
c. 34. 26, instead of éraywyds) = 
ἐπανάξεσθαι (viii. 42. 8), put to sea 
against an advancing squadron of 
hostile ships. — qv τι ναυτικῷ κινών- 
ται: sc. of Συρακόσιοι, if they should 
bestir themselves with the flect. On 
this medio-pass. use, see Kr. Spr. 52, 
6,1. Cf. c. 50. 38. -- 22. προσεῖχέ τε 
ἤδη... πολέμῳ: and in general, from 
now on, he devoted himself more to naval 
warfare. προσέχειν in same sense in 
c. 75. 44. τε gives the effect of a 
natural result, as in i. 67. 2; 76. 16, 
etc. —24. ἀνελπιστότερα: cf C. 47. 
9; v. 102) 3. 

στρατιάν : some troops, i.e. those that 
were not necessary for guarding the 


τῷ 


10 THUCYDIDES VII. 4. 


‘ \ Ν a 
25 τιὰν καὶ τὰς ναῦς ἐξετείχισε τρία φρούρια, καὶ ἐν αὐτοῖς 
, , Ν ἴω ΕἿΣ ‘A Ν Lal » > “ 
Ta TE σκεύη τὰ πλεῖστα ἔκειτο καὶ τὰ πλοῖα ἤδη ἐκεῖ 
Ἁ , Y A e A A “ 
τὰ μεγάλα ὥρμει καὶ αἱ ταχεῖαι νῆες. ὥστε καὶ τῶν 


4 cal 
πληρωμάτων οὐχ ἥκιστα τότε πρῶτον κάκωσις eyevETO: 


a \ ἊΝ ΄, , \ > > 50 Bs 
τῳ (Ke yep VOaTL σπανιῳ χρώμενοι και OUK eyvyyv εν, και 


- en, Ἂς 9 ε / 9’ ε ~ e A 
ἐπὶ φρυγανισμὸν ἅμα ὁπότε ἐξέλθοιεν οἱ ναῦται, ὑπὸ 
A ε A A A 
τῶν ἱππέων τῶν Συρακοσίων κρατούντων τῆς γῆς διε- 
’ ’ N A A 
φθείροντο. τρίτον yap μέρος τῶν ἱππέων τοῖς Συρακο- 
’ \ Ν 39 “A ’ ν Ν 
σίοις διὰ τοὺς ἐν τῷ Πλημμυρίῳ, ἵνα μὴ κακουργήσοντες 
9 SX A > A > ’ 4 5 , 
ἐξίοιεν, ἐπὶ τῇ ἐν TO Ὀλυμπιείῳ πολίχνῃ ἐτετάχατο. 
5 a \ Ν A A a 
35 ἐπυνθάνετο δὲ καὶ Tas λοιπὰς τῶν Κορινθίων ναῦς προσ- 
4 ε > / Ν 4 5 Ν 5 an ΕΣ 
πλεούσας ὁ Νικίας, καὶ πέμπει ἐς φυλακὴν αὐτῶν εἴκοσι 


A a ΕἾ ,ὕ Ν Ν ε ,ὕ ἣ, » ἧ 
VaUS, αἷς εἰρητο περί τε Λοκροὺς και Ρηγιον καὶ τὴν 


προσβολὴν τῆς Σικελίας ναυλοχεῖν αὐτάς. 


fortifications on Epipolae and in the 
low ground near the great harbour. 
The main camp of the Athenians 
continued to be along their walls. — 
25. ἐξετείχισε: the aor. to express 
speedy completion; cf. c. 26. 17; iv. 
4. 4.---τρία φρούρια: these forts 
were to supply the place of the ar- 
senal on Lebdalum, which had been 
captured (c. 3. § 4), and under their 
protection lay most of the fleet. 

27. τῶν πληρωμάτων κάκωσις ἐγένε- 
το: --τὰ πληρώματα ἐκακώθη (cf. the 
use οὗ κακοῦν inc. 24. 12; iii. 87. 6; 
vi. 18. 25). πληρώματα signifies here 
the whole ship’s crew, ναῦται as well 
as ἐπιβάται. Cf. c. 12.10; 13. 6.— 29. 


τῷ τε ... οἱ ναῦται : the causal par- 
tic. (χρώμενοι) and the temporal 


clause (ὁπότε ἐξέλθοιεν), forming to- 
gether the prot., are co-ordinated by 
te καί. Kr. Spr. 59,2,5. With the 
principal verb διεφθείροντο, in the 
impf., they portray the gradual in- 


crease of the trouble.— xpatovvrav 
τῆς γῆς : since they were masters of the 
(adjacent) country. Cf. i. 111. 5; vi. 
23. 7.— 32. τοῖς Συρακοσίοις: dat. of 
advantage ; possibly agent with the 
pass., really implying interest, as in v. 
29. 5.— 34. ἐπὶ rq... wodixvy: at the 
fort built at the Olympieium, as men- 
tioned vi. 75. ὅ. --- ἐτετάχατο: such 
Jon. forms of the pf. and plpf., other- 
wise unusual in Att., occur also in iii. 
13. 16, 18; iv. 31. 7; Va Ope 
Spr. 30, 2, 7. 

35. τὰς λοιπάς: cf c. 2. ὃ 1.— 
36. ἐς φυλακὴν αὐτῶν: 1.6. in order 
to watch for them. —37. τὴν προσ- 
βολὴν τῆς Σικελίας : the approach to 
Sicily. Cf iv. 1. 63 νι 4S. 8.— 38. 
ναυλοχεῖν αὐτάς: this unusual word 
is explained by Photius, ναυλοχεῖν " 
ναῦς λοχᾶν καὶ ἐνεδρεύειν. Θουκυδίδης 
ἑβδόμῳ. αὐτάς is obj. οὗ ναυλοχεῖν. 
Cf. Appian, Bell. Civ. iv. 82, Μοῦρκος 
ἐν Πελοποννήσῳ ναυλοχῶν Κλεόπατραν. 


--τ 


10 


THUCYDIDES VII. ς. 


ε lal la 
Ο δὲ Γύλιππος ἅμα μὲν ἐτείχιζε τὸ διὰ τῶν ’ExuTo\Gv 

A a“ / “ 
τεῖχος, τοῖς λίθοις χρώμενος ods οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι προπαρε- 
, 7 νΨ Ν , 5 ’, nigh ΑΝ, ΄ 
βάλοντο σφίσιν, ἅμα δὲ παρέτασσεν ἐξάγων ἀεὶ πρὸ TOU 
τειχίσματος τοὺς Συρακοσίους καὶ τοὺς ξυμμάχους καὶ 
2 ~ 2 A > 4, > \ ἈΝ ¥D ~ 
ot ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἀντιπαρετάσσοντο. ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἔδοξε τῷ 
Γυλίππῳ καιρὸς εἶναι, ἦρχε τῆς ἐφόδου: καὶ ἐν χερσὶ 
γενόμενοι ἐμάχοντο μεταξὺ τῶν τειχισμάτων, ἣ τῆς ἵππου 
τῶν Συρακοσίων οὐδεμία χρῆσις ἦν. καὶ νικηθέντων 
τῶν Συρακοσίων καὶ τῶν ξυμμάχων καὶ νεκροὺς ὑπο- 
σπόνδους ἀνελομένων καὶ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων τροπαῖον στη- 
’ ε Ν ΄ 4 Ν ᾽ὔ 5 
σάντων, ὁ μὲν Γύλιππος ξυγκαλέσας τὸ στράτευμα οὐκ 
3», Ν ε , > ’ > > ε “ / “ 
ἔφη τὸ ἁμάρτημα ἐκείνων, ἀλλ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ γενέσθαι τῆς 
γὰρ ἵππου καὶ τῶν ἀκοντιστῶν τὴν ὠφελίαν τῇ τάξει, 


ὅ. Gylippus carries forward the 
counter-wall, and ventures to attack the 
Athenians between the two walls, but, not 
being able to use his cavalry in the con- 
Jined space, is repulsed. By taking 
the blame of the failure on himself, how- 
ever, he keeps the confidence of the Syr- 
acusans in future success unimpaired. 

1. τὸ διὰ τῶν ᾿Εἰπιπολών τεῖχος : see 
on 6. 4. 2. --- ἅμα μὲν ἐτείχιζε... ἅμα 
δὲ παρέτασσεν : significant expression 
for the restless activity of Gylippus 
in training his men for battle, and at 
the same time keeping the enemy 
occupied. — 2. ots ot ᾿Αθηναῖοι προ- 
παρεβάλοντο σφίσιν: cf. c. 2.21; vi. 
99. 2. σφίσιν is added to the mid. not 
without irony; they had dragged up 
the stones for their own wall, and saw 
them now used by their enemies. For 
σφίσι referring to the nearest subj., 
see Kiihn. 455, note 9. —3. τοῦ τειχί- 
σματος : the sing. refers to the cross- 
wall (more exactly 7 ἐκτείνων τείχισις 
in ec. 6. 5), which was still in précess 
of erection, and before which Gylip- 


pus drew up his troops. τῶν τειχισμά- 
των in 7 and τῶν τειχῶν in 14 refer 
to the unfinished wall of circumvalla- 
tion of the Athenians and the cross- 
wall of the Syracusans that was ad- 
vancing against it. 

7. 4: more comprehensive than οὗ, 
“in a place where.” — 8. οὐδεμία 
χρῆσις ἦν: pregnant use of εἶναι 
ὑπάρχειν. Cf. Ὁ. 36. 28; 70. 20; 1. 2. 
5; 49. 11; 52. 10; ii. 89. 35; -viii. 96. 
6.— 9. νεκρούς: among these was 
the Corinthian Gongylus, mentioned 
in c. 2.2. Cf. Plut. Nic. 19. — ὑπο- 
σπόνδους ἀνελομένων : an acknowledg- 
ment of defeat, since they were 
obliged to beg for the σπονδαί. But 
in ii. 22. 15, the words ἀνείλοντο τοὺς 
νεκροὺς ἀσπόνδους show that the defeat 
was not decisive. See on i. 63. 17.— 
11. ὁ μὲν Γύλιππος: μέν from Vat. 
referring to 6 δὲ Νικίας inc. 6. 1. --- 18. 
τῇ τάξει: by his line of battle; instru- 
mental dat. explained by the clause 
Το τι. “since he had 
too far in between the 


ἐντὸς 


placed it 


11 


1 


12 THUCYDIDES VII. 5, 6. τ 


ἐντὸς λίαν τῶν τειχῶν ποιήσας, ἀφελέσθαι: νῦν οὖν 4 
Φ 5 / \ La! 4 5 , 5 Ν 

15 αὖθις ἐπάξειν, καὶ διανοεῖσθαι οὕτως ἐκέλευεν αὐτοὺς 
ὡς τῇ μὲν παρασκευῇ οὐκ ἔλασσον ἕξοντας, τῇ δὲ γνώμῃ 
5 > \ any, 5 ss ΄ , ΄ 
οὐκ ἀνεκτὸν ἐσόμενον, εἰ μὴ ἀξιώσουσι ἸΠελοποννήσιοί 

3, \ “Ὁ 3 ’ aN “ὦ \ ? 
τε ovtes Kat Awpins lovwv καὶ νησιωτῶν Kar ξυγκλύ.- 
δων ἀνθρώπων κρατήσαντες ἐξελάσασθαι ἐκ τῆς χώρας. 

20 καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα, ἐπειδὴ καιρὸς ἦν, αὖθις ἐπῆγεν αὐτούς. 

Ν > “a * 

6 ‘O δὲ Νικίας καὶ ot ᾿Αθηναῖοι, νομίζοντες καὶ εἰ 1 
SA \ 997 , » 9 A , > 
ἐκεῖνοι μὴ ἐθέλοιεν μάχης ἄρχειν, ἀναγκαῖον σφίσιν εἶναι 

qn ~ » 
μὴ περιορᾶν παροικοδομούμενον TO τεῖχος (ἤδη γὰρ καὶ 


walls.” With ἐντὸς . .. ποιήσας cf. i. 
62. 18; 109. 16; ν. 2. 13. See App. 
14. viv... ἐπάξειν : νῦν is not tem- 
poral, but, as in νῦν δέ, refers to the 
present case, the experience gained, 
and is to be closely connected with 
αὖθις, “he would after this experience 
again lead them out.” ἐπάγειν here 
and in 20 not “lead to battle,” but 
= ἐξάγοντα παρατάσσειν (5), “draw up 
in battle array.” —15. καὶ διανοεῖσθαι 
οὕτως ἐκέλευεν : and he urged them to 
have this conviction. —16. as... ἕξον- 
tas: supplementary partic. with ὡς. 
GMT. 919. ---τῇ μὲν παρασκευῇ: in 
point of preparation; τῇ δὲ γνώμῃ 
(with ἀξιώσουσι), as regarded their 
determination; the former he him- 
self would attend to, the latter he 
expected from them.—17. οὐκ dve- 
κτὸν ἐσόμενον: it will be intolerable, 
impers. acc. with ws, just'as above 
the regular acc. οὐκ ἔλασσον ἕξοντας. 
—el μὴ ἀξιώσουσι... ἐξελάσ ασθαι-: 
“ΠῚ they should not make it a point 
of honour to drive them οἷ." éée- 
λάσασθαι also in iv. 35. 14. Vat. 
has ἐξελάσεσθαι, but there is no ex- 
ample of the fut. inf. after ἀξιοῦν. 
For the aor. inf.§ ef. also c. 63. 20; i. 
74. 14; 132.11; iil. 39.20; 40. 24.— 


Πελοποννήσιοι. . . νησιωτῶν : chiastic 
arrangement, since Πελοποννήσιοι has 
almost the force of ἠπειρῶται. Cf. 
vi. 77. 11, where Δωριῆς ἐλεύθεροι ἀπ᾽ 
αὐτονόμου τῆς Πελοποννήσου τὴν Σικελί- 
αν οἰκοῦντες are disdainfully con- 
trasted with Ἴωνες καὶ Ἑλλησπόντιοι 
καὶ νησιῶται. Here ξυγκλύδων is added 
as more contemptuous than the usual 
ξυμμίκτων (iv. 106. 4; 109. 10; vi. 4. 
56; 17.8).—20. ἐπειδὴ καιρὸς qv: the 
very next day as is proved by τῇ 
ὑστεραία (μάχῃ), 6. 11. 8.— αὖθις ἐπή- 
γεν αὐτούς : he led them out again, to 
show that he was ready for battle, but 
did not make an attack (hence the 
impf.). He accepted battle immedi- 
ately, however, when it was offered 
by the Athenians. 

6. In the next conflict Gylippus suc- 
ceeds, by a better arrangement of his 
troops, in driving the Athenians back 
behind their fortifications, and immedi- 
ately thereupon pushes the cross-wall 
past the wall of the Athenians, so that 
JSrom this time on the investment of the 
city is, impossible. 

1. καὶ εἰ... μὴ ἐθέλοιεν : “even if 
they should not have the courage.” — 
2. μάχης ἄρχειν : as ine. 5. 6, ἄρχειν 
τῆς ἐφόδου. --- ὃ. περιορᾶν παροικοδο- 


THUCYDIDES 


VIE δ. 


ὅσον ov παρεληλύθει τὴν τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων τοῦ τείχους 


Ν ε > ΄, ’ \ > / 5. Ὁ ἃς 4 
5 τελευτὴν ἡ ἐκείνων τείχισις, καὶ εἰ παρέλθοι, ταὐτὸν ἤδη 


’ 5 A »“ , 
ἐποίει αὐτοῖς νικᾶν TE μαχομένοις διὰ παντὸς καὶ μηδὲ 


μάχεσθαι), ἀντεπήεσαν οὖν τοις Συρακοσίοις. 


Ἂς 
καὶ ὁ Τύ.- 


λιππος τοὺς μὲν ὁπλίτας ἔξω τῶν τειχῶν μᾶλλον ἢ πρό- 
, lal 
τερον προαγαγὼν ξυνέμισγεν αὐτοῖς, τοὺς δ᾽ ἱππέας καὶ 


Ἂ 5 Ν 5 , ’ A 5 , Ν 
10 τοὺς ἀκοντιστὰς ἐκ πλαγίρυ τάξας τῶν Αθηναίων κατα 


τὴν εὐρυχωρίαν, ἣ τῶν τειχῶν ἀμφοτέρων αἱ ἐργασίαι 
ἔληγον. καὶ προσβαλόντες οἱ ἱππῆς ἐν τῇ μάχῃ τῷ εὐω- 


μούμενον : the pres. partic. with περιο- 
pay indicates continued action, as ini. 
24.17; 25.10; 86.8; the aor. partic. 
a completed fact. GMT. 885. See 
on ii. 18. 21. ---τὸ τεῖχος: = mpds τὸ 
ἐγκάρσιον, τεῖχος ἁπλοῦν of c. 4. 3.— 
4. τὴν... τελευτήν : the unfinished 
northern part of the wall of circum- 
vallation, begun in the direction of 
Trogilus (vi. 99. 1), but stopped (vi. 
tor. 1) in order first to complete the 
other side toward the great harbour. 
Cf. c. 2. 11 ff. —5. εἰ παρέλθοι : so Cl. 
and St. instead of the vulgate προ- 
έλθοι, as it was not the advance of the 
cross-wall, but its passing the Athe- 
nian wall, that was to be feared. 
But the change seems to be hardly 
necessary, for as the cross-wall had 
already all but passed the Athenian 
wall (ἤδη... ὅσον οὐ παρεληλύθει), if 
it moved forward at all, it would pass, 
and hence it is quite the same whether 
we have προέλθοι or παρέλθοι. For 
the mood, see GMT. 696.— ταὐ- 
τὸν ἤδη ἐποίει... μηδὲ μάχεσθαι : “in 
that case (ἤδη) it amounted to the 
same whether they conquered in 
every battle or did not fight at 
all”; for only the completion of the 
wall of circumvallation could bring 


about the fall of the city. ποιεῖν = 


valere, effect, amount to, as in ii. 80. 
9, and like δύνασθαι in i. 141.6. The 
impf. expresses the enduring result of 
the cond. εἰ παρέλθοι. --- Θ. διὰ παντός: 
continually, always of time in Thuc. 
See on i. 38. 2.—7. μάχεσθαι: Vat. 
has ἀμύνεσθαι with μάχεσθαι as margi- 
nal reading; but, as St. says, the 
repetition of μάχεσθαι adds force. 


— οὖν: after a long parenthesis, 
as in vi. 64. 18. See also on iii. 
95. 9. 

8. τῶν τειχῶν: = TOY τειχισμάτων 


(c. 5. 7). --- ἢ πρότερον: than in the 
former battle (c. 5. 7).—9. ξυνέμισ- 
γεν: prepared for the conflict, impt., 
as i. 62. 21. --- 10. ἐκ πλαγίου : so that 
they might at the favourable moment 
fall upon the flank of the Athenians. 
--11. 7... ἔληγον : Cl. thinks the 
evpuxwpia means the space between the 
the advancing walls. 
St. adopts Arn.’s view: “The Syr- 
acusans front toward the west; 
their cavalry therefore, being on the 
right, was on the north of their line. 
And it was the northern side of Epi- 
polae which presented the greatest 
extent of clear ground, the finished 
part of the Athenian line being the 
southern side towards the cliffs look- 
ing to the south.” 


τελευταί of 


13 


9 
o 


14 


15 


20 


~) 


THUCYDIDES VII. 6, 7. 


͵ὔ ,ὔ A > ,ὔ ν > 5 Ν > » 

νύμῳ κέρᾳ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, ὅπερ κατ᾽ αὐτοὺς ἦν, ἔτρε- 

3, 3 > Ν Ν Ν ¥ ’, Ν ε Ν 

wav: καὶ δι’ αὐτὸ καὶ τὸ ἄλλο στράτευμα νικηθὲν ὑπὸ 

lal Ν A 

τῶν Συρακοσίων κατηράχθη ἐς τὰ τειχίσματα. καὶ TH 

Ν 

ἐπιούσῃ νυκτὶ ἔφθασαν παροικοδομήσαντες καὶ παρελ- 

θόντες τὴν τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων οἰκοδομίαν, ὥστε μηκέτι μήτε 

αὐτοὶ κωλύεσθαι ὑπ᾽ αὐτῶν, ἐκείνους τε καὶ παντάπα- 

Ν ~ “ 

σιν ἀπεστερηκέναι, εἰ καὶ κρατοῖεν, μὴ ἂν ἔτι σφᾶς ἀπο- 
τειχίσαι. 

Μετὰ δὲ τοῦτο αἵ τε τῶν Κορινθίων νῆες καὶ ᾽Αμ- 

“ Ν ’ » ’ ε ε /, “4 

πρακιωτῶν καὶ Λευκαδίων ἐσέπλευσαν αἱ ὑπόλοιποι δώ- 

δεκα, λαθοῦσαι τὴν τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων φυλακήν (ἦρχε δὲ 

αὐτῶν ᾿Ερασινίδης Κορίνθιος), καὶ ξυνετείχισαν τὸ λοι- 


Tov τοῖς Συρακοσίοις [μέχρι] τοῦ ἐγκαρσίου τείχους - καὶ 2 


13. κατ᾽ αὐτούς : opposite them; cf. 
i. 62. 24; v. 71.22.— 15. κατηράχθη: 
(Vat.; most of the Mss. κατερράχθη) 
was driven back, from καταράσσειν and 
corresponding to amapaénre, Cc. 63. 4. 

Kal... ἔφθασαν : immediate result 
of the victory, “and the very next 
night the Syracusans accomplished 
what the Athenians had so much 
feared” (cf. 5). The important re- 
sult is stated with esp. emphasis. 
Cl. does not agree with St. and Bk. 
in objecting to the more exact ex- 
planation of παροικοδομήσαντες by 
᾿Αθηναίων 
οἰκοδομίαν, esp. since παρελθεῖν was 
emphasized above (4, 5). --- 17. μήτε 


A / ‘7 ΄ 
καὶ παρελθόντες τὴν τῶν 


» Ε , > 
αὐτοὶ κωλύεσθαι ἀποτειχίσαι: 
their intercourse with the interior 


could no longer be hindered, and they 
had deprived the Athenians of all 
possibility of investing the city. μή 
after ἀπεστερηκέναι, aS 1. το. 3; ii 
IOI. 3; iv. 40. 5 after ἀπιστεῖν; Vv 

11 after ἀπέχεσθαι; iii. 32. 14 after 
See Rehdantz on 


S26) 


ἐλπίδα οὐκ ἔχειν. 


Xen. Anab. iil. 5. 11. GMT. 815,1; 
H. 1029; Kr. Spr. ΟἿ. 12. Ὁ: eam: 
516, 3a. For ἄν, see GMT. 211. 

7. Immediately thereafter the ezx- 
pected Corinthian, Ambraciot, and Leu- 
cadian ships reach the great harbour of 
Syracuse, unobserved by the Athenians, 
and the cross-wall is finished. Gylip- 
pus displays the greatest activity in 
getting reinforcements from all quar- 
ters, and the Syracusans are zealously 
occupied in fitting out their fleet. 

1. ai τε τῶν Κορινθίων νῆες κτέ.: 
cf. c. 4. 35, where also .4 τῶν ᾿Αθη- 
ναίων φυλακή is mentioned. τῶν ex- 
pressed but once as in i. 7. 7, ete. 
The two circumstances so important 
for the Syracusans, the arrival of the 
long-expected ships and the activity 
of Gylippus, are connected by τε καί. 
—4. ξυνετείχισαν: the men from 
these ships, who now helped to finish 
the rest of the cross-wall, which had 
just been carried past the Athenian 
wall. This sense, which is required 
by the whole context, is best gained 


THUCYDIDES VII. 7, 8. 


\ » \ ¥ 
ὁ Γύλιππος ἐς τὴν ἄλλην Σικελίαν ἐπὶ στρατιάν τε wWyeE- 


το καὶ ναυτικὴν καὶ πεζικὴν ξυλλέξων, καὶ τῶν πόλεων 


ἅμα προσαξόμενος εἴ τις ἢ μὴ πρόθυμος ἢν ἢ παντάπα.- 


» 9 ͵΄, va , 
ow ἔτι ἀφεστήκει τοῦ πολέμου. 


πρέσβεις τε ἄλλοι τῶν 


Συρακοσίων καὶ Κορινθίων ἐς Λακεδαίμονα καὶ Kopw- 


θον ἀπεστάλησαν, ὅπως στρατιὰ ἔτι περαιωθῃ τρόπῳ ᾧ 


+ > ε , a 7 x A ν 5, “ 
αν, ἐν ὁλκάσιν ἢ πλοίοις ἢ ἄλλως ὁπως ἂν, προχωρῇ, 


ε Ἂν lal 3 ’ 5 ,’ 
ως καὶ Τῶν Αθηναίων επιμεταπεμπομεένων. 


οἵ TE Συρα- 


΄ δ 3 , Ne 9 A ε \ 
KOOLOL VQUTLKOV ἐπλήρουν και ανεπειρωντο ως και τού- 


8 9 , K Ν 5 ἀλλ NO > , 
TO επιχειρήσοντεές, αι ες TAAAQ ποὰλν ETEPPWVTO. 


ὁ δὲ 


5 , fal Ν ἴω ΄ 
Νικίας αἰσθόμενος τοῦτο καὶ ὁρῶν καθ᾽ ἡμέραν ἐπιδι- 


by following Holm’s clear explana- 
tion (Sic. 11. 392-395) and striking out 
μέχρι, Which may have sprung from 
a misunderstanding of πρὸς τὸ ἐγκάρ- 
σιῦν τεῖχος ἁπλοῦν (C. 4.3). τὸ λοιπόν 
is to be connected with τοῦ ἐγκαρσίου 
τείχους, just as in ὁ. 71. 94, τὸ λοιπὸν 
τοῦ τείχους ; iv. 116. 15, τὸ λοιπὸν τοῦ 
χειμῶνος. The first Syracusan cross- 
wall was also called ἐγκάρσιον τεῖχος 
(vi. 99. 16). St., with the approval 
of Philippi, strikes out μέχρι τοῦ 
ἐγκαρσίου τείχους in order to get the 
same sense. See App. 

6. ἐπὶ στρατιαν : concise expression 
of purpose (cf. c. 12. 1), which is 
more definitely explained by καὶ vav- 
τικὴν ... ξυλλέξων. --- TE: refers to καὶ 
τῶν πόλεων below, and should not be 
struck out, as v. H. thinks. — ὥχετο: 
as often, to indicate departure without 
delay. Cf. i. 90. 26; 116. 15.—7. 
πεΐζικήν : retained with most of the 
Mss., instead of πεζήν. See on vi. 33. 
9.— τῶν πόλεων: part. gen. depend- 
ing on ef τις. Kr. Spr. 60, 10, 1.— 
8. προσαξόμενος : to bring over, used 
in same sense in i. 99. 8; 11. 30. 7; ili. 
gt. 7; iv. 86. 3.—9. ἀφεστήκει: had 
stood aloof, as in vi. 88. 22. 


Sresh troops. 


ἄλλοι: opp. to Gylippus (6); has 
no reference to the former ambassa- 
dors mentioned vi. 75. ὃ 3. —10. Ko- 
ρινθίων : 1.6. from the lately arrived 
ships, who could work the more ef- 
fectively in their native city.—11. 
τρόπῳ ᾧ GV... προχωρῇ : τη: whatever 
way might be available, in merchant 
ships, or small craft, or in any other way 
that might be convenient. ἐν ὁλκάσιν . . 
ὕπως ἄν is to be taken as explanatory 
of τρόπῳ ᾧ ἂν προχωρῇ, and προχωρῇ is 
understood with ὅπως ἄν. See App. 
—13. ὡς . ἐπιμεταπεμπομένων : 
since also the Athenians were sending for 
The direct statement of 
this is not made till the following 
chap., but it is here taken for granted 
as already known. 

14. ἐπλήρουν kal ἀνεπειρῶντο : same 
phrase in ec. 51. 9, and ἀναπειρᾶσθαι, 
practise maneuvering, again, c. 12. 16. 
—15. ἐπέρρωντο: were encouraged ; 
also 6. 17.10. Cf. c. 2. 9, ἐπερρώσθη- 
σαν, plucked wp courage. 

8. Nicias, fully aware of his difficult 
position, turns with urgent appeals for 
help to Athens, and in order to leave 
no ground for a misunderstanding, sets 


forth his views in detail in a letter. 


15 


3 


10 


10 


THUCYDIDES - VIL. 8. 


“ lal Ν 
δοῦσαν τήν τε τῶν πολεμίων ἰσχὺν καὶ τὴν σφετέραν 


3 ΄, » Ἁ 2% 5 Ν > ΄ > ΄, 
ἀπορίαν, ἔπεμπε καὶ αὐτὸς ἐς τὰς ᾿Αθήνας ἀγγέλλων 


’ Ν \ » > 9 ΄“ / 
πολλάκις μὲν καὶ ἄλλοτε καθ᾽ ἕκαστα τῶν γιγνομένων, 


V4 Ν Ν /, ’ὔ 3 on Ky ’ 3 
μάλιστα δὲ καὶ τότε, νομίζων ἐν δεινοῖς τε εἶναι καί, εἰ 
Ἄν 6 , x A ,ὔ "ἢ ΠΩ A ΘΝ 
μὴ ὡς τάχιστα ἢ σφᾶς μεταπέμψουσιν ἢ ἄλλους μὴ ὀλί. 


γους ἀποστελοῦσιν, οὐδεμίαν εἶναι σωτηρίαν. 


φοβού- 


\ \ ε , “ἡ Ν Ν A , "ὃ 
μενος δὲ μὴ οἱ πεμπόμενοι ἢ κατὰ τὴν τοῦ λέγειν ἀδυ- 


’, “ἡ \ , 5 »" , “ἡ lol ΕἾ d 
νασίαν ἢ καὶ μνήμης ἐλλιπεῖς γιγνόμενοι ἢ τῷ OXAW 


x ’ ’ 39 δ Ξ, 9 , » 
πρὸς χάριν τι λέγοντες οὐ τὰ ὄντα ἀπαγγέλλωσιν, eypa- 


> , , Y ἊΝ ΄ \ ε κ᾿ 
ψεν ἐπιστολήν, νομίζων οὕτως ἂν μάλιστα τὴν αὑτοῦ 


γνώμην μηδὲν ἐν τῷ ἀγγέλῳ ἀφανισθεῖσαν μαθόντας 


3. σφετέραν : see on 6. I. 21. --- 4. 
καὶ αὐτός: as the Syracusans had 
sent to Lacedaemon, which may have 
happened as well after as before. — 
ἔπεμπε. . . τότε: Cl. takes πολλάκις 
μὲν καὶ ἄλλοτε with ἀγγέλλων only, 
μάλιστα δὲ καὶ τότε with ἀγγέλλων 
ἔπεμπε; but St.’s view is better: 
“ἔπεμπε, imperfectum quod ad 
πολλάκις μὲν καὶ ἄλλοτε relatum no- 
tionem rei repititae habet, 
apud μάλιστα δὲ καὶ τότε Sonat 
mittere parabat.’—5. καθ᾽ ἕκα- 
στα: singula quaeq ue, taken ἴο- 
gether, obj. of ἀγγέλλων. Cf. i. 3. 6, 
κατὰ ἔθνη, Singulas gentes; i. 3.9, 
καθ᾽ ἑκάστους, Singulos quosque; 
also iv. 47. 10.—6. εἰ py... peta- 
πέμψουσιν: Vat. has μεταπέμψωσιν, 
and since Thuc. has one sure exam- 
ple of εἰ with the subjv. without ἄν in 
a case of great uncertainty of the sup- 
position (vi. 21. 5, possibly i. 72. 14), 
perhaps it should not here be uncon- 
ditionally rejected. See on vi. 21. 5. 
Cl. says ἀποστελοῦσιν would then in- 
dicate that which was more to be 
desired; but cf. Dem. xvii. 176. — 
8. οὐδεμίαν εἶναι σωτηρίαν : the fut. 
indic. in the prot. and the simple inf. 


pres. in the apod. correspond to the 
firm conviction and categorical ex- 
pression of Nicias. In dir. dise. it 
would be, εἰ μὴ ἀποστελεῖτε, οὐδεμία 
ἐστὶ σωτηρία. ν. H.’s conjecture, οὐδε- 
μίαν ἂν εἶναι σωτηρίαν, would weaken 
the force. Οὗ vi. 6.19; 91. 13. 

9. κατὰ τὴν Tov λέγειν ἀδυνασίαν: 
so Vat.; the other Mss. omit τήν; but 
even if the art. of the governing 
subst. is often omitted when a gen. 
goes before (see on vi. 88. 23), still 
the omission here would be so strange 
as to cause obscurity. The unusual 
form ἀδυνασία for ἀδυναμία occurs also 
viii. 8. 19.—10. μνήμης ἐλλιπεῖς γι- 
yvopevor: so Vat. for γνώμης of all the 
rest of the Mss.: “from defect of 
memory.” This might very naturally 
have happened if they had had to 
retain everything in memory; for in 
addition to the letter he told them 
certain things to be delivered by word 
of mouth, ὅσα ἔδει αὐτοὺς εἰπεῖν, 16, 
and ὅσα τε ἀπὸ γλώσσης εἴρητο αὐτοῖς, 
6. 10. 2. ---12. οὕτως ἂν μάλιστα: Cl. 
says οὕτως is explained by rhy... μα- 
θόντας, ἂν μάλιστα belonging to βουλεύ- 
σασθαι; better οὕτως ἂν μάλιστα μαθόν- 
τας βουλεύσασθαι. --- 18, ἐν τῷ ἀγγέχῳ : 


bo 


10 τοῦτο. 


* Ol. 91. 8; B.c. 414, Sept. 
** Ol. 91.3; B.c. 414, Nov. 


τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους βουλεύσασθαι περὶ τῆς ἀληθείας. 


e ὯΝ » , aA 5 , Ν , 
15 Ol με’ @WXOVTO φέροντες, ους ἀπέστειλε, τα γράμματα 


THUCYDIDES 


ὙΠ 8-τὸ: iM’ 


A 
και 3 


\ 
και 


Y “8 τι Ν 3 La) ε δὲ Ν Ν Ν ΄, ὃ 
OOQ εοει AVTOVS ELTTEW* O € TA KATA TO OTPQATOTE OV 


dua φυλακῆς μᾶλλον ἤδη ἔχων ἢ δι’ ἑκουσίων κινδύνων 


>’ / 
ἐπεμέλετο. 


Ἔν δὲ τῷ αὐτῷ θέρει ὃ: 


»“ Ν 5 , 
τελευτῶντι καὶ Evetiwv στρα- 1 


᾿ τηγὸς ᾿Αθηναίων μετὰ Περδίκκου στρατεύσας ἐπ᾽ ᾿Αμφί- 


ἂν lal a 
πολιν Θρᾳξὶ πολλοῖς τὴν μὲν πόλιν οὐχ εἷλεν, ἐς δὲ τὸν 


Στρυμόνα περικομίσας τριήρεις ἐκ τοῦ ποταμοῦ ἐπολιόρ- 


δ κει ὁρμώμενος ἐξ Ἵμεραίου. 


* 


\ Ν - » ’ὕ 
καὶ τὸ θέρος ἐτελεύτα 


τοῦ © ἐπιγιγνομένου χειμῶνος ἥκοντες ἐς τὰς 1 


> ΄ ε Ν lal , ν > Ν Ἂ » 
Αθήνας οἱ παρὰ τοῦ Νικίου ὁσα τε ἀπὸ γλώσσης εἰρητο 


9 A > \ » , 9 \ \ 
αὐτοῖς εἶπον καὶ εἰ TLS TL ἐπηρώτα ἀπεκρίνοντο καὶ τὴν 


belongs with ἀφανισθεῖσαν ; his view 
might be obscured “in the messenger ” 
(by his inaccurate comprehension or 
delivery). Cf. ii. 35. 7, ἐν ἑνὶ ἀνδρὶ 
πολλῶν ἀρετὰς κινδυνεύεσθαι. On this 
use of ἐν with persons, see Kiihn. 431, 
13) ia 

15. οὖς ἀπέστειλε: inserted epexe- 
getically. See App.—16. ὁ δὲ τὰ 
κατὰ TO στρατόπεδον... ἐπεμέλετο: 
“keeping his army from this time 
rather on the defensive than on the 
offensive, he attended to his duties.” 
τὰ κατὰ TO στρατόπεδον is Obj. of ἔχων, 
which must be taken by zeugma also 
with δι᾽ ἑκουσίων κινδύνων. ἐπεμέλετο 
(not ἐπεμελεῖτο; see on vi. 54. 26) is 
used abs. The const. is similar to 
ἡγοῦντο with limiting partic. ini. 19. 2. 
τὸ στρατόπεδον refers no doubt to the 
army, not to the camp esp., and so 
would include the troops in the forti- 
fications on Plemmyrium, as well as 
those in the main camp. See App. 

9. Attempt of the Athenians to win 
back Amphipolis. 

1. τελευτῶντι : when it was near the 


end, pred. Of. i. 30. 19. -- Evertov: 
not elsewhere mentioned. — 2. pera 
Περδίκκου: as the help of Thracian 
Chalcidians held out to him by the 
Lacedaemonians had not come, Per- 
diccas had no doubt, though no men- 
tion is made of it, made peace and 
alliance with the Athenians, in order 
that his country might no longer be 
exposed to hostilities from them (cf 
vi. 7.§ 3,4). See Weissenborn, Hellen. 
Beitr. p. 173, and Introd. to Book V. 
p- 19 ff. —3. Θρᾳξὶ πολλοῖς : without 
doubt mercenaries from the surround- 
ing regions. Cf.c. 27.§ 1; v. 6. § 2. 
—4, περικομίσας : doubtless out of 
the port Eion. Cf iv. 106.17; v. 6. 
2; το, 10. ---ἐκ τοῦ ποταμοῦ : belongs 
to ἐπολιόρκει. --- 5. Ἵμεραίου : not oth- 
erwise known. Weissenborn says, 
“Probably on the right bank of the 
river above the bridge.” 

10. The letter of Nicias reaches 
Athens and is read in the Popular 
Assembly. 

2. ἀπὸ γλώσσης : orally; just so 
Hat. i. 123. 20.—3. εἴ τίς τι ἐπηρώτα : 


18 


ll 


THUCYDIDES VII. 


10, 11. 


5 Ν 3 ’, ε Ἂ Ν ε ~ / 
ἐπιστολὴν ἀπέδοσαν. ὁ δὲ γραμματεὺς ὁ τῆς πόλεως παρ- 
ελθὼν ἀνέγνω. τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις δηλοῦσαν τοιάδε" 

“Ta μὲν πρότερον πραχθέντα, ὦ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, ἐν ἀλ- 


λαις πολλαῖς ἐπιστολαῖς ἴστε: νῦν δὲ καιρὸς οὐχ ἧσσον 


, cae > Ἐν 9 \ , 
μαθόντας υμας εν ῳ εσμεν βουλεύσασθαι. 


κρατησάντων 2 


Ν ε ω , A 7, SS 7 >7? ἃ > / 
γὰρ μων μαχαις ταις πλείοσι “ορακοσίιους ἐφ ους επεμ- 


Ἂς Ν - lal 
φθημεν Kal τὰ τείχη οἰκοδομησαμένων ἐν οἷσπερ νῦν 


ἐσμέν, ἦλθε Τύλιππος Λακεδαιμόνιος στρατιὰν ἔχων ἔκ 


Ἂ aA - 
τε ἸΠελοποννήσου καὶ τῶν ἐν Σικελίᾳ πόλεων ἔστιν ὧν. 


(Vat. for ἠρώτα) if any one asked further 
questions. To the impf. of the prot. 
corresponds also in the apod. ἀπεκρί- 
vovto (Vat., for ἀπεκρίναντο of most of 
the Mss.).—4. ὁ γραμματεὺς ὁ τῆς 
πόλεως: cf. Poll. Vill. 98, ὁ ὑπὸ τοῦ 
δήμου αἱρεθεὶς γραμματεὺς ἀναγιγνώσκει 
τῷ δήμῳ καὶ τῇ βουλῇ. ν. H. and St. 
omit 6 τῆς πόλεως. ---ὅ. δηλοῦσαν : of 
the contents of a letter. Οὗ c. 16.1; 
Ny OUR 1; 197. 22: 

Lerrer or ΝΙΟΙΑΒ ΤῸ THE ΈΜΟΒ 

AT ATHENS. 

11. Although we were very successful 
at first, a change has taken place since 
the arrival of Gylippus. Having lost 
the last battle we have had to withdraw 
behind our fortifications, and are now 
rather in the condition of besieged than 
of besiegers. 

1. ἐν ἄλλαις πολλαῖς ἐπιστολαῖς 
ἴστε: ἐν, where we expect ἐκ, is due 
possibly to the original pf. meaning 
of εἰδέναι: “you have seen (read) in 
many letters.” MKiihn.431,1,8) a. Kr. 
compares Dem. xutv. 60, μεμαθήκατε 
ἐν τοῖς ἐν ἀρχῇ εἰρημένοις. CF. Cic. de 
Nat. D. i. 26. 72, ut videmus in 
scriptis. Compare also the use of 
ἐν in expressions of decisive authority, 
as ili. 53. 8. πολλαῖς (which Vat. 
omits no doubt only in consequence 


of the similar endings) helps to give 
point to the following οὐχ ἧσσον = 
μάλιστα: “you have frequently had 
information; now, however, it is 
more important than ever that you 
learn the truth and determine accord- 
ingly.” Cf.c. 8. 4.—3. ἐν ᾧ ἐσμέν: 
in what condition we are. Cf. ec. 14.12; 
vi. 6.30. For neut. of pron. to indi- 
cate condition, measure, degree, etc., 
see Kr. Spr. 49, 4, 4 and 22. 

4. μάχαις ταῖς πλείοσι : order as in 
8, μάχῃ TH πρώτῃ, 1. τ. 6, παρασκευῇ TH 
πάσῃ, and i, 11. 13, μέρει τῷ Gel παρόντι. 
- Συρακοσίους : Thuc. construes κρα- 
τεῖν, When connected with μάχῃ (i. 108. 
18; vi. 2. 26) or μαχόμενον (ii. 39. 14; 
iv. 67.29), with the ace.; so also some- 
times when μάχῃ is not expressed, but 
the whole context points to it (as il. 
39. 18; iii. 99. 9); otherwise always 
with the gen.—5. τὰ τείχη: taken 
strictly in point of time (οἰκοδομησαμέ- 
νων... ἦλθε Γύλιππος), it would refer 
only to the wall of circumvallation, 
so far as it was finished, and to the 
round fort on Epipolae; but ἐν οἷσπερ 
νῦν ἐσμέν and the following avexwpn- 
σαμεν ἐς τὰ τείχη Show that also the 
three forts built on Plemmyrium after 
the arrival of Gylippus are included. 
—7. ἔστιν av: some. ὦ. 1029; 


THUCYDIDES VII. 


11 1.2. 


Ν , A Ν , A ε 5 ε A A 39 ε 
και μαχῃ ΤΊ) μεν ΤΡρΡΩΤΊ νικαται ὑφ μων, ΤΊ) ὃ υστε- 


4 ε “ 4 A Ν 5 Lal ,ὔ > 
ραίᾳ ἱππευσί τε πολλοῖς καὶ ἀκοντισταῖς βιασθέντες ἀνε. 


10 χωρήσαμεν ἐς τὰ τείχη. 


A > ε A bs , 
νυν οὖν μεις μὲν παυσάμενοι 


τοῦ περιτειχισμοῦ διὰ τὸ πλῆθος τῶν ἐναντίων ἡσυχά. 


ζομεν (οὐδὲ γὰρ ξυμπάσῃ τῇ στρατιᾷ δυναίμεθ᾽ ἂν χρή- 


σασθαι ἀπανηλωκυίας τῆς φυλακῆς τῶν τειχῶν μέρος τι 


ae “ ε Ν , δ ΝᾺ A ε las 
του ὁπλιτικοῦ), ol δὲ παρῳκοδομήκασιν ἡμῖν τεῖχος ἁπλοῦν, 


Y A 5 » 
15 ὥστε μὴ εἶναι ἔτι περιτειχίσαι αὐτούς, ἢν μή τις τὸ πα- 


, An a A > \ Y 
ρατείχισμα τοῦτο πολλῇ στρατιᾷ ἐπελθὼν ἕλῃ. 


ξυμβέ. 


4 A lal e La 3, > Ν la 
βηκέ τε πολιορκεῖν δοκοῦντας ἡμᾶς ἄλλους αὐτοὺς μᾶλ. 


, la A A 
λον, ὅσα γε κατὰ γῆν, τοῦτο πάσχειν" οὐδὲ γὰρ τῆς χώρας 


2 \ \ τ N 2K , 3 ΄ 
επι πολὺ διὰ TOUS LIT7TTEAS ἐξερχόμεθα. 


Ν 
“Πεπόμφασι δὲ καὶ ἐς Πελοπόννησον πρέσβεις ἐπ᾽ 


» 
ἄλλην στρατιάν, καὶ ἐς τὰς ἐν Σικελίᾳ πόλεις Γύλιππος 


x \ δ \ , A Ss A 
OLY ETAL, Tas. μεν και πεισων ξυμπολεμεῖν οσαι νυν ἡσυ- 


’ὔ bs δὲ la) »» \ Ν Ν Ἂς 
χάζουσιν, απο € των ETL Και στρατιαν πεζὴν και ναυ- 


H.998. Cf. i. 65. 15; iii. 92. 22; vi. 88. 
34.— 8. τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ: “in the battle 
on the next day.” See on ce. 5. 20, and 
Herbst, Gegen Cobet, p. 34. Cf. Plut. 
Nic. 19, εἰς τὴν ἐπιοῦσαν ἡμέραν κτέ. 
11. τὸ πλῆθος : “the superior num- 
ber,” as in iv. 10.16. This superior- 
ity is explained by οὐδὲ yap... τοῦ 
ὁπλιτικοῦ, since always a part of the 
foot-force was occupied in guarding 
the walls (here esp. the wall of cir- 
cumvallation). —14. παρῳκοδομήκα- 
ow: cf. c.6.16.—15. μὴ εἶναι: = μὴ 
παρεῖναι (or as Vat. reads, μὴ δυνατὸν 
εἶναι). Cf. ii. 97. 28; v. 40. 10. 
in this sense always with the neg. — 
ἣν μή tis: only here in Thuc. — τὸ 
παρατείχισμα : here, and in c. 43. 7,35, 
the Syracusan cross-wall (τὸ ἐγκάρσιον 
τεῖχος, 6. 7.5) since now it had passed 
the Athenian περιτείχισμα (vi. 101.5). 
17. ἄλλους : Obj. οὗ πολιορκεῖν, ἡμᾶς 


εἶναι 


αὐτοὺς Subj. of πάσχειν. Compare sim- 
ilar order in c. 75. 40.—18. ὅσα ye: 
restrictive, as in iv. 48. 24; viii. 70. 5. 
Kr. Spr. 62, 1, 4. — τῆς χώρας : part. 
gen. depending on ἐπὶ πολύ. G. 1088; 
H. (306. Οὐ: 38. 1 79.2: 40: 8. 
65. 7; i. 50. 6; iv. 3. 11.—19. ἐπὶ 
πολύ : in local sense, over a great extent. 
Kr. Spr. 48, 4, 3. 

12. 
thing to reinforce their land troops and 
to practise their fleet for an attack, while 
our fleet, continually on duty and con- 
stantly expecting an attack, never has 
time for rest and repairs. 

1. πεπόμφασι.... οἴχεται: cf. ὁ. 7. 
§ 2, ὃ. --- ἐπ᾿ ἄλλην στρατιάν: cf ο. 7. 
6.—3. καί: more closely connected 
with ξυμπολεμεῖν. ---4. ἀπὸ δὲ τῶν: 
position as in iii. 61.6; vi. 45.5; 66. 
6. Kr. Spr. 50, 1, 138. — ἔτι καὶ στρα- 
τιᾶάν ; still more troops. Cf.c. 2.7; 34. 


The Syracusans are doing every- 


19 


20 


»-“ \ “ἡ , ¥ 
5 τικου παρασκευὴν qv δύνηται ἄξων. 


10 


THUCYDIDES VII. 12. 


διανοοῦνται γάρ, 2 


, »-»"» A 4 nw nw nr 
ὡς ἐγὼ πυνθάνομαι, τῷ τε πεζῷ ἅμα τῶν τειχῶν ἡμῶν 


΄ Ἀ A Ἧς Ν ’, 
πειρᾶν και ταις ναυσι κατα θάλασσαν. 


\ eon , > Y \ Ν ΄ 
δενὶ υμῶὼν δόξῃ ειναι οτι και κατα θάλασσαν. 


καὶ δεινὸν μη- 8 


τὸ γὰρ 


fr = 5 »" » 
ναυτικὸν ἡμῶν, TEP κἀκεῖνοι πυνθάνονται, τὸ μὲν πρῶ- 


τον ἤκμαζε καὶ τῶν νεῶν τῇ ξηρότητι καὶ τῶν πληρωμά- 


των τῇ σωτηρίᾳ. νῦν δὲ αἵ τε νῆες διάβροχοι, τοσοῦτον 


χρόνον ἤδη θαλασσεύουσαι, καὶ τὰ πληρώματα ἔφθαρται. 


τὰς μὲν γὰρ ναῦς οὐκ ἔστιν ἀνελκύσαντας διαψύξαι διὰ 4 


Ν > , =~ / \ » ,’ ἈΝ Lal 
τὸ ἀντιπάλους τῷ πλήθει καὶ ἔτι πλείους τὰς τῶν πολε- 


,ὔ 3, ὋΝ ,ὔ 4 e 
μίων οὐσας ἀεὶ προσδοκίαν παρέχειν ὡς ἐπιπλεύσονται. 


‘\ ’ὔ 5 5 , Ν ε » ’ - ἄτα] 
φανεραὶ δέ εισιν αναπειρώμέναι και αι επιχειρήσεις ἔπ ὃ 


ὅ. ---ναυτικοῦ παρασκευήν: as in ii. 
62. 14; = παρεσκευασμένον ναυτικόν. 
Cf. τριήρων παρασκευή, lil. 39. 7. 

6. ὡς... πυνθάνομαι: the pres., as 
in 9 and vi. 17. 18, of information re- 
peatedly received. —7. wepayv: with 
the gen., as ini. 61.15. In the second 
clause πειρᾶν is used abs., being only 
locally defined by κατὰ θάλασσαν, 
which is opp. to τῶν τειχῶν. 

δεινόν: incredible; cf. ili. 57. 8.— 
8. ὅτι kal kata θάλασσαν: sc. 
pay διανοοῦνται. An attack in the open 
sea, not on Plemmyrium, is meant. 
9. ἧπερ: hardly necessary, with Cl., 
to supply γενέσθαι. ἧπερ refers to 
the change that had taken place, and 
points therefore esp. to the second 
clause, νῦν δὲ... ἔφθαρται. --- 1Ό. τῇ 
ξηρότητι : opp. to διάβροχοι (in 11), the 
good condition of ships, when the wood 
is not thoroughly soaked from lying 
too long in the water. The means to 
preserve this condition is ἀνελκύσαν- 


TEL 


τος διαψύξαι (13), or ἀποξηρᾶναι (17), 
which had not been possible for more 
than a year now (from July, 415 — vi. 
30—to September, 414 B.c.). Cf 


Poll. i. 121, καὶ ai μὲν ἀθαλάσσευτοι καὶ 
ἀκραιφνεῖς καὶ ξηραὶ διεψυγμέναι, ai δὲ ἐν- 
τεθαλαττευκυῖαι, δίυγροι, apatat, διάβρο- 
χοι.---τῶν πληρωμάτων τῇ σωτηρίᾳ: 
in the unimpaired condition of the crews. 
Cf. c. 4. § 6.—11. αἵ te vies .. - 
ἔφθαρται: ai τε νῆες . . . θαλασσεύουσαι 
is explained from 13 to ec. 13. 5, καὶ 
τὰ πληρώματα ἔφθαρται from c. 13. 5 
to the end of the chap. We see 
thereby how inaptly the connexion 
is broken by the division of the 
chaps. — διάβροχοι: not leaky, but 
water-logged. Dukas explains well, 
διὰ πολλοῦ θαλασσεύουσαι ἐπὶ πολὺ διυ- 
γράνθησαν κἀντεῦθεν βαρεῖαι γενόμεναι 
δυσκίνητοι ἦσαν. See on 10. 

13. διαψύξαι : accent acc. to Hero- 
dian. Cf. ξυμμίξαι, ii. 84. 34, and 
προσμίξαι, ili, 31.13. See App. on ii. 
84. 34.—14. καὶ ἔτι πλείους: the 
correct reading, from Vat. only, in- 
stead of καὶ ὅτι πλείους, adds force 
to ἀντιπάλους τῷ πλήθει. .. οὔσας, 
since they are equal in number and even 
superior. 

16. ἀναπειρώμεναι: (Vat., all the 
rest ἀ ποπειρώμεναι) see on 6. 7. 14.— 


THUCYDIDES VII. 


12) 1.2. 


> (A Ν » “A “ 
ἐκείνοις καὶ ἀποξηρᾶναι τὰς σφετέρας μᾶλλον ἐξουσία" 


21 


13 οὐ γὰρ ἐφορμοῦσιν ἄλλοις. ἡμῖν δ᾽ ἐκ πολλῆς ἂν περιου- 1 


A , A A 
σίας νεῶν μόλις τοῦτο ὑπῆρχε Kal μὴ ἀναγκαζομένοις, 


7 “A ’ fe > \ > / , 
ὥσπερ νῦν, πάσαις φυλάσσειν: εἰ yap ἀφαιρήσομέν τι 


\ \ A , No Ἢ ΄ > 7 Ν 
και βραχὺ TS ΤῊ ρησεως, Ta ἐπιτήδεια ουκ ἕξομεν, παρα 


ὴν ἐκεί όλιν χαλεπῶ ὶ νῦν ἐ 7 
τὴν ἐκείνων πόλιν χαλεπως καὶ νυν ἐσκομιζόμενοι. 


Ἂς 
τα 


δὲ πληρώματα διὰ τόδε ἐφθάρη τε ἡμῖν καὶ ἔτι νῦν 


φθείρεται, τῶν ναυτῶν τῶν μὲν διὰ φρυγανισμὸν καὶ 


ε Ν Ν ὁὃ , Ν εἰς A ε ly, > 
ap7Taynv KQL U βειαν μακραν UTO Τῶν πΊΤΕων ἀπολλυ- 


ἐπ᾽ ἐκείνοις : in their power. Kr. Spr. 
68, 41, 9. See on vi. 22. 13. St. 
(who, following Codex M. in the Brit. 
Mus., omits ἐξουσία in 14) is wrong in 
extending the force of ἐπ᾽ ἐκείνοις to 
ἀποξηρᾶναι. μᾶλλον requires a more 
definite expression than ἐπ᾽ ἐκείνοις, 
they have, more than we, opportunity for 
drying their ships. —18. οὐ γὰρ ἐφορ- 
μοῦσιν ἄλλοις: sc. ὥσπερ ai ἡμέτεραι, 
they are not obliged (as are our ships) 
to watch others. 
18. But we dare not 
watchfulness, on account of the difficulty 
of getting supplies. The army suffers 
loss, moreover, partly from sudden at- 
tacks of the enemy’s cavalry, partly from 
the desertion of those who came with us ei- 
ther through compulsion or in hope of gain. 
1. ἐκ πολλῆς περιουσίας νεῶν : lit., 
Jrom a great numerical superiority in 
ships, i.e. even if we had such supe- 
riority. ἐκ of the consequence as in 
ἼΠΖ 17: γε. ἡ: 11.033: 12.--- 2. τοῦτο: 
80. τὸ ἀποξηραίνειν τὰς ναῦς. --- καὶ 
μὴ ἀναγκαζομένοις: with ἐκ πολλῆς 
περιουσίας forming the prot. to ἂν 
ὑπῆρχε. The difficulty attending the 
ἀνελκύσαντας διαψύξαι even with a 
greater number of ships (μόλις ἂν 
τοῦτο ὑπῆρχε) was shown in Ο. 12. ὃ 
4.—3. ὥσπερ νῦν: sc. ἀναγκαζόμεθα, 
explained by εἰ γὰρ ἀφαιρήσομέν τι... 


relax our 


ἐσκομιζόμενοι. ---- πάσαις : with all (the 
ships), the military dat., as in i. 49. 
18, and often. —ddatpyoopev τι καὶ 
βραχύ: leave off even a little. —A4. 
παρὰ τὴν ἐκείνων πόλιν : 1.6. along by 
Syracuse, in sailing into the great 
harbour. — 5. ἐσκομιζόμενοι: sc. 
ἐπιτήδεια. Cf. vi. 22. 6. 

τὰ δὲ πληρώματα : see onc. 4. 27.— 
6. διὰ τόδε: set forth in the follow- 
ing up to the end of the chap., first 
in gen. abs. (τῶν μὲν... ἀπολλυμένων), 
then with finite verb (οἱ δὲ θεράποντες 

. αὐτομολοῦσι κτὲ.). For similar 
cases of anacoluthon, see ¢c. 15. ὃ 
2; 47. ὃ 2.--- ἐφθάρη, φθείρεται: the 
former referring to the cases that 
had already occurred (cf. c. 4. § 6), 
the latter to the continuance of the 
bad state of affairs. —7. τῶν ναυτῶν: 
the part. gen. placed first, including 
all the following parts, τῶν μέν, of δὲ 
θεράποντες, and of ξένοι. Fhis last is 
subdivided into οἱ μέν (10), of δέ (11), 
and of δέ is further divided into οἱ 
μέν (15), of δέ (15) and εἰσὶ δ᾽ of 
(16). The ναῦται include ἐπιβάται as 
well as ἐρέται. The most of the lat- 
ter consist of θεράποντες and ξένοι. 
Cf. i. 143. 8, τοὺς ξένους τῶν ναυτῶν, 
and vi. 31. 28, τοῖς θρανίταις τῶν vav- 
τῶν. Ace. to this view, τῶν before 
μέν in 7 is not to be omitted. — 8. pa- 


X 
τα 


bo 


22 


THUCYDIDES VII. 13. 


, ε Ν ’, > δὴ 5 5 ,ὕ , 
PEev@v: ol δὲ θεράποντες, εἐπειοὴ ES ἀντίπαλα καθεστή.- 


> A AR ΄ ε Ν 5 1-5 , 
10 Kaper, αὐτομολοῦσι, καὶ οἱ ξένοι οἱ μεν ἀναγκαστοι ἐσβαν- 


5 Ν Ν ‘ / > “~ ε \ e Ν 
TES εὐθὺς κατα τας πόλεις αποχώρουσιν, οι δὲ τυπτο 


μεγάλου μισθοῦ τὸ πρῶτον ἐπαρθέντες καὶ οἰόμενοι 
χρηματιεῖσθαι μᾶλλον ἢ μαχεῖσθαι, ἐπειδὴ παρὰ γνώμην 


’ \ \ > 5 Ν “A 4 5 » 
ναυτικόν τε δὴ καὶ τἄλλα ἀπὸ τῶν πολεμίων ἀνθεστῶτα 


ε ca ε ἈΝ 29 > , /, > , ε 
ορώωσιν, οι μεν ΕἾ αὑτομολίας προφάσει απέρχονται, οι 


δὲ ὡς ἕκαστοι δύνανται, πολλὴ δ᾽ ἡ Σικελία, εἰσὶ δ᾽ ot 


, > Ν 5 ,ὔ 5 ὃ ,ὔ ε Ν 5 
και, GAVTOL ELT OPEVOLEVOL, av ράποδα Ὕκκαρικα αντεμ.- 


κράν: adv. with ἀπολλυμένων (“at 
a distance from their camp”), and 
rightly placed in Vat. after ὑδρείαν, 
not after ἁρπαγήν. lt would seem, 
however, to have esp. reference to 
ὑδρείαν if we compare c. 4. 29, ὕδατι 
σπανίῳ χρώμενοι kal οὐκ ἐγγύθεν. The 
Schol. explains, ἁρπαγὴν μακράν : διὰ τὸ 
ἐπὶ πολλοῦ διαστήματος ἐφ᾽ ἁρπαγὴν 
ἐξιέναι; but no doubt wrongly. —9. 
ot θεράποντες : this term, which is used 
elsewhere (iv. 16. 9) only of the at- 
tendants of the Spartan hoplites, 
seems to refer here to the θῆτες, who 
were pressed for rowing, and bond- 
men. So Cl.; but prob. all, or most, 
were ἀνδράποδα. See Boeckh, Public 
Economy of the Athenians, p. 360 fi. 
—9. ἐπειδὴ ἐς ἀντίπαλα καθεστήκα- 
μεν: since we are reduced to an equal- 
ity (with the Syracusans), 1.6. since 
the prospect of a speedy victory has 
been lost. The same idea is ex- 
pressed in other words in 13, ἐπειδὴ 
παρὰ γνώμην... ἀνθεστῶτα ὁρῶσιν. --- 
10. ἀναγκαστοί: pred. with ἐσβάν- 
as in 6. 58. 17 with στρατεύ- 
οντες. (ἃ. 926; H. 619. --- 12. οἰόμενοι 
χρηματιεῖσθαι: cf vi. 31. 43. --- 14. 
ἀπὸ τῶν πολεμίων : on the part of the 
enemy.—15. ἐπ᾿ αὐτομολίας προφάσει: 
on any occasion for deserting (to the 


Tes. 


enemy), ἴ.6. whenever the deserters 
thought themselves unobserved by 
the Athenians, or found themselves 
unexpectedly in the neighbourhood of 
the Syracusan troops. πρόφασις, not 
of the pretended, but of the real occa- 
sion, as in i. 23. 23; 118. 3, and freq. 
See App. —16. ὡς ἕκαστοι δύνανται: 
ἴ.6. aS any opportunity offered of flee- 
ing, without exactly going over to 
the enemy.—-7oAAq δ᾽ ἡ Σικελία: 
epexegetical, just as v. 110. 1. πολλή 
is here used as in Plat. Phaed. 
78 a, πολλὴ ἣ Ἑλλάς; Theocr. 22. 156, 
πολλά τοι Σπάρτα, πολλὰ δ᾽. .. AAs. 
—17. αὐτοὶ ἐμπορευόμενοι: (so Vat., 
the remaining Mss. αὐτοῦ) while they 
devote themselves to merchandising, 
which, acc. to vi. 31. 42, many had 
made their object in the expedition. 
καί belongs to the whole clause ἀνδρά- 
moda... ἀφήρηνται. Kr. Spr. 69, 32, 
15.— ἀνδράποδα Ὕκκαρικά : inhabit- 
ants of the little town Hyccara, whom 
Nicias had sold as slaves (vi. 62. § 3). 
Of the crews, some that had gone out 
with money for the purpose of trad- 
ing utilized the opportunity to buy 
men of Hyccara; and, with the con- 
sent of the trierarchs, put them in 
the naval service in their own places. 
These occurrences happened, doubt- 


THUCYDIDES VII. 13, 14. 


ἐδ ε Ν A , Ν , Ν 93 Δ 
βιβάσαι ὑπὲρ σφῶν πείσαντες τοὺς τριηράρχους τὴν ἀκρί- 


14βειαν τοῦ ναυτικοῦ ἀφῇύρηνται. 


5 / 3 ε “ 
επισταμενοις ὃ υμιν 


γράφω ὅτι βραχεῖα ἀκμὴ πληρώματος καὶ ὀλίγοι τῶν 


ἴων “ “ \ 
ναυτῶν ot ἐξορμῶντές τε ναῦν καὶ ξυνέχοντες τὴν εἰρε- 


΄] 
σιαν. 


A , 5 , A “7s 
τούτων δὲ πάντων ἀπορώτατον τό τε μὴ οἷόν TE 


εἶναι ταῦτα ἐμοὶ κωλῦσαι τῷ στρατηγῷ (χαλεπαὶ γὰρ αἱ 


ὑμέτεραι φύσεις ἄρξαι) καὶ 


, Ν lal »» ἃ 
σόμεθα τας VaVS εχόμεέν, O 


less, in the autumn of 415 B.c., and 
the mention of them implies a com- 
plaint on the part of Nicias against 
the negligence of some of the trie- 
rarchs.— 18. τὴν ἀκρίβειαν τοῦ vav- 
τικοῦ : the strict discipline of the naval 
service, which was disturbed by the 
mixing in of strange elements. ἀκρί- 
βεια corresponds to ἀκριβές of vi. 55. 
ΠΟ ΤΟ Arr. Ana; i. 21. 9, ἀκριβε- 
στάτοις τοῖς πληρώμασι. 

14. The number of troops that can be 
depended on is small. I myself am 
not able to prevent the evils, and repair 
our losses. In Sicily we have only weak 
allies, and our supplies are threatened. 
However gloomy all this is, it is my duty 
to tell you the truth. 

1. ἐπισταμένοις: the partic. is the 
important word, ‘‘ you yourselves 
know best what I write to you.” Cf 
iii. 53. 14. — 2. βραχεῖα ἀκμή : under- 
stood by the Schol. of the short dura- 
tion of the good condition of a crew; 
and so Bl., Kr., and Arn. explain. 
Cf. viii. 46. 33. But acc. to Bauer, 
Cl., and St. the sense is: ‘‘ the really 
efficient part of a ship’s crew is always 
small.” — 3. ot éfoppavres . τὴν 
εἰρεσίαν : the two expressions (co-ord. 
by τε καί) bring together the two 
most important qualifications of an 
oarsman, which are in a certain degree 


ὅτι οὐδ᾽ ὁπόθεν ἐπιπληρω- 
τοῖς πολεμίοις πολλαχόθεν 


opp. to each other: not only to start 
a ship (properly) (ἐξορμᾶν), but to 
keep the rowing in order (ξυνέχειν). 
Cf. Poll. i. 123, τὰ δὲ ἔργα ἀνάγεσθαι, 
προσαναπειρᾶσθαι, ἐξορμᾶν τὴν ναῦν. St., 
however, understands the sense to be: 
who so impel a boat with oars as to 
keep time in rowing. 

4. τούτων δὲ πάντων: sc. ἀπόρων 
ὄντων, covering all back to ὁ. 12. ὃ 3, 
and repeated in the following ταῦτα. 
—b5. ἐμοί: on the dat. after οἷόν τε 
εἶναι instead of the subj. ace. with the 
inf., see Kiihn. 585, note 2.— χαλεπαὶ 
ἄρξαι: inf. act. where we use pas- 
sive. G.1529; H.952a; Kr. Spr. 55, 
3,7. See on vi. 42. 8, pdous &pxew.— 
ai ὑμέτεραι φύσεις: ingenia ves- 
tra. Cf. Ar. Pax, 607, τὰς φύσεις ὑμῶν 
... kal τὸν αὐτοδὰξ τρόπον. --- 6. ἐπιπλη- 
ρωσόμεθα: “fill up; ἐπι- ἃ8 in ἐπισκευά- 
ζειν, 6. 1.23 vi. 104. 20; ἐπιπέμπειν, vi. 
73. 10; ἐπιμανθάνειν, i. 138. 12. Cl. 
writes émimAnpwo ὦμεθα (deliberative 
subj.), for ἐπιπληρωσ όμεθα, ace. to 
analogy of ii. 52. 11; iv. 28.16; v. 
65. 21. But while Thuc. might of 
course have written the subjy. it is 
not abs. necessary. Besides, the 
Schol. explains, τὰ πληρώματα ἀναπλη- 
See on i. 91. 4. For the 
deliberative subjv., see Kr. Spr. 54, 
7,2; Kiihn. 394, note 3. For fut., see 


pau 0 Mev. 


bo 


24 


THUCYDIDES VII. 14, 15. 


ὑπάρχει, ἀλλ᾽ ἀνάγκη ad ὧν ἔχοντες ἤλθομεν τά τε 


ὄντα καὶ ἀπαναλισκόμενα γίγνεσθαι" αἱ γὰρ νῦν οὖσαι 


10 πόλεις ξύμμαχοι ἀδύνατοι, Νάξος καὶ Κατάνη. 


εἰ δὲ 


΄ ἃ » a ΄, ΄ Ν , 
προσγενήσεται εν €TL τοις πολεμίοις, ωστε τα τρέφοντα 


ε “ ΄ A Ἢ Ni ε a > - > Ν Ν ε a 
μας χώρια TNS TAALaAS, ορωντα εν @ we EO MEV και υμων 


Ἂς > 4 Ν 5 , - 
μὴ ἐπιβοηθούντων, πρὸς ἐκείνους χωρῆσαι, διαπεπολε- 


“ \ e nw , 
μήσεται αὐτοῖς ἀμαχεὶ ἐκπολιορκηθέντων ἡμῶν ὁ πό- 


15 λεμος. 


«ες ΄ 9; f=i% a Sek > cnx ν 5 aN 
Τούτων ἐγὼ 70lw μεν ἂν εἰχον υμιν ετερα ἐπιστελ- 


λειν, οὐ μέντοι χρησιμώτερά γε, εἰ δεῖ σαφῶς εἰδότας τὰ 


ἐνθάδε βουλεύσασθαι, καὶ ἅμα τὰς φύσεις ἐπιστάμενος 


ε Ὁ“ ’,’ A Ν 
ὑμῶν, βουλομένων μὲν τὰ 


ν 5 ’, > , 
ἥδιστα ακουειν, αιτιωμένων 


ἥν εν » ε συ 9 5 5 “ Ν ε ΄ἊὉ » “ 5. 
20 δὲ ὕστερον, ἣν τι ὑμιν ἀπ᾿ αὐτῶν μὴ ὁμοῖον ἐκβῇ, ἀσφα- 


λέστερον ἡγησάμην τὸ ἀληθὲς δηλῶσαι. 


9 


Kr. Spr. 89, 7,8.— 8. ἀφ᾽ av . . . γίγνε- 
σθαι : the sense is, “as we must supply 
the losses from the troops brought 
with us, so must what remains suffice 
for the service without compensation 
for the losses.” The reference is 
only to the crews τὰ πληρώματα (not 
to war supplies). The art. not re- 
peated with ἀπαναλισκόμενα, as in Cc. 
ἘΠ 9 is: IVE 25.10: 

11. ἕν ἔτι: only one thing more, ex- 
plained in the following ὥστε. 
χωρῆσαι. The aor. inf. makes vivid 
the threatening danger.—12. kal 
ὑμῶν μὴ ἐπιβοηθούντων : although in 
the gen. abs., to be taken with δρῶντα, 
as te καί shows: “when they see in 
what condition we are and (that this 
is so) while you do not come to our 
aid.” Kr. Spr. 56, 14, 2.—13. πρὸς 
ἐκείνους χωρῆσαι: go over to them, 
as in i. 18. 28; v. 22.11; 43. 6.— 
διαπεπολεμήσεται αὐτοῖς : the fut. pf. 
of Vat., stronger than διαπολεμήσεται 


Lal 5 ἃ A v »-“» a 
“ Καὶ νῦν as ἐφ᾽ ἃ μὲν ἤλθομεν τὸ πρῶτον Kal τῶν 


of the other Mss., “they will have 
ended the war.” Kr. Spr.53,9,3. Ace. 
to the like expression in 6. 25. 46, 6 
πόλεμος could be spared here, and Kr. 
and St. omit it. But it is the reading 
of all the Mss., and as opp. to ἀμαχεί 
is not without force: “an end would, 
without a battle, be put to the whole 
war.” See App. — 14. ἐκπολιορκηθέν- 
τῶν: cf. c. 11. § 4. 

17. τὰ ἐνθάδε: corresponding to ἐν 
6 ἔσμεν in c. 11. 3.—20. ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν: 
sc. τῶν ἡδίστων, ἃ ἀκούειν βούλεσθε, with 
which ὁμοῖον has the meaning corre- 
spondingly. Cf. ii. 54. 16.— 21. ἡγη- 
σάμην : aor., anticipating the time of 
reading. GMT. 50; H. 838; Kr. Spr. 
53, 10, 1. 

15. Therefore you must not reproach 
us, but either recall the army, or send out 
a new one, equally strong and supplied 
with all that is necessary. And send me 
a successor, since I am enfeebled by sick- 
ness. Whatever you determine to do, 


THUCYDIDES VII. ts. 


“ ἣν A A A 
στρατιωτῶν καὶ TOV ἡγεμόνων ὑμῖν μὴ μεμπτῶν γεγε- 


΄ 7 Ν ΄’ὔ 3», Ἰ 5 δΥ δὲ τ' λί 
νὴ μένων OUTW Τὴν γνωμὴν EXETE €7TELOT) € 2UKEALA TE 


ν / \ > ΄ 3, Ν 
απασα ξυνίσταται και εκ Πελοποννήσου adn στρατια 


5 προσδόκιμος, αὐτοὶ βουλεύσασθε ἤδη ὡς τῶν γ᾽ ἐνθάδε 


aC A an 
μηδὲ τοῖς παροῦσιν ἀνταρκούντων, ἀλλ᾽ ἢ τούτους μετα- 


, , Δ ΕΣ Ν Ἢ > , > , 
πέμπειν δέον ἢ ἄλλην στρατιὰν μὴ ἐλάσσω ἐπιπέμπειν 


\ Ἂς Ἂς , \ , \ > , > , 
και πεζὴν και VQAUTLKNV, και χρήματα μη ὀλίγα, εμοι TE 


4 ’ ε 5 ,ὕ ᾽ν, 5 Ν / A 
διάδοχόν τινα, WS ἀδύνατός ειμυ διὰ νοσον νεφρῖτιν πα- 


10 ραμένειν. ἀξιῶ δ᾽ ὑμῶν ξυγγνώμης τυγχάνειν - καὶ γὰρ 


es) <5 , Ne 5 ε ,ὔ 8 By 5 LA 
OT ἐρρώμην, πολλὰ ἐν εμονιαις υμας EV ETTOLNO A. 
μη NYE μ ἢ 


ψΨ 
Ο τι 


δὲ , Y Aa 3 52 Χ Ν Ἀπ 4 3 Ν , 
€ μέλλετε, ἅμα TH ἣρι εὐθὺς καὶ μὴ ἐς ἀναβολὰς πράσ- 


however, must be carried out as speedily 
as possible ; for in delay is the greatest 
danger. 


1. ὡς... γεγενημένων: be of this 


opinion, that with regard to the object of 


our expedition neither the soldiers nor 
the generals ought to be blamed by you. 
For genitive absolute with verb of 
knowing, see GMT. 918; Kiihn. 488, 
10 β. The neg. is μή because the 
leading verb is imv. Kiihn. 515, 3. 
ἐφ᾽ ἃ ἤλθομεν τὸ πρῶτον, i.e. to war 
with Syracuse alone. —3. οὕτω : em- 
phasizing the idea of the partic. 
clause. Kiihn. 486, note 5. Cf i. 22. 
8; 37.4; vi. 24. ὃ. --- Σικελία ἅπασα 
ξυνίσταται: as was predicted vi. 37. 
16, ξυστήσεται γάρ. ---ὅ. προσδόκιμος, 
αὐτοὶ βουλεύσασθε. .. ἀνταρκούντων : 
this reading of ν᾽ αἵ. 15 to be preferred 
to προσδόκιμος αὐτοῖς, βουλεύεσθε of 
the rest of the Mss. The main 
stress of the sent. is on αὐτοὶ βουλεύ- 
σασθε, and indeed only the aor. imy. 
is compatible with ἤδη: “do you 
yourselves make up your minds at 
once, understanding that the troops 
which we have here certainly are 
not a match for even our present 


enemies.” — τῶν ἐνθάδε, τοῖς παροῦσιν : 
are both neut., referring to the still 
remaining force of the Athenians and 
the already strongly developed power 
of the Syracusans. —6. ἀνταρκούν- 
των: Schol. ἀντέχειν δυναμένων. -- 
μεταπέμπειν : recall, as in c. 8. 7.—7. 
ἐπιπέμπειν : as in vi. 73.10. See on 
c. 14.6. The alliteration in μεταπέμ- 
mev and ἐπιπέμπειν Was observed by 
the old rhetoricians. —8. ἐμοί te: with 
Vat., instead of ἐμοὶ δέ, ace. to the 
usage of Thuc., since it is after στρα- 
τιά and χρήματα, the third demand. 
Cf. i. 33.6; 67.6; 69.3; 76.12.—9. 
διάδοχόν τινα: not any successor, but 
some one (another) as successor. — διὰ 
νόσον vedpitiv: also mentioned by 
Plut. Nie. ΤῈ 

10. ὑμῶν : dependent on ξυγγνώμης, 
but, as its position shows, not con- 
fined to the force of the possessive: 
“T expect to receive from you an 
indulgent judgment.” —11. εὖ ἐποί- 
σα: of political services, corre- 
sponding to εὐεργέτης in i. 136. 2; il. 
27. 9.—12. μέλλετε: sc. πράσσειν. --- 
μὴ és avaBoAds: = μηδὲν ἀναβαλλό- 
μενοι, without delay. Cf. c. 70. 49, μὴ 5° 


20 


THUCYDIDES VIL. 15, 16. 


σετε, ὡς TOV πολεμίων τὰ μὲν ἐν Σικελίᾳ δι᾿ ὀλίγου πο- 


ριουμένων, τὰ δ᾽ ἐκ Πελοποννήσου σχολαίτερον μέν, ὅμως 


1 δ᾽, ἣν μὴ προσέχητε τὴν γνώμην, τὰ μὲν λήσουσιν ὑμᾶς, 


16 


σι 


΄ Ν ’ Ἀ Ἀ ,ὕ 5» 
ὥσπερ καὶ πρότερον, τὰ δὲ φθήσονται. 


ε A -“ > »“" . 
Η μὲν tov Νικίου ἐπιστολὴ τοσαῦτα ἐδήλου, ot δὲ 


> “ Ε] ΄ 2 A Ν \ = ΄ 5 ΄ 
Αθηναῖοι ἀκούσαντες αὐτῆς τὸν μὲν Νικίαν οὐ παρέλυ- 


΄“ 9 A 3 > > ~ 9 » 9 , 
σαν τῆς ἀρχῆς, ἀλλ᾽ αὐτῷ, ἕως ἂν ἕτεροι ξυνάρχοντες 


ε ΄ 5 , ~ 5 »“. 5 “Ὁ 4 , 
αἱρεθέντες ἀφίκωνται, των QAUTOU εκει δύο προσείλοντο, 


Μένανδρον καὶ Εὐθύδημον, ὅπως μὴ μόνος ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ 


ταλαιπωροίη στρατιὰν δὲ ἄλλην ἐπεψηφίσαντο πέμπειν 


᾿ξ Ν \ 3 ’ 9 ’ Ἀ aA 
ναυτικὴν καὶ πεζὴν ᾿Αθηναίων τε ἐκ καταλόγου καὶ τῶν 


ἀνάγκην ; Hdt. viii. 21.11, οὐκέτι ἐς ἄνα- 
βολὰς ἐποιοῦντο τὴν ἀναχώρησιν. For 
other similar consts., see on v. 8. 12. 
—13. ὡς... φθήσονται : Cl. explains: 
ὡς as causal conj. introduces the rest 
of the sent.; the partic. clauses end 
with ὅμως δέ (sc. ποριουμένων With ὅμως 
δέ as well as with τὰ δ᾽ ἐκ Πελοποννή- 
cov) and the main sent. 15 ἢν uy... 
φθήσονται. But more probably ὡς 
belongs .to the gen. abs. ἃ. 1574; 
H. 978. With τὰ δ᾽ ἐκ Πελοποννή- 
σου σχολαίτερον μέν SC. ποριουμένων, but 
after ὅμως δέ there isa change of const. 
to finite verb, as ine. 13. 9. With 
. φθήσονται We Must sup- 
ply πορισάμενοι. Kr. Spr. 56, 16 A. 
—16. ὥσπερ καὶ πρότερον : contains 
a reproach against the Athenians for 


λήσουσιν.. 


not hindering the Peloponnesians 
from sending ships before (vi. 93. 
§ 2, 3). 


16. In consequence of this letter, the 
Athenians appoint from those in the army 
two men to share the command tempora- 
rily with Nicias, and determine to send 
him strong reinforcements of ships and 
troops, as well as of money. Demosthenes 
and Eurymedon are chosen generals, and 


the latter sets sail for Sicily in the begin- 
ning of the winter. 

2. ov παρέλυσαν τῆς ἀρχῆς : did not 
release from his office. The verb oc- 
curs also in viii. 54. 9.—4. αὐτοῦ 
éxet: emphatic designation ‘of place, 
on the very spot. Observe the use of 
the corresponding prons. αὐτὸς ἐκεῖνος 
ἴη 6.1.8. Cf Soph. O. C. 78, τῶν ἐνθάδ᾽ 
αὐτοῦ; Hdt.i. 189. 20, αὐτοῦ ταύτῃ; V. 19. 
, αὐτοῦ τῇδε. The Schol. is therefore 
wrong in explaining, τῶν στρατιωτῶν 
αὐτοῦ, ἤγουν τοῦ Νικίου. τῶν αὐτοῦ 
ἐκεῖ means out of the number of men 
of prominence present with the army 
before Syracuse. Of the two, only 
Euthydemus has been mentioned be- 
fore (v το. 9; 24. 6).—5. ὅπως... 
ταλαιπωροίη : that he might not have to 
bear the burden alone in his sickness, the 
νόσος νεφρῖτις Of c. 15.9.— 6. ἐπεψη- 
dicavro: Vat., instead of ἐψηφίσαντο. 
ἐπι- has the same force as in ἐπιπλη- 
ρωσόμεθα. c, 14.6. The compound is 
found certainly in Aeschin. τι. 68; 
elsewhere the Mss. are uncertain (e.g. 
Xen. Anab. vii. 6. 14).—7. ἐκ κατα- 
λόγου: 7.c. from the military list of 
the three highest classes of citizens. 


* B.c. 414, Dec. 


ξυμμάχων. 


τε τὸν ᾿ΑΔλκισθένους καὶ Εὐρυμέδοντα τὸν 

καὶ τὸν μὲν Εὐρυμέδοντα εὐθὺς * περὶ ἡλίου 
Ν 

χειμερινὰς ἀποπέμπουσιν ἐς τὴν Σικελίαν 


A » » 
νεων, ἄγοντα ELKOTL τάλαντα ἀργυρίου, καὶ 


THUCYDIDES VII. 16, 17. 


\ , 3. es ν , 
και ξυνάρχοντας αυτῳ είλοντο Δημοσθένην 


Θουκλέους. 


\ 
μετα δέκα 


ἅμα ἀγγε- 


an A 5 A ν ν ,ἅ Ν > , > a 
λοῦντα τοῖς ἐκεῖ OTL ἥξει βοήθεια καὶ ἐπιμέλεια αὑτῶν 


Ψ 
εσται. 


ε δὲ θέ, ε ye , Ν 
ὁ ὃὲ Δημοσθένης ὑπομένων παρεσκευάζετο τὸν 


" εν a ἊΝ 
ἔκπλουν ὡς ἅμα τῷ ἦρι ποιησόμενος, στρατιάν τε ἐπαγ- 


γέλλων ἐς τοὺς ξυμμάχους καὶ χρήματα αὐτόθεν καὶ ναῦς 


ἊΣ He ta ε ( 
καὶ ὁπλίτας ἑτοιμάζων. 


πέμπουσι δὲ καὶ περὶ τὴν Πελο- 


Y cin? a Ψ an 9 , 
TOVVHTOV οἱ Αθηναῖοι εἰκοσι VAUS, OTWS φυλάσσοιεν 


See on vi. 43. 9.—8. Δημοσθένην : 
last in active service, iv. 66-69. — 
Εὐρυμέδοντα: after the unsuccessful 
expedition in Sicily in the year 424 
B.c., he had been punished with a 
fine (iv. 65. 12). 

10. τὰς χειμερινάς : Diod. (xiii. 8) 
wrongly says τὰς θερινὰς τροπάς. Cf: 
Plut. Wie. 20, διὰ χειμῶνος. --- 12, εἴ- 
κοσι τάλαντα: that this sum did not 
in the remotest degree suffice for the 
necessities of Nicias is clear; for 20 
talents were only a month’s pay for 20 
ships. Valla gives centum vigin- 
ti; Diod. xiii. 8, ἑκατὸν τεσσαράκοντα. 
Hence Boeckh (P. EF. p. 395) con- 
jectures that Eurymedon first carried 
over 20 talents, Demosthenes later 
(ec. 20. § 2) 120 talents. This view 
might seem to be favoured by the 
promise om... 
But it is hardly possible that Thuc. 
should have mentioned the smaller 
sum and said nothing of the larger. 
The best solution of the difficulty 
seems to be, with Kr. and St., to follow 
Valla and one Ms. (h; Cl. says no Ms. 
has ἑκατόν) and read εἴκοσι καὶ ἑκατόν. 

17. During the winter the Athenians 


> / 5. - v 
ἐπιμέλεια αὐτῶν EOTAL. 


on the one side and the Peloponnesians 
on the other carry on with equal zeal 
their preparations for the Sicilian War. 

1. ὑπομένων : remaining behind. Cf. 
111. 35.05: ἵν. QO, θυ ν. Ide 18... wiengos 
15.— παρεσκευαΐετο : takes ἃ combina- 
tion of two common consts., the simple 
noun-obj. (τὸν ἔκπλουν, as in ii. 56. 5; 
y. 10. 1) and the fut. partic. with ὡς 
(ο: 4: 15, 1ἴ- δὰ 20 τν- 8: 10) 
ἔκπλουν is to be supplied with ποιη- 
σόμενος. — 2. ἐπαγγέλλων: impe- 
rans, as in iii. 16. 16; viii. 108. 21. 
Of. c. 18. 27, σίδηρον περιήγγελλον κατὰ 


‘ 
TOV 


τοὺς ξυμμάχους ; also ii. 85.11. ἐπαγγέλ- 
λων includes the force also of πέμψας, 
exactly opp. to ἀπαγγέλλων. --- ὃ. αὐτό- 
θεν : sc. ἐξ ᾿Αθηνῶν. The Schol. wrongly 
explains, ἀπὸ τῶν ξυμμάχων. 

4. πέμπουσι περὶ τὴν Πελοπόννη- 
σον: having learned a lesson from 
their former negligence (see on ¢. 15. 
16), they send these ships on the 
usual περίπλους (cf. i. 107. 15; il. 23. 
δ; 69. 2).—5. φυλάσσοιεν μηδένα 

.. περαιοῦσθαι: cf. ii. 69. 5, φυλακὴν 
εἶχε μήτ᾽ ἐκπλεῖν. The const. of μή 
with inf. is the same as with κωλύειν. 
See on ec. 6. 19. 


\ ᾿ 
τροτπας τας : 


27 


bo 


28 


10 


15 


THUCYDIDES VII: 17. 


μηδένα ἀπὸ Κορίνθου καὶ τῆς Πελοποννήσου ἐς τὴν. Σι- 
, "» ε Ν / ε > A ε 
κελίαν περαιοῦσθαι. οἱ γὰρ Κορίνθιοι. ὡς αὐτοῖς οἱ 
πρέσβεις ἧκον καὶ τὰ ἐν τῇ Σικελίᾳ βελτίω ἤγγελλον, 
ΕἾ a 
νομίσαντες οὐκ ἄκαιρον Kal τὴν προτέραν πέμψιν τῶν 
lal , “A A 3 , ἣν 5» ε 
νεῶν ποιήσασθαι, πολλῷ μᾶλλον ἐπέρρωντο, καὶ ἐν ὃλ- 
κάσι παρεσκευάζοντο αὐτοί τε ἀποστελοῦντες ὁπλίτας ἐς 
τὴν Σικελίαν καὶ ἐκ τῆς ἄλλης Πελοποννήσου οἱ Λακε- 
δαιμόνιοι τῷ αὐτῷ τρόπῳ πέμψοντες. ναῦς τε οἱ Κορίν- 
κ᾿ » 
θιοι πέντε καὶ εἴκοσιν ἐπλήρουν, ὅπως ναυμαχίας τε 
5 ’, Ἂς Ν 3 Lal , , Ν 
ἀποπειράσωσι πρὸς τὴν ἐν τῇ Ναυπάκτῳ φυλακήν, καὶ 
Ν ε , ϑι tA a eee) A , > A 
Tas ὁλκάδας αὐτῶν ἧσσον οἱ ἐν TH Ναυπάκτῳ ᾿Αθηναῖοι 
ἈῊΡ lal 
κωλύοιεν ἀπαίρειν, πρὸς THY σφετέρα: ἀντίταξιν τῶν 


τριήρων τὴν φυλακὴν ποιούμενοι. ς 


7. αὐτοῖς οἱ πρέσβεις ἧκον: ἧκον 
with the dat. as ἦλθον in c. 73. 5. See 
One. 1 19. 
App.— 8. βελτίω : sc. εἶναι. Cf Eur. 
Hec. 423, ἄγγελλε πασῶν ἀθλιωτάτην 
ἐμέ. --- 9. οὐκ ἄκαιρον... ποιήσασθαι: 
= οὐκ ἀκαίρως πρότερον τὰς ναῦς πέμψαι. 
The const.of νομίσαντες ... ποιήσασθαι 15 
the same as that of ἡγησάμενοι ἱερῶσθαι 
in ν. 1. 9. πέμψις is unusual; found in 
Thue. only here, in Hdt. viii. 54. ὃ. 
The reference is to the sending out of 
Gylippus, vi. 93. 8.—10. ἐν ὁλκάσι 

. πέμψοντες : the use of common 
merchant vessels for the transport of 
troops is marked as unusual by the 
position of the word. ὁλκάσι coming 
first, the contrasted vais (i.e. τριήρεις, 
in 15) has the same position. The 
use of the same method of transporta- 
tion by the Lacedaemonians (τῷ αὐτῷ 
τρόπῳ) is also emphasized, and cer- 
tainly more effectually by the new par- 
tie. πέμψουτε: (after ἀποστελοῦντες), to 
which v. H. objects without sufficient 
grounds. ὁπλίτας is obj. of both partics. 

14. ὕπως. .. ἀποπειράσωσι ... . kal 


On the reading, see. 


KwAvouev: the same change of mood 
as in iii, 22. 39; vi. 96. 18,19. GMT. 
320 ν.; 3821; Kiihn. 553,6. The first 
verb (aor.) refers to the act contem- 
plated, the second (pres.) to its endur- 
ing result. — 15. πρὸς τὴν ἐν τῇ Nav- 
πάκτῳ φυλακήν: against the Athe- 
nian squadron, generally 20 triremes, 
stationed on guard here during the 
whole war. Cf. ii. 69. 1; 80. 21.— 
16. τὰς ὁλκάδας αὐτῶν : the merchant 
vessels which were to transport their 
troops. αὐτῶν instead of σφῶν, al- 
though σφετέραν follows. Cf. i. 95. 8. 
—17. πρὸς τὴν σφετέραν ἀντίταξιν 
τῶν τριήρων : ἀντίταξιν is used in ἃ 
proleptic sense, ἢ.6. against their tri- 
remes whenever they (the Corinthi- 
ans) should have arrayed themselves 
with these against them. The con- 
nexion is made clearer by the fact 
that the possessive pron. (σφετέραν, 
referring to the Corinthians) is placed 
with the verbal noun and not with 
τριήρων, to which it really belongs. 
Kr. Spr. 51, 4, 7.— 18. ποιούμενοι : 
modifies ᾿Αθηναῖοι. 


18 


10 


THUCYDIDES VII. 18. 


Παρεσκευάζοντο δὲ καὶ τὴν ἐς τὴν ᾿Αττικὴν ἐσβο- 
e 9 A 
λὴν ot Λακεδαιμόνιοι, ὥσπερ τε προεδέδοκτο αὐτοῖς καὶ 
“ , Ν r ’ 5» / 5 Ν 5 
τῶν Συρακοσίων καὶ Κορινθίων ἐναγόντων, ἐπειδὴ ἐπυν- 
θάνοντο τὴν ἀπὸ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων βοήθειαν ἐς τὴν Σικε- 
, 9 ἣν 5 A , A 
λίαν, ows δὴ ἐσβολῆς γενομένης διακωλυθῇ. καὶ ὃ 
7. ’, 
᾿Αλκιβιάδης προσκείμενος ἐδίδασκε τὴν Δεκέλειαν τειχί- 
᾿ Ἂς SN 5 a Ν x Ἃ Ν “Ὁ 
ζειν καὶ μὴ ἀνεῖναι τὸν πόλεμον. μάλιστα δὲ τοῖς Λακε- 
ὃ ᾿ > fA 4, (wd /, Ν > ͵ 
αιμονίοις ἐγεγένητό τις ῥώμη, διότι τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους 
5 ’, “A ἊΝ / 3, , “ 
ἐνόμιζον διπλοῦν τὸν πόλεμον ἔχοντας, πρός τε σφᾶς 
\ ’ > , »Ἅ \ 9 Ν 
καὶ Σικελιώτας, εὐκαθαιρετωτέρους ἔσεσθαι, καὶ ὅτι τὰς 
σπονδὰς προτέρους λελυκέναι ἡγοῦντο αὐτούς: ἐν γὰρ 
“ , lal 
τῷ προτέρῳ πολέμῳ σφέτερον TO παρανόμημα μᾶλλον 
γενέσθαι, ὅτι τε ἐς Πλάταιαν ἦλθον Θηβαῖοι ἐν σπον- 


18. The Lacedaemonians make prep- 
arations to invade Attica the next spring, 
and, on the advice of Alcibiades, to estab- 
lish themselves in Decelea. And they 
enter upon this undertaking with so much 
the greater confidence because they con- 
sider that the Athenians had broken the 
treaty of peace by the inroad on the coast 
of Laconia the year before (vi. 105). 

1. παρεσκευάζοντο: continues per 
epanaphoram the account of ec. 
17. 11.—2. ὥσπερ mpocdéSoxTo ... 
ἐναγόντων : cf. vi. 93. ὃ 1,2. αὐτοῖς, as 
opp. to Συρατοσίων καὶ Κορινθίων, = 
ipsis. The two clauses also are 
placed in opposition by te kal. We 
should expect καὶ ἐνῆγον instead of 
the gen. abs. For change of const., 
see Kr. Spr. 59, 2, 4. -- 8. ἐπειδὴ ἐπυν- 
θάνοντο : closely connected with ἐνα- 
γόντων : ‘as soon as they (the Corin- 
thians and Syracusans) received in- 
formation of the new preparations of 
the Athenians to send aid into Sicily.” 
—4. τὴν ἀπὸ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων βοήθειαν : 
ΒΗ ΠΟ 7,2. 2. 11. 02. 2], Cf also ii. 
86. 22, πρίν τι amd τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἐπι- 


βοηθῆσαι. Bk. wishes in all these 
places ᾿Αθηνῶν, but ἀπό seems more 
appropriate with the name of the 
people. — 5. δή: in explanatory sub- 
ord. clause, as in i. 24. 5; iv. 23. 6; 
Vi. 92. 19.— διακωλυθῇ : the subj. is 
ἢ βοήθεια. — 6. προσκείμενος : in- 
stans. Cf. viii. 52. 15.— ἐδίδασκε: 
const. like κελεύειν, as also in i. 136. 
9; iv. 46.18; 83. 11.—7. μὴ ἀνεῖναι : 
the aor. (Vat.) makes the admonition 
just at this moment more urgent than 
the vulgate μὴ ἀνιέναι. 

8. τις ῥώμη : a sort of self-confidence. 
Cf. c. 42.14. Neither the noun nor 
the corresponding verb ever signi- 
fies, Cl. holds, organic strength alone; 
they always refer esp. to the dispo- 
sition of the mind. See App. on vi. 
31. 3.—10. εὐκαθαιρετωτέρους : found 
only here in Thuc.; from καθαιρεῖν 
(pull down, iii. 13. 82; v. 14. 14; vi. 
83. 6) and corresponding to the ver- 
bal adj. καθαιρετέα (i. 118. 16).— 13. 
ὅτι te: occurs also in vi. 83.1. τε 
(only in Vat.) and καί emphasize prop. 
the two different charges (cf: ii. 2 ff.), 


29 


1 


30 THUCYDIDES VII.. 18. 


nw , 5 , 5 “ / - 9 A 
dais Kat, εἰρημένον ἐν ταῖς πρότερον ξυνθήκαις ὅπλα μὴ 
5 4 x ’ὔ » / 5 Ν 5 ε 4 
15 ἐπιφέρειν, ἫΝ δίκας θέλωσι διδόναι, QUTOL οὐχ υπηκουον 
3 ΄ ΄ A 5.} , \ \ A 
ἐς δίκας προκαλουμένων τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων. καὶ διὰ τοῦτο 
lal \ nn 
εἰκότως δυστυχεῖν τε ἐνόμιζον καὶ ἐνεθυμοῦμτο τήν τε 
» ᾿ κ 
περὶ Πύλον ξυμφορὰν καὶ εἴ τις ἄλλη αὐτοῖς γένοιτο. 
5 ΟΥ̓ Ν ce. ”~ nw , \ 5 »” 
ἐπειδὴ δὲ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ταῖς τριάκοντα ναυσὶν ἐξ Ἄργους 
20 ὁρμώμενοι ᾿Επιδαύρου τέ τι καὶ ἸἹΤ]ρασιῶν καὶ ἄλλα ἐδήω- 
A 5 4 ν 5 , εἶ ε 4 - 
σαν καὶ ἐκ IIvAov ἅμα ἐλήστευον, καὶ ὁσάκις περί του 
Ν , Lal Ν Ἂς Ἂν 5 
διαφοραὶ γένοιντο τῶν κατὰ Tas σπονδὰς ἀμφισβητου- 
μένων, ἐς δίκας προκαλουμένων τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων οὐκ 
ἤθελον ἐπιτρέπειν, τότε δὴ οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι νομίσαντες 
25 τὸ παρανόμημα, ὅπερ καὶ σφίσι πρότερον ἡμάρτητο, αὖ- 
θις ἐς τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους τὸ αὐτὸ περιεστάναι, πρόθυμοι 


the wrongful entry of the Thebans 
into Plataea, and the refusal of an 
adjustment by law on the part of the 
Lacedaemonians. — 14. εἰρημένον : 
acc. abs., as in c. 77. 32; i. 140. 10; 
ν 30-2105 29. 12. | GMT" 851: 
973; Kr. Spr. 56, 9, ὅ. --ἐν ταῖς πρό- 
τερον ξυνθήκαις : referring to the τρια- 
κοντούτεις σπονδαί of i. 115.2. The 
ady. πρότερον merely indicates the 
time of the ξυνθῆκαι; the adj. would 
contrast these ξυνθῆκαι with others. 
Kreaspr.2b0, 8, 6. Ὁ 1: 235 Ween 87: 
32.—15. αὐτοί: sec. of Λακεδαιμόνιοι. 
—16. és δίκας... τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων: cf. 
i. 78.§ 4; 145.—17. εἰκότως : deserv- 
edly.— ἐνεθυμοῦντο: here and in y. 
32. 5 = ἐνθύμιον ἐποιοῦντο (6. 50. 29), 
“they considered the misfortune as a 
result of their guilt.” —18. εἴ τις... 
γένοιτο: of the freq. misfortunes, 
“any other that had happened to 
them.’’ General cond. GMT. 462; H. 
894, 2. St.’s reading ἐγένετο (with one 
Ms.) is simpler. 

19. ταῖς τριάκοντα ναυσίν: the ex- 


pedition of Pythodorus and others 
(vi. 105), concerning which Thuc. 
observed (/.c.), τὰς σπονδὰς φανερώτατα 

. ἔλυσαν. ----ἐξ ἤΆΑργους : added only 
in Vat., but indispensable with dpud- 
μενοι. In vi. 105. 15, although it is 
not expressly stated, it is clearly im- 
plied in the context. —21. ἐλήστευον : 
so Vat., for the mid. ἐλῃστεύοντο of 
the rest of the Mss., which Thue. never 
uses.— 22. κατὰ τὰς σπονδάς : in the 
treaty of peace of B.c.424. Cf. v. 18 ff. 
—— 24. ἐπιτρέπειν : to submit to arbi- 
tration. Cf. i. 28.9; iv. 83. 103 Vv. τ΄ 
14.— 25. ἡμάρτητο: pass., as in ii. 
65. 45.— 26. τὸ αὐτό: Cl. takes it as 
pred., and refers to c. 21. 17; ii. 40.12; 
iii. 21.10; but none of these is exactly 
parallel. It seems rather to be an 
emphatic repetition of τὸ παρανόμημα. 
Kr. 51, 5, 1.— περιεστάναι : 
change round, shift. Generally it means 
to pass over into another form and 
manner, as in i. 32. 15; 120. 27; vi. 
24. 6, πολὺ δὲ μᾶλλον ὥρμηντο καὶ Tov- 
ναντίον περιέστη αὐτῷ. 


Spr. 


* Ol. 91, 8; B.c. 413, March. THUCYDIDES VII. 18, το. 3 


> 5» Ν , Ν 5 a“ ~ 4 4 / 
ἦσαν ἐς TOV πόλεμον. καὶ EV τῷ χειμῶνι τούτῳ σίδηρόν 4 
τε περιήγγελλον κατὰ τοὺς ξυμμάχους καὶ τἄλλα ἐργα- 
2 A A 
λεῖα ἡτοίμαζον ἐς τὸν ἐπιτειχισμόν. καὶ τοῖς ἐν τῇ Σικε- 
, y ε > 7, 3 = ε ΄, > , 
30 λίᾳ αμα Ws ἀποπέμψοντες ἐν ταις ὁλκάσιν επικουριαν 
> (A / Ν \ x la 
αὐτοί TE ἐπόριζον καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους Πελοποννησίους προσ- 
’ Ν ε Ν 5 ἊΨ \ y+ \ “3 
nvayKkalov. καὶ ὃ χειμὼν ἐτελεύτα, καὶ ὄγδοον Kal δέ- 
κατον ἔτος τῷ πολέμῳ ἐτελεύτα τῷδε ὃν Θουκυδίδης ξυν- 
ἔγραψεν. 
*& nw ve &) ld 5 5 Ν > , 7, 
19 Τοῦ δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου ἦρος εὐθὺς ἀρχομένου πρῴ- 1 
δὴ ε ὃ ΄ Ν ε , 3 Ν 3 
tata δὴ οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι καὶ ot ξύμμαχοι ἐς τὴν ᾽Ατ- 
ΧΝ 5 “ > 
τικὴν ἐσέβαλον" ἡγεῖτο δὲ *Ayis ὁ ᾿Αρχιδάμου, Λακεδαι- 
μονίων βασιλεύς. καὶ πρῶτον μὲν τῆς χώρας τὰ περὶ 
‘\ ee 5 ’ » , 3 Ἅ Ν / 
5 τὸ πεδίον ἐδήωσαν, ἔπειτα Δεκέλειαν ἐτείχιζον, κατὰ πό- 


λεις διελόμενοι τὸ ἔργον. 


27. σίδηρον: as in iv. 69. 6; 
vi. 88. 388, iron tools, such as were 
necessary in wall-building and in 
sieges. The term is σιδήρια in iv. 4. 
5.— 28. περιήγγελλον: here and ii. 
85. 11 with the acc., as ἐπαγγέλλειν in 
ὁ. 17. 2; elsewhere with the inf. (i. 
MEOW oy 1 TOs 23/180, 13; iv. 8.5; v. 
54. 8; vi. 88. 35).— 31. ἐπόριζον : they 
were procuring, sc. τὴν ἐπικουρίαν, Which 
is also to be supplied with ἀποπέμψον- 
Tes. — Mpoonvaykatoy: sc. πορίζειν, the 
same brachylogy as with δρᾶν, i. 78. 
10; ii. 86. 14. pos- has the same 
strengthening force as in iii. 61. 14; 
iv. 87.8; v.42. 19; viii. 76. 82. See 
on προσβιασθέν, i. τοῦ. 2. 

19. At the beginning of spring, Attica 
is invaded and Decelea occupied and for- 
tified. At the same time, the Lacedae- 
monians, Boeotians, Corinthians, and 
Sicyonians send fresh troops to the 
Syracusans. The transports which con- 
vey these depart unmolested on their 
voyage, being protected by the 25 triremes 


ἀπέχει δὲ ἡ Δεκέλεια σταδίους 


of the Corinthians, which hold in check 
the Attic ships at Naupactus. 

1. τοῦ ἐπιγιγνομένου ἦρος εὐθὺς 
ἀρχομένου πρῴτατα : see App.—2. ἐς 
τὴν ᾿Αττικὴν ἐσέβαλον : on the signi- 
ficance of this invasion in determin- 
ing the periods of the Peloponnesian 
War, see App. to v. 25.10. — 4. τὰ περὶ 
τὸ πεδίον : περί of a geographical des- 
ignation without defined limits. See 
oni. 5.17. The level country is 
meant which stretches from the west- 
ern border of Attica up toward the 
Parnes mountain range, called also 
πεδιάς and μεσόγαια. * See Bursian, 
Geogr. von Griechenland, I. p. 268. 
Where the road to Boeotia cuts 
through the eastern Parnes, almost 
due north from Athens, at the highest 
point of the pass (now called Κληδί) 
on the site of the present village of Ta- 
toi, lies Decelea, where the Lacedaemo- 
nians built the Epiteichismos. See 
Bursian, I. p. 335.— 5. κατὰ πόλεις 
διελόμενοι τὸ ἔργον: as in ii. 78. 4, 


10 


15 


THUCYDIDES VII. 19. 


, A A 5 ΄ , » Ἀ ε ’ 
μάλιστα τῆς τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων πόλεως εἴκοσι καὶ ἑκατόν, 
,ὔ A A 5 “ , A 5» A nw 
παραπλήσιον δὲ καὶ οὐ πολλῷ πλέον καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς Βοιω- 

/ τ Ὁ Ν ““ ’, Ν A , an , 
τίας. ἐπὶ δὲ τῷ πεδίῳ καὶ τῆς χώρας τοῖς κρατίστοις 
A 5 5 

ἐς τὸ κακουργεῖν ὠκοδομεῖτο τὸ τεῖχος, ἐπιφανὲς μέχρι 
A ~ 5 , , Ν ε Ν 9 - Ὁ» “A 
τῆς τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων πόλεως. Kal οἱ μὲν ἐν TH ᾿Αττικῇ 
Πελοποννήσιοι καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι ἐτείχιζον, οἱ δ᾽ ἐν τῇ 
no μμαχ Χ ᾿ i] 
,ὕ bs] , Ν Ν 5 A , Ὁ“ 
Πελοποννήσῳ ἀπέστελλον περὶ τὸν αὑτὸν χρόνον ταῖς 
ε , Ἂς ε - 5 A ys Xe 8 ’ A 
ὁλκάσι τοὺς ὁπλίτας ἐς τὴν Σικελίαν, Λακεδαιμόνιοι μὲν 
wn ε , 5 , A , ἣν nw 
τῶν τε Εἱλώτων ἐπιλεξάμενοι τοὺς βελτίστους καὶ τῶν 
,ὔὕ , 5 ε ’ὕ ε , A 
νεοδαμώδων, ξυναμφοτέρων ἐς ἑξακοσίους ὁπλίτας καὶ 

» τ , ¥ \ δὲ , 
Εκκριτον Σπαρτιάτην ἄρχοντα, Βοιωτοι ὃε τριακοσίους 

na > ε 

ὁπλίτας, ὧν ἦρχον Ξένων τε καὶ Νίκων Θηβαῖοι καὶ Ἣγή- 


a A > 9 ἴω “ 
σανδρος Θεσπιεύς. οὗτοι μὲν οὖν ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι ὁρμή- 


διελόμενοι κατὰ πόλεις τὸ χωριόν. CF ii. 
75. 11; iv. 69. 10; v. 75. 22; 114. 3. 
8. παραπλήσιον : often joined with 
more or less similar expressions, as 
140. 5; ἴσον 
kal παραπλήσιον, Cc. 42. 10; τοιαῦτα καὶ 
παραπλήσια, Cc. 78.4; i. 22. 18; παρα- 
πλήσιαι καὶ ἔτι πλείους, 111. 17.3. Hence 
the addition καὶ οὐ πολλῷ πλέον ts not 
objectionable here. The geographi- 
cal designation, however, causes some 
difficulty, for the nearest border of Boe- 
otia is by no means 120 stadia distant. 
The measurement was prob. taken on 
the road most used by the Athenians, 
that to Oropus, which was then in 
their possession. — 9. ἐπὶ τῷ πεδίῳ 
. ὠκοδομεῖτο TO τεῖχος : ἐπί with the 
dat. in the hostile sense of ἐπιτειχί- 
Cew, 6. 47. 15, and ἐπιτειχισμός, c. 18. 
29; 28.15, and of τῇ χώρᾳ ἐπῳκεῖτο, 
c. 27. 11. ἐς τὸ κακουργεῖν is added to 
explain the object still more clearly. 
Cf. vi. 12. 11, és τὸ ἄρχειν. St.and Kr. 
strike out ἐς τὸ κακουργεῖν. ---- τῆς χώρας 
τοῖς κρατίστοις : the most fruitful 


ὁμοῖα καὶ παραπλήσια, 1. 


parts of the Mesogaia, between Thria, 
Acharnae, Cephissia, and Oenoé, 
which on this very account were liable 
és τὸ κακουργεῖν. ---- 10. ἐπιφανές : visi- 
ble. See on υἱ. οὔ. 10. Cf. Xen.Hell.i.1. 
35, “Ayis δὲ ἐκ τῆς Δεκελείας ἰδὼν πλοῖα 
πολλὰ σίτου εἰς Πειραιᾶ καταθέοντα. 

13. ἀπέστελλον: were dispatching. 
Of. ες. 20. 7; ii. 85. 10. — ταῖς ὁλκάσι: 
without the ἐν of c. 7. 12; 17.10; 18. 
30; 50.6. The dat. indicates here, as 
in 29 below, the unusual means of 
transportation. —14. τοὺς ὁπλίτας: 
those mentioned in c. 17.4. — 15. τῶν 
Εἱλώτων... τοὺς βελτίστους : this use 
of Helots for foreign wars seems 
to have become customary after it 
had been introduced by Brasidas (iv. 
80. ὃ 2). — 16. νεοδαμώδων : the class 
of new citizens formed of Helots 
emancipated for service in war. Cf. 
c. 58. 12; viii. 5. 7. They are first 
mentioned in y. 34. 6. See Schoe- 
mann, Griech. Alterthiimer, I. p. 205 ff. 
The accent is ace. to Herod. I. 428, 13. 

19. ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι: so Bk. and the 


THUCYDIDES VIL. 


19, 20. 


> Ν A , “ “A > Ν 
20 σαντες ἀπὸ Tov Ταινάρου τῆς Λακωνικῆς ἐς τὸ πέλαγος 


ἀφῆκαν: μετὰ δὲ τούτους Κορῶθιοι οὐ πολλῷ ὕστερον 


if. ε »“ XA ἈΝ 5 5 5 -“ ν᾿ 4 
πεντακοσίους ὁπλίτας, TOUS μὲν ἀπ αὑτὴης Κορίνθου, 


- τοὺς δὲ προσμισθωσάμενοι ᾿Αρκάδων, καὶ ἄρχοντα ᾽Αλέ. 


Eapyov Κορίνθιον προστάξαντες ἀπέπεμψαν. 


] , 
ἀπέστειλαν 


\ δ τ Ξ ες 
25 δὲ καὶ Σικυώνιοι διακοσίους ὁπλίτας ὁμοῦ τοῖς Κορν- 


θίοις, ὧν ἦρχε Σαργεὺς 


Σικυώνιος. 


κοσι νῆες τῶν Κορινθίων αἱ τοῦ χειμῶνος πληρωθεῖσαι 


3 , A 3 A , " > A Y 
ἀνθώρμουν TALS εν ΤΊ) Ναυπάκτῳ εικοσιν Αττικαις, εωσ - 


5 A Ὁ e ε "“ “A ε , 5 Ν lal 
περ αὐτοῖς οὗτοι οἱ OTALTAaL ταῖς ὁλκάσιν ἀπὸ τῆς LleXo- 


᾿ A a ΄ A 
30 ποννήσου ἀπῆραν: οὗπερ ἕνεκα καὶ TO πρῶτον ἐπληρώ- 


θησαν, ὅπως μὴ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι πρὸς τὰς ὁλκάδας μᾶλλον 


x a 
ἢ πρὸς τὰς τριήρεις TOV νοῦν ἔχωσιν. 


ε \ ΄ \ » 
αι δὲ TTEVTE και ει-: 


9 


3 A ο A 
Ἔν δὲ τούτῳ καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἅμα τῆς Δεκελείας 1 


τῷ τειχισμῷ καὶ τοῦ ἦρος εὐθὺς ἀρχομένου περί τε ΠΠε- 


later editt., against the Mss., following 
the constant usage of Thuc. The 
phrase means inter primos, and 
occurs nine times in Thuc. H. 652 a; 
Kiihn. 349°, 7. See on i. 6.6. Ace. 
to 6. 17. 15, 25, ships had already been 
dispatched, though not to Sicily. 
below, 26. — ὁρμήσαντες: 
though less freq. Cfili. 24.1; iv. 36.6; 
90. 15. —21. ἀφῆκαν : sc. τὰς vais; in 
Thue. only here, and likewise once in 
Hat. (vii. 193.15). agpuevarseems to have 
been used on account of the bolder voy- 
age through the open sea (és τὸ πέλαγος) 
without touching at Corcyra and the 
Italian coast, as ships coming out of 
the Corinthian Gulf usually did. " Fur- 
ther particulars about these vessels 
are given in c. 50. On the form of 
the aor., see App.— 23. dpxovta... 
προστάξαντες : the expression occurs 
in four other places in Thuc., viz.: iii. 
ΘΟ, Ὁ ὙἹ: 93.8; viii. 23. 21; 39. 18. 
See App. on iii, 26. 9. --- 25, Σικυώ- 


See 


= ὁρμηθέντες, 


viot: but ἀναγκαστοὶ στρατεύοντες (6. 
58. 17), since the Lacedaemonians 
had forced an oligarchical constitu- 
tion on them (v. δὲ. ὃ 2). 

26. ai δὲ... ἀνθώρμουν: ef. c. 17. 
§ 4; 31.§4.—28. ταῖς εἴκοσιν ᾿Αττι- 
Kats: the squadron regularly sta- 
tioned at ἢ pays ae not the 20 tri- 
remes (c. 17. § 2) which were to watch 
the whole co oast of the Peloponnese. — 
29. αὐτοῖς: dat. of interest in loose 


relation, as in i. 6. 8; 48. 93 ili. 
98.9. 6. 1170; H. 771.—30. καὶ τὸ 
πρῶτον: from the very beginning they 


had been intended for this duty. —31. 
ὅπως μὴ ... TOV ΤῊ ἔχωσι : the same 
const. alee in viii. 8.16. Cf. iii. 22. 29. 

20. About the same time the Atheni- 
ans send out a second fleet of 30 ships 
under Charicles to the coast of the Pelo- 
ponnese ; and Demosthenes with 65 tri- 
remes, 1200 hoplites, some islanders, and 
military stores, to Sicily. 

2. περί re Πελοπόννησον : τε, which 


9 


94 


10 


THUCYDIDES VII. 20. 


, A , ¥ οἱ τ / Ν 
λοπόννησον ναῦς τριάκοντα ἔστειλαν καὶ Χαρικλέα τὸν 
3 A ΟΝ ὃ , ¥ S ¥ Δ απ ΤᾺ 3 
Ἀπολλοδώρου ἄρχοντα, ᾧ εἴρητο καὶ ἐς Apyos ἀφικο- 
Δ Ν ᾿ Ν “ > ’ ε ’ 
μένῳ κατὰ τὸ ξυμμαχικὸν παρακαλεῖν ᾿Αργείων [τε] ὁπλί- 
> Ν Ν ~ \ Ν ’ > Ν , 
Tas ἐπὶ Tas ναῦς, Kal τὸν Δημοσθένην ἐς τὴν Σικελίαν, 
ὥσπερ ἔμελλον, ἀπέστελλον ἑξήκοντα μὲν ναυσὶν ᾿Αθη- 
ναίων καὶ πέντε Χίαις, ὁπλίταις δὲ ἐκ καταλόγου ᾿Αθη- 
ναίων διακοσίοις καὶ χιλίοις, καὶ νησιωτῶν ὅσοις ἕκαστα- 
, ar >> ΄ ΄ θ aa A »¥ 
χόθεν οἷόν 7 Hv πλείστοις χρήσασθαι, Kal ἐκ τῶν ἄλλων 
ξυμμάχων τῶν ὑπηκόων, εἴ ποθέν τι εἶχον ἐπιτήδειον ἐς 
ΕΝ An r 
τὸν πόλεμον, ξυμπορίσαντες. εἴρητο δ᾽ αὐτῷ πρῶτον 
ἈΝ la σ΄ , 9 , 4 
μετὰ τοῦ Χαρικλέους ἅμα περιπλέοντα ξυστρατεύεσθαι 


καὶ ὁ μὲν Δημοσθένης ἐς τὴν 


Ἁ \ , 
περὶ τὴν Λακωνικὴν. 


Αἴγιναν πλεύσας τοῦ 


’ὔ / » ε ’ 
στρατεύματός τε εἰ τι ὑπελείπετο 


περιέμενε καὶ τὸν Χαρικλέα τοὺς ᾿Αργείους παραλαβεῖν. 


is found only in Vat., is necessary in 
opp. to καὶ τὸν Δημοσθένην in 6. On 
the contrary, the isolated τε in 5, 
after ᾿Αργείων, is inadmissible. —3. 
Xapuxrea: later, one of the Thirty, 
ace. to Xen. Hell. ii. 3. 2. --- ἔστειλαν : 
they dispatched (aor.). He set out im- 
mediately, but was detained in Argos 
attending to the duty assigned him. 
—5. παρακαλεῖν: usual term for a 
summons for military aid. Cf ii. 96. 
Seve 6: 18: 

7. ἀπέστελλον : they were preparing 
to send; impf., as from the extent of 
the preparations delay was to be ex- 
pected, and, indeed, is mentioned in 
14 and c. 26. 1 ff.— 8. ἐκ καταλόγου: 
to be connected with ὁπλίταις. See 
on 6. 16. 7.—9. ὅσοις... χρήσα- 
σθαι : “as many as they could possibly 
get into their service.” 
(aor.) = convertere 
GMT. He S415) ORs 8: 
-11. τῶν ὑπηκόων: i.e. those 
furnished neither troops, nor ships 


, 
χρήσασθαι 
in usum. 
55; 


who 


in natura. Cf. c. 57. 13; i. 19. 6; 
99. 11. —12. ξυμπορίσαντες : as the 
simple πορίζειν (c. 18. 31) = cong ui- 
rere; elsewhere in the mid. (viii. 1. 
24: 4. 3).— εἴρητο δ᾽ αὐτῷ.... περι- 
πλέοντα ξυστρατεύεσθαι : this clause 
after the one above (4), ᾧ εἴρητο ἀφικο- 
μένῳ παρακαλεῖν, Shows quite strikingly 
the freedom of const. The partic. 
usually takes the form of the ace. with 
inf. when placed at any distance from 
a dat. belonging to leading verb. G. 
928, 1; Kr. Spr. 55, 257% 

15. ὑπελείπετο: St. writes ὑπελέ- 
λειπτο acc. to C. 33. 27, εἴ τις ὑπελέλει- 
aro ἐξετάσαι. But inc. 33. 27 exami- 
nation is to be made whether any one 
had purposely remained behind ; here 
Demosthenes proposes if any person 
or thing had not been ready, was still 
behind, to wait for it. With the impf. 
here in the sense of continued wait- 
ing, cf. i. τι. 9, τοῖς ἀεὶ ὑπολειπομέ- 
νοις. the pres. partic. of continued oc- 
currence. —16. τὸν Χαρικλέα. . . 


THUCYDIDES VII. 21. 


35 


3 δὲ Sh τὰ ΄ ES Ν 5 ‘ , , 
Ev 6€ Ty Σικελίᾳ ὑπὸ τοὺς αὐτοὺς χρόνους τούτου 1 


a > Awe , & > Ν 
τοῦ ἦρος καὶ ὁ Τύλιππος ἧκεν ἐς τὰς 


Cys a ΄ a » Ἢ 
«ἀπὸ τῶν πολεων ὧν ἐπεισε στρατιαν 


πλείστην ἐδύνατο. 


» A An “ ε ΄,ὔ 
ἔφη χρῆναι πληροῦν ναὺς ὡς δύνανται 


καὶ ξυγκαλέσας 


Συρακούσας, ἄγων 
ὅσην ἑκασταχόθεν 
τοὺς Συρακοσίους 
πλείστας καὶ ναυ- 


μαχίας ἀπόπειραν λαμβάνειν - ἐλπίζειν γὰρ ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ 


3, » “τὸ 4, 5 Ν / ’ 
TL Epyov ἄξιον του κινδύνου ες TOV πόλεμον κατεργᾶασα- 


σθαι. 


A an \ \ 9 A 5 ΄ δ Χ 
TOV ταις νᾶαυσι [LY ἀθυμεῖν [ἐπιχειρήσειν] προς TOUS 


5 ’ , SQA > ’ ’ Χ 5 ’ 
Αθηναίους, λέγων οὐδὲ εκεινους TAT PLOV ΤῊΝ εμπειριαν 


οὐδὲ ἀΐδιον τῆς θαλάσσης ἔχειν, ἠπειρώτας μᾶλλον τῶν 


παραλαβεῖν : Schol. ἀπὸ κοινοῦ τὸ περι- 
έμενε. The same const. occurs after 
ἐπιμένειν in 111. 2. 7. 

21. In Syracuse Gylippus and Her- 
mocrates vie with one another in the effort to 
put all their forces into the best condition, 
and especially to incite the Syracusans 
to naval warfare. 

1. ὑπὸ τοὺς αὐτοὺς χρόνους τούτου 
τοῦ ἦρος: cf. iv. 2. 1.—2. ὁ Τύλιπ- 
πος ἧκεν: 1.6. from the interior of 
Sicily. Cf.c. 7. § 2. 

6. ἀπόπειραν : the noun found only 
here in Att.; the verb ἀποπειρᾶν also 
in 6. 17. 15; 36. 2, and in mid. iv. 24. 
7. ἀπόπειραν λαμβάνειν = ἀπόπειραν 
"ποιεῖσθαι, to make trial of a sea-fight, as 
in Hdt. viii.9.7. Cf. iii. 20. 20, τὴν 

tumpetpnow τῶν κλιμάκων ἔλαβον; 
Plat. Prot. 348 a, πεῖραν ἀλλήλων λαμ- 
Bdvovtes. —omr αὐτοῦ: Schol., τοῦ 
ναυμαχεῖν. ---ἴ. κατεργάσασθαι: Cl. 
thinks the aor. inf. as appropriate 
after ἐλπίζειν (cf. iv. 13. 4; 24. 10; 
80. 3) as after ἐλπίς (ii. 80. 10; iii. 
emlaravero 27} 80. (Qu. Gr. p. 7) 
has adopted here and everywhere 
after ἐλπίζειν either the fut. inf. or the 
aor. inf. with ἄν, Cl, thinks the aor. inf. 


( 


corresponds to the success confidently 
expected from the means specifically 
referred to (ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ). 

8. ξυνανέπειθε οὐχ ἥκιστα τοῦ ταῖς 
ναυσὶ μὴ ἀθυμεῖν [ἐπιχειρήσειν] πρὸς 
τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους : ξΣυνανέπειθε occurs 
also in vi. 88. 48, St. is doubtless 
right in thinking ἐπιχειρήσειν a gloss 
(Qu. Gr. p. 8 and Symb. Philol. Bonn. 
p. 388); for the fut. inf. is inappro- 
priate and the connexion with πρός 
without parallel. On the other hand, 
ἀθυμεῖν (for which St. writes 
αὐτοὺς μὴ . . - ἀθυμεῖν) is not to be 
given up. It expresses the object of 
the persuasion: and Hermocrates es- 
pecially joined in persuading them, to 
prevent them from being without confi- 
dence against the Athenians on sea. 
GMT. 798; H. 960. See on i. 4. 6. 
For Cil.’s explanation, see App. — 
9. ἀθυμεῖν πρὸς τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους: cf. 
ji. 88. 11. --- 11. ἀΐδιον: usually un- 
derstood of the past, but rather to be 
referred to the fut. in contrast with 
πάτριον, even their maritime skill was 


TOU = « « 


not hereditary, nor would it last forever. 
So Dem. uses ἀθάνατον (Iv. 8), uh ὡς 
θεῷ νομίζετ᾽ ἐκείνῳ τὰ παρόντᾳ πεπηγέ 


, Ν νὴ ε ε 4 > 9 
ξυνανέπειθε δὲ καὶ ὁ Ἑρμοκράτης οὐχ Ἥκιστα 3 


56 THUCYDIDES VII. 21. 


τ ’ » Ἀ 5 ») ε Ν 4 
Συρακοσίων ὄντας Kal ἀναγκασθέντας ὑπὸ Μήδων vav- 
¥ ν 
τικοὺς γενέσθαι. καὶ πρὸς ἄνδρας τολμηρούς, οἵους 
Ν lal Ν 
καὶ ᾿Αθηναίους, τοὺς ἀντιτολμῶντας χαλεπωτάτους καὶ 
3 ‘ , e Ν > a \ ΄ > ΄ 
αὐτοὺς φαίνεσθαι: ᾧ γὰρ ἐκεῖνοι τοὺς πέλας, οὐ Suva- 
μει ἔστιν ὅτε προύχοντες, τῷ δὲ θράσει ἐπιχειροῦντες 
A \ ὅν, WER \ TO ἢ - ΄ a “uk ΄ 
καταφοβοῦσι, καὶ σφᾶς ἂν τὸ αὐτὸ ὁμοίως τοις ἐναντίοις 
ὑποσχεῖν. καὶ Συρακοσίους εὖ εἰδέναι ἔφη τῷ τολμῆσαι 
x >. ~ 
ἀπροσδοκήτως πρὸς τὸ ᾿Αθηναίων ναυτικὸν ἀντιστῆναι 
20 πλέον τι διὰ τὸ τοιοῦτον ἐκπλαγέντων αὐτῶν περιγενη- 
> a : 
σομένους ἢ ᾿Αθηναίους τῇ ἐπιστήμῃ THY Συρακοσίων 
> , ΄ 27 > ἀν > \ “ 
ἀπειρίαν βλάψοντας. ἰέναι οὖν ἐκέλευεν ἐς τὴν πεῖραν 
A “ A ε ’ὔ 
τοῦ ναυτικοῦ καὶ μὴ ἀποκνεῖν. καὶ οἱ μὲν Συρακόσιοι, 


a ΕΝ - 
τοῦ τε Τυλίππου καὶ Ἑρμοκράτους καὶ εἴ του ἄλλου πει- 


ναι ἀθάνατα.- ἔχειν, ἠπειρώτας : Vat. 
omits ἀλλ᾽ after ἔχειν. -- 19, οἵους 
καὶ ᾿Αθηναίους : for the attraction of 
case as well as the proleptic use of 
καί in a relative clause, cf. vi. 68. 
9. G. 1036; H. 1002; Kr. Spr. 62, 
Aor Kuhn. 555) i33— 14. καὶ av- 
tous: this reading has been adopted 
by Cl., instead of the vulgate ἂν 
αὐτοῖς (of which ἄν is wanting in 
many Mss., read 
in some). The sense is, “in com- 
bat against bold men, such as the Athe- 
nians are, those who with  bold- 
ness go against them appear also 
themselves the most formidable (ene- 
mies).” καὶ αὐτούς as ini. 50. 18, and 
often. χαλεπωτάτου- καὶ αὐτοὺς φαίνε- 
σθαι is explained in the following sent. 
and finally repeated in other words: 
kal σφᾶς ἂν τὸ αὐτὺ (sc. τὺ φοβεῖν αὐ- 
τοὐΞ) τοῖς ἐναντίοις ὑποσχεῖν. St. omits 
both Kr. and Bm. 
take πρὸς ἄνδρας with τοὺς ἀντιτοὰλ- 
μῶντας (cf. 19) and refer αὐτοῖς to 
ἄνδρας, Which seems quite reasonable. 


while αὐτούς 15 


δ ae 
ἄν and αὐτοῖς. 


—15. ᾧ γὰρ ἐκεῖνοι. . . ὑποσχεῖν: 
Schol., ᾧ γὰρ ἐκεῖνοι, φησί, φοβοῦσι τοὺς 
πέλας, τουτέστι διὰ θράσος καὶ οὐχὶ διὰ 
δυνάμεως ὑπεροχήν, τούτῳ ἂν καὶ ὑπὸ 
Συρακοσίων ἐκφοβήσεσθαι τοὺς ᾿Αθηναί- 
ους. With the const., ᾧ, τὸ αὐτό, ef. 
iii. 12. 4. The acc. σφᾶς, instead of 
σφεῖς, though referring to the subj. 
of the leading verb, as in iii. 111. 
13; vi. 49.9; 96. 5; viii. 32. 15. ὕπο- 
σχεῖν in the sense of ἐμβαλεῖν is very 
unusual and without parallel in Thue. 
St. compares Pind. Ol. 2. 54, πλοῦτος 
βαθεῖαν ὑπέχων μέριμναν. F 

19. ἀπροσδοκήτως: the ady. only 
here and iv. 29. 17; elsewhere the 
adj.— 20. πλέον τι: so Vat., instead 
of πλέον, as in ij. 11. 32; v. 109. 4. — 
περιγενησομένους : reading of Vat. for 
περιεσομένους. This and βλάψοντας are 
supplementary partics. in ind. disc. 
with εὖ εἰδέναι. GMT. 904; H. 982. 

24. “Ἑρμοκράτους καὶ εἴ του ἄλλου: 
unusual assimilation of the pron. 
Pp. compares Soph. Aj. 487, ἐξέφυν 


πατρὺς εἴπερ τινὸς σθένοντος. Kr. Spr. 


10 βῶνται. 


THUCYDIDES 


θό ν , > \ , \ Ν A 
25 VovT@v, ὥρμηντο TE ἐς THY ναυμαχίαν καὶ τὰς ναῦς 


ἐπλήρουν. 


ΠΥ ΣῈ. 2, 


91 


\ 4 5 εἶ 
Ὁ δὲ Γύλιππος, ἐπειδὴ παρεσκευάσατο τὸ ναυτικόν, 1 
᾽ 


> Ν ε Ν 4 la) Ν 
ἀγαγὼν ὑπὸ νύκτα πᾶσαν τὴν στρατιὰν τὴν πεζὴν αὐ- 


\ A A Ν an 
TOS μὲν τοῖς ἐν τῷ ΠΙ]λημμυρίῳ τείχεσι κατὰ γὴν ἔμελλε 


lal ε A ιν 
προσβαλεῖν, αἱ δὲ τριήρεις τῶν Συρακοσίων ἅμα καὶ ἀπὸ 


θ "2 , A Ν / » ἴω , 
5 €uv ματος πέντε μὲν καὶ τριάκοντα ἐκ τοῦ μεγάλου λι- 


, = , ε \ te ΟΝ -“ 
μένος ἐπέπλεον, at δὲ πέντε καὶ τεσσαράκοντα ἐκ TOU 


aNd a 3 \ \ , > A , 
€AAOOOVOS, OV HV και TO νεώριον αυτοις, περιέπλεον, 


’ὔ’ Ν Ν 5 Ν lal ἈΝ -“ 5 ~ 
βουλόμενοι πρὸς TAS EVTOS προσμεῖξαι Kal ἅμα ἐπιπλεῖν 


τῷ Πλημμυρίῳ, ὅπως οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἀμφοτέρωθεν θορυ- 


60, 10, 2. ----2ὅ. ὥρμηντό τε ἐς κτέ. : cf. 
11 Ὅν. ὅ; Vi. 40. 19; 47. 17. 

22. Thereupon Gylippus attacks 
Plemmyrium from the land side, while 
simultaneously 80 triremes sail out of 
the two harbours against the fleet of 
the Athenians. The latter, with 60 
ships, stubbornly resist. 

1. παρεσκευάσατο: St. has adopted 
from two Mss. παρεσκεύαστο. on 
the ground that Gylippus did not 
himself prepare the fleet. But it is 
sufficient that he had general direc- 
tion in the matter.— 2. ἀγαγὼν 
στρατιάν: very generally used of 
setting out with anarmy. Cf. c. 84. 
2; iv. 93,8. He set out under cover 
of night (ὑπὸ νύκτα) and waited un- 
til the expected sea-fight should 
offer the favourable moment for at- 


tack. Cf. c. 23. ὃ 1.--- αοΟὐτὸς μὲν... 
ἔμελλε... αἱ δὲ τριήρεις... ἐπέπλεον 


. περιέπλεον: paratactic const., 
“‘ while he held himself ready for an 
attack by land, the two divisions of 


ships made a simultaneous onset.” — - 


4. ai δὲ τριήρεις τῶν Bupakociwv: the 
whole 80, after which follow the 


οἱ δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναῖοι διὰ τάχους ἀντιπληρώσαντες 


parts in the same case. See on ii. 
95.5; iii. 13. 17.— ἅμα καὶ ἀπὸ ξυνθή- 
patos: at the same time and on a pre- 
concerted signal. Cf. iv. 67. 20; vi. 
61. 10.—6. αἱ δὲ πέντε: Cl. explains 
the art. as signifying the fleet that is 
ready and stationed in definite num- 
ber in the smaller harbour, while the 
35 triremes from the greater harbour 
do not comprise all the ships that are 
getting ready there. But better St. 
the remainder, the art., which has the 
same force as in τὰ δὲ δύο, c. 24. 4, 
and in af δὲ ἕνδεκα, c. 25. 6, implying 
that the whole number was 80. Kr. 
Spr. 50, 2, 8.—7. τὸ νεώριον: the 
harbour of the war-ships with the 
necessary appurtenances of wharves 
and docks. See Holm, II. p. 382.— 
περιέπλεον : 1.6. around the old city 
(the Nasos). On the omission of καί 
before περιέπλεον, see App. — 8. πρὸς 
τὰς ἐντὸς προσμεῖξαι : Schol. ταῖς ἰδίαις 
ταῖς ἐντὺς τοῦ μεγάλου λιμένος ξυμμίξαι. 
—9. ἀμφοτέρωθεν : 1.6. both by land 
and sea. We find it with θορυβεῖσθαι 
also in ili. 26. 5; v. 10. 33. 

10. ἀντιπληρώσαντες : having manned 


04801 


bo 


38 THUCYDIDES VII. 22, 23. 


An A » 
ἑξήκοντα ναῦς ταῖς μὲν πέντε καὶ εἴκοσι πρὸς τὰς πέντε 
Ν / “ Nv / Ν 5 »“ / , 
καὶ τριάκοντα τῶν Συρακοσίων Tas ἐν τῷ μεγάλῳ λιμένι 

~ \ Ἂν nr 

ἐναυμάχουν, TALS δ᾽ ἐπιλοίποις ἀπήντων ἐπὶ Tas ἐκ τοῦ 

νεωρίου περιπλεούσας. καὶ εὐθὺς πρὸ τοῦ στόματος τοῦ 

,ὔ ,ὕ 5 , Ν 5 & 5 , ~ Pa 

15 μεγάλου λιμένος ἐναυμάχουν, καὶ ἄντειχον ἀλλήλοις ἐπὶ 

πολύ, οἱ μὲν βιάσασθαι βουλόμενοι τὸν ἔσπλουν, οἱ δὲ 

33 κωλύειν. ἐν τούτῳ δὲ ὁ Γύλιππος, τῶν ἐν τῷ Πλημμυρίῳ 

> 7 Ν Ν , > ’ὔ Ἀ cal 

Αθηναίων πρὸς τὴν θάλασσαν ἐπικαταβάντων Kal TH 

ναυμαχίᾳ τὴν γνώμην προσεχόντων, φθάνει προσπεσὼν 

nw ΄“ Ἀ ἴω 
ἅμα τῇ ἕῳ αἰφνιδίως τοῖς τείχεσι, καὶ αἱρεῖ τὸ μέγιστον 
lal » Ν Ν Ν 5 , / 5 ε , 

5 πρῶτον, ἔπειτα δὲ Kal τὰ ἐλάσσω δύο, οὐχ ὑπομεινάν- 

των τῶν φυλάκων, ὡς εἶδον τὸ μέγιστον ῥᾳδίως ληφθέν. 
Lal Lal ΕΣ 

καὶ ἐκ μὲν τοῦ πρώτου ἁλόντος χαλεπῶς οἱ ἄνθρωποι, 

4 \ 5 Ν A Ν ε ’ὔἅ Ἂς , ἣν Ν 

ὅσοι καὶ ἐς τὰ πλοῖα καὶ ὁλκάδα τινὰ κατέφυγον, ἐς τὸ 


’ 5 / nw A 4 “ 5 
στρατόπεδον ἐξεκομίζοντο: τῶν yap Συρακοσίων ταῖς ἐν 


in turn, with reference to ¢c. 21. 26.— 
11. ταῖς μέν, ταῖς δ᾽ ἐπιλοίποις : the 
art. with numbers used as parts of a 
whole. See on 6 above. Cf. i. 116. 
2.—13. ταῖς ἐπιλοίποις: 1.ε. 35. ἐπί- 
λοιπὸς is found only here in Thuc., 
who uses elsewhere ὑπόλοιπος. --- 16. 
οἱ μέν : sc. of Συρακόσιοι. 

29. °Gylippus by a sudden onset gets 
possession of the three forts on Plemmy- 
rium; but the Syracusan fleet is beaten 
by the Athenian, and suffers considerable 
loss. 

1. ἐν τούτῳ: the battle at sea be- 
gan before daylight, for when at 
daybreak (ἅμα τῇ ἕῳ, 4) Gylippus 
advanced to the attack, the Athe- 
nians had already been for some time 
looking on the sea-fight. — 2. ἐπικατα- 
βάντων : going down to the very edge 
(of the water), as in c. 35.9; 84. 19; 
iv. 11. 2.—3. φθάνει προσπεσών : 1.6. 
before the Athenians could arm them- 
selves to resist, — 5. ἔπειτα δὲ καὶ τὰ 


ἐλάσσω δύο: the decisive success is 
briefly announced first; the details 
and results are described afterwards 
in 7 with καὶ μέν and in 11 with ἐπειδὴ 
5é.— 6. τῶν φυλάκων: the garrison 
stationed there. Cf. ec. 43. 22. 

7. ἐκ τοῦ πρώτου ἁλόντος : from that 
which was first taken. For the pred. 
adj. between the art. and its partic., 
see Kr. Spr. 50, 12, 1. Cl. writes 
(against the Mss.) πρῶτον, taking it 
ady. both here and in 5. But even if 
it be not an adj. in 5, as St. claims 
(cf. vi. 66. 15), that would not be 
proof that it is not one here. — 8. és τὰ 
πλοῖα: which acc. toc. 4. 26 lay there 
at anchor under the protection of the 
fortifications of Plemmyrium. — és τὸ 
στρατόπεδον : i.e. into the chief camp 
of the Athenian army near the double 
wall and close to the great harbour. 
See on ὁ. 4. 24 and Holm, II. p. 595. 
—9. τῶν γὰρ κτέ. : explains χαλεπῶς 

. ἐξεκομίζοντο. --- 10. κρατούντων τῇ 


THUCYDIDES VII. 23. 


lal , te Ν , a 
10 τῷ μεγάλῳ λιμένι ναυσὶ κρατούντων TH ναυμαχίᾳ ὑπὸ 


15 


20 


, an \ > 4 > Vs > Ν Ν 
τριήρους μιᾶς καὶ εὖ πλεούσης ἐπεδιώκοντο ἐπειδὴ δὲ 
Ν δύ Ἁ ε ’ὕ 5 ’ὕ Ν ε 5 / 
τὰ δύο τειχίσματα ἡλίσκετο, EV τούτῳ καὶ οἱ Συρακόσιοι 
Ἂν Ψ' »» ὕὔ A e 5 5 Lal 4 
ἐτύγχανον ἤδη νικώμενοι, καὶ οἱ ἐξ αὐτῶν φεύγοντες 
ῥᾷον παρέπλευσαν. αἱ γὰρ τῶν Συρακοσίων αἱ πρὸ τοῦ 
στόματος νῆες ναυμαχοῦσαι βιασάμεναι τὰς τῶν ᾿Αθη- 
ναίων ναῦς οὐδενὶ κόσμῳ ἐσέπλεον καὶ ταραχθεῖσαι περὶ 
3 ΄ , \ , Ἄν 5 , , 
ἀλλήλας παρέδοσαν τὴν νίκην τοὺς Αθηναίοις. ταύτας 
ap ἔτρεψαν καὶ ὑφ᾽ ὧν τὸ πρῶτον ἐνικῶντο ἐ 2 
σε Yap “Ἐτρ ρ QUE? σῷ 
\ ¢ Q Alls A , 
λιμένι. καὶ ἕνδεκα μὲν ναῦς τῶν Συρακοσίων κατέδυσαν 
A A Ν Lal 5 if 9 , A 2 
καὶ τοὺς πολλοὺς τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἀπέκτειναν, πλὴν ὅσον 
ἐκ τριῶν νεῶν, ovs ἐζώγρησαν: τῶν δὲ σφετέρων τρεῖς 
τὰ δὲ ναυάγια ἀνελκύσαντες τῶν 


νῆες διεφθάρησαν. 


, \ las 3 a , , a 
Συρακοσίων KQL Τροπαιον εν τῳ νησιδίῳ στήσαντες τῳ 


ναυμαχίᾳ : as the Syracusans still had 
the advantage against the Att. ships, 
they could spare one trireme for the 
pursuit of the fleeing garrison of the 
larger fort.— 11. ἐπειδὴ... ἡλί- 
σκετο: exact statement of the simul- 
taneous (impf.) occurrences at two 
different points: “at the time when 
the two smaller forts fell into the 
hands of the Syracusan land troops, 
the Syracusan fleet was already losing 
the day, so that the Athenian garri- 
sons from the smaller forts, who 
were fleeing along the coast in boats, 
could no longer be pursued by the 
Syracusans.” How this change in the 
sea-fight had come about is then de- 
scribed from 14 (ai yap τῶν Συρακοσίων 
κτὲ.) to the end of the chap. 

14. ai πρὸ τοῦ στόματος vies vav- 
μαχοῦσαι: 1.6. af ἐκ τοῦ νεωρίου περιπλέ- 
Cf. ec. 22.13. Thue. is fond of 
placing the attrib. partic. after the 
noun, when other words are added. Kr. 


Spr. 60, 10,5. See on i. 11. 19,—16. 


ουσαι. 


οὐδενὶ κόσμῳ: cfc. 40. 10; 84. 9; iii. 
108. 16; also πολλῷ κόσμῳ in viii. 99 
13.— ταραχθεῖσαι περὶ ἀλλήλας : 
ἐν ἀλλήλαις (il. 65. 50), or ἐν σφίσιν 
αὐταῖς (c. 67. 14; 84. 
πτουσαι ἀλλήλαις (C. 
παρέδοσαν τὴν νίκην: 
victory, aS in Viil. 71. 


18), or προσπί- 
36. 33). —17. 
gave away the 
3, Thy παλαιὰν 
ἐλευθερίαν παραδώσειν. --- ταῦτας τε. 
ἐνικῶντο : “for they routed not only 
these (who had fallen into disorder), 
but aiso those by whom they were at 
first worsted inside the harbour” On 
this co-ordination of the rel. clause 
with the dem., see Kr. Spr. 51, 13, 5. 
—18. ἐν τῷ λιμένι: ie. ἐν τῷ μεγάλῳ 
λιμένι (10). 

20. πλὴν ὅσον: limiting in Δαν. 
sense the preceding, except, with which 
we must supply τοὺς ἀνθρώπους, to 
which οὕς refers. In c. 62. 18 (πλὴν 
ὕσον ἂν 6 πεζὸς ἡμῶν ἐπέχῃ) the gram- 
matical connexion is closer. — 23. ἐν 
τῷ νησιδίῳ: it cannot be certainly 
determined whether this is Isola del 


99 


THUCYDIDES VII. 23, 24. 


πρὸ Tov Πλημμυρίου, ἀνεχώρησαν ἐς τὸ ἑαυτῶν στρα- 


- ’ 
25 τόπεδον. 


ε δὲ τ' ’ Ν Ν Ν i 9 
Ou 0€ Συρακόσιοι κατὰ μὲν τὴν ναυμαχίαν οὕτως 


> , \ mi ΤΩΝ a , ΄ > \ 
ἐπεπράγεσαν, TA δ᾽ ἐν τῳ ΤΠλημμυρίῳ τείχη εἶχον καὶ 


nw »-»ὄ 7 
τροπαῖα ἔστησαν αὐτῶν τρία. 


\ \ X y a 
και TO μεν ετέρον τοιν 


δυοῖν τειχοῖν τοῖν ὕστερον ληφθέντοιν κατέβαλον, τὰ δὲ 


5 δύο ἐπισκευάσαντες ἐφρούρουν. 


ἄνθρωποι δ᾽ ἐν τῶν 


τειχῶν τῇ ἁλώσει ἀπέθανον καὶ ἐζωγρήθησαν πολλοῖΐ, 


\ , Ν Ν ͵ Cie 9 Ν ’ 
καὶ χρήματα πολλὰ τὰ ξύμπαντα ἑάλω : ὥσπερ γὰρ ταμιείῳ 


χρωμένων τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων τοις τείχεσι πολλὰ μὲν ἐμπό- 


΄ SH i. 95 κ νΝ x Ν an , 
pov χρήματα και σιτος ΕΨνΝΉΨ, πολλὰ δὲ καὶ των τριηραρ- 


pie iN BP , , , \ > 
10 χῶν, επέει και LOTLA τεσσαράκοντα, T Ply) P@v και τάλλα 


’ 5 ’ ἧς ’ > ’ - 
σκεύη ἐγκατελήφθη καὶ τριήρεις ἀνειλκυσμέναι τρεῖς. 


A ω rs Ἂν , 
μέγιστόν τε Kal ἐν τοῖς πρῶτον ἐκάκωσε TO στράτευμα 


Castelluccio or San Marciano. — 24. 
ἐς τὸ ἑαυτῶν στρατόπεδον : see on 8. 

94, The loss of Plemmyrium is the 
the more grievous to the Athenians, since 
large quantities of naval stores and ship 
material, as well as three triremes which 
had been drawn up on land, fall into the 
hands of the enemy. 

1. οὕτως ἐπεπράγεσαν: fad fared 
thus, used esp.,as here, of unfavourable 
events, if the contrary is not ex- 
pressed. Cf. ii. 4. 33.—3. τροπαῖα 
ἔστησαν αὐτῶν : sc. τῶν ἁλόντων τει- 
χῶκς Cf ec. 41.12; 54.1; ii. 82. 8; iv. 
12.8; vi. 98.20. Kr. Spr. 47, 7,3 —4. 
κατέβαλον : as ini. 58.13; v. 83.8. — 
τὰ δὲ δύο: see on 6. 22.6.—5. ém- 
σκευάσαντες: cfc. 1. 2; 38. 11; vi. 
104. 20. 

ἐν τῶν τειχῶν TH ἁλώσει: Thuc. and 
Hat. are fond of inserting the gen. 
between a prep. and its case. Kr. 
Spr. 41, 9,19. Cf. i. 9.25; v. 47. 65; 
vi. 34. 57.— 7. χρήματα : material of 
every sort. Cf. 9 below, wares, and 


c. 25. 7, military stores. For the facts, ef. 
Diod. xiii. 9, Plut. Nic. 20. --- τὰ ξύμ- 
παντα: all together. Kr. Spr. 50, 11, 
13. (ἢ c. 1. 91. - ὥσπερ: Cl. and 
St., for ὥστε of the Mss., which is 
nowhere used comparatively in Att. 
prose, ἅτε, which Bk. and Kr. write, 
would be admissible ace. to vy. 72. 1; 
but ὥσπερ is more like the vulgate, 
and is supported also by the imitation 
of the passage in Jos. Antiquities, xviii. 
9, ἐχρῶντο ὥσπερ ταμιείῳ ταῖσδε ταῖς 
πόλεσιν. --- ταμιείῳ χρωμένων: in the 
same 56η86 ᾿᾽88 vi. 97. 27, τοῖς τε 
σκεύεσι καὶ τοῖς χρήμασιν ἀποθήκη. 
For the facts, cf c. 4. 25.—9. τῶν 
τριηράρχων: the art., added from 
Vat., because the trierarchs are a 
class belonging’ together, as opp. to 
ἔμποροι, who came together by chance. 
—11. ἐγκατελήφθη: se. ἐν τοῖς τείχεσι. 
Cf. c. 30. 18: iv. 116. 4. 

12. μέγιστον: cognate acc. with 
1054; H. 716 b; Kr. 
Cf. c. 44. 82; v. 82. 21, 


ἐκάκωσε. G. 
Spr. 46, 5, 7. 


THUCYDIDES VII. 24, 25. 41 


τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἡ τοῦ Πλημμυρίου λῆψις: οὐ γὰρ ἔτι οὐδ᾽ 
ἔσπλοι ἀσφαλεῖς ἦσαν τῆς ἐπαγωγῆς τῶν ἐπιτηδείων 
ε Ν 12 Ν 5» ts 5 κ΄“ 5» 4 
15 (οἱ yap Συρακόσιοι ναυσὶν αὐτόθι ἐφορμοῦντες ἐκώλυον 
Ν Ἂς ,ὔ » δι ἐν ε > , ¥ > 

' Kal dua μάχης ἤδη ἐγίγνοντο at ἐσκομιδαί), ἔς τε τἄλλα 
κατάπληξιν παρέσχε καὶ ἀθυμίαν τῷ στρατεύματι. 

25 Mera δὲ τοῦτο ναῦς Te ἐκπέμπουσι δώδεκα οἱ Συρα- 1 
’ὔ ἙΝ , 5 > 5 la τ' , »” 

κόσιοι καὶ ᾿Αγάθαρχον ἐπ᾽ αὐτῶν Συρακόσιον ἄρχοντα. 
Ν 5 lal ’ \ > / y¥ , 

καὶ αὐτῶν pia μὲν es ἸΠελοπόννησον wyeto, πρέσβεις 

» ν ’ , 7 ν 3 5 4 

ἄγουσα, ὅπως τά TE σφέτερα φράσωσιν ὅτι ἐν ἐλπίσιν 
5 Ν Ν Ν > A 4 3» la) 5 ὔ ia 

5 εἰσὶ Kal τὸν ἐκεῖ πόλεμον ETL μᾶλλον ἐποτρύνωσι γίγνε- 

ε Ν ν Lal % Ἂν 3 ’ὔ ¥ 
σθαι: at δὲ ἕνδεκα νῆες πρὸς τὴν ᾿Ιταλίαν ἔπλευσαν, 
, A A ΕἸ , , , 

πυνθανόμεναι πλοῖα τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις χρημάτων γέμοντα 


Ὁ" 
προσπλεῖν. 


μέγιστον ὀφελήσειν; Xen. An. iii. 1. 
98, μέγα ὀνῆσαι. --- τε: Vat., for δέ, not 
correlative to καί, but resumptive, as 
in. i. 4.5; 67.5. —€v τοῖς πρῶτον : see 
on 6. 19. 19. —13. οὐδ᾽ ἔσπλοι: with 
Vat. for οὐδ᾽ of ἔσπλοι, because the 
statement is general; but in 16 ai ἐσκο- 
μιδαί, because the context renders it 
definite. —14. τῆς ἐπαγωγῆς τῶν ém- 
τηδείων : abstract for the concrete = 
τῶν ἐπαγομένων ἐπιτηδείων. Cf. v. 82. 
24.—16. διὰ μάχης : only by fighting. 
—és τάλλα: favourite expression of 
πὸ (7 0: ἡ. 153 77. 85 1. 1.143 6. 
15; 36. 19. ---17. παρέσχε : the subj. 
is 7 τοῦ Πλημμυρίου λῆψις. 

25. The Syracusans dispatch ships 
and intercept some supplies sent out to the 
Athenians, and by the announcement of 
their success arouse their Peloponnesian 
allies to lend further assistance. Before 
Syracuse both sides seek by all manner 
of attacks to do each other as much harm 
as possible, and especially violent is the 
contest about the palisade built by the 
Syracusans for the protection of their 
ships. The Syracusans send ambas- 


sadors to the Sicel cities to try to arouse 
them to take a more active part in the 
war. 

3. ᾧχετο: here, as always (c. 7. 6; 
12. 3; 46. 6), expressive of haste. 
This one ship had separated immedi- 
ately from the rest, and set off with 
all haste on its voyage to the Pelo- 
ponnese. —4. ὅπως .. . γίγνεσθαι: 
ὅπως from Vat., instead of οἵπερ, has 
been adopted by the later editt. The 
rel. pron. with the subjv. of purpose 
cannot be established in Att. τε, like- 
wise from Vat., is indispensable, as 
τὰ σφέτερα is contrasted with ἐκεῖ 
πόλεμον. ἐν ἐλπίσι as below in 43; ὁ. 
46. 6; i. 74. 22, iv. 7o. 20. Cf és 
ἐλπίδα ἐλθεῖν, ii. 56. 12.—6. αἱ ἕνδεκα : 
see on 6. 22. 0. --- τὴν Ἰταλίαν: in 
Thue. used only of the peninsula 
south of the river Laus and Metapon- 
tum. See on vi. 2. 19; i. 12. 14.—7. 
χρημάτων γέμοντα: the order of Vat. 
more forcible than the Vulgate γέ- 
μοντα χρημάτων. For χρήματα, see on 
ΡΘΗ τ: 

8. τῶν πλοίων: the gen. with ἐπι- 


4A » 4 > »ϑ Ν Ν 
καὶ τῶν τε πλοίων ἐπιτυχοῦσαι τὰ πολλὰ 2 


42 


, ἃ A > ΄ ε A > 
10 κατέκαυσαν, A τοις Αθηναίοις ετοιμα DV. 


15 


20 


THUCYDIDES VII. 25. 


διέφθειραν καὶ ξύλα ναυπηγήσιμα ev τῇ Καυλωνιάτιδι 
ἔς te Ao- 

\ \ A > ρον - A 9 ga ΄, 
κροὺς μετὰ ταῦτα ἦλθον, καὶ ὁρμουσῶν αὐτῶν κατέ. 

tA A ε ’ὔὕ A 3 Ν ’ὔ 3», 

πλευσε μία τῶν ὁλκάδων τῶν ἀπὸ Πελοποννήσου ἄγουσα 
Θεσπιέων ὁπλίτας: καὶ ἀναλαβόντες αὐτοὺς οἱ Συρακό- 
φυλάξαντες δ᾽ 


> Ν € Ἔ a ¥ \ \ cr , 
αὐυτοὺυς οἱ Αθηναῖοι €LKOOL VAVOL προς τοις Μέεγαροις, 


> Χ Ν “~ 4 5 > 5», 
σιοι ἐπι TAS VAVUS παρέπλεον ΕἾ οἰκου. 


͵΄ \ A , > κ 3 ΄ὕ Ν Ὁ. 
μίαν μὲν ναῦν λαμβάνουσιν αὐτοῖς ἀνδράσι, τὰς δ᾽ ἀλ- 
λας οὐκ ἠδυνήθησαν, ἀλλ᾽ ἀποφεύγουσιν ἐς τὰς Συρα- 
κούσας. 

5 ,ὔ δὲ Ν A Lal ~ ~ | Ν 5 

Eyévero δὲ καὶ περὶ τῶν σταυρῶν ἀκροβολισμὸς ἐν 

τῷ λιμένι, OVS οἱ Συρακόσιοι πρὸ τῶν παλαιῶν νεωσοΐ- 
͵ὕὔ 3 A , 9 5 “ ε Ὁ“ 3 

κων κατέπηξαν ἐν Τῇ θαλάσσῃ, ὅπως αὐτοῖς αἱ νῆες ἐν- 

Ν ε ΄“ A ον fe 5 ΜΝ Ν ’ 
τὸς ὁρμοιεν καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐπιπλέοντες μὴ βλάπτοιεν 


ἐμβάλλοντες. 


τυγχάνειν unusual. Cf. iii. 3.23; Xen. 
Occ, 2. 3; 12: 20; Plat. Pial. ΘῈ ἃ: 
Ar, Plut. 245.—9. Κ αυλωνιάτιδι : the 
district of Caulonia north of Locri 
Epizephyrii, on the edge of the Sila 
forest, which produced much building 
timber and pitch. Cf. Strabo, vi. 
1.9. 

12. μία τῶν ὁλκάδων... ὁπλίτας: 
prob. one of the fleet which sailed 
from Taenarum (c. 19. ὃ 3, 4), among 
the commanders of which was also a 
Thespian named Hegesander. This 
ship perhaps lost its course on the 
voyage διὰ πελάγους, and thus was de- 
tained longer than the others. The 
Thespians are reckoned with the 
Boeotians in ὁ. 19. ὃ 3. 

14. φυλάξαντες δ᾽ αὐτούς: Schol. 
τηρήσαντες καιρὸν ἐς τὸ ἐπιθέσθαι αὐτοῖς. 
Cf. c. 4. 86, πέμπει 
αὐτῶν. ---1δ. πρὸς τοῖς Μεγάροις : the 
Hyblaean Megara. See on vi. 4.8.— 
16. αὐτοῖς ἀνδράσι: dat. of accom- 


ἐς φυλακὴν 


προσαγαγόντες γὰρ ναῦν μυριοφόρον αὐ- 


paniment. G. 1191; Ἡ 774a. Cf. 
li. 90. 26; iv. 14. 63 viii. 102. 15. — 
17. οὐκ ἤδυνήθησαν : sc. AauBavew-— 
ἀλλ᾽ ἀποφεύγουσιν: for change of 
subj., see on i. 26. 17. 

20. πρὸ τῶν παλαιῶν vewrolkwy: 
the regular dockyard (νεώριον) of the 
Syracusans was, ace. to c. 22. ὃ 1, in 
the smaller harbour. But for the 
protection of the ships temporarily 
lying in port there were ship-houses 
also on the shore of the great har- 
bour, under which every ship found 
shelter. In time of peace they needed 
no further protection; but now the 
Syracusans had built a palisade to 
defend them from the attacks of the 
Athenians. — 21. ἐντὸς oppotev: ἵ.ε. 
behind the protecting palisade. ἐντός 
is similarly used in c. 5. 14; ii. 83.26; 
Vi. 67. Oe Ἴ78ὶ 2. 

23. προσαγαγόντες yap κτέ.: in ex- 
planation of περὶ τῶν σταυρῶν axpo- 
βολισμός in 19.— μυριοφόρον : since 


3 


σι 


θ 


35 βωσαν. 


THUCYDIDES VIL. 2ς. 


lal δἰ 259 A 4, / A Ν 
τοῖς οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, πύργους τε ξυλίνους ἔχουσαν καὶ πα- 


’, » A > uy » 5 / 
25 ραφράγματα, ΕΚ TE Των AKATWY WVEVOV ἀναδούμενοι τοὺς 


ἊΝ Ν 5 ΄ Ν “ ΠΥ gy) 
σταυροὺς καὶ ἀνέκλων καὶ κατακολυμβῶντες ἐξέπριον. 


οἱ δὲ Συρακόσιοι ἀπὸ τῶν νεωσοίκων ἔβαλλον - οἱ δ᾽ ἐκ 


τῆς ὁλκάδος ἀντέβαλλον: καὶ τέλος τοὺς πολλοὺς τῶν 


σταυρῶν ἀνεῖλον οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι. 


χαλεπωτάτη δ᾽ ἣν τῆς 


80 σταυρώσεως ἡ κρύφιος: ἦσαν γὰρ τῶν σταυρῶν οὺς οὐχ 


ε 4 -~ , re 2 Ν > 
UTEPEXOVTAS TIS θαλάσσης κατέπη Eav, ὥστε δεινὸν ἣν 


προσπλεῦσαι, μὴ οὐ προϊδών τις ὥσπερ περὶ ἕρμα περι- 


βάλῃ τὴν ναῦν. 


ἀλλὰ καὶ τούτους κολυμβηταὶ δυόμενοι 


ἐξέπριον μισθοῦ: ὅμως δ᾽ αὖθις οἱ Συρακόσιοι ἐσταύ- 


πολλὰ δὲ καὶ ἄλλα πρὸς ἀλλήλους, οἷον εἰκὸς 


an A 
τῶν στρατοπέδων ἐγγὺς ὄντων καὶ ἀντιτεταγμένων, ἐμη- 


χανῶντο καὶ ἀκροβολισμοῖς καὶ πείραις παντοίαις ἐχρῶντο. 


Ἔπεμψαν δὲ καὶ ἐς τὰς πόλεις πρέσβεις οἱ Συρακό- 


the reading seems to be established 
(occurring also in Poll. ii. 82 and 
Strab. xvii. 1. 26), we must take a 
talent as unit of measure, and inter- 
pret, “aship of 10,000 talents burden.” 
Cf. iv. 118. 28, πλοίῳ és πεντακόσια 
τάλαντα ἄγοντι μέτρα; also Hdt. i. 194. 
17; 11. 96. 16. Lobeck’s conjecture μυ- 
ριαμφόρον (Ad Phryn. p. 663) is there- 
fore to be rejected.— αὐτοῖς : sc. τοῖς 
σταυροῖς (Schol. τοῖς σταυρώμασι δηλον- 
ότι). ---24. πύργους Te... καὶ παρα- 
φράγματα: this vessel of about 258 
tons (if the talents were Att., or 357, 
if Aeginetan), with its wooden towers 
and bulwarks (παραφράγματα, also iv. 
115. 7), served as a floating fortress 
for the troops. From its deck they 
repelled the attacks of the enemy 
and protected the operations of their 
own men (οἱ δ᾽ ἐκ τῆς ὁλκάδος ἀντέ- 
βαλλον in 27). These operations con- 
sisted in the attempt, made from the 
smaller boats, partly to fasten cords 


to the stakes and then to pull them 
out with windlasses, partly to dive 
under the water and saw them off. 
See App. 

29. τῆς σταυρώσεως ἡ κρύφιος : the 
hidden part of the palisade, after the 
analogy of ἡ πλείστη τῆς στρατιᾶς, C. 
3. 15. — 31. ὑπερέχοντας : as in ili. 23. 
26.— 32. μὴ οὐ προϊδών τις... περι- 
βάλῃ τὴν ναῦν : dependent on δεινὸν ἣν 
and explanatory οὗ προσπλεῦσαι. οὐ 
belongs only to προϊδών. ἕρμα 15 ἃ rock. 
Of. Hdt. vii. 183. 6, where ἐπελαύ- 
νειν is used, as here περιβάλλειν. --- 34. 
μισθοῦ: for pay. Cf.iv. 124.22; v.6.7. 
The word indicates that the κολυμβη- 
rat (also iv. 26. 28) were esp. trained 
for their business. 

35. οἷον elkos: elliptical, as ofa 
εἰκός in ii. 54.33; vi. 69. 15.—37. πεί- 
pats: stratagems, found in pl. only 
here, though the sense is the same as 
in iii. 20. 8. 

38. ἐς τὰς πόλεις : sc. τῶν Σικελιω- 


48 


THUCYDIDES VII. 2s, 26. 


΄ ΄ Ν > a ον 
σιοι Κορινθίων και ᾿Αμπρακιωτων καὶ Λακεδαιμονίων, 


40 ἀγγέλλοντας τήν τε τοῦ Πλημμυρίονυ λῆψιν καὶ τῆς vav- 


΄ , ε > a A , > , a Δ A 
μαχίας πέρι WS OV TH τῶν πολεμίων ἰσχύι μᾶλλον ἢ ™ 


σφετέρᾳ ταραχῇ ἡσσηθεῖεν, τά τε ἄλλα δηλώσοντας ὅτι 


5 > ΄ὔ SEX Ν Eas Ἐς a S82 5 Ν. 
ἐν ἐλπίσιν εἰσὶ καὶ ἀξιώσοντας ξυμβοηθεῖν €77 GQUTOUS 


Ν Ν \ “ ε ‘\ “A 3 / ὕὔ 
καὶ ναυσὶ καὶ πεζῷ, ὡς καὶ τῶν Αθηναίων προσδοκί. 


45 μων ὄντων ἄλλῃ στρατιᾷ, καὶ ἣν φθάσωσιν αὐτοὶ πρό- 


4 Ν Ν ’ὔ 5 A 
τερον διαφθείραντες TO TAPOV OTPATEVLA αὕτων, δια- 


πεπολεμησόμενον. 
ἔπρασσον. 


Ἀ ε Ν 5 “ - nw 
καὶ οἱ μὲν ἐν τῇ Σικελίᾳ ταῦτα 


ὋὉ δὲ Δημοσθένης, ἐπεὶ ξυνελέγη αὐτῷ τὸ στρά- 


ἃ » x 3 \ 
τευμα O ἔδει εχόντα Es TV 


τῶν. They hoped to make most im- 
pression on these through ambassa- 
dors from the Dorian cities of Hellas. 
The result of the mission is stated in 
c. 32. — 40. ἀγγέλλοντας : the rather 
unusual pres. partic. of purpose (as in 
c. 3. 4; ili. 52. 11; vi. 88. 62), with 
which are connected δηλώσοντας and 
ἀξιώσοντας (42, 45), forming subord. 
explanatory clauses. — 41.00... μάλ- 
λον 7: . so much, as, the first 
member being completely subordi- 
nated, as in i. 73. 17.— 42. τά Te 
ἄλλα δηλώσοντας... kal ἀξιώσον- 
τας: the ultimate main object is 
brought out more forcibly by the 
position of τά τε ἄλλα. The connex- 
ion would be disturbed by αὖ, which 
is inserted before δηλώσοντας in all 
the Mss. except Vat. It was perhaps 
a marginal note of some reader, re- 
ferring to 4 above. — 43. ἐπ᾽ αὐτούς : 
80. τοὺς "A@nvaiovs.— 44. ὡς... προσ- 
δοκίμων ὄντων : the expectation of 
this danger, which could be averted 
only by timely help, was to be the 
excuse for the demand (das). — 45. 
ἄλλῃ στρατιᾷ: cf. c. 16. 6.— αὐτοί: 


ΠΟ, τ - 


Σικελίαν βοηθεῖν, ἄρας ἐκ 


Cl. explains in his last edit., “they 
alone, the Syracusans, without the 
help of the others.” But this does 
not agree with the request just re- 
ferred to. The contrast is between 
the Athenians on the one side (αὐτῶν), 
and the Syracusans and their allies 
on the other (αὐτοί). ----46. διαπεπο- 
λεμησόμενον : so Vat. (which is more 
forcible than διαπολεμησόμενον of the 
vulgate), there would be an end of the 
war. Cf. c. 14. 18, and Liv. xxiii. 13, 
debellatum mox fore, si ad- 
niti paulum voluissent, re- 
bantur. The impers. partic. in acc. 
abs. with ὡς is co-ord. with the gen. 
abs., as in c. 15. 7. 

26. Demosthenes joins Charicles on 
the coast of Argolis. The two ravage 
some places in Laconia, and fortify a 
point on the coast opposite Cythera, in 
order to furnish an asylum for fugitive 
Helots and a starting-point for preda- 
Thereupon Demos- 
thenes continues his journey to Sicily. 
Charicles, however, after further strength- 
ening the fort, turns back to Athens. 

1. emel ξυνελέγη αὐτῴ: cf c. 37. 


tory excursions, 


THUCYDIDES VII. 26. 


ἴων 5 ’ Ν 4, Ἂς Ν , A 
τῆς Αἰγίνης καὶ πλεύσας πρὸς THY Πελοπόννησον τῷ TE 


Χαρικλεῖ καὶ ταῖς τριάκοντα ναυσὶ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἕυμ- 


vd A / ~ 5 - e , » \ Ν 
δ μίσγει, καὶ παραλαβόντες τῶν ᾿Αργείων ὁπλίτας ἐπὶ τὰς 


lal 4 > \ » Ν lal Ν lal 
VQAUS ἔπλεον ες ΤῊΝ Λακωνικὴν, και πρώτον μεν τὴς 


ΕἸ , “ la 5 Δ, » / .} 
Ἐπιδαύρου τι τὴς Λιμηρας ἐδήωσαν, ἔπειτα, σχόντες ἐς 


\ ἈΝ fd A ial » Ν ε Ν 
τὰ καταντικρὺ Κυθήρων τῆς Λακωνικῆς, ἔνθα τὸ ἱερὸν 


ἊΨ, 9. / , > “A ~ » ἃ 5 / \ 
tov ᾿Απόλλωνός ἐστι, τῆς TE γῆς ἔστιν ἃ ἐδήωσαν Kal 


10 ἐτείχισαν ἰσθμῶδές τι χωρίον, ἵνα δὴ οἵ τε Εἵλωτες τῶν 


Λακεδαιμονίων αὐτόσε αὐτομολῶσι καὶ ἅμα λῃσταὶ ἐξ 


> A 4 5 A 4, ε Ν lal 
αὐτοῦ, ὥσπερ ἐκ τῆς Πύλου, ἁρπαγὴν ποιῶνται. 


ε 


\ 
και ὁ 


μὲν Δημοσθένης εὐθύς, ἐπειδὴ ξυγκατέλαβε τὸ χωρίον, 


΄ HM a ὦ ἧς ν Ν A DV ge i 
παρέπλει ἐπὶ τῆς Κερκύρας, ὅπως καὶ τῶν ἐκεῖθεν Evp- 


15 μάχων παραλαβὼν τὸν ἐς τὴν Σικελίαν πλοῦν ὅτι τάχι- 


A ε \ ΄ a , ν Ν ΄ 
στα ποιῆται: ὁ δὲ Χαρικλῆς περιμείνας, ἕως τὸ χωρίον 


3 Ἃ \ \ Ν 5 x 5 / 
ἐξετείχισε, Kal καταλιπὼν φυλακὴν αὐτοῦ ἀπεκομίζετο 


\ δ Y a , δ 5.9 ¥ \ 
KQL αὐτὸς voTEPOV TALS τριάκοντα VAVOW ἐπ οἰκου KAL 


es. lal 4 
οι Αργειοι αμα. 


§1; 20. ὃ 95. αὐτῷ is not for ὕπ᾽ αὐτοῦ, 
but dat. of advantage, corresponding 
to the idea of περιέμενε in c. 20. 16.— 3. 
πρὸς τὴν Πελοποννησον : indefinite, to 
the coast in general, not to any special 
point; in 6, és τὴν Λακωνικήν, definite, 
with the intention of engaging in some 
enterprise there. —tw Χαρικλεῖ: who 
in the meanwhile had performed his 
task (παρακαλεῖν ᾿Αργείων ὁπλίτας, Cc. 
20. 5). The παραλαβεῖν (ὁ. 20. 16) is 
now carried out by Demosthenes and 
Charicles together. 

7. ᾿Ἐἰπιδαύρου τι τῆς Λιμηρᾶς : Epi- 
daurus Limera was situated on a 
well-protected bay among the spurs 
of the Zarax mountains. C7. iv. 56. 10. 
See Curtius, Pelop. II. p. 292.— 8. 
τὰ καταντικρὺ Κυθήρων τῆς Λακω- 
νικῆς: the part of Laconia opposite 
Cythera. — τὸ ἱερὸν τοῦ ᾿Απόλλωνος : 


the site is not certainly known. See 
Curtius, Pelop. 11. p. 330, Rem. 75. — 
10. ἰσθμώδές τι χωρίον : prob. the Ὄνου 
γνάθος (Paus. iii. 23. 1), now Elaphonisi. 
See Curtius, zb/d., and Bursian, II. p. 
140.— 12. ὥσπερ ἐκ τῆς Πύλου: cf: 
iv. 41.§ 2; v. 14. ὃ: 

13. ξυγκατέλαβε: 1.6. with Chari- 
cles, whose operations on the coast 
of the Peloponnese he was to support 
(εἴρητο δ᾽ αὐτῷ... ξυστρατεύεσθαι, Cc. 20. 
12).---14. παρέπλει: sailed along the 
coast. This is the usual word, though 
most of the Mss. read ἐπέπλει; Vat. 
ἐπιπαρέπλει, Which is evidently only a 
slip of the pen. — τῶν ἐκεῖθεν ξυμμάχων : 
the part.gen.asiniv.$0.7. G.1097,1; H. 
736.— 16. ἕως ... ἐξετείχισε: until hehad 
completed the fortification of the place. 
Schol. εἰς τέλος ἤγαγεν. Cf. c. 4. 25; 
iv. 4.4; 45.11.—18. καὶ αὐτός : 1.6. as 


45 


3 


48 THUCYDIDES VII. 27. 


3 ΄ \ \ A A | 

27 Αφίκοντο δὲ καὶ Θρᾳκῶν τῶν μαχαιροφόρων Tov 1 
Διακοῦ γένους ἐς τὰς ᾿Αθήνας πελτασταὶ τοῦ αὐτοῦ θέ. 
ρους τούτου τριακόσιοι καὶ χίλιοι, ODS ἔδει τῷ Δημο- 

σθένει ἐς τὴν Σικελίαν ξυμπλεῖν. οἱ δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, ὡς 2 
ν “Ὁ A > Ν ΄, . io > 
5 ὕστερον ἧκον, διενοοῦντο αὐτοὺς πάλιν ὅθεν ἦλθον ἐς 
Θράκην ἀποπέμπειν. τὸ γὰρ ἔχειν πρὸς τὸν ἐκ τῆς Δε- 
’ὔ ’ 5 Ν \ > , ὯΝ 
κελείας πόλεμον αὐτοὺς πολυτελὲς ἐφαίνετο: δραχμὴν 

Ν A - ΄ [2 > / > Ν Ν c 

yap τῆς ἡμέρας ἕκαστος ἐλάμβανον. ἐπειδὴ yap ἡ Δε- 3 

/ Ν Ν ἴω ε Ἃς ’ Lal na > ~ 

κέλεια TO μὲν πρῶτον ὑπὸ πάσης τῆς στρατιᾶς ἐν τῷ 


10 θέ j θεῖ ὕ δὲ φ ts ἀπὸ τῶ 
pee TOUTW TELN LO €lo a, VOTEPOV ε βουραις ΑἹΤΟ Τῶν 
’ Ν Ν , 5 4 “ ’ 5 
πόλεων κατα διαδοχὴν Xpovev €TTLOVO ALS ΤΊ χώρᾳ ετῳ- 
e 


Demosthenes before. It refers only 
to ἀπεκομίζετο (111. 81. 4; iv. 96. 35). 
27. A corps of 1300 Thracian mer- 


cenaries arriving after Demosthenes’s 


departure is sent back. Description of 


the evils that Athens suffered from the 
occupation of Decelea. 

1. Θρᾳκῶν τῶν μαχαιροφόρων τοῦ 
Διακοῦ γένους: in μαχαιροφόρων we 
have the characteristic mark of the 
Thracians. Cf. ii. 96. 10; Xen. Cy- 
rop. vi. 2. 10; Aesch. Pers. 56 (τὸ 
μαχαιροφόρον ἔθνος ἐκ πάσης ᾿Ασίας 
ἕπεται). Tac. Ann. iii. 38 mentions 
the Dii along with the Odrusae. — 2. 
τοῦ αὐτοῦ θέρους τούτου: so Vat. for 
the vulgate, ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ θέρει τούτῳ, 
the gen. indicating the time within 
which anything takes place, without 
definitely fixing the date, during this 
same summer. See on vi. 97. 1.—3. 
ἔδει: as often, of an arrangement 
previously made. Cf. ii. 5. 1; 92. 
24; mi 95.183, iv.46:.17; ν. 42. 4. 

5. ὕστερον : too late. Cf. c. 29. 1; 
li. 80. 35. — 6. ἀποπέμπειν : send back. 
amo- as in ἀποδιδόναι. --- ἔχειν: with 
pregnant force, retain. —mpds τὸν ἐκ 
τῆς Δεκελείας πόλεμον: 1.6. against 
the incursions made from Decelea, 


not referring to 6 Δεκελεικὸς πόλεμος 
proper.—7. δραχμήν : the usual pay 
of hoplites amounted to four obols. 
See Boeckh, P. E. p. 375. — 8. ἐλάμ- 
Bavov: Vat.for ἐλάμβανεν. The subj. 
is of Θρᾷκες, and ἕκαστος is in pred. 
appos. to the pl. subj., as in ii. $7. 
31; iii. 38. 24; iv. 80. 15; vi. 69. 19. 
ἐπειδὴ ... . ἐπῳκεῖτο: Cl. explains 
that the occupation (ἐπῳκεῖτο) consisted 
of two parts: the first, the fortification 
of the place, expressed by means of 
the partic. clause (ὑπὸ... τειχισθεῖσα); 
the second, the military operations, 
expressed by the dat., φρούραις amd τῶν 
πόλεων (sc. τῶν ξυμμάχων) κατὰ διαδοχὴν 
χρόνου ἐπιούσαις: “by means of gar- 
risons which came in from the allied 
cities in fixed succession.” But St. ex- 
plains perhaps more clearly, that the 
first clause is really subord. to the sec- 
ond, though the two are co-ord. by μέν, 
δέ, and he cites in support iii. 82. ὃ 1; 
vi. 69.§ 1. Arn. understands, by zeug- 
ma, from τειχισθεῖσα, κατεχομένη in the 
second clause. See App. Cl. connects 
τῇ χώρᾳ With ἐπιούσαις ; but it seems 
better, with Arn. and St., to take it 
Cf. vi. 86. 18, ἐποι- 
κοῦντες ὑμῖν; V. 51.4, οὐ yap ἐπ᾿ ἄλλῃ 


with ἐπῳκεῖτο. 


15 


THUCYDIDES VII. 27. 


κεῖτο, πολλὰ ἔβλαπτε τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους καὶ ἐν τοῖς πρῶ- 
tg > 5 / \ 5 ’ὔ a > re 

Tov χρημάτων τ᾽ ὀλέθρῳ καὶ ἀνθρώπων φθορᾷ ἐκάκωσε 

πρότερον μὲν γὰρ βραχεῖαι γιγνόμεναι αἱ 

5 Ν Ν + /, “ aA 3 , > > , 

ἐσβολαὶ τὸν ἄλλον χρόνον τῆς γῆς ἀπολαύειν οὐκ ἐκώ.- 


τὰ πράγματα. 


le Ν Aw > , \ ε \ Ν \ 

vor * TOTE δὲ ξυνεχῶς ἐπικαθημένων, και OTE μεν και 
/ > / ἜΝ 3 5 3 ,ὔ lal 32 lal 
πλεόνων ἐπιόντων, ὁτὲ ὃ ἘΞ avaykyns τῆς ἰσὴς φρουρᾶς 


3 \ , \ 7 4, 
. καταθεούσης τε THV χώραν και λῃστείας ποιουμένήης, βα- 


20 


, / A A ’ » aA 
σιλέως TE TApPOVTOS TOV των Λακεδαιμονίων Αγιδος, ὃς 
9 5 ͵7ὕ \ / 5 lal ᾽ὔ (Oe 
οὐκ EK παρέργου τὸν πόλεμον ἐποιεῖτο, μεγάλα οἱ ᾿Αθη.- 
ναῖοι ἐβλάπτοντο. τῆς τε γὰρ χώρας ἁπάσης ἐστέρηντο 
Ἂ, 5 ,ὔ , x Z , 5 ΄ὕ 
καὶ ἀνδραπόδων πλέον ἢ δύο μυριάδες ηὐτομολήκεσαν, 
καὶ τούτων πολὺ μέρος χειροτέχναι, πρόβατά τε ἀπολώ- 


τινὶ γῇ τὸ χωρίον ἐτειχίσθη ; Paus. iv. 
26. 5, ἀξιόμαχον πόλιν ἐποικίσαι Λακε- 
δαιμονίοι. See on ec. 19. 9.—12. 
ἔβλαπτε, ἐκάκωσε: the subj. is to be 
inferred from the foregoing clause, 
Viz. τοῦτο, τὸ τὴν Δεκέλειαν ἐποικεῖσθαι. 
πολλά is cognate ace. See on ὁ. 24. 
12. ---Οἰἐν τοῖς πρῶτον: correctly re- 
stored by Bk. instead of πρώτοις. See 
on 6. 19. 19.—13. ὀλέθρῳ: Kr. ob- 
jects to this word with χρημάτων; but 
αἱ πρόσοδοι ἀπώλλυντο in Ο. 28. 92 sup- 
ports the present reading. 

14. βραχεῖαι γιγνόμεναι at ἐσβολαί: 
the five incursions of the first period 
of the war, of which the second (430 
B.C.) was the longest, lasting 40 days 
(ii. 57. ὃ 2), the fifth (425 B.c.) the 
shortest, lasting only 15 days (iv. 6. 
ὃ 2).—16. ἐπικαθημένων : sc. τῶν ἐσ- 
βαλόντων. ---ὁτὲ μέν, ὁτὲ δέ = ποτὲ 
μέν, ποτὲ δέ. It does not occur again 
till Arist. But cf. Plat. Phaed. 59a, 
ὁτὲ μέν, ἐνίοτε δέ; Theuet. 207 d, ὁτὲ 
μέν, τοτὲ δέ: Xen. Hier. τ. 5, ἔστι μὲν 
ὅτε... ἔστι δ᾽ ὅτε: Cyneg. 5. 8, ὁτὲ δέ. 
—17. τῆς ἴσης φρουρᾶΞ: Cl. under- 
stands this, as opp. to καὶ πλειόνων 


ἐπιόντων, to mean the regular garrison 
furnished successively by the differ- 
ent cities (cf. 10, ἀπὸ τῶν πόλεων κατὰ 
διαδοχὴν χρόνου ἐπιούσαι5). Schol., τῆς 
ἴσης φρουρᾶς, τῆς τεταγμένης δηλονότι. 
These had to provide for their own 
support and therefore κατέθεε τὴν χώ- 
ραν ἐξ ἀνάγκης, 1.6. whenever there was 
need. St. explains cum modo eti- 
am plures invaderent, modo 
ex necessitate aequalis 
quanta necessitate postulabatur) ma- 
nus excursionem faceret. See 
App.—18. βασιλέως te παρόντος: 
the third factor in the Decelean War. 
—20. ἐκ παρέργου: also i. 142. 25. 
Cf. ἐν παρέργῳ, Vi. 69. 27; Soph. Phil. 


so 
fo. 


(:.6. 


21. τῆς χώρας: Schol., τῆς κ-ρτί- 
μου. --- 22. πλέον ἢ δύο μυριάδες: 
Boeckh, P. EF. p. 55, reckons the 
number of slaves in Athens in the 
most flourishing period at 365,000, so 
that the number here given does not 
seem incredible. — 23. πολὺ μέρος: 
Vat. has τὸ πολύ, but most of these 
slaves could hardly have been handi- 
craftsmen: for very many slaves would 


47 


4 


THUCYDIDES VII. 27, 28. 


λει πάντα καὶ ζεύγη ἵπποι τε, ὁσημέραι ἐξελαυνόν- 


~ ε /, /, \ , Ν 
25 Tw τῶν ἱππέων πρός τε τὴν Δεκέλειαν καταδρομὰς 


XN 
ποιουμένων καὶ κατὰ τὴν χώραν φυλασσόντων, οἱ μὲν 


a “ Ν nr 
ἀπεχωλοῦντο ἐν γῇ ἀποκρότῳ τε καὶ ξυνεχῶς TahauTo- 


28 ροῦντες, οἱ δ᾽ ἐτιτρώσκοντο. 


[.2 » 
ἢ τε τῶν ἐπιτηδείων παρα- 


Ν > ‘al > f, / 3 a > lal Ν 
κομιδὴ ἐκ τῆς Εὐβοίας, πρότερον ἐκ τοῦ ᾿Ωρωποῦ κατὰ 


A \ A , θα > Ν τ' , Ν 
γὴν διὰ τῆς Δεκελείας θᾶσσον οὖσα, περὶ Σούνιον κατὰ 


’ὔ Ν Le “A \ , ε ’, 
θάλασσαν πολυτελὴς ἐγίγνετο: τῶν δὲ πάντων ὁμοίως 


5 A "ὃ ων ε , 
ἐπακτῶν ἐδεῖτο ἢ πόλις, 


be required for household service. — 
χειροτέχναι : artisans of every kind. 
See App. to vi. 72. 10. --- ἀπολώλει 
πάντα: so Vat., which is more ex- 
pressive than πάντα ἀπολώλει of the 
rest of the Mss.—24. ζεύγη : from 
Vat. instead of ὑποζύγια, since it 
would_be natural acc. to Att. usage 
to choose for beasts of burden that 
term from which the citizens of: the 
third class received their name, (evyi- 


ται. --- ὁσημέραι: adv. Kr. Spr. 51, 
19, 15.— 27. ἐν γῇ .. . ταλαιπωροῦν- 


tes: the two causes of lameness ex- 
pressed in unlike manner; first by 
means of the prep. and its case, then 
with the partic. ξυνεχῶς ταλαιπωροῦντες, 
7.e. from the continual exertion. For 
same change of const., cf. iv. 26. 19. 
Kr. connects ἐν γῇ ἀποκρότῳ and ἔξυνε- 
y@s with ταλαιπωροῦντες. Either ex- 
planation might be correct. 

28. Even the importation of provi- 
stons is made difficult for the Athenians ; 
and they are oppressed by all .he incon- 
veniences of a siege at home, while they 
themselves continue to besiege Syracuse. 
In the extreme financial straits into 
which they have come, they seek relief by 
a tax of five per cent. on all wares im- 
ported and exported bn sea. 


oe ~ > , ‘ 
1. ἥ Te TOV ἐπιτηδείων παρακομιδὴ 


Ν 5 Ν “ ,ὕ = 
καὶ ἀντὶ TOU πόλις εἶναι 


xré.: this is the last of the bad re- 
sults (μεγάλα ἐβλάπτοντο) of the oc- 
cupation of Decelea that are re- 
counted from ec. 27, 21 on, 
των ὁμοίως ἐπακτῶν ἐδεῖτο in 4 does 
not belong in the same rank with the 
preceding; it contains rather the 
ground of the last statement, and 
must therefore be introduced, not by 
te, but by the epexegetical δέ, as in i. 
26. 23; 55. 3; v. 10. 21. But St. 
claims that even with Cl.’s interpre- 
tation te is more appropriate. The 
transportation of provisions from 
Euboea was more difficult and expen- 
sive, because they had to be brought 
around Sunium; nevertheless every- 
thing had to be imported, because the 
whole country was in the hands of the 
enemy, and out of 1t neither corn nor 
cattle could be got; and so (καί) Ath- 
ens resembled in fact rather a for- 
tress than an open city. —2. κατὰ 
γῆν : all the Mss. have κατὰ vis, but 
κατὰ θάλασσαν shows that the ace. is 
required. —3. θᾶσσον οὖσα: corre- 
sponds to ῥᾷον αὐτῷ ἐφαίνετο ἣ ἐσκο- 
μιδὴ τῶν ἐπιτηδείων ἔσεσθαι in ec. 4. 18. 
The Mss., even Vat., give θάσσων, but 
the adv. is the preferable expression. 
— 4. τῶν S€ ... ἐδεῖτο: = πάντα ὧν ἐδεῖ- 
το ἐπακτὰ ἦν. The Schol. explains 


τῶν πάν- 


10 


1ὅ 


THUCYDIDES VII. 28. 


, fA ; οὗ Ν ~ 5 Α Ν A e , 
φρούριον κατέστη. πρὸς yap TH ἐπάλξει τὴν μὲν ἡμέ- 
ραν κατὰ διαδοχὴν οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι φυλάσσοντες, τὴν δὲ 

, Ν ἊΝ \ A ε ’ὔ ε Ν 5» 5 ν 
νύκτα καὶ ξύμπαντες πλὴν τῶν ἱππέων, οἱ μὲν ἐφ᾽ ὅπλοις 
που, οἱ δ᾽ ἐπὶ τοῦ τείχους, καὶ θέρους καὶ χειμῶνος 
5 lal ’ὔ » > Ν 5 Pe ν , 
ἐταλαιπωροῦντο. μάλιστα δ᾽ αὐτοὺς ἐπίεζεν ὅτι δύο 

Ψ > , 
πολέμους ἅμα εἶχον, Kat ἐς φιλονικίαν καθέστασαν τοι- 


Ud ἃ ‘ , > ’, 5» 5 ΄ Ν 
αὐτὴν HV πριν γενέσθαι NTLOTHOEV av τις AkKOVOAS. TO 


Ν > Ν , > Lond ε XN 
yap αὐτοὺς πολιορκουμένους ἐπιτειχισμῳ ὑπὸ Ἰ]ελοπον- 


5 A A“ 
νησίων pnd ὡς ἀποστῆναι ἐκ Σικελίας, ἀλλὰ ἐκεῖ Συρα- 
κούσας τῷ αὐτῷ τρόπῳ ἀντιπολιορκεῖν, πόλιν οὐδὲν 
> S > ’ > ε x “ 5 7 ἈΝ Ν 
ἐλάσσω αὐτήν ye καθ᾽ αὑτὴν τῆς ᾿Αθηναίων, καὶ τὸν 
παράλογον τοσοῦτον ποιῆσαι τοῖς Ἕλλησι τῆς δυνάμεως 

Ἄ lal 
Kal τόλμης, ὅσον κατ᾽ ἀρχὰς τοῦ πολέμου οἱ μὲν ἐνιαυ- 
, ε δὲ ὃ ΄ ε δὲ aA aA Ws) \ λ , ΄ 
τόν, οἱ δὲ δύο, οἱ δὲ τριῶν γε ἐτῶν οὐδεὶς πλείω χρόνον 


ἐπακτῶν by εἰσαγωγίμων ἐξ ἀλλοδαπῆς. 
See on vi. 20.20. It is pred. Kr. Spr. 
57,3, 3. — 6. φρούριον κατέστη : became 
a fortress, the verb used in the same 
sense as in i. 118.3; ii. 65. 380; 89. 37. 

πρὸς yap τῇ ἐπάλξει: = παρ᾽ ἔπαλξιν 
(ii. 13. 42). —8. ἐφ᾽ ὅπλοις που: so 
Vat. correctly, instead of the mean- 
ingless ποιούμενοι, which perhaps 
crept into this place from the partic. 
in c. 27. 18, 26. ὅπλα means the 
camping places, watch-posts, which 
were in different parts of the city; 
hence the indef. που, “here and 
there.” Cf.i.111. 6; iii. 1. 7; vi. 64. 20. 

12. τὸ γὰρ αὐτοὺς πολιορκουμένους 
κτέὲ. : the three infs. introduced by τό, 
ἀποστῆναι ϊῃ 14, ἀντιπολιορκεῖν in 15, and 
ποιῆσαι in 17 (the aors. of the simple 
occurrence, the pres. of continued 
activity) form the subj. of an incom- 
plete period, the intention of which 
is already fulfilled in the inserted 
ὅσον clause. On this anacoluthon 
and the different attempts to remove 


it, see App. —15. τῷ αὐτῷ τρόπῳ: 
sc. ἐπιτειχισμῷ, for as such, 1.6. as the 
building a fort on an enemy’s frontier, 
was also the attack of the Athenians 
on Syracuse to be regarded.— 17. 
παράλογον : miscalculation. Thue. 
uses this form eight times, mapa Ad- 
γον five times, and there are four 
places where it is doubtful which 
form should be preferred. See on i. 
65. 3. —18. ὅσον : Cl. explains it as 
giving the measure after τοσοῦτον 
(here with finite verbs following; in 
iii. 49. § 4 with inf. as well as finite 
verb), and since the measure is to be 
deduced from the difference between 
the expectation (ἐνόμιζον) and the 
present result (ἔτει ἑπτακαιδεκάτῳ és 
Σικελίαν ἦλθον) he claims that ὥστε 
cannot be correct, and conjectures 
ὅμως δέ. Butit is better, with Kr., 
Arn., and St., to take both ὅσον and 
giving the measure after 
τοσοῦτον, and interpret ὅσον, quate- 
nus, in so furas. See App.—19. οἱ 


ὥστε as 


49 


2 


« 


5 


20 


30 


50 


THUCYDIDES VII. 28. 


au ¢ , > ΄ 3 ε ΄ 5 , 
ἐνόμιζον περιοίσειν αὐτούς, εἰ ot IleXotovvyoto ἐσβά- 
> \ , 7 Ἵν ε , x ‘ 
λοιεν ἐς τὴν χώραν, TwoTE ἔτει ἑπτακαιδεκάτῳ μετὰ τὴν 
\ > : » a 
πρώτην ἐσβολὴν ἦλθον ἐς Σικελίαν, ἤδη TO πολέμῳ κατὰ 
\ 
πάντα τετρυχωμένοι, Kal πόλεμον οὐδὲν ἐλάσσω προσαν- 
“ ’, 

είλοντο τοῦ πρότερον ὑπάρχοντος ἐκ ἸΤελοποννήσου " δι᾿ 
a \ , eN κ ΄ δ χν \ 
ἃ Kal τότε ὑπό TE τῆς Δεκελείας πολλὰ βλαπτούσης καὶ 

An » 5 ’ ’ ’ > ἦς 
τῶν ἄλλων ἀναλωμάτων μεγάλων προσπιπτόντων ἀδύ- 
νατοι ἐγένοντο τοῖς χρήμασι. καὶ τὴν εἰκοστὴν κατὰ 
τοῦτον τὸν χρόνον τῶν κατὰ θάλασσαν ἀντὶ τοῦ φόρου 
τοῖς ὑπηκόοις ἐποίησαν, πλείω νομίζοντες ἂν σφίσι χρή- 
ματα οὕτω προσιέναι. αἱ μὲν γὰρ δαπάναι οὐχ ὁμοίως 

‘\ 7 5 Ν A ’ a 9 ἣν 7 
καὶ πρίν, ἀλλὰ πολλῷ μείζους καθέστασαν, ὅσῳ καὶ μεί- 


Cov ὃ πόλεμος ἣν, αἱ δὲ πρόσοδοι ἀπώλλυντο. 


δὲ τριῶν γε ἐτῶν, οὐδεὶς πλείω χρόνον : 
the two parts of the phrase are to be 
closely connected in reading, so that 
the gen. τριῶν ἐτῶν will be seen to 
depend on χρόνον. Possibly οὐδεὶς δέ 
would make the connexion clearer, un- 
less Kr. and St. are right in removing 
the comma after ἐτῶν, thus making 
οὐδείς part. appos. to of δέ (“no one 
of the rest”). — 20. περιοίσειν : hold 
out, a use of the word, which does not 
occur again till the later writers. It 
combines the force of περιέσεσθαι and 
ἀνθέξειν (Suid.),— 21. ἑπτακαιδεκάτῳ: 
the same form in iv. τοι. 1. — τὴν πρώ- 
τὴν ἐσβολήν : cf. ii. 19. —23. τετρυχω- 
μένοι: found in Thuc. only in the 
pres. and pf. pass. partic. Cf iv. 


60.13. See on i. 126. 24. — προσ- 
ανείλοντο: προσ- with ady. force, 
insuper. 


24. δι᾽ a: for all these reasons, to 
which kal τότε. . . προσπιπτόντων adds 
still a further cause. The ἄλλα ἀναλώ- 
para were recounted from c. 27. ὃ 4 
to c. 28. ὃ 1.—25. ὑπὸ τῆς Δεκελείας 
πολλὰ βλαπτούσης: the partic. with 


the force of the verbal subst., as in ec. 
42. 10; ili. 20. 3; 29. 9; iv. 29. 9.— 
26. ἀδύνατοι τοῖς χρήμασι: Schol., 
ἤγουν ἐνδεεῖς χρημάτων ἐγίγνοντο. The 
const. is not elsewhere found, but 
is warranted by kindred expressions, as 
χρήμασι δυνατοί in 1. 13. 19; δυνάμενος 
τοῖς χρήμασι, Lys. v1. 48. — 27. τὴν εἰκο- 
στήν: with regard to this impost on 
exports and imports, see Boeckh, 
P. E. p. 434. It continued perhaps 
till the end of the Peloponnesian 
War. See Boeckh, /.c.—kara: Cl. 
reads xara from Vat. alone, but the 
Schol. reads ὑπό, and explains it by 
κατά (ind: κατά). --- 28. ἀντὶ τοῦ φό- 
ρου: cf. i. 06. 1; ii. 13. 23; Vv. 18. 22. 
— 29. ἐποίησαν : of the introduction of 
a tax is not found elsewhere. St. writes, 
on Badham’s conjecture, ἐπέθεσαν ; 
Cl. prefers ἐπέταξαν, comparing i. 139. 
2; 140. 18; ii. 7.10.—31. καὶ πρίν: 
as in vi. 11. 5. ---καθέστασαν : see on 
6.— 32. at δὲ πρόσοδοι ἀπώλλυντο: 
still dependent on ὅσῳ (Cl.); better 
co-ord. with ai μὲν. . . καθέστασαν 
(Holden). 


THUCYDIDES VII. 29. 


dl 


9 Τοὺς οὖν Θρᾷκας τοὺς τῷ Δημοσθένει ὑστερήσαν- 1 


τας, διὰ τὴν παροῦσαν ἀπορίαν τῶν χρημάτων οὐ βου- 


“ ’ 
λόμενοι δαπανᾶν, εὐθὺς ἀπέπεμπον, προστάξαντες κομί- 


5 Ν , Xi > / WA > ἰφὴ , 
σαι αὐυτους Διιτρέφει και ELTOVTES AULA EV τῷ παράπλῳ 


τι δύνηται, ἀπ᾿ αὐτῶν βλάψ)αι. 
1 


5 ΄: xX > 5 4 Ν ἂν 7 3, 
ET OPEVOVTO 05 δι Ev L7TOU και TOUS πολε tous, V 
p yap p μίους, ἡ 


QA x Ν 
ὁ δὲ ἔς τε τὴν Τανα- 


γραίαν ἀπεβίβασεν αὐτοὺς καὶ ἁρπαγήν τινα ἐποιήσατο 


διὰ τάχους, καὶ ἐκ Χαλκίδος τῆς Εὐβοίας ἀφ᾽ ἑσπέρας 


4 3, Χ > Ν / 
διέπλευσε τὸν Evpurov καὶ ἀποβιβάσας ἐς τὴν Βοιωτίαν 


10 


ἦγεν αὐτοὺς ἐπὶ Μυκαλησσόν. 


\ Ν ἈΝ 4 A 
καὶ τὴν μὲν νύκτα λαθὼν : 


πρὸς τῷ ᾿Ὡρμαίῳ ηὐλίσατο (ἀπέχει δὲ τῆς Μυκαλησσοῦ 


ε ΄, ΄, ΄ Ψ KL in eyes, a ΄ 
ἑκκαίδεκα μάλιστα σταδίους), αμα δὲ ΤΊ) Ὥμερᾳ ΤΊ) πόλει 


29. The Thracian mercenaries who 
are sent back, betake themselves, on the 
way home, to robberies and cruelties on 
the Boeotian coast, especially in Myca- 
lessus. 

1. τῷ Δημοσθένει: dat. of advan- 
tuger(c7 ¢. 26:1), since they were 
intended as reinforcements for him. 
Cf. c. 27. ὃ 1.—3. δαπανᾶν : 1.6. to 
be at great expense on account of 
them. Cf. c. 27. § 2.— ἀπέπεμπον : 
for the use of the impf., see on c¢. 20. 
7. WKihn. 383, 3, takes it as equiv. to 
the aor. That they returned by ship 
is shown by what follows, and is 
implied in κομίσαι. --- 4. Διιτρέφει: 
prob. the grandson of the Diitrephes 
mentioned in iii. 75. 2; iv. 53.5; 119. 
10. It is he, doubtless, who is men- 
tioned again in viii. 64.7. See App. 
πο: lO. “St. writes, following in- 
scriptions, Διείτρέφης in all the places 
just cited. —etmovres: in sense of κε- 
λεύειν, as in iii. 3. 16; iv. 2. 8, and freq. 
Κύμη. 473, 2.— 5. ἔν τι δύνηται: so 
Vat. correctly, instead of ἤν τι δύνων- 
ται, since the sing. is required in con- 
nexion with amr αὐτῶν βλάψαι, the 


subj. of which is Diitrephes. —6. ἀπ᾽ 
αὐτῶν βλάψαι: Schol. ἀντὶ τοῦ δὲ 
αὐτῶν, to do injury by means of 
them. “amd expresses the instru- 
ment, that from which the hurt pro- 
ceeded.” Arn. Cf. βλάπτεσθαι ἀφ᾽ 
ὧν (of things) inc. 67.19. The idea 
seems to be, “at their cost,” 1.6. to 
use them as “food for powder.” 

Tavaypatav: for Τάναγραν of the 
Mss. ‘The reference here can be only 
to the land extending down to the 
coast (cf. iv. 76. 17), not to the city, 
which was situated on a height at 
some distance from the sea. See 
Bursian, I. p. 122, After a short stay 
(διὰ tayouvs) they embarked again 
(though Thue. does not mention this), 
and sailed over to Chalcis; then, re- 
crossing the Euripus, they surprised 
Mycalessus. The two plundering in- 
cursions are connected by re (in 6) 
and καί before ἐκ Χαλκίδος. --- 8. ἀφ᾽ 
ἑσπέρας: directly after nightfall, as in 
11. 112. 8; viii. 27. 27 = ὑπὸ νύκτα in 
i. 115. 19; vi. 64.35.—10. Μυκαλησ- 
σόν: see Bursian, I. p. 217. 

11. ηὐλίσατο: pitched his camp. 


52 


THUCYDIDES VII. 29. 


, ¥ > / ᾿ Ν ε A 5 , 
προσέκειτο οὔσῃ οὐ μεγάλῃ, καὶ αἱρεῖ ἀφυλάκτοις τε 
ΕἾ 
ἐπιπεσὼν καὶ ἀπροσδοκήτοις μὴ av ποτέ τινας σφίσιν 


5» Ν / “Ὁ > / 5 ’ὔὕ al 
185 ἀπὸ θαλάσσης τοσοῦτον ἐπαναβάντας ἐπιθέσθαι, τοῦ 


A »” \ » = \ “ 
τείχους ἀσθενοῦς ὄντος καὶ ἔστιν 7) καὶ πεπτωκότος, TOU 


Ἀ ΄ὔ 5 , Ν “ ν Ν Ν » 
δὲ βραχέος φὠκοδομημένου, καὶ πυλῶν ἅμα διὰ τὴν ἀδειαν 


> ΄ 
ανεωγμένων. 


ἐσπεσόντες δὲ οἱ Θρᾷκες ἐς τὴν Μυκαλησ- 


Ν ΄ὕ “ἢ Ν \ ε \ > / Ν Ν > 
σον TAS TE OLKLAS Και TA ιερα ἐπόρθουν, και TOUS αν- 


ΕΝ 

20 θρώπους ἐφόνευον φειδόμενοι οὔτε πρεσβυτέρας οὔτε 
’ ε ’ Ψ οὖ / £ “Ὁ ν 5 4 Ν 
νεωτέρας ἡλικίας, ἀλλα πάντας ἑξῆς, ὁτῳ ἐντύχοιεν, καὶ 


20 


lal Ν A 7 Ν Ν 
γυναῖκας καὶ παῖδας κτείνοντες, καὶ προσέτι καὶ ὑποζύ- 


για καὶ ὅσα ἄλλα ἔμψυχα ἴδοιεν. 


τὸ γὰρ γένος τῶν 


Θ A ε cal A aN aA i > cals ἃ 
ρᾳκῶν, ὁμοῖα τοῖς μάλιστα tov βαρβαρικοῦ, ἐν ᾧ ἂν 


θ , / / > 
αρσήσῃ, φονικώτατόν ἐστι. 


καὶ τότε ἄλλη τε ταραχὴ 


5 5 ‘gs \ > , A - 5 / Ν 3 
οὐκ ὀλίγη καὶ ἰδέα πᾶσα καθεστήκει ὀλέθρου, καὶ ἐπι- 


, , / ν , > > ’ὔ 
πεσοντες διδασκαλείῳ παίδων, oTEep μέγιστον ἫΝ αὐτόθι 


—13. οὐ μεγάλῃ: οὐ added from 
Vat. Strab., ix. 2. 11, 6411510 κώμη τῆς 
Ταναγρικῆς, and this agrees with ὡς 
ἐπὶ weyéGerin c. 30. 20. — 14. ἀπροσδοκή- 
τοις : in the act. sense (see on vi. 69. 
2) it takes, in consequence of the im- 
plied negation (= οὐ προσδοκῶσι), also 
the dependent-inf. with neg. μή after 
it. See onc. 6. 19; iii. 32. 14.—15. 
τοσοῦτον: about 30 stadia, and not 
so far as the city Tanagra is distant 
from the coast.—16. πεπτωκότος : 
fallen down. Cf. i. 89. 19; iv. 112. 6. 
—17. βραχέος κοδομημένου: the 
adj. is pred. as inc. 4. 11, ἐποικοδομή- 
. ὑψηλότερον. This part of 
the wall had not been built high in 
the beginning. 

19. τοὺς ἀνθρώπους. . . ἡλικίας: 
Paus., i. 23. 3, says of the same occur- 


σαντες. . 


rence, Μυκαλησσίων οὐ μόνον τὸ μάχι- 
μὸν οἱ Θρᾷκες, ἀλλὰ καὶ γυναῖκας ἐφό- 
νευσαν καὶ παῖδας. --- 21. ὅτῳ ἐντύχοιεν : 
prot.of general cond. For ὅτῳ in col- 


lective sense referring to pl. antec., 
see Kiihn. 359, 3 ¢ 8. —23. ὅσα ἄλλα 
ἔμψυχα: in the strong expression 
may be perceived the aversion with 
which the historian tells the story. — 
24. ὁμοῖα τοῖς μάλιστα: se. φονικοῖς. 
ὁμοῖα is adv., as ini. 25. 18; Hat. iii. 
8. 2; 57. 8; vii. 118. 8; 141. 4. On 
the phrase (=ut qui maxime), 
see Kiihn. 349”, note 5.—év ᾧ ἂν 
θαρσήσῃ : wherever they have courage, 


i.e. have nothing to fear. The aor. 
occurs also in ii. 79. 19. 
25. καὶ τότε... παίδων: and on 


this occasion not only did no slight 
tumult and every kind of destruction 
ensue, but also falling upon a boys’ 
school, etc. καὶ τότε introduces an 
example under ἃ general remark. 
Kr. Spr. 69, 32,8. ΟΥ̓ 6. 71.41. To 
ἄλλη τε corresponds καί before ἐπι- 
πεσόντες. πᾶσα ἰδέα asin il. 19. 1; 77. 
7; iii; 81: 22; 83.1; 98: 151. το 
— 27. ὅπερ μέγιστον nv... kal ἄρτι 


or 


90 


THUCYDIDES VII. 29, 30. 


, ὦ »» ε fe! 3 / , , 
και APTL ετυχον OL παῖδες ἐσεληλυθότες, κατέκοψαν πάν- 


Ἂς Ν lal / lA 9 lal Y “ 
tas: Kal ξυμφορὰ τῇ πόλει πάσῃ οὐδεμιᾶς ἥσσων μᾶλ- 
ε ’ 5 / / 3 74 v4 \ z 
30 λον ἑτέρας ἀδόκητός τε ἐπέπεσεν αὕτη Kal δεινή. 


΄ , 3A ‘\ os > Ν ΄ 

βόντες προκεχωρηκότας ἤδη τοὺς Θρᾷκας οὐ πολὺ τήν 
/ > , \ > Ν ᾽,ὔ , 

τε λείαν ἀφείλοντο καὶ αὐτοὺς φοβήσαντες καταδιώκου- 


= hes Ν + Ν δ; , a > “ \ 
Ow ἐπὶ TOV Ευριπον καὶ τὴν θάλασσαν. οὗ αὐτοῖς τὰ 


πλοῖα ἃ ἤγαγεν ὥρμει. 


> , x , » 3 v7 “ la 
ἐσβάσει τους πλείστους, OUTE ἐπισταμένους νειν, των TE 


3 a ΄ ε Cw ΠῚ a toy , » 
εν τοις πλοίοις, ως εωρῶν TQ εν ΤΊ) YN) ορμισαντων, ἔξω 


ἔτυχον οἱ παῖδες ἐσεληλυθότες : with- 
out repetition of the rel. pron. (és 6) 
in the second clause (cf. vi. 64. 18), 
and even without αὐτό, which is ex- 
pressed in the similar passage ii. 4. 
25. G. 1040; H. 1005; Kr. Spr. 60, 
6, 2.—29. καὶ ξυμφορὰ τῇ πόλει... 
καὶ δεινή : Thuc. sums up the horror 
of the whole affair in the most impres- 
sive manner, the subst. placed first, 
followed by the phrases οὐδεμιᾶς ἥσσων 
and μᾶλλον ἑτέρας, which have the 
force of sups., and the dem. pron. 
The position of the subst. gives it a 
character of generality with nearly 
the effect of the part. gen. See oni. 
-1.8. This passage differs, however, 
from those cited at i. 1. 8 in this re- 
spect, that here two qualities in their 
highest expression unite in a single 
case, viz. the extent of the destruc- 
tion (οὐδεμιᾶς ἥσσων) and the com- 
plete unexpectedness of it (μᾶλλον 
ἑτέρας ἀδόκητος). “ And so this blow, 
than which &o greater ever affected 
a whole city, was in the highest de- 
gree both unexpected and terrible.” 
μᾶλλον. . . ἀδόκητος and δεινή stand 
in pred. relation to ἐπέπεσεν. See 
App. 

30. Before they can embark, they are 
attacked by the Thebans, who had rushed 


to the rescue, and a large number is 
killed. 

1. αἰσθόμενοι: without obj. ex- 
pressed, referring to what precedes. 
See on i. 95. 21. ---καταλαβόντες mpo- 
κεχωρηκότας: finding that they had 
gone forward, 1.6. on the retreat 
toward the coast. καταλαμβάνειν in 
the sense find, discover (deprehen- 
do), takes regularly the partic. pres. 
or pf., never aor., since only existing 
states can be in question. G. 1582; 
H. 982. See oni. 59. 3.—3. αὐτοὺς 
φοβήσαντες: putting them to flight. 
Cf. c. 79. 23; iv. 56. 6.—5. ἃ ἤγα- 
yev: ἄγειν of ships, as in c. 25. 4; iii. 
On 8. No 27: 10) 

6. τοὺς πλείστους : closely 
nected with ἐν τῇ ἐσβάσει. ‘The sense 
is, most of those who were killed fell 
at the time of the embarkation. τοὺς 
πλείστους cannot refer here to the 
majority of the whole number, as is 
proved by ξύμπαντες... ἀπέθανον in 
14. For πλεῖστοι in this sense, cf. iv. 
44. 7 and Hat. vill. $89. 9. — οὔτε ém- 
σταμένους... TOV TE... ὁρμισάντων : 
on the connexion of partics. in differ- 
ent cases by copulative particles, see 


con- 


Kr. Spr. 56, 14, 2.—7. ἔξω rofevpa- 
ros: Without doubt the correct read- 
ing, although the Mss. have mostly 


re 


3 


Oe 


Oi δὲ Θηβαῖοι αἰσθόμενοι ἐβοήθουν, καὶ Karaha- 1 


AQ ° , a lot 
καὶ ἀποκτείνουσιν αὐτῶν ἐν τῇ 2 


THUCYDIDES VII. 30. 


’ὔ Ν lal 5 ‘ ¥ a“ 3, > 4 
τοξεύματος Ta Tota: ἐπεὶ ἔν ye τῇ ἄλλῃ ἀναχωρήσει 


> > / ε oO Ν ‘\ “A / ε / 
οὐκ ἀτόπως οἱ Θρᾷκες πρὸς TO τῶν Θηβαίων ἱππικόν, 


Ψ a ΄, ΄ ΄ Ν " 
10 oT7Tep πρῶτον προσέκειτο, προεκθέοντές TE καὶι EvoTpe- 


, 5 5 ᾿ 4 Ν Ν 5 “Ὁ Ν 
φόμενοι εν εἐπιχωριῳ τάξει ΤῊΝ φυλακὴν εἐποίουντο, και 


ὀλίγοι αὐτῶν ἐν τούτῳ διεφθάρησαν. 


μέρος δέ τι καὶ ἐν 


τῇ πόλει αὐτῇ du ἁρπαγὴν ἐγκαταληφθὲν ἀπώλετο. ot 


δὲ ΄ “ A 4 Ν ’ > XN 
€ ξύμπαντες TOV Opakwv πεντήκοντα Kal διακόσιοι ἀπὸ 


4 Ἀ A Dum BP, 
15 τριακοσιων και χιλίων ἀπέθανον. 


διέφθειραν δὲ καὶ 


τῶν Θηβαίων καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ot ξυνεβοήθησαν ἐς εἴκοσι 


΄ Ν ε a \ A 
μάλιστα ἱππέας τε Kal ὁπλίτας ὁμοῦ καὶ Θηβαίων τῶν 


βοιωταρχῶν Σκιρφώνδαν: τῶν δὲ Μυκαλησσίων μέρος 


τι ἀπανηλώθη. 


Xv Ν Ν Ν "ἢ -' 
τὰ μὲν κατὰ τὴν Μυκαλησσὸν πάθει 


20 χρησαμένην οὐδενὸς ὡς ἐπὶ μεγέθει τῶν κατὰ τὸν πόλε- 


μον ἧσσον ὀλοφύρασθαι ἀξίῳ τοιαῦτα ξυνέβη. 


ἔξω (ζεύγματος. See App.—S8. ἐπεί 
κτὲ.: gives the cause of the above 
ἀποκτείνουσιν αὐτῶν ἐν τῇ ἐσβάσει τοὺς 
πλείστους: “ for elsewhere (ἐν τῇ ἄλλῃ 
ἀναχωρήσει) on the retreat they lost 
not 50 many men, since they knew 
how to defend themselves not unskil- 
fully.” — 9. οὐκ ἀτόπως: Schol., 
οὐκ ἀκόσμως. It belongs with the fol- 
lowing description of the fighting. — 
11. ἐν ἐπιχωρίῳ τάξει: after the man- 
ner of sighting of their country (προεκθεῖν 
and ἐξυστρέφεσθαι), which they used 
οὐκ ἀτόπως. Cf. Hdt. ix. 62. 14, προεξαΐσ- 
σοντες κατ᾽ ἕνα καὶ δέκα, καὶ πλεῦνές τε 
καὶ ἐλάσσονες συστρεφόμενοι, ἐσέπιπτον 


ἐς τοὺς Σπαρτιήτας. --- 12. ἐν τούτῳ: 
ἴ.6. ἐν τῷ προεκθέοντας καὶ ξυστρεφομέ- 
νους τὴν φυλακὴν ποιεῖσθαι. --- 18. ἐγκα- 


ταληφθέν: 1.6. since in their greed for 
plunder they had allowed themselves 
to be surprised. Cf. iv. 8. 48; 35. 6; 
v. 3. 6.—ot ξύμπαντες : all together. 
See one. 1.91. Was Diitrephes among 
the slain? See App. 

16. és εἴκοσι μάλιστα : about twenty. 


See Kiihn. 432, 1, 1b; Kr. Spr. 60, 
8, 1.— 17. τῶν βοιωταρχῶν: the 
whole number of Boeotarchs was 
eleven, of whom four were Thebans 
— two for the city, two for Plataea 
and other subject towns — the rest (in 
varying proportion) from the remain- 
ing cities. See Oxyrhynchus Papyri 
V. 842. col. xii. 8 ff. 

18. τῶν Μυκαλησσίων: i.c. of the 
armed citizens who had joined in the 
pursuit with the Thebans. — μέρος τι: 
a considerable part. Cf. i. 23. 16; ii. 
64. 7; iv. 30. 2.—19. τὰ κατὰ τὴν 
Μυκαλησσὸν ... τοιαῦτα ξυνέβη: cf 
similar concluding sents. in iii. 50. 18, 
τὰ κατὰ Λέσβον οὕτως ἐγένετο; iii. 68. 
30, τὰ κατὰ Πλάταιαν .. @pUTws ἐτελεύ- 
tnoev. Cf. also iv. 48 ὃ 5. CI. 
thinks, with St., that Reiske’s emen- 
dation, χρησαμέν nv for χρησαμένων, 
is necessary, esp. on account of the 
following ὡς ἐπὶ μεγέθει. This is doubt- 
less better, though the Schol. has χρη- 
σαμένων - τῶν Μυκαλησσίων δηλονότι. ---- 
20. ὡς ἐπὶ μεγέθει: sc. τῆς πόλεως, in 


THUCYDIDES VII. 31. 


‘O δὲ Δημοσθένης τότε ἀποπλέων ἐπὶ τῆς Κερκύ. 1 


x Ν 3 Ὁ Be 7 c 4 ε lal 
pas μετὰ τὴν ἐκ τῆς Λακωνικῆς τείχισιν, ὁλκάδα ορμου- 


σαν ἐν Φειᾷ τῇ Ἡλείων εὑρών, ἐν ἣ οἱ Κορίνθιοι ὁπλῖται 


ἐς τὴν Σικελίαν ἔμελλον περαιοῦσθαι, αὐτὴν μὲν δια- 


5 φθείρει, οἱ δ᾽ avdpes ἀποφυγόντες ὕστερον λαβόντες 


ἄλλην ἔπλεον. 


ἣν \ a > ΄ ε ΄ 
καὶ μετὰ τοῦτο ἀφικόμενος ὁ Δημοσθέ. 


vys ἐς τὴν Ζάκυνθον καὶ Κεφαλληνίαν ὁπλίτας τε παρ- 


4 Ν 5 A , “A ’ὔ , 
éhaBe καὶ ἐκ τῆς Ναυπάκτου τῶν Μεσσηνίων μετεπέμ- 


Ἂς » An 
ψατο, Kal ἐς THY ἀντιπέρας ἤπειρον τῆς ᾿Ακαρνανίας 


, > , ΄ ν 93 , a δ, 4 ” 
10 διέβη, ἐς ᾿Αλύζειάν τε καὶ ᾿Ανακτόριον, ὃ αὐτοὶ εἶχον. ὄντι 


δ᾽ 5 A“ Ν lal ε 5 “ὃ ΕῚ a ΕἸ “ - 
αὐυτῳ πέρι ταυτα O Ευρυμέ ων ATAVT A εκ τὴς alKE- 


λίας ἀποπλέων, ὃς τότε τοῦ χειμῶνος τὰ χρήματα ἄγων 


proportion to the size (of the city). Cf. 
iii. 113. 25, ὡς πρὸς τὸ μέγεθος τῆς πό- 
λεως. 

31. Demosthenes takes measures, dur- 
ing the further course of his voyage to 
Sicily, for the reinforcement of his fleet 
and for the security of Naupactus and the 
adjacent regions. He unites forces with 
his colleague Eurymedon, whom he meets 
returning from Sicily. 

1. τότε ἀποπλέων: cf. c. 26. 14, 
where the word παραπλεῖν is used of 
the actual course of the voyage at 
that moment. — 2. ἐκ τῆς Λακωνικῆς : 
with unusual after-effect of ἀποπλέων 
= ἀποπλέων ἐκ τῆς Λακωνικῆς μετὰ THY 


ἐν αὐτῇ γενομένην τείχισιν. —3. ἐν 
Φειᾷ: the port of Olympia. See 


Curtius, Pelop. II. p. 45. Cf. ii. 25. 
16. ---εὐρών : the reading of Vat., 
adopted also by St., instead of the 
vulgate, λαβών, which is incompati- 
ble with διαφθείρει. For similar use 
of cipiccev, cf. ii. ὁ. 14; v. 42. 7. 
See on καταλαβόντες, c. 30. 1. — οἱ 
Κορίνθιοι ὁπλῖται: cf. ο. 17. ὃ 3; το. 
ὃ 4. This one ship had got sep- 
arated from the squadron of Alexar- 


chus, as in the similar case mentioned 
{πΠ| ΟἹ 25. 11: 

8. τῶν Μεσσηνίων : sc. ὁπλίτας. ---9ϑ. 
τῆς Axapvavias: this coast Demosthe- 
nes had become well acquainted with 
during his campaigns in the summer 
and autumn of 426 B.c. (iii. 94 ff.). — 10. 
᾿Αλυΐειαν : cf. Strab. x. 2.21, ἡ ᾿Αλύζεια 
πεντεκαίδεκα ἀπὸ θαλάττης διέχει στα- 
δίους. On the form, see App. —atrot: 
sc. οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, who occupied it in the 
autumn of 425 B.c. (iv. 49) and had 
not given it up again. Cf. v. 30. 15. 

11. περὶ ταῦτα: Schol. ἤγουν περὶ 
τὸ συλλέγειν δύναμιν. On this use of 
περί, see Kr. Spr. 68, 33, 2. — Eupupe- 
Sov: having accomplished the voyage 
to Syracuse on which he had been 
sent (c. 16. 10), he was now on his 
way back to Athens, but meeting with 
Demosthenes entered immediately on 
his duties as joint commander, to 
which position he had been elected, 
c. 16. 8.—12. τότε τοῦ χειμῶνος: cf. 
c. 16. 10, περὶ ἡλίου τροπὰς Tas χειμερι- 
vas. τότε used often of a time taken 
for granted as well known. See on 
i. 101. 9. -- τὰ χρήματα ἄγων: of. 


THUCYDIDES VII. 31. 


An A 93 , A) 3 / ’ ¥ Ἂς 9 
τῇ στρατιᾷ ἀπεπέμφθη, καὶ ἀγγέλλει τά TE ἄλλα καὶ ὅτι 


, Ν a A ΕΝ Ν , Ε. ΤῊΣ a 
πύθοιτο κατὰ πλοῦν ἤδη ὧν τὸ Π]λημμύριον ὑπὸ τῶν 


15 Συρακοσίων ἑαλωκός. 


ἀφικνεῖται δὲ καὶ Κόνων παρ᾽ 


> la ἃ 3 4 5 /, ν ε ΄ Ἂ 
αὐτούς, ὃς ἦρχε Ναυπάκτου, ἀγγέλλων οτι αἱ πέντε καὶ 


ΕἾ A A ΄ ε ΄ὕ΄ > la Ξ, 
εἴκοσι νῆες τῶν Κορινθίων αἱ σφίσιν ἀνθορμοῦσαι οὔτε 


’ὔ Ν ΄ A /, , 
καταλύουσι τὸν πόλεμον ναυμαχεῖν τε μέλλουσι: πέμ- 


> 5» ΄, > Ν lal c 5 ε Ν » 
πειν ουν ἐκέλευεν QvUTOUS ναῦς, WS ουχ ἱκανὰς ουσας 


“ ϑι Ἂς ~ Ν ’ 
20 δυοῖν δεούσας εἴκοσι τὰς ἑαυτῶν πρὸς τὰς ἐκείνων πέντε 


\ » A 
και ELKOOL ναυμάᾶχειν. 


“~ \ > ἐλ 4 nw ε 
T@ μεν οὖν Κόνωνι δέκα ναῦς ὁ 


Δημοσθένης καὶ ὁ Evpupédav τὰς ἄριστα σφίσι πλεού- 


27> ® SEEN es ΄ \ \ 2 a 
σας ἀφ ων αυτοι εὐχον ξυμπέμπουσι προς TAS EV ΤΊ) 


Ναυπάκτῳ: αὐτοὶ δὲ τὰ περὶ τῆς στρατιᾶς τὸν ξύλλογον 


25 ἡτοιμάζοντο, Εὐρυμέδων μὲν ἐς τὴν Κέρκυραν πλεύσας 


c. 16. 12. ---14, κατὰ πλοῦν : as in iii. 
32.2. Cf. καθ᾽ ὅδόν, ν. 3. 14; 37. 6. - 
τὸ ΤἸΠ]λημμύριον.... ἑαλωκός : cfc. 23. 
§ 1. 

15. Κόνων : without doubt the 
same who was prominent toward the 
end of the Peloponnesian War and 
later. He seems at this time to have 
had command both of the town and 
of the fleet stationed there. Diphilus 
no doubt came a little later, with 
reinforcements, to supersede Conon. 
Cf. c. 34.13.—16. at πέντε kal εἴκοσι 
... ἀνθορμοῦσαι: cf. c.17.§ 4; το. § 5. 
σφίσιν, sc. τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις, is spoken 
from Conon’s standpoint. For pl., 
see on c. 1.27. — 17. οὔτε καταλύουσι 
τὸν πόλεμον: Thuc. seems to have 
chosen the unusual expression, κατα- 
λύειν τὸν πόλεμον, “leave off mili- 
tary operations,” on account of the 
extraordinary circumstances. War 
had not yet been declared between 
Athens and the Peloponnesian alli- 
ance; and though arms had been 
gradually taken up everywhere, it 
was still possible to return to peace- 


ful relations. The 25 Corinthian 
ships had been sent out with the 
special object of protecting, the ves- 
sels intended for Sicily (c. 17. § 4; 
19. § 5), and since these had now 
gone safely past Naupactus, there was 
no further cause for hostilities, and it 
might have been expected that they 
would abandon their hostile attitude 
(καταλύσειν αὐτοὺς τὸν πόλεμον). But 
this was not the case; on the con- 
trary, they showed an inclination to 
risk a sea-fight with the Athenians. 
This contrast is appropriately ex- 
pressed by the co-ord. const. οὔτε ka- 
ταλύουσι Toy πόλεμον ναυμαχεῖν TE μέλ- 
λουσι. See App.—19. ὡς: with ace. 
abs., a8 in 1. 134. 215 vi, 21. ΤΠ se vane 
66. 20. GMT. 853; H. 974; Kr; 
Spr. δύ, 9, 4.— 20. δυοῖν δεούσας 
εἴκοσι: pred. to τὰς ἑαυτῶν. How the 
fleet of 20 triremes of c. 19. 28 had 
been reduced to 18 is not stated. 

23. ξυμπέμπουσι: send along with. 
Cf. ii. 12. 11; iv. 80, 21.—24. περὶ 
τῆς στρατιᾶς τὸν ξύλλογον : for order, 
see on Cc, 24. 5. ξύλλογος in the sense 


4 


THUCYDIDES VII. 31, 32. 


x 4 - lal lal , 5 ἣν \ 
και πεντεκαίδεκά TE VaUS πληροῦν κελεύσας αὐυτους και 


ὁπλίτας καταλεγόμενος (ξυνῆρχε γὰρ ἤδη Δημοσθένει 


ἀποτραπόμενος, ὥσπερ καὶ ἡρέθη), Δημοσθένης δ᾽ ἐκ 


“ Ν Ν 3 ΄’ / ὃ » Ν 
τῶν περὶ τὴν ᾿Ακαρνανίαν χωρίων σφενδονήτας τε καὶ 


’ὔ 
80 ἀκοντιστὰς ξυναγείρων. 


“ A Ν lal 
Οἱ δ᾽ ἐκ τῶν Συρακουσῶν τότε μετὰ THY τοῦ ΤΙλημ- 


μυρίου ἅλωσιν πρέσβεις οἰχόμενοι ἐς τὰς πόλεις, ἐπειδὴ 


» ’ὕ Ἂς ’ὔ ϑ, »»Μ ἃς 
ἔπεισάν τε καὶ ξυναγείραντες ἔμελλον ἄξειν τὸν στρα- 


ν ε vA A6 , 5 lol τ an 
Tov, ὁ Νικίας προπυθόμενος πέμπει ἐς τῶν Σικελῶν 


δ τοὺς τὴν δίοδον ἔχοντας καὶ σφίσι ξυμμάχους, Κεντόρι- 


mas τε καὶ ᾿Αλικυαίους καὶ ἄλλους, ὅπως μὴ διαφρήσουσι 


τοὺς πολεμίους, ἀλλὰ ξυστραφέντες κωλύσουσι διελθεῖν - 


of bringing together troops from all 
quarters only here, but corresponding 
to the freq. use of ξυλλέγειν. Chic. 
7. 7, etc. — 27. ξυνῆρχε: see on 11.— 
28. ἀποτραπόμενος:: 1.6. giving up the 
voyage home (ἀποπλέων in 12) and 
turning back toward Sicily. Cf: iii. 
80. ὅ. ---ἠρέθη : see on 11. 

82. In Sicily, meanwhile, the Sicel 


allies of the Athenians, at the request of 


Nicias, attack the reinforcements sent by 
the Siceliote cities to Syracuse and de- 
stroy about 800. The rest escape to 
Syracuse. 

1. οἱ δ᾽ ἐκ... πρέσβεις : the subj. 
of the ἐπειδή clause placed first for 
emphasis. Kiihn. 606, 7.— τότε μετὰ 
τὴν τοῦ ΤΙ]λημμυρίου ἅλωσιν: refers 
to 6. 25. 9. ΑΒ to τότε, see on ©. 31. 
12.—2. οἰχόμενοι ἐς τὰς odes: the 
partic. is attrib. Thuc. is fond of 
placing the attrib. partic. after the 
noun whenever other modifiers are 
added. See oni. 11.19. The cities 
esp. meant are Selinus and Himera, 
for Camarina and Gela are referred 
to separately in c. 33. 2,4. Cfic. 25. 


98. --- 4. προπυθόμενος : Vat. has only 
πυθόμενος, but προπυθόμενος is quite 
appropriate, and occurs besides in 
similar connexion in iv. 42. 14.—5. 
τοὺς τὴν δίοδον ἔχοντας: 1.6. those 
who dwelt on the road leading from 
the northern part of the island to 
Syracuse. With this agrees the situ- 
ation of Κεντόριπα, Centuripa of 
the Romans, now Centorbi (Holm, I. 
Ρ. 68), about 25 miles west of Aetna. 
A town Alicyae in this region is un- 
known. A place of the name situ- 
ated in the north-western part of the 
isiand between Segesta and Selinus 
can hardly be the one referred to. 
Cf. vi. 88. 8 4; 94. ὃ 9. -- σφίσι : from 
Vat. only, but indispensable with ξυμ- 
μάχους. For pl., see on 6. 1. 27.—6. 
διαφρήσουσι : Dobree’s conjecture for 
the vulgate διαφήσουσι, adopted by 
Bk., Bm., and St. A comparison with 
Ar. Av. 193, τῶν μηρίων τὴν κνῖσαν ov 
διαφρήσετε, leaves scarcely a doubt as 
to its correctness. Cf. Δ μοί. Mag- 
num, p. 246, 43, διαφρῶ σημαίνει τὸ 
διακομίζω καὶ εἰσιέναι καὶ ἀφιέναι ποιῶ 


ὧι 


~ 


THUCYDIDES VII. 32, 33. 


ΕΣ Ν > \ 2Q\ , > la ‘ x 
adn yap αὐτοὺς οὐδὲ πειράσει»" Ακραγαντινοι γὰρ οὐκ 


ἐδίδοσαν διὰ τῆς ἑαυτῶν ὁδόν. 


πορευομένων δ᾽ ἤδη τῶν 


lal , a 
10 Σικελιωτῶν ot Σικελοί, καθάπερ ἐδέοντο οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, 


ἐνέδραν [τινὰ τριχῆ | ποιησάμενοι ἀφυλάκτοις τε καὶ ἐξαίφ- 


9 ’ ». 5 5 / , 
νῆς ἐπιγενόμενοι διέφθειραν ἐς ὀκτακοσίους μάλιστα 


Ἂς Ν / \ crx la) ’ , 
καὶ τοὺς πρέσβεις πλὴν ἑνὸς τοῦ Κορινθίου πάντας - 


os 
ου- 


\ \ , 3 ΄ \ ΄ 
τος δὲ τους διαφυγόντας, ες πεντακοσίους και χιλίους, 


33 ἐκόμισεν ἐς τὰς Συρακούσας. 


καὶ περὶ τὰς αὐτὰς ἡμέρας 


A ε r A 5 Ὁ 5 A “ 
και οἱ Καμαριναῖοι ἀφικνοῦνται αὑτοις βοηθοῦντες, πεν - 


΄, \ ε A / de 3 \ Ν , 
TAKOOLOL μεν ὅπλῖται, τριακοσίοι € ακοντισται και τοζό. 


, 
ται TPlLaKOO LOL. 


\ \ e A 
ἔπεμψαν δὲ καὶ ot Γελῷοι ναυτικόν Te, 


lal Ν 5 SS ’ὔ Ν ε ,’ 
ἐς πέντε ναυς, καὶ ακοντιστας τετρακοσίους και νππεος 


διακοσίους. 


σχεδὸν γάρ τι ἤδη ἅπασα ἡ Σικελία, πλὴν 


> ΄ a > 50" “ναῦν > ε > 
Δκραγαντίνων, ουτοι ὃ οὐδὲ μεθ ETEPWV Yoav, Ou ὃ 


» 5. Na , \ a , ε RA. 
ἄλλοι ἐπὶ τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους μετὰ τῶν Συρακοσίων ot πρό- 


’ , = ’, 
τερον περιορώμενοι ξυστάντες ἐβοήθουν. 


— 8. ἄλλῃ : by another way, 1.6. than the 
main road. Cf. c. 70. 27.—’Akpa- 
γαντῖνοι οὐκ ἐδίδοσαν ὁδόν: on ac- 
count of their neutrality. Cf. ο. 33.7. 

11. [twa τριχῆ]: Cl. brackets 
both words as inappropriate to the 
context; the most of the editt. only 
τριχῆ. Twa is wanting in Vat., τριχῆ in 
most of the Mss. —adbvAdkTots Te καὶ 
ἐξαίφνης : the adv. modifiers in differ- 
ent forms, as in c. 13. 1,2; 40.10. Kr. 
Spr. 59, 2,3.—13. τοῦ Κορινθίου: cf. 
c. 25. 59.—15. ἐκόμισεν: as in c. 20. 
5, implying the idea of bringing 
through safely. 

39. But gradually nearly all the Greek 
cities in Sicily declare for Syracuse, ex- 
cept Agrigentum, which remains neutral. 
Demosthenes and Eurymedon continue 
their voyage toward Sicily, and stop some 
time at Thurii. 


2. ot Καμαριναῖοι: they had de- 


cided in the negotiations of the pre- 
ceding year, ἐν τῷ παρόντι μηδετέροις 
ἀμύνειν, vi. 88. 14.—4. οἱ Tedrwor: as 
to their zeal for Syracuse before this 
time, cfc. I. 21; vi. 67. 18.—5. és 
πέντε ναῦς : Appos. to ναυτικόν. 

6. σχεδόν τι ἅπασα: almost all. 
Naxus and Catana were still wanting. 
ἅπασα is adopted from Vat. as stronger 
than the vulgate πᾶσα. ( c. 15. 4. 
σχεδόν τι, as in 11]. 68. 27; v. 66. 10. 
—7. οὐδὲ μεθ᾽ ἑτέρων : neutral, as in 
ii. 67. 84; 72.11; vi. 44. 20.—ot δ᾽ 
ἄλλοι: resumes ἅπασα ἡ Σικελία after 
οὗτοι 6... ἦσαν, which on account of 
its influence on the const. of the re- 
mainder of the sent. is not to be put in 
parenthesis. — 8. ot πρότερον περιορώ- 
μενοι: Supplementary attrib. explana- 
tion referring esp. to the Camarinaeans. 
περιορώμενοι, eEXSpectantes even- 
tum, as in iv. 73. 5; vi. 93. 3; 103. 10. 


So 


10 


15 


20 


THUCYDIDES VII. 33. 


ae \ ΄ ε ἌΓ, ἣν Sui) 95 a 
Kat ot μὲν Συρακόσιοι, ws αὐτοῖς τὸ ἐν τοῖς Σικε- 
λοῖς πάθος ἐγένετο, ἐπέσχον τὸ εὐθέως τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις 
5 A ε \ »Ἤ Ν > ΄, ε , 
ἐπιχειρεῖν: ὁ δὲ Δημοσθένης καὶ Εὐρυμέδων, ETOLLNS 
ΕΣ A A » 3, AS Ἢ 
ἤδη τῆς στρατιᾶς οὔσης ἔκ τε τῆς Κερκύρας καὶ ἀπὸ 
lol , ~ a 
τῆς ἠπείρου, ἐπεραιώθησαν ξυμπάσῃ τῇ στρατιᾷ τὸν 
7. 7 Cee ¥ 3 / \ ε , Tare 
Ιόνιον ἐπ᾿ ἄκραν ᾿Ιαπυγίαν- Kat ὁρμηθέντες αὐτόθεν 
, 23 4 Ν 
κατίσχουσιν ἐς τὰς Χοιράδας νήσους ᾿Ιαπυγίας, καὶ ἀκον- 
A Ν ΄“ 
τιστάς τέτινας τῶν ᾿Ιαπύγων πεντήκοντα καὶ ἑκατὸν τοῦ 
, » > , 2 Χ δ a \ A 
Μεσσαπίου ἔθνους ἀναβιβάζονται ἐπὶ τὰς ναῦς, Kal τῷ 
ΕΣ ν Ἂν Ν 5 Ν , xX 
Αρτᾳ, ὅσπερ καὶ τοὺς ἀκοντιστὰς δυνάστης ὧν παρέσχεν 
lal ’ 74 ἴω 
αὐτοῖς, ἀνανεωσάμενοί τινα παλαιὰν φιλίαν ἀφικνοῦνται 
5 , Ὁ“ 5 ’ Ν ἣν / 
ἐς Μεταπόντιον τῆς Ἰταλίας. καὶ τοὺς Μεταποντίους 
A 5» , 
πείσαντες κατὰ TO ξυμμαχικὸν ἀκοντιστάς τε ξυμπέμ- 
“ ‘\ Ν lal 
TEW τριακοσίους καὶ τριήρεις δύο Kal ἀναλαβόντες ταῦτα 


- 3 ’ 
παρέπλευσαν ἐς Θουρίαν. 


11. ἐπέσχον τὸ ἐπιχειρεῖν: cf. ii. 
81.19; Soph. Phil. 881, μηδ᾽ ἐπίσχω- 
μεν τὸ πλεῖν; Dem. Χχι. 12, τὸ λαμβά- 
νειν δίκην ἐπέσχετε. See on ii. 76. 4. 
ἐπέχειν is wot used in the mid. in 
Thuc., and in the sense “refrain from” 
perhaps only in aor.—13. ἔκ te τῆς 
Κερκύρας καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς ἠπείρου: cf. c. 
31. ὃ 5.—14. τὸν Ἰόνιον: without 
κόλπον, as in Vi. 30.6; 34.24; 104. 10. 
See on iii. 107. 4.—15. ἄκραν Ἰαπυ- 
yiav: the promontory on the northern 
side of the bay of Tarentum. Cf. vi. 
30. 5; 34. 22; 44. 9. 

16. Χοιράδας : in the inner recess 
of the Tarentine bay before the 
harbour of Tarentum, inhabited by 
lapygians (νήσους ᾿Ιαπυγίας), to which 
people the tribe of the Messapians 
belonged. See Niebuhr, Rom. Hist. 
I. p. 146.—17. τινας : about, belong- 
ing to πεντήκοντα καὶ ἑκατόν. Kr. Spr. 
ΠΟ Ἢ 07 δ: 74. 19; 87. 15. 11]. 
68. 16; 111.17; vili.21.4.—19. "Apra: 


Ν , Ἂς 
καὶ καταλαμβάνουσι νεωστὶ 


a prince of the Messapians, who 


was hostile to the Tarentines. See 
Niebuhr, ibid. p. 150. He is men- 
tioned in Athenaeus, ili. p. 108 f, 


(who cites this passage) as Μεσσαπίων 
βασιλεὺς τῶν ἐν “larvyia. — δυνάστης: 
used in Thue. only here of a_bar- 
barian prince. — 20. twa: it is im- 
plied perhaps that Thue. did not know 
the particulars. — 21. τῆς ᾿Ιταλίας: 
added because at this point the boun- 
dary of ancient Italy begins. See on 
ΟΣ Ὁ: 

22. κατὰ τὸ ξυμμαχικόν : the treaty 
has not been mentioned before. — 23. 
ἀναλαβόντες : taking with them, as in 
ὁ. 86. ὃ; v. 64. 20. ταῦτα refers to 
ἀκοντιστάς and τριήρεις together. Vat. 
reads αὐτάς, which is perhaps prefer- 
able, since the 300 javelin-men were no 
doubt on the triremes. — 24. ἐς Oov- 
ρίαν: the city, not the country, must 
be meant here, as in vi. 61. 36; 104. 
13, for the country is called ἡ @ov- 


59 


3 


4 


60 THUCYDIDES VII. 33, 34. 


A 3 ΄, ᾿ \ 
25 στάσει τοὺς τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἐναντίου: ἐκπεπτωκότας - Kal 6 
Ν lal 
βουλόμενοι τὴν στρατιὰν αὐτόθι πᾶσαν ἀθροίσαντες εἴ 
ε / > / \ x ,ὔ lal , 
τις ὑπελέλειπτο ἐξετάσαι καὶ τοὺς Θουρίους πεῖσαι σφίσι 
ε 
ξυστρατεύειν τε ὡς προθυμότατα καί, ἐπειδήπερ ἐν, 
΄΄ ΄ EL Ν 3 Ν > θ Ν Ν Ὅν lal 
τούτῳ τύχης εἰσί, τοὺς αὐτοὺς ἐχθροὺς καὶ φίλους τοῖς 
80 ᾿Αθηναί (ζε έμενον ἐν τῇ Θουρί i ἔ 
ηναίοις νομίζειν, περιέμενον ἐν τῇ Θουρίᾳ καὶ ἔπρασ- 
σον ταῦτα. 
, \ ἣς lal 
54 Οἱ δὲ Πελοποννήσιοι περὶ τὸν αὐτὸν χρόνον τοῦ- 1 
A Ν κά 9 A 
TOV OL ἐν ταῖς πέντε καὶ εἴκοσι ναυσίν, οἵπερ τῶν ὁλκά- 
4 “A ΕῚ ΄ὔ δὴ > Ἃ Ν ἣν 
δων ἕνεκα τῆς ἐς Σικελίαν κομιδῆς ἀνθώρμουν πρὸς τὰς 
3 Us “A ΄ ¢ + ae / 
ἐν Ναυπάκτῳ ναῦς, παρασκευασάμενοι ὡς ἐπὶ ναυμαχίᾳ 
5 καὶ προσπληρώσαντες ἔτι ναῦς, ὥστε ὀλίγῳ ἐλάσσους εἶ- 
Lal lo “ “~ ε ,’ Ν 5 
ναι αὐτοῖς τῶν ᾿Αττικῶν νεῶν, ὁρμίζονται κατὰ ᾿Ερινεὸν 


ριάς in c. 35. 6. Steph. Byz. says 34. About this time the fleets of the 


that the name was written @oupia and 
Θούριον, as well as Θούριοι, and Eckhel 
describes a coin with the inscription 
@OYPIA. (Arn.) Thuc. uses Θούριοι 
only of the inhabitants (below, 27; 
35- 2; 57- 58; vi. 104. 22; viii. 84. 3). 
---καταλαμβάνουσι.... ἐκπεπτωκότας : 
see on c. 30. 1. 

26. εἴ τις ὑπελέλειπτο: to be con- 
nected,Cl. thinks, with ἐξετάσαι. A final 
muster is meant, such as was called 
ἐπεξέτασις in vi. 42.2. They wished, 
after bringing together all the gradu- 
ally enlisted military forces, once more 
to examine closely whether all were 
present, no one left behind. St., claim- 
ing that with Cl.’s view the pf. is 
necessary, connects it with ἀθροίσαντες, 
which seems preferable, though the 
plpf. in indir. disc. might be admissible. 
— 28. ἐν τούτῳ τύχης : 1.6. freed from 
the anti-Attic party. 
on ὁ. 2. 16.—30. ἔπρασσον ταῦτα: 
i.e. they were occupied with negotia- 
tions concerning a full alliance. 


For const. see 


Athenians and the Peloponnesians, which 
had been lying opposite one another in 
the Corinthian gulf, fight a battle near 
Erineus on the coast of Achaia. Each 
claims the victory, but neither gains a 
decided advantage. 

2. οἱ ἐν ταῖς πέντε καὶ εἴκοσι vav- 
σίν: cf.c.17.§ 4; το. ὃ 5; 91. ὃ 4.-- 
3. ἕνεκα: placed, as in i. 57. 10 (τῆς 
Ποτειδαίας ἕνεκα ἀποστάσεως), between 
the objective and the governing gen., 
for τῶν ὁλκάδων depends upon τῆς . . . 
κομιδῆς. --- 4. ὡς ἐπὶ ναυμαχίᾳ: with 
the intention of fighting, as in iii. 
4. 6; vi. 34. 33. Cf. ὡς ἐπὶ ναυμα- 
xiav in same sense in i. 48. 2; 11. 83. 
10; 85. 12;.86. 3; iv. τὸ Ro. 
προσπληρώσαντες ἔτι ναῦς: Schol. 
προσέτι ἄλλας πληρώσαντες. The arri- 
val of fresh ships is implied. Cf. vi. 
104. 12.—6. ’Epweov: a small place 
on a bay of the gulf of Corinth east 
of Rhium, the harbour of the town 
Rhypes or Rhypae. See Curtius. Pelop. 
TI. p. 458; Bursian, IT. pp. 315, 330. 


10 


15 


20 


THUCYDIDES VII. 34. 


τῆς ᾿Αχαΐας ἐν τῇ Ῥυπικῇ. καὶ αὐτοῖς, τοῦ χωρίου μηνο- 
ὃ la x. 5.15 ἘΝ ν ε Ν Ν ε ΄ A 
ειδοῦς ὄντος ἐφ᾽ ᾧ ὥρμουν, ὁ μὲν πεζὸς ἑκατέρωθεν 
προσβεβοηθηκὼς τῶν τε Κορινθίων καὶ τῶν αὐτόθεν 
ξυμμάχων ἐπὶ ταῖς προανεχούσαις ἄκραις παρετέτακτο, 
ε Ν “ Ἂς \ > ἫΝ ’΄ > \ nw 
αἱ δὲ νῆες TO μεταξὺ εἶχον ἐμφράξασαι - ἦρχε δὲ τοῦ vav- 
τικοῦ Πολυάνθης Κορίνθιος. οἱ δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐκ τῆς 
Ναυπάκτου τριάκοντα ναυσὶ καὶ τρισίν (ἦρχε δὲ αὐτῶν 
Δίφιλος) ἐπέπλευσαν αὐτοῖς. καὶ οἱ Κορίνθιοι τὸ μὲν 
πρῶτον ἡσύχαζον, ἔπειτα ἀρθέντος αὐτοῖς τοῦ σημείου, 
3 \ Ἂν > , ἊΝ ν 3 \ Ἁ > , 
ἐπεὶ καιρὸς ἐδόκει εἶναι, ὥρμησαν ἐπὶ τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους 
ΔΝ 4 \ , > A Ν 3 , Ν 
και ἐναυμάχουν. καὶ χρόνον ἀντεῖχον πολὺν ἀλλήλοις. καὶ 
nr Ν , Aw ““ , las A 
τῶν μὲν Κορινθίων τρεῖς νῆες διαφθείρονται, τῶν δὲ 
3 ’, ’, Ν -᾿ ’ ε “A e ἧς if, 
Αθηναίων κατέδυ μὲν οὐδεμία ἁπλῶς, ἑπτὰ δέ τινες 
+ 5 7 5 / > , Ν 5 
ἄπλοι ἐγένοντο, ἀντίπρωροι ἐμβαλλόμεναι καὶ avappa- 
γεῖσαι τὰς παρεξειρεσίας ὑπὸ τῶν Κορινθίων νεῶν ἐπ᾽ 


7. αὐτοῖς: the dat. placed thus 
early in the sent. has a general rela- 
tion to the whole, and is only loosely 
connected with παρετέτακτο. Of. i. 6. 
8; 48. 9, etc. — Tot χωρίου μηνοειδοῦς 
ὄντος: the bay itself in which the 
ships had taken their station, so that 
the land troops could be drawn up on 
the promontories on either side, ταῖς 
mpoavexovoats (Vat., vulgate ἀνεχού- 
gas) &kpas. —9. τῶν αὐτόθεν ξυμ- 
μάχων : sc. ᾿Αχαιῶν, who were already 
at that time all on the Lacedaemo- 
nian side. Cf. ii. 9. ὃ 2. τῶν αὐτόθεν 
as in vi. 25. 15 and freq.—11. ἐμφρά- 
ξασαι: 1.6. by their position barring 
the entrance to the bay. Cf. iv. 8. 22. 

13. τριάκοντα ναυσὶ καὶ τρισί: in 
addition to the 18 triremes that Conon 
had, and the 10 given him by Demos- 
thenes and Eurymedon (c. 31. § 4,5), 
still others had prob. been brought by 
Diphilus. See on ec, 31. 15, 


15, ἀρθέντος αὐτοῖς τοῦ σημείου : 
the raising of a flag or some such 
signal is implied. The opposite is τὰ 
σημεῖα κατεσπάσθη (i. 63. 14). Cf. i. 
201 65: 11s av. 42. 20: 

19. ἁπλώς : outright. Cf. Plat. Phaed. 
100 d; Phaedr. 257b. Not found 
elsewhere in this sense except in late 
writers. —€émrta τινες : see onc. 33. 17. 
—20. ἄπλοι: Schol. ἀχρεῖοι πρὸς πλεῦ- 
σιν. The word applies primarily to 
water hard to sail through, but is trans- 
ferred by Thuc. here, as also in 33 and 
c. 60. 12, to unseaworthy ships. — ép- 
βαλλόμεναι: Schol. ὑπὸ τῶν πολεμίων 
νεῶν τυπτόμεναι. It is pass. of ἐμβάλ- 
Aew τινί (i. 49. 28; iv. 14.7). Inc. 70. 

3, 34 the act. and pass. occur together. 
The pres. partic. indicates repetition, 
the aor. (ἀναρραγεῖσαι) the immediate 
result. — 21. τὰς παρεξειρεσίας : for the 
ace. with the pass., see G. 1259; H. 
724a. The front part of the ship is 


61 


be 


4 


62 


τῷ 
σι 


90 


THUCYDIDES VIL. 34. 


.-. , Ν 5» ΄ 5 “~ , 
αὐτῷ τούτῳ παχυτέρας τὰς ἐπωτίδας ἐχουσῶν. ναυμαχή- 6 
Ν \ ε ‘ A 
σαντες δὲ ἀντίπαλα μὲν Kal ὡς αὐτοὺς ἑκατέρους ἀξιοῦν 


“ σ Ν ΄“ , / “A > 
νικαν OLWS δὲ τῶν νανυαγιων κρατησαντων των Αθη- 


΄, , Ν an > , ¥ 5 “ > Ν ’» 
ναιὼν διά τε ΤῊΝ του ανέμου απωσιν αὐτῶν ες TO πέλα- 


os καὶ διὰ τὴν τῶν Κορινθίων οὐκέτι ἐπαναγωγήν, διε- 
Ἶ 1) ἐξ 


κρίθησαν ἀπ᾽ ἀλλήλων, καὶ δίωξις οὐδεμία ἐγένετο, οὐδ᾽ 


» 5 ,ὕ Bed ε Ν Ν Ι΄ ‘ 
ἄνδρες οὐδετέρων ἑάλωσαν." οι μὲν γαρ Κορίνθιοι και 

΄ Ν “A a a ε ΄ , 
Πελοποννήσιοι πρὸς TH YN ναυμαάχουντες ῥᾳδίως διεσῴ- 


ζοντο, τῶν δὲ ᾿Αθηναίων οὐδεμία κατέδυ ναῦς. 


ἀποπλευ- 


A > , Ν 
σάντων δὲ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἐς τὴν Ναύπακτον οἱ Κορίν- 


\ A ¥ ε A 9 
fio. εὐθὺς τροπαῖον ἔστησαν ὡς νικῶντες, ὅτι πλείους 


meant. Schol. παρεξειρεσία ἐστὶ τὸ κατὰ 
τὴν πρώραν πρὸ τῶν κωπῶν, ὡς ἂν εἴποι 
τις τὸ παρὲξ τῆς εἰρεσίας. Cf.c. 40.18; 
ἶν. 12. ὃ. It was bored through or ripped 
up by the violent blows of the ἐπωτίδες. 
ἀναρρηγνύναι in this sense also in 6. 36. 
19; 40. 17. --- ἐπ᾿ αὐτῷ τούτῳ : Cl. adopts 
the dat. (of purpose) from Vat., as in 
i. 74. 19, ἐπὶ 7G... νέμεσθαι; 11. 29. 
17, ἐπ᾿ ὠφελίᾳ; vi. 31. 14, ἐπὶ βραχεῖ 
πλῷ. But there seems to be no cer- 
tain example in Thue. of ἐπὶ τούτῳ 
expressing purpose, whereas ἐπὶ τοῦ- 
το occurs in c. 36.3; iv. 3.9; v. 87. 4. 
- 22. τὰς ἐπωτίδας: a sort of cat- 
heads. Schol. τὰ ἑκατέρωθεν πρώρας ἐξέ- 
χοντα ξύλα. These beams projected like 
ears on both sides of the prow, and 
served to strengthen it. 

23. ἀντίπαλα : acc. neut. pl. of inner 
obj. approximating to an ady., as 
ἀγχώμαλα C. 71.21; ἐναντία, 111. 55. 9. 
See oni. 3. 18; 38. 6.— ds... ἀξιοῦν 
νικᾶν: ws=wote. GMT. 608, 609. 
αὐτοὺς ἑκατέρους (with order as in i. 
105. 23; v. 41. 16), though referring 
to the subj. in ναυμαχήσαντες, is in the 
acc., since the particularizing of the 
subj. in ἑκατέρους requires an independ- 


ent const. For the inf. clause express- 
inga qualification of the action, see Kr. 
Spr.55,3,3.— 25. τὴν τοῦ ἀνέμου ἄπω- 
σιν αὐτῶν: subjective and objective 
gen.respectively depending on ἄπωσιν. 
Kr. Spr. 47, 9, 7. —€s τὸ πέλαγος : 1.6. 
towards the Athenians, who attacked 
from without. — 26. διὰ τὴν οὐκέτι 
ἐπαναγωγήν : Schol. διὰ τὸ μὴ ἐπανά- 
γεσθαι αὐτοῖς τοὺς Κορινθίους, i.e. aban- 
doned the damaged ships. οὐκέτι in 
attrib. position modifying the verbal 
noun as in c. 44. 42. Kiihn. 461, 6. 
See on i. 137. 26.— διεκρίθησαν ἀπ᾽ 
ἀλλήλων : as ini. 105.22. The verb 
διακρίνεσθαι, meaning to desist from 
combat, occurs also in ¢c. 38. 5; iv. 
14. 22. 

29. ῥᾳδίως διεσῳζοντο: (ῥᾳδίως 
from Vat., for which most of the 
rest of the Mss. have καί) escaped from 
pursuit easily, i.e. swam to the land 
when they were obliged to leave the 
sinking ships.—30. κατέδυ: to be 
taken as plpf., as is shown by a com- 
parison with 19. No ship of theirs 
had been completely destroyed, and 
hence there had been no opportunity 
to capture the crew 


THUCYDIDES VII. 34, 35. 


“ εἰ id lal A > 4 Ν 
των EVAVTLWY VQAUS ἄπλους ἐποιῆσαν, και νομίσαντες av- 


\ 5 ε a 5 Ψ 505 ε 4 a ΄ 
τοι ουχ ἡσσᾶσθαι δι OTTEP ovo οι ετέροι γνικαν" OU TE 


Ν ’ «ε / a 5 x Ν > 5 
35 yap Κορίνθιοι ἡγήσαντο κρατεῖν εἰ μὴ Kal πολὺ ἐκρα- 


“ ν ᾿ς Ὁ θ a > 4 ε “A ν > Ν 
τοῦντο, οἵ T ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐνόμιζον ἡσσᾶσθαι ὅτι οὐ πολὺ 


Ln A 
ενικων. 


5» ’, Ν “A ’, Ν io 
ἀποπλευσάντων δὲ των Πελοποννησίων και του 


πεζοῦ διαλυθέντος ot ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἔστησαν τροπαῖον καὶ 


> Ν 3 ANS ΝΑ ε U4 md ’ὔ a 3 “A 
αὐτου ἐν ΤΊ) Axata ως VLKENOQAVTES aATEKXOV TOU Epuwveov, 


a , 9 
40 ἐν ᾧ οἱ Κορίνθιοι ὥρμουν, ws εἴκοσι σταδίους. 


, 2 5 ’΄ 
ναυμαχία οὕτως ἐτελεύτα. 


ἈΠ δ \ 
καὶ ἢ [LEV 


ὋὉ δὲ Δημοσθένης καὶ Ἐὐρυμέδων, ἐπειδὴ ξυστρα- 


A , 
τεύειν αὐτοῖς οἱ Θούριοι παρεσκευάσθησαν ἑπτακοσίοις 


\ Ld oe \ 5 ἴω Ν Ν lal 
μεν ὁπλίταις, τριακοσίοις δὲ ακοντισταις, TAS μὲν VAUS 


A Sigs SEN A ΄, 3 Ν Ν 
παραπλεῖν ἐκέλευον ἐπὶ τῆς Κροτωνιάτιδος, αὐτοὶ δὲ 


X x ΄ > , A ὙΜῚΝ nl τὶ ΄ 
TOV πεζὸν πάντα, ἐξετάσαντες TT PWT OV ἔπι TM LuBaper 


33. καὶ νομίσαντες αὐτοὶ... νικᾶν: 
αὐτοί adopted, with St., instead οἵ δι 
αὐτό (Vat. αὐτό), since dv αὐτό (for 
διὰ ταὐτό, OY διὰ τοῦτο) δι’ ὅπερ is im- 
possible. Render: and because they 
themselves considered that they were not 
defeated (for the very reason) on ac- 
count of which the others did not claim to 
be victorious. Cl. explains δ ὅπερ... 
νικᾶν, “ because the others did not claim 
to be victorious.” — 34. οὐδ᾽ οἱ ἕτεροι 
νικᾶν : sc. ἐνόμιζον. On the one side, οὐχ 
ἡσσᾶσθαι-ενικᾶν ΟΥ̓ κρατεῖν; on the other, 
οὐ νικᾶν = ἡσσᾶσθαι. On this equiva- 
lence rests the following explanation, 
οἵ τε yap Κορίνθιοι... 
kwv.—35d. καὶ πολύ: giving strong 
emphasis, as in c. 41. 14. Kr. Spr. 
69, 32,18. See on i. 74. 10. 

37. ἀποπλευσάντων δὲ τῶν Iledo- 
ποννησίων : emphatically contrasted 
with ἀποπλευσάντων δὲ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων 
in 30. The sailing away of the 
Peloponnesians signified that they 
gave up the idea of coping with the 


. ὅτι οὐ πολὺ ἐνί- 


Athenians, and the latter therefore 
now definitely claimed the victory. 
— 39. ἐν τῇ ᾿Αχαΐᾳ : on the coast of 
Achaia, without exact statement of 
the place, which is indicated only by 
the distance of the trophy from Eri- 
neus. 

35. Demosthenes and Eurymedon, 
abandoning their intention of marching 
their land forces through the territory of 
Croton, embark at the mouth of the 
river Hylias and come by sea to Petra, 
near Rhegium. 

2. παρεσκευάσθησαν: had been in- 
duced; not equiv. to παρεσκευάσαντο, 
but pass. of παρασκευάζειν τινά, as 
used in iii. 36. 20; iv. 132. 11; viil. 
52.1. Kiihn. 473, 2. It is the ac- 
complishment of what was desired in 
c. 33. § 6, βουλόμενοι. . . καὶ τοὺς 
Θουρίους πεῖσαι σφίσι ξυστρατεύειν ὡς 
In viii. 52. 1, we have 
παρεσκεύαζε καὶ ἀνέπειθεν united in the 
same sense. —5. XvBaper: the river 
near Thurii having the same name 


προθυμότατα. 


65 


90 


THUCYDIDES VII. 35, 36. 


ποταμῷ ἦγον διὰ τῆς Θουριάδος γῆς. 


woe 5.:π ς 
καὶ WS EYEVOVYTO 2 


SAN “ὍΝ ε / ~ Ν > A ε r “A 
€7L τῳ Trta TOTAL, και αυτοις OL Κροτωνιαται προσ- 


/ εν 5 x / , ἕν SS A 
πέμψαντες εἶπον οὐκ ἂν σφίσι βουλομένοις εἶναι διὰ τῆς 


γῆς σφῶν τὸν στρατὸν ἰέμαι, ἐπικαταβάντες ηὐλίσαντο 


aA ἢ - Ν 
10 πρὸς τὴν θάλασσαν καὶ τὴν ἐκβολὴν τοῦ Ὑλίου - καὶ αἱ 


A A Ν ἊΝ > 4 
VES αὐτοῖς ἐς TO αὐτὸ ἀπήντων. 


la > ε / > 
ΤΊ) ὃ υστέραιᾳ ανα- 


, rs » Ν A / \ 
βιβασάμενοι παρέπλεον, ἴσχοντες πρὸς Tats πόλεσι πλὴν 


Λοκρῶν, ἕως ἀφίκοντο ἐπὶ Πέτραν τῆς “Pnyivys. 


ε δὲ ys , 3 , 0 / 58 FN 
Ou € <UPaKOO LOL EV TOUT πυν ανομέενοι QUT WV 


Ν > / > “A Ἂ 5 A > 4, 
Tov ἐπίπλουν αὖθις ταῖς ναυσὶν. ἀποπειρᾶσαι ἐβούλοντο 


\ Ae an lol nan 7 ἘΝ. SX ~ 
και ΤΊ) αλλῃ παρασκευὴ) του πεζοῦ, HVTEP ΕἾΤ αὐτο TOVTO 


with the destroyed city, on the site 
of which Thurii was built. Cf Strab. 
vi. 1. 13 (where the gen. is SuBdpidos). 

7. to Ὑλίᾳ: cannot be exactly 
identified. —mpooméppavtes: as in i. 
Be. Ὁ ait) 52. 10. See one. sn: 
προπέμψαντες, Which Portus proposes, 
is unnecessary. — 8. οὐκ dv σφίσι βου- 
λομένοις εἶναι : on the periphrasis, see 
GMT. 900; Kr. Spr. 48, 6, 4. Cf. 
Sall. Jug. 84. 8, quia neque plebi 
militia volenti; 1oo. 4; Tac. Ann. 
i. 59; Hist. iil. 433 Agric. 18. Note 
the very rare inf. of indir. disc. 
after εἶπον. GMT. 99; 7538, 3.—49. 
ἐπικαταβάντες : see on c. 23. 2. Cl. 
connects πρὸς τὴν θάλασσαν with the 
partic., as in c. 23. 2; but St. takes 
it with ηὐλίσαντο, citing Xen. Hell. ii. 
2. 8, πρὸς τὴν πόλιν ἐστρατοπέδευσεν. 
Either view is admissible. —11. ἀνα- 
βιβασάμενοι: cf c. 33-18. Here τὸν 
στρατόν is to be supplied. —12. πλὴν 
Λοκρῶν: which was hostile to the 
Athenians. Cf. vi. 44. 13.—13. Πέ- 
tpav: usually called Λευκοπέτρα. Cf. 
Strab. vi. 1. 7. 

36. The Syracusans, hearing of their 
approach, determine to risk a second 


sea-fight in the great harbour before they 
arrive, and strengthen the prows of their 
ships in order that they may have the 
advantage of the Athenians in a battle 
in the confined space. 

2. αὖθις: after the first sea-fight 


(c. 22, 23). ---ταῖς ναυσὶν ἀποπειρά- 
σαι: = ναυμαχίας ἀποπειρᾶσαι, C. 17. 


14.—3. καὶ τῇ ἄλλῃ παρασκευῇ τοῦ 
πεΐοῦ : Cl. explains, “and besides (cf. 
i. 2.12; vi. 72. 17) by arming (and 
strengthening) the land army, as 
stated in c. 33. § 1, 2.” But in this 
case we should have ὅνπερ, referring to 
πεζοῦ, rather than ἥνπερ. The sense is: 
to make trial with the ships and with 
the fovi-force too (besides). Cf. e. 
37. off. For this meaning of παρα- 
σκευή, cf. Vi. 31. 6. It is dat. of 
manner, rather than means; πεζοῦ, 
gen, of description, not objective gen. 
On ἄλλῃ, see ἃ. 966, 2; H. 705.— 
ἥνπερ ... ξυνέλεγον : the impf., since 
they were constantly expecting fresh 
troops from the allies. It corresponds 
to of δ᾽ ἄλλοι ἐβοήθουν, c. 33. 7. But 
St. and Kr. take this as equiv. in 
force to the plpf., which is perhaps 
better. See Kr. Spr. 53, 2, 8, --- ἐπ᾽ 


THUCYDIDES VII. 36. 


πρὶν ἐλθεῖν αὐτοὺς φθάσαι βουλόμενοι ξυνέλεγον. 


παρε 


, \ ’ὔ’ x τς ε 5 gu , 
5 σκευάσαντο δὲ τό τε ἄλλο ναυτικὸν ὡς ἐκ τῆς προτέρας 


ναυμαχίας τι πλέον ἐνεῖδον σχήσοντες, καὶ τὰς πρῴρας 


lal A / 3 ¥y 4, 5 4 
τῶν νεῶν ξυντεμόντες ἐς ἔλασσον στεριφωτέρας ἐποίη- 


οὗ 7 A ΄ὔ ΄ 
σαν, καὶ τὰς ἐπωτίδας ἐπέθεσαν ταῖς πρῴραις παχείας, 


Ν 5 ΄ὔ 5" > Wie a) ε ΄ Ν Ν ΄ 
και ἀντερίδας AT αὐτῶν UTETELVAV T POs TOUS TOLYOUS 


ε 5 QA a . 4 5 / Ν 4 a / 
10 ws ἐπι ἐξ TNXELS ἐντὸς TE και ἔξωθεν - ᾧπερ τρόπῳ 


Ν ε (A Ν Ν 5 “ , ΄-“ ΕῚ 
καὶ OL Κορίνθιοι πρὸς τᾶς ἐν Τῇ Ναυπάκτῳ ναὺυς ἐπι- 


σκευασάμενοι πρῴραθεν ἐναυμάχουν. 


ἐνόμισαν γὰρ οἱ 


, Ν Ν la 3 ΄ tal > ε , 
Συρακόσιοι προς τας τῶν Αθηναίων ναυς ουχ ομοιως 


5 /, 5 x Ν Ν ’ 3 4 
ἀντινεναυπηγημένας, ἀλλὰ λεπτὰ τὰ πρῴραθεν ἐχούσας 


15 διὰ τὸ μὴ ἀντιπρῴροις μᾶλλον αὐτοὺς ἢ ἐκ περίπλου 


A ΕἸ A A > A 7 Ν Ν > 
Tats ἐμβολαῖς χρῆσθαι. οὐκ ἔλασσον σχήσειν. καὶ τὴν ἐν 


αὐτὸ τοῦτο : See ONC. 34. 21. —4. πρὶν 
ἐλθεῖν : on πρίν with inf. depending on 
φθάσαι, see Kiihn. 482, note 11. 
παρεσκευάσαντο : this and the fol- 
lowing aors. used for the more ex- 
act plpf. — 5. τό τε ἄλλο ναυτικόν: τὸ 
ἄλλο contrasted with καὶ τὰς πρῴρας. 
‘‘inevery other respect they had fitted 
out their fleet in such manner, as—.”’ 
—6. ἐνεῖδον : Vat. has εἶδον, but évo- 
ρᾶν iS ἃ common expression with 
Thuc. for knowledge won by experi- 
ence, τ(Ἱ- ο. 62. 1.1. οἷς. 245 iii. 30. 
14. — πλέον σχήσοντες: = πλέον σχή- 


σειν. Schol. τοῦτ᾽ ἔστι πλεονεκτήσον- 
τες. — 7. ξυντεμόντες ἐς ἔλασσον: 
shortening. See Graser, de veterwmn 


re navali, Ὁ. 28. Cf. viii. 86. 30, és 
εὐτέλειάν τι ξυντέτμηται; Ar. Ran. 
1262, εἰς ἕν ξυντεμῶ. --- 8. τὰς ἐπωτί- 
Sas: see on c. 34. 22.- παχείας: 
pred. ; they put on the prows cat-heads 
of great thickness or strength, i.e. 
made them stronger than they had 
been. —9. ἀντερίδας : supports, braces, 
extending from the under side of the 
beams through the sides of the ship a 


length of nine feet within and nine 
without. See Graser, Athens Kriegs- 
hifen, Philol. 1871, p. 35, note; and 
compare the cut inde vet. renav. tab. 2, 
fig. 10. --- ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν: sc. τῶν ἐπωτί- 
δων; for the ἀντηρίδες served as sup- 
ports for these. —11. ἐπισκευασάμε- 
vot: the Corinthians had in this man- 
ner refitted their ships. Cf. c. 34. 
22. For ém-, see on c. 14. 6.—12. 
πρῴραθεν: Cl. explains, from the prow, 
i.e. attacking front to front with the 
prow (and the ἔμβολον), employing 
neither the περίπλους nor the διέκπλους, 
as before (cf. 22). But it is better to 
take πρῴραθεν with ἐπισκευασάμενοι. as 
St. and Kr., for the important point 
here is the strengthening of the prow, 
not fighting with the prow. ‘This 
seems clear from τὰ πρῴραθεν ἐχούσας, 
below, which is contrasted with these 
words. 

13. οὐχ ὁμοίως ἀντινεναυπηγημένας: 
not built in like manner to match them. 
Cf. c. 62. 11. --- 15. ἐκ περίπλου: by 
acircuit (around the hostile ship), 1.6. 
from the side.—16. οὐκ ἔλασσον 


65 


9 
~ 


00 


20 


25 


THUCYDIDES VII. 36. 


TO μεγάλῳ λιμένι ναυμαχίαν, οὐκ ἐν πολλῷ πολλαῖς vav- 
σὶν οὖσαν, πρὸς ἑαυτῶν ἔσεσθαι ἀντιπρῴροις γὰρ ταῖς 
ἐμβολαῖς χρώμενοι ἀναρρήξειν τὰ πρῴραθεν αὐτοῖς, στε- 
ρίφοις καὶ παχέσι πρὸς κοῖλα καὶ ἀσθενῆ παίοντες τοῖς 
> / 

ἐμβόλοις. 
ν ΄, 5» ΄ Ν ¥ ὃ ΄ δι τς ε “a ΄ 

οχωρίᾳ οὔτε περίπλουν οὔτε διέκπλουν, ᾧπερ τῆς τέχνης 


τοῖς δὲ ᾿Αθηναίοις οὐκ ἔσεσθαι σφῶν ἐν στε- 


’, Sa. ἢ 3 Ν Ν Ν Ν ὃ Ν Ν Ν 
μάλιστα ἐπίστευον: αὐτοὶ γὰρ κατὰ τὸ δυνατὸν τὸ μὲν 

5 ’ A Ν Ν Ἂς ’, , 
ov δώσειν, διεκπλεῖν, τὸ δὲ THY στενοχωρίαν κωλύσειν 
ὥστε μὴ περιπλεῖν. τῇ τε πρότερον ἀμαθίᾳ τῶν κυβερ- 
νητῶν δοκούσῃ εἶναι, τῷ ἀντίπρῳρον ξυγκροῦσαι, μάλιστ᾽ 
ἂν αὐτοὶ χρήσασθαι: πλεῖστον γὰρ ἐν αὐτῷ σχήσειν. 
Ν οὐ 5 ’, 5 3, “ 3 7 5 
τὴν γὰρ ἀνάκρουσιν οὐκ ἔσεσθαι τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις ἐξω- 


θουμένοις ἄλλοσε ἢ ἐς τὴν 


σχήσειν: = πλέον σχήσειν. See on 6. 
—17. οὐκ ἐν πολλῷ : as in ii., 102. 
22, = ἐν ov πολλῷ (ii. 49. 10), in a 
Kr. Spr. 67, 10, 4.— 
18. πρὸς ἑαυτῶν : to their own advan- 
tage. Cf. ii. 86. 19. — ἀντιπρῴροις 
yap ταῖς ἐμβολαῖς: St. has without 
doubt correctly restored, ace. to 
Reiske’s conjecture, ἀντιπρώροις for 
ἀντίπρωροι. Cf. 15; ec. 40. 16.—19. 
ἀναρρήξειν : asin c. 34. 20.—20. πρὸς 
κοῖλα καὶ ἀσθενῆ: sc. τὰ ἔμβολα. --- 
παίοντες : reading of Vat. only; all 
the rest, παρέχοντες. 

21. οὐκ ἔσεσθαι: = ὑπάρξειν, in 
which sense εἶναι, esp. with neg., is 
often used. Cf. below, 28, 35; i. 2. 
5; 49.11. -- σφῶν : objective gen. with 
περίπλουν and διέκπλουν. --- 22. ὥπερ 
τῆς τέχνης: const. similar to c. 33. 
28, ἐν τούτῳ τύχης. See on 6. 2. 16. 
ᾧπερ refers to both the preceding 
nouns, just (περ) the part of their naval 
skill on which they depended most. — 24. 
διεκπλεῖν : epexegetical to τὸ μέν. --- 
25. ὥστε μὴ περιπλεῖν : epexegetical 
ἴο τὸ 66 On ὥστε μή with inf. after 


narrow space. 


γῆν, καὶ ταύτην dv ὀλίγον 


κωλύσειν, see Kr. Spr. 67, 12,4. See 
App. 

25. τῇ πρότερον. .. δοκούσῃ εἶναι: 
the same form of expression as in i, 
32. 15. For the position of the par- 
tic., see on c. 32. 2 and 1. 11. 19.— * 
26. τῷ ἀντίπρῳρον ξυγκροῦσαι: in 
explanatory appos. to the preceding 
clause. See App.— 27. πλεῖστον... 
σχήσειν: Valla renders, se maxime 
superiores fore, which is doubt- 
less his translation of πλεῖστον σχή- 
σειν, aS Superiorem esse is of 
πλέον ἔχειν. But St. writes πλεῖστον 
περισχήσειν, Since no parallel exam- 
ple of the sup. with ἔχειν can be 
found. — 28. τὴν ἀνάκρουσιν : Lacking 
water, i.e. backing without turning the 
ship, called πρύμναν κρούεσθαι in ec. 
40. 2; i. 50. 21, etc.— οὐκ ἔσεσθαι: 
see on 21.—29. és τὴν γῆν: 1.6. to 
the coast behind them. Of this only 
the part where they had their camp, 
between the mouth of the Anapus 
and the swamp Lysimelea, was open 
to them. — ταύτην : St. (Pp.) and 
Goeller refer it to γῆν, and Arn, ap- 


THUCYDIDES VII. 36, 37. 


Ν 5 5 ,ὔ 5 519% x / Ν = la) 
380 και ἐς ὀλίγον, KOT αὐτὸ. Τὸ στρατόπεδον TO εαυτων. 


τοῦ δ᾽ ἄλλου λιμένος αὐτοὶ κρατήσειν, καὶ Evudepope- 


> , ΗΨ ΄ 5 EA ay Ν , 
νους QuUTOUS, ἣν 77H βιάζωνται, ες ὀλίγον TE και TAVTAS 


= A 5 ’ὔὕ 4 5 ων , 9 
ἐς τὸ αὐτό, προσπίπτοντας ἀλλήλοις ταράξεσθαι (ὅπερ 


Ν ‘ 5 A 
Kat ἔβλαπτε μάλιστα τοὺς Αθηναίους ἐν ἁπάσαις ταῖς 


"» A , A 
35 ναυμαχίαις, οὐκ οὔσης αὐτοῖς ἐς πάντα TOV λιμένα τῆς 


ἀνακρούσεως, ὥσπερ τοῖς Συρακοσίοις)" 


περιπλεῦσαι 


Ν 3, Ν 5» ᾽’ὔ Las 5 , Ν 5 , 
δὲ ἐς τὴν εὑρυχωριαν, σφῶν ἐχόντων τὴν ἐπίπλευσιν 


5 Ν ΄“ , Ν 5 ’ὔ > , 
ΟΑἼΤΟ του πελάγους TE Και avakpovol, OV δυνήσεσθαι 


3 v4 Ψ Ν a / ΄ > 
αὐτούς, ἄλλως τε Kal Tov IlAnppvpiov πολεμίου τε av- 


λιμένος. 


A Sy Ν “ ’ὔ’ 5 / ” “ 
40 τους ἐσομένου και του OTOLATOS OU μεγάλου OVTOS του 


6 


A ε Ν \ ε “ 
Ταῦτα οἱ Συρακόσιοι πρὸς τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἐπιστήμην 1 


proves; but Bm. to ἀνάκρουσιν. ἐς 
ὀλίγον is better connected with the 
idea of motion, as Kr. says, who 
compares, below 35, οὐκ οὔσης ... τῆς 
avaxpovoews. We might add also gup- 
φερομένους... αὑτό, 91. --- δι ὀλίγου 
καὶ ἐς ὀλίγον : through a short distance 
(to the coast) and to a small part (of 
the coast). és ὀλίγον is explained by 
κατ᾽ αὐτὸ τὸ στρατόπεδον τὸ ἑαυτῶν. 
31. ξυμφερομένους ἐς ὀλίγον : driven 
together into a small space. Cf. ο. 8ι. 
11, ξυνῆγον ἐς ταὐτό; ii. 84. 3, ξυνῆγον 
és ὀλίγον. --- 33. ταράξεσθαι: fut. 
mid. in pass. sense, as in ὁ. 67. 15, — 
ὅπερ καὶ ἔβλαπτε. . . ναυμαχίαις: 
referring to the following events, 
“and it was just this which did the 
Athenians the greatest injury in all 
the following battles.” —35. és mav- 
τα τὸν λιμένα: contrasted with és 
ολίγον in 80. — 37. és τὴν εὐρυχωρίαν : 
= és τὸ πέλαγος, Outside of the great 
harbour. —odav ἐχόντων τὴν 
πλευσιν : “since they had the power 
of entry (into the great harbour) in 
their control”; 1.6. not only could 


> , 
ετπτι- 


they themselves enter at any time, 
but they could even prevent the en- 
emy, esp. the expected fleet of De- 
mosthenes and Eurymedon, from 
entering. — 38. dvakpovow: the art. 
not repeated, as in v. 5. 1, ἐν τῇ mapa- 
κομιδῇ τῇ ἐς Thy Σικελίαν kal ἀναχωρή- 
σε. Cf ce 37) 1 πο. position Οὗ 
te is explained by the close rela- 
tion of the words in the phrase τὴν 
ἐπίπλευσιν ἀπὺ τοῦ πελάγους. In39 also 
the particle is thrown out of place by 
the emphatic position of πολεμίου. On 
Cl.’s conjecture, ἃ: αχώρησιν, see App. 
37. Gylippus leads the land forces 
against the Athenian fortifications, and 
simultaneously 80 Syracusan ships sail 
out against their fleet in the great har- 
The Athenians make hasty prep- 
arations for defence by land and sea. 


bour. 


1. ταῦτα: from Vat., for τοιαῖτα, 
answering to the definiteness and 
with which the refitting 
of the Syracusan ships and its ob- 


accuracy 
ject are described in the preceding 
Cf. 
Vv. 9. 12, --- ἐπιστήμην τε καὶ δύναμιν ; 


chap. -- πρός : in proportion to. 


68 THUCYDIDES VII. 37. 


\ , 5 ,ὕ ‘\ 4 , an 
τε καὶ δύναμιν ἐπινοήσαντες καὶ ἅμα τεθαρσηκότες μᾶλ- 
Μ > ᾿ς » 4 , 5 4 “A 
λον ἤδη ἀπὸ τῆς προτέρας ναυμαχίας ἐπεχείρουν τῷ τε 
na iva \ lal ᾽ὕὔ Ἂς Ν \ Ν 5 of 
πεζῷ Gua καὶ ταῖς ναυσί. Kal τὸν μὲν πεζὸν ὀλίγῳ 

, Ἂς 5 A , 4 Ν 
δ πρότερον τὸν ἐκ τῆς πόλεως Τύλιππος προεξαγαγὼν 
nw nw nw 5 9 
προσῆγε τῷ τείχει τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, καθ᾽ ὅσον πρὸς τὴν 
, » nw Cis A ec 5 Ν ἴων > ὩΣ ΄ 
πόλιν αὐτοῦ ἑώρα: καὶ OL ἀπὸ τοῦ ᾿Ολυμπιείου, οἵ τε 
ὁπλῖται ὅσοι ἐκεῖ ἦσαν καὶ οἱ ἱππῆς καὶ ἡ γυμνητεία 
τῶν Συρακοσίων, ἐκ τοῦ ἐπὶ θάτερα προσήει τῷ τείχει" 
ε \ a \ a 52 ΧΝ 3 , A , 
10 ai δὲ νῆες μετὰ τοῦτο εὐθὺς ἐπεξέπλεον τῶν Συρακοσίων 
καὶ ξυμμάχων. 
qn nw “ XA Qn 
μενοι τῷ πεζῷ μόνῳ πειράσειν, ὁρῶντες δὲ καὶ τὰς ναῦς 


\ €.9 A \ A SaaS 27 
και OL Αθηναῖοι TO πρώωτον AvUTOVS οιο- 


> ld » > “ Ν ε Ν 5. } Ἃς Ν 7, 
ἐπιφερομένας ἄφνω, ἐθορυβοῦντο, καὶ ot μὲν ἐπὶ τὰ τείχη 
καὶ πρὸ τῶν τειχῶν τοῖς προσιοῦσιν ἀντιπαρετάσσοντο, 
ε A ἃ Ν 3 ἃς lal > / Ν las 3, Aa 
15 οἱ δὲ πρὸς τοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ ᾿Ολυμπιείου καὶ τῶν ἔξω κατὰ 
lal Ἂς Ν 
τάχος χωροῦντας, ἱππέας τε πολλοὺς καὶ ἀκοντιστάς, ἀντ- 


the former referring to the acknowl- 
edged want of skill of their pilots (c. 
36. 25), the latter perhaps to the 
shortness of the time, which did not 
admit of a greater improvement of 
the fleet. —2. τεθαρσηκότες : the pf. 
partic. expresses the confidence which 
they had felt now for some time. — 
3. ἐπεχείρουν : were preparing to at- 
tack (impf.). Cf. Ὁ. 20. 7. 

5. τὸν ἐκ τῆς πόλεως : Supplemen- 
tary explanation which points to the 
following καὶ of ἀπὸ τοῦ ᾿Ολυμπιείου. ---- 
6. καθ᾽ ὅσον... ἑώρα: = κατὰ τοσοῦτο, 
ὅσον τοῦ τείχους πρὸς τὴν πόλιν ἑώρα, ON 
that side of it which faced the city. αὐτοῦ 
depends on καθ᾽ ὅσον. Cf. ili. 104. 4. 
On the const. of the prep. with the 
rel. clause, see Kr. Spr. 51, 19, 6. — 
οἱ ἀπὸ τοῦ ᾿Ολυμπιείου : cf. c. 4. 92 ff. 
—8. ἡ γυμνητεία: found only here. 
The correct form from Vat. 
sponding to the verb γυμνητεύειν ; most 
It stands 


corre- 


of the Mss. have γυμνητία. 


for the concrete of γυμνῆτες (Schol. 
οἱ WaAol), just as levis armatura 
is used concretely in Lat. The ref- 
erence is to the ἀκοντισταί of 10. --- 
9. ἐκ tov ἐπὶ θάτερα: ab altera 
parte, as in viii. 33. 7. Kr. Spr. 43, 
4,5. Cf ec. 84. 15; 1. 87. 9. — προσ- 
ἤει: the agreement with the last 
noun (ἡ γυμνητεία), Which is only in 
appos., is unusual. — 10. ἐπεξέπλεον : 
so Vat., for ἐξέπλεον, indicating the 
purpose to attack. ἐπεκπλεῖν is omitted 
from the lexicon, but warranted by 
the subst. ἐπέκπλους (viii. 20. 3). 

11. καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι κτέ.: Plut. 
(Nic. 20) states —whether on good 
grounds or not, cannot be determined 
—that Nicias was forced into fight- 
ing by the zeal of Menander and Eu- 
rymedon (c. 16. ὃ 1).—13. ἐπὶ τὰ 
τείχη: (mounting) upon the walls, 
against those advancing on the city 
side (cf. 5). It is opp. to ἀπὸ τῶν 
τειχῶν in Ο. 38. 5.—16. ἱππέας τε 


THUCYDIDES VII. 37, 38. 


ἊΝ » δὲ Ν lal > nd Ἀ 9 5 ᾿Ὶ Ν 
επεξήεσαν, ἄλλοι δὲ τὰς ναῦς ἐπλήρουν, καὶ ἅμα ἐπὶ τὸν 


5 Ν Φ Vous \ , > > 
αἰγιαλὸν παρεβοήθουν, και ἐπειδὴ πλήρεις σαν, ἄνταν - 


“Ὁ \ lal “ 
ἢγον πέντε καὶ ἑβδομήκοντα ναῦς - καὶ τῶν Συρακοσίων 


ϑϑῆσαν ὀγδοήκοντα μάλιστα. 


‘al \ ε iA 5 \ Ν 
τῆς δὲ ἡμέρας ἐπὶ πολὺ 


/, Ν 5 ’ Ἂν ’, > ’ 
προσπλέοντες καὶ ἀνακρουόμενοι | καὶ] πειράσαντες ἀλλή- 


λων καὶ οὐδέτεροι δυνάμενοι ἄξιόν τι λόγου παραλαβεῖν, 


» Ν “ ,ὔ x δύ A > ΄ ε ys / 
ει μη ναυν μιαν 7) VO των Αθηναίων ου “υρακοσίιοι 


ζ' 7 \ ε Ν ν 5» \ “ 
8 καταδύσαντες, διεκρίθησαν και O πεζὸς αμα ATO τῶν 


τειχῶν ἀπῆλθε. 


Tn δ᾽ ὕστε fo € \ > , ε ΄ὕ G joe 
7) Pato OL μεν UPQaKOOLOL ἡσυχα OV, OUVOEV 


δηλοῦντες ὁποῖόν TL TO μέλλον ποιήσουσιν: ὁ δὲ Νικίας 


IQA 9 A Ἂν A / / Ν Ε] ΄ 
ἰδὼν ἀντίπαλα τὰ τῆς ναυμαχίας γενόμενα καὶ ἐλπίζων 


πολλοὺς καὶ ἀκοντιστάς: sc. ὄντας, 
the appos. phrase explaining κατὰ 
τάχος xwpoovtas. The ὁπλῖται were 
behind these. —17. ἐπὶ τὸν αἰγιαλὸν 
παρεβοήθουν : 1.6. to aid any ship of 
theirs that might be driven to shore. 
Cf. ce. 34. 10; 53. 5.—19. vats: Do- 
bree and Bk. propose ναυσί as in c. 
52. 4; but ef. viii. 95. 12, ἀνῆγε τὰς 
vavs; Hdt. vii. roo. 11, ete. For a 
like variety in const. with αἴρειν, see 
on 1. 52. 5.—20. ὀγδοήκοντα : the 
same number with which they fought 
the first battle; the eleven then lost 
(6. 23. 19) had therefore been re- 
placed. 

38. But on this day they do not 
come to a general action, and on the fol- 
lowing day Nicias seeks to strengthen 
the position of his fleet by transport 
ships anchored in front. 

1. τῆς δὲ ἡμέρας ἐπὶ πολύ : see on 
.¢. 11.18. Cf. c. 39. 4.— 2. προσπλέον- 
τες... πειράσαντες ἀλλήλων : Cl. and 
St. take προσπλέοντες καὶ ἀνακρουόμενοι 
as expressing the manner of the me 
pacavres, and hence omit καί before 
it: ‘“‘after they had tried one another 


by advancing and retreating (back- 
ing) till late in the day.” The change 
seems hardly necessary. — 3. οὐδέ- 
τερου: part. appos. to subj. of leading 
verb. Kr. Spr. 56, 9, 1. --- ἀξιόν τι 
λόγου παραλαβεῖν : fo win any advan- 
tage of importance. Cf. Hat. vii. 211. 17, 
οὐδὲν ἐδυνέατο mapaAaBeiv. —4. el μὴ ... 
καταδύσαντες : except that the Syracu- 
sans sank a ship or two of the Athenians. 
Cl. explains that ei μή is used ellipti- 
cally, without finite verb, and cites ἢν 
μή ἴῃ ν. 47. 51. St.and Kr. understand 
(ἄξιόν τι λόγου) παρέλαβον. Kiihn. 577, 
8. Certainly the verb is easily sup- 
plied both here and in vy. 47. 31. —8te- 
κρίθησαν : see on 6. 34. 26. 

8. ὁποῖόν τι τὸ μέλλον: ὁποῖόν τι AS 
in iii. 28. ὅ. Cl. takes it as an obj. of 
the verb, and τὸ μέλλον as adv., next 
(cf. vi. 69. 20). This is satisfactory, 
though Kr.’s explanation, = ὅποῖόν τί 
ἐστι τὸ μέλλον 6, is admissible. Kr. 
Spr. 57, 8, 5.—9. ἰδὼν ἀντίπαλα ta 
τῆς ναυμαχίας γενόμενα : seeing that 
their naval strength had become equal 


(aor. partic.), 7.e. since the last battle 


which had finally resulted in favour of 


69 


2 


THUCYDIDES VII. 38, 39. 


10 αὐτοὺς αὖθις ἐπιχειρήσειν, τούς TE τριηράρχους ἠνάγκα- 
Ἂς » ΕἾ 
ζεν ἐπισκευάζειν τὰς ναῦς, εἴ τίς τι ἐπεπονήκει, καὶ ὁλ- 


κάδας προώρμισε πρὸ τοῦ σφετέρου σταυρώματος, ὃ av- 


nw Ν nw nw > Ν ͵ὕ ΄“. > nr , 
τοῖς πρὸ τῶν νεῶν ἀντὶ λιμένος κλῃστοῦ ἐν Τῇ θαλάσσῃ 


ἐπεπήγει. 


διαλειπούσας δὲ τὰς ὁλκάδας ὅσον δύο πλέ- 


15 Opa am ἀλλήλων κατέστησεν, ὅπως, εἴ τις βιάζοιτο ναῦς, 


εἴη κατάφευξις ἀσφαλὴς καὶ πάλιν καθ᾽ ἡσυχίαν ἔκπλους. 


΄, δὲ os 9 Ν ε ΄ / 
παρασκευαζόμενοι δὲ ταῦτα ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν διετέλεσαν 


Pe “A Od / 
οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι μέχρι νυκτός. 


“ > ε ’, - ’ ~ x ν »Ἁ 
Τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ οἱ Συρακόσιοι τῆς μὲν ὥρας πρῴ- 
τερον, τῇ ὃ ἐπιχειρήσει τῇ αὐτῇ τοῦ τε πεζοῦ καὶ τοῦ 


“ A > / Ἂ 
ναυτικου προσέμισγον τοις Αθηναίοις, και ἀντικατα- 


΄, A Ν Ν Θ᾽ ΟΝ ΄ > ee, \ 
στάντες ταῖς ναυσὶ τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον αὖθις ἐπὶ πολὺ 
A “ ε /, , > ΄ XN Ν > la 
διῆγον τῆς ἡμέρας πειρώμενοι ἀλλήλων, πρὶν δὴ ᾿Αρί- 


the Athenians (6. 23. ὃ 9, 4). Or per- 
haps τὰ τῆς ναυμαχίας refers to the 
events of the previous day, which 
seems to be the view of Valla, pari 


eventu fuisse pugnatum.—éaA- 
πίζων : expecting, as in iv. 71. 7.—11. 


ἐπισκευαΐειν : cf. ο. 1.2; 24.5; vi. 104. 20. 
See on c. 14. 6.— ἐπεπονήκει: of ships 
also in vi. 104. 20. — 12. προώρμισε: 
not found elsewhere. The thing itself 
would not be likely to happen often. 
— πρὸ τοῦ σφετέρου σταυρώματος : 
which they had already built, vi. 66. 
8, παρὰ Tas vais σταύρωμα ἔπηξαν. For 
σφετέρου, see on 6. I. 27.—13. ἀντὶ 
λιμένος κλῃστοῦ: 1.6. to supply the 
place of a harbour which could be 
closed with chains. 

14. διαλειπούσας : the pres., 
stead of διαλιπούσας, which all the 
Mss. have, is necessary to express the 
idea of continuance required by the 
The Schol. has διαλειπού- 
σας" ἤγουν διισταμένας. ‘The case is 
different from that in i. 112, 1; iii. 


in- 


connexion. 


74.1.—15. βιαΐζοιτο : pass. as in i. 2. 
4, and freq. — 16. κατάφευξις : also 
inc. 41.3; not found elsewhere. 

39. Stratagem of Aristo. The Syr- 
acusans prepare to take their midday 
meal on the beach, with a view to sur- 
prising the Athenians. 

1. τῆς μὲν ὥρας πρῴτερον : earlier 
in the day (than before). Cf. iv. 93. 
3, τῆς ἡμέρας ove. For such adverbs 
with the gen., see G. 1088; H. 757 a; 
Kr. Spr. 47, 10, 4. For the form 
πρέτερον, see on 6. 19. 1.—2. τῇ ἐπι- 
χειρήσει TH αὐτῇ : in the same manner 
of attack, as described in ὁ. 37. ὃ 3; 
38. § 1. 

4. αὖθις : referring to τῆς δὲ ἡμέρας 

.. ἀλλήλων, C. 38. 1. -- ἐπὶ πολὺ τῆς 
ἡμέρας : see onc. 11. 18. --- ὅ. πειρώ- 
μενοι: the mid. used like the act. (cf 
c. 38. 2), as also in ii. 81. 10; 85. 6; 
iv. 132. 13. --- πρὶν δή: till at last; 
before critical events. Cf. ec. γι. 26; 
iii. 29. 5. On the const. with indic., 
see GMT, 635; H, 924; Kuhn, 568, 


10 


15 


THUCYDIDES VII. 39. 


στων ὁ Πυρρίχου Κορίνθιος, ἄριστος ὧν κυβερνήτης τῶν 


ἊΣ + δ᾿ 4 Ν , “~ 
μετα “-ορακοσίιων, πείθει τους σφετέρους του νὰᾶυτι- 


la A , e Ν > “ ’ > 
κοῦ ἄρχοντας, πέμψαντας ws τοὺς ἐν TH πόλει ἐπιμε- 


ἽᾺ 4 ν , Ἂν 5 \ “ 
λομένους, κελεύειν OTL τάχιστα τὴν ayopay τῶν πωλου- 


/ 5 Ν Ν 7 Ν 
μένων μεταναστήσαντας ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν κομίσαι, καὶ 


Ψ 5», 9 7 , > - ᾽ν 3 ΄ὔ 
οσατις EXEL ἐδώδιμα, TOAVTAS EKELOE φέροντας αναγκασαι 


Lal ν 5 A 5 ’ ἊΝ , 5» Ἂ 
πωλεῖν, ὅπως αὐτοῦ ἐκβιβάσαντες τοὺς ναύτας εὐθὺς 


Ν Ν a 3 ΄, \ Si aN 50 
παρα τας ναῦς αρυστοτποιήσονται, και νυ Ὁ υγου αυσις 


Ν 5 Ν 3 ΄, A 3 , 5 
και αὐθημερὸν ἀπροσδοκήτοις τοις Αθηναίοις εἐπιχέει- 


ρῶσιν. 


la; Kr. Spr. 54, 17, 6.—’Apiorov: 
mentioned with praise also by Plut. 
Nic. 20, and Polyaenus, v. 13. Acc. 
to Plut. Nic. 25, he fell in the great 
sea-fight (c. 70).—6. τῶν μετὰ Συρα- 
κοσίων: 1.6. of all on the side of the 
Syracusans, those from abroad in- 
cluded. —7. σφετέρους : bracketed by 
Cl., as having no prop. connexion ; 
but St. explains, “ σφετέρους, sc. τῶν 
μετὰ Συρακοσίων, ex quibus ipse 
Aristo erat.” Cf.c. 4.10, ἀπήγαγε 
τοὺς σφετέρους. See on 0.1. 27.—8. 
TOUS ἐπιμελομένους : SC. τῆς ἀγορᾶς = 
τοὺς ἀγορανόμους. ---ϑ. τὴν ἀγορὰν τῶν 
πωλουμένων : ‘‘the market of all 
wares brought for sale”; in the army, 
of course, = ὅσα Tis ἔχει ἐδώδιμα. CF. 
Polyaenus, v. 13, τὴν ἀγορὰν τῶν τρο- 
φῶν μεταγαγεῖν ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν. Kr. 
and St. bracket τῶν πωλουμένων as un- 
necessary and without parallel. — 10. 
μεταναστήσαντας ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν: 
so Vat., the rest of the Mss. παρὰ τὴν 
θάλασσαν μεταστῆσαι κομίσαντας. But 
mapa for ἐπί with inanimate objects 
occurs in Att. prose only in Xen. 
Anab. 11.4.11. Besides, éréis confirmed 
by the passage cited above from Poly- 
aenus. 
only the change of place, but the re- 


μεταναστήσαντας indicates not 


moval with all the utensils necessary 
to the market business, 7.e. the σκηναὶ 
καὶ γέρρα, of which Dem. (xvirl. 169) 
speaks in a like case. μεταστήσαντας 
would be nearly equiv. to κομίσαν- 
tas; but μεταναστήσαντας signifies the 
activity that must precede the κομί- 
σαι, and therefore takes more prop. 
than κομίσαι the form of the partic. 
But Kr. and St. write μεταστήσαντας, 
because μεταναστῆσαι seems to be 
used nowhere of things in this sense, 
while μεταστῆσαι is so used in Eur. 
Bacch. 49; Polyb. ii. 17. 11.—12. 
αὐτοῦ: Portus’s conjecture for αὐτοῖς, 
on the spot, 1.6. just on the shore, 
which seems to be confirmed by ec. 
40. 4. But αὐτοῖς might be ethical 
dat., as Arn. and Lamberton explain. 
—13. ἀριστοποιήσονται: in the mid., 
prop. of the leaders, but implying 
also the sailors. Cf. viii. 95. 11, 6 yap 
᾿Αγησανδρίδας ἀριστοποιησάμενος ἀνῆγε 
τὰς ναῦς. For the fut. in final clause 
(though some Mss. have the aor.), 
see GMT. 324; H. 881 ο. -- δι᾽ 
ὀλίγου : temporal as in c. 15. 13; ii. 
85. 9.—14. ἐπιχειρῶσι: co-ord. with 
the fut. ἀριστοποιήσονται. The same 
change of mood occurs in reversed 
order in ii. 72, 20, 21. 


THUCYDIDES VII. qo. 


\ » ¥ \ G 
Kat ot μὲν πεισθέντες ἔπεμψαν ἄγγελον, Kal 7 1 


> SY , θ ἈΝ ε Ss ’ > ϑ 4 
ayopa TAPETKEVAT Ἴ. και Ob “Ἣ᾽σρακοσίιοι ἐξαίφνης πρυ- 


, , Ἂ Ν ΄ ¥ Ἃ. 
μναν κρουσάμενοι πάλιν πρὸς τὴν πόλιν ἔπλευσαν, καὶ 


al 5» Qn 
εὐθὺς ἐκβάντες αὐτοῦ ἄριστον ἐποιοῦντο" οἵ δ᾽ ᾿Αθη- 


ναῖοι νομίσαντες αὐτοὺς ὡς ἡσσημένους σφῶν πρὸς τὴν 


πόλιν ἀνακρούσασθαι, καθ᾽ ἡσυχίαν ἐκβάντες τά τε ἄλλα 


, Ν Ἂς > ‘ Ἂς ¥ ε A“ 5 ΄, 
διεπράσσοντο καὶ τὰ ἀμφὶ τὸ ἄριστον, ὡς τῆς γε ἡμέρας 


“Δ wr 
ταύτης οὐκέτι οἰόμενοι ἂν ναυμαχῆσαι. 


ἐξαίφνης δὲ οἱ 


τ᾿ ΄, ΄ Ν ca > , > ε 
“υρακοσίιοι πληρώσαντες τας ναῦς ἐπέπλεον αὖθις. οι 


10 δὲ διὰ πολλοῦ θορύβου, καὶ ἄσιτοι οἱ πλείους, οὐδενὶ 


/ > / Va ee / \ / ’ 
κόσμῳ ἐσβάντες μόλις ποτὲ ἀντανήγοντο. καὶ χρόνον μέν 


τινα ἀπέσχοντο ἀλλήλων φυλασσόμενοι: ἔπειτα οὐκ ἐδό- 


κει τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις ὑπὸ σφῶν αὐτῶμ διαμέλλοντας κόπῳ 


c 4 5 5 > nw 9 ’ὔ Ν > / 
ἁλίσκεσθαι, ἀλλ ἐπιχειρεῖν οτι τάχιστα, καὶ -ἐπιφερόμε- 


40. The Athenians allow themselves 
to be deceived, and begin the battle with- 
out sufficient preparation. The Syra- 
cusans do them great damage with the 
strengthened prows, and with little boats 
which run up under the sides of the hos- 
tile ships. 

1. καὶ ot μὲν κτέ. : the rapid suc- 
cession of short sents. connected by 
kai expresses vividly the ‘execution 
of the plan.—2. πρύμναν κρουσάμε- 
vou: see on c. 36. 28.— ὃ. πάλιν: 
back; αὖθις (9) 

5. ds ἡσσημένους σφῶν: “in the 
conviction (és) that they could not 
cope with them.” σφῶν is pers. gen. 
with ἡσσημένους; elsewhere we find the 
gen. of impers. nouns, as τοῦ δεινοῦ, 
τοῦ ῥήματος, iv. 37. 6; v. 111. 15.— 
7. ὡς οἰόμενοι: in the belief. On as 
with the partic., see Kiihn. 488, 1 a, a. 
ΟΕ ΧΕΞ ΛΘ: 

10. διὰ θορύβου, καὶ ἄσιτοι: see on 
c. 32. 11. --- οὐδενὶ κόσμῳ : common 
expression in Thue. (c. 23. 16; 84. 9; 


» aga in. 


ii. 52. 5; iii. 108. 16), here having its 
cause in διὰ θορύβου, as iii. 108. 16 
in araxrws.—11. μόλις ποτέ: 1.6. it 
was a long time before order was 
sufficiently. restored to enable them 
to sail out for battle. 

12. ἀπέσχοντο ἀλλήλων: “they 
held off from one another.” Cf. σφῶν 
αὐτῶν ἀπέσχοντο, Vili. 92. 52.— dvdac- 
σόμενοι : 1.6. guarding against unfore- 
seen attack.—ov« ἐδόκει τοῖς ᾿Αθη- 
ναίοις... ἁλίσκεσθαι: “they did not 
think best to wear themselves out 
with delay,” lit. to be overcome with 
weariness through themselves (1.6. 
through their own fault) by delaying. 
Lamb. compares Soph. Aj. 216, μανίᾳ 
On the change of case in 
διαμέλλοντας, see G. 928, 1; Kr. 
Spr. 55, 2, 7. St. adopts Madvig’s 
conjecture ἀναλίσκεσθαι, Which is used 
of animals in the sense overwhelmed, 
consumed (Plat. Prot. 521 b; Aesch. 
Ag. 553), and is no doubt admissible ; 
but it does not seem to be necessary. 


, 
ἁλούς. 


41 τίζοντες. 


THUCYDIDES VII. 40, 41. 


4 , 
15 νοι ἐκ παρακελεύσεως ἐναυμάχουν. 


οἱ δὲ Συρακόσιοι δε- 


ἕξάμενοι καὶ ταῖς ναυσὶν ἀντιπρῴροις χρώμενοι, ὥσπερ 
διενοήθησαν, τῶν ἐμβόλων τῇ παρασκευῇ ἀνερρήγνυσαν 
τὰς τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ναῦς ἐπὶ πολὺ τῆς παρεξειρεσίας, καὶ 


“ ’ὔ 5 lal 
οἱ ἀπὸ τῶν καταστρωμάτων αὐτοῖς ἀκοντίζοντες μεγάλα 


20 ἔβλαπτον τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους, πολὺ δ᾽ ἔτι μείζω οἱ ἐν τοῖς 


lal “ Ν᾽ 
λεπτοῖς πλοίοις περιπλέοντες τῶν Συρακοσίων καὶ ἔς τε 


Ν Ν ΄ὔὕ “ 4 nw A \ 
TOUS ταρσοὺς ὑποπίπτοντες TOV πολεμίων νεῶν καὶ ἐς τὰ 


’ἅ 4 Ν 5 5 Lal > Ν , 5 
πλάγια παραπλέοντες καὶ ἐξ αὐτῶν ἐς τοὺς ναύτας ἀκον- 


ἈΝ nw 
τέλος δὲ τούτῳ τῷ τρόπῳ κατὰ κράτος ναυμα- 


οὔντες οἱ Συρακόσιοι ἐνίκησαν, καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι τρα- 
Χ n 


, Ν lal ε 4 Ἂς Ἃ 5 “ 5 
πομένοι διὰ των ὁλκάδων ΤῊΝ κατάφευξιν εποιουνῖο ες 


A 9 
TOV ἑαυτῶν ὅρμον. 


15. δεξάμενοι : sc. ἐπιφερομένους 
αὐτούς. Cf. iv. 127. 7.—16. ὥσπερ 
διενοήθησαν: cf.c. 36. 18.—17. τῶν 
ἐμβόλων : necessary emendation of 
Abresch, for ἐμβολῶν; for here the 
beak of the ship is meant, in which 
sense ἐμβολή does not occur in Att. 
prose. Observe, however, its use for 
a battering ram in ii. 76. 28. — ἀνερρή- 
γνυσαν: cf. c. 34. 20; 36. 19. --- 18. 
ἐπὶ πολὺ τῆς παρεξειρεσίας : “far into 
the front part of the ship.” See onc. 
34. 21. For ἐπὶ πολύ with the gen., 
see onc. 11. 18, --- 19. αὐτοῖς : sc. τοῖς 
Συρακοσίοις. For the const. of the 
dat., see on c. 34. 7. —20. τοῖς λε- 
πτοῖς πλοίοις : as in ii. 83. 26.—21. és 
τοὺς ταρσοὺς ὑποπίπτοντες: Schol. 
ὑποδυόμενοι ὑπὸ τοὺς ταρσούς, 1.6. dart- 
ing in among the banks of oars, thus 
interfering with the rowing, and in- 
juring the oars. Cf. Dio C. 1. 32. 
8, ἔς Te τοὺς ταρσοὺς τῶν νεῶν ὑποπί- 
πτοντες καὶ τὰς κώπας συναράσσοντες. 
Boeckh (Seewesen, 112) explains the 

tapoot as the whole of the oarage, — 


ε Ν A 4 ~ ’ὔ 
ai δὲ τῶν Συρακοσίων νῆες μέχρι 


ν 
22. ἐς τὰ πλαγια παραπλέοντες : sail- 
ing against (not past) the sides (of the 
ships). — 23. ἐξ αὐτῶν : sc. τῶν λεπτῶν 
πλοίων. --- ἐς τοὺς ναύτας ἀκοντίζοντες : 
hurling at the sailors. The acc. is used 
without prep. when hitting or wound- 
ing is to be expressed. Kr. Spr. 47, 
14, 1. The missiles were doubtless 
hurled, as Arn. explains, through the 
port-holes for the oars. <As to the size 
of these port-holes, ef Hdt. v. 33. 12. 

41. At last the Athenian ships, after 
great loss, seek refuge behind the line of 
transport boats. Elation of the Syra- 
Cusans. 

1. κατὰ κράτος : with all their might, 
to be connected with ναυμαχοῦντες, 
not, as the Schol. says, with ἐνίκησαν. 
It is so used with πολιορκεῖν (i. 64. 14); 
πολεμεῖν (i. 118. 21; 11. 54. 14); προσ- 
βάλλειν (iv. 131.4).—3. διὰ τῶν ὁλκά- 
Sev: cf. c. 38. 11]. ---4. ὅρμον: the 
open place of anchorage of the Athe- 
nians (cf. vi. 44. 12), which they had 
tried to turn into a λιμὴν κλῃστός (6. 
38. 11 ff.). 


73 


5 


74 


5 


10 


15 


THUCYDIDES VII. 41. 


ε ’,ὔ 5 f » » 4 ε Ὁ“ 
ὁλκάδων ἐπεδίωκον " επειτα AVTOVS AL KEpalar 


ἔσπλων at ἀπὸ τῶν ὁλκάδων δελφινοφόροι ἡρμέ- 


μὲν τῶν 
ὑπὲρ τῶν 
“i , Re an A ΄ > , 

ναι ἐκώλυον. δύο δὲ νῆες τῶν Συρακοσίων ἐπαιρόμεναι 

τῇ νίκῃ προσέμειξαν αὐτῶν ἐγγὺς καὶ διεφθάρησαν, καὶ 

ε ε , > A 5 ὃ ’ὕ ε (λ ὃ , δ᾽ c 

ἡ ἑτέρα αὐτοῖς ἀνδράσιν ἑάλω. καταδύσαντες δ᾽ οἱ Συρα- 

κόσιοι τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἑπτὰ ναῦς καὶ κατατραυματίσαν- 
, »” ὃ ἈΝ Ν ? Ν Ν 

τες πολλάς, ανὸρας τε τοὺς μὲν ζωγρήσαντες, τοὺς δὲ 

ἀποκτείναντες ἀπεχώρησαν, καὶ τροπαῖά τε ἀμφοτέρων 

lal “ Ἂς 

τῶν ναυμαχιῶν ἔστησαν καὶ τὴν ἐλπίδα ἤδη. ἐχυρὰν εἶχον 

ταῖς μὲν ναυσὶ καὶ πολὺ κρείσσους εἶναι, ἐδόκουν δὲ καὶ 


Ν Ν ’ 
τὸν πεζὸν χειρώσεσθαι. 


Ν ε Ν ε 5 ,ὔ > 
καὶ οἱ μὲν ws ἐπιθησόμενοι κατ 


3 ’, va > 
ἀμφότερα παρεσκευάζοντο αὖθις. 


5. at κεραῖαι : similar contrivances 
to those that the Plataeans had 
erected to ward off the battering rams 
from their walls (ii. 76.§ 4). As in 
the passage cited, beams (Soro!) were 
attached to crane-shaped poles, to be 
let down, so here δελφῖνες (Schol., 
σιδηροῦν μολίβδινον 
εἰς δελφῖνα ἐσχηματισμένον), heavy 
weights of lead or iron in the form of 
dolphins, possibly with the tail sharp- 
ened for the purpose of piercing 
through the vessels, and thus sinking 
them. Cf. Liv. xxxviii. 5, tolleno- 
nibus libramenta plumbi in- 
cutiebant. Poll. i. 54 mentions 
this contrivance as one used even on 
triremes, ὑπὲρ τὸ ἔμβολον δελφὶς ἵστα- 
ται, ὅταν ἣ ναῦς δελφινοφόρος ἧ. But 
this seems to be the only notice of 
the kind. — 6. ἡρμέναι: (pf.) always 
drawn up (not ἀρθεῖσαι, occasionally), 
they hung threateningly over the in- 
tervals between every two ships (c. 
38. 14), ὑπὲρ τῶν ἔσπλων. As the in- 
terval was two plethra, the length of 
the κεραῖαι was extraordinary; but 
they are to be conceived as stretching 
out from both sides over the inter- 


κατασκεύασμα ἢ 


vening space. On the position of the 
partic., see on 6. 23. 14. 

7. -ἐπαιρόμεναι τῇ νίκῃ : flushed with 
υἱοίον ἡ. τττ- 8. προσέμειξαν αὐτῶν ἐγγύς : 
as in iv. 93. 4, προσέμειξεν ἐγγὺς τοῦ 
στρατεύματος. Without ἐγγύς the dat. 
would be necessary. αὐτῶν includes 
both ὁλκάδων and κεραῖαι.--- 9. ἡ ἑτέρα : 
the one (of these two ships), from 
which it follows that the crew of the 
other escaped. 

10. katatpavpaticavtes: of ships 
also in viii. το. 20; 42. 11. Ὁ τ 14. 
5, ἔτρωσαν μὲν πολλάς; Liv. xxxvii. 24, 
multis ictibus vulnerata na- 
vis erat.—12. τροπαῖά τε ἀμφοτέ- 
ρων τῶν ναυμαχιῶν ἔστησαν: see on 
c. 24.3. The reference is to the un- 
decided action two days before (6. 38. 
§ 1), and the last far more important 
one.—14. ταῖς pev: so placed as if 
only τὸν δὲ πεζὸν χειρώσεσθαι were to 
follow. — καὶ πολύ: see on 6. 34. 35. 
— ἐδόκουν δέ: weaker than τὴν ἐλπίδα 
(opinionem) ἤδη ἐχυρὰν εἶχον with 
which it is connected, “and they even 
thought.” — 15. kar’ ἀμφότερα: se. 
τῷ τε πεζῷ Kal ταῖς ναυσί. Cf. ὁ. το. 
16; 59.4; vi. 31.17. —16. παρεσκευά- 


42 


THUCYDIDES VII. 42. 


75 


Ἔν τούτῳ δὲ Δημοσθένης καὶ Εὐρυμέδων ἔχοντες 1 


᾿ς > XN “ "AA 4 5 40 vA a 
THY αἸΤΟ τῶν ἡναιω" βοή ειαν παραγιγνονταυ, ναυς 


A Ni ec 7 \ A “A \ ε 7, 
τε τρεῖς καὶ ἑβδομήκοντα ξὺν ταῖς ἕξενικαῖς καὶ ὁπλίτας 


\ Ζ a Ν va 
περὶ πεντακισχιλίους ἑαυτῶν τε καὶ τῶν ξυμμάχων, ἀκον- 


τιστάς τε βαρβάρους καὶ “Ἕλληνας οὐκ ὀλίγους καὶ σφεν- 


ὃ ΄ \ EG \ \ x \ ε ΄, 
Ονῆτας καὶ TOCOTAS Καὶ ΤῊΝ αλλην παρασκευὴν ἱκανΉΝΨΝ. 


\ lal \ ΄ Ν , / 5 
και τοις μεν Συρακοσίοις και ξυμμάχοις κατάπληξις εν 


“ > , 5» Wh 5 7 > es δὲ »» 
τῳ αὐυτικα Οὐκ O υγὴ eyeveTo, εἰ TEPas μηθέν EOTAL 


7 ἴω 5 A wn , ε nw » Ν 
σφίσι TOU ἀπαλλαγῆναι τοῦ κινδύνου, ὁρώντες οὔτε διὰ 


fovro αὖθις: refers to the prepara- 
tions of the Syracusans before the 
last battle (c. 36; 37. ὃ 1), and doubt- 
less shows the zeal of Gylippus. 

42, Just at this time Demosthenes 
ani Eurymedon reach the harbour of 
Syracuse with a fleet of 73 triremes and 
a reinforcement of 5,000 hoplites and 
numerous light troops. Demosthenes, in 
view of the unfavourable results of the 
previous dilatory manner of carrying on 
the war, urges Nicias to a speedy attack, 
by way of Euryelus, upon the Syracusan 
cross-wall, 

1. ἐν τούτῳ: 1.6. while the Syra- 
cusans were still making preparations 
(παρεσκευάζοντο). ‘The day cannot be 
definitely determined. Grote (VII. ¢. 
60, p. 141) considers it the second day 
after the sea-fight. —2. ἀπὸ τῶν ᾿Αθη- 
ναίων : as to Bk.’s conjecture, ἀπὸ τῶν 
᾿Αθηνῶν, see on c. 18. 4. ---παραγίγνον- 
ται: refers to the entrance of the 
βοήθεια into the great harbour, and 
the union with the fleet of Nicias. It 
is strange that the Syracusans who 
controlled the mouth of the harbour 
(c. 36. § 6) made no attempt to pre- 
vent the entrance. Plut. Mic. 21 
states that Demosthenes sailed in 
ὅπλων κόσμῳ καὶ παρασήμοις τριήρων καὶ 
πλήθει κελευστῶν καὶ αὐλητῶν θεατρικῶς 
καὶ πρὸς ἔκπληξιν πολεμίων ἐξησκημένον; 


but on what authority is not known. 
—3. τρεῖς καὶ ἑβδομήκοντα : this 
number consists of 65 (c. 20. 7), 15 
(c. 31. 26), 2 (c. 33.28), and Euryme- 
don’s ship (c. 31. 11), minus the 10 
given to Conon (c. 31.21). Since the 
number is stated with such accuracy, 
μάλιστα after ἑβδομήκοντα is rightly 
omitted by Vat. Plut. Nic. 21 agrees 
with Thuc.—£vtv ταῖς ξενικαῖς : in- 
cluding those of the allies, 1.6. of the 
Chians (c. 20. 8), the Corcyraeans (6. 
31. 26), and the Metapontians (c. 33. 
29). -- ὁπλίτας... πεντακισχιλίους : 
Plut. and Diod. agree with Thue.— 
5. βαρβάρους: the 150 ἀκοντισταὶ τοῦ 
Μεσσαπίου ἔθνους, c. 33. 17. --- οὐκ ὀλί- 
yous: Plut. Nic. 21 says ἀκοντιστὰς 
καὶ τοξότας Kal σφενδονήτας τρισχιλίων 
οὐκ ἐλάττους. 

8. εἰ πέρας... κινδύνου: if there 
shall not be to them a final escape from 
danger. For the prot. with εἰ after 
κατάπληξις. ἐγένετο, see GMT. 
697. τοῦ ἀπαλλαγῆναι is not governed 
by, but is explanatory of πέρας, appos. 
gen. Kiihn. 402d. Cf. Dem. xt. 40, 
τί ἂν ἣν πέρας ἡμῖν τοῦ διαλυθῆναι; Hat. 
ii. 139. 2, τέλος δὲ... 

. ὧδε ἔλεγον γενέσθαι. --- ϑΞϑ. ὁρῶντες: 
as if οὐκ ὀλίγον κατεπλάγησαν preceded. 
The anacoluthon similar to ii. 53. 
13, where κρίνοντες is connected with 


τῆς ἀπαλλαγῆς 


τῷ 


76 


THUCYDIDES VII. 42. 


Ν ΄ ΄ Oe ἫΝ Ν ¥ 
10 τὴν Δεκέλειαν τειχιζομένην οὐδὲν ἧσσον στρατὸν ἴσον 


Ν ’ὔ “ ΄ 5 / / “A 
Kal παραπλήσιον τῷ προτέρῳ ἐπεληλυθότα τήν TE τῶν 


> ’ὔ 4 / SS /, ~ 
Αθηναίων δύναμιν πανταχόσε πολλὴν φαινομένην: τῷ 


nr 4 nw 
δὲ προτέρῳ στρατεύματι τών ᾿Αθηναίων ὡς ἐκ κακῶν 


ῥώμη τις ἐγεγένητο. 


ὁ δὲ Δημοσθένης ἰδὼν ὡς εἶχε τὰ 


’ὔ Ν uy > co 5 ὃ / joe 
15 TPAayLaTa, κα VOMLO AS ουχ OLOV TE EWAL ιατρίβειν OVOE 


0 A 4 c T ’ὔ » θ 5 / Ν ἣν “A 
παθεῖν ὅπερ ὁ Νικίας ἔπαθεν (ἀφικόμενος yap τὸ πρῶ- 


ε τ 4 / c 5 Ἰθὺ ’ » 
τον o Νικιας φοβερός, ὡς οὐκ εὐθϑυς προσέκειτο ταις 


Συρακούσαις, ἀλλ᾽ ἐν Κατάνῃ διεχείμαζεν, ὑπερώφθη 


Ν A - ες 5 A te 5 A ε 
τε καὶ ἔφθασεν αὐτὸν ἐκ τῆς ἸΠελοποννήσου στρατιᾷ ὁ 


20 Γύλιππος ἀφικόμενος, ἣν οὐδ᾽ ἂν μετέπεμψαν οἱ Συρα- 


25 


/ > 5 ἴω 5 Ν 5 ᾽’ ε XN Ν 3 Ν ““τΆ 
KOOLOL, εἰ EKEWOS εὐθὺς ETEKELTO* ικανοι γὰρ αυτοι OLO- 


5 Ψ 2. τὰ » Ψ " \ > 
μένοι εἰναι αμα 1 ὧν ἔμαθον ἡἡσσους OVTES καὶ αποτε- 


΄, x > 7 > > ΄ὕ, » 
τειχισμένοι ἂν ἦσαν, ὥστε μηδ᾽ εἰ μετέπεμψαν ἔτι 


ε ΄ Xd 5 \ > las A > > na ε 
OMOLM@S ἂν GAUTOUS ὠφελεϊν), ταυτὰ OVV ανασ κοίτων O Δη- 


: ΄, \ , Ψ \ IN 3 a ΄ 
μοσθένης και γιγνώσκων OTL Και AUTOS EV τῳ TAPOVTL 


the acc.; iil. 36. 8, ἐπικαλοῦντες with 
αὐτοῖς. Kiihn. 495, 1 a.— διὰ τὴν 
Δεκέλειαν τειχιζομένην : see on c. 28. 
25.—10. οὐδέν : merely repeats the 
neg. in οὔτε. The correlative of οὔτε 
is τε. ---ὀὶσοὸν kal παραπλήσιον: cf. 
τοιαῦτα Kal παραπλήσια in i. 22. 18; 
ἴσος καὶ ὁμοῖος, i. 27.4; v. 27.12; 59. 
24.— 12. πανταχόσε: in all direc- 
tions, only here in Thuc., who uses 
elsewhere πανταχόθεν, though rather 
in the sense “for the most various 
reasons * (1.124. 1; ii. 53. 11; 59.85 
vi. 61. 18, etc.).—13. ὡς ἐκ κακῶν : ὡς 
restrictive, as in iil. 113. 25: “a feel- 
ing of confidence (ῥώμη. see on 6. 
18. 8 and App. to vi. 31. 5) was re- 
stored so far as it was possible after 
their misfortunes.” Cf Hdt. viii. ror. 
1, ταῦτα ἀκούσας Ἐέρξης ws ἐκ κακῶν 
ἐχάρη; Liv. x. 43. 15, agmine in- 


columi ut ex tanta trepida- 
tione Bovianum preventum. 
On ὡς, see Kr. Spr. 69, 63, 4. 

15. οὐχ οἷόν τε εἶναι: non licere. 
Cf. iv. 22. 10; viii. 92. 23. οὐδὲ 
παθεῖν : sc. οἷόν τε εἶναι. Of. vi. 92. 6, 
where ἀξιῶ is understood in like man- 
ner after οὐδέ. So St. explains. For 
Cl.’s view, see App. —17. φοβερός: 
inspiring terror, act. in force as in ii. 
98. 20; iv. 126. 21, and below (26) 
δεινότατος. --- 18. ἐν Κατάνῃ διεχεί- 
patev: cf. vi. γ2 Τῇ. ---21. αὐτοί: alone, 
without help from outside. (ΟἿ ii. 15. 
6; iv. 49. 5; v. 60.4; vi. 84. 9.— 24. 
αὐτούς : sc. τοὺς Συρακοσίους, the obj., 
with which we must supply as subj. 
τὸ μεταπέμψαι. --- οὖν: after a long 
parenthesis as in c. 6. 7; ii. 85. 10; 
iii. 95. 9; vi. 64. 13. — ἀνασκοπῶν : 
reflecting on, renewing the idea of ἰδὼν 


THUCYDIDES VII. 42. 


πρώτῃ ἡμέ ἄλιστα δεινότατός ἐ ts ἐναντί 
τῇ πρώτῃ ἡμέρᾳ μάλιστα δεινότατός ἐστι τοῖς ἐναντίοις, 


ἐβούλετο ὅ τι τάχος ἀποχρήσασθαι τῇ παρούσῃ τοῦ στρα- 


A 3 A 
τεύματος ἐκπλήζξει. 


καὶ ὁρῶν τὸ παρατείχισμα τῶν Συ- 


ρακοσίων, ᾧ ἐκώλυσαν περιτειχίσαι σφᾶς τοὺς ᾿Αθηναί. 


δ an Oy v2 5; 5 β , , a 571 ΄“ 
30 ous, ἁπλοῦν ὃν Kal, εἰ ἐπικρατήσειέ τις τῶν τε ᾿᾿ὼπιπολών 


A 5 tA Ν > “ 5 > A , 
TNS ἀναβάσεως και αὖθις Του EV AUTALS στρατοπέδου, 


ῥᾳδίως ἂν αὐτὸ ληφθέν (οὐδὲ γὰρ ὑπομεῖναι ἂν σφᾶς 
οὐδένα), ἠπείγετο ἐπιθέσθαι τῇ πείρᾳ καί οἱ ξυντομω- 


, ε A ὃ λ /, x Ν θ , 4 Ss 
τάτην ἡγεῖτο διαπολέμησιν * ἣ yap κατορθώσας ἕξειν Xv- 
, AS / Ν Ν Ν 5 Ἃ » 
35 pakovoas ἢ ἀπάξειν τὴν στρατιὰν καὶ οὐ τρίψεσθαι ἄλλως 
᾿Αθηναίους τε τοὺς ξυστρατευομένους καὶ τὴν ξύμπασαν 


πόλιν. 


καὶ νομίσας above. Cf. i. 132. 8.— 26. 
μάλιστα: to be closely connected with 
TH πρώτῃ ἡμέρᾳ, on the first day most 
of all, these words forming a strength- 
ening addition to the sup. δεινότατος 
ἐν τῷ παρόντι. On such intensive 
expressions with the sup., see Kiihn. 
349°, 7c. — 27. ὃ τι τάχος: as quickly 
as possible, in Thue. only here. Cf. 
Hot. ix. 7. 29: Kihn. 349°, 7 e.— 
ἀποχρήσασθαι: to get the full benefit. 
Cf. 1. 68. 20; vi. 17. ὃ. --- τῇ παρούσῃ 
τοῦ στρατεύματος ἐκπλήξει: 1.6. the 
consternation caused by his army. 
The gen. is objective. Kr. Spr. 47, 
ἵ, Ὁ. 

28. τὸ παρατείχισμα: cf. ο. 4. 81; 
γ. 8 1.—30. ἁπλοῦν ὄν: cfc. 4. 3.— 
ἐπικρατήσειε: from Vat., more ex- 
pressive than κρατήσειε, which the rest 
of the Mss. have. Cf. i. 2. 10, τῆς 
τροφῆς ἐπικρατεῖν ; of persons, iii. 93. 
16; viii. 48.9. ἐπικρατῆσαι -- get the 
mastery of; ἐπικρατεῖν (c. 43. 38) = 
be master of.— Trav τε “Emurodav τῆς 
ἀναβάσεως : the objective gen. placed 
first, as often. See on i. 32.8. The 
place of ascent was κατὰ τὸν Εὐρύηλον 


(c. 43.21; vi.g7.11).—31. καὶ αὖθις : 
and furthermore, 1.6. in consequence 
thereof. Cf. i. 70.9; v. 43. 10. -- τοῦ 
ἐν αὐταῖς στρατοπέδου: the hostile 
camp situated there, which is more 
definitely described, in its three divis- 
ions, in ὁ. 43. ὃ 4. Didot and Grote 
(VII. c. 60, p. 145) refer it to the camp 
of the Athenians made there after the 
storming of Euryelus (vi.97. 24). They 
understand αὖθις = for the second time, 
but certainly incorrectly. — 32. σφάς: 
see on 0.1. 27. --- 99. ἐπιθέσθαι : = ἐπι- 
χειρῆσαι, with the idea of haste. — καί 
οἱ ξυντομωτάτην ἡγεῖτο διαπολέμησιν : 
“and considered it his shortest way 
of ending the war.” διαπολέμησιν is 
pred.; the subj. is to be supplied from 
See App. 

35. τρίψεσθαι : wear out, as in vi. 
18.37. The fut. (Vat.) is necessary 
with ἀπάξειν. --- ἄλλως : Schol. ἀπρά- 
κτῶς. Cf ΟΠ 17 ΜΞ τὸ. Sy Ὁ: 16: Ὁ. 
— 36. ᾿Αθηναίους τε τοὺς ξυστρατευ- 
ομένους: = τούς τε ξυστρατευομένους 
᾿Αθηναίους, 1.6. not only the Athenians 
in the field, but the whole of the citi- 
zens at home. 


/ “ 
ἐπιθέσθαι τῇ πείρᾳ. 


σι 


10 


THUCYDIDES VII. 43. 


Πρῶτον μὲν οὖν τήν τε γῆν ἐξελθόντες τῶν Συρα- 1 


, » ε > A Ν Ν ¥ A a“ 
KOOLW@Y ETEMOV Ob Αθηναῖοι πέρι τὸν Αναπον καὶ TO 


4 5 ’ ν Ν nw a“ nw 
στρατεύματι ἐπεκράτουν, WOTTEP TO πρῶτον, TW TE πεζῷ 


Ν A / > \ Ν be ε ’ὔ > 
και TALS VAVOLV (οὐδὲ yap καθ ETEPA Ol Συρακόσιοι αντ- 


Ψ \ aw aie an NS ὯΝ πὸ 
επεξήεσαν OTL μη τοις LITTEVOL και ακοντισταις ἀπὸ του 


᾿Ολυμπιείου): ἔπειτα μηχαναῖς ἔδοξε τῷ Δημοσθένει πρό- 


τερον ἀποπειρᾶσαι τοῦ παρατειχίσματος. 


ε ν 2 κα 
ως δὲ αὐυτῳ 


/ 4 ε Ἂς “ὦ / 
προσαγαγόντι κατεκαύθησάν τε ὑπὸ τῶν ἐναντίων ἀπὸ 


Qn ’ὔ Ν Ν “ ΕἾ ~ 
τοῦ τείχους ἀμυνομένων αἱ μηχαναὶ Kal TH ἄλλῃ στρατιᾷ 


πολλαχῇ προσβάλλοντες ἀπεκρούοντο, οὐκέτι ἐδόκει δια- 


τρίβειν, ἀλλὰ πείσας τόν τε Νικίαν καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους Evv- 


4 c ον 
ἄρχοντας, ὡς ἐπενόει, τὴν 


43. After fruitless attacks on the 
cross-wall from the southern side, Demos- 
thenes undertakes with the whole of the 
army, provided with all that was neces- 
sary, an attack from the north on Epipo- 
lae and the fortifications of the Syra- 
cusans situated there. They ascend the 
heights, and take the first fortifications. 


Even after Gylippus takes upon himself 


the defence, the Athenians continue to 
drive back the Syracusans before their 
impetuous assault, until they are checked 
by the stubborn resistance of the Boeo- 
tians, fall into confusion, and finally are 
forced to give way. ἷ 

1. πρῶτον μὲν οὖν... Ὀλυμπιείου : 
with this sent., which is usually in- 
cluded in the preceding chap., c. 43 
begins more appropriately. — ἐξεὰ- 
θόντες: sc. ἐκ Tod στρατοπέδου. --- ὃ. 
ἐπεκράτουν : sc. τῆς γῆς. See on ὁ. 
42. 90. -- ὥσπερ τὸ πρῶτον : 1.6. after 
the fleet had united with the land 
army in the great harbour, vi. 103. 
§ 1,2. Later, it is true, Nicias de- 
clared in his letter to Athens (6. 11. 
18), οὐδὲ τῆς χώρας ἐπὶ πολὺ διὰ τοὺς 


ἱππέας ἐξερχόμεθα. ---4. οὐδὲ καθ᾽ ἕτε- 
ρα: 1.6. neither by land nor sea = 


ἐπιχείρησιν TOV Ἐπιπολῶν 


Cf. ii. 67. 84, μηδὲ μεθ᾽ 
ἑτέρων. See on 6. 41. 15.—5. ὅτι 
μή: nisi, as in iv. 26. 5; 94.9. Kr. 
Spr. 65, 5, 11.— 7. τοῦ παρατειχίσμα- 
tos: the cross-wall (τὸ ἐγκάρσιον τεῖ- 
xos) begun by Gylippus ec. 4. 8:1, 
carried on c. 5, § 1, and finished 
ec. 7. ὃ 1, by which the comple- 
tion of the Athenian wall of cir- 
cumvallation was rendered impossi- 
ble. Nicias calls it in his letter 
likewise παρατείχισμα (c. 11. 15), and 
points already at that time to the 
present undertaking of Demosthenes, 
μὴ εἶναι περιτειχίσαι αὐτούς, ἢν μή τις 
τὸ παρατείχισμα πολλῇ στρατιᾷ ἐπελ- 
θὼν ἕλῃ. See map of the siege. — 8. 
προσαγαγόντι: the first fruitless at- 
tempt must have been directed from 
the south against the more eastern 
part of the παρατείχισμα. The Athe- 
nians found here a strong and watch- 
ful garrison. See App. —10. πολ- 
λαχῇ : at different points of the Syra- 
cusan cross-wall. —11. πείσας τὸν 
Νικίαν : ace. to Plut. Nic. 21, Nicias 
long opposed the plan. — τοὺς ἄλλους : 
Eurymedon, Menander, and Euthyde- 
mus (c. 16. 5, 9).—12. ὡς ἐπενόει : 


> . / 
κατ᾽ οὐδέτερα. 


15 


20 


25 


THUCYDIDES VIL. 43. 


3 A Sn ies Leek A 9502 90 72 > A 
ἐποιεῖτο. Kal ἡμέρας μὲν ἀδύνατα ἐδόκει εἶναι λαθεῖν 
£ δ 5 ’ 4 \ ’ 5 
προσελθόντας τε καὶ ἀναβάντας, παραγγείλας δὲ πένθ 
ἡμερῶν σιτία καὶ τοὺς λιθολόγους καὶ τέκτονας πάντας 
λαβὼν καὶ ἄλλην παρασκευὴν τοξευμάτων τε καὶ ὅσα 
ἔδει, ἣν κρατῶσι, τειχίζοντας ἔχειν, αὐτὸς μὲν ἀπὸ πρώ- 
ν x 5 , \ , 5 Ν \ 
Tov ὕπνου καὶ Εὐρυμέδων καὶ Μένανδρος ἀναλαβὼν τὴν 
A“ Ν 5 7, τῆς Ν 3 / 5 4 5 
πᾶσαν στρατιὰν ἐχώρει πρὸς τὰς ᾿Επιπολάς, Νικίας ὃ 
ἐν τοῖς τείχεσιν ὑπελείπετο. καὶ ἐπειδὴ ἐγένοντο πρὸς 
αὐταῖς κατὰ τὸν Εὐρύηλον, ἧπερ καὶ ἡ προτέρα στρα- 
Ν Ἂς ΄“ 5 γ , , Ν ᾽ὔ “A 
Tia TO πρῶτον ἀνέβη, λανθάνουσί τε τοὺς φύλακας τῶν 
Συρακοσίων καὶ προσβάντες τὸ τείχισμα ὃ ἦν αὐτόθι 
τῶν Συρακοσίων αἱροῦσι καὶ ἄνδρας τῶν φυλάκων ἀπο- 
΄ ε \ ΄ὕ , 52 Ν \ Ν 
κτείνουσιν: οἱ δὲ πλείους διαφυγόντες εὐθὺς πρὸς τὰ 
στρατόπεδα, ἃ ἦν ἐπὶ τῶν ᾿Επιπολῶν τρία ἐν προτει- 
’ὔ a Ν τ ΄ὔ ἃ \ Lo =/ 
χίσμασιν, ἕν μὲν τῶν Συρακοσίων, ἕν δὲ τῶν ἄλλων ΣΙι- 


only Vat. has ὡς, the rest καί after ---18. ἀναλαβὼν... ἐχώρει: unusual 


ἐπενόει, Which was prob. added after 
ὡς dropped out. 

13. ἀδύνατα: the neut. pl. accords 
with the usage of Thuc. Cf. i. 1. 11; 
IOs 1.19. 566 011. 7: 2: All 
the Mss. except Vat. have ἀδύνατον. 
— 14. πένθ᾽ ἡμερῶν σιτία: gen. of 
measure. See on ὁ. 2. 17. — 15. 
λιθολόγους kal τέκτονας : as in Vi. 44. 
4. Cf. τέκτονες καὶ λιθουργοί in v. 82. 
27.—16. ἄλλην : besides. See one. 4. 
12. --- παρασκευὴν τοξευμάτων : hardly 
appropriate between carpenters and 
what was necessary for wall-building. 
Madvig (Advv. I. p. 380) proposed 
μοχλευμάτων, Meineke λαξευμάτων (= 
Aatevrnpiwy, implements for hewing 
stones); but neither is prob. The 
correct reading is still to be found. 


σιδήρια λιθουργά (iv. 4. 5) would suit. 


the sense. —17. amo πρώτου ὕπνου: 
= περὶ πρῶτον ὕπνον (ii. 2.10). Chap’ 
ἑσπέρας εὐθύς in iii. 112. 8; viii. 27. 27. 


sing. after several preceding nouns, 
agreeing with the main subj. Cf. iv. 
112. 9. The sing. at the beginning 
before several subjs. is common. Cf. 
i. 29.6; iii. 70. 7; 72.4. Kr. Spr. 638, 
4, ---τὴν πᾶσαν στρατιάν : Diod. says, 
“10,000 hoplites and as many light 
troops”; Plut. “the foot force.” — 
19. Νικίας δὲ. . . ὑπελείπετο: with 
Euthydemus, as it seems. The impf. 
ὑπελείπετο refers to his task of guard- 
ing the camp. 

21. ἥπερ. .. ἀνέβη: cf vi. 97. 11. 
— 24. ἄνδρας τῶν φυλάκων : τινας, 
which Vat. inserts after ἄνδρας, is not 
in accord with the usage of Thuc. 
Of tis 330 1Sd4hive132, 465 Vv. 115, 125 
viii. 71. 18. ἄνδρας has itself in these 
passages almost the force of τινας. 

26. ἐν προτειχίσμασιν: rightly 
added from Vat., referring to the 
defensive outworks out of which 
Gylippus sallies (59). They were 


79 


5) 
2 


80 


30 


35 


THUCYDIDES VII. 43. 


κελιωτῶν, ἕν δὲ τῶν ξυμμάχων, ἀγγέλλουσι THY ἔφοδον 
καὶ τοῖς ἑξακοσίοις τῶν Συρακοσίων, ot καὶ πρῶτοι κατὰ 
τοῦτο τὸ μέρος τῶν ᾿Επιπολῶν φύλακες ἦσαν, ἔφραζον. 
ε » 5 4 > > ’ \ > na ε af Ἀ 
οἱ δ᾽ ἐβοήθουν τ᾽ εὐθύς, καὶ αὐτοῖς ὁ Δημοσθένης καὶ 
οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐντυχόντες ἀμυνομένους προθύμως ἔτρε- 
ψαν. 


η ΄ δρμῇ τοῦ περαίνεσθαι ὧν ἕνεκα ἦλθον μὴ 
τῇ παρούσῃ ὁρμῇ τοῦ περ κα ἦλθον μὴ 


Ν 5 Ν Ν 5 Ν > 4 > Ν /, ν 
καὶ αὐτοὶ μὲν εὐθὺς ἐχώρουν ἐς τὸ πρόσθεν, ὅπως 


A , » NN a ΄ Ν 

βραδεῖς γένωνται: ἄλλοι δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης τὸ παρα- 
τείχισμα τῶν Συρακοσίων, οὐχ ὑπομενόντων τῶν φυλά- 
οἱ δὲ Συρα- 


9 A Ν 5 / 5 ez 
κων, Ὥβου» τε και τας ἐπάλξεις απέεσυρον. 


, \ ε ΄, Χ ε , Ν ε > 
κοσιοι και OL ξύμμαχοι καὶ ὁ Τύλιππος καὶ οἱ μετ 


> A 5 , 5 ΄ / X LO ΄ 
αυτου ἐβοήθουν εκ των προτειχισμαάτων, και α OKY)TOU 


situated at some distance from one 
another, and abutted on the northern 
side of the παρατείχισμα. See the map. 
— 28. τῶν ξυμμάχων : i.e. those from 
Greece proper. — 29. τοῖς ἑξακοσίοις : 
this corps of the λογάδες τῶν ὁπλιτῶν 


(vi. 96. 16) which had suffered great 


loss (vi. 97. 20), had been restored 
prob. to its former strength, and stood 
here too, again, at the most danger- 
ous post.—30. ἔφραζον: informed 
them more clearly (impf.). 

31. ot δ᾽ ἐβοήθουν τε... kal αὐτοῖς 
6 Δημοσθένης κτέ.: paratactic const. 
for more vivid representation: “as 
they hastened to lend aid, the Athe- 
nians met them and put them to 
flight.” on 6. 4. 5.—34. τοῦ 
περαίνεσθαι: pass., not mid. as most 
editt. take it; for of the mid. of the 
simple verb there seems to be no 
example, though Plat. has διαπεραίνε- 
σθαι (Phaedr. 263 6; Prot.314e; Legg. 
673 ¢, etc.). It can therefore be taken 
only with βραδεῖς γένωνται (not with 
ὁρμῇ), which the Schol. correctly ex- 
plains, τὸ μὴ βραδεῖς γένωνται ἀντὶ τοῦ 
μὴ ὑστερήσωσι κεῖται: “in order that 


Se e 


they, in the impulse of the moment, 
might not be slow about the accom- 
plishment of that for which they had 
come.” G.1120; H. 749. Quite dif- 
ferent is the causal dat. βραδυτέρους 
τῷ ἀμύνεσθαι in iv. 34. 4, to which Kr. 
refers. — 35. ἄλλοι: as contrasted 
with αὐτοί (Demosthenes and the 
main body of the Athenians), Eury- 
medon and Menander with the rest 
of the Athenian forces. After the 
former had driven back the foremost 
Syracusans, the latter turned imme- 
diately to the attack on the cross- 
wall (παρατείχισμα)Ὶ. --- ἀπὸ τῆς πρώ- 
τῆς τὸ παρατείχισμα: the Mss. read 
τὸ ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης παρατείχισμα, Which 
is impossible. Goeller transposed the 
art. as in our text. ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης 
means at the very beginning. This for- 
mula, as well as ἀπὸ πρώτης (i. 77. 11), 
ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης εὐθύς (Luc. de Conscrib. 
Hist.i. 1), refers only to time. Matth. 
Gr. 282, 5.—37. ἥρουν τε kal. . . ἀπέ- 
συρον: inchoative impfs. 

38. ὁ Τύλιππος καὶ οἱ per αὐτοῦ: 
Cl., referring to 27, thinks that 
Gylippus perhaps had taken com- 


THUCYDIDES VII. 43, 44. 


an , 4 3 Ν ΄ ’, , 
40 τοῦ τολμήματος σφίσιν ἐν νυκτὶ γενομένου προσέβαλόν 


ων Ν 
τε τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις ἐκπεπληγμένοι καὶ βιασθέντες ὑπ᾽ 


αὐτῶν τὸ πρῶτον ὑπεχώρησαν. 


προϊόντων δὲ τῶν ᾽᾿Αθη- 


ναΐων ἐν ἀταξίᾳ μᾶλλον ἤδη ὡς κεκρατηκότων καὶ βου 
ὑπ}: 10 βρᾶατη ie 


λομένων διὰ παντὸς TOD μήπω μεμαχημένου τῶν ἐναν- 


΄ὔ ε , Ἂ ν NET ef lal a 
45 τίων ws τάχιστα διελθεῖν, Wa μὴ ἀνέντων σφῶν τῆς 


ἐφόδου αὖθις ξυστραφῶσιν, οἱ Βοιωτοὶ πρῶτοι αὐτοῖς 


5 ’ \ Uf »» ’ὔὕ Ἀ 5 Ν 
ἀντέσχον καὶ προσβαλόντες ἐτρεψάν τε καὶ ἐς φυγὴν κατ- 


44έστησαν. 


\ > lol » 9 “ “Ὁ \ 5» 4 
καὶ ἐνταῦθα ἤδη ἐν πολλῇ Tapayy καὶ ἀπορίᾳ 


ἐγίγνοντο οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, ἣν οὐδὲ πυθέσθαι ῥάδιον ἢν 


50.» 5 5 4 , Ψ / 
οὐδ᾽ ἀφ᾽ ἑτέρων ὅτῳ τρόπῳ 


mand esp. of the more independent 
Siceliotes, most of whom were in ac- 
tion now for the first time; Hermo- 
crates of the main army of the Syra- 
cusans and the dependent allies. But 
Diod. xi. 11 says that Hermocrates. 
commanded the Six Hundred (29). 
It is more likely, perhaps, that οἱ 
μετὰ Γυλίππου refers to τῶν ξυμμάχων 
in 28 (the allies from the rest of 
Greece), of ξύμμαχοι here to τῶν ἄλλων 
Σικελιωτῶν, in 27.—41. ἐκπεπληγμέ- 
vot: 7.6. from the very beginning, 
βιασθέντες (aor.) in the course of the 
battle. — ὑπ᾿ αὐτῶν : sc. τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων. 

43. ὡς κεκρατηκότων : the pf. partic. 
indicates the fatal illusion: ‘‘ feeling 
that the victory had already been fully 
decided for them.’ —44. διὰ παντὸς 
TOU μήπω μεμαχημένου : the common 
use of the neut. partic. in a collective 
sense, as in ὁ. 85. 12, 14; iv. 96.17; 
vi. 89.16. Kr. Spr. 48, 4,17. So it 
is used in an abstract sense in i. 36. 
3; ii. 87.9, 10.—45. διελθεῖν : to get 
through with them, as in iii. 45. 9, 
διεξεληλύθασι διὰ πασῶν τῶν (ζημιῶν οἱ 
ἄνθρωποι. But St. understands διελ- 
θεῖν in lit. sense, pervadere per 
hostes eosque dissipare. So 


ν ᾿ , > \ 
ἕκαστα ξυνηνέχθη. ev μὲν 
Valla.—tys ἐφόδου: with ἀνέντων, as 
in vy. 32. 15, ἀνεῖσαν τῆς φιλονικία“. 
Kiihn. 421, 3.—46. ot Βοιωτοί: cf. 
c. 19.17; 25. 18. The merit of the 
Boeotians is mentioned esp. by Plut. 
Nic. 21.—47. ἐς φυγὴν κατέστησαν : 
cf. lil. 108. 5; iv. 14. 4, etc. 

44, The difficulty. of maintaining 
order in the darkness and uncertainty 
turns the retreat into a wild flight, in 
which many perish, part in the pursuit, 
still more in leaping down from the cliff. 
Vivid description of the different events. 

1. ἐν... ἀπορίᾳ ἐγίγνοντο : compre- 
hensive expression for the fearful sit- 
uation described in ὃ 2 ff. Cf. iv. 
26. 8.— 2. ἥν : placed first by prolepsis. 
Arn. explains that we should have ex- 
pected ὅτῳ τρόπῳ ξυνηνέχθη, sc. ἡ Ta- 
ραχή, but that ἕκαστα having been in- 
serted, the sent. is now ungrammati- 
cal. Asitstands, ἕκαστα seems to bear 
a sort of partitive relation to the 
subj. implied in ἥν. τ-- οὐδὲ... ῥᾷδιον 
ἦν: this expression undoubtedly re- 
fers to Thucydides’ own experience. 
See Introd. to Book 1. p. 15.— 3. οὐδ᾽ 
ἀφ᾽ ἑτέρων : i.e. neither from Atheni- 
ans nor from Syracusans. C/. v. 26. 
26, where Thuc. speaks of his care in 


81 


82 THUCYDIDES VII. 44. 


Ν ε 4, / , ν δὲ ὑδὲ A e 
yap ἡμέρᾳ σαφέστερα μέν, ὅμως δὲ οὐδὲ ταῦτα οἵ παρα. 
ὅ γενόμενοι πάντα πλὴν τὸ καθ᾽ ἑαυτὸν ἕκαστος μόλις οἷ- 
δεν" ἐν δὲ νυκτομαχίᾳ, ἣ μόνη δὴ στρατοπέδων μεγά- 
Aa “ lal » 
λων ἔν ye TUDE τῷ πολέμῳ ἐγένετο, πῶς ἂν τις σαφῶς 
» > \ Ν ΄ , eZ. Ν ν 

τι noe; ἢν μὲν γὰρ σελήνη λαμπρά, ἑώρων δὲ οὕτως 

iA r ε > λ “ a. Ψ' \ Ν ¥ A , 
ἀλλήλους ws ἐν σελήνῃ εἰκός, THY μὲν ὄψιν τοῦ σώματος 
10 προορᾶν, τὴν δὲ γνῶσιν τοῦ οἰκείου ἀπιστεῖσθαι. ὁπλῖ- 
ται δὲ ἀμφοτέρων οὐκ ὀλίγοι ἐν στενοχωρίᾳ ἀνεστρέφοντο 
Pope Se be ΧΟΡ lc 
\ ~ > 2 ε Ν » 5 aA ε Ν » A 
καὶ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ot μὲν ἤδη ἐνικῶντο, ot δὲ ἔτι TH 
πολὺ δὲ 


΄, > a Ν Ν ᾿Ξ 5 ΄ Ν a: ἘΦ 
στρατευμᾶτος αὐυτοις TO μεν αρτι ἀναβεβήκει, TO ὃ Ἐ7Ὶ 


OT ἐφόδῳ ἀήσσητοι ἐνώρου καὶ τοῦ ἀλλ 
πρώτῃ € DY ANTONTOL ἐχώρουν. ὶ τοῦ ου 


15 προσανῇήει, ὥστ᾽ οὐκ ἠπίσταντο πρὸς ὅ τι χρὴ χωρῆσαι. 
ἤδη γὰρ τὰ πρόσθεν τῆς τροπῆς γεγενημένης ἐτετάρακτο 


’ὔ Ν \ 4 ε Ν can “ “ 
παντα και χαλεπὰ NV VITO τὴς Bons διαγνῶναι. 


making accurate investigations: γενο- 
μένῳ παρ᾽ ἀμφοτέροις τοῖς πράγμασι. For 
position of the prep., see on 6. 43. 4. 
— 4. σαφέστερα μέν: not to be const. 
with οἶδεν, but with something like τὰ 
γιγνόμενά ἐστι to be supplied from 
ξυνηνέχθη. --- ὅμως... οἶδεν : “but still 
even of these things those who are en- 
gaged do not (know) everything, ex- 
cept (so far as) each knows with diffi- 
culty what happens just about him- 
self.” πάντα follows οὐδὲ ταῦτα in 
explanatory appos. οἶδεν agrees with 
the nearer ἕκαστος. Kr. Spr. 63, 1, 3. 
Cf. c. 27. 8, where ἕκαστος takes a pl. 
verb.— 6. δή: belongs. with μόνη as 
in 11. 77. 7 with πᾶσαν, i. 33. 13 with 
ὀλίγοις. ---. ἔν ye τῷδε TH πολέμῳ: 
γε (from Vat.) as in iv. 48. 24, ὅσα γε 
κατὰ Tov πόλεμον τόνδε. --- ἄν TIS... 
ἤδει: the transition to the particular 
case was made at ἥ, hence only ἤδει, 
not εἰδείη, which some Mss. give, is 
possible. 


ν Ν 
οἱ τε γὰρ 


9. ὡς... εἰκός : sc. δρᾶν, to which 
the following infs. are added in ex- 
planation. — 10. τὴν δὲ γνῶσιν τοῦ 
οἰκείου ἀπιστεῖσθαι : “to distrust their 
recognition of friends.’’ τοῦ οἰκείου 
Cl. explains as what was especial or 
peculiar, in contrast to τοῦ σώματος. 
ἀπιστεῖσθαι as v. 68. 6, τὰ πλήθη ἤπι- 
στεῖτο. --- 11. ἀνεστρέφοντο: versa- 
bantur, as in iv. 35. 2; vill. 94. 9. 

12. τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων : 1.6. those who, 
ace. to ὁ. 43. § 9, 4, had first ascended 
the heights and immediately pressed 
on (c. 43. § 5). With these is con- 
trasted in 13 τὸ ἄλλο στράτευμα. --- οἱ 
δὲ ἔτι... ἐχώρουν : 1.6. were advancing 
unchecked with their first impulse. 
Cf. c. 43. 35.—14. αὐτοῖς: see on 
C. 34. 7.—15. πρὸς 6 τι χρὴ χωρῆσαι: 
which body to join. —16. τὰ πρόσθεν: 
the troops that had first pressed for- 
ward. —17. χαλεπὰ... διαγνῶναι: 
with τὰ πρόσθεν, as in i. 1. 10, τὰ ἔτι 
παλαιότερα σαφῶς εὑρεῖν ἀδύνατα. 


THUCYDIDES VII. 44. 


Συρακόσιοι καὶ ot ξύμμαχοι ws κρατοῦντες παρεκελεύοντό 


τε κραυγῇ οὐκ OAL ὦώμενοι, ἀδύνατον ὃν ἐν νυκτὶ 
€ κραυγῃ Yn χρώμενοι, 


ΕἾ A \ 4 Ν , 5 , 
20 ἄλλῳ τῳ σημῆναι, καὶ ἅμα τοὺς προσφερομένους ἐδέ- 


ν > 0 A 5 ΄’΄ Lal > Ἀ ἣν A 
χοντο" ot Te ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐζήτουν τε σφᾶς αὐτοὺς καὶ πᾶν 


τὸ ἐξ ἐναντίας, καὶ εἰ φίλιον εἴη τῶν ἤδη πάλιν φευγόν- 


74 3 Ψ ‘\ “a 5 ’, Τα , 
των, πολέμιον ἐνόμιζον, καὶ τοῖς ἐρωτήμασι τοῦ ξυνθή- 


ματος πυκνοῖς χρώμενοι διὰ τὸ μὴ εἶναι ἄλλῳ τῳ γνω- 


25 ρίσαι, σφίσι τε αὐτοῖς θόρυβον πολὺν παρεῖχον ἅμα 


, 5 “ Ν A ’ Ν SEX 
πάντες ἐρωτῶντες, καὶ τοῖς πολεμίοις σαφὲς αὐτὸ κατ- 


, Ν 3 > Zz 5 ε , 5 ΄ Ν Ν 
εστησαν" ΤΟ ὃ εκεινων ουχ ομοιως HTLOTAVTO, διὰ ΤΟ 


an Ν , δι 
κρατοῦντας αὐτοὺς καὶ μὴ διεσπασμένους ἧσσον ἀγνο- 


lal x , » “ 
εἶσθαι, ὥστ᾽ εἰ μὲν ἐντύχοιέν τισι κρείσσους ὄντες τῶν 


Ἂν ΄ > ‘ 4 =i 7 > 4, ‘\ 
30 πολεμίων, διέφευγον αὐτοὺς ἅτε ἐκείνων ἐπιστάμενοι TO 


18. ὡς κρατοῦντες : in the feeling of 
victory. The ὡς of Vat. is preferable 
to the simple partic. —19. κραυγῇ 
οὐκ ὀλίγῃ χρώμενοι : ‘with loud cries,” 
to be taken with παρεκελεύοντο (sc. 
ἀλλήλους) and καὶ ἅμα τοὺς προσφερο- 
μένους (the Athenians coming up) ἐδέ- 
xovro as shown by τε, καὶ ἅμα. --- ἀδύ- 
νατον ov: for the acc. abs, of impers. 
phrase, see G. 1569; H. 973; Kiihn. 
487, 3.— 20. σημῆναι : common term 
in military language. Cf. c. 50. 26; 
v. 71. 17.—21. οἵ re ’AOnvaior: 1.6. οἵ 
νεωστὶ ἀνεβεβήκεσαν. teis correlative 
to re in 17. Observe the repeated 
correlation with τε, καί throughout 
the sent. —oods αὐτούς : = ἀλλήλους, 
as in viii. 92.52. Kr. Spr. 51, 2, 16. 
The meaning is: those who were just 
coming up looked about for those 
who had gone before, but took all who 
came toward them, 1.6. even their 
own people who were fleeing back, 
for enemies. —22. τὸ ἐξ ἐναντίας : 
the correct reading from Vat. instead 
of the vulgate τὸ ἐναντίον. Cf. Schol. 
γράφεται καὶ πᾶν τὸ ἐξ ἐναντίας. For 


ἐξ ἐναντίας, from the opposite direction, 
cf. iv. 33. 5; 35. 11. or the neut. 
sing. in collective sense, see Kiihn. 
347, 3.—madw: see on c. 40. 3.— 23. 
τοῦ ξυνθήματος : λόγος ἐν πολέμῳ τῶν 
οἰκείων διδόμενος, Etymol. Mag. Cf. 51 
below. Cf. Tac. Hist. iii. 22, cre- 
bris interrogationibus notum 
pugnae signum. — 24. εἶναι: = 
παρεῖναι. See onc. 11. 15.— γνωρίσαι : 
sc. ἀλλήλους. --- 25. σφίσι τε αὐτοῖς 
... ἐρωτῶντες : 1.6. they caused con- 
fusion among themselves, because all 
were asking at the same time, and 
therefore no one got an intelligible 


answer. — 26. σαφὲς αὐτὸ κατέστη- 
σαν: cf. i. 32.6; 140.80. αὐτό, sc. τὸ 
ξύνθημα. 


27. τὸ δ᾽ ἐκείνων. .. ἠπίσταντο: 
but their (the Syracusans’) watchword 
the Athenians did not know to the same 
extent (οὐχ duotws).— διὰ TO... Ho- 
σον ἀγνοεῖσθαι: sc. ἐν ἀλλήλοις. The 
Syracusans had no need to ask for 
their own watchword, because they 
kept together (μὴ διεσπασμένους) and 
knew one another. —29. ἐντυχοιέν 


83 


84 


35 


40 


45 


THUCYDIDES VII. 44. 


, 3 3 5 Ν Ν ε , , 
ἕξύνθημα, εἰ δ᾽ αὐτοὶ μὴ ὑποκρίνοιντο, διεφθείροντο. 
, Ν Ν 5 ν », ᾿ ε Zz 
μέγιστον δὲ καὶ οὐχ ἥκιστα ἔβλαψεν καὶ ὁ παιανισμός * 
ἀπὸ γὰρ ἀμφοτέρων παραπλήσιος ὧν ἀπορίαν παρεῖχεν. 
οἵ τε γὰρ ᾿Λργεῖοι καὶ οἱ Κερκυραῖοι καὶ ὅσον Δωρικὸν 
a ars ΄ > re τ , , A 
per ᾿Αθηναίων ἦν ὁπότε παιανίσειαν, φόβον παρεῖχε 

“A > A 9 , ε ’ὔ ν , 
τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις, οἵ τε πολέμιοι ὁμοίως. ὥστε τέλος Evp- 
πεσόντες αὑτοῖς κατὰ πολλὰ τοῦ στρατοπέδου, ἐπεὶ ἅπαξ 


ἐταράχθησαν, φίλοι τε φίλοις καὶ πολῖται πολίταις, οὐ 


-povov ἐς φόβον καθίστασαν, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐς χεῖρας ἀλλήλοις 


5 / / 3 4 Ν ’ va ἴω 
ἐλθόντες μόλις ἀπελύοντο. καὶ διωκόμενοι κατά τε τῶν 
κρημνῶν πολλοὶ ῥιπτοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς ἀπώλλυντο, στενῆς 
ΕΥ̓ A ΕῚ νΝ lal 5 lal , , Ν 
οὔσης τῆς ἀπὸ τῶν ᾿Επιπολῶν πάλιν καταβάσεως, καὶ 


ἐπειδὴ ἐς τὸ ὁμαλὸν οἱ σῳζόμενοι ἄνωθεν KataBater, ot 
ὴ μ υζόμ 


~J 


μὲν πολλοὶ αὐτῶν Kal ὅσοι ἦσαν TOV προτέρων TTPATLW- ° 


τῶν ἐμπειρίᾳ μᾶλλον τῆς χώρας ἐς τὸ στρατόπεδον διε- 


39. καθίστασαν: understand αὑτούς 


τισι: sc. οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι. τισι governs 
τῶν πολεμίων. --- 31. αὐτοί: the Athe- 
nians again, who throughout the 
whole description are those first in 
mind.— ὑποκρίνοιντο : = ἀποκρίνοιντο. 
Cf. Hat. i. 78. 14; o1. 29; 164. 8. 
Understand here something like ἐντυ- 
χόντες κρείσσοσι τῶν πολεμίων. 

32. μέγιστον καὶ οὐχ ἥκιστα : see 
on 6. 24. 12. ---καὶ 6 παιανισμός: cf. 
Schol. on i. 50. 20, δύο παιᾶνας ῆδον οἱ 
Ἕλληνες, πρὸ μὲν τοῦ πολέμου τῷ “Apel, 
μετὰ δὲ τὸν πόλεμον τῷ ᾿Απόλλωνι. CL. 
and St. adopt everywhere, though 
against most of the Mss., παιανι- 
σμός, παια νίζειν for the forms with ὦ 
(παιων-). See oni. 50. 20; vi. 32. 10. 
Herodian recognizes only παιαν ---. 
— 35. φόβον παρεῖχε: sc. τὸ παιανίσαι. 
The Athenians thought the paean of 
their Dorian allies was hostile, just 
as that of the enemy themselves. — 
36. οἵ τε πολέμιοι ὁμοίως : sc. 
παιανίσειαν. 


ὁπότε 


or ἀλλήλους. Cf. ἐς φόβον καταστῆναι, 
ii. 81.27; iv. 96. 23. See on ec. 43. 
47. On the impf. for the aor., see 
App. —40. μόλις ἀπελύοντο : were 
separated with difficulty, of bitter con- 
test, as in c. 63. 3; i. 49. 7. 

41. πολλοί: so all the later editt. 
for of πολλοί of the Mss., because acc. 
to the whole account, and esp. 6. 45. 
§ 2, the majority did not perish in this 
way. Besides, Plut. and Valla seem 
not to have read the art. — ῥιπτοῦν- 
τες : on the form, see App. — €avtots : 
for σφᾶς αὐτούς. Cf. 1. 4. 18; 49. 22. 
—42. πάλιν: with καταβάσεως as in 
c. 38.16 with ἔκπλους, c. 62. 15 with 
ἀνάκρουσις. Cf.iv. 10.14; v. 5.1. Kr. 
Spr. 50, 8, 4.—43. ἐπειδὴ... κατα- 
Baiev: opt. with reference to the dif- 
ferent divisions. —44. τῶν προτέρων 
στρατιωτῶν : 1.6. τῆς προτέρας στρατιᾶς 
(c. 43. 21), who, as they had ascended 
Epipolae in the summer of 414 B.c., 


THUCYDIDES VII. 44-.46. 


fs e \ 
φύγγανον, οἱ δὲ 


lal ε ΄“3νΜ be 
των ὁδῶν κατα, 


2 ν Ν a 
ὕστερον ἥκοντες εἰσὶν ot διαμαρτόντες 


τὴν yopav ἐπλανήθησαν" οὕς, ἐπειδὺ 
ὴν χώρ nono οὕς, ἐπειδὴ 


ἡμέρα ἐγένετο, οἱ ἱππῆς τῶν Συρακοσίων περιελάσαντες 


διέφθειραν. 
45 


Tn δ᾽ ε ’ὔ ε Ν Σ ΄, ὃ , omen 
7) VOTEPAla OL μεν υρακοσιοι vo TPOTTALa 


3, Sky, (oye) a ene / Ἀ Ν 
«στῆσαν, ἔπι TE ταις. ΕἘπιπολαῖς Ἢ πρόσβασις και κατα 


Ἂς , “- ε Ν > , e > 5 “ 
τὸ χωρίον ἣ οἱ Βοιωτοὶ ἀντέστησαν, οἱ δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναῖοι 


τοὺς νεκροὺς ὑποσπόνδους ἐκομίσαντο. 


ἀπέθανον δὲ οὐκ 


\ 7 7. A Ν A , “ , » 
5 ὀλίγοι αὐτῶν τε καὶ τῶν ξυμμάχων, ὅπλα μέντοι ἔτι 


», “ἡ Ν Ν Ν 3 7: ε Ἂν Ν lal 
πλείω ἢ κατὰ TOUS νεκροὺς ἐλήφθη οἱ yap κατὰ τῶν. 


κρημνῶν βιασθέντες ἄλλεσθαι ψιλοὶ [ἄνευ τῶν ἀσπίδων] 


οἱ μὲν ἀπώλλυντο, οἱ δ᾽ ἐσώθησαν. 


46 


A lol ε Ν \ 
Mera δὲ τοῦτο οἱ μὲν Συρακόσιοι ws ἐπὶ ἀπροσ- 


δοκήτῳ εὐπραγίᾳ πάλιν αὖ ἀναρρωσθέντες, ὥσπερ καὶ 


were better acquainted with the coun- 
try. —45. διεφύγγανον : for this fuller 
form, cf. φυγγάνω, Aesch. Prom. 513; 
Soph. 41.132; ἀποφυγγάνω, Dem. xxi11. 
74; διαφυγγάνω, Aeschin. 111.10; Arr. 
An. iv. 4.6; ἐκφυγγάνω, Aesch. Prom. 
525; καταφυγγάνω, Aeschin. 111. 208; 
Hdt. vi. 16. 4. — 46. εἰσὶν οἵ: part. 
appos. to of δέ, as i. 119. 4, of ἄλλοι, 
οἱ πλείους. Cf. iv. 52.4; vi. 88. 21.— 
διαμαρτόντες τῶν ὁδῶν : also in i. 106. 
3.— 47. ἐπλανήθησαν, διέφθειραν : the 
fate of individuals (εἰσὶν οἵ) stated 
in the aor. 

45. The Syracusans erect two tro- 
phies. Losses of the Athenians. 

2. ἢ ἡ πρόσβασις : sc. ἐγένετο = ἧ 
οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι προσέβησαν, corresponding 
to ἡ οἱ Βοιωτοὶ ἀντέστησαν. πρόσβασις 
is used not in a local sense, the way 
up, but with verbal force, the ascend- 
ing (of the heights by way of Euryelus, 
6. 43.21). — 3. ἢ ot Βοιωτοὶ ἀντέστη- 
σαν: on the reading, see App. — 4. 
ὑποσπόνδους ἐκομίσαντο : see onc. 5.9. 


οὐκ ὀλίγοι: ace. to Diod. x11. 11, 
2500; Plut. Nic. 21, 2000.— 5. ὅπλα: 
esp. shields. —6. πλείω ἢ κατὰ τοὺς 
νεκρούς : cf. Cc. 75. 22 ;1. 7γ6. 17 ; 11. 50. 2; 
v. 102.2; ν].15.10. Kr. Spr. 49, 4. — 
7. ψιλοὶ [ἄνευ τῶν ἀσπίδων] : ψιλοί is 
pred. ‘The bracketed words Pluygers, 
Cl., and St. consider an interpolation. 
See App. Cobet proposed ἀπώλοντο, 
but the impf. is prop. used of those 
who, scattered the country 
(ἐπλανήθησαν, c. 44. 47), met their 
death, one after another, at the hands 
of the cavalry. ἐσώθησαν indicates 
only the final result. —8. οἱ μὲν... 
οἱ δέ: part. appos. to of yap... 
βιασθέντες ἅλλεσθαι. 

46. The Syracusans try to get rein- 


over 


forcements from Agrigentum and_ the 


interior of Sicily. 

2. εὐπραγίᾳ: Thuc. uses equally 
the forms εὐπραγία and εὐπραξία. Cf. 
iii. 39. 23, ἀπροσδόκητος εὐπραξία. --- 
πάλιν av: asinc. 64. 1,not pleonastic; 
πάλιν, back, i.e. into the former mood, 


85 


bo 


THUCYDIDES VII. 46, 47. 


, 5 Ν > , , , 
πρότερον, ἐς μὲν Ἀκράγαντα στασιάζοντα πεντεκαΐδεκα 


Ν ys ᾿ς > / 9 > , Ν / 
ναυσι &lLKAVOV ἀπέστειλαν, οπως εἐπαγαγοιτο ΤῊΝ πόλιν, 


5 εἰ δύναιτο: Γύλιππος δὲ κατὰ γῆν ἐς τὴν ἄλλην Σικε- 
, 


λίαν ῴχετο αὖθις, ἄξων στρατιὰν ἔτι, ὡς ἐν ἐλπίδι ὧν 


Ν Ν ΄ A "AO ΄, ε ΄ ΄ > δὴ \ > 
και TA τειχὴ TOV NVAL@V ALPNOELV βίᾳ, ἐπειδὴ TA ἐν 


ταῖς ᾿ΕὈπιπολαῖς οὕτω ξυνέβη. 


ε Ν ““ > / \ > 4 > , 
Oi δὲ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων στρατηγοὶ ἐν τούτῳ ἐβουλεύ- 
Ν Ν 
ovTo πρός τε τὴν γεγενημένην ξυμφορὰν καὶ πρὸς τὴν 
παροῦσαν ἐν τῷ στρατοπέδῳ κατὰ πάντα ἀρρωστίαν. 


τοῖς τε γὰρ ἐπιχειρήμασιν ἑώρων οὐ κατορθοῦντες καὶ 


a “ ’ Ν 
τοὺς στρατιώτας ἀχθομένους τῇ μονῇ " νόσῳ τε γὰρ ἐπι- 


αὖ, again, this change having taken 
place once already. πάλιν αὖ and 
ὥσπερ καὶ πρότερον both belong to 
ἀναρρωσθέντες, and refer to c. 41. ὃ 4, 
when a feeling of confidence had been 
conceived, and to ¢c. 42. ὃ 2, when this 
had again been lost.—3. és ᾿Ακρά- 
yavta: Schol. τὸν ᾿Ακράγαντα ἄρσενι- 
Cf. c. 50.2. It is named from 
the river near by. See Schubring, 
Akragas, p. 5. The city had de- 
clared itself neutral, c. 33.7; but now 
in consequence of internal disturb- 
ances (στασιάζοντα) the prospects were 
more favourable for Syracuse. There- 
fore 15 triremes had been sent to the 
support of the Syracusan party in the 
city. —4. Σικανον : one of the gener- 
als chosen with Hermocrates, vi. 73. 
3. — ἐπαγάγοιτο: must be preferred 
here, as in iii. 63. 5 (cf. v. 45. 4), to 
the vulgate ὑπαγάγοιτο, as Pluygers 
(Mnem. 11, 95) rightly observes ; for 
the object was to bring over the city to 
the Syracusan side, not to subdue it. 
Cf.c. 50. §1.— 5. ἄλλην : rightly added 
by Vat., as Sicily is opp. to Agrigen- 
tum. Cf. c. 7. 6, 6 Τύλιππος ἐς τὴν 
ἄλλην Σικελίαν ἐπὶ στρατιάν Te ᾧχετο, 


κῶς. 


fallen them. 


to which αὖθις in 6 refers. —6. ἐν 
ἐλπίδι av: see on c. 25. 4. 
47. The attack on Epipolae having 


Jailed, and the Athenian army suffering 


severely from sickness, Demosthenes pro- 
poses as hasty a departure as possible, in 
order that they may at least bring help 
to the hard-pressed mother-city. 

2. πρὸς τὴν... ξυμφοράν: in 
view of the misfortune that had be- 
See on ii. 22. 1.— 3. 
ἀρρωστίαν: as in iii. 15. 11, despon- 
dency. Cf. viii. 83. 7, appwardtepov. — 
5. ἀχθομένους τῇ μονῇ: cf v. 7. 3, 
ἀχθομένων TH ἕδρᾳ. 

νόσῳ τε γὰρ ἐπιέζοντο... ἐφαίνετο: 
this sent. contains the reasons why 
the troops were displeased at remain- 
ing longer (ἤχθοντο τῇ μονῇ), of which 
thore are two: the prevailing sick- 
ness and the utter hopelessness of 
success. The first reason, which is 
introduced by γάρ, rests in turn on 
two grounds, of which the first is ex- 
pressed in gen. abs., the second (τὸ 
χωρίον... . ἣν) in independent const. 
(cf. c. 13. 7 ff.). The second main 
cause, however (τὰ ἄλλα ἀνέλπιστα 
ἐφαίνετο), is connected by ὅτι directly 


10 


15 


* Ol. 91. 4; B.c. 413, Aug. THUCYDIDES VII. 47. 


elovTo κατ᾽ ἀμφότερα, τῆς TE ὥρας τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ ταύτης ἢ 
οὔσης ἐν ἣ ἀσθενοῦσιν ἄνθρωποι μάλιστα, καὶ τὸ χωρίον 
ἅμα ἐν ᾧ ἐστρατοπεδεύοντο ἑλῶδες καὶ χαλεπὸν ἦν, τά 
” 9 5 / 5 ~ > , “ > 
τε ἄλλα ὅτι ἀνέλπιστα αὐτοῖς ἐφαίνετο. τῷ οὖν Anpo- 
7 5 5 / », “ 4 5 5 9 Ν 
σθένει οὐκ ἐδόκει ἔτι χρῆναι μένειν, ἀλλ᾽ ἅπερ Kal δια- 
νοηθεὶς ἐς τὰς ᾿Επιπολὰς διεκινδύνευσεν, ἐπειδὴ ἔσφαλτο, 
5 / 3 Zé Ν ἈΝ ΄, Ψ » Ν , 
ἀπιέναι ἐψηφίζετο καὶ μὴ διατρίβειν, ἕως ἔτι τὸ Téda- 
γος οἷόν τε περαιοῦσθαι καὶ τοῦ στρατεύματος ταῖς γοῦν 
> , \ a \ A , > ΄ 
ἐπελθούσαις ναυσὶ κρατεῖν. καὶ τῇ πόλει ὠφελιμώτερον 
ἔφη εἶναι πρὸς τοὺς ἐν τῇ χώρᾳ σφῶν ἐπιτειχίζοντας 
\ 4 GN * , a > ΄ Ἐ.4 
τὸν πόλεμον ποιεῖσθαι ἢ Συρακοσίους, ods οὐκέτι ῥᾷάδιον 
εἶναι χειρώσασθαι" οὐδ᾽ αὖ ἄλλως χρήματα πολλὰ δαπα- 


with ἀχθομένους τῇ μονῇ, On account 
of the interposition of the irregular 
τὸ χωρίον ἦν. The two reasons, the 
material one (sickness) and the moral 
one (hopelessness), are co-ord. by τε, 
τε as equally influential. In accord- 
ance with this view, Cl. puts a colon 
after μονῇ and acomma after ἦν. So 
Arn. explains, but without altering 
the punctuation. Kr., St., and Bm. 
follow Reiske in omitting ὅτι. --- 6. 
Kat ἀμφότερα: for two reasons, as in 
Vili. 65. 8.— τῆς ὥρας τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ: 
cf. Plut. Nic. 22, μετοπώρου γὰρ ἦν ἡἣ 
ἀρχή. Thue. says in 6. 79. 10, only ἃ 
few weeks later, τοῦ ἔτους πρὺς μετό- 
πωρον ἤδη ὄντος. Cf. c. 50. § 4.—7. 
ἄνθρωποι : on the omission of the art., 
see Kr. Spr. 50, ὃ, 6.—8. yxaderov: 
hard to bear, 1.6. unhealthy. 

10. ἅπερ καὶ διανοηθεὶς ... διεκιν- 
δύνευσεν: so with Vat., for as the 
remark belongs to Thuc., not to De- 
mosthenes, διακινδυνεῦσαι (sc. ἔφη, re- 
ferring to Demosthenes) is impossible. 
Thue. recalls the views which Demos- 
thenes had held from the beginning. 


Cf. c. 42.§ 5.—11. és τὰς Ἐπιπολὰς 
διεκινδύνευσε: risked (the attack) on 
Epipolae. Cf. iii. 36. 11, és "Iwviav... 
παρακινδυνεῦσαι. Kr. Spr. 68, 21, 4.— 
12. ἐψηφίζετο : 1.6. in this council of the 
commanders only; ψηφιζομένους μετὰ 
πολλῶν in c. 48.5 refers to a general 
council to be held later. — τὸ πέλαγος 
οἷόν Te περαιοῦσθαι : 1.6. before Nov. — 
13. τοῦ στρατεύματος... κρατεῖν : the 
part. gen. depending on ταῖς... - ναυσί, 
κρατεῖν On οἷόν τε, “while it was pos- 
sible, at least with the newly arrived 
ships of the armament (even if little 
dependence was to be placed on the 
remainder) to prevail at sea.” The 
Schol. wrongly explains, τοῦ πολεμίου 
στρατεύματος. 

16. ἢ Συρακοσίους : 1... ἢ πρὸς τοὺς 
Συρακοσίους. On the omission of the 
prep., see Kr. Spr. 68,9. Cf. i. 6. 21; 
21.5; vi- 78. 4; viii. 96. 10. In iil. 
44. 8, the prep. is repeated. — ots... 


εἶναι: inf. by assimilation. ἃ. 1524; 
ΠΟΙ Vous αὖ: niegnue 
ΕΠ ᾺΞ {π| i. το. ΘΙ ly 575 Ὁ. 


and freq. The thowght of c. 42. ὃ 5 


88 


48 vavtas εἰκὸς εἶναι προσκαθῆσθαι. 


10 


THUCYDIDES VII. 47. 48. 


καὶ ὁ μὲν Δημοσθέ. 1 


- ~ ee ε δὲ ΄ Se \ Ἀ 
νὴς τοιαῦτα ἐγίγνωσκεν" oO O€ Νικίας ἐνόμιζε μὲν καὶ 


ΠΝ" , A Ν , > ~ Ν / > 
αυτος πονὴρα σφῶν τα πραγματα ειναι, τῳ δὲ λόγῳ ουκ 


ἐβούλετο αὐτὰ ἀσθενῆ ἀποδεικνύναι, οὐδ᾽ ἐμφανῶς σφᾶς 


ψηφιζομένους μετὰ πολλῶν τὴν ἀναχώρησιν τοῖς πολε- 


μίοις καταγγέλτους γίγνεσθαι: λαθεῖν γὰρ ἄν, ὁπότε 


βούλοιντο, τοῦτο ποιοῦντες πολλῴ ἧσσον. 


Ν 
τὸ δέ τι καὶ 


τὰ τῶν πολεμίων, ἀφ᾽ ὧν ἐπὶ πλέον ἢ οἱ ἄλλοι ἠσθά- 


veto αὐτῶν, ἐλπίδος τι ἔτι παρεῖχε πονηρότερα τῶν σφε. 


τέρων ἔσεσθαι, ἣν καρτερῶσι προσκαθήμενοι - χρημάτων 


is repeated in this passage with more 
emphasis. — 18. προσκαθῆσθαι: of 
persistent siege, as in c. 48. 10; 49. 7; 
iv. 130. 9; vi. 89. 30. 

48. Nicias, on the contrary, although 
secretly recognizing the gravity of the 
situation, still considers that of the Syra- 
cusans not more favourable, because they 
lack money and are not equal to the 
Athenians at sea. Besides, the secret 
information which he receives from the 
pro-Athenian party in Syracuse, leads 
him to hope for a revolution. But espe- 
cially does he fear that their withdrawal 
without having accomplished anything 
will bring upon them the bitterest accusa- 
tions at Athens, and even lead to their 
destruction. And since the Syracusans 
cannot possibly long keep up their great 
exertions, he insists on waiting for the 
probable ruin of their power. 

3. πόνηρα: Schol. ἀσθενῆ, ere 
σφαλῇ, ἐπικίνδυνα. For the accent in 
this sense, see App. —Tod δὲ λόγῳ: 
in open speech, i.e. in the council of 
war.—6. καταγγέλτους γίγνεσθαι: 
Schol. δήλους διὰ μηνύματος; “he did 
not wish that it should be revealed to 
the enemy that they (Nicias and the 
other leaders) in a full council (μετὰ 


πολλῶν) openly voted for the re- 
treat.” With this personal const. of 
the verbal adj. with γίγνεσθαι cf. viii. 
14.2, ἐξάγγελτοι γενέσθαι; Hat. ii. 119. 
10, ἐπάϊστος ἐγένετο. See on iii. 30. 
9. - λαθεῖν γὰρ dv κτέ. : sc. εἰ κατάγ- 
γελτοι γίγνοιντο κτὲ., i.e. they could 
not so easily retreat unobserved, 
whenever they might wish to do 
so, if, etc. — 7. ποιοῦντες : nom. re- 
ferring to ἔφη to be supplied from 
ἐβούλετο (4), and pl. since Nicias 
represents the Athenians. Kiihn. 
476, note 1, explains that it is at- 
tracted into the case of the subj. of 
the subord. clause ὅπότε βούλοιντο. 

τὸ δέ τι καί: accedit quod, as 
in i. 107. 19; τιδ. 12.—8. ἀφ᾽ ὧν... 
αὐτῶν : “according to what he more 
than the rest knew of them.” Cf. vi. 
17.23; 20.4. αὐτῶν depends on ἅ con- 
tained in ag’ ὧν, and refers to ra τῶν 
πολεμίων. Kr. Spr. 47, 10,2. Cf. v. 
26. 25, ξυνέβη wo... καθ᾽ ἡσυχίαν τι 
αὐτῶν μᾶλλον αἰσθέσθαι. --- 9. ἐλπίδος 
τι: 4180 ἴπ ii. 51. 29. Cf. ec. 69. 11, 
λαμπρότητός τι; iii. 44. 6, τι ξυγγνώ- 
uns. — 10. χρημάτων... ἐκτρυχώ- 
σειν: for they would wear them out by 
want of supplies. αὐτούς refers to the 


15 


20 


THUCYDIDES VII. 48. 


‘ St Ζ > Ν > , =/ Ν νὰ ΄ 
yap ἀπορίᾳ αὐτοὺς ἐκτρυχώσειν, ἀλλως τε καὶ ἐπὶ πλέον 
ἤδη ταῖς ὑπαρχούσαις ναυσὶ θαλασσοκρατούντων. καί (ἢν 

΄, \ > la) 4 , A > 
yap τι καὶ ἐν ταῖς Συρακούσαις βουλόμενον τοῖς ᾿Αθη- 
ναίοις τὰ πράγματα ἐνδοῦναι) ἐπεκηρυκεύετο ὡς αὐτὸν 
καὶ οὐκ εἴα ἀπανίστασθαι. ἃ ἐπιστάμενος τῷ μὲν ἔργῳ : 
3», Ie) Ψ ’ 3, Ν lal 5» lol lal 5 
ἔτι ἐπ᾿ ἀμφότερα ἔχων καὶ διασκοπῶν ἀνεῖχε, τῷ ὃ 
ἐμφανεῖ τότε λό yk ἔφη ἀπάξειν τὴ ατιάν. εὖ 
ἐμφανεῖ τότε λόγῳ οὐ ἡ ἀπάξειν τὴν στρατιάν. εὖ 

Ν 5 A ν 3 Lad “A lal > 5 4 
yap εἰδέναι ὅτι ᾿Αθηναῖοι σφῶν ταῦτα οὐκ ἀποδέξονται 
ν A 5 A , > lal Ν Ν > ‘ 
ὥστε μὴ αὐτῶν ψηφισαμένων ἀπελθεῖν. καὶ yap ov τοὺς 

> \ a , \ la 2 A \ \ , 
αὐτοὺς ψηφιεῖσθαί τε περὶ σφῶν [αὐτῶν] καὶ τὰ πράγ- 


οο 
co 


Syracusans; the subj. of ἐκτρυχώσειν 
is the Athenians. The remainder of 
the sent., ἄλλως Te kal. . . θαλασσοκρα- 
τούντων, seems to indicate that χρή- 
ματα here means supplies, not money. 
—12. θαλασσοκρατούντων: sc. σφῶν, 
the gen. abs., although the subj. im- 
plied in ἐκτρυχώσειν is nom. Cf. iii. 13. 
90, βοηθησάντων δὲ ὑμῶν προθύμως, πό- 
Aw τε πρηυσλήψεσθε κτὲ., where the 
subj. of the gen. abs. is the same as that 
of the leading verb. Kr. Spr. 47, 4, 2. 
Cf. ii. 83.15, 16; v. 31.7.— καί [ἦν yap 
. .. ἐνδοῦναι) ἐπεκηρυκεύετο : the cau- 
sal sent. in parataxis before the main 
one, not uncommon in Thue. See 


oni, 31. 7. The subj. of ἐπεκηρυκεύετο 


is to be supplied from the parenthe- 
sis τὸ ἐν ταῖς Συρακούσαις βουλόμενον 
«ré. The word is used here and in ο. 
49. 4 of secret messages, the bearers 
of which are called διάγγελοι in c. 73. 
27.—15. οὐκ ela: advised against. 
7 νι. 72. 7; vill. 46. 31. 

16. ἐπ᾽ ἀμφότερα ἔχων : an unusual 
expression, inclining to both sides, wa- 
vering between two decisions, ex- 
plained by διασκοπῶν. --- ἀνεῖχε: kept, 
with ἔχων and διασκοπῶν to complete 
the meaning. 
τίθετο γνώμῃ. 


Schol. οὐδεμιᾷ προσε- 


10. ὃν ἐν: 12, 


ἔτι διασκοπῶ ὅ τι πράξη ἀνεῖχε. It is 
inti τ πη" ΘΠ ΤΟ 
22; viii. 94. 11.-- τῷ δ᾽ ἐμφανεῖ τότε 
λόγῳ: in open speech at thut time (as 
he was obliged to express his opinion 
in the council of war); opp. to τῷ 
μὲν ἔργῳ. ---18. οὐκ ἀποδέξονται: “as 
in iii. 57. 5, would not approve= μέμ- 
ψονται, and so, like it, const. with ace. 


of thing and gen. of person. C/. i. 
84. 1, ὃ μέμφονται μάλιστα ἡμῶν." Cl. 


But there ἡμῶ. is possessive gen. with 
é, here σφῶν depends on raira.— 
19. ὥστε... ἀπελθεῖν : explanatory 
of ταῦτα. namely, that they should with- 
draw without their order. ware as in 
δ᾽. 12... 11 τ λοι 5). Μ1: 58.. ἢ viele 
588. — od τοὺς αὐτοὺς ψηφιεῖσθαί τε 
περὶ σφῶν [αὐτῶν] καὶ τὰ πράγματα 
... γνώσεσθαι: the paratactic const., 
though logically the second clause is 
subord., ‘‘not the same persons would 
pass judgment on them and form 
their opinions,” etc., 1.6. a class of per- 
sons would pass judgment on them 
very different from those who would 
form their opinions from seeing the 
state of affairs, as they do them- 
selves, rather than from hearsay on 
the fault-finding of others. Bk. was 
right in striking out αὐτῶν after σφῶν, 


THUCYDIDES VII. 48. 


C7 \ > Vie \ > ¥ 5 ΄ 
ματα WOTEP και GQUTOL Op@vTas και OUK ἄλλων ETT LT LLY) - 


> , , > oe Ὁ » > , 
σει ἀκούοντας γνώσεσθαι, ἀλλ ἐξ ὧν ἄν τις εὖ λέγων 


διαβάλλοι, ἐκ τούτων αὐτοὺς πείσεσθαι. 


τῶν τε παρόν- 


“A x Ν Ν ΄ ¥ a na 
των στρατιωτῶν πολλοὺς Kal τοὺς πλείους ἔφη, οἱ νῦν 


A c > “A » 5 A τι ’ > 
βοῶσιν ως ἐν δεινοῖς OVTES, EKELOE ἀφικομένους ταναν- 


7 ’, ε ε Ν ’ὔ ’ ε 
τια βοήσεσθαι ως U7O χρηματων καταπροδόντες οι στρα- 


τηγοὶ ἀπῆλθον. 
τὰς ᾿Αθηναίων 


ee 
ὑπ᾽ ᾿Αθηναίων 


εἰ δεῖ, κινδυνεύσας τοῦτο παθεῖν ἰδίᾳ. 


> S ΄ Sie, 5 , 
οὐκ οὖν βούλεσθαι αὐτός ye ἐπιστάμενος 
> “Ὁ Ώ » 
φύσεις ἐπ᾽ αἰσχρᾷ τε αἰτίᾳ καὶ ἀδίκως 
ἀπολέσθαι μᾶλλον ἢ ὑπὸ τῶν πολεμίων, 


, 
Ta τε Συρακο- 


΄ » [ » Y A , > fe 

σίων ἔφη ὅμως ἔτι ἥσσω τῶν σφετέρων εἶναι: χρήμασι 

γὰρ αὐτοὺς ἕξενοτροφοῦντας καὶ ἐν περιπολίοις ἅμα ἀνα-. 
» 

λίσκοντας καὶ ναυτικὸν πολὺ ἔτι ἐνιαυτὸν ἤδη βόσκον- 


since σφῶν refers not to τοὺς αὐτούς 
but to the speaker (Nicias) and his 
comrades. — 21. ὥσπερ καὶ αὐτοί: 
the nom. as in i. 32.3; νυ. 29. 9; 44. 
9. - ἄλλων ἐπιτιμήσει ἀκούοντας : 50 
with Vat. rather than the vulgate 
ἀκούσαντας. since it is co-ord. with 
δρῶντας. --- 22. ἐξ ὧν av τις... δια- 
βάλλοι: ἄν belongs to the opt. and 
not to the rel. “ by slanders such as 
any one might bring forward (δια- 
βάλλοι ἄν) in fine speeches, they 
would allow themselves to be per- 
suaded.” Cf.c. 50. 33; viii. 54. 6, ὅπῃ 
GMT. 557. εὖ λέ 
you, by fine speeches, is ironical. Cf. 
ili. 38. 20, ἀπὸ τῶν λόγῳ καλῶς ἐπιτιμη- 
σάντων. --- 23. ἐκ τούτων : epanalep- 
sis, as in iii. 64. 5. G. 1030; H. 
996 b. — αὐτούς : sc. τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους. 
24. καὶ τοὺς πλείους: and even 
Cf. ec. 68. 7; 80. 18.—25. 
βοῶσιν: cry out, esp. of indignant 
complaints. Cf. vi. 28. 9; viii. 86. 8. 
— 26. ὑπὸ χρημάτων καταπροδόντες: 
becoming traitors for money. Cf. Lys. 
VII. 21, ὑπὸ τῆς ἐμῆς δυνάμεως καὶ τῶν 


a > ~ f 
av αὐτοῖς δοκοίη. 


most. 


ἐμῶν χρημάτων οὐδεὶς ἐθέλει σοι μαρτυ- 
ρεῖν. καταπροδόντες, used intr., is in- 
gressive. —27. ἐπιστάμενος τὰς ᾿Αθη- 
ναίων dices: cf. c. 14, § 2, 4.-- 
28. ἐπ᾽ αἰσχρᾷ αἰτίᾳ: on a disgraceful 
charge. Cf. i. 102. 16, ἐπὶ τῷ βελτί- 
ονι λόγῳ; 1. 141. 3, ἐπὶ μεγάλῃ καὶ ἐπὶ 
βραχεί: ὁμοίως προφάσει. --- 30. μᾶλλον 
ἢ... ἰδίᾳ: rather than incurring dan- 
ger of his own accord to suffer this, if 
need be, at the hands of the enemy. κιν- 
δυνεύσας has the principal emphasis. 
This idea is emphasized still further » 
by the significant position of ἰδία. For 
other adys. thus emphatically placed 
last, cf. i. 28.12; 77.19; ili. 55. 13. — 
ἰδίᾳ: on his own responsibility, as opp. 
to ἐπ᾿ αἰσχρᾷ αἰτίᾳ; Arn. and St., Sor 
his part, i.e. he would rather lose his 
individual life, etc. 

31. ὅμως: 1.6. however bad their 
own condition might be, sti#l—. Cf. 
y. 61. 3.—32. ἐν περιπολίοις : Schol. 
ἐν τοῖς περὶ τὴν πόλιν τειχίσμασι Kal 
Cf. vi. 45. 6, ἐς τὰ περιπό- 
Ala τὰ ἐν TH χώρᾳ φρουρὰς ἐσεκόμιζον. 
— ἀναλίσκοντας : sc. χρήματα. --- 33. καὶ 


οἰκοδομαῖς. 


THUCYDIDES VII. 48, 49. 


Ν ΝῚ 5 A Ν Jig: 5 4 / / 
Tas τὰ μὲν ἀπορεῖν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι aunyarvnoey * δισχίλιά τε 


35 γὰρ τάλαντα ἤδη ἀνηλωκέναι καὶ ἔτι πολλὰ προσοφείλειν, 


» Ν A / A la lal lal 
ἣν τε καὶ ὁτιοῦν ἐκλίπωσι τῆς νῦν παρασκευῆς τῷ μὴ 


διδόναι τροφήν, φθερεῖσθαι αὐτῶν τὰ πράγματα, ἐπικου- 


Ν lal x ὃ 5 5 of Y Ἂς ,΄ 3 
pika μᾶλλον ἢ OL ἀνάγκης ὥσπερ τὰ σφέτερα ὄντα. 


, > »», lal , ἂς Ν , 
τρίβειν οὖν ἔφη χρῆναι προσκαθβημένους καὶ μὴ χρή- 
40 μασιν, ὡς πολὺ κρείσσους εἰσί, νικηθέντας ἀπιέναι. 


49ὁ μὲν Νικίας τοσαῦτα λέγων ἰσχυρίζετο, αἰσθόμενος τὰ 


> A , > A Ν Ν A 4 
ἐν ταῖς Συρακούσαις ἀκριβῶς, καὶ THY τῶν χρημάτων 


...emt: et praeterea. Cf vi. 31. 13, 
καὶ ξύμμαχοι ἔτι. --- βόσκοντας : main- 
taining, as in Hat. vi. 39. 14, πεντακοσί- 
ous βόσκων ἐπικούρους. It is not else- 
where used of men in Att. prose, but 
often in a contemptuous sense in the 
poets. — 34. τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ: the first 
is explained by δισχίλια yap .. . προσ- 
οφείλειν; the second by ἤν τε... 
πράγματα. ---ἔτι: Cl. and Kr. render 
hereafter (cf. vi. 86. 24, ἔτι βουλή- 
σεσθε): Arn. translates the passage: 
“ Were in some respects ill provided, 
and in others, moreover, they would 
be utterly at a loss how to proceed.” 
— 35. ἀνηλωκέναι: on the aug., see 
ἌΡΡ. --- προσοφείλειν : they owed ὑε- 
sides, i.e. were in arrears with many 
payments.—36. ἦν τε καὶ ὁτιοῦν 
ἐκλίπωσι τῆς νῦν παρασκευῆς: cf. ὁ. 
13. 3, εἰ ἀφαιρήσομέν τι καὶ βραχὺ τῆς 
τηρήσεως. --- 37. τροφήν: pecuniam 
alimentariam, the common mean- 
ing in military usage. Cf. vi. 93. 20. 
In Dem. tv. 28, σιτηρέσιον ( = τροφή). 
— φθερεῖσθαι: fut. mid. used pass. 
Kiihn. 376, note 1; Kr. Spr. 40 s.v.— 
ἐπικουρικὰ μᾶλλον ἢ δι ἀνάγκης: 
Schol. μισθοφόρων τοῖς Συρακοσίοις ὄν- 
των, καὶ οὐχὶ δι᾽ ἀνάγκην στρατευομένων 
πολιτῶν, ὥσπερ ᾿Αθηναίων. 


39. καὶ μὴ χρήμασιν : it seems better 


not to bracket χρήμασι as Cl. does. 
The concluding argument of Demos- 
thenes in ec. 47. 17 was, “nor again was 
it proper to continue the siege, expend- 
ing much money to no purpose,” 1.6. the 
money consideration was his final ob- 
jection to staying longer. Nicias’s final 
argument was an answer to this, “ they 
ought to continue the siege (τρίβειν 
mpooKkabnuévovs) and not to go away 
conquered by money (by the money 
consideration), as they were much su- 
perior (in this respect).” With this 
comparison the sent. becomes clear. 
If any change in the text is to be 
made, the emendation of Korais, ois 
for Ss, most commends itself. See 
App. 

49. Demosthenes is decidedly against 
the continuation of the siege, and insists, 
if they may not leave Sicily without 
orders from Athens, that they go back to 
Thapsus or Catana, whence they could 
ravage the enemy’s territory with their 
land-force, and where they would have 
the advantage of the open sea for the 
movement of their fleet. 
this difference of opinion much precious 
time is lost. 

1. λέγων ἰσχυρίζετο : as in 23, insisted 
emphatically. he idea is, asserted con- 
Jidently, rather than asserted persist- 


On account of 


91 


6 


10 


THUCYDIDES VII. 49. 


ἀπορίαν καὶ ὅτι ἦν αὐτόθι πολὺ τὸ βουλόμενον τοῖς 
᾿Αθηναίοις γίγνεσθαι τὰ πράγματα καὶ ἐπικηρυκευόμε- 
νον πρὸς αὐτὸν ὥστε μὴ ἀπανίστασθαι, καὶ ἅμα ταῖς 
ὁ δὲ 


, \ \ “A = 50. e A 
Δημοσθένης περὶ μὲν τοῦ προσκαθῆσθαι οὐδ᾽ ὁπωσοῦν 


γοῦν ναυσίν, ἣἧ πρότερον, ἐθάρσησε κρατηθείς. 


> / > \ a \ > , Ν Ν 3», > 
ἐνεδέχετο" εἰ δὲ Set μὴ ἀπάγειν THY στρατιὰν ἄνευ ᾿Αθη- 
Ν lal nr “ἡ 
ναίων ψηφίσματος, ἀλλὰ τρίβειν αὐτοῦ, ἔφη χρῆναι ἢ 
> Ν ΄ 5 ’ὔ’ »“ “ὦ “ἡ 5 Ν , 
és τὴν Θάψον ἀναστάντας τοῦτο ποιεῖν ἢ ἐς THY Κατά- 
id »-“ “ 3 SN Ν “A μ» 9 ’, ’ 
νην, ὅθεν τῷ τε πεζῷ ἐπὶ πολλὰ τῆς χώρας ἐπιόντες θρέ- 
ψονται πορθοῦντες τὰ τῶν πολεμίων καὶ ἐκείνους βλά- 
ψουσι, ταῖς τε ναυσὶν ἐν πελάγει καὶ οὐκ ἐν στενοχωρίᾳ, 
ἣ πρὸς τῶν πολεμίων μᾶλλόν ἐστι, τοὺς ἀγῶνας ποιή- 


5 » 5 > / 5 
σονται, ἀλλ᾽ ἐν εὐρυχωρίᾳ, ἐν 


ently. Cf. iii. 44. 9; iv. 23. 6. ---9. 
πολὺ τὸ βουλόμενον: the correction 
πολύ, for the unintelligible που of 
the Mss., is due to Linwood (Jahrbb. 
1862, p. 202), who refers to the imita- 
tion of the passage in Dio Ὁ. xlv. 
8, πλεῖστον γάρ ἐστι τὸ βουλόμενον 
πάντας... ἀλλήλοις διαφέρεσθαι. (ἢ. 
Plut. Nic. 21, ἦσαν ἄνδρες οὐκ ὀλίγοι 
διαλεγόμενοι τῷ Νικία κρύφα ὥστε μὴ 
ἀπανίστασθαι. The art. is prop. with 
βουλόμενον, since reference is had to 
ο. 48. 15.— τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις γίγνεσθαι: 
Cl. is doubtless right in explaining 
τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις as dat. of possession 
with γίγνεσθαι, though in the exam- 
ples he cites (iii. 23. 26; v. 55. 14; 
viii. 57. 8) γίγνεσθαι seems rather = 
contingere, evenire. St. adds 
ὑποχείρια before γίγνεσθαι, citing 11]. 
86. 18.—5. ὥστε: see on 6. 48. 19. 
— ταῖς γοῦν ναυσίν, τῇ᾽ πρότερον, ἐθάρ- 
σησε κρατηθείς : this is St.’s reading 
for ἢ πρότερον θαρσήσει ( Vat. ἐθάρσησεὶ 
of the Mss.: ‘‘and at the same time 
though beaten, he placed confidence 


in the ships at least, as before.” See 


TL τε τῆς ἐμπειρίας χρή- 


App. For ἣ πρότερον, cf. c. 4.22 ff. The 
connexion of the finite verb ἐθάρσησε 
with the partic. αἰσθόμενος raises no dif- 
ficulty. The anacoluthon is essentially 
the same as ine. 47. ὃ 2. Cf.i.57.§4. 

7. περὶ... Tov προσκαθῆσθαι: as 
to the question of continuing the siege. 
See on 6. 47. 18.— οὐδ᾽ ὁπωσοῦν: cf. 
6. 60. 20; i. 77.95; viii. 90. 16; g1. 21. 
—8. ἐνεδέχετο: here, as in v. 15. 9, 
without def. obj., which is easily sup- 
plied from the context.—9. avrov: 
there, i.e. in Sicily. Kr.’s emendation, 
adopted by Cl. and St., for αὐτούς, 
which as the subj. of τρίβειν is with- 
out force and unnecessary, even if 
admissible. — 10. Θάψον: where the 
fleet on the voyage out had lain for 
some time. Cf. vi. 97. 9.— Κατάνην : 
here too the fleet had made a long 
stay, vi. 50. 10 to vi. 97. 3.—11. ἐπὶ 
πολλὰ τῆς χώρας : see on 6. ΣΙ. 18.— 


θρέψονται: -- τὸ στράτευμα θρέψουσι, 
the fut. in rel. clause of purpose, as 
in vi. 21. 7.—14. πρὸς τῶν πολεμίων : 


in the enemy’s favour. See on 6. 36. 18. 
For the facts, cf. c. 36. ὃ 3, 4.—15. 


THUCYDIDES VII. 49, 50. 


lal Ν ΄ Ν ’ 
σιμα σφῶν ἔσται καὶ ἀναχωρήσεις καὶ ἐπίπλους οὐκ ἐκ 


βραχέος καὶ περιγραπτοῦ ὁρμώμενοί τε καὶ καταίροντες 


ἕξουσι. 


, ¥ > “a > Ἀ ld ε »᾿ 5 , 
GO VTE ξύμπαν ειπέειν, οὐδενὶ TPOT@ οι ἔφη αρε- 


> qn > “ » , tA. 2 ,ὔ "ὃ ΞΕ 
σκειν ἐν TH αὐυτῳ €TL μένειν, α OTL τάχιστα HON €Egav- 


% = 
20 ίστασθαι Kat μὴ μέλλειν. 
τὸ 4 A »" ᾽ὕὔ 3 Ν 
ἀντιλέγοντος δὲ τοῦ Νικίου ὄκνος τις καὶ 


ξυνηγόρευεν. 


Ν ε > Z, > A lal 
καὶ ὁ Εὐρυμέδων αὐτῷ ταῦτα 


ἈΝ Ld XN 
μέλλησις ἐγένετο Kal ἅμα ὑπόνοια μή TL καὶ πλέον εἰ- 


Ν ε ΄ > 7 
das ὁ Νικίας ἰσχυρίζηται. 


ϑ ε x > A , 
καὶ οἱ μὲν ᾿Αθηναῖοι τούτῳ 


Ὁ τρόπῳ διεμέλλησάν τε καὶ κατὰ YO ἔμε 
τῴ τρόπῳ ὀιεμέλλησαν τε καὶ κατα χώραν εἐμενον. 
ε Ν , Ἂς ε Ν 3 ΄, “ 
Ο δὲ Γύλιππος καὶ ὁ Σικανὸς ἐν τούτῳ παρῆσαν 


3 \ , ε Ν Ν ε ἣν n~ 3 , 

ες τας Συρακούσας, O μεν Σικανὸς αμαρτων του Ακρα- 
~ > ΓΤ aN Ν Ψ΄. 2 5 Cay. ε A Sy / 

yavTos (ἐν [Ξ a γὰρ OYTOS QUTOU ETL ἢ τοις “«τῷΟρακοσίιοις 


ἐν ἡ τά τε τῆς ἐμπειρίας χρήσιμα σφῶν 
ἔσται: where the advantages of skill 
will be theirs. Some editt. take χρή- 
σιμα as pred. and σφῶν with ἐμπειρίας, 
but in this case σφίσιν would be more 
natural. —16. οὐκ ἐκ βραχέος καὶ 
περιγραπτοῦ : belongs to the partics. 
ὁρμώμενοί Te καὶ καταίροντες, though in 
form appropriate only to the former, 
since with καταίροντες we should prop. 
have és with ace. The partics. stand 
too in chiastic order as compared 
with ἀναχωρήσεις and ἐπίπλους. --- 18. 
ἕξουσι : ‘they will have in their 
power.” See on ὁ. 36. 37. 

τὸ ξύμπαν εἰπεῖν : inf. used abs. in 
parenthetical phrase. GMT. 777, 1; 
H. 956. Cf. i. 138. 18. --- 19. ὅτι 
τάχιστα ἤδη ἐξανίστασθαι kal μὴ μέλ- 
λειν : so restored by Haase (Lucubr. 
Thuc. p. 58) instead of ὅτι τάχιστα ἤδη 
καὶ μὴ μέλλειν ἐξανίστασθαι. Cf. v. 30. 
29, ἐκέλευον τοὺς Κορινθίους ἰέναι ἐς τὴν 
ξυμμαχίαν καὶ μὴ μέλλειν, Which proves 
that in our passage there has been 
only a careless change in the order 
of the words. ἐξανίστασθαι means to 
withdraw from their position. Cf. ἀπανί- 


στασθαι (5) depart, ἀναστῆναι (10) 
retire, remove. — 21. Evvnyopevev: cf. 
vi. 6. 26. 

22. ἐγένετο: so Vat., confirmed by 
the imitation of Jos. A. J. Prooem. 2, 
ὄκνος μοι καὶ μέλλησις ἐγένετο. Some 
other Mss. have ἐνεγένετο, which 
Thue. uses with the dat. Cf. c. 8ο. 
12; 1.2. 16; ii. 49. 82; 62. 29:—-7 
καὶ πλέον εἰδώς: cf. v. 29. 12, πλέον 
τέ τι εἰδότας. --- 24. διεμέλλησαν : they 
came to delay (aor.). 

50. The Syracusans in the meantime 
get fresh reinforcements ; in the army of 
the Athenians the sickness keeps spread- 
ing, and Nicias becomes more inclined 
to depart. The decision is now made, 
and everything is ready for the depart- 
ure, when an eclipse of the moon occurs. 
The superstitious Nicias thereupon re- 
fuses to stir until thrice nine days have 
passed, as the soothsayers direct. 

1. ὁ δὲ Γύλιππος καὶ ὁ Σικανός:: cf 
ο. 46.--- παρῆσαν és: as in vi. 88. 51. 
Cf. ii. 34. 11, παρεῖναι ἐπί; ill. 3. 19, 
παρεῖναι παρά. --- ὃ. ἡ τοῖς Συρακοσίοις 
στάσις φιλία: the party friendly to the 


Syracusans; φιλία is Bauer’s conjec- 


93 


4 


94 


THUCYDIDES VII. 50. 


στάσις φιλία ἐξεπεπτώκει) " 


ὁ δὲ Γύλιππος ἄλλην τε 


5 στρατιὰν πολλὴν ἔχων ἦλθεν ἀπὸ τῆς Σικελίας καὶ τοὺς 


15 


> “ , lal > 5 “Ὁ ε 4 ε 7 
ἐκ τῆς Πελοποννήσου τοῦ ἦρος ἐν ταῖς ὁλκάσιν ὁπλίτας 


ἀποσταλέντας, ἀφικομένους ἀπὸ τῆς Λιβύης ἐς Σελινοῦν- 


Ta. 


ἀπενεχθέντες yap ἐς Λιβύην, καὶ δόντων Κυρηναίων 


,» 4 Ά “ La) ε , Ἂν > “A , 
τριήρεις δύο καὶ τοῦ πλοῦ ἡγεμόνας, Kal ἐν TO παράπλῳ 
5 ΄ , «ες Ἂς 4 , 

10 Εὐεσπερίταις πολιορκουμένοις ὑπὸ Λιβύων ξυμμαχήσαν- 

Ν ’ Ν 7 Ν > / cA 

TES καὶ νικήσαντες τοὺς Λίβυς, Kal αὐτόθεν παραπλεύ- 

5 , , Ν 5 / ν 

σαντες ἐς Νέαν πόλιν, Καρχηδονιακὸν ἐμπόριον, ὅθεν.- 

4 5 , 4, e “A \ Ν Lal 

περ Σικελία ἐλάχιστον δύο ἡμερῶν καὶ νυκτὸς πλοῦν 
3 4 \ 5 3 > lal if 5 A > 

ἀπέχει, Kal am αὐτοῦ περαιωθέντες ἀφίκοντο ἐς Σελι- 


lal si Se e \ SS / AY 5 A Ξλθό 
νοῦντα" καὶ οἱ μὲν Συρακόσιοι εὐθὺς αὐτῶν ἐλθόντων 
παρεσκευάζοντο ὡς ἐπιθησόμενοι Kat ἀμφότερα αὖθις 
lal 3 / Ἂς Ν Ν ἰφὸ ε Ν A > ze 
tots ᾿Αθηναίοις, καὶ ναυσὶ καὶ πεζῷ : οἱ δὲ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων 
an " 
στρατηγοὶ ὁρῶντες στρατιάν τε ἄλλην προσγεγενημένην 
αὐτοῖς, καὶ τὰ ἑαυτῶν ἅμα οὐκ ἐπὶ τὸ βέλτιον χωροῦντα, 


ture for ἐς φίλια, ἐς φιλίαν, ἐς φιλία 
(Vat.) of the Mss. See App. τοῖς 
Συρακοσίοις belongs to φιλία, and the 
attrib. adj. is placed after its noun as 
in ili. 56. 5, κατὰ τὸν πᾶσι νόμον Kabe- 
στῶτα; iv. 122. 19, τῇ κατὰ γῆν Λακε- 
δαιμονίων ἰσχύι ἀνωφελεῖ. Cf. 7 below 
and c. 23. 15. --- 4. ἄλλην τε στρατιάν : 
ΟἿ ΟἹ 21.8.1: ἌδΟ. LO 9106. ΧΤΙ 12. 
this army was collected from Selinus, 
Gela, Himera, and Camerina. — 5. 
τοὺς ἐκ τῆς Πελοποννήσου... ἀποστα- 
λέντας : cf. c. το. ὃ 3. 

8. ἀπενεχθέντες ἐς Λιβύην : ie. 
driven thither by storms. Cf. vi. 104. 
16, ἁρπασθεὶς ὑπ᾽ ἀνέμου... ἀποφέρεται 
ἐς τὸ πέλαγος. Niebuhr’s view of an 
intentional voyage in that direction 
(Lectures on ἄπο. Hist. II. p. 160) is 
therefore wrong. — 10. Eveorepirats : 
Steph. Byz. Εὐεσπέριδες πόλις Λιβύης. 


τὸ ἐθνικὸν Ἑὐεσπερίτης. It is the later 
Berenice, west from Barca, near the . 
great Syrtis.—12. Νέαν πόλιν: ef. 
Strab. xvii. 3. 16; not to be con- 
founded with the Neapolis which is 
also called Leptis, Strab. xvii. 3. 18. 
See Kiepert, Alte Geogr. p. 193, 197. — 
ὅθενπερ Σικελία ἐλάχιστον δύο ἡμερῶν 
καὶ νυκτὸς πλοῦν ἀπέχει: correctly 
emended by Bm. for ὅθεν πρὸς Σικελίαν 
. . πλοῦς (Vat. πλοῦν) ἀπέχει. Cf. 
vi. 2. 98, ἐντεῦθεν ἐλάχιστον πλοῦν 
Καρχηδὼν Σικελίας ἀπέχει. For πλοῦς 
as a measure of distance, see on iy. 
104. 17. ὅθενπερ as in iv. 73. 27.— 
14. és Σελινοῦντα: they went thither 
next because it was in alliance with 
Syracuse, vi. 48. .From there Gylip- 
pus brings them to Syracuse, 5. 

19. ἐπὶ τὸ βέλτιον χωροῦντα: cf. 
ἐπὶ (és) τὸ μεῖζον ἐπιδιδόναι, Vi. 60. 8; 


* B.c. 413, Aug. 27. 


26 


25 


30 


THUCYDIDES VII. 50. 


> \ δι τεῦ ΓΝ, A A , » , 

ahha καθ᾽ ἡμέραν τοῖς πᾶσι χαλεπώτερον ἴσχοντα, μά- 
\ mee) , A 9 , i , ͵΄ 

λιστα δὲ τῇ ἀσθενείᾳ τῶν ἀνθρώπων πιεζόμενα, μετεμέ- 

λοντό τε πρότερον οὐκ ἀναστάντες, καὶ ὡς αὐτοῖς οὐδὲ 

ε af fs yy ε PA > nn 5 5 x Ἂν » 

ὁ Νικίας ἔτι ὁμοίως ἠναντιοῦτο, ἀλλ᾽ ἢ μὴ φανερῶς γε 

ἀξιῶν ψηφίζεσθαι, προεῖπον ὡς ἠδύναντο ἀδηλότατα ἔκ- 

an “ A 
πλουν ἐκ TOU στρατοπέδου πᾶσι καὶ παρεσκευάσθαι, 


Ν , 5 lal 3 Ν ε A 
Kal μελλόντων αὐτῶν, ἐπειδὴ ἑτοῖμα 
3: 


Ψ 
ὅταν τὶς σημήνῃ. 
> 5 A Ξ: ’,ὕ 3 4 Sule? \ , 
nv, ἀποπλεῖν ἡ σελήνη ἐκλείπει: * ἐτύγχανε yap πανσέ- 
ληνος οὖσα. καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι οἵ τε πλείους ἐπισχεῖν ἐκέ- 
λευον τοὺς στρατηγοὺς ἐνθύμιον ποιούμενοι, καὶ ὁ Νι- 
> Ny » a an 
κίας (ἣν yap τι καὶ ἄγαν θειασμῷ τε Kal τῷ τοιούτῳ 
΄ ΤῸΝ Ey ὃ > , 0 » » ΄ 
προσκείμενος) οὐδ᾽ ἂν διαβουλεύσασθαι ἔτι ἔφη, πρίν, 


nw Ν “Ὁ ο 
ὡς οἱ μάντεις ἐξηγοῦντο, τρὶς ἐννέα ἡμέρας μεῖναι, ὅπως 


Vili. 24. 22. -- 20. καθ’ ἡμέραν: in 
dies, with the comp. also in vi. 60. 
8; 63. 5.— Tots πᾶσι: in every re- 
spect. Cf. ν. 28. 12. — χαλεπώτερον 
ἴσχοντα: growing worse. ἴσχειν intr. 
here and Plat. Lach. 181 e; elsewhere 
trans. See on iii. 58. 26.— 21. pere- 
peAovro: with past partic., as in iv. 
27. 18, od δεξάμενοι: V.35. 17, ἀποδεδω- 
κότες. --- 23. ὁμοίως : 1.6. as hitherto. 
Cf. i. 75.12; 99. 6. --- ἀλλ᾽ F: nisi, 
praeterquam. Kr. Spr. 69, 4, 6. 
ὉΠ τ. ητ. 4; v. 60.5; 80.6; vill. 28. 
9. See App. — 24. προεῖπον... ση- 
μήνῃ : as secretly as possible they gave 
orders for departure to all and to be 
prepared (i.e. to sail out) whenever the 
signal should be given. The orders 
were given to the trierarchs (πᾶσι) 
secretly, lest the soldiers might find 
out the plan and by some imprudence 
disclose it to the enemy. Cf. c. 48. 
5. Abresch’s emendation παρεσκευά- 
σθαι (for παρασκευάσασθαι) is neces- 
sary, since it is clear that the orders 
must be to be ready (to sail out) when 
the signal shall be given, not then 


first to get ready (παρασκευάσασθαι). 
Cf. Plut. Nic. 22, παρήγγειλε τοῖς 
στρατιώταις εὐτρεπεῖς εἶναι πρὸς ἀπό- 
πλουν. For Cl.’s view, who reads [καὶ] 
παρασκευάσασθαι, see App. 

26. ἐπειδὴ ἑτοῖμα ἦν: constant 
expression. Cf. li. 3. 15; 10. δ) 56. 
3; 98. 2.—27. ἡ σελήνη ἐκλείπει: 
Aug. 27, 413 B.c. See Heis, Die Fin- 
sternisse w. d. Pelop. Krieges, p. 11. — 
28. ot ᾿Αθηναῖοι οἵ τε πλείους... kal 
ὁ Νικίας : part. appos. Cf. c. γι. ὃ 1. 
— 29. ἐνθύμιον ποιούμενοι : making it 
a matter of religion. Cf. v. 16. 18, ἐς 
ἐνθυμίαν προβάλλειν; Hat. vill. 54.8, év- 
θύμιόν of ἐγένετο ἐμπρήσαντι τὸ ἱρόν: 
Eur. Herc. 722, σοὶ τόδ᾽ ἔστ᾽ ἐνθύμιον. 
— 30. καὶ ἄγαν θειασμῷ : Schol. εὐχῇ καὶ 
μαντείᾳ, all religious usages and prac- 
tices, whose observance is called θειά- 
ew in viii. 1.8. —31. προσκείμενος : in- 
clined to, as in vi. 89. 13; viii. 89. 22. — 
οὐδ᾽ dv διαβουλεύσασθαι : would not even 
allow a consultation, i.e. about the ques- 
tion contained in ὅπως ἂν πρότερον 
κινηθείη. --- 32. ἐξηγοῦντο: regularly 
used of seers and priests. Cf. Eur. 


THUCYDIDES VII. 50, 51. 


2 , » 
αν TT POTEPOV KWY) θείη. 


καὶ τοῖς μὲν ᾿Αθηναίοις μελλή- 


σασι διὰ τοῦτο ἡ μονὴ ἐγεγένητο. 


Οἱ δὲ Συρακόσιοι καὶ αὐτοὶ τοῦτο πυθόμενοι πολλῷ 


μᾶλλον 


ε Ν 
ως και 


> Say eae 
ἐπηρμένοι ἦσαν μὴ ἀνιέναι τὰ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, 
nw , ΕΣ ΄ 
αὐτῶν κατεγνωκότων ἤδη μηκέτι κρεισσόνων 


> va , a Ν ΄ aA aA > Ν “ἡ 
εἶναι σφῶν μήτε ταῖς ναυσὶ μήτε τᾷ πεζῷ (οὐ γὰρ ἂν 
Ν » 3 “ Ν 9 > / > 
Tov ἔκπλουν ἐπιβουλεῦσαι), Kal ἅμα οὐ βουλόμενοι αὐ- 


Ν 
τους 
βους 
Phoen. 1011; Iph. Aul. 529; Plat. 
Theag. 181; Xen. Cyrop. vii. 5. 57; 


Vili. 3. 11. — τρὶς ἐννέα ἡμέρας : prob. 
ace. to priestly law, as in the predic- 
tion of the τρὶς ἐννέα ἔτη, ν. 26. 22. 
Diod, x11. 13 gives only τὰς εἰθισμένας 
τρεῖς ἡμέρας; Plut. Nic. 23 rclates, 
Νικίας ἄλλην ἔπεισε σελήνης ἀναμένειν 
περίοδον. The statement of Thuc. is 
certainly not to be questioned, even 
though they did not actually remain 
27 days. See Ullrich, Quaest. Aris- 
toph. p. 40.— ὅπως... κινηθείη : indir. 
question representing pot. opt. of dir. 
disc. —33. καὶ τοῖς... ἐγεγένητο: 
and so the Athenians, having once delayed 
Jor this reason, must stay. Cl. proposes 
ἐγένετο for ἐγεγένητο; more likely 
would be ἐνεγένετο. 

51. So much the more are the Syra- 
cusans filled with hope of victory, and 
spend several days maneuvering pre- 
paratory to a sea-fight. But they first 
make a preliminary attack on the Athe- 
nian fortifications from the land side, 
and drive back a small party of the 
Athenians who come out against them. 

1. τοῦτο: 1.6. both the intention to 
depart and the abandonment of it. — 
2. ἐπηρμένοι: Vat. for the vulgate 
ἐγηγερμένοι, Which is unusual in this 
sense in prose writers. ἐπηρμένοι sig- 


ἄλλοσέ ποι τῆς Σικελίας καθεζομένους χαλεπωτέ- 
εἶναι προσπολεμεῖν, ἀλλ᾽ αὐτοῦ ὡς τάχιστα καὶ 


nifies the confidence of victory (cf. ο.. 
41.7) with the added idea of lively 
excitement which urged them to vig: 

orous action (cf. li. 11. 9; viii. 2. 3), 

the enhancement of the idea of ἀναρρω- 
σθέντες of c. 46.2: “they were full of 
confident resolution.” — μη ἀνιέναι: 

asin ..18. 7; vi. 18. 16, nut to be slack 
ab ut.—3. as... πεζῷ : since even they 

themselves evidently had already come 

to the conclusion that they were no longer 
superior to them either by sea or land. 

κατεγνωκότων of unfavourable judg- 
ment, as in ili. 45. 4. αὐτὸν = τῶν 
᾿Αθηναίων; σφῶν = τῶν Συρακοσίων. 

The latter is governed by κρεισσόνων. 

—4. οὐ γὰρ dv... ἐπιβουλευσαι: for 

otherwise they would not have projected 

the departure. Cf.i. 11.5; 68. 18; iii. 

84. 15. For the inf. in indir. disc., 

see Kr. Spr. 65, 11,7.—5. καὶ dpa ov 

βουλόμενοι : co-ord. with the gen. abs. 

clause as second reason for ἐπηρμένοι 

ἦσαν. Kr. Spr. 56, 14, 2.—6. ἄλλοσέ 

ποι... προσπολεμεῖν : not wishing that 

they should establish themselves anywhere 

else in Sicily and be harder to contend 

with. For τῆς Σικελίας as part. gen. 

depending on adv. of place, see G. 

1088; H. 757. On the matter, cf. Ὁ. 

49. ὃ 2. For const. of χαλεπωτέρους 

προσπολεμεῖν, See on 6. 14. 5. 


THUCYDIDES VIL. 51, 52. 97 
ἐν ᾧ σφίσι ξυμφέρει ἀναγκάσαι αὐτοὺς ναυμαχεῖ is 2 
ἷ μφέρει ἀναγκάσαι αὐτοὺς ναυμαχεῖν. τὰς 2 


i lal A 4 4 A 
οὖν ναῦς ἐπλήρουν Kal ἀνεπειρῶντο ἡμέρας ὅσαι αὐτοῖς 
297 ε \ > 5 \ \ \ x a \ 
10 ἐδόκουν ἱκαναὶ εἶναι. ἐπειδὴ δὲ καιρὸς ἦν, τῇ μὲν προ- 
, Ν Ν 4 “A 3 , / . Ν 
τέρᾳ πρὸς τὰ τείχη τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων προσέβαλλόν, καὶ 
9» ’ὔ , Ἂς 5 Lal \ lo ε nw 
ἐπεξελθόντος μέρους τινὸς οὐ πολλοῦ καὶ TOV ὁπλιτῶν 
καὶ τῶν ἱππίων κατά τινας πύλας ἀπολαμβάνουσί τε τῶν 
ὁπλιτῶν τινας καὶ τρεψάμενοι καταδιώκουσιν: οὔσης δὲ 
Lal “A 5 i, ε > ~ ν iS Ἃ 
15 στένης TNS ἐσόδου οἱ Αθηναῖοι LTTMOVS TE ἑβδομήκοντα 


nw “ Ν 
δοαπολλύουσι καὶ τῶν ὁπλιτῶν οὐ πολλούς. καὶ ταύτῃ 1 
ἢ 


Sy 


μὲν TH ἡμέρᾳ ἀπεχώρησεν ἡ στρατιὰ τῶν Συρακοσίων: 


Ὁ“ 5 ε ~ \ , 
Τῇ ὃ". ὑστεραίᾳ ταῖς τε ναυσὶ» ἐςπλέουσιν 


Ἧ EBS ΄ Ν n ζῷ Ψ ‘ \ 
καὶ εβοομήκοντα, καὶ TW TECH AWA προς TA 


βουν. 


\ 7 / 
κοντα Kal προσμίξαντες ἐναυμάχουν. 


8. τὰς ναῦς ἐπλήρουν καὶ ἀνεπει- 


ρῶντο: exactly as inc. 7. 14. ἀνεπαύ- 


οἱ δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἀντανῆγον ναυσὶν ἐξ 


οὔσαις ἐξ 
PA -" / 

τείχη ἐχώ- 
Ἂς > , 

καὶ dydon- 


\ Ν > 
και TOV Kupv- 


that the reference is only to horses. 
In the jam at the gates the horsemen 


ovto, the reading of most of the Mss., prob. abandoned their horses and 
including Vat., does not agree with escaped. —16. ἀπολλύουσι: as in iv. 


the context. —10. τῇ μὲν προτέρᾳ: 
on the first (of the two days that 
come under consideration), opp. to τῇ 
δ᾽ torepaiz, c. 52. 3. Herbst (Geg. 
Cobet, p. 36) has shown that # προτέρα 
(not mporepaia, which Vat. has here) 
is used only where reference is made 
from the earlier to the later day; 
where it is made from the later to the 
earlier (as in i. 54. 16), ἡ mporepata 
is used. —11. προσέβαλλον : inchoa- 
_ tive impf.— 13. ἀπολαμβάνουσι : cut 
off. Cf. v. ὃ. 10. --- 14. τρεψάμενοι 
καταδιώκουσιν : referring to the whole 
force, not the ὁπλιτῶν τινας, as shown 
by what follows. —15. τῆς ἐσόδου: 
the entrance (to the fortifications of the 
Athenians). — ἵππους: understood by 
some (Heilmann, and Holm, IT. p. 
56) of horsemen; but the repetition 


τοὺς ἵππους in Cc. 54. 3 makes it prob, 


Jleets 


25.19; in viii. 10.16 ἀπολλύασι. Both 
forms seem to have been used by the 
older Att. writers. 

52. On the following day the two 
The 
Syracusans conquer at first in the cen- 
tre, then defeat the right wing, slaying 
Eurymedon, and at last drive the whole 


come to gin engagement. 


Sleet ashore. 


3. ἕξ kal ἑβδομήκοντα: 76 Syracu- 
san and 86 Athenian ships against 80 
and 75 respectively in the previous 
sea-fight, c. 37. 19, 20. No reason is 
given for the variation in the num- 
bers; the Athenians prob. did not fit 
out a larger number now, after the 
arrival of the 73 fresh ships (c. 42.5), 
on account of the narrow space. —4. 
Bankes 
began the battle 


ἀντανῆγον ναυσίν: sce on ὁ. 
- ὅ. ἐναυμάχουν : 
(impf.), 


bo 


THUCYDIDES ὙΠΙ., 52, 53: 


μέδοντα ἔχοντα τὸ δεξιὸν κέρας τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων καὶ 


, ’ὔὕ Ἁ ΄“ lal 5 , ‘ 
βουλόμενον περικλήσασθαι τὰς ναῦς τῶν ἐναντίων καὶ 


ἐπεξάγοντα τῷ πλῴ πρὸς τὴν γὴν μᾶλλον, νικήσαντες 


΄ Ν ε - XN ΄ lal A 
οἱ Συρακόσιοι Kal ol ξύμμαχοι TO μέσον πρῶτον τῶν 


5 ,΄ὕ 5 ’ > A“ 5 “ ,’ Ν 
10 Αθηναίων, ἀπολαμβάνουσι κάκεινον ἐν τῳ κοίλῳ και 


A lal ’ὔ Ἁ 5 , , A \ > 
μυχῷ τοῦ λιμένος καὶ αὑτὸν TE διαφθείρουσι καὶ τὰς μετ 


> A a > ΄ » \ \ \ , " 
αὐτου VQAUS επισπομένας" ETELTA δὲ και TAS πασας ἤδη 


cal “ 5 ’ὔ A / \ 9 ’ 5 Ν 
ναυς τῶν Αθηναίων κατεδίωκόν TE KAL ἐξεώθουν ες ΤῊΝ 


53 γῆν. 


ε \ , CL’ \ A A , 
ὁ δὲ Γύλιππος ὁρῶν Tas ναὺς τῶν πολεμίων νι- 


\ » lal ,ὔὕ \ »“» lal 
κωμένας καὶ ἔξω τῶν σταυρωμάτων καὶ τοῦ ἑαυτῶν στρα- 


τοπέδου καταφερομένας, βουλόμενος διαφθείρειν τοὺς 


8. ἐπεξάγοντα : so Cl. and St., fol- 
lowing Vat.; other editt. since Bk. 
ἐπεξαγαγόντα (with a few Mss., most 
having étayovra). The pres. expresses 
vividly the moment when Euryme- 
don, extending his line, or perhaps 
drawing off (cf: Diod. xiii. 13, ὡς ἀπε- 
σπάσθη τῆς tatews), to the right, in 
order to turn the left wing of the 
enemy, approaches too near the land, 
and is cut off. Cf. v. 71. 14, δείσας δὲ 
“Ayis μὴ σφῶν κυκλωθῇ τὸ εὐώνυμον, 
καὶ νομίσας ἄγαν περιέχειν τοὺς Μαντι- 
νέας, τοῖς μὲν Σκιρίταις καὶ Βρασιδείοις 
ἐσήμηνεν ἐπεξαγαγόντας amd σφῶν ἐξ- 
ἰισῶσαι τοῖς Μαντινεῦσιν. In this pas- 
sage the aor. is necessary before ἐξι- 
σῶσαι. ---10. κἀκεῖνον : referring to 
Εὐρυμέδοντα mentioned above and em- 
phatically repeating it after νικήσαν- 
τες τὸ μέσον πρῶτον. ---ἐν τῷ κοίλῳ καὶ 
μυχῷ τοῦ λιμένος: in a recess of the 
inner bay of the harbour. Diod., who 
in the account of the battle (xiii. 13) 
follows in many particulars good au- 
thority, prob. Philistus, says: ἀπελή- 
φθη πρὸς τὸν κόλπον τὸν Δάσκωνα μὲν 
καλούμενον. κατακλεισθεὶς δ᾽ εἰς στενὸν 
τόπον καὶ βιασθεὶς εἰς τὴν γῆν ἐκπεσεῖν, 
αὐτὸς μὲν ὑπό τινος τρωθεὶς καιρίᾳ πλήγῃ 


τὸν βίον μετήλλαξεν: ἑπτὰ δὲ ναῦς ἐν 
TOUT? τῷ τόπῳ διεφθάρησαν. The στε- 
vos τόπος is named by Thuc. κοῖλον, 
a recess of some depth at the foot of 
the hill of the same name, Dascon 
(vi. 66. 9), in addition to the more 
general designation of μυχὸς τοῦ Ame 
vos of ο. 4.21. Therefore κοίλῳ καί is 
not to be bracketed as vy. H. (Stud. 
p. 100) proposes. With much prob- 
ability, however, v. H. conjectures 
from the above passage of Diod. that 
ἑπτά has dropped out after ἐπισπομέ- 
vas. —11. per αὐτοῦ ἐπισπομένας : as 
in c. 57. 47, μετὰ ᾿Αθηναίων ἠκολούθουν. 
As to the position of the partic., see 
on c. 23. 14.—12. τὰς πάσας ἤδη 
ναῦς: so Vat.; vulgate ναῦς ἤδη. (ΟἿ 
viii. 26. 1, περὶ δείλην ἤδη ovlav; viii. 
56. 19, ἐν τῇ τρίτῃ ἤδη ξυνόδῳ. 

53. In the attempt to secure the Attic 
ships on the shore, the Syracusans are 
driven back with great loss; but they 
take 18 ships and kill the crews. An 
attempt to set the remaining ships on fire 
is baffled by the Athenians. 

2. ἔξω τῶν σταυρωμάτων: cf c. 38. 
§ 2; vi. 66. ὃ 2.—kal τοῦ ἑαυτῶν 
στρατοπέδου: see on 6. 23. 8.—3. 
καταφερομένας : driven to shore, as in 


10 


1 


THUCYDIDES VII. 53. 


5 ΄ \ \ A cA Ν ys , Φ ΄ 
exBaivovTas καὶ τας ναῦς ῥᾷον τοὺς Συρακοσίους ἀφέλ. 
A lol / » , Sie) XN x 
Kew τῆς γῆς φιλίας οὔσης, παρεβοήθει ἐπὶ τὴν χηλὴν 

al aA Ν 
μέρος τι ἔχων τῆς στρατιᾶς. καὶ αὐτοὺς οἱ Tupanvot 
a \ 5 ay (ον 5. ΄ Ψ ea 
(οὗτοι γὰρ ἐφύλασσον τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις ταύτῃ) ὁρῶντες 
ἀτάκτως προσφερομένους, ἐπεκβοηθήσαντες καὶ προσπε- 
σόντες τοῖς πρώτοις τρέπουσι καὶ ἐσβάλλουσιν ἐς τὴν 
λίμνην τὴν Λυσιμέλειαν καλουμένην. ὕστερον δὲ πλείονος 
ἤδη τοῦ στρατεύματος παρόντος τῶν Συρακοσίων καὶ 
’ \ (a) ve a > , Ν 7 
ξυμμάχων καὶ ot ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐπιβοηθήσαντες καὶ δείσαντες 
“ \ ’ 
περὶ ταῖς ναυσὶν ἐς μάχην τε κατέστησαν πρὸς αὐτοὺς 
Ν , 5 4 Ἂν, ε Pe > Ν 5 , 
Kal νικήσαντες ἐπεδίωξαν καὶ ὁπλίτας TE OV πολλοὺς ἀπέ. 
Ν \ lal \ Ν Ν 

κτειναν καὶ τὰς ναῦς τὰς μὲν πολλὰς διέσωσάν τε καὶ 
Κ᾿ ἣν wi , ὃ lal \ , "» 
ξυνήγαγον κατὰ τὸ στρατόπεδον, δυοῖν δὲ δεούσας εἴ- 


6. 71. 31.—4. ἀφέλκειν: cf. c. 74. 
12 ff.; ii. 93. 25. Cl. is clearly wrong 
in writing ἀνέλκειν for ἀφέλκειν, and 
Grote’s view is right: ‘“ Gylippus 
marched down his land force to the 
water’s edge, in order to prevent the 
retreat of the crews, as well as to assist 
the Syracusan seamen in hauling off the 
ships as prizes.” So also Thirlwall 
understands it. The ταύτῃ of 7 shows 
that that part of the shore was rather 
in the possession of the Athenians, 
and τῆς γῆς φιλίας οὔσης (St. si ab 
amicis teneretur) means that 
Gylippus expected to make that part 
of the shore friendly by the aid he 
brought, not that it was then so. Be- 
sides, the issue, as related in ὃ 9, 
shows how dangerous it would have 
been for the Syracusans to draw the 
ships up on shore at that point. After 
the great sea-fight, they did without 
opposition what they now wished to do, 
namely, took the ships in tow, and 
brought them to the city (ὁ. 74. jin.). 
—5. ἐπὶ τὴν χηλήν: to the causeway. 
This was a quay which ran along 


by the swamp Lysimelea toward the 
Athenian camp. See the map. 

6. ot Tuponvoi: an Etruscan auxil- 
iary corps which ace. to promise (vi. 
88. 34) had joined the Athenians, 
with three fifty-oared boats (vi. 103. 
10).—7. οὗτοι γὰρ ἐφύλασσον τοῖς 
᾿Αθηναίοις ταύτῃ: for these had been 
staiioned by the Athenians on guard in 
that quarter, i.e. on the northern side 
of the camp. — 8. προσφερομένους : 
80. τοὺς Συρακοσίους. --- ἔπεκβοηθήσαν- 
τες: cf. viii. 55. 18. ---10. τὴν Avor- 
μέλειαν καλουμένην: cf. c. 80. 20. 
The place is called τὸ ἕλος in Vi. IOI. 
2. See Holm, I. p. 12. 

11. παρόντος: partic. from παρῆν 
in sense of the aor. Cf. ec. 50. 1; 1. 
47. 5. —12. ἐπιβοηθήσαντες καὶ δεί- 
σαντες περὶ ταῖς ναυσίν: the effect 
and the cause (δείσαντες) placed 
co-ord., as in i. I. ὃ, dptduevos... καὶ 
éAticas. —13. ἐς μάχην κατέστησαν: 
= καταστάντες ἐμάχοντο (i. 49. 10), 
7.e. it came to a regular battle. — 16. 
ξυνήγαγον κατὰ TO στρατόπεδον : 1.6. 
they brought them again into safety 


99 


bo 


100 


d4ynoar. 


THUCYDIDES VII. 53, 54- 


e , Ν ε , »» 7 A © 
KOOLY OL Συρακόσιοι και OU ξύμμαχοι ἔλαθον αὐυτων, και 


» ’ὔ > 4 
TOUS ἄνδρας παντας απεκτειναν. 


Ἀ ΓῚ \ \ =) 
Kal ἐπὶ Tas λοιπὰς ἐμ- 


πρῆσαι βουλόμενοι ὁλκάδα παλαιὰν κληματίδων καὶ da- 


20 δὸς γεμίσαντες (ἦν γὰρ ἐπὶ τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους ὃ ἄνεμος 


οὔριος) ἀφεῖσαν [τὴν ναῦν] πῦρ ἐμβαλόντες. καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθη- 


A“ ΄ Ν Ὁ Ν > / 
VQLOL δείσαντες περι ταις ναυσιν ἀντεμηχανήσαντό TE 


4 4 οὖ ra , / Ν Ν 
σβεστήρια κωλύματα καὶ παύσαντες τήν τε φλόγα καὶ τὸ 


μὴ προσελθεῖν ἐγγὺς τὴν ὁλκάδα τοῦ κινδύνου ἀπηλλά- 


μετὰ δὲ τοῦτο Συρακόσιοι μὲν τῆς τε ναυμαχίας 


-“ » Ν -“ » ~ νΝ nr ͵ὔ 5 
τροπαῖον εστησαν καὶ τὴς AVM τὴς προς TW τειχέει απο- 


λήψεως τῶν ὁπλιτῶν, ὅθεν καὶ τοὺς ἵππους ἔλαβον, ᾿Αθη- 


~ a \ A A an 
ναῖοι δὲ ἧς TE OL Τυρσηνοὶ τροπῆς ἐποιήσαντο τῶν πεζῶν 


5» Ν ’ ἈΝ @ > A n~ 4 , 
ἐς THY λίμνην καὶ ἧς αὐτοὶ τῷ ἄλλῳ στρατοπέδῳ. 


behind the σταυρώματα (2) in front of 
the camp. — δυοῖν δὲ δεούσας εἴκοσιν 
... ἔλαβον αὐτῶν: Grote thinks that 
these 18 ships had belonged to the 
division, which was out of reach of 
all help, in the bay of Dascon. But 
Cl. is doubtless right in considering 
this loss of 18 captured ships to be dif- 
ferent from that of the (seven) ships 
of Eurymedon that were destroyed 
(διαφθείρουσι) as stated in c. 52. 11. 
The μυχὺς τοῦ λιμένος at the foot of 
Dascon was on the opposite side of the 
Lysimelea from the Athenian camp. 

19. Sa80s: collective sing., as κέ- 
pawos in ii. 4. 7; ἄμπελον, iv. go. 9. 
Κύμη. 347, 1. Cf. Diod. xiii. 13, κλη- 
ματίδων καὶ δίδων, ἔτι δὲ πίττης πληρώ- 
cas. —20. ἦν ἐπὶ τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους ὁ 
ἄνεμος οὔριος: -- (πνεῦμα) 
ἐπίφορος With dat., as in ii. 77. 20; iii. 
74. 11.—21. [τὴν ναῦν] : Cl. follows 
Badham (./nem. 1876) in considering 
these words as a gloss after ὁλκάδα 
παλαιάν. There seems to be no rea- 
son, however, why Thuc. should not 
have repeated the obj. after the pa- 


ἄνεμος 


renthesis. — 23. σβεστήρια κωλύ- 
para: the general term κωλύματα (1. 
16.1; v. 30. 11, 24) is explained by 
the unusual σβεστήρια. Cf. Poll. 
i. 168, σβεστηρίοις κωλύμασιν ἐχρῶντο, 
which seems to be an imitation of 
this passage. The effect of σβεστήρια 
is expressed in παύσαντες τὴν φλόγα; 
of κωλύματα in (παύσαντες) τὸ μὴ 
προσελθεῖν (cf. lil. I. 7) ἐγγὺς τὴν 6A- 


cada. The two effects are co-ord. by 
τε (after τήν, Vat.), καί. The plan 
(ἀντεμηχανήσαντό τε. . . κωλύματα) 


and its execution and result (καὶ παύ- 
σαντες . . - ἀπηλλάγησαν) are co-ord. 
in parataxis, and hence there is no 
need to omit τε after ἐμηχανήσαντο, 
as St. does. On τὸ μή with inf. after 
mavoavtes, see GMT. 811; H. 1029; 
Kiihn. 516, note 91. ῥ 

54. On both sides trophies are erected. 

1. τῆς . ναυμαχίας τροπαῖον: 
see on 6. 24. 3.—2. ἄνω: 1.6. on the 
land. (ΟἿ ς. 51. 15.—3. ὅθεν: where, 
strictly = ἐξ ἧς (τῆς ἄνω awoAt ews) 
—Tovs ἵππους : see on 6. 51. 15.—4. 
ἧς... τροπῆς : on the attraction and 


THUCYDIDES VII. 55. 


101 


Γεγενημένης δὲ τῆς νίκης τοῖς Συρακοσίοις λαμπρᾶς 1 
ἤδη καὶ τοῦ ναυτικοῦ (πρότερον μὲν γὰρ ἐφοβοῦντο τὰς μετὰ 


τοῦ Δημοσθένους ναῦς ἐπελθούσας) οἱ μὲν ᾿Αθηναῖοι 


5 Ν \ 3 ’ὔὕ > Ν ε ΄ 5 “A fs 
ἐν παντὶ δὴ ἀθυμίας ἦσαν καὶ ὁ παράλογος αὐτοῖς μέ- 
> \ \ , » A , ε ΄ 
γας ἦν, πολὺ δὲ μείζων ἔτι τῆς στρατείας ὁ μετάμελος. 
ΕΣ 
πόλεσι γὰρ ταύταις μόναις ἤδη ὁμοιοτρόποις ἐπελθόντες, 

ν Ν Ἂν A 
δημοκρατουμέναις τε, ὥσπερ Kal αὐτοί, καὶ ναῦς Kal 
Y ad 
ἵππους καὶ μεγέθη ἐχούσαις, od δυνάμενοι ἐπενεγκεῖν 


Ψ 3 γι, A Ν Ψ 5 “ 
οὔτε ἐκ πολιτείας τι μεταβολῆς τὸ διάφορον αὕτοις, @ 


_assimilation, see G. 1038; H. 998 ἃ. 
—5. ἧς αὐτοί: cf. c. 53. 13 ff. 

55. The superiority of the Syracu- 
sans at sea having been thus clearly 
demonstrated, the Athenians lose all hope 
of accomplishing in any way at all the 
object of the expedition. 

1. Aapmpas: pred., the victory of the 
Syracusans having been decisive. Cf. 
Lue. Ver. Hist. i. 17, τῆς δὲ τροπῆς 
λαμπρᾶς γεγενημένης. Cl. proposes to 
write λαμπρῶς, rendering, “victory on 
the sea having also clearly decided 
for the Syracusans”; but there is no 
necessity for the change, since the 
pred. adj. has this force. See App. 
—2. ἤδη kal Tov ναυτικοῦ : καί, even 
(also), which Vat. omits, is indispen- 
sable, since the reference is to the 
defeat of Demosthenes in the battle 
on Epipolae, c. 43. —pev: without a 
direct correlative, but answering ir- 
regularly to δέ above. —3. ἐπελθού- 
σας: for the position of the attrib. 
partic., see on c. 23. 14. G. 969. 
- 4. ἐν παντὶ ἀθυμίας : in the great- 
est despondency. For const., see on 
Camo se 33,128. Cf. Plat. Rep. 
579 b, ἐν παντὶ κακοῦ; Hat. vii. 118. 38, 
és πᾶν κακοῦ ἀπίκατο. ---ὁ παράλογος: 
see on Ο. 28. 17.— 5. τῆς στρατείας ὁ 
μετάμελος : regret over the expedition, 
objective gen. iil. 414, 4. 


ὃ μετά- 


Ἐν 


μελος is not found elsewhere in Att., 
but occurs again in the later writers. 

6. πόλεσι ταῦταις κτέ. : the placing 
of the subst. first gives it a character 
of generality, with nearly the effect 
of the part. gen.: “of all the cities 
with which they had gone to war, 
these were the only ones at that time 
of kindred organization.” The order 
is the common one in Thuce., in which 
a pron. subj. is placed after a pred. 
subst. and before a sup. adj. (here 
represented by μόναις) which belongs 
to the subst. See on 6. 29. 29.— ἤδη : 
at that time, as in vi. 31. 46.—8. 
μεγέθη : though the pl. does not occur 
elsewhere in Thuc., it is found in Ar. 
Ran. 1057; Xen. Cyneg. 4. 1; Plat. 
Prot. 356 @; Crit?. 115d; Legg. 860 b, 
861 6. Kiihn. 348, note 3. It refers 
to the size of the cities, as well as to 
their noteworthy buildings and im- 
provements, esp. those for warlike 
purposes. — 9. ἐκ πολιτείας τι μετα- 
βολῆς: “by a change of constitution 
in any respect.” τι is adv. acc., a 
const. esp. common after negs., as in 
Ὁ. 57. 4, οὐ κατὰ δίκην τι μᾶλλον. --- τὸ 
διάφορον: as in 6. 75. 59, the change, 
the revolution. Kr. takes te with τὸ 
διάφορον, and this in the sense of dis- 
cord, explaining: τὸ διάφορον ὃ αὐτοῖς 


Of 4, 


ἐδύναντο ἐπενεγκεῖν οὐδὲν ἦν. 


102 


THUCYDIDES VII. 55, 56. 


» Ὧν ee A“ wn 
10 προσήγοντο av, οὔτ᾽ ἐκ παρασκευῆς πολλῷ κρείσσονος, 
, δὲ Ν ΄ ΄ Ν 9. - τ > a Ν 
σφαλλόμενοι δὲ τὰ πλείω, τά τε πρὸ αὐτῶν ἠπόρουν καὶ 


> § , \ A \ > , a τ >» ¥ 
επει 7) YE και TALS VAVOL ἐκρατήθησαν, O OUK αν @WOVTO, 


56 πολλῴ δὴ μᾶλλον ἔτι. 


»ΩΝ , "ὃ a \ \ , >) murs A 
εὐθὺς παρέπλεον aoewsS Καὶ TO στομα AvUTOV διενοοῦντο 


κλήσειν, ὅπως μηκέτι, μηδ᾽ εἰ βούλοιντο, λάθοιεν αὐτοὺς 


οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐκπλεύσαντες. 


Χ “ Ν 
οὐ γὰρ. περὶ τοῦ αὐτοὶ σω- 


“ ’, ¥ Ν > , > la 5 Ν Ν 9 
θῆναι μόνον ἔτι τὴν ἐπιμέλειαν ἐποιοῦντο, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὅπως 


> ΄ , ΄ 9 > ἣν coe A 
EKEWOUS κωλύσωσι, νομίζοντες, οπερ nV, απὸ TE των 


140. 27, τὸ γὰρ βραχύ τι τοῦτο πᾶσαν 
ὑμῶν ἔχει τὴν βεβαίωσιν; iv. 27. 21, 
ὡρμημένους τι τὸ πλέον. --- ὃ προσή- 
yovto av: by which they might have 
brought them into subjection, 1.6. εἰ ἐδύ- 
vavto τοῦτο ἐπενεγκεῖν. Cf. ii. 30. 
7; vi. 94. 14. Kr. Spr. 54, 12, 9.— 
10. οὔτ᾽ ἐκ παρασκευῆς ToAAw κρείσ- 
σονος: Cl., Kr., and St. write κρείσ- 
covos instead of the vulgate κρείσσους. 
See App. The phrase is manifestly 
opp. to οὔτε ἐκ πολιτείας Tt μεταβολῆς, 
and both are to be connected as 
means with ov δυνάμενοι ἐπενεγκεῖν. 
The sense of the sent. thus far is: 
“these were the only cities at that 
time similar in character to their own, 
against which they had gone to war; 
for they had a democratic constitu- 
tion, as they themselves had, and 
possessed ships and cavalry, and were 
not inconsiderable in size; therefore 
they could neither by a change in 
their constitution in any respect, nor 
by very much superior military forces, 
bring about among them the change 
(either by inward factions, or by a 
defeat in open field) by which they 
might have hoped to bring them 
under their rule.” The three partics. 
ἐπελθόντες (6), ov δυνάμενοι ἐπενεγκεῖν 
(8), and σφαλλόμενοι δὲ τὰ πλείω (11, 


of the results of the undertaking) 
contain the successive causes of the 
following ἠπόρουν xré. See App. — 
11. ta πρὸ αὐτῶν: adv., before this, 
v.e. before the unsuccessful sea-fight. 
αὐτά of the matters under discussion, 
as in i. 1. 10, and often. 

56. The confidence of the Syracu- 
sans, on the other hand, rises now to the 
point of hoping completely to destroy the 
Athenian army, and thus win great glory 
and a conspicuous position among the 
Greeks. 

2. παρέπλεον: i.e. they sailed 
along the shore of the harbour, even 
past the Athenian ship-station, in a 
demonstrative and threatening man- 
ner. — §evoovvro: with fut. inf. as in 
iv. 115.7; 121. 3. 

4. αὐτοί: from Vat., for αὐτοῦ, 
alone admissible as opp. to ἐκείνους. 
—6. κωλύσωσι: the reading of all 
the Mss. After verba curandi 
with ὅπως, Thuc.’s usage varies be- 
tween the fut. indic. and aor. subjy. 
GMT. 339; H. 885b. See oni. 19. 3 
and St. Qu. Gr. p. 11. With κωλύσωσι 
understand μὴ σωθῆναι. Cf. vi. 88. 28; 
102. 8.— ἀπὸ τῶν παρόντων: on ac- 
count of (in consequence of) the pres- 
ent state of affairs, stronger than ἐκ 


Cf. Tae 


τῶν παρόντων. 2 


οἱ δὲ Συρακόσιοι τόν τε λιμένα 1 


THUCYDIDES VII. 56. 105 


παρόντων πολὺ σφῶν καθυπέρτερα τὰ πράγματα εἶναι, 
καὶ εἰ δύναιντο κρατῆσαι ᾿Αθηναίων τε καὶ τῶν ξυμμάχων 
Ν Ν A ‘ Ν ΄ Ν ΄ > Ν 
καὶ κατὰ γῆν καὶ κατὰ θάλασσαν, καλὸν σφίσιν ἐς τοὺς 
10 Ἕλληνας τὸ ἀγώνισμα φανεῖσθαι: τούς τε γὰρ ἄλλους 
Ἕλληνας εὐθὺς τοὺς μὲν ἐλευθεροῦσθαι, τοὺς δὲ φόβου 
> 4 5 ἣν » Ν » Ν ε / 
ἀπολύεσθαι (οὐ yap ἔτι δυνατὴν ἔσεσθαι τὴν ὑπόλοιπον 
> 4 4 x A 5 ’ὔ ld 
Αθηναίων δύναμιν τὸν ὕστερον ἐπενεχθησόμενον πόλεμον 
fa) » lal > 
ἐνεγκεῖν), καὶ αὐτοὶ δόξαντες αἴτιοι αὐτῶν εἶναι ὑπό τε 


“A »» 5 vA Ν ε Ν “ »Ἅ Ν 
15 τῶν ἄλλων ἀνθρώπων καὶ ὑπὸ τῶν ἔπειτα πολὺ θαυμα.- 


[Ὁ] 


΄ \ 4% , » elses ΄ A \ 
σθήσεσθαι. καὶ ἣν δὲ ἄξιος ὁ ἀγὼν κατά τε ταῦτα Kal : 
4 5 Ν 3 4 , ce 5 Ν Ν A 
ὅτι οὐχὶ ᾿Αθηναίων μόνον περιεγίγνοντο, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῶν 
» Ν > 
ἄλλων πολλῶν ξυμμάχων, καὶ οὐδ᾽ αὐτοὶ αὖ μόνον, ἀλλὰ 
καὶ μετὰ τῶν ξυμβοηθησάντων σφίσιν, ἡγεμόνες τε γε- 


x ͵ὕὔ Ν Ν 
20 vopevor μετὰ Κορινθίων καὶ Λακεδαιμονίων, καὶ τὴν 


7. καθυπέρτερα : as in v. 14. 8.—9. ἐς 
τοὺς “λληνας : the prep. és with refer- 
ence to the lit. meaning of φανεῖσθαι, as 
it were, shine into. (Quite similar is δη- 
λοῦν ἐς τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους, i.go. 10. Cf.i. 72. 
13; vi. 31. 832. — καλόν : glorious, with 
ἀγώνισμα also in 6. 59. 2.—11. τοὺς 
μέν, τοὺς δέ: part. appos. to τοὺς. 

Ἕλληνας, aS in ὁ. 45. 8.— ἐλευθεροῦ- 
σθαι, ἀπολύεσθαι : these infs. are evi- 
dently used in fut. sense. St., fol- 
lowing v. H., has inserted ay before 
ἐλευθεροῦσθαι, but unnecessarily ; for 
whether Cl.’s idea that in the older 
Att. writers some presents of pure 
and contract verbs are used in the 
sense of the fut. (see on iii. 58. 29) 
be right or not, certainly the pres. 
with εὐθύς here expresses much more 
forcibly the instantaneous result. 
The Schol., as St. observes, seems to 
have read ἀπολύσ εσθαι, since he ex- 
plains it by ῥύσεσθαι. --- 14. καὶ αὐτοί: 
opp. to τούς τε ἄλλους Ἕλληνας in 10, 
— δόξαντες αἴτιοι αὐτῶν εἶναι: having 


the reputation of being the causes of 
these things. For αὐτῶν, see on 6. 
55-11. The Schol. correctly explains, 
Ths τε ἐλευθερίας τῶν Ἑλλήνων καὶ TOU 
ἀπαλλαγῆναι τοῦ φόβου. 

16. καὶ ἦν 8... 
decisive combat was indeed an important 
καί is not copulative, and δέ 
is epexegetical. See on i. 132. 22.— 
17. ὅτι... περιεγίγνοντο: the impf. 
of anticipation, because they were con- 
quering. — μόνον; - . . μόνον : Cl. and 
St. write μόνων, μόνοι, the former ex- 
plaining: “ As μόνοι in 18 is necessary 
as opp. to μετὰ τῶν ξυμβοηθησάντων, SO 
in 17 also, for the sake of symmetry at 
least, μόνων is necessary. Besides, 
μόνων is, if not indispensable, at least 
much more expressive, and αὖ before 
udvorrefers to a preceding μόνων. Kr. 
unnecessarily objects to the words καὶ 
οὐδ᾽ αὐτοὶ αὖ μόνον, because that would 
diminish the glory οὗ the Syracusans. 
That the Syracusans in this struggle 
appeared as leaders, even by the side 


ἀγών: and the 


one, 


104 THUCYDIDES VII. 56, 57. 


σφετέραν πόλιν ἐμπαρασχόντες προκινδυνεῦσαί τε Kal 
τοῦ ναυτικοῦ μέγα μέρος προκόψαντες. ἔθνη γὰρ πλεῖ- 
\ 3. 2N 4 / , ~ Zz Ν na 
στα δὴ ἐπὶ μίαν πόλιν ταύτην ξυνῆλθε, πλήν γε δὴ τοῦ 

, »” A 3 “A ἴω » Ν ἃς > 
ξύμπαντος ὄχλου τοῦ ἐν τῷδε τῷ πολέμῳ πρὸς τὴν ᾿Αθη- 

25 ναίων τε πόλιν καὶ Λακεδαιμονίων. 

57 Τοσοίδε yap ἑκάτεροι ἐπὶ Σικελίαν τε Kal περὶ Σι- 
κελίας, τοῖς μὲν ξυγκτησόμενοι τὴν χώραν ἐλθόντες, τοῖς 
Ν , Sak , 5 ΄, > 
δὲ ξυνδιασώσοντες, [ἐπὶ Συρακούσας] ἐπολέμησαν, ov 


of Corinthians and Lacedaemonians, 
and that the contest took place in 
their territory, gave them great im- 
portance for all Hellas.” But the 
change seems unnecessary : see App.— 
21. ἐμπαρασχόντες: cf. vi. 12. 13. ἐν- 
has adv. force, as if τῷ ἀγῶνι were 
expressed. Cf. ii. 
ἐπιτήδειος ἐφαίνετο ἐνστρατοπεδεῦσαι; il. 


20. 9, 6 χῶρος 
44. 5, ἐνευδαιμονῆσαι ὃ Bios ... ἔυνε- 
μετρήθη. The sense of the passage is, 
“having put forward their own city 
in the contest to take the post of dan- 
ger.” — τε: as if καὶ προκόψαι followed. 
There is a slight change of const., 
since προκόψαντες is conformed rather 
to éurapacxdvtes. — 22. τοῦ ναυτικοῦ 
... προκόψαντες: having made great prog- 
ress in naval affairs, lit. having opened 
the way for the navy in large meas- 
ure. Cf. iv. 60. 12, καὶ τῆς ἀρχῆς ἅμα 
προκοπτόντων ἐκείνοι. Kiihn. 416, 
note 2. Thue. sometimes uses μέρος 
(adv. here) in other places also in an 
unusual way, eg. in iil. 3. 6; ν. 
22. 9. 

ἔθνη γὰρ πλεῖστα δὴ κτέ.: cf 1. 1. 8. 
yap refers to τῶν ἄλλων πολλῶν ξυμμά- 
χων and μετὰ τῶν ξυμβοηθησάντων σφίσι 
above. — 29. ἐπὶ μίαν πόλιν : not against 
but to the city, since not only the 
enemy but also the allies are meant. 
π-- τοῦ ξύμπαντος ὄχλου: the Mss. 
read λόγου, which the Schol. explains 


by ἀριθμοῦ. Kr. proposed ὄχλου, which 
Cl. and St. adopt. It is supported by 
c. 75. 26, μυριάδες τοῦ ξύμπαντος ὄχλου 
οὐκ ἐλάσσους τεσσάρων ἅμα ἐπορεύοντο. 
Besides, only with the reading ὄχλου 
is it admissible with rod... πρὸς τὴν 
᾿Αθηναίων Te πόλιν καὶ Λακεδαιμονίων to 
supply ξυνελθόντος from ξυνῆλθε, and 
thereby to put the prep. πρός in a prop. 
light. Instead of this, St. would sup- 
ply or insert ξυστάντος. Heilmann and 
Madvig propose ξυλλόγου for λόγου. 

57. The allies of the Athenians. 

1. ἐπὶ Σικελίαν τε kal περὶ Σικε- 
λίας: for ἐπὶ Σικελίαν with ἐπολέμη- 
σαν, see Kr. Spr. 48, 9, 9. --- 2. ἐλθόν- 
τες: belongs to both fut. parties. — 
3. [ἐπὶ Συρακούσας] ἐπολέμησαν : the 
aor. means not they carried on the war, 
but they entered inte the war (sooner 
or later), took partin it. ἐπὶ Συρακού- 
σας, against Syracuse, Cl. considers a 
marginal explanation of ἐπὶ Σικελίαν 
(1) which has crept into the text. Kr. 
and St. adopt Bauer’s emendation, 
ἐπὶ Συρακούσαις ἐπολέμησαν = ἐς τὸν 
ἐπὶ Συρακούσαις πόλεμον κατέστησαν. 
Arn. holds to ἐπὶ Συρακούσας ἐπολέμη.- 
σαν and renders came to Syracuse to 
war, ἐπολέμησαν being synonymous 
with és πόλεμον, Or μετὰ πολέμου, ἦλθον. 
This would be preferable if πολεμεῖν 
ἐπί τινα in this sense could be estab- 
lished. — ov... tv: not at all. See on 


10 


THUCYDIDES VII. 57. 


κατὰ δίκην τι μᾶλλον οὐδὲ Kata Evyyéveray μετ᾽ ἀλλή- 


’, > ε 4 ial “ἡ Ν 
λων στάντες, ἀλλ᾽ ὡς ἕκαστοι τῆς ξυντυχίας ἢ κατὰ τὸ 


ξυμφέρον ἢ ἀνάγκῃ ἔσχον. 


5 > Ν > a = 
Αθηναῖοι μέν αὐτοὶ ἴωνες 


a , τ' Ἃ εἰν 5 θ \ > A a 
επι Δωριέας “υρακοσίιους εκοντες Hr OV, και QAUTOLS ΤΊ) 


νον ἦν a Ν , » , , \» 
αὐτῇ φωνῃ Kal νομίμοις ἐτι χρώμενοι Λήμνιοι καὶ Ip- 


Ν ΡΆ ἃ » > Ν », ε 
βριοι καὶ Αἰγινῆται, ot τότε Αἰγιναν εἶχον, καὶ ἔτι ᾿ἔστι- 


΄»“ ε 5 = 4 ε 4 5 nw »» »Ἄ 
ανης ov ἐν Εὐβοίᾳ Εστίαιαν οἰκουντες, αἀποικοι οντες 


ξυνεστράτευσαν. 


τῶν δὲ ἄλλων οἱ μὲν ὑπήκοοι, οἱ δ᾽ 


SN , SL, 5λον a \ ἃ ΄ 
απο ξυμμαχίας αὐυτονομοι, εἰσι € και οἱι μισθοφόροι 


6. 55. 9. --- 4. per ἀλλήλων στάντες : 
“choosing their side.” Cf. ο.61.12; 
i. 33. 22; iii. 39. 12. —5. ὡς ἕκαστοι τῆς 
fuvtuxias .. . ἔσχον : this is Heilmann’s 
and Bm.’s conjecture, for ἑκάστοις... 
ἔσχεν. (Vat. has ἕκαστοι, prima 
manu.) ἔχειν is not used impers. in 
Thue. The const. is the same as in i. 
22. 14, ὡς ἑκατέρων τις εὐνοίας ἢ μνή- 
uns ἔχοι. See one. 2. 2. ἔσχον (aor. 
as in v. 28. 12), inceptive: “ accord- 
ing as the individual (states) whether 
for the sake of their own advantage 
or through compulsion came into a 
nearer relationship with (ξυντυχίας) 
the one side or the other.” 

6. ᾿Αθηναῖοι... .”Iwves .. . Δωριέας 
Συρακοσίους: chiastic order. — 7. 
ἑκόντες ἦλθον : the hostile relation of 
the chief contestants was founded 
also inrace difference; here, therefore, 
there was no need of compulsion from 
without. — τῇ airy: belongs in force 
also to νομίμοις and governs αὐτοῖς (7). 
— 8. Λήμνιοι κτέ. : the occupation of 
Lemnos by Att. cleruchs was effected 
by Miltiades (Hdt. vi. 140); that of 
Imbrus prob. about the same time; of 
Werima, tol Bic. (cf ii. 27. § 1, to 
which τότε refers); of Hestiaea, or 
Histiaea, 446 p.c. (i. 114. 16). The 
city Hestiaea was called after its oc- 
cupation by the Athenians, in the 


dialect of the people, Oreus, from 
the place near by with which it was 
united; but in public documents and 
on coins it was called even later Hes- 
tiaea. See Bursian, II. p. 407. — 10. 
ot ἐν Εὐβοίᾳ “Εἰστίαιαν οἰκοῦντες : per- 
haps to distinguish it from the city of 
the same name in Acarnania, men- 
tioned by Steph. Byz. s.v.—11. Evve- 
στράτευσαν: aor. set out with them. 
ἄποικοι ὄντες giving the reason. Cf 
ξυνεστράτευον (15), took part in the expe- 
dition with them. 

12. ἀπὸ ξυμμαχίας αὐτόνομοι: ἀπὸ 
ξυμμαχίας gives the cause of their tak- 
ing part in the expedition; αὐτόνομοι 
shows the relation they occupy in it. 
On ἀπό, according to, see Kiihn. 450, 1g. 
“Thue. calls all those who have en- 
tered into a perpetual alliance with 
the Athenians to wage war on the 
barbarians, and who acknowledge 
their hegemony, ὑπήκοοι ξύμμαχοι, and 
distinguishes from them those who, 
like the Corcyraeans, made simply a 
temporary alliance. The latter are 
here termed ἀπὸ ξυμμαχίας αὐτόνομοι, 
elsewhere simply αὐτόνομοι (6. 57. 333 
vi. 69. 23), or πάνυ ἐλευθέρως ξυμμαχοῦν- 
τες (vi. 85.9). Of the former he dis- 
tinguished two classes,— the one who, 
enjoying their own laws and free from 
tribute, furnish ships of their own 


105 


9 
v 


106 


20 


ξυνεστράτευον. 


THUCYDIDES VII. 57. 


λῶν ᾿Ερετριῆς καὶ Χαλκιδῆς καὶ Στυρῆς καὶ Καρύστιοι 
15 ἀπ᾿ Εὐβοίας ἦσαν, ἀπὸ δὲ νήσων Κεῖοι καὶ “Avdpror καὶ 


> ’ ‘\ Ν > ai 
Τήνιοι, ἐκ δ᾽ ᾿Ιωνίας Μιλήσιοι καὶ Σάμιοι καὶ Χῖοι. 


΄ 
του- 


των Χῖοι φόρου οὐχ ὑποτελεῖς ὄντες, ναῦς δὲ παρέχον- 


’ 
τες αὐτόνομοι ξυνέσποντο. 


\ Ν nw »»Ἥ» »” 
καὶ TO πλεῖστον Iwves ovTes 


a \ ee. ns σ΄ - 
οὗτοι πάντες καὶ ἀπ᾿ ᾿Αθηναίων πλὴν Καρυστίων (οὗ- 


» aN , ε , - ee ς Ν 5 ’, ν 
τοι ὃ εισι Δρύοπες), ὑπ KOOL ὃ OVTES καὶ avaykKy) ομως 


Ἴωνές γε ἐπὶ Δωριέας ἠκολούθουν. 


πρὸς δ᾽ αὐτοῖς Αἰο- 


“ A Ν ᾿ἶ 
λῆς, Μηθυμναῖοι μὲν ναυσὶ καὶ οὐ φόρῳ ὑπήκοοι, Te- 


accord to the Athenians (cf. vi. 85. 8, 
νεῶν παροκωχῇ αὐτονόμους, and below, 
§ 4, 5); the second, those who pay 
money instead of ships (cf. ii. 9. 15, 
πόλεις ai ὑποτελεῖς οὖσαι, and below, ὃ 
4, 5; the same being called ὑποχει- 
pious in iii. 11.2). And so besides the 
ἀπὸ ξυμμαχίας αὐτόνομοι there is an- 
other class of αὐτόνομοι, who, though 
really ὑπήκοοι, are considered αὐτόνο- 
μοι because they are under no con- 
straint in point of laws and customs 
in the sphere of their separate govern- 
ments. (Cf. iii. 10.§ 6; 11. 91: 39. 
§ 2.)” St. 

13. καὶ τῶν μὲν ὑπηκόων κτέ.: as 
the enumeration of subject and tribu- 
tary allies follows geographical sub- 
divisions, —i.e. the allies from Eu- 
boea, those from the Cyclades, and 
those from Ionia, —the Chians also 
are reckoned among the last, since 
here the geographical point of view is 
most important; but immediately af- 
terwards, regard being paid to the con- 
dition of the ξυμμαχία, the correction 
is added: . ξυνέσποντο 
(we should have expected τούτων δὲ 
Χῖοι). See App.—16. Τήνιοι : from 
one of the larger Cyclades ; the read- 
ing of Vat. only, the others incor- 


τούτων Χῖοι... 


rectly Τήιοι. --- 18. ξυνέσποντο: aor., 
as ξυνεστράτευσαν in 1]. --- τὸ πλεῖ- 
στον: adv., for the most part. —19. 
οὗτοι πάντες sums up the ὑπήκοοι καὶ 
φόρου ὑποτελεῖς (15), including the 
Chians, who geographically are count- 
ed with these. Ἴωνες ὄντες empha- 
sizes the point of race, which is still 
more closely defined by the addition 
kal ἀπ’ ᾿Αθηναίων (sc. ἄποικοι; cf. Vi. 
76. 14, ἀπὸ σφῶν). --- 20. Δρύοπες: 
mentioned among the oldest Hellenic 
inhabitants of Greece, dwelling near 
Mt. Oeta. Cf. Hat. viii. 43. 9. See 
Hermann, Griech. St. Alt. § 16, note 6. 
- ὑπήκοοι ὄντες... Δωριέας : though 
their service was not voluntary, still 
(Sues) it was not unnatural, since they 
went as Ionians (emphasized by γε, of 
Vat.) against Dorians. In the cases 
that follow the race-connexion is sen- 
sibly violated. 

21. πρὸς αὐτοῖς : i.e. besides the 
Ionian peoples. —22. Μηθυμναῖοι : 
Methymna in Lesbos had been spared 
the harsh treatment of the remaining 
Lesbians, iii. 50. 7, and the inhabitants 
are named, vi. 85.8, along with the 
Chians, as νεῶν παροκωχῇ αὐτόνομοι. 
The same relation is here expressed by 
ναυσὶ καὶ ov φόρῳ ὑπήκοοι, paying ser- 


Ν “~ \ ε , Ν , ε 
και τῶν μὲν υὕπὴηκοων Κα', φόρου υποτε- 4 


σι 


THUCYDIDES. VII. 57. 


» A 
νέδιοι δὲ Kat Αἰνιοι ὑποτελεῖς. 


οὗτοι δὲ Αἰολῆς Αἰολεῦσι 


~ , - A κ᾿ 
τοῖς κτίσασι Βοιωτοις τοῖς μετὰ Συρακοσίων κατ᾽ ἀνάγ- 


25 κην ἐμάχοντο, Πλαταιῆς δὲ καταντικρὺ Βοιωτοὶ Βοιω- 


Len] Zz > ie Ν ἊΝ 3» 
TOLS μονοι ELKOTWS KATA TO ἔχθος. 


“Ῥόδιοι δὲ καὶ Κυθή- 


wn Ν 
ριοι Δωριῆς ἀμφότεροι, ot μὲν Λακεδαιμονίων ἄποικοι, 


Κυθήριοι, ἐπὶ Λακεδαιμονίους τοὺς ἅμα Γυλίππῳ μετὰ 
ε A 
᾿Αθηναίων ὅπλα ἐπέφερον, Ῥόδιοι δέ, ᾿Αργεῖοι γένος, Συ- 
, Ἂν lal , Ἂν XN 5 , ε 
90 βρακοσίιοις μεν Δωριευσι, Γελῴοις δὲ και αἀποικοις εαυ- 


3. Ν , ἐν 5 
τῶν οὖσι, μετὰ Συρακοσίων στρατευομένοις, ἠναγκάζοντο 


Ὁ“ 
πολεμεῖν. 


τῶν τε περὶ Πελοπόννησον νησιωτῶν Κεφαλ.- 


“A \ ἊΝ ΄, θ 3 / / Ν δὲ Ν 
λῆνες μὲν καὶ Ζακύνθιοι αὐτόνομοι μέν, κατὰ δὲ τὸ νη- 


vice with ships, not with tribute, ὑπή- 
κοοι being used in an arbitrarily lim- 
ited sense.—23. Αἴνιοι: from Αἶνος, 
an old Aeol. settlement on the Thra- 
cian coast. See Herm. St. Alt. ὃ 76, 
note 17. — 24. Βοιωτοῖς τοῖς μετα, Συ- 
ρακοσίων : the τοῖς which hitherto had 
rested only on Lindau’s conjecture 
has been lately confirmed by the Ms. 
in the Brit. Mus. (M. in Stahl). The 
general designation τοῖς κτίσασι Bow- 
τοῖς, “the Boeotians who had colo- 
nized the above-named places” had 
necessarily to be restricted by τοῖς 
μετὰ Συρακοσίων, “who stood now on 
the Syracusan side.” With regard to 
the subject, see Curtius, Gr. Hist. I. p. 
127, “Boeotia was the starting-point 
for the emigration (of the Aeolian 
races), and was considered also in 
later times the mother-country of the 
Aeolian colonies.” — kar’ ἀνάγκην : 
because they were ὑπήκοοι and ὑποτε- 
λεῖς. Hore the breaking up of the 
natural relation of κατὰ τὸ ξυγγενές 
(c. 58. 15; i. 6. 12; iii. 82. 36) was 
brought about by outward compul- 
sion. — 25. Πλαταιῆς δὲ... ἔχθος: 
the Plataeans on the other hand were 


influenced in their choice of alliance 
by their well-grounded hate against 
the Thebans, therefore εἰκότως. Cl.’s 
rendering of καταντικρύ, on the other 
hand, is at least doubtful, Bm. pro- 
poses καὶ ἄντικρυς, indeed outright (cf. 
1. 122. 15; viii. 64. 23; 92. 65), which 
would give exactly the idea of Κερκυ- 
ραῖοι δὲ... σαφῶς in 35 below. κατὰ 
τὺ ἔχθος, with Vat., referring to well- 
known occurrences, the other Mss. 


107 


~I 


κατ᾽ ἔχθος. --- 26. μόνοι: 1.6. no other . 


Boeotians had joined the Athenians. 
Moreover, the Plataeans here referred 
to are either such as had found refuge 
in Athens, e.g. those who succeeded 
in escaping when Plataea was be- 
sieged, iii. 24. ὃ 9, or such as had set- 
tled in Scione, v. 32. § 1. 

28. Κυθήριοι : repeated to avoid 
misunderstanding. Cf. ec. 86. 10.— 
29. ἐπέφερον: this reading of Vat., 
for ἔφερον, seems to be supported by 
c. 18. 15; v. 18. 12. --- ᾿Αργεῖοι γένος : 
see ©. Miiller, Dorier, I. p. 119 ff. — 
30. ἀποίκοις ἑαυτῶν : cf. vi. 4. ὃ 5. 

32. KebaddAnves μὲν καὶ Ζακύνθιοι : 
cf. α. 31.7. The correlative is δέ in 
35. — 33. κατὰ τὸ νησιωτικόν : on 


108 


90 


40 


THUCYDIDES VII. 57. 


σιωτικὸν μᾶλλον κατειργόμενοι, OTL θαλάσσης ἐκράτουν 
οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, ξυνείποντο: Κερκυραῖοι δὲ οὐ μόνον Δωρι- 
ἧς ἀλλὰ καὶ Κορῶθιοι σαφῶς ἐπὶ Κορινθίους τε καὶ 
Συρακοσίους, τῶν μὲν ἄποικοι ὄντες, τῶν δὲ ξυγγενεῖς, 


βουλήσει δὲ 


ἔχθος τὸ Κορινθίων οὐχ ἧσσον εἵποντο. 


ἀνάγκη μὲν ἐκ τοῦ εὐπρεποῦς, κατὰ 
Ν e 
Kat ot Meo- 
σήνιοι νῦν καλούμενοι ἐκ Ναυπάκτου καὶ ἐκ Πύλου 
’ ε >> us > 4 5 Ν / , 
τότε ὑπ᾽ ᾿Αθηναίων ἐχομένης ἐς τὸν πόλεμον παρελήφθη- 
σαν. καὶ ἔτι Μεγαρέων φυγάδες οὐ πολλοὶ Μεγαρεῦσι 
΄ > \ κ ye an .» 
Σελινουντίοις οὖσι κατὰ ξυμφορὰν ἐμάχοντο. τῶν δὲ ἄλλων 
ε ,ὕ “A e 4 > 4 "ὃ > -“ \ 
ἑκούσιος μᾶλλον ἡ στρατεία ἐγίγνετο Non. Ἀργεῖοι μὲν 
lal a a A 
yap ov τῆς ξυμμαχίας ἕνεκα μᾶλλον ἢ τῆς Λακεδαιμονίων 
τς Ry a , . "597 3 , 
τε ἔχθρας καὶ τῆς παραυτίκα ἕκαστοι ἰδίας ὠφελίας Aw- 


ριῆς ἐπὶ Δωριέας μετὰ ᾿Αθηναίων ᾿Ιώνων ἠκολούθουν, 


account of their insular position. — 34. 
κατειργόμενοι: : constrained. Cf. iv. 98. 
18.— 36. σαφῶς : clearly, actually.— 
37. τῶν μέν: sc. Κορινθίων. --- τῶν δέ: 
sc. Συρακοσίων. --- 88. ἐκ τοῦ εὐπρε- 
ποῦς: for appearance’s sake. Schol. 
iva εὐπρεπὴς ἀπολογισμὸς αὐτοῖς ἡ. --- 
κατὰ ἔχθος τὸ Κορινθίων * cf. i. 26. --- 
39. οὐχ ἧσσον: not less, i.e. even 
more. 

ot Μεσσήνιοι viv καλούμενοι: 
“more common is the order οἱ viv 
Μεσσήνιοι καλούμενοι, as ἡ νῦν Ἑλλὰς 
καλουμένη, 1. 2. 1; ἡ νῦν Θεσσαλία κα- 
λουμένη, i. 2. 14. Cfii. gg. 19. But οἱ 
has not dropped out after Μεσσήνιοι, 
as a comparison with ii. 29. 11, ἐν 
Δαυλίᾳ τῆς Φωκίδος νῦν καλουμένης, 
shows. The phrase νῦν καλούμενοι is 
added because the Helots whom the 
Athenians had settled at Naupactus (i. 
103. § 3) were not in fact all Messeni- 
ans (i. ror. ὃ 2).” St. See App. —40. 
ἐκ Ναυπάκτου... παρελήφθησαν : as 
stated in c. 31. ὃ 2. ---᾿ὧῷκ Πύλον... 


ἐχομένης : acc. to iv. 41. § 2 the Athe- 
nians had placed the Messenians from 
Naupactus as a garrison at Pylus 
(425 B.c.). —42. φυγάδες οὐ πολλοί: 
cf. iv. 74. ὃ 2; vi. 43. 15. —Meya- 
ρεῦσι.... οὖσι: pred. to Σελινουντίοις. 
The position as in 7 and 23 above. — 
43. κατὰ Evxpdhopay: in consequence of 
their misfortune, i.e. banishment which 
had brought them to Athens. Schol. 
ξυμφορὰν ἄρτι τὴν φυγὴν λέγει. 

44. ἤδη: froin this point (in the enu- 
meration). Cf. ii. 96.17. With the 
last named the motive was ἀνάγκη or 
ξυμφορά under the controlling influ- 
ence of the Athenians; those named 
after this went of their own accord, 
for even the μισθοφόροι are to be reck- 
oned under this head. — 46. τῆς παρ- 
αὐτίκα ἕκαστοι ἰδίας ὠφελίας : cf. sim- 
ilar consts. inc. 70. 47 ; νἱ. 69. 19. ὠφε- 
Aias, although indispensable, is found 
only in Vat. The meaning seems to 
be that the 500 Argives mentioned in 
vi. 43. 11 had offered themselves of 


8 


THUCYDIDES VII. 57. 


Μαντινῆς δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι ᾿Αρκάδων μισθοφόροι, ἐπὶ τοὺς 


S 


eS 4 Le > és > / +7 \ 
ἀεὶ πολεμίους σφίσιν ἀποδεικνυμένους εἰωθότες ἰέναι, καὶ 


50 τότε τοὺς μετὰ Κορινθίων ἐλθόντας ᾿Αρκάδας οὐδὲν ἧσσον 


55 


διὰ κέρδος ἡγούμενοι πολεμίους, Κρῆτες δὲ καὶ Αἰτωλοὶ 


ισθῷ καὶ οὗτοι πεισθέντες - ἕξυνέ δὲ τοῖς Κρησὶ τὴν 
μ ‘ 7) ” 


Γέλαν Ῥοδίοις ξυγκτίσαντας μὴ ξὺν τοῖς ἀποίκοις ἀλλ᾽ 


aN Ν 5 ΄ ἘΚ νὰν a > A 
ἐπι TOUS ATOLKOUS EKOVTAS μετα μισθοῦ ἐλθεῖν. 


καὶ Akap- 


if Ν ν Ν ’ \ Ν ᾽’ὔ / 
νάνων τινὲς ἅμα μὲν κέρδει, TO δὲ πλέον Δημοσθένους 


φιλίᾳ καὶ ᾿Αθηναίων εὐνοίᾳ ξύμμαχοι ὄντες ἐπεκούρησαν 
t / t μμ Χ βρη 5 


καὶ οἵδε μὲν τῷ ᾿Ιονίῳ κόλπῳ ὁριζόμενοι" ᾿Ιταλιωτῶν δὲ 


, Ν , 2 ΄ SF , 
Θούριοι και Μεταποόντιοι, εν τοιαυταις αναγκαις ΤΟΤΕ στα- 


σιωτικῶν καιρῶν κατειλημμένοι, ξυνεστράτευον καὶ ΣΙι- 


their own accord, as they individually 
expected profit from the expedition. 
That the Argives, as the Arcadians, 
sometimes served as mercenaries, is 
shown by Ar. Pax, 477.—48. Mav- 
τινῆς Kal ἄλλοι ᾿Αρκάδων : cf vi. 43. 
12.—49 ἀεί: from time to time, i.e. in 
each particular case, opp. to which 
is καὶ τότε, so this time. — ττολεμίους : 
pred. Kr. Spr. 50, 12, 1. --- σφίσιν ἀπο- 
δεικνυμένους : sc. ὑπὸ τῶν μισθωσάντων. 
—50. τοὺς μετὰ Κορινθίων ἐλθόντας 
᾿Αρκάδας : cf. ο. το. 23.— οὐδὲν ἧσσον : 
with πολεμίους. “ As they were ac- 
customed at other times to turn 
against any who were pointed out to 
them as enemies (usually of course 
strangers), so now they had no hesita- 
tion in fighting, for the sake of pay, 
their own countrymen.” —51. Kpyres: 
cf. vi. 43. 14. --- Αἰτωλοί: they serve 
now as mercenaries with the Atheni- 
ans, who had invaded their country in 
426 B.c. Cf. iii. 94. ff. —53. ξυγκτί- 
cavras: cf. vi. 4, ὃ 3. For the acc., 
see on 6. 40. 15.— 54. ἑκόντας : this 
reading of Vat., for ἄκοντας, is of 
course the only one admissible with 
μετὰ μισθοῦ and in this class of the 


allies. Cf. 44 above. Valla renders, 
ultro. On the other hand, ἀποίκους 
is necessary (Vat. ἐποίκους, cf. ii. 27. 
5), on account of the antithesis (μὴ 
ξὺν ---- ἀλλ᾽ ἐπί). 

54. ᾿Ακαρνάνων tives: cf. ο. 31. 28. 
—55. Δημοσθένους, .. . ᾿Αθηναίων: 
objective gens. For proofs of the 
friendly disposition here alluded to, ef: 
iii. 7. § 1; 94. § 25 105. §3; 107. § 2; 
114. ὃ 1.—57. Ἰονίῳ κόλπῳ: here 
taken as extending to the west coast 
of Italy —58. ἐν τοιαύταις ἀνάγκαις 
τότε στασιωτικῶν καιρῶν κατειλημμέ- 
vot: Thue. states in ec. 33. 24 ff., con 
cerning Thurii, that the Att. party had 
prevailed and driven out their oppo- 
nents; and they were now in such a 
situation, resulting from party rela- 
tions (στασιωτικῶν καιρῶν), that they 


were forced (τοιαύταις ἀνάγκαις) to the - 


alliance with Athens. As Thuc. men- 
tions in c. 33. § 5 factions only among 
the Thurians, and says that the Meta- 
pontians joined the Athenians κατὰ 
τὸ ξυμμαχικόν, St. thinks, with reason, 
that we should read Μεταπόντιοι καὶ 
Θοήριοι.--- 59. κατειλημμένοι : Reiske’s 
emendation for κατειλημμένων, which 


109 


10 


1] 


110 


THUCYDIDES VIL 57, 58. 


60 κελιωτῶν Νάξιοι καὶ Καταναῖοι, βαρβάρων δὲ “Eyeoraton, 


ν 5 / Ν A Ν ΄ὔ ᾿ “ », 
οἴπερ ἐπηγάγοντο, καὶ Σικελῶν τὸ πλέον, καὶ τῶν ἔξω 


Σικελίας Τυρσηνῶν τέ τινες κατὰ διαφορὰν Συρακοσίων 


καὶ ᾿Ιάπυγες μισθοφόροι. 


τοσάδε μὲν μετὰ ᾿Αθηναίων 


58 ἔθνη ἐστράτευον. Συρακοσίοις δὲ ἀντεβοήθησαν Καμαρι- 
ναῖοι μὲν ὅμοροι ὄντες καὶ Γελῷοι οἰκοῦντες μετ᾽ αὐτούς, 


» > ΄ ε ‘es > ~ 3.5 Dee ε 
επειτα AkpayavTwov ἡσυχαζόντων εν τω €7 EKELVA ἱδρυ- 


μένοι Σελινούντιοι. 


\ σ' Ν ~ Va XN Ν 
καὶ οἵδε μὲν τῆς Σικελίας τὸ πρὸς 


5; , , ΄ , ε Ἐ- \ ΨῚ ὁ Ἂς 
5 Λιβύην μέρος τετραμμένον νεμόμενοι, ‘Ipepator δὲ ἀπὸ 
τοῦ πρὸς τὸν Τυρσηνικὸν πόντον μορίου, ἐν ᾧ καὶ μόνοι 
Ἕλληνες οἰκοῦσιν - οὗτοι δὲ καὶ ἐξ αὐτοῦ μόνοι ἐβοήθησαν. 
καὶ "Ἑλληνικὰ μὲν ἔθνη τῶν ἐν Σικελίᾳ τοσάδε, Δωριῆς 

ἈΝ ε > ’ , 4 , Ν 
τε καὶ [οἱ] αὐτόνομοι πάντες, ξυνεμάχουν, βαρβάρων δὲ 

Χ ΄ ν X 3 ΄ Ν Ν > ΄ 

10 Σικελοὶ μόνοι ὅσοι μὴ ἀφέστασαν πρὸς τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους - 
τῶν δ᾽ ἔξω Σικελίας “Ἑλλήνων Λακεδαιμόνιοι μὲν ἡγε- 


would be gen. abs., Θουρίων καὶ Μετα- 
ποντίων being understood. The gen. 
is doubtless an error of the copyist 
due to the preceding gens. — 60. Bap- 
βάρων δὲ Ἐγεσταῖοι: cf. vi. 2. ὃ 5, 6. 
— 61. ἐπηγάγοντο: sc. τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους. 
— Σικελῶν : most of the Mss., except 
Vat., wrongly Σικελιωτῶν. Cf. c. 58. 
10; vi. 88. ὃ 4.—62. Τυρσηνῶν: see 
on 6. 53. 6.—63. Ἰάπυγες: cf: c. 33. 
ὃ 4.— 64. ἔθνη ἐστράτευον : neut. pl. 
with pl. verb, because ἔθνη denotes 
persons. Kiihn. 365 a. 

D8. The allies of the Syracusans. 

1. Καμαριναῖοι. ... καὶ Γελῴοι : cf 
6.33.8 1, vi. 67.13.—2. per αὐτούς: 
back of them, 1.6. further up the coast, 
in the same sense as ἐν τῷ ἐπ᾽ ἐκεῖνα 
in 3. It is the same use of μετά with 
acc. as in descriptions of lines of bat- 
tle (cf. v. 67.7, 16).— 3. ’Axpayavri- 
νων ἡσυχαΐόντων: remaining neutral. 
Cf. ο. 33. 1.--- ἐν τῷ ἐπ᾽ ἐκεῖνα : in the 


country beyond (the Agrigentines). See 
on ὁ. 37.9. Cf. vili. 104. 26. 

5. τετραμμένον : for position of the 
attrib. partic., see on c. 23. 14.—6. 
μορίου: v. H. (p. 100) rejects this 
word here and in ii. 65. 52 without 
sufficient reason, for μόριον is not dim. 
of μόρος, as he asserts, but has a 
specializing force, as all nouns end- 
ing in -ἰον. Cf ἀργύριον, ἄργυρος ; χρυ- 
σίον, χρυσός; βιβλίον, βίβλος ; χωρίον, 
x@pos.— 7. Ἕλληνες: pred., as the 
only Hellenes. Cf. vi. 62. 9. — ἐξ av- 
TOU: 82. τοῦ πρὸς τὸν Τυρσηνικὸν πόντον 
μορίου. 

9. [ot] αὐτόνομοι : all the editt. 
follow Bk. in omitting the impossible 
of. Reiske proposed to place it after 
αὐτόνομοι.---10. Σικελοὶ μόνοι : neither 
Elymi, then (vi. 2. 15), nor Phoeni- 
cians (vi. 2. 52), joined them. —écour 
μὴ ἀφέστασαν : acc. to 6. 57.61 (Suce- 
λῶν τὸ πλέον) the majority had re- 


15 


20 


25 


THUCYDIDES VII. 58. 


, , 4 , \ Ν x 
μόνα Σπαρτιάτην παρεχόμενοι, νεοδαμώδεις δὲ τοὺς ah- 
λους καὶ Εἵλωτας [δύναται δὲ τὸ νεοδαμῶδες ἐλεύθερον 
ΕἾ > ΄ θ δὲ Ν Ν Ν “ ΄ 
ἤδη εἶναι), Κορίνθιοι δὲ καὶ ναυσὶ καὶ πεζῷ μόνοι πα- 

Ν - 
ραγενόμενοι καὶ Λευκάδιοι καὶ ᾿Αμπρακιῶται κατὰ τὸ 
XN 3 
ξυγγενές, ἐκ δὲ ᾿Αρκαδίας μισθοφόροι ὑπὸ Κορινθίων 
Ν 
ἀποσταλέντες καὶ Σικυώνιοι ἀναγκαστοὶ στρατεύοντες καὶ 
τῶν ἔξω Πελοποννήσου Βοιωτοί. πρὸς δὲ τοὺς ἐπελ- 
θόντας τούτους οἱ Σικελιῶται αὐτοὶ πλῆθος πλέον κατὰ 
πάντα παρέσχοντο, ἅτε μεγάλας πόλεις οἰκοῦντες - καὶ 

Ν ε a Ν Ν aA \ & Or oats » “ 
γὰρ ὅπλιται πολλοὶ καὶ νῆες καὶ ἵπποι καὶ ὃ ἄλλος ὁμι- 

Ε , \ N Ψ > ε 
hos ἄφθονος ξυνελέγη. καὶ πρὸς ἅπαντας αὖθις, ὡς 
> e Ἂς » , "ἢ Ν / 5 4 
εἰπειν, τοὺς ἄλλους Συρακόσιοι αὐτοὶ πλείω ἐπορίσαντο 

τοῖν , , ν᾿ 3 , , > 
διὰ μέγεθός τε πόλεως καὶ OTL ἐν μεγίστῳ κινδύνῳ ἦσαν. 


x ec \ ε , 3 ἪΝ /, , Ν 
και QL μὲν εκατέρων ETLKOUPLAL τοσαίδε ξυνελέγησαν, και: 


volted. Cf. vi. 88. § 8, 4. ---12. νεο- ᾿Αμπρακιῶται; for τὸ ξυγγενές (sc. τῶν 
δαμώδεις ... καὶ Βίἵλωτας : see on 6. Συρακοσίων) is the motive with all 
19. 16.—13. [δύναται δὲ... ἤδη three for participation in the war. — 
εἶναι] : Dindorf and ν. H. justly 16. ἐξ ᾿Αρκαδίας μισθοφόροι. .. καὶ 


recognized that these words were not Σικνώνιοι: cf. c. 19. § 4.--- 17. ἀναγ- 


111 


from Thuc. The explanation of the καστοί: because since 418 B.c. an 
Schol. (νεοδαμώδης 6 ἐλεύθερος παρὰ oligarchic constitution had been 


τοῖς Λακεδαιμονίοις) proves that he did 
not have them before him. Besides, 
in c. 19. 16 and v. 34.6 Thuc. took 
for granted on the part of his readers 
acquaintance with this Spartan insti- 
tution. —14. μόνοι: 1.6. καὶ ναυσὶ καὶ 
πεζῷ. The Leucadians and Ambraci- 
ots furnished only ships, which the 
Corinthians manned in addition to 
their own. Cf. vi. 104. 10, οἱ Kopiv- 
θιοι πρὸς ταῖς σφετέραις δέκα Λευκαδίας 
δύο καὶ ᾿Αμπρακιώτιδας τρεῖς προσπληρώ- 
σαντες ὕστερον ἔμελλον πλεύσεσθαι. --- 
15. παραγενόμενοι: belongs only to 
Κορίνθιοι; but κατὰ τὸ ξυγγενές (sup- 
ply ξυνεμάχουν from 9) belongs to the 
three subjects Κορίνθιοι, Λευκάδιοι, and 


forced on the Sicyonians (ν. 81. 6). 
Cf. ο. 18. 31.—18. Βοιωτοί: cf ec. 
19. § 9. 

mpos: here and in 22 below, in 
comparison with. —21. ὁ ἄλλος ὅμιλος : 
of light-armed troops of every kind. 
— 22. ξυνελέγη : used esp. of the col- 
lection of troops. Cf i. 115. 18; il. 
TON 8: 1 004. 10. vie 32) Los (66. 14; 
οὗ. 6.— αὖθις : only to introduce the 
second comparison. — ὡς εἰπεῖν : lim- 
iting ἅπαντας. It is the regular form 
in Thuc., never &s ἔπος εἰπεῖν. See 
on i, 1. 9. —24. μέγεθος πόλεως : art. 
omitted as with μῆκος πλοῦ in vi. 34. 
28; 86. 10. 

25. τοσαίδε ξυνελέγησαν : = τυσαίδε 


GO οὐδὲν ἐς οὐδὲν ἐπενόουν. 


112 


THUCYDIDES VII. 58-60. 


, "ὃ “ > , A Ν 2 , 90" 
τότε ἤδη πᾶσαι ἀμφοτέροις παρῆσαν και οὐκέτι οὐδὲν 


οὐδετέροις ἐπῆλθεν. 


ε > ον \ 
Οἱ δ᾽ οὖν Συρακόσιοι καὶ ot ξύμμαχοι εἰκότως ἐνό- 


Ν > , ΄, > es. lal , 
μισαν καλὸν αγώνισμα σφίσιν εἶναι ἐπὶ TH γεγενημένῃ 


“ nA 4 a 
νίκῃ τῆς ναυμαχίας ἑλεῖν TE TO στρατόπεδον ἅπαν τῶν 


> ͵ὕ “ »” \ Ν » 9 > ,ὕ 
Αθηναίων TOOOUTOV ον, Και μηδὲ καθ ετερα αυτους. 


5 μήτε διὰ θαλάσσης μήτε τῷ πεζῷ, διαφυγεῖν. 


ἔκλῃον otv 


/ ΄ 27% Ν , ¥ Ν ’ 5 ‘ 
τόν τε λιμένα εὐθὺς τὸν μέγαν, ἔχοντα TO στόμα ὀκτὼ 


,ὔὕ ’,’ ΄’, ’ Ν ’, Ν > 4 
σταδίων μάλιστα, τριήρεσι πλαγίαις Kal πλοίοις Kal ἀκά- 


ts) ὑὉ5 a ε , \ > ΕἸ ¥ 4 
τοις, ἐπ αγκυρῶν ὁρμίζοντες, καὶ τἄλλα, ἢν ETL vavpa- 


χεῖν ot ᾿Αθηναῖοι τολμήσωσι, 


κλησιν ὁρῶσι καὶ τὴν ἄλλην 


ἦσαν ai ξυνελέγησαν. --- 26. τότε: in the 
latter part of the summer of 415 B.c. 

59. The Syracusans, determined to 
wage a war of extermination against the 
Athenians, now shut off the entrance to 
the great harbour by means of ships 
anchored broadside before it. 

1. οἱ δ᾽ οὖν Συρακόσιοι: since the 
narrative, interrupted at the end of ο. 
56, is here resumed, giving in ἐνόμισαν 
καλὸν ἀγώνισμα σφίσιν εἶνάι almost a 
verbal repetition οὗ c. 56.9, Kr.’s 
conjecture, δέ (for te of the Mss.), 
which is the usual connecting particle 
in Thue. in such cases, is doubtless 


right. See on i. 3. 19. For οὖν, see 
onc. 6.7. See App.—2. ἐπὶ τῇ ye- 


γενημένῃ νίκῃ: not only temporal, 
after the victory won, but also on the 
basis of the victory won, t.e. trust- 
ing now in victory.—4. μηδὲ καθ᾽ 
ἕτερα : 7.€. κατὰ μηδέτερα. See on 6. 
41. 15; 43. 4. ----Οπῆὐτοὺς... διαφυγεῖν: 
with changed sulbj., dependent on 
With regard to the 
force of the aor. infs. ἑλεῖν, διαφυνεῖν, 
see App. to 1, abovc.—5. διὰ Oadac- 


καλὺν ἀγώνισμα. 


’ Xie 7 
παρεσκευάζοντο, καὶ ὀλίγον 


A \ 
τοῖς δὲ ᾿Αθηναίοις τήν τε ἀπό- 


“ > 
διάνοιαν αὐτῶν αἰσθομένοις 


σης: more def. than κατὰ θάλασσαν, 
referring to the wide sea to be crossed. 
ἔκλῃον : imp.; they undertook the 
work, which, acc. to Diod. xiii. 14, 
they finished in three days. —6. 
ὀκτὼ σταδίων μάλιστα: for gen. of 
measure, see on c. 2. 17. Holm 
( Vortrag in Karlsr.  Philol. Wochen- 
schrift, 1882, No. 44, and Zeitschr. f. 
allg. Gesch. 1884, p. 16, 17) adopts 
here a small itinerary stadium of 
about 150 metres. See App. to ὁ. 78. 
14.—7. πλαγίαις: belongs to the 
three substs. The ships were placed 
broadside before the harbour and 
anchored (ἐπ᾽ ἀγκυρῶν ὁδρμίζοντες, se. 
αὐτάς). --- 9, ὀλίγον οὐδὲν ἐς οὐδέν : 
cf. c. 87. 28; ii. 8: 15 wie τὸ ele ee 
Introd. to Book I. p. 48, note 77. 

60. Encompassed by the greatest dan- 
ger, the Athenians determine, if possible, 
to cut their way through with their ships ; 
they abandon all the fortifications except 
a walled space near the ships for the sick 
and for the baggage of the army, and 
put all the available troops on board. 

2. ὁρῶσι: pres., as the work was 


THUCYDIDES VII. 60. 


113 


, 3 ’ Ν ’ ν Χ Ν 
βουλευτέα ἐδόκει. καὶ ξυνελθόντες οἵ τε στρατηγοὶ καὶ 2 
οἱ ταξίαρχοι πρὸς τὴν παροῦσαν ἀπορίαν τῶν τε ἄλλων 

Ἃ, ν Ν 5 ’ y¥ > 7 » 3 4 
5 καὶ OTL τὰ ἐπιτήδεια οὔτε αὐτίκα ἔτι εἶχον (προπέμψαν- 
τες γὰρ ἐς Κατάνην ὡς ἐκπλευσόμενοι ἀπεῖπον μὴ ἐπά- 
»΄ Ν Ν 4 ΄,͵ 5 Ν v4 
yew) οὔτε τὸ λοιπὸν ἔμελλον ἕξειν, εἰ μὴ ναυκρατήσουσιν, 
3 , Ν \ ΄ Ν = > A Ν Ν > 
ἐβουλεύσαντο τὰ μὲν τείχη τὰ ἄνω ἐκλιπεῖν, πρὸς δὲ av- 
ταῖς ταῖς ναυσὶν ἀπολαβόντες διατειχίσματι ὅσον οἷόν τε 
10 ἐλάχιστον τοῖς τε σκεύεσι καὶ τοῖξ ἀσθενοῦσιν ἱκανὸν 
, by \ A SoS Ν a + lal 
γενέσθαι, τοῦτο μὲν φρουρεῖν, ἀπὸ δὲ τοῦ ἄλλου πεζοῦ 
τὰς ναῦς ἁπάσας, ὅσαι ἦσαν καὶ δυναταὶ καὶ ἀπλοώτεραι, 


still going ΟΠ. --- αἰσθομένοις : aor., 
since they had received information. 
—3. Bovdevtéa: from βουλεύεσθαι. 
With regard to the pl. form of the 
verbal, common in Thuc., see on i. 7. 
2. 
καὶ ot ταξίαρχοι: Schol. νῦν διὰ 
τὸ ἄπορον καὶ τοὺς ταξιάρχους (see on 
iv. 4. 2) οἱ στρατηγοὶ συνήγαγον, καθ᾽ 


«αὑτοὺς πρότερον βουλευόμενοι. Cf. ο. 48. 


§ 1; 50.§ 5. --͵ἰ. πρὸς τὴν παροῦσαν 
ἀπορίαν: to be connected with ἐβου- 
λεύσαντο in 8. Cf. c. 47. 2. --- τῶν τε 
ἄλλων: as if καὶ τῶν ἐπιτηδείων fol- 
lowed. — 5. καὶ ὅτι xré.: for change 
of const., see Kr. Spr. 59, 2, 4.—6. 
ἀπεῖπον μὴ ἐπάγειν: they had di- 
rected them net to bring any more 
provisions. ἐπάγειν, bring (of the 
Catanaeans); ἐπάγεσθαι (vi. 99. 21), 
fetch (of the Athenians themselves). 
This had been done when their de- 
parture (ὡς ἐκπλευσόμενοι, cf. Cc. 50. ὃ 
3, 4) had been determined on before 
the eclipse of the moon.— 8. τὰ τεί- 
χη τὰ ἄνω: the part of the lower 
wall (c. 2. 17 ff.) that was furthest 
from the coast. Grote understands 
it of points on Epipolae still in pos- 
session of the Athenians; but hardly 
rightly. If any part of Epipolae was 


still occupied by the Athenians, it is 
strange that no mention was made of 
it at the time of the night attack, c. 
42. § 4 Τῇ. --- πρὸς αὐταῖς ταῖς ναυσίν: 
“as near as possible to their ships.” 
—9. ἀπολαβόντες διατειχίσματι: so 
with Vat. for διατείχισμά τι of the 
rest of the Mss.; for it seems clearly 
meant that they cut off by a cross- 
wall a space between the double wall 
of the smallest extent that would 
suffice for the reception of the bag- 
gage, the sick, and the garrison nec- 
essary for the protection of these. 
διατείχισμα also in ili. 34. 9.—10. 
ἀσθενοῦσιν : the reading of Vat., the 
rest ἀσθενέσι, which, ace. to c. 75. 12, 
is perhaps admissible. But the older 
and better writers, acc. to BI., use 
always the partic. for the sick, and in 
c. 75. 12 ἀσθενέσι means rather the 
weak than simply the sick.—11. ἀπὸ 
τοῦ ἄλλου πεζοῦ: from the rest of the 
infuntry, 1.6. those not required to 
guard the camp.—12. ἁπάσας : the 
reading of Vat. for racas of the other 
Mss., esp. appropriate before καὶ δυνα- 
ταὶ Kal ἀπλοώτεραι, t.e. the whole num- 
ber, whether they were in good con- 
dition or even somewhat unseawortliy. 
— ὅσαι ἦσαν : for the impf. indic. in- 


114 


15 


20 


THUCYDIDES VII. 60. 


, Ἦ, 5 / “Ὁ Ν la 
πάντα τινὰ ἐσβιβάζοντες πληρῶσαι, καὶ διαναυμαχήσαν- 
“ἡ Ν ~ > r / 4 “ἡ \ ’ 
τες, ἢν μὲν νικῶσιν, ἐς Κατάνην κομίζεσθαι, ἣν δὲ μή, 
ἐμπρήσαντες τὰς ναῦς πεζῇ ξυνταξάμενοι ἀποχωρεῖν 7H 
ἂν τάχιστα μέλλωσί τινος χωρίου ἢ βαρβαρικοῦ ἢ Ἕλλη- 
νικοῦ φιλίου ἀντιλήψεσθαι. καὶ οἱ μέν, ὡς ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς 
an 4 Qn 5, at 
ταῦτα, Kal ἐποίησαν : ἔκ TE γὰρ τῶν ἄνω τειχῶν ὑποκατ- 
έβησαν καὶ τὰς ναῦς ἐπλήρωσαν πάσας, ἀναγκάσαντες 
ἐσβαίνειν ὅστις καὶ ὁπωσοῦν ἐδόκει ἡλικίας μετέχων ἐπι- 
τήδειος εἶναι. καὶ ξυνεπληρώθησαν νῆες αἱ πᾶσαι δέκα 
, \ ε / / . 5...) 5 Ν Ν bs 
μάλιστα Kal ἑκατόν, τοξότας τε ἐπ᾽ αὐτὰς πολλοὺς καὶ 
5 Ν “ > ’ Ν »-"» μή ᾽’ 5 
ἀκοντιστὰς τῶν τε ᾽᾿Ακαρνάνων καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ξένων ἐσε- 
΄ Ν ἊΝ e a? > “δ᾿ 5 3 ’ὔ ΄- 
βίβαζον καὶ τἄλλα ὡς οἷόν τ᾽ Hv ἐξ ἀναγκαίου τε καὶ 


stead of opt. in dependent clause, 
see GMT. 701; Κύμη. 595, 8. -- 
δυναταί: really personal, and used 
only here of ships (just as πονεῖν is 
used of them in ec. 38.11; vi. 104. 20). 
- ἀπλοώτεραι : see on 6. 34. 20. — 
13. πάντα τινά : as comprehensive as 
possible. Kr. Spr. 51,16, 11. Cfic. 
70. 21; 84. 10.—15. ἢ ἂν. .. μέλλω- 
ow: by whatever way they were likely 
quickest. —17. ἀντιλήψεσθαι: reach, 
as in 6. 77. 329. ---ὡς ἔδοξεν... καὶ 
ἐποίησαν: of the immediate execu- 
tion of the plan agreed on. See on 
15 92: 17: 

20. καὶ ὁπωσοῦν : found also in i. 
77.9; viii. 91. 21. It is to be con- 
nected with ἐπιτήδειος. --- ἡλικίας μετέ- 
χων: “as being not yet too old,” 1.6. 
for such service. ἡλικία is used not 
in a military, but general sense, which 
the Schol. indicates by νεότητος. Cf. 
ii. 44. 20, ἐν τῷ ἀχρείῳ THs ἡλικίας, and 
vi. 24.11. (St. strikes out the words, 
following Philippi, Jairbb. 1881, p. 
99.) 

21. καί: and so, as ini. 67. 12; vi. 
73. 1.— αἱ πᾶσαι: in all. See onc. 


: Ὥ 
1. 91. - δέκα μάλιστα καὶ ἑκατόν: 


Diod. xiii. 14 gives 115 triremes; 
Plut., as Thuc., 110, adding: ai yap 
ἄλλαι ταρσῶν ἐνδεεῖς ἦσαν. That the 
original number, namely, 154 tri- 
remes first sent out (vi. 43. 3) and 73 
afterwards (vii. 42. 3), ae. 207 al- 
together, had been greatly reduced, 
is a matter of course after the con- 
flicts of the whole year, but the loss 
cannot be accurately estimated. — 22. 
ἐπ᾽ αὐτάς: for which Kr. proposed és 
αὐτάς, is appropriate for those light- 
armed troops whose duty was constant 
watching and fighting with light 
arms on the deck. — 24. ἐξ ἀναγκαίου : 
ady., in such desperate circumstances, 
which made the unusual equipment 
necessary. The ἐκ with the neut. of 
the adj. as in ἐξ ἴσου, i. 120. 4; ἐκ τοῦ 
ἀκινδύνου, lil. 40. 23; ἐκ τοῦ προφανοῦς, 
vi. 73. 7. τε, καί forbids connecting 
ἀναγκαίου with διανοίας. Τῇ so con- 
nected, τοιαύτης would have to be 
taken in a materially different sense 
from ἀναγκαίου. Besides, τοιαύτης δια- 
νοίας cannot attain its full effect except 
by being construed separately. The 


3 


4 


THUCYDIDES VII. 60, 61. 


25 τοιαύτης διανοίας ἐπορίσαντο. 


ὁ δὲ Νικίας, ἐπειδὴ τὰ 5 


πολλὰ ἑτοῖμα HY, ὁρῶν τοὺς στρατιώτας τῷ τε παρὰ τὸ 


> \ \ as \ a > A \ \ 
εἰωθὸς πολυ ταις ναῦσι κρατηθῆναι ἀθυμοῦντας και διὰ 


Ν A 5 la » ε / , 
THY τῶν ἐπιτηδείων σπανιν WS ταχιστα βουλομένους δια- 


΄ὕ΄ , A Ψ / ~ 
κινδυνεύειν, ξυγκαλέσας ἅπαντας παρεκελεύσατό TE TPO- 


80 τον καὶ ἔλεξε τοιάδε: 


61 


“"Avdpes στρατιῶται ᾿Αθηναίων τε καὶ τῶν ἄλλων 


ἕξ 4 c \ 3 Ἂν ε λλ ε iy Ν ν 
υμμαάχων, O μεν αγων O με ων OMOLWS κοινος αἀπασιν 


» , ΄ Ν , ε , 5» “- 
εσται πέρι TE σωτηριας και πατρίδος [ἑκάστοις ουχ no - 


σον ἢἣ τοῖς πολεμίοις] - ἣν yap κρατήσωμεν νῦν ταῖς ναυ- 


4 vy Ν ε Ἂ ᾿ 5 ’ js > ““ 
5 σιν, ἐστι τῳ ΤῊΝ υπαρχουσαν που OLKELAV πόλιν ἐπιδεῖν. 


5 (oY ἈΝ > Ν 29QX / Ψ ε > / 
ἀθυμεῖν δὲ ου XP? οὐδὲ TAC KEW oTEp Ou ATELPOTATOL 2 


A > ’ ἃ A , 5 “ , », 
των ἀνθρώπων, Ol τοις πρώτοις aAywou σφαλέντες E€TELTA 


διὰ παντὸς τὴν ἐλπίδα τοῦ φόβου ὁμοίαν ταῖς Evpdo- 


ραῖς ἔχουσιν. 


ἀλλ᾽ ὅσοι τε ᾿Αθηναίων πάρεστε, πολλῶν 3 


10 nO λέ » »» Ἂς y “ Ξ / 
OY πο εμων εμπειροι OVTES, καὶ οσοι των υμμάχων, 


sense is then, “in so critical a situa- 
tion and in consequence of such a 
(desperate) resolution.” 

26. ὁρῶν τοὺς στρατιώτας: on the 
reading, see App. —27. πολὺ ταῖς 
ναυσὶ κρατηθῆναι: in the battle de- 
scribed in 6. 52, 53. 


SPEECH OF NIcIAS TO THE TROOPS 
BEFORE THE GREAT SEA-FIGHT. 


61. “ Before all alike, Athenians and 
allies, is the decisive struggle. You 
should go into it with courage, because 
you know how changeable is the fortune 
of war, and because, considering your 
numbers, you have a right to hope that it 
will decide for you.” 

1. ἄλλων: see on 6. 4. 12.—2. 
ὁμοίως : to be connected with ἅπασιν. 
Cf. c. 28. 4; i. 93. 8; vi. 24. 8.—3. 
[ἑκάστοις οὐχ ἧσσον ἢ τοῖς πολεμί- 
ots]: Cl. and St. bracket these words 


as a gloss to ὁμοίως ἅπασιν. See App. 
—5. ἔστι Tw... ἐπιδεῖν: “it is pos- 
sible for every one to see again his 
fatherland.” On τῳ in the sense many 
a one, or every one, see Kr. Spr. 51, 16, 
10. With τὴν ὑπάρχουσάν που οἰκείαν 
πόλιν ἐπιδεῖν cf. Vi. 69. 24, τὴν ὑπάρχου- 
σαν σφίσι πατρίδα νικήσαντες πάλιν ἐπι- 
deiv.— ἐπιδεῖν : see again,also ἴῃ ὁ.77. 91: 

6. ἀθυμεῖν δέ: opp. to ὁ μὲν ἀγών: 
“the battle is to be decisive, but there 
is no ground for despondency.” — 8. 
τὴν ἐλπίδα τοῦ φόβου Kré.: the expec- 
tation of their fear, 1.6. the expectation 
which in their fear they entertain 
takes the colour of the misfortunes 
which they have suffered. Schol. 
προσδοκῶσιν ὁμοίως ταῖς γεγενημέναις 
ξυμφοραῖς τὰ μέλλοντα. ἐλπίς in this 
sense occurs also in vi. 87. 18. Cf 
πενίας ἐλπίς, li. 42.15; Lue. in Tyran- 
nic. τι, τίς ἐλπὶς τοῦ φόβου. 


115 


116 


62 


THUCYDIDES VII. 61, 62. 


Ν -“ 
ξυστρατευόμενοι ἀεὶ μνήσθητε τῶν ἐν τοῖς πολέμοις 
Ἁ »-" “Δ aw 
παραλόγων, Kal TO τῆς τύχης Kav pe ἡμῶν ἐλπίσαν- 
τες στῆναι καὶ ὡς ἀναμαχούμενοι ἀξίως τοῦδε τοῦ πλή- 
9 \ “~ ~~ lo 
fous, ὅσον αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν αὐτῶν ἐφορᾶτε, παρασκευάζεσθε. 
«ε«ἃ δὲ > Ν 5 (ὃ Cee, | A ΄“ , , 
A δὲ apwya ἐνείδομεν ἐπὶ TH TOV λιμένος στενό- 
ἈΝ x , »” 4 ΄ » \ 
THTL πρὼς τὸν μέλλοντα ὄχλον τῶν νεῶν ἔσεσθαι Kal 
Ν lal 

πρὸς τὴν ἐκείνων ETL TOV καταστρωμάτων παρασκευήν, 
Φ , > , , Q Pip tr “- > A 
οἷς πρότερον ἐβλαπτόμεθα, πάντα καὶ ἡμῖν νῦν ἐκ τῶν 
παρόντων μετὰ τῶν κυβερνητῶν ἐσκεμμένα ἡτοίμασται. 
‘\ Ν , Ν \ 3 XN 5 7 Ν 
καὶ γὰρ τοξόται πολλοὶ καὶ ἀκοντισταὶ ἐπιβήσονται καὶ 
ὄχλος ᾧ ναυμαχίαν μὲν ποιούμενοι ἐν πελάγει οὐκ ἂν 
» Ψ' ~~ ‘ , x » ~ 5 ͵ὕὔ ΄»“Ἵ ͵ 
ἐχρώμεθα διὰ τὸ βλάπτειν ἂν τὸ τῆς ἐπιστήμης τῇ βαρύ- 
TnTL τῶν νεῶν, ἐν δὲ τῇ ἐνθάδε ἠναγκασμένῃ ἀπὸ τῶν 


11. τῶν ἐν τοῖς πολέμοις παραλό- 
γῶν : see on c. 28. 17.---12. καὶ... 
παρασκευαΐζεσθε: and make yourselves 
ready with the expectation that fortune 
may even yet be with us, and with the 
purpose to retrieve your defeat in a 


manner worthy of this vast number of 


your own army that you see before you. 
On gen. with neut. art. (τὸ τῆς τύχης, 


fortune), see Η. 750c; Kr. Spr. 47, 5, 


10. Cfc. 62.8; iv. 18.9. μεθ᾽ ἡμῶν 
στῆναι aS ἴῃ ὁ. 57. 4. 
longs really to τοῦδε τοῦ πλήθους, but 
is grammatically dependent as part. 
gen. on ὅσον. Kr. Spr. 47, 9, 5. 

62. “On our side every precaution 


ὑμῶν αὐτῶν be- 


has been taken to protect our ships against 
the contrivances devised by the enemy 
before the last battle ; and our crews have 
been strengthened, so as to render our 
attacks on their ships more effective.” 

1. dpwya: used oftener in poetry. 
Cf. also Plat. Prot. 334 b. — ἐνείδομεν : 
see on 6. 36. 6.—émi τῇ... στενό- 


tytt: in the matter of the narrowness of 


the harbour. ἐπί with the dat. as in i. 
70. 10; 11. 17.15; iv. 22. 13.—2. πρὸς 


τὸν μέλλοντα ὄχλον . . . ἔσεσθαι : 
ἔσεσθαι depends on μέλλοντα, and 
éxAos means, not the great number 
(for this was present from the begin- 
ning), but the press of the ships, as in 
i. 49. 8, ὑπό τε πλήθους Kal ὄχλου. --- 3. 
πρὸς τὴν... παρασκευήν : cf. c. 36. ὃ 5- 
ὃ. —4. οἷς πρότερον ἐβλαπτόμεθα : cf. Cc. 
40. § 5. οἷς is neut. and refers to ὄχλος 
as well as παρασκευή. Kr. Spr. 58, 3,5. 
— 5. peta τῶν κυβερνητῶν : belongs 
with ἐσκεμμένα: “after careful con- 
sideration in company with the pilots.” 

6. ἐπιβήσονται: will serve as epi- 
batae. The epibatae were as a rule 
hoplites, or men armed as such (see 
on vi. 43. 9).— Kal ὄχλος : Cl. puts a 
comma before καί and renders, and 
ἐπιβήσεται. will come 
together on board). But rather it 
seems that the whole is added to a 
part, viz. the archers and javelin-men, 
ὄχλος signifying here the whole mul- 
titude of men by whom the ships were 
filled. —8. διὰ to βλάπτειν : the subj. 
is τὸν ὄχλον. --- τὸ τῆς ἐπιστήμης : See 
on c. 61. 12.— 9. ἐν δὲ... πρόσφορος 


so a crowd (sc. 


15 ὑπουργῶσιν. 


THUCYDIDES VII. 62, 63. 


10 νεῶν πεζομαχίᾳ πρόσφορος ἔσται. 


εὕρηται δ᾽ ἡμῖν ὅσα 8 


χρὴ ἀντιναυπηγῆσαι, καὶ πρὸς τὰς τῶν ἐπωτίδων αὐ- 


eX ΄ ® Ν , 5 / A 
Tos’ παχύτητας, ᾧπερ δὴ μάλιστα ἐβλαπτόμεθα, χειρῶν 


A > ’, ἃ , ον ’ὔ 3 ’, 
σιδηρῶν ἐπιβολαΐί, αἱ σχήσουσι τὴν πάλιν ἀνάκρουσιν 


A , , x Ἂς ode oS ΄ ε > , 
τῆς προσπεσούσης νεώς, ἣν TA ἐπὶ τούτοις οἱ ἐπιβάται 


2 A \ nee 9 ΄ σ΄ 
ες TOUTO γὰρ δὴ ἠναγκάσμεθα WOTE πεΐο- 


a an lal Ν τὴ 
μαχεῖν ἀπὸ τῶν νεῶν, καὶ τὸ μήτε αὐτοὺς ἀνακρούεσθαι 


μήτ ἐκείνους ἐᾶν ὠφέλιμον φαίνεται, ἄλλως τε καὶ 


" τῆς γῆς, πλὴν ὅσον ἂν 6 πεζὸς ἡμῶν ἐπέχῃ, πολεμίας 


09 


fi 


5, 
οὐυσης. 


“Ov χρὴ μεμνημένους διαμάχεσθαι ὅσον ἂν δύνησθε, 


ἔσται: understand és from the pre- 
ceding 6. Cf. i. το. 20 ἣν εἰκὸς... 
ποιητὴν ὄντα κοσμῆσαι, ὅμως δὲ patve- 
ται ἐνδεεστέραᾳ. G. 1041; Η. 1005; 
Kiihn. 561,1. With this view πρόσ- 


Φορος, the reading of a single Ms. 


(the rest, πρόσφορα), is necessary. 
Most other editt. read πρόσφορα, sc. 
ἐπιβῆναι αὐτόν (τὸν ὄχλον) For a 
state of affairs similar to that here 
described (ἐν τῇ . . . πεζομαχίᾳ), cf: 1. 
49. ὃ 2, and ii. 89. § 8. 

11. χρὴ ἀντιναυπηγῆσαι : the 
reading of Vat., for the unintelligible 
μὴ ἀντιναυπηγεῖσθαι of the other Mss. 
The aor. inf. is preferable for the 
single case. The fact that Thuc. in 
i. 31.5 and vi. go. 12 used the mid., 
both times after pers. subjs., does not 
exclude the act. form in an impers. 
const. — τῶν ἐπωτίδων : see on Cc. 34. 
22; 36. 8.— αὐτοῖς : in the sense of a 
loose gen. See one. 34.7.—12. παχύ- 
τητας: attracted into the number of 
ἐπωτίδων, as ἐπιβολαί (13) into that of 
xepav.—omep: on the neut. of the 
rel. referring to preceding clause, see 
Kr. Spr. 58, 3, 6.— χειρῶν σιδηρῶν 
ἐπιβολαί: the laying on of grappling- 
irons. ἐπιβολή here and in ec. 65. 5 


signifies the device to be employed in 
battle, not the application of it, as is 
shown by iv. 25. 14, χειρὶ σιδηρᾷ ere 
βληθείσῃ μίαν ναῦν ἀπώλεσαν. --- 13. 
σχήσουσι: See on i. 
73. 22. — πάλιν : back, here pleonasti- 
cally added to ἀνάκρουσις for empha- 
sis. Cf. c. 44. 42.—14. τῆς νεώς : in 
the sense of ἑκάστης νεώς, as also in 
ce. 65.7. Kr. Spr. 50, 2, 4.—14. τὰ 
ἐπὶ τούτοις : what is necessary under 
these circumstances (or next in order), 1.6. 
to board the hostile ships, and fight 
hand to hand. (1. 65.7; vi. 45. 3. 

15. πεζομαχεῖν ἀπὸ τῶν νεῶν : as in 
iv. 14. 20.—16. καὶ τὸ μήτε... ὠφέ- 
λιμον φαίνεται: independent const. 
where we should expect the inf. de- 
pendent on ὥστε. --- 17. ἐᾶν : sc. ἀνακρού- 
εσθαι. ΟΠ 1. 70. 33.—18. ἐπέχῃ : will 
have possession of. Cf. i. 48.7; 50.7. 

68. “So 7 admonish you all to hold 
out bravely in the combat which is be- 
fore us, the hoplites in the consciousness 
of their superiority, the seamen in de- 
pendence on our preparations and on the 


, 
= κωλύσουσι. 


ancient glory of Athens, to sustain which 
is now our duty. Show your adversaries 
that you do not bow before misfortunes.” 

1. ov: the rel. serves as an em- 


117 


118 


10 


THUCYDIDES VII. 63. 


, 5 Ν A 
καὶ μὴ ἐξωθεῖσθαι ἐς αὐτήν, ἀλλὰ ξυμπεσούσης νηὶ 
Ν Ν / 5 “ 5 4 “ἡ Ἧς 5 Ν “ 
νεὼς μὴ πρότερον ἀξιοῦν ἀπολύεσθαι ἢ τοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ 
πολεμίου καταστρώματος ὁπλίτας ἀπαράξητε. καὶ: ταῦτα 

lal - an » σ 
τοῖς ὁπλίταις οὐχ ἧσσον τῶν ναυτῶν παρακελεύομαι, ὅσῳ 
a »” “ Ν » aA ε ΄, 5. oe ce! ¥ 
τῶν ἄνωθεν μᾶλλον τὸ ἔργον τοῦτο: ὑπάρχει δ᾽ ἡμῖν ἔτι 
νῦν γε τὰ πλείω τῷ πεζῷ ἐπικρατεῖν. τοῖς δὲ ναύταις 
~ 45 A rea A \ , Vanes A 
παραινῶ καὶ ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ τῷδε Kal δέομαι μὴ ἐκπεπλῆ- 

“ A 5», 
χθαΐί τι ταῖς ξυμφοραῖς ἄγαν, τήν τε παρασκευὴν ἀπὸ 
τῶν καταστρωμάτων βελτίω νῦν ἔχοντας καὶ τὰς ναῦς 
N , 3 ’, \ AS Ν 5 θ A A ε ΘΑ 3 Ν 
πλείους, ἐκείνην τε τὴν ἡδονὴν ἐνθυμεῖσθαι ὡς ἀξία ἐστὶ 
, ἃ , > “~ 4 εἶ \ 3, 
διασώσασθαι, ot τέως ᾿Αθηναῖοι νομιζόμενοι καὶ μὴ ὄντες 
= 
Lal al Aw “~ Ἀ ων “ 

ἡμῶν τῆς τε φωνῆς τῇ ἐπιστήμῃ καὶ τῶν τρόπων τῇ μι- 
4 20) 4 θ Ν Ν "RAK (ὃ » A “ 5 A 5 “- 
μήσει ἐθαυμάζεσθε κατὰ τὴν a0a, καὶ τῆς ἀρχῆς τῆς 


phatie connective. Cf. i. 9. 19; 42. 
i, etc. — διαμάχεσθαι: to fight to the 
last (utmost). —2. és αὐτήν: sc. τὴν 
γῆν πολεμίαν οὖσαν. --- ὃ. ἀξιοῦν : to be 
resolved. —aamodver8ar: cf. c. 44. 40. 
-- πρότερον 7: With the subjy. with- 
out ἄν, as πρίν in vi. 10.19; μέχρι, i. 
137- 138. GMT. 620, 648, 6538; H. 
921a; Kiihn. 398, note 2c; Kr. Dial. 
54, 17, 9.— 4. dmapatnre: cf. Hat. 
Vill. 90. 10, τοὺς ἐπιβάτας ἀπὸ τῆς κατα- 
δυσάσης νεὺς βάλλοντες ἀπήραξαν. See 
on ec. 6. 15. 

5. τῶν ναυτῶν: 1... ἢ τοῖς ναύταις. 
Η. 643 b; Kiihn. 543, 1 b.—6. τῶν 
ἄνωθεν: 1... τῶν ἐπὶ τῶν καταστρωμά- 
των, τῶν ἐπιβατῶν. ---. τὰ πλείω : 
cognate acc. with ἐπικρατεῖν, as in iv. 
19. 9. 

8. ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ τῷδε: Schol. ἐν τῷ 
παραινεῖν. --- τι: to be connected with 
un: “not to be in any way too much 
dismayed.” —9. ἀπό: as ine. 70. 20, in- 
stead of ἐπί (c. 62.3) because the deck 
is thought of as the point from which 
they are to fight. Kr. Spr. 50, 8, 17. 


—10. βελτίω viv: sc. ἢ ἐν τῇ προτέρᾳ 
ναυμαχία. ---11. ἐκείνην τε τὴν ἡδονήν : 
that proud feeling. The proleptic 
const. as in ii. 67.23; vi. 88.5. From 
here to the end of the chap. the 
exhortation is directed esp. to the 
metoeci, who served principally in 
the fleet. They are more particularly 
designated in 12 by ot τέως ᾿Αθηναῖοι 
νομιζόμενοι κτέ. (Schol. τοὺς μετοίκους 
λέγει). --- ἀξία ἐστὶ διασώσασθαι : 
pers. const. GMT. 762; H. 9448. 
Cf. i. 40. 18; 1. τὸς 1) == ot 
τέως κτὲ. : in the rel. clause the 
speaker passes from the feeling to the 
subjects of it, and the sent. proceeds 
in the second person because τοῖς ναύ- 
ταις (7) = ὑμῖν τοῖς ναύται. --- 13. ἡμῶν : 
Cl. and St. adopt this reading of a few 
Mss., for ὑμῶν, because the direct refer- 
ence to the Athenians throughout the 
whole passage is more natural than 
the vague ὑμῶν. --- τῆς φωνῆς TH ἐπι- 
στήμῃ ... Ἑλλάδα : remarkable tes- 
timony to the recognized superiority 
of Att. over all other Hellenic cul- 


THUCYDIDES VII. 63, 64. 


e , ὩΣ »»» Ἧς Ἂ > “Ὁ » Ν 
15 ἡμετέρας οὐκ ἔλασσον κατὰ τὸ ὠφελεῖσθαι, ἔς TE τὸ 


φοβερὸν τοῖς ὑπηκόοις καὶ τὸ μὴ ἀδικεῖσθαι, [ πολὺ πλεῖον] 


ετείνετε. ὥστε κοινωνοὶ μόνοι ἐλευθέρως ἡμῖν τῆς ἀρχῆς 
μετείχ μ ρως ἡμῖν τῆς ἀρχῆ 


» ΄ x 5. ἘΝ A \ , 
OVTES δικαίως [ἂν] αὐτὴν νυν μὴ καταπροδίδοτε, κατα -.- 


A Ν , ἃ 4 , 
φρονήσαντες δὲ Κορινθίων τε, οὺς πολλάκις νενικήκατε, 


\ A a 2999 59 A 3 \ y x 
20 καὶ Σικελιωτῶν, ὧν οὐδ᾽ ἀντιστῆναι οὐδεὶς ἕως ἤκμαζε 


Ν Ν ε la) 5 , 3 ͵ 5 \ Ν ὃ / 
TO VQUTLKOV μιν ἠξίωσεν, ἀμύνασθε αὐυτους και είξατε, 


4 Ν ‘ > 4 7 A ε ε ’ 5 ’ 
OTL καὺ μετα ἀσθενείας και ξυμφορῶν 7) UPETEPa ET LOT) μη 


Ν / . Ris 
κρείσσων ἐστὶν ἑτέρας εὐτυχούσης ῥώμης. 


A > Ἂν ΄ 
“Tods δὲ ᾿Αθηναίους ὑμῶν πάλιν αὖ καὶ τάδε ὑπο- 


Y y+ lal “ ᾽ὔ » ε ΄ 
μιμνήσκω ὅτι οὔτε ναῦς ἐν τοῖς νεωσοίκοις ἀλλας ὁμοίας 


An a » 
ταῖσδε οὔτε ὁπλιτῶν ἡλικίαν ὑπελίπετε, εἴ τε ξυμβήσε- 


ture, and to its power of propagation. 
—15. κατὰ τὸ ὠφελεῖσθαι κτέ. : the 
sense is, ‘‘and you have become 
sharers in our empire not less than 
we in point of advantage, both in 
inspiring fear in our subjects (7.e. 
securing respect from them), and in 
freedom from injury.” But it is 
hardly possible that both οὐκ ἔλασσον 
(15) and πολὺ πλεῖον (16) can be cor- 
rect. Cl. rejects the former, but St., 
Kr., and Lamb. more prop. consider the 
latter a gloss to οὐκ ἔλασσον. See App. 

17. ἐλευθέρως : in a free manner, i.e. 
without limitation of your freedom. 
Cf. vi. 85.9, πάνυ ἐλευθέρως ξυμμαχοῦν- 
τες. --- 18. δικαίως [av]: Cl. brackets 
both words on the ground that no 
satisfactory explanation has been 
found. Most editt. omit ἄν (with a 
few Mss.). The sense would then be, 
“act justly, and do not betray it.” 
“δικαίως is synonymous with ὡς τὸ 
δίκαιον βούλεται (Arn.). Kiihn. 497, 5. 
See App. — 21. ἡμῖν : to be taken 
with ἀντιστῆναι as well as with ἤκμαζε. 
-- ἠξίωσεν : presumed. Cf. i. 42. 2; 
74. 12. — 22. ἐπιστήμη: freq. used 


of technical knowledge and skill, esp. 
in seamanship. Cf. c. 62. 8; i. 49. 12; 
121. 15.— 23. ἑτέρας εὐτυχούσης ῥώ- 
pys: than confidence on the part of 
others resulting from lucky events. With 
ἑτέρας, for which Bauer proposed ἑτέ- 
pov, cf. σφετέραν in c. 17. 17; map’ 
ἀμφοτέροις τοῖς πράγμασι, V. 26.27, On 
ῥώμη, see App. to vi. 31. 3. 

64. “The Athenians especially I re- 
mind that in this fleet are collected the 
last resources of the state, and that after 
its destruction Syracuse and Sparta will 
divide between them the supremacy over 
Hellas. Put forth, therefore, the greatest 
skill and bravery in this critical struggle.” 

1. τοὺς δὲ ᾿Αθηναίους ὑμῶν: who- 
ever of you are Athenians; the const. 
AS Lvs 126: 14: vie ὅτ. alo: Crs 
changes τε of the Mss. to δέ on ac- 
count of the evident reference to ὁ. 
63. 12, but the change seems quite 
unnecessary. —amdAw av: see on 6. 
46. 2.— καὶ τάδε: the acc. neut. of 
the pron. with ὑπομιμνήσκειν as Vi. 
68. 14, τοὐναντίον ὑπομιμνήσκω ὑμᾶς. 
Substs. stand in the gen. as in 6, 69. 
14. Kiihn. 411, 6.—3. ἡλικίαν: in 


110 


120 


10 


15 


THUCYDIDES VII. 64. 


ὑμῖν, τούς τε ἐνθάδε πολε- 
ud 3 Ἂς 9. 3 5 A P 4 ’, : A \ Ν > A ε 
μίους εὐθὺς ἐπ᾽ ἐκεῖνα πλευσουμένούς καὶ τοὺς ἐκεῖ ὑπο- 


, »” ἢ “ἡ τ A 
Tat TL ἄλλο ἢ TO κρατεῖν 


na ’ὔὕ ὩΣ : A \ 
λοίπους ἡμῶν ἀδυνάτους ἐσομένους τούς TE αὐτοῦ. καὶ 
Ν 3 / > 4 Ν ε Ν “ἡ ε Ν 
τοὺς ἐπελθόντας ἀμύνασθαι. καὶ οἱ μὲν ἂν ὑπὸ Συρα- 
/ 5 \ ; 4 “Ὁ » \ ¥ ν ’ 5 4 
κοσίοις εὐθὺς γίγνοισθε, οἷς αὐτοὶ ἴστε οἵᾳ γνώμῃ ἐπήλ- 
ε ΕΟ ΡΥ eee PIX ΄ Ψ > CNT A 
Bere, οἱ δ᾽ ἐκεῖ ὑπὸ Λακεδαιμονίοις. ὥστε ἐν ἑνὶ τῷδε 
‘ ” a“ » 
ὑπὲρ ἀμφοτέρων ἀγῶνι καθεστῶτες καρτερήσατε, εἴπερ 
y A > , \ 
ποτέ, καὶ ἐνθυμεῖσθε. καθ᾽ ἑκάστους Te καὶ ξύμπαντες, 
ο . A Ν A a Seo a 
ὅτι οἱ ἐν Tals ναυσὶν ὑμῶν νῦν ἐσόμενοι καὶ πεζοὶ" τοῖς 
> / > ἧς ‘\ ~ Ν 6 ε / / \ XN 
Αθηναίοις εἰσὶ καὶ νῆες Kal ἡ ὑπόλοιπος πόλις καὶ TO 
7 » Aras A \ a yest ΟΣ one 
μέγα ὄνομα τῶν ᾿Αθηνῶν, περὶ ὧν, εἴ τίς TL ἕτερος ἑτέρου 
Ψ “ἡ > 7 - 5 ΄ y 3S a > ΕἾ lal 
προφέρει ἢ ἐπιστήμῃ ἢ εὐψυχίᾳ, οὐκ ἂν ἐν ἄλλῳ μᾶλλον 
καιρῷ ἀποδειξάμενος αὐτός τε αὑτῷ ὠφέλιμος γένουτο 
ἐρᾷ μ 5 μος Ὑ 


Ν lal ,ὔ / 39 
και τοις ξύμπασι σωτήριος. 


personal sense, iuventutem, as in 
iii. 67. 11. —4. τι ἄλλο ἢ τὸ κρατεῖν : 
Schol. εὐφημότατα ἠνίξατο τὴν ἧτταν. 
---5. ἐπ᾽ ἐκεῖνα, ἐκεῖ: refer to Athens. 


᾿ Of. vi. 77. 4, τῶν 7 ἐκεῖ Ἑλλήνων. On 


the other hand, τοὺς αὐτοῦ refers to 
the enemies of Athens in Hellas, and 
τοὺς ἐπελθόντας to those who will have 
been added from Sicily.—7. καί: 
See on 6. 60. 21.— ot μέν... 
ot δέ: this division covers the whole 
military strength of Athens, οἱ μὲν the 
army before Syracuse, οἱ δ᾽ ἐκεῖ those 
at home. Hence ἂν ὑπὸ Συρακοσίοις 
εὐθὺς γίγνοισθε points to impending 
captivity, ὑπὸ Λακεδαιμονίοις to the 
fall of Athens itself. — 8. οἷς... ἐπήλ- 
θετε: and you yourselves know with 
what intentions you came against them. 
Cf. vi. 31. § 6, and esp. (the hopes of 
Alcibiades} vi. 15. § 2. 

. 10. ὑπὲρ ἀμφοτέρων : sc. τῶν τ᾽ ad- 
τοῦ καὶ τῶν ἐκεῖ. ἀμφοτέρων NOt ἕκα- 
τέρων, because the two interests are 
identical. ἀμφοτέρων could be, as Kr. 

“ 


and so. 


‘di τίς τι... 


explains, neut., both things, your free- 
dom and the independence of Athens, 
i.e. the idea of the preceding clauses. 
—11. καθ᾽ ἑκάστους : severally. For 
this formula, in the place of the nom., 
see Kr. Spr. 60, 8, 4.— 12. οἱ ἐν ταῖς 
ναυσὶν ὑμῶν νῦν ἐσόμενοι: Nicias 
speaks immediately before the em- 
barkation of the troops: the sick and 
invalids and the garrison of the δια- 
τείχισμα (c. 60. 9), who will remain 
behind, are also present; therefore 
the part. gen. ὑμῶν, as in 1, above. 
See App. —14. περὶ dv: the rel. is 
neut., referring to the four preceding 
substs., and is to be connected with 
ἀποδειξάμενος, With which supply as 
obj. τοῦτο from εἴ τι προφέρει. “ And if 
any one should display whatever supe- 
riority he has over others, either in 
skill or courage, in behalf of these 
things (περὶ ὧν), he could at no other 
time contribute more to his own ad- 
vantage and to the safety of all.” — 
. προφέρει κτέ. : Cf. i. 123. 6. 


THUCYDIDES VII. 65, 66. 


121 


ε Ν ’ lal / 5 μον > 4 
Ο μὲν Νικίας τοσαῦτα παρακελευσάμενος εὐθὺς ἐκέ.- 1 


λευε πληροῦν τὰς ναῦς. τῷ δὲ Γυλίππῳ καὶ τοῖς Συ- 


ρακοσίοις παρὴν μὲν αἰσθάνεσθαι ὁρῶσι καὶ αὐτὴν τὴν 
παρασκευήν, ὅτι ναυμαχήσουσιν οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, προηγγέλθη 
δὲ αὐτοῖς καὶ ἡ ἐπιβολὴ τῶν σιδηρῶν χειρῶν, καὶ πρός 


τε τἀλλὰ ἐξηρτύσαντο ὡς ἕκαστα καὶ πρὸς τοῦτο: τὰς 


γὰρ πρώρας καὶ τῆς νεὼς ἄνω ἐπὶ πολὺ κατεβύρσωσαν, 


Ψ λ 5 2 \ \ ¥ > \ ε \ 
ὅπως ἂν ἀπολισθάνοι Kat μὴ ἔχοι ἀντιλαβὴν ἡ χεὶρ 


ἐπιβαλλομένη. 


Ν 5 or e A , > , 
και €7TEL ω) ετοιμα TAVTOA HY; παρεκελεύ- 


5 7 - ΧΝ Ν / Ν 3, 
10 σαντο ἐκείνοις οἱ τε στρατηγοὶ καὶ Γύλιππος καὶ ἔλεξαν 


τοιάδε" 


Cast δ Χο γον ΄ Ny PERILS a 
Οτι μὲν καλὰ τὰ προειργασμένα καὶ ὑπὲρ καλῶν 


65. Immediately after this speech, 
Nicias gives orders to embark. Gylip- 
pus and the Syracusans meet the Athenian 
improvements with counter-improvements. 

3. παρήν: it was possible, in the 
sense well known from the abs. partic. 
(GivemetOn Wilks Ὑ, 102. 7). The ex- 
planatory ὁρῶσι should not be sepa- 
rated by a comma from αἰσθάνεσθαι. 
--- καὶ αὐτὴν τὴν παρασκευήν : 1.6. all 
arrangements and occurrences which 
were connected with the embarka- 
tion.—4. προηγγέλθη χειρών: 
the (device of) laying on the grappling- 
irons had been reported to them (i.e. by 
spies). For ἐπιβολή, see on ὁ. 62. 12. 

6. ὡς ἕκαστα: = καθ᾽ ἕκαττα, Sin- 
gula deinceps. See oni. 3. 19. 
- καὶ πρὸς τοῦτο: and especially against 
this, 1.6. τὰς τῶν σιδηρῶν χειρῶν ἐπιβο- 
Ads. Kiihn. 521, 2.—7. τῆς νεὼς 
ἄνω ἐπὶ πολύ: the whole forms the 
second obj. = μέγα μέρος τῆ" νεὼς ἄνω, 
“and besides a considerable portion 
of the ship above (/.c. in its upper 
parts).” Kiihn. 351, 8. See on 6. 
1. 18.---κατεβύρσωσαν: Poll. (i. 
130) well explains, πρὸς τὰς ἐπιβολὰς 


αὐτῶν ἀντεσοφίζοντο βύρσας προσηλοῦν- 
τες πρὸς τὰ τειχίσματα τῶν νεῶν, ὕπως 
ὁ σίδηρος ὀλισθαίνῃ πρὺς τὸ ἀντίτυπον 
ἀντιλαβὴν οὐκ ἔχων. --- 8. ὅπως ἂν ἀπο- 
λισθάνοι: the opt. after ὅπως 
though common in Hdt., is rare in 
Att. prose. GMT. 330; H. 882; 
Kiihn. 553, 5.—9. ἐπιβαλλομένη : 
“when thrown upon the hostile ships.” 


“ 
av, 


Cf. iv. 25. 14.—10. οἵ τε στρατηγοὶ 
καὶ Γύλιππος ... ἔλεξαν : the Schol. 
observes πάντες ὑπὸ θάρσους ἐν τούτοις 


παρακελεύονται, and mentions then 
the motives of the leaders of the dif- 
ferent Greek states. But Thue. 


means (as ὁ. 69. 1 proves) only οἱ τῶν 
Συρακοσίων στρατηγοί, 1.6. the native 
generals, as opp. to the Spartan Gy- 
lippus. A like case occurs ii. 86. 26, 
expressed in exactly the same words, 
πορεκελεύσαντο καὶ ἔλεξαν τοιάδε. 


ADDRESS OF GYLIPPUS AND THE 
OrneR COMMANDERS ΤῸ THEIR 
Troops. Chaps. 66-68. 


66. “ The glorious victories which you 
have already won over the mightiest state 
in Hellas are the sure pledge to you of 


122 


10 


THUCYDIDES VII. 66. 


Aa , ε 5 Ν ¥ > Ss , ‘ , 
τῶν μελλόντων ὁ ἀγὼν ἔσται, ὦ Συρακόσιοι καὶ Evppa- 
- Ν a e a 207 2QX Ν᾿ >» 
χοι, οἵ τε πολλοὶ δοκεῖτε ἡμῖν εἰδέναι (οὐδὲ yap ἂν 
7, A ΄ ΄ > , Ν 3, Ν 5. 
αὐτῶν οὕτως προθύμως ἀντελάβεσθε), καὶ εἴ τις μὴ ἐπὶ 
ὅσον δεῖ ἤσθηται, σημανοῦμεν. ᾿Αθηναίους γὰρ ἐς τὴν 
’ὕ 4 ὃ ἐλθό “~ \ > Ν ~ >= dé ᾿ 
χώραν τήνδε ὄντας πρῶτον μὲν ἐπὶ τῆς Σικελίας κα- 
, ¥ \ > . , Ν ~ 
ταδουλώσει, ἔπειτα δὲ εἰ κατορθώσειαν, καὶ τῆς Πελοπον- 
νήσου καὶ τῆς ἄλλης Ἑλλάδος, καὶ ἀρχὴν τὴν ἤδη μεγί. 
στὴν τῶν τε πρὶν Ἑλλήνων καὶ τῶν νῦν κεκτημένους, 
πρῶτοι ἀνθρώπων ὑποστάντες τῷ ναυτικῷ, ᾧπερ πάντα 
κατέσχον, τὰς μὲν νενικήκατε ἤδη ναυμαχίας, τὴν δ᾽ ἐκ 


= 


“ » , a“ ΄ ¥ \ ee Ν 5 “ 
του ELKOTOS νυν νικΚΉ σετε. ἄνδρες yep ἐπειδὰν @ ἀξιοῦσι 


προύχειν κολουθῶσι, τό γ᾽ ὑπόλοιπον αὐτῶν τῆς δόξης 


further successes, and have deeply de- 
pressed the courage and hope of the 
Athenians.” 

1. ὑπὲρ καλῶν τῶν μελλόντων : the 
position of the pred. adj. before the 
art. produces the same effect as 
καλὰ τὰ μέλλοντα, ὑπὲρ ὧν 6 ἀγὼν 
ἔσται. --- 8. οὐδὲ γὰρ av: for otherwise 
you,would not. Cf. α. 51. 4. --- 4. av 
TOV: SC. τῶν προειργασμένων καὶ τῶν 
μελλόντων. See on 6. 55. 1]. --- μὴ 
ἐπὶ ὅσον Set: not sufficiently. 

5. ᾿Αθηναίους : not to be connected 
with ὑποστάντες νενικήκατε and νική- 
cere (Cl.), but with the verbs only. 
—7. ἔπειτα δέ: the reading of Vat., 
for of the other Mss. —8. 
ἀρχὴν τὴν ἤδη μεγίστην : by the posi- 
tion, —subst., art., adj.,— the em- 
phasis is put on the attribute. The 
arrangement is common in Thuc. 
See on i. 1. 6.— καὶ ἀρχὴν - . . κεκτη- 
μένους: we should expect ἤδη with 
But the sense is, “the 
most extensive rule already among 
the ancient and the present Hel- 
lenes.” τῶν πρὶν Ἑλλήνων is part. 


» > 
επειτ 


κεκτημένους. 


gen., though the sup. does not really 
belong to the sphere of the gen. Kr. 
Spr. 47, 28, 10.—10. ὑποστάντες: 
with dat. as ii. 61. 17.— 11. κατέ- 
oxov: potiti sunt. (Cf. ii. 62. 
25; iv. 2. 13. --- -τὰς μὲν νενικήκατε 
ἤδη ναυμαχίας : cf. ii. ὃς. 14, περὶ τῆς 
ναυμαχίας ἣν ἐνίκησαν. The double 
ace. (since ᾿Αθηναίους belongs also 
to νενικήκατε) Similar to i. 32. 18, τὴν 

. ναυμαχίαν... ἀπεωσάμεθα Κοριν- 
θίους. G. 1076; H. 1259. --- ἐκ τοῦ εἰκό- 
τος: also inc. 68. 14, ἃ strengthened 
εἰκότως, in all probability. Cf. ἐξ 
ἀναγκαίου, 6. 60.24; ἐκ τοῦ φανεροῦ, iv. 
79. 10; ἐκ τοῦ ἀσφαλοῦς, i. 39. 2; ἐκ 
τοῦ ἀφανοῦς, i. 51. 4. 

12. ἄνδρες: in the sense of the 
impers. pron.—@ ἀξιοῦσι προύχειν : 
“wherein they claim to be the first.” 
—13. xodov8acr: is, it seems, more 
Att. than κολουσθῶσι. Schol. ἐλαττω- 
θῶσι.---τὸό y ὑπόλοιπον αὐτῶν τῆς 
δόξης : “1Π6 rest of their good opin- 
ion of themselves.” By its close 
connexion with the preceding ᾧ a%t- 
ova. προύχειν, δόξα αὐτῶν gets the 


co 


THUCYDIDES VII. 66, 67. 


3 », = Mt ς a > “ἡ > > . 7 Ν 
ἀσθενέστερον αὐτὸ ἑαυτοῦ ἐστιν ἢ εἰ μηδ᾽ φήθησαν τὸ 


15 πρῶτον, καὶ τῷ Tap ἐλπίδα τοῦ αὐχήματος σφαλλόμενοι 


καὶ παρὰ ἰσχὺν τῆς δυνάμεως ἐνδιδόασιν- ὃ νῦν ᾿Αθη- 


’,ὕ wheat , 
VQLOVUS ELKOS πεπονθέναι. 


ςς ΕΗ las δὲ Ve e , /, & \ 5 
μὼν O€ TO TE υπαρχον ΤΡρΟΤΕρον, WTEp και QVE- 


¥ Ν» 5 ΄ ~ 
πιστήμονες ETL ὄντες ἀπετολμήσαμεν, βεβαιότερον νῦν, 


καὶ τῆς δοκήσεως προσγεγενημένης αὐτῷ, τὸ κρατίστους 


> 5» A 4 , , 
εἶναι εἰ TOUS κρατίστους ἐνικήσαμεν, διπλασία ἑκάστου 


meaning which the Schol. expresses 
by φρόνημα. self-confidence. — 14. ἀσθε- 
νέστερον αὐτὸ ἑαυτοῦ ἐστιν ἢ εἰ--: 
“has sunk lower (is weaker) than 
if,” etc. The comp. with αὐτὸ ἑαυτοῦ 
measuring the difference between 
different conditions of the subj. it- 
self. H. 644; Kiihn. 548, 6. Both 
the refi. gen. and # here as in 
Hat. ii. 25. 23, αὐτὸς ἑωυτοῦ ῥέει πολλῷ 
ὑποδεέστερος ἢ τοῦ θέρεος ; Vili. 86. 8. — 
ὠήθησαν : sc. προύχειν. --- τὸ πρῶτον: 
JSrom the beginning, and so strengthen- 
ing the negation, as τὴν ἀρχήν in iv. 
98. 4; vi. 56. 5.—15. καὶ to παρ᾽ 
ἐλπίδα... ἐνδιδόασιν : Cl. thinks that 
the evident parallelism of the sent. 
requires that τοῦ αὐχήματος should 
depend on παρ᾽ ἐλπίδα, as τῆς δυνάμεως 
depends on παρὰ ἰσχύν; the former in 
the sense ‘at variance with ” (1.6. con- 
trary to the expectation of) “their 
proud self-confidence”; the latter, 
“contrary to the strength of their real 
power,” 1.6. more than was necessary 
in proportion to the real measure of 
their strength. But it seems better, 
with Kr., St., and others, to take τῷ 
map ἐλπίδα =insperato, and const. 
τοῦ avxnuatos with σφαλλόμενοι, ““ de- 
ceived in their self-confidence.” Cf. iv. 
62. 12, τῷ παρ᾽ ἐλπίδα μὴ χαλεπῶς 
σφαλλέσθω. With παρὰ ἰσχὺν τῆς 
δυνάμεως, cf. Soph. Phil, 594, ἰσχύος 


κράτος; Paul. ad Eph. τ. 19, τὸ κράτος 
τῆς ἰσχύος. ---16. ἐνδιδόασιν: give 
in, lose courage. Cf. viil. 1. 23. 

67. “We, on the contrary, have more 
than ever cause to hope for the best; for 
the measures which they have taken 
against us will themselves be ruinous to 
Besides, not confidence but de- 
spair drives them to battle.” 

1. τὸ ὑπάρχον πρότερον κτέ.: τὸ 
ὑπάρχον is not to be understood, with 
Kr., of material power, as διπλασία 
ἑκάστου ἣ ἐλπίς proves, but only of 
moral strength; here, ‘‘ courage,” 
‘« self-confidence.” - ‘‘ The feeling 
which before animated us, in which 
we, when we were still inexperienced, 
dared to risk all, rests now on a 
firm basis; and since the conviction 
of superiority has been added, the 
hope of every one is doubled.” — ave- 
πιστήμονες : AS ἐπιστήμη (C. 62.8; 64. 
15), referring esp. to skill in seaman- 


them. 


ship. — 2. ἀπετολμήσαμεν: found 
only here. Cf. ἀποπειρᾶσαι, c. 36. 2; 
ἀποκινδυνεύειν, C. 81. 26.—3. αὐτῷ: 
sc. τῷ πρότερον ὑπάρχοντι. --- τὸ Kpa- 


τίστους εἶναι: Cl. explains τό with 
the inf. as introducing the explana- 
tion of τῆς δοκήσεως. Most editt. omit 
τό. See App.—4. εἰ... ἐνικήσαμεν: 
the real case in cond. form, as in i. 33. 
SEa7OmSs (OO: Ase. O56 45 παρ ΖΝ 
The repetition of κρατίστους (hence 


123 


124 


δ 


10 


15 


20 


THUCYDIDES VII. 67. 


ε 5 ’ Ἄς δὲ ἧς Ἂν Ν 5 “4 e ,’ 
ἢ ἐλπίς - τὰ O€ πολλὰ πρὸς τὰς ἐπιχειρήσεις ἡ μεγίστη 
ἐλπὶς μεγίστην καὶ τὴν προθυμίαν παρέχεται. 
τῆς ἀντιμιμήσεως αὐτῶν τῆς παρασκενῆς ἡμῶν τῷ μὲν 
ἡμετέρῳ τρόπῳ ξυνήθη τέ ἐστι καὶ οὐκ ἀνάρμοστοι πρὸς 
ν 5 A > , ε > > Ν \ ἣς ε A 
ἕκαστον αὐτῶν ecouefa: οἱ δ᾽, ἐπειδὰν πολλοὶ μὲν ὁπλι- 
ται ἐπὶ τῶν καταστρωμάτων παρὰ τὸ καθεστηκὸς ὦσι, 
\ Ν Ν 5 ’ = ε > δὼ > 
πολλοὶ δὲ Kal ἀκοντισταί, χερσαῖοι, ws εἰπεῖν, ᾿Ακαρ- 
“ , Ν Ξ SN “ 39 / ἃ 50» ν 
vaves τε καὶ ἀλλοι, ἐπὶ ναῦς ἀναβάντες, οἵ οὐδ᾽ ὅπως 
᾽,ὕ Ν Ν ’ὔ, » Lal ε Ps » » 
καθεζομένους χρὴ τὸ βέλος ἀφεῖναι εὑρήσουσι, πῶς οὐ 
la Ἂς “ Ν lal 
σφαλοῦσί TE τὰς ναῦς καὶ ἐν σφίσιν αὐτοῖς πάντες οὐκ 


> A ε “A , ΄ ΄ > XN \ 
εν τῳ εαύυτων), τρόπῳ κινουμέενοι ταράξονται ; επει και 


τῷ πλήθει τῶν νεῶν οὐκ ὠφελήσονται, εἴ τις καὶ τόδε 


ε A ν -} Ὁ» 7 , > 3 ’ Ν 
ὑμῶν, ὅτι οὐκ ἴσαις ναυμαχήσει, πεφόβηται > ἐν ὀλίγῳ γὰρ 
\ > , \ 9 \ a a ΄ »¥ 
πολλαὶ ἀργότεραι μὲν ἐς TO δρᾶν τι ὧν βούλονται ἔσον- 
en XT Ν Va 3 95 8 ε “Ὁ ᾽ν 
ται, ῥᾷσται δὲ ἐς τὸ βλάπτεσθαι ἀφ᾽ ὧν ἡμῖν παρεσκεύα- 


σται. 


the omission of the comma before εἰ) 
gives to the explanatory clause some- 
thing of an axiomatic character. — 5. 
τὰ πολλά: for the most part, generally. 
Cf. i. 13. 3; iv. 80. 10. 


6. τὰ τῆς ἀντιμιμήσεως. . . ἡμῶν: 
“everything in our arrangements 


which they on their side (ἂντι-) seek 
to imitate.” — 8. οὐκ ἀνάρμοστοι: 
“not unprepared.” This adj. in 
pers. const. is not found elsewhere. — 
10. παρὰ τὸ καθεστηκός : contrary to 
the usual manner. Cf. i. 98. 9.—11. 
χερσαῖοι: “living on terra firma,” 
used esp. of animals, and hence soft- 
ened by ὡς εἰπεῖν. It is to be con- 
nected with ἐπὶ ναῦς ἀναβάντες, and 
᾿Ακαρνᾶνές τε καὶ ἄλλοι is added as 
furnishing significant examples. —12. 
ὅπως - - χρη: cf. c. 44. 15; iii. τὰ 18; 
and see on i. 91. 4.—13. καθεζομέ- 
vous: sitting; for they will not be able 


τὸ δ᾽ ἀληθέστατον γνῶτε, ἐξ ὧν ἡμεῖς οἰόμεθα 


to stand on board the ships. —14. πῶς 
ov... τὰς ναῦς: how will they not im- 
peril their ships ? —év σφίσιν αὐτοῖς... 
ταράξονται: see on ¢c. 23. 16. —15. 
ἐν TO... τρόπῳ: cf. 1. 130. 5, ἐν τῷ 
καθεστηκότι τρόπῳ. 

16. τῷ πλήθει: “by the greater 


- number.” — 17. ἐν ὀλίγῳ : in a narrow 


space. Cf.c. 70.22; il. 84.14; 86. 20; 
iv. 55. 17; 96. 13. --- 18. ἀργότεραι és 
τὸ δρᾶν: “slower in accomplishing.” 
Cf. vi. 12. 10, νεώτερος és τὸ ἄρχειν. 
—19. és τὸ βλάπτεσθαι : unusual 
for the simple inf. after ῥᾷσται. It is 
caused by the parallelism with the 
preceding és τὸ δρᾶν. For the usual 
const., see on 6. 14. 5.—aq’ ὧν ἡμῖν 
παρεσκεύασται: by the arrangements 
which have been made by us ; unusual as- 
similation of the nom. of the rel. clause 
(ἀπὸ τούτων ad). G. 1053; H. 996a; 
Ktihn. 555,note4. For ἀπό, cf. c. 29.6. 


τά TE2 


3 


THUCYDIDES VII. 67, 68. 


σαφῶς πεπύσθαι: ὑπερβαλλόντων yap αὐτοῖς τῶν κακῶν 


\ / ε Ν “~ 4, > 7 > > ra 
καὶ βιαζόμενοι ὑπὸ τῆς παρούσης ἀπορίας ἐς ἀπόνοιαν 


καθεστήκασιν οὐ παρασκευῆς πίστει μᾶλλον ἢ τύχης ἀπο- 


an 9 ν ὃ ,ὕ Ss 5 “ἡ , 5 
κινδυνεῦσαι οὕτως OTWS υνανται, ιν 7) βιασάμενοι €K- 


“ἡ Ν nA Ἂς la 
25 πλεύσωσιν ἢ KATA γὴν μετὰ τοῦτο THY ἀποχώρησιν ποι- 


ὥνται, ὡς τῶν γε παρόντων οὐκ ἂν πράξαντες χεῖρον. 


cc Ν > 3 ΄ὔ , \ , > A 
II pos OU) ἀταξίαν TE TOLQUTYV και τυχὴν ἀνδρῶν 


ε x A , > “ ΄ 
EQUTYV παραδεδωκυῖαν πολεμιωτάτων ΟΡΎ) προσμείξω- 


Ψ Ἀ , ee 
μέν, καὶ νομίσωμεν ἅμα μὲν νομιμώτατον εἶναι πρὸς 


‘ ἃ “Ὁ ε 53 Ν 4 lal 
τοὺς ἐναντίους, οὗ ἂν WS ETL τιμωρίᾳ τοῦ προσπεσόντος 


ἴω “ , Sw ο 
δικαιώσωσιν ἀποπλῆσαι τῆς γνώμης τὸ θυμούμενον, ἅμα 


21. ὑπερβαλλόντων: abundare, 
superare. (ἢ vi. 23.3. For the co- 
ordination of the gen. abs. with the 
circumstantial nom., both causal, see 
Kr. Spr. 56, 14, 2; Kiihn. 492, 3. — 23. 
ἀποκινδυνεῦσαι: this is Duker’s con- 
jecture for ἀποκινδυνεύσει (dat.) of the 
Mss. and most editt. In this way the 
idea és ἀπόνοιαν καθεστήκασι is carried 
out naturally, and οὕτως ὅπως δύνανται 
is brought into the necessary connex- 
ion with a verb. The Schol. says: 
οὐ τῇ παρασκευῇ δηλονότι πιστεύοντες, 
ἀλλὰ διακινδυνεῦσαι σπεύδοντες ἐπὶ τῇ 
τύχῃ τὸ μέλλον ποιοῦνται, Which sup- 
ports the conjecture. “They are come 
into the desperate strait of risking a 
battle in such manner as they can, 
trusting more to fortune than to their 
own strength.” For government of ἀπο- 
κινδυνεῦσαι, see Kr. Spr. δῦ, 3, 16.— 
26. ὡς... οὐκ ἂν πράξαντες χεῖρον : 
the aor. (as in vi. 20. 8, προσδεξαμέ- 
vas) in the uncertainty of the Mss. is 
to be preferred to the fut. part. πράξον- 
Tes. τῶν παρόντων χεῖρον short for 
χεῖρον ἢ ἐν τῷ παρόντι πράσσουσι. Kr. 
Spr. 47, 27, 2. Cf. vi. 89. 19, τῆς 
ὑπαρχούσης ἀκολασίας ... μετριώτεροι. 
For the causal partic. with ἄν repre- 


senting aor. opt., see GMT. 215; H. 
987 a. 

68. “ We, however, are without doubt 
justified, while warding off a most un- 
just attack, in taking full revenge on 
our bitterest foes; and by this means we 
shall at the same time secure freedom 
for all Sicily.” 

1. πρὸς οὖν ἀταξίαν... προσμείξω- 
μεν : the acc. with πρός for the simple 
dat. is unusual, but after the analogy 
of μάχεσθαι πρός τινα. --- τύχην ἀνδρῶν 
ἑαυτὴν παραδεδωκυῖαν : the idea of a 
fate overruling the individual human 
being, as well as whole states, is not 
found elsewhere in Thuc., but often 
in Dem.; ¢.g. 11. 22, τὴν τῆς ἡμετέρας 
πόλεως τύχην ἂν ἑλοίμην ἢ τὴν ἐκείνου. 
—2. ὀργῇ : with fury, as in ν. 70. 2. 
—3. νομιμώτατον ...ot av: against 
enemies it is quite lawful (1.6. they act 
quite lawfully) who,etc. On the free con- 
nexion of the pl. of the pers. rel. pron. 


* with the neut. adj., see Kr. Spr. 51, 13, 


11; Kithn. 563,3d. Cf ii. 44. 4; vi. 14. 
7.—4. ὡς ἐπὶ τιμωρίᾳ τοῦ προσπεσόν- 
τος: on the ground of punishing the ag- 
gressor. Of. i. 126. 14.—5. ἀποπλη- 
σαι τῆς γνώμης TO θυμούμενον : fo satiate 
their heart’s animosity. So in iii. 82. 


125 


126 THUCYDIDES VII. 68. 


Wwe Ν J 4 > / ε Ὁ Ν Ν ’, 
δὲ ἐχθροὺς ἀμύνασθαι ἐκγενησόμενον ἡμῖν [καὶ] τὸ λεγό- 2 
μενόν που ἥδιστον εἶναι. ὡς δὲ ἐχθροὶ καὶ ἔχθιστοι, 

, ¥ Pose SieN \ ε ΄ > ΄ 
πάντες ἴστε, οἵ γ᾽ ἐπὶ τὴν ἡμετέραν ἦλθον δουλωσόμενοι, 
ἐν ᾧ, εἰ κατώρθωσαν, ἀνδράσι μὲν ἂν τάλγιστα προσέ- 

Ἀ \ Ν Ν Ν > 4 , A 
10 θεσαν, παισὶ δὲ Kal γυναιξὶ τὰ ἀπρεπέστατα, πόλει δὲ 
τῇ πάσῃ τὴν αἰσχίστην ἐπίκλησιν. ἀνθ᾽ ὧν μὴ μαλακι- 8 
A ΄ 2 \ Ν 3 , 3 [αὶ 3 Ν 
σθῆναί τινα πρέπει, μηδὲ τὸ ἀκινδύνως ἀπελθεῖν αὐτοὺς 
κέρδος νομίσαι. τοῦτο μὲν γὰρ καὶ ἐὰν κρατήσωσιν, 
ὁμοίως δράσουσι" τὸ δὲ πραξάντων ἡμῶν ἐκ τοῦ εἰκότος 
ἃ ’ , “A Ἂν ΄“ ’ / 
ἃ βουλόμεθα τούσδε τε κολασθῆναι καὶ τῇ πάσῃ Σικελίᾳ 
’ Ν Ν 5 ’ : ΄’ lal 
καρπουμένῃ Kal πρὶν ἐλευθερίαν βεβαιοτέραν παραδοῦναι, 
καλὸς ὁ ἀγών. καὶ κινδύνων οὗτοι σπανιώτατοι, οἵ ἂν 
ἐλάχιστα ἐκ τοῦ σφαλῆναι βλάπτοντες πλεῖστα διὰ τὸ 


> lal 5» wn 33 
εὐτυχῆσαι ὠφελῶσιν. 


64, ἐκπιμπλάναι. τὸ θυμούμενον (also 
Eur. Hec. 299) as τὸ δεδιός, i. 36. 
3; τὸ ὀργιζόμενον, 11. 59.12; τὸ ἐπιθυ- 
μοῦν, Vi. 24. 4.—6. ἐκγενησόμενον : 
(Vat.) will fall to our lot, become ours ; 
more appropriate than ἐγγενησόμενον 
(cf. Ar. Eq. 851), will be possible. Cf. 
Hat. i. 78.7; vil. 4.5. The partic. ἐκγενη- 
céuevov depends on νομίσωμεν (with 
force of εἰδῶμεν). Kiihn. 484,8; Kr. 
Dial. δῦ, 4, 4.-- τὸ λεγόμενόν που 
ἥδιστον εἶναι: evidently appos. to 
ἐχθροὺς ἀμύνασθαι, “that which is 
proverbially the sweetest thing”; and 
hence καί, which is omitted by one 


Ms. and Valla, is incorrect. Kr. Spr. 
δῖ. 0 19... 1 : 
7. ἐχθροὶ καὶ ἔχθιστοι: enemies, 


and indeed the worst of all enemies. 
See on 6. 48. 24.— 9. ἐν &: where- 
by, referring in a general sense to 
the idea of the preceding clause, 
as Amietys i TO; 
σασθαι ἡμᾶς. --- τἄλγιστα προσέθεσαν : 
as in iii. 42. 25, τιμήν; iv. 20. 12, χά- 


Schol. ἐν τῷ δουλώ- 


ριν. --- 11. τὴν αἰσχίστην ἐπίκλησιν : 
Schol. τὴν δουλείαν (in the sense of 
political dependence). 

12. ἀκινδύνως : 1.6. for the Syracu- 
sans and all Sicily.—14. ἡμῶν: 
adopted by Cl. from Vat., on the 
ground that it is almost indispensable 
after the foregoing, which treated of 
the Athenians. But, as St. says, 
ἡμῶν is easily understood from βουλό- 
μεθα. Kr. is certainly wrong in pro- 
posing αὐτῶν. For the const. πράττειν 
τι, see Kr. Spr. 46, 5, 11. ---Οἰκ τοῦ 
εἰκότος : as is probable. —15. κολα- 
σθῆναι, παραδοῦναι: the sent. is con- 
structed as if καλὸς ἀγών were to fol- 
low. With the latter inf. supply ἡμᾶς. 
The subj. is changed as in vi. 68. 
12.—16. ἐλευθερίαν : belongs to καρ- 
πουμένῃ as well as to παραδοῦναι. 
Kiihn. 597, 2f.—18. ἐκ τοῦ σφαλή- 
vat: in consequence of failure. For 
gen. of inf. with prep. thus used adv., 
see Kiihn. 478, 4 ο. --- πλεῖστα: cog- 
nate ace. See one. 24. 12. 


Ὶ 


‘THUCYDIDES VII. 69. 


Kat οἱ μὲν τῶν Συρακοσίων στρατηγοὶ Kat Τύλιπ- 1 
μ 


» Ν Ἀ lal , 
πος τοιαῦτα καὶ αὐτοὶ τοῖς σφετέροις στρατιώταις παρα- 


΄, 3 ΄ Ν A > 4 > δὴ \ 
κελευσάμενοι ἀντεπλήρουν τὰς ναῦς εὐθύς, ἐπειδὴ Kal 


τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους ἠσθάνοντο. 


c Ν ’ὔὕ ε ᾷς ἴω ve 
ὁ δὲ Νικίας ὑπὸ τῶν Tapov- 


3 ΄ Sone oa Ξ ε ΄ ΨΥ: 
_5 τῶν ἐκπεπληγμένος και OP@V οιος O κίνδυνος και ὡς 


ἐ \ a) 5 δὴ \ ν » 3», λλ > ’, θ Ν 
γγυς 7) > E€7TEL 7) και οσον OUK εμε OV αναγεσ αι, και 


9 A > “ , 
νομίσας, ὅπερ πάσχουσιν ἐν τοῖς μεγάλοις ἄγωσι, TAVTA 


+” Whee ἢ ΄ 5 a 5 \ ΄ 4, το σὲ » 
TE εργῳ ετι σφίσιν ἐνδεᾷ ειναι και λόγῳ αυτοις OUTW 


e ‘\ 5 “A ον Lal , Y τ 
LKaAVa εἰρῆσθαι, αὖθις Των τριηραρχῶν €Va& EKAOTOV 


> , ’ὔ 5 , Ν τι Ν 3 ‘\ 
10 ἀνεκάλει, πατρόθεν τε ἐπονομάζων καὶ αὐτοὺς ὀνομαστὶ 


καὶ φυλήν, ἀξιῶν τό τε καθ᾽ ἑαυτόν, ᾧ ὑπῆρχε λαμ- 


69. After this speech, the Syracusan 
leaders also embark their troops. Nici- 
as, however, overwhelmed by the thought 
of the impending crisis, turns once more 
with prayers and exhortations to the 
individual trierarchs. After this he 
arranges the troops with whom he re- 
mains on land in as long a line as: pos- 
sible along the shore; and Demosthenes, 
Menander, and Euthydemus, who. have 
charge of the fleet, sail immediately with 
their ships against the closed entrance of 
the harbour. 

3. καὶ τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους : sc. πληροῦν- 
τας τὰς αὑτῶν ναῦς. Kr. Spr. 56, 16, 1. 
Cf. i. 78. 10; ii. 86. 14.—4. ὑπὸ τῶν 
παρόντων: found only here. It is 
equiv. to the usual ἐκ τῶν παρόντων, 
ἐπὶ τοῖς παροῦσι, πρὸς Ta παρόντα, amd 
τῶν παρόντων. See one. 56. 6. 

5. ὡς ἐγγὺς ἤδη: the reading of 
Vat.; the ἦν after ἤδη which the other 


_Mss. have weakens the force of the 


expression. —6. ὅσον ov: tantum 
non. Kr. Spr. 67, 14,5. Cfi. 36.8; 
ii. 94.6; iv. 69. 15; v.59. 22; 64.4; vi. 
45.8; viii. 26.3.—'7. ὅπερ πάσχουσιν : 
86, of ἄνθρωποι νομίζοντες. --- πάντα... 
εἰρῆσθαι: the number of σφίσιν and 
αὐτοῖς shows that both refer to the 


subj. of πάσχουσιν. After σφίσιν has 
made clear the reference to the subj. 
of πάσχουσιν, there is no need of the 
refl. in the second case. The con- 
trasted ἔργῳ and λόγῳ make it clear 
that both dats. refer to the same subj. 
But Pp. and Bm. explain αὐτοῖς = τοῖς 
στρατιώταις τοῦ Νικίου; St., following 
L. Dindorf, strikes out αὐτοῖς, which 
however seems necessary with λόγῳ 
εἰρῆσθαι. οὔπω ἱκανά is opp. to πάντα, 
hence the position of te. — 9. ἕνα ἕκα- 
στον: cf. c. 75. 15; vi. 41. 6.—10. 
dvexader: called by name, as in ce. 70. 
49. See on i. 3. 16. -- πατρόθεν τε 
ἐπονομάζων: the Schol. refers to 
Hom. K. 68, πατρόθεν ἐκ γενεῆς ὀνομά- 
(wy ἄνδρα ἕκαστον, πάντας" κυ δαίνων. 
- αὐτούς : 1.6. τοῖς οἰκείοις αὐτῶν ὀνό- 
μασιν, as opp. to φυλήν. both for 
the sake-of greater honour. St. 
claims, however, that ἐπονομάζων is 
nowhere equiv. simply to ὀνομάζων, 
but here and in Plat. Lys. 204a (ἔτι 
πατρόθεν ἐπονομάζεται) Means ἐπὶ τῷ 
ὀνόματι ὀνομάζειν, 1.6. praeter ipso- 
rum nomen nominare. He 
omits, therefore, καὶ αὐτοὺς ὀνομαστί, 
as a marginal explanation indicating 
this force of the verb. —11. ἀξιῶν : 


127 


128 


15 


20 


25 


THUCYDIDES VIL. 69. 


4 if Ν , μι Ν Ν Ν. 5 
πρότητός τι, μὴ προδιδόναι τινὰ. καὶ τὰς πατρικὰς ἀρε- 
τάς, ὧν ἐπιφανεῖς ἦσαν ol πρόγονοι, μὴ ἀφανίζειν, πα- 
τρίδος τε τῆς ἐλευθερωτάτης ὑπομιμνήσκων καὶ τῆς ἐν 

> ΄“ > , “ > Ν ἂν 3 ’ὔ 3, 
αὐτῇ ἀνεπιτάκτου πᾶσιν ἐς τὴν δίαιταν ἐξουσίας, ἄλλα 
nA -- col »¥ 
τε λέγων ὅσα ἐν τῷ τοιούτῳ ἤδη τοῦ καιροῦ ὄντες ἄν- 
θρωποι οὐ πρὸς τὸ δοκεῖν τινι ἀρχαιολογεῖν φυλαξάμε- 
νοι εἴποιεν ἄν, καὶ ὑπὲρ ἁπάντων παραπλήσια ἔς τε γυ- 
ναῖκας καὶ παῖδας καὶ θεοὺς πατρῴους προφερόμενα, 
> 3 B® “~ 4 > ’ > , 4 > 
ἀλλ᾽ ἐπὶ τῇ παρούσῃ ἐκπλήξει ὠφέλιμα νομίζοντες ἐπι- 
βοῶνται. καὶ 6 μὲν οὐχ ἱκανὰ μᾶλλον ἢ ἀναγκαῖα νομί- 
σας παρῃνῆσθαι, ἀποχωρήσας ἦγε τὸν πεζὸν πρὸς τὴν 
΄ Ν , ε ee. a δύ 9 
θάλασσαν καὶ παρέταξεν ws ἐπὶ πλεῖστον ἐδύνατο, ὅπως 
ὅτι μεγίστη τοῖς ἐν ταῖς ναυσὶν ὠφελία ἐς τὸ θαρσεῖν 
γίγνοιτο. ὁ δὲ Δημοσθένης καὶ Μένανδρος καὶ Εὐθύδη.- 
μος (οὗτοι γὰρ ἐπὶ τὰς ναῦς τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων στρατηγοὶ 


admonishing, with the infs. μὴ προδιδό- 
ναι and μὴ ἀφανίζειν, of which the 
former has as subj. τινα (preceded by. 
its limiting rel. clause), the latter 
τούτους (ὧν = τούτους ὧν). --- τὸ καθ᾽ 
ἑαυτόν: gets through ᾧ ὑπῆρχε λαμ- 
πρότητός τι the signification οἵ indi- 
vidual merit and worth. Schol. τὴν 
οἰκείαν ἀρετήν. ---’λαμπρότητός TL: 566 
on 6. 48. 9.—14. τῆς ἐν αὐτῇ ἀνεπι- 
τάκτου ... ἐξουσίας : i.e. ὅτι ἑκάστῳ 
ἐν αὐτῇ ἀνεπιτάκτως διαιτᾶσθαι ἔξεστι. 
See the beautiful expression of this 
thought in the Funeral Oration, ii. 
37. ὃ 2. —15. ἄλλα τε λέγων: τε in- 
troducing the third partic.—16. ἐν 
τῷ τοιούτῳ τοῦ καιροῦ: in such a crisis. 
See on 6. 2. 16.—17. οὐ πρὸς τὸ δο- 
κεῖν τινι ἀρχαιολογεῖν φυλαξάμενοι: 
not minding lest they might seem to any to 
say something old. φυλάσσεσθαι πρός τι 
israre. It occurs in Plut. Mor. 976 ἃ. 
πρός, as to, with regard to, as in ii. 22. 
1; vi. 40. 13, and often.—18. kal 


ὑπὲρ ἁπάντων... mpodepopeva: = ἃ 
καὶ ὑπὲρ ἁπάντων παραπλήσια προφέρε- 
The whole clause is in appos. to 
boa... καί, even, is to be 
taken with ἁπάντων, and παραπλήσια 
is pred. to προφερόμενα. “ Common- 
place appeals such as are brought 
forward even for everything (on all 
occasions).”— 20. ἀλλ᾽... ἐπιβοῶνται: 
the force of ὅσα continues. The 
clause is opp. to οὐ πρὸς τὸ Soxetv... 
φυλαξάμενοι εἴποιεν ἄν. 

21. οὐχ ἱκανὰ μᾶλλον ἢ ἀναγκαῖα: 
Schol. ἀναγκαῖα μᾶλλον ἤπερ ἱκανά. Cf. 
ii. 70. 5, βρῶσις ἀναγκαία; vi. 37. 17, 
ἀναγκαία παρασκευή. --- 22. τὸν melov: 
ῖ.6. the part of the land force that re- 
mained on shore to guard the διατεί- 
χισμα (c. 60. 11). —23. ὅπως. 
γίγνοιτο: 1.6. in order that the sight 
of the greater crowd might increase 
their courage. 

25. Μένανδρος καὶ EvOvSquos: cf 
c. 16. 5.—26. στρατηγοὶ ἐπέβησαν : 


ται. 
¥ v 
. ELTOLEV ἂν. 


THUCYDIDES VII. 69, 70. 


ΕἸ ΄ » 5 Ν A ε at 1 Ad > Ἀ 
ἐπέβησαν) αραντες ΑἼΤΟ του εαύτων στρατοπέδου εὐθὺς 


3, ΄ς Ν lal A ie Nit LAN 
ἔπλεον πρὸς TO ζεῦγμα τοῦ λιμένος καὶ τὸν καταλει- 


φθέντα διέκπλουν, βουλόμενοι βιάσασθαι ἐς τὸ ἔξω. 


70 προεξαναγαγόμενοι δὲ οἱ Συρακόσιοι καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι 


Ν ’ὔ ἣν 5 Ἂς ss. | a 4, 
ναυσι παραπλησίαις TOV ἀριθμὸν και ΤΡρΟΤΕρον, κατα 


Ν »Ἁ ΄ > ~ 5 4 Ν Ν ς 
τε τὸν ἔκπλουν μέρει αὐτῶν ἐφύλασσον καὶ κατὰ τὸν 


Ε , ΄ Ψ , 7 , 
ἄλλον κύκλῳ λιμένα, ὅπως πανταχόθεν ἅμα προσπί.- 


lal 5 4 Ν ε Ἂς ν 5 Lal 
πτοιεν τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις, καὶ ὁ πεζὸς ἅμα αὐτοῖς παρε- 


βοήθει ἧπερ καὶ αἱ νῆες κατίσχοιεν. 


had embarked as strategi (pred.). — 28. 
τὸ ζεῦγμα: the barrier of the harbour, 
described in c. 59. ὃ 2. So the Greeks 
named a bridge of boats of any kind. 
— 29. διέκπλουν : signifies usually the 
manceuvre of breaking through a line 
of hostile ships (c. 36. 22; 70. 26), 
but here the space left for sailing 
through (cf. Plut. Nic. 24, ἀπέκλεισαν 
τὸν διέκπλουν). For it seems neces- 
sary to assume, even though it is not 
mentioned, that the Syracusans in clos- 
ing their harbour must have left an 
opening for their own use. The Schol., 
who seems to have read παραλειφθέντα, 
explains, τούτεστι παρελέλειπτο ὥστε 
μὴ ἐζεῦχθαι. In ec. 70. 3 ἔκπλους re- 
fers to the same point in the ζεῦγμα. 
Hence καταλειφθέντα of Vat. is to be 
preferred to καταληφθέντα, παραληφ- 
θέντα, OY παραλειφθέντα. Cf. Hat. vii. 
36. 12, διέκπλοον ὑπόφαυσιν Kat é- 
λιπον τῶν πεντηκοντέρων καὶ τριηρέων, 
“they left an opening to sail through ” 
(referring to the bridge over the 
Hellespont). — βιάσασθαι : abs. break 
through, as in i. 63.5; different from 
c. 70. 48. 

70. The Syracusan fleet has posses- 
sion not only of the outlet but of all parts 
of the harbour, and the battle soon be- 
comes general. On both sides the great- 


ἦρχον δὲ TOD ναυτι- 


est effort and skill are put forth by the 
leaders as well as by the crews. 

1. mpocEavayayopuevor: this form, 
which Dion. Hal. gives in quoting the 
passage, is here necessary. The aor. 
is required before ἐφύλασσον, and the 
simple ἐξάγεσθαι does not occur in the 
sense of the sailing out of ships, while 
several different compounds of avd- 
γεσθαι have this force: ἐξανάγεσθαι, 
ii. 25. 25; ὑπεξανάγεσθαι, 111. 74. 14; 
ἀντεπανάγεσθαι, iv. 25. 4. The com- 
parison with the isolated étaywyn, 
Hat. iv. 179. 9, which is used not of 
the sailing out, but of rescue from 
danger, is not sufficient. St., how- 
ever, reads προεξαγαγόμενοι = pro- 
vecti, priores vela dantes, and 
compares besides ἐξαγωγή in Hat. iv. 
179. 9, also ἐπεξάγοντα, c. 52.8. On 
the freq. errors in the transcription 
of this and like forms, see the App. 
on i. 29. 18. —2. καὶ πρότερον: cf. c. 
52.5. There were at that time 76.— 
5. παρεβοήθει: Arn.’s reading, follow- 
ing Dion. Hal., for παραβοηθεῖ, παρα- 
βοηθῇ or παραβοηθοῖ of the Mss. “It 
is absurd to say that they stationed 
their ships all round the harbour in 
order that their land forces might aid 
them, when nothing had been said 
about the land forces.” With καὶ ἅμα 


129 


130 


THUCYDIDES VII. 7o. 


lol ma Sy , Ν Ν Ν -Αν is , 
κοῦ τοῖς Συρακοσίοις Σικανὸς μὲν καὶ Αγάθαρχος κέρας 


,ὔὕ nw Ν »»Ἥ 
ἑκάτερος τοῦ παντὸς ἔχων, 
τὸ μέσον. 


Πυθὴν δὲ καὶ οἱ Κορίνθιοι 
3 Ν 3 e¢3 -~ ’ ΦΆ ,ὔ 
ἐπειδὴ δ᾽ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι προσέμισγον τῷ ζεύγ- 


10 ματι, τῇ μὲν πρώτῃ ῥύμῃ ἐπιπλέοντες ἐκράτουν τῶν 


. A \ > A \ An - , Ν 
τεταγμένων νεῶν πρὸς αὐτῴ, καὶ ἐπειρῶντο λύειν τὰς 


΄ Ν ι Le) /, / 4 Lal 
κλήσεις - μετὰ δὲ τοῦτο πανταχόθεν σφίσι τῶν Συρακο- 


/ Ν 4 > , > Ν a 4, 
σίων καὶ ξυμμάχων ἐπιφερομένων. ov πρὸς τῷ ζεύγματι 
» , > ε ΄ > Ν Ν Ν \ , 4 
ἔτι μόνον ἦν ἡ ναυμαχία, ἀλλὰ καὶ κατὰ τὸν λιμένα ἐγί- 


15 γνετο, καὶ ἦν καρτερὰ καὶ οἵα οὐχ ἑτέρα τῶν προτέρων. 


\ \ Ν ε id 4 5 Ν »“» A > 
πολλὴ μεν γαρ EKATEPOLS προθυμία απο τῶν VAUTWV ες 


τὸ ἐπιπλεῖν ὁπότε κελευσθείη ἐγίγνετο, πολλὴ δὲ ἡ ἀν- 


τιτέχνησις τῶν κυβερνητῶν καὶ ἀγωνισμὸς πρὸς ἀλλή- 


9 , na 
hous, ot τε ἐπιβάται ἐθεράπευον, ὅτε προσπέσοι ναῦς 


therefore a second precaution is in- 
troduced independently. There is an 
exact parallel to this passage in ii. go. 
14: (ὁ Φορμίων) ἔπλει παρὰ τὴν γῆν Kal 
6 πεζὺς ἅμα τῶν Μεσσηνίων παρεβοήθει. 
The land troops stood on the shore 
ready to attack the ships of the Athe- 
nians wherever they might be driven 
to land. —7. tots Συρακοσίοις : the 
dat. with ἄρχειν as in i. 93. 11; ii. 2. 
6; vi. 54.27. G. 1165; H. 767; Kr. 
Spr. 47, 20, 2.— Σικανός : cf. c. 50. 1. 
—’Ayddapxos: c. 25. 2.— 8. ΤΠυθήν: 
ce. I. 1; vi. 104. 8.—9. ot ᾿Αθηναῖοι: 
most Mss. and Dion. de Thuc. Iud. p. 
875 read of ἄλλοι ᾿Αθηναῖοι. St. pre- 
fixes, with a few Mss., also καί. But 
there is ground here neither for ἄλλοι 
(as in 6. 61. 1) nor for καί (cf. c. 69. 
§ 4), both of which Vat. omits. 

10. τῶν τεταγμένων νεῶν πρὸς AUTH : 
as to the position of πρὸς αὐτῷ, cf. v. 
112. 6, τῇ μέχρι τοῦδε σῳζούσῃ τύχῃ ἐκ 
τοῦ θείου αὐτήν. Kr. Spr. 50, 10, 2.— 
11. λύειν τὰς κλήσεις: 1.6. to break 
the zeugma, for the passage that had 


been left open (c. 69. 29) would have 
to be enlarged to allow the whole 
fleet to escape. See onc. 69. 29, and 
cf.c. 59. ὃ 2. --- 12, σφίσι: for αὐτοῖς, 
written under the influence of the 
preceding sent. —14. ἦν: so Vat. 
correctly; the rest omit. ἐγίγνετο 
cannot prop. be used of the ναυμαχία 
πρὸς τῷ ζεύγματι, the beginning of 
which had been already mentioned in 
10.— kata τὸν λιμένα ἐγίγνετο: 1.6. 
the sea-fight which had already begun 
now broke out over the whole harbour. 
- 15. οἵα οὐχ ἑτέρα: cf. i. 23.5; viii. 
ΡΝ) Ὁ 

16. πολλή, πολλή : Cf. πολλούς, πολ- 
λούς in i. 49. 2, 3. -- ἀπὸ τῶν ναυτῶν : 
on the part of the sailors, stronger than 
the simple gen. See on i. 37.5. —17. 
κελευσθείη : 1.6. by the κελευσταί (40) 
appointed to this ἀπίν. -- ἡ ἀντιτέ- 
χνησις: the art. is used since this is a 
recognized feature in any sea-fight. 
This word and ἀγωνισμός found only 
here in Att. —19. ot τε ἐπιβάται: τε 
introduces the third member after 


20 


25 


30 


THUCYDIDES VII. 70. 


19 


, A: /, Ν 5 Ν κ᾿ , lol ΕἾ 
νηΐ, μὴ λείπεσθαι τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος τῆς ἄλλης 
τέχνης: πᾶς τέ τις ἐν ᾧ προσετέτακτο αὐτὸς ἕκαστος 
3 ’, lal 7 lal Ν 5 5» A. 
ἠπείγετο πρῶτος φαίνεσθαι. ξυμπεσουσῶν δὲ ἐν ὀλίγῳ 4 

la lal “A \ Ν ea > 5 ’, 3 
πολλῶν νεῶν (πλεῖσται γὰρ δὴ αὗται ἐν ἐλαχίστῳ ἐναυ- 

’ὔ Ν Ν 5 , /, v4 
μάχησαν - βραχὺ yap ἀπέλιπον ξυναμφότεραι διακόσιαι 

Si ε Ν 5 Ν Ν Ν \ > ἃς > rd 
γενέσθαι) ai μὲν ἐμβολαὶ διὰ τὸ μὴ εἶναι τὰς ἀνακρούσεις 

Ν , > ae 3 , ε \ 4 ε me 
καὶ OLEKTAOUS ὀλίγαι ἐγίγνοντο, αἱ δὲ προσβολαΐ, ws τύχοι 
ναῦς νηὶ προσπεσοῦσα 7) διὰ τὸ φεύγειν ἢ ἄλλῃ ἐπιπλέ- 
ουσα, πυκνότεραι ἦσαν. καὶ ὅσον μὲν χρόνον προσφέ. ὃ 
ροιτο ναῦς, οἱ ἀπὸ τῶν καταστρωμάτων τοῖς ἀκοντίοις 

Ν Ξ ‘\ ’ὔὕ 5 ’ὔὕ Sa. > ΜΝ 5 La 
Kat τοξεύμασι Kat λίθοις ἀφθόνως ἐπ᾽ αὐτὴν ἐχρῶντο. 
5 ἈΝ \ ΄ ἘΣ 9 ΄ 5 x ae > 
ἐπειδὴ δὲ προσμείξειαν, οἱ ἐπιβάται ἐς χεῖρας ἰόντες ἐπει- 


ρῶντο ταῖς ἀλλήλων ναυσὶν ἐπιβαίνειν. 


ναυτῶν and κυβερνητῶν. --- ἐθεράπευον : 
curabant.—20. τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ κατα- 
στρώματος : the service on deck. It is 
subj. of λείπεσθαι. For ἀπό, see on 6. 
63. 9.— τῆς ἄλλης τέχνης: 1.6. τῆ; τῶν 
ναυτῶν καὶ κυβερνητῶν. -- 21, πᾶς τέ 
τις: the resumptive τε, as with τὸ 
ξύμπαν, Cc. 49. 18; ἁπλῶς, iii. 82. 34; 
πάντι τρόπῳ, iv. 48. 15. 
see on 6. 60. 15.— év ᾧ : 1.6. ἐν τούτῳ 
ᾧ; ἐν belonging only with the im- 
plied τούτῳ and to be connected with 
πρῶτος φαίνεσθαι. For προστάσσεσθαι 
with the simple dat., cf: ii. 87. 31; vi. 
ἼΕ 51; 42: 8. 

24. βραχὺ ἀπέλιπον : = ὀλίγου ἐδέ. 
σαν. With simple inf. Kiihn. 516, note 
9a. Cf. Hdt. vii. 9. 18, ὀλίγον ἀπο- 
λιπόντι. . . ἀφικέσθαι. ---- διακόσιαι : 
ace. to c. 60. 21 and 2 above, the 
number would be 186. — 25. αἱ ἐμβο- 
λαί: most Mss. have ἐκβολαί, which 
does not suit the context. The éuBo- 
Aai are intentional attacks, προσβολαί 
accidental collisions (as shown by as 
τύχοι... ἐπιπλέουσα) of the ships. — 


For πᾶς τις, 


ξυνετύγχανέ τε 


διὰ τὸ μὴ εἶναι... διέκπλους : 1.6. on 
account οὐ the impossibility of the 
regular manceuvres, ἀνακρούσ εἰς (see on 
c. 36. 28) and διέκπλοι. The διέκπλους 
was the favourite Att. manceuvre of 
breaking through the hostile line, and 
then attacking the separated portions 
in flank or rear. See oni. 49.11. The 
art. is not repeated with διέκπλους, as 
in ὁ. 71.3.—27. ἢ διὰ τὸ φεύγειν ἢ 
ἄλλῃ (νηὶ) ἐπιπλέουσα : co-ordination 
of different consts. Cf. vi. 17. 12, ἢ 
ἐκ τοῦ λέγων πείθειν ἢ στασιάζων. Kr. 
Spr. 59, 2, 3. 

31. οἱ ἐπιβάται : wrongly suspected 
by Pluygers (M/nem. 11, p.96). After 
the slingers and archers had sought 
to ward off the approaching ship, the 
regular ἐπιβάται, the hoplites on 
board, took up the battle ciose at 
hand. Cf. ec. 62. 14. — 32. ἐπιβαί- 
νεὶν : with the dat. only here in Thuc., 
elsewhere with gen. or ἐπί τι. 

tuvervyxave τε πολλαχοῦ: and so it 
happened in many places. ξυντυγχάνει" 
of the coincidence of several circum- 


90 


40 


45 


‘ 


2 THUCYDIDES VII. 70. 


πολλαχοῦ διὰ THY στενοχωρίαν τὰ μὲν ἄλλοις ἐμβεβλη- 
, Ν Ν 5» Ν 5 A , Ν ΄ὕ Ν 
κέναι, τὰ δὲ αὐτοὺς ἐμβεβλῆσθαι, δύο τε περὶ μίαν καὶ 
ἔστιν ἣ καὶ πλείους ναῦς κατ᾽ ἀνάγκην ξυνηρτῆσθαι, καὶ 
τοῖς κυβερνήταις τῶν μὲν φυλακὴν τῶν δ᾽ ἐπιβουλήν, 
Ν > ἃ 4 Ν Ν Ν YA 
μὴ καθ᾽ ἐν ἕκαστον κατὰ πολλὰ δὲ πανταχόθεν, περιε- 
στάναι, καὶ τὸν κτύπον μέγαν ἀπὸ πολλῶν νεῶν Evp- 
πιπτουσῶν ἔκπληξίν τε ἅμα καὶ ἀποστέρησιν τῆς ἀκοῆς 
- ε \ , ΄, \ Ν \ 
ὧν οἱ κελευσται φθέγγοιντο παρέχειν. πολλὴ yap δὴ 
ε -» \ Ν 5 5 e , nw nw 
ἢ παρακέλευσις καὶ βοὴ ad ἑκατέρων τοὺς κελευσταῖς 
κατά τε τὴν τέχνην καὶ πρὸς τὴν αὐτίκα φιλονικίαν 
5 ὧν A \ 3 , ΄, , ‘\ » 
ἐγίγνετο, τοῖς μὲν ᾿Αθηναίοις βιάζεσθαί τε τὸν ἔκπλουν 
ἐπιβοῶντες καὶ περὶ τῆς ἐς τὴν πατρίδα σωτηρίας νῦν, 
εἴ ποτε καὶ αὖθις, προθύμως ἀντιλαβέσθαι, τοῖς δὲ Συρα- 


’, \ ’ὔ Ἂς > Lal 4 5 Ἂς 
κοσίοις καὶ ξυμμάχοις καλὸν εἶναι κωλῦσαΐ τε αὐτοὺς 


stances, as ξυμβαίνειν in c. 75. 7. --- 33. 
τὰ pev,... τὰ δέ: “on the one side, 
on the other side.” — épBeBAnkevat : 
some general subj., like τινα or ἐνίους 
is to be supplied, to which in the 
second clause, before ἐμβεβλῆσθαι, the 
pred. αὐτούς, themselves, is added. — 
34. ἐμβεβλῆσθαι ; from the act. éu- 
βάλλειν τινί, as in c. 34. 20.— 35. kar’ 
ἀνάγκην: of necessity, because they 
could not help it. Cf c. 57. 24.— 
ξυνηρτῆσθαι : Schol. συμπεπλέχθαι. --- 
36. τοῖς κυβερνήταις... φυλακὴν... 
ἐπιβουλὴν... περιεστάναι: τοὺς 
κυβερνήτας ἀναγκάζεσθαι ἅμα φυλάξαι 
τὰς ἐπιφερομένας ναῦς, ἅμα ἐπιβουλεῦσαι 
ἄλλαις xré. The sense is, “so that 
upon the pilots devolved the neces- 
sity of guarding against the one party 
and of attacking the other, not one 
by one, but on all sides at the same 
time.” With φυλακὴν (ἐπιβουλὴν) 
περιεστάναι, cf. ili. 54. 17, περιέστη 
φόβος; vi. 61. 18, περιεστήκει ὑποψία. 
—38. péyay...tvpmurroveay: placed 


after κτύπον (sc. ὄντα) in pred. sense. 
— 39. ἀποστέρησιν παρέχειν : = ἄπο- 
στερεῖν. 

40. πολλή : “much and loud.” — 41. 
ad’ ἑκατέρων: cf. 16, above.—rois κελευ- 
σταῖς : παρὰ τῶν κελευστῶν. --- 
42. κατά τε τὴν τέχνην καὶ πρὸς τὴν 
αὐτίκα φιλονικίαν : “as their calling ‘ 
demanded, and from the rivalry of 
the moment.” --- 49. τοῖς μὲν ᾿Αθη- 
ναίοις : obj. οἵ ἐπιβοῶντες, which is 
understood also with τοῖς δὲ Συρακο- 
σίοις (45).— 44. ἐπιβοῶντες: after 
τοῖς κελευσταῖς, as if οἱ κελευσταὶ παρε- 
κελεύοντο preceded. See on ce. 42. 9.— 
περὶ τῆς... σωτηρίας : Cl. takes with 
ἀντιλοβέσθαι as an emphatic circum- 
locution for the gen., comparing c. 66. 
1: but St. rightly takes ἀντιλαβέσθαι 
abs., as in ii. 8.3; viii. 106.23. τῆς 
és τὴν πατρίδα σωτηρίας is after the 
analogy of the common const., ἐς 
τὴν πατρίδα σῴζεσθαι. --- νῦν, et ποτε 
καὶ αὖθις, προθύμως ἀντιλαβέσθαι : Cl. 
explains: “since the admonitory εἴ 


1.€. 


THUCYDIDES VU. 70, 71. 


ὃ Log Ν Ν 5 ’, ε 4 (ὃ 4 
ιαφυγεῖν και τὴν οἰκέειαν εκαστους TAT Pu QA νικησαντας 


> “~ 
ἐπαυξὴη σαι. 


», 
καὶ οἱ στρατηγοὶ προσέτι ἑκατέρων, εἴ τινά 


που ὁρῷεν μὴ δι’ ἀνάγκην πρύμναν κρουόμενον, ἀνα- 
\ 
50 καλοῦντες ὀνομαστὶ TOV τριήραρχον ἠρώτων, ot μὲν ᾿Αθη- 
ναῖοι εἰ τὴν πολεμιωτάτημ γὴν οἰκειοτέραν ἤδη τῆς οὐ 
du ὀλίγου πόνου κεκτημένης θαλάσσης ἡγούμενοι ὕὑπο- 
χωροῦσιν, οἱ δὲ Συρακόσιοι εἰ οὺς σαφῶς ἴσασι προθυ- 
, > Δ ‘\ ’ὔ’ a 4 
μουμένους [᾿Αθηναίους] παντὶ τρόπῳ διαφυγεῖν, τούτους 


11 αὐτοὶ φεύγοντας φεύγουσιν. 


ποτε, if ever, refers to the past (cf. c. 
64. 10; iv. 55. 12), καὶ αὖθις can be 
connected only with viv, The admo- 
nition to the Athenians is: ‘if ever 
before, now once again they must do 
everything to obtain a safe return 
home.’ Cf. Dem. 1. 6, τῷ πολέμῳ 
προσέχειν, εἴπερ ποτέ, kal νῦν. Quite 
different is the connexion in ii. 48. 14, 
where πότε refers to the fut., ‘if the 
sickness should ever break out 
again.’” The other editt. all punctu- 
ate νῦν, ef ποτε καὶ αὖθις, προθύμως, 1.6. 
now, if ever again (in the fut.), which 
is‘ doubtless better. — 47. ἑκάστους: 
refers to the allies from the different 
Sicilian states, For position, see on 
c. 57. 46. 

49. μὴ δι᾽ ἀνάγκην : unnecessarily. 
See App. — πρύμναν κρουόμενον : here 
“retiring from the battle.” — ἀνακα- 
λούῦντες ὀνομαστί: see on c. 69. 10.— 
51. olkeotépav: more friendly, more 
their own.— τῆς οὐ BV ὀλίγου πόνου 
κεκτημένης θαλάσσης : spoken in the 
full confidence of Athenian superi- 
ority at sea. πόνου, which is added 
from Vat., strengthens this effect ma- 
terially. κεκτημένης is pass., as in ii. 
62. 22. Kr. Spr. 40, s.v.; Kithn. 377, 
4 a.—52. ὑποχωροῦσιν : the correct 
reading from Vat. for ἀποχωροῦσιν of 
the other Mss. It is the prop. word 


ν 9 Ὺ lal Ἂν, 3 
Ὁ τε ἐκ τῆς γῆς πεζὸς ap- 


for retreat before a superior force, 
and corresponds exactly to the πρύ- 
μναν Kpovduevov above. Cf. πρύμναν 
κρουόμενον ὑποχωρεῖν also in i. 54. 16; 
iii. 78. 12.— 54. [᾿Αθηναίους]: Cl. 
(Attica, p. 194, 1862) considers this 
a gloss, contending that it weakens 
the effect of a contrast which is itself 
quite clear. Pluygers (nem. 11, p. 
96) and St. agree. — 55. φεύγοντας 
φεύγουσιν : repeated to heighten the 
contrast. 

71. The infantry on both sides fol- 
low the changing events of the battle with 
most painful interest, their bodily move- 
ments keeping time with the excitement 
of their minds. The Athenians, espe- 
cially, for a long time greet the occur- 
rences before their eyes with loud excla- 
mations of hope or of anxiety ; but when 
victory at last decides for the Syracu- 
sans, and the Athenians, fleeing in wild 
confusion, seek refuge on shore, the land 
troops are seized with despair like that 
of the Lacedaemonians when their peo- 
ple, after the destruction of their ships, 
were hopelessly cut off at Pylus (iv. 14). 

1, ὅ τε ἐκ τῆς γῆς πεζὸς ἀμφοτέρων 
cf. α. 70. 29, οἱ ἀπὸ τῶν καταστρω- 
μάτων. τε introduces significantly a 
new feature of the whole considera- 
tion. At the bottom of the entire 
description as far as 24 lies the idea, 


ες 
κτε.: 


9 


, > , a , , 2 Sag 
φοτέρων ἰσορρόπου τὴς ναυμάχιας καθεστηκυίας, πολὺν 


94 THUCYDIDES VII. 71. 


Tov ἀγῶνα καὶ ξύστασιν τῆς γνώμης εἶχε, φιλονικῶν μὲν 
΄ A » ω 
ὁ αὐτόθεν περὶ τοῦ πλείονος ἤδη καλοῦ, δεδιότες δὲ οἱ 


-͵ , Χ ~A 4 ¥ tA 4, 
5 ἐπελθόντες μὴ τῶν παροντων ετι XELP@ πράξωσι. 


΄ 
παν- 


Ν δὲ 3 » ΄»Ὁ» > θ 4 5 Ν A 9 
των yap On ἀνακειμένων τοις Αθηναίοις ἐς τᾶς ναῦς O 


τε φόβος ἣν ὑπὲρ τοῦ μέλλοντος οὐδενὶ ἐοικώς, καὶ διὰ 


τὸ (ἀνώμαλον τῆς τάξεως) ἀνώμαλον καὶ τὴν ἔποψιν 


τῆς ναυμαχίας ἐκ τῆς γῆς ἠναγκάζοντο ἔχειν. 


δι ὀλί 


\ A , ’ 9 
10 you yap οὔσης τῆς θέας καὶ οὐ πάντων ἅμα ἐς TO αὐτὸ 


wy , Ν 
σκοπούντων, εἰ μέν τινες LOOLEY πῃ τοὺς σφετέρους ἐπι- 


“-“ 5 ’ / xX Ἂν Ν > ’ 
κρατουντας, ἀνεθάρσησάν TE ἂν Και προς ἀνάκλησιν 


that so long as the real struggle is 
undecided, so long continues in the 
minds of the spectators a reflexion 
of this struggle. To ἰσορρόπου τῆς 
ναυμαχίας καθεστηκυίας ANSWers πολὺν 
τὸν ἀγῶνα καὶ ξύστασιν τῆς γνώμης εἶχε. 
ξύστασις, used in Hdt. vi. 117. 6 and 
vii. 167. 5, of the greatest heat of 
battle, expresses here excitement of 
mind (stronger than even ἀγών). It 
occurs also in same sense in Eur. 
Hipp. 985, μένος μὲν ξύστασίς τε σῶν 
φρενῶν δεινή. And Dio C., who in 
his account of the battle of Mylae 
(xlix. 9) had this passage in mind, 
Says, ἀντιπάλου ἐπὶ πολὺ τῆς μάχης 
γενομένης ἰσορρόπῳ καὶ αὐτοὶ συστά- 
cer τῆς γνώμης συνέσχοντο. -- 2. 
πολύν: pred. Kiihn. 465, 11 ο.---4. ὁ 
αὐτόθεν : Schol. 6 Συρακόσιος στρατός. 
This and of ἐπελθόντες (se. οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι 
καὶ of ξύμμαχοι) are the parts in appos. 
to ὅ τε ἐκ τῆς γῆς πεζός. Cf. iv. 6. 
5. Kr. Spr. 56, 9, 1.— περὶ τοῦ πλεί- 
ονος ἤδη καλοῦ: “to make greater 
the glory that was already great.” — 
5. μὴ τῶν παρόντων ἔτι χείρω πρά- 
ξωσι: cf. c. 67. 26. 

6. ἀνακειμένων : takes, as pf. pass. 


to ἀνατίθημι (viii. 82.3), és instead of ἐν. 
Cf. Hat. i. 97. 5, 6 Δηϊόκης és ἑωυτὸν 
πᾶν ἀνακείμενον. The Schol. renders 
the sense correctly, πάσης τῆς ἐλπίδος 
αὐτοῖς ἐν ταῖς ναυσὶ ovons.— 7. οὐδενὶ 
ἐοικώς: SC. οἷος οὐδεὶς ἄλλος = μέγι- 
oTos. — διὰ τὸ (ἀνώμαλον τῆς τάξεως) 
ἀνώμαλον καὶ τὴν ἔποψιν τῆς ναυμα- 
χίας ἐκ τῆς γῆς ἠναγκαΐοντο ἔχειν : 50 
Cl. reads, not claiming certainty for 
his addition, but seeking only to give, 
instead of the incomprehensible origi- 
nal, the sense which is gathered from 
the context: “and becavse their posi- 
tion on the shore was unlike (in con- 
sequence of the widely extended line, 
c. 69. 25), so necessarily was their 
view of the conflict (from different 
points) unlike.” This explanation is 
hardly satisfactory. See App. 

9. δι᾿ ὀλίγου : at a little distance, as 
in ii. 89. 41; iii. 43. 14.—12. ἀνεθάρ- 
σησαν av: use of ay with aor. indic. 
to express a repeated occurrence, 
corresponding to εἴ τινες ἴδοιεν in the 
prot. GMT. 162; Η. 835,a; Kiihn. 
392%, 5. Cf. Plat. Apol. 22 b, ἀναλαμ- 
Bavwv αὐτῶν τὰ ποιήματα... . διηρώτων 
ἂν αὐτούς. ---- -τρὸς ἀνάκλησιν : ἐο calling 


2 


THUCYDIDES VII. γι. 


θεῶν μὴ στερῆσαι σφᾶς τῆς σωτηρίας ἐτρέποντο. οἱ δ᾽ 


ἐπὶ τὸ ἡσσώμενον βλέψαντες ὀλοφυρμῷ τε ἅμα μετὰ βοῆς 


5 “ Ν ὍΝ ἃς “A , “ » Ν \ , 
15 ἔχρωντο και ATO των δρωμένων τὴς οψεως καὶ τὴν γνω- 


an A 3 A οὐδε A 
μην μᾶλλον τῶν ἐν τῷ ἔργῳ ἐδουλοῦντο: ἄλλοι δὲ καὶ 


ἧς 3 he r /, om ’ 5 ὃ / ὃ Ν ἈΝ 5 / 
προς QVTLTAAOV TL Τῆς ναυμάᾶχιας QATLOOVTES, OLA TO ακρι- 


\ “A ε 4 ΟΥ̓ lol , 5 ΄“ 3, A 
τως ξυνεχὲς τῆς ἁμίλλης Kal τοῖς σώμασιν αὐτοῖς ἴσα ΤΉ 


δόξῃ τ ξυναπονεύοντες ἐν τοῖς ᾿χαλεπόηητο διῆ- 


20 "ἡ ἀεὶ yep παρ᾽ πο dl 7 διέφευγον ἢ ἢ ἀπώλλυντο. Od 


eRe ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ τον τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, ἕως ἀγχώ- 


μαλα ἐναυμάχουν, πάντα ὁμοῦ ἀκοῦσαι, ὀλοφυρμός, βοή, 


νικῶντες, κρατούμενοι, 


by name. Cf. ἀνακαλεῖν, c. 69. 10; 70. 
49.—13. οἱ δ᾽ ἐπὶ τὸ yoowpevov βλέ- 
Ψαντες: = εἰ δ᾽ ἄλλοι. .. βλέψειαν. 
τὸ ἡσσώμεμον, the neut. partic. used 
subst., has a collective force. Kr. 
Spr. 43, 4, 17.— 14. ὀλοφυρμῴ μετὰ 
Boys: “loud lamentation.” ἅμα con- 
nects ὀλοφυρμῷ μετὰ βοῆς ἐχρῶντο with 
τὴν γνώμην ἐδουλοῦντο. --- 15. τῶν. 
δρωμένων : obj. gen. with ὄψεως. Cf. 
c. 42. 30, τῶν ᾿Επιπολῶν τῆς ἀναβά- 
σεως. ---τὴν γνώμην... ἐδουλούντο: 
of extreme hopelessness, which robs 
the mind of freedom. Cf. ii. 61. 13, 
δουλοῖ yap φρόνημα Td αἰφνίδιον ; iv. 34. 
9, τῇ γνώμῃ δεδουλωμένοι. --- 16. τῶν 
ἐν τῷ ἔργῳ: = τῶν μαχομένων --- 17. 
ἀντίπαλον : -- ἰσόρροπον. --- διὰ τὸ 
ἀκρίτως ξυνεχές : on account of the long 
continuance in uncertainty, 1.6. the long 
continuance of the uncertainty. —18. 
τοῖς σώμασιν... EvvatrovevovTes: 1.6. 
in the movement of the body the 
mood of the mind was reflected. 
Schol. συνεξομοιοῦντες τὰ σώματα TH 
περὶ τῶν γιγνομένων προσδοκίᾳ ἀπένευον 
ἴσα is cognate 
The passage 


τῷ σώματι τῇδε κἀκεῖσε. 
acc, See on 6. 34. 29. 


ἄλλα 


μέγα στρατόπεδον πολυειδῆ 


ν 5 / 7 
ὅσα ἐν μεγάλῳ κινδύνῳ 


ἀναγκάζοιτο φθέγγεσθαι. 


is imitated by Sall. Jug. 60: niti 
corporibus et ea hue et illue 
. agitare. —19. ἐν τοῖς χαλεπώ- 
tara διῆγον : were in the most painful 
state. For ἐν rots, see on ὁ. 19. 19. 
20. ἀεὶ yap map ὀλίγον... ἀπώλ- 
λυντο: Sor now they were all but saved, 
now all but lost. παρά as in &. 2. 23.— 
21. τε: The inferential τε as 
in i. 4. 5 and often. — 21. dyxopada: 
cognate ace. See on 6. 34.25. The 
word is found only in Thue. and iate 
writers. — 22. πάντα ὁμοῦ ἀκοῦσαι, 
ὀλοφυρμὸς . . . κρατούμενοι: the pers. 
const. with εἶναι (πάντα being subj. 
of jv) instead of the more usual 
impers. Cf Aesch. Pers. 419, θάλασσα 
δ᾽ οὐκέτ᾽ ἦν ἰδεῖν ναυαγίων πλήθουσα. 
See the imitation of this passage in 
Charit. p. 66, 10, πάντα ἦν ὁμοῦ, δάκρυα, 


and so. 


χαρά, θάμβος, ἔλεος. --- 29. νικῶντες, 
κρατούμενοι: 1.6. the cries of the ex- 
cited soldiers, we conquer, we are beaten, 
π- ἄλλα doa... φθέγγεσθαι: = πάντα 
τὰ ἄλλα εἴδη φθεγμάτων, ὅσα μέγα 
/ / > 1 - 
“στρατόπεδον φθέγγεσθαι ἀναγκάζοιτο. 


ἄλλα ends the asyndeton as the Lat. 
alia, On the asyndeton, see Kr. Spr. 


135 


150 THUCYDIDES VII. 71. 


25 παραπλήσια δὲ καὶ οἱ ἐπὶ τῶν νεῶν αὐτοῖς ἔπασχον, 5 
" δὴ c ys / Ν ε ’ἅ We, λὺ 5» 
πρίν γε δὴ οἱ Συρακόσιοι καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι ἐπὶ πολὺ ἀν- 
τισχούσης τῆς ναυμαχίας ἔτρεψάν τὲ τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους καὶ 
ἐπικείμενοι λαμπρῶς, πολλῇ κραυγῇ καὶ διακελευσμῷ 

χρώμενοι, κατεδίωκον ἐς τὴν γῆν. τότε δὲ ὁ μὲν ναυτι- ὁ 
80 κὸ ἧς, ἄλλος ἄλλῃ, ὅ ὴ μετέω ἑάλ 
κὸς στρατός, ἄλλος ἄλλῃ, ὅσοι μὴ μετέωροι ἑάλωσαν, 
la 5 / 5 Ν / ε Ν Ν 
κατενεχθέντες ἐξέπεσον ἐς τὸ στρατόπεδον: ὃ δὲ πεζὸς 
> ΄ / > > > Ν A ε “A > lal \ 
οὐκέτι διαφόρως, ἀλλ᾽ ἀπὸ μιᾶς ὁρμῆς οἰμωγῇ τε Kal 
, , A Ν / c Ν 
στόνῳ πάντες, δυσανασχετοῦντες τὰ γιγνόμενα, οἱ μὲν. 
Suk Ν a 54 e δὲ Ν Ν Χ Ν an 
ἐπὶ τὰς ναῦς παρεβοήθουν, ot δὲ πρὸς TO λοιπὸν τοῦ 
τὰ 2 ε 
86 τείχους ἐς φυλακήν, ἄλλοι δὲ καὶ οἱ πλεῖστοι ἤδη περὶ 
σφᾶς αὐτοὺς καὶ ὅπῃ σωθήσονται διεσκόπουν. ἦν τε ἐν Ἰ 
τῷ παραυτίκα οὐδεμιᾶς δὴ τῶν ξυμπασῶν ἐλάσσων ἔκ- 


. in the harbour. 


mAn Ets. 


59, 1, 1. On the general rel. cond., 
see GMT. 532; H. 914, B 2. 

25. αὐτοῖς : sc. τοῖς ἐν τῇ γῇ: de- 
pendent on παραπλήσια. --- 26. πρίν γε 
δή : until at last. See on 6. 39. 5.— 
ἐπὶ πολύ: long, with ἀντισχούσης, as 
in c. 22.15; 79. 24, εἰς. --- 27. ἔτρεψαν : 
the aor. signifies the moment of the 
crisis, the impf. κατεδίωκον (29) the 
results that followed. — 28. λαμπρῶς : 
= φανερῶς, as in i. 49. 29, ἡ τροπὴ ἐγί- 
γνετο λαμπρῶς καὶ ἐνέκειντο of Κορίνθιοι. 
It belongs to κατεδίωκον. Cl. would 
connect it with ἔτρεψαν, which its 
position forbids. 

30. μετέωροι: 7.6. while still afloat 
Cf. i. 48. 4, etc. —31. 
κατενεχθέντες : Schol. πρὸς τὴν γῆν. Cf. 
C. 53. 9. -- ἐξέπεσον ἐς τὸ στρατόπε- 
Sov: 1.6. rushed from the ships into 
the camp. — 32. οὐκέτι διαφόρως : no 
longer with the various emotions de- 
scribed above 8-18, but driven by 
one impulse (ἀπὸ μιᾶς ὁρμῆς, for the 
more usual μιᾷ ὁρμῇ), 1.6. despair. — 


΄,΄ ’,ἅ / ον 3» > XN 
παραπλήσια ΤῈ πεπόνθεσαν και ἔδρασαν αυτοι 


99. δυσανασχετούντες : acc. to Poll. 
iii. 130, first used by Thue. (and 
only here) ; common in late writers. 
This verb takes the ace. (τὰ γιγνό- 
peva), just as δυσχεραίνειν, ἀγανακτεῖν. 
Kr. Spr. 48, 8, 1. Cf Dion. Hal. p. 
596, 22, δυσανασχετοῦντες Thy mappn- 
clay αὐτῆς. --- οἱ μὲν... ot δέ: part. 
appos. to 6 πεζός as in 4.—34. τὸ 
λοιπὸν Tov τείχους : the διατείχισμα 
mentioned in Ο. 60. 9.—35. περὶ σφᾶς 
αὐτούς : the most thought at this 
moment (ἤδη) only of themselves. 
περί with the acc. for the more usual 
gen. Cf. iv. 51. 5, μηδὲν περὶ σφᾶς 
νεώτερον βουλεύσειν; Vill. 11. 19, τὰ 
περὶ τὴν καταφυγὴν ἠγγέλθη. --- 36. ὅπῃ 
σωθήσονται: ὅπῃ with fut. indic. as 
ὅτῳ τρόπῳ in i. 107. 19, and freq. 

37. ovSepids ἐλάσσων : 1.6. μεγίστη. 
So δή here as with the sup. In for- 
mulas like this the gen. is always 
used, never #7. Kiihn. 543, note 5; 
Kr. Spr. 47, 27, 5.— 38. καί: after 
παραπλήσια as in c. 70.2. After καί 


THUCYDIDES VII. 71, 72. 


ἐν Πύλῳ: διαφθαρεισῶν yap τῶν νεῶν τοῖς Λακεδαιμο- 
40 νίοις προσαπώλλυντο αὐτοῖς καὶ οἱ ἐν τῇ νήσῳ ἄνδρες 


ΝΥ / = 5 > 
διαβεβηκότες, καὶ τότε τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις ἀνέλπιστον ἣν τὸ 


κατὰ γὴν σωθήσεσθαι, ἢν μή τι παρὰ λόγον γίγνηται. 
Γενομένης δ᾽ ἰσχυρᾶς τῆς ναυμαχίας καὶ πολλῶν 
νεῶν ἀμφοτέροις καὶ ἀνθρώπων ἀπολομένων οἱ Συρα- 


Ν 5 4 , \ 
KOGLOL Kal οἱ ξύμμαχοι ἐπικρατήσαντες τά TE ναυάγια καὶ 


Ν A 5 4 ba 5 4 ΩΝ Ν ,ὔ 
τοὺς νεκροὺς ἀνείλοντο καὶ ἀποπλεύσαντες πρὸς τὴν πό- 


5 λιν τροπαῖον ἔστησαν, οἱ δ᾽ 


᾿Αθηναῖοι ὑπὸ μεγέθους τῶν 2 


παρόντων κακῶν νεκρῶν μὲν πέρι ἢ ναυαγίων οὐδὲ ἐπε- 


, 5. A 5 , La ἊΝ XN > £ > Ν 
νοουν QLTYOAL αναιρεέεσιν, TNS δὲ νυκτος ἐβούλοντο εὐθὺς 


ἀναχωρεῖν. Δημοσθένης δὲ Νικίᾳ προσελθὼν γνώμην 3 


(= ὧς) the aor. has the force of the 
plpf. —39. διαφθαρεισῶν τῶν νεῶν 
κτέ.: cf. iv. 14 Τῇ. --- 40. προσαπώλ- 
λυντο αὐτοῖς : (impf.) “were as good 
as lost for them.” For αὐτοῖς a few 
of the minor Mss. have αὐταῖς (ταῖς 
ναυσί); but the repeated reference to 
the Lacedaemonians is more forcible 
than the unnecessary allusion to the 
ships. — ot ἐν τῇ νήσῳ διαβεβηκότες : 
for ἐν after verb of motion, see Kiihn. 
447, Aa; Kr. Spr. 68, 12,2: Cfriv. 
14.7, Tals... ἐν τῇ γῇ καταπεφευγυίαις; 
also c. 87. 19. For position of the 
partic., see on c. 23. 14.—41. καὶ 
τότε: sothen. See on 6. 29. 25. —- 42. 
παρὰ λόγον : not παράλογον, which 
᾿ Thue. prob. never used as adj. See 
on i. 65. 8. 

72. After the battle the Syracusans 
erect a trophy. The generals of the Athe- 
nians wish to make another attempt dur- 
ing the succeeding night to cut their way 
through with the rest of their ships; but 
the troops refuse to go on board again. 
And so they determine to retreat by 
land. 


- 1, γενομένης δ᾽ ἰσχυρᾶς τῆς ναυμα- 


χίας κτέ. : refers to οἱ δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναῖοι... 

γ ἀναχωρεῖν much more than to οἱ Συρα- 
κόσιοι ... ἔστησαν : “since the battle 
had been so dreadful and the losses 
so great, the Athenians thought only 
of getting away.” Hence only a 
comma, not a colon, should be placed 
after ἔστησαν (5). --- πολλῶν νεῶν : 
ace. to 12, the Athenians had lost 
(110 —60) about 50 ships; ace. to 
13; the Syracusans (76—50) about 
25. See on ec. 60. 21 and 70. 24. 
Diod. xiii. 17 gives the loss on the 
Athenian side at 60, on the Syracu- 
san at 8 destroyed and 16 rendered 
useless. 

5. ὑπὸ μεγέθους τῶν παρόντων 
κακῶν : ὑπό, by reason of. Cf. vi. 103. 
20, ὑποψίαν ὑπὸ τῶν παρόντων κακῶν ἐς 
ἀλλήλους εἶχον. ---. αἰτῆσαι ἀναίρε- 
ow: explanatory of the proleptic 
νεκρῶν πέρι ἢ ναυαγίων. Kr. Spr. 61, 6, 
8. Of. v. 63. 6, ἐπειδὴ περὶ ᾿᾽Ορχομέ- 
vou ἠγγέλλετο ἑαλωκέναι. --- ἐβούλοντο : 
Vat.; ἐβουλεύοντο of the rest of the 
Mss. is appropriate neither with οὐδὲ 
ἐπενόουν nor with εὐθύς. 


8. γνώμην ἐποιεῖτο : made a pro- 


137 


΄ 


138 THUCYDIDES VII. 72, 73. 


5 “a 4 4 ‘ Ν A“ A , 
ἐποιεῖτο πληρώσαντας ἔτι τὰς λοιπὰς τῶν νεῶν βιά. 
10 σασθαι, ἣν δύνωνται, ἅμα ἕῳ τὸν ἔκπλουν, λέγων ὅτι 
, » ε (ia) a , , τὶ A 
πλείους ἔτι αἱ λοιπαί εἰσι νῆες χρήσιμαι σφίσιν ἢ τοῖς 
πολεμίοις. ἦσαν γὰρ τοῖς μὲν ᾿Αθηναίοις περίλοιποι ὡς 
ἑξήκοντα. τοῖς δ᾽ ἐναντίοις ἐλάσσους ἢ πεντήκοντα. καὶ 
ξυγχωροῦντος Νικίου τῇ γνώμῃ καὶ βουλομένων πληροῦν 
5 la ε A > » > 7 Ν Ν 
15 αὐτῶν οἱ ναῦται οὐκ ἤθελον ἐσβαίνειν διὰ τὸ καταπε- 
na a ¢ \ & 

TNX Gal τε TH NOON καὶ μὴ ἂν ἔτι οἴεσθαι κρατῆσαι. καὶ 
οἱ μὲν ὡς κατὰ γὴν ἀναχωρήσοντες ἤδη ξύμπαντες τὴν 

»" ΄ > ε ΄ SWC ΄, ε ΄ 
1 γνώμην εἶχον. Ἑρμοκράτης δὲ ὁ Συρακόσιος ὑπονοήσας 

A \ vA > 
αὐτῶν τὴν διάνοιαν καὶ νομίσας δεινὸν εἶναι εἰ τοσαύτη 
\ A 

στρατιὰ κατὰ γὴν ὑποχωρήσασα καὶ καθεζομένη ποι τῆς 
Σικελίας βουλήσεται αὖθις σφίσι τὸν πόλεμον ποιεῖσθαι, 
5 ἐσηγεῖται ἐλθὼν τοῖς ἐν τέλει οὖσιν ὡς οὐ χρεὼν ἀποχω- 
ρῆσαι τῆς νυκτὸς αὐτοὺς περιιδεῖν, λέγων ταῦτα ἃ καὶ 


posal. Cf.-1. 128. 27; ii. 2. 24.—9. 
πληρώσαντας ἔτι: having manned once 
more. Cf.c.59.8. Kiihn. 464, 2, takes 
ἔτι Tas λοιπάς as equiv. to τὰς ἔτι 
λοιπάς. Cl. omits ἔτι without good 


troops. But the next day being a festival 
of Hercules, they are indisposed to make 
new efforts. Hermocrates, thereupon, 
warns the Athenians through messengers 
whom they suppose friendly not to set 


reason. — 11. νῆες χρήσιμαι: the 
more usual masc. form occurs viii. 76. 
26. The two words are treated as 
one and therefore placed together 
after ai Aviat, while πλείους is pred. 

15. αὐτῶν: i.e. Nicias and Demos- 
thenes.— 16. τε: added from Vat. 
and contrasting appropriately the 
double reason, what had happened 
and what was to be feared.—py... 
κρατῆσαι: ἄν to be connected with 
κρατῆσαι; μὴ ἔτι οἴεσθαι dependent on 
διὰ τό. --- 17. ὡς κατὰ γὴν ἀναχωρή- 
σοντες : cf. Plat. Legg. 755 Ὁ, μηκέτι 
τὴν τηλικαύτην ἀρχὴν ὡς ἄρξων διανοη- 
θήτω. 

73. Hermocrates advises the Syra- 
cusans to wall off all the roads leading 
into the interior, and occupy them with 


out in the night, saying that they will 
Jind the roads guarded by troops. 

2. el... βουλήσεται... τὸν πόλε- 
μον ποιεῖσθαι: cf. ὁ. 51. 5.—5. ἐση- 
γεῖται : represents. Cf. iii. 20. 7; iv. 
76.8; vi. 99. 7.—Tois ἐν τέλει οὖσι: 
cf. i. 90. 29; vi. 88.61. For the dat. 
with ἐλθών, see on i. 13. 12. — 6. ἀπο- 
χωρῆσαι αὐτοὺς περιιδεῖν : to let them 
quietly withdraw. Kr. and Cl. think 
that περιιδεῖν with the inf. represents 
the possibility of anything taking 
place, with the partic. the fact. Ky. 
But in GMT. 903, 6, 
the inf. and partic. are shown to refer 
to exactly the same thing. Cf. ii. 
18. 21, περιιδεῖν τμηθεῖσαν ; li. 20. 6, 
περιιδεῖν tunOjva. See also Kiihn. 
484, 24. ---λέγων ταῦτα ἃ καὶ αὐτῷ 


Spr. 56, 6, 9, 


THUCYDIDES ΜΠ. 73. 


αὐτῷ ἐδόκει, ἀλλὰ ἐξελθόντας ἤδη πάντας Συρακοσίους 
καὶ τοὺς ξυμμάχους τάς τε ὁδοὺς ἀποικοδομῆσαι καὶ τὰ 


στενόπορα τῶν χωρίων διαλαβόντας φυλάσσειν. οἱ δὲ 


Ν Ν \ “Ὁ an 
10 ξυνεγίγνωσκον μὲν καὶ αὐτοὶ οὐχ ἧσσον ταῦτα ἐκείνου 


15 


IN, , 5 Ἂς δὲ 3 , x > , 
καὶ ἐδόκει ποιητέα εἶναι, TOUS δὲ ἀνθρώπους ἄρτι ἀσμέ- 
νους ἀπὸ ναυμαχίας τε μεγάλης ἀναπεπαυμένους καὶ 
ἅμα ἑορτῆς οὔσης (ἔτυχε γὰρ αὐτοῖς Ἡρακλεῖ ταύτην 

ἣν ε 7, θ , > 3 ὃ oN x ε δί 39 a 
τὴν ἡμέραν θυσία οὖσα) ov δοκεῖν ἂν ῥᾳδίως ἐθελῆσαι 
ὑπακοῦσαι: ὑπὸ γὰρ τοῦ περιχαροῦς τῆς νίκης πρὸς 
πόσιν τετράφθαι τοὺς πολλοὺς ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ, καὶ πάντα 
μᾶλλον ἐλπίζειν ἂν σφῶν πείθεσθαι αὐτοὺς ἢ ὅπλα λα- 


βόντας ἐν τῷ παρόντι ἐξελθεῖν. 


ἐδόκει: so Vat. and most of the Mss. 
The sense seems to be, “saying just 
what he actually (καί) thought.” Cl. 
explains, “saying that which seemed 
to him from his own conjecture (καὶ 
αὐτῷ) probable.” Certain intelli- 
gence he did not claim to have. The 
reference is to ὑπονοήσας αὐτῶν τὴν 
διάνοιαν and the consideration con- 
nected therewith, καὶ νομίσας .. 
πόλεμον ποιεῖσθαι. ἐσηγεῖται expresses 
the advice, λέγων the ground for it. 
Neither explanation, though perhaps 
as good as can be given, is entirely 
satisfactory, and St. may be right 
in bracketing the words. —7. ἀλλὰ 


. τὸν 


ἐξελθόντας... ἀποικοδομήσαι .. . φυ- 
λάσσειν : supply χρέων ἐστί from 


above. — ἤδη: immediately. — 8. τὰς 
ὁδοὺς ἀποικοδομῆσαι : Schol. ἀποφρά- 
ξαι διά τινος οἰκοδομῆς. Cf. i. 134. 12. 
—9. διαλαβόντας: Cl. and Bm. fol- 
low Bk. in adopting this reading from 
Vat. for προφθάσαντας of the remain- 
ing Mss. and editt. διαλαβεῖν, which 
occurs only here in Thuc., is warranted 
and explained by the imitation of 
Polyb. i. 18, of στρατηγοὶ τῶν Ῥωμαίων 


ὡς δὲ τοῖς ἄρχουσι ταῦτα 


τὰ μεταξὺ τῶν τάφρων καὶ τῶν στρατο- 
πέδων διαστήματα φυλακαῖς διέλαβον ; 
iv. 67, 6 Φίλιππος κλείσας τὰς πύλας 
τοῦ Κορίνθου καὶ διαλαβὼν τὰς ὅδοὺς 
φυλακαῖς. Cf. Diod. xiv. 75, καὶ Διο- 
νύσιος τὰς ὁδοὺς διαλαβὼν φυλακαῖς. 
Suidas, citing our passage, explains: 
διαλαβών, προκατασχών. See App. — 
οἱ δέ: sc. ἐν τέλει ὄντες. 

10. ξυνεγίγνωσκον : of the 
same opinion; ξυν- with ady. force. 
Cf. ii. 60. 15.—11. ἄρτι... ἀναπε- 
παυμένους : “the men having just 
gladly taken a little repose after the 
great sea-fight.” On account of ἀσμέ- 
νους and the prep. ἀπό, ἀναπεπαυμένους 
is to be preferred to πεπαυμένους of 
Vat. For the simple partic. and gen. 
abs. co-ord., see Kr. Spr. 56, 14, 2. — 
14. οὐ δοκεῖν: depends loosely on 
ἐγίγνωσκον (or ἔλεγον) to be supplied 


were 


from ξυνεγίγνωσκον above. — av: be- 
longs with ἐθελῆσαι. --- 15. ὑπὸ τοῦ 


περιχαροῦς : “by reason of their great 
joy.” ὑπό asinc. 72.5. τὸ περιχαρές 
oceurs also in ii. 51.28.—17. odav: 
the gen. with πείθεσθαι not elsewhere 
found in Att. prose. Kiihn. 417, note 


139 


Co 


140 


THUCYDIDES VII. 73, 74. 


λογιζομένοις ἐφαίνετο ἄπορα καὶ οὐκέτι ἔπειθεν αὐτοὺς 


ee ΄ 38 pes ΄ , A 
20 0 Eppokparys, αὐυτος ἐπι TOUTOLS τάδε μηχαναται" δε- 


duds, μὴ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι καθ᾽ ἡσυχίαν προφθάσωσιν ἐν 


2 νυκτὶ διελθόντες τὰ χαλεπώτατα τῶν νωρίων, πέμπει 
™ x 2 χώριων, TEM 


“ ε ’ ἣν A a Ν ε Ὡς Ν XN lal 
των εταιρων τινας τῶν ἑαυτοῦ μετα LTTEWV προς ΤΟ των 


3 7 / δὲ.» / ἃ 
Αθηναίων στρατόπεδον ἡνίκα ξυνεσκόταζεν" Ol προσε- 


25 λάσαντες ἐξ ὅσου τις ἔμελλεν ἀκούσεσθαι καὶ ἀνακαλε- 


΄ὕ ΄ ε Ξ lal 3 ΄ 5 ΄ > 
σάμενοι TWAS WS OVTES τῶν Αθηναίων ἐπιτήδειοι (Hoav 


γάρ τινες τῷ 
4 T , 
φράζειν Νικίᾳ 


nw » 
Νικίᾳ διάγγελοι τῶν ἔνδοθεν) ἐκέλευον 
μὴ ἀπάγειν τῆς νυκτὸς τὸ στράτευμα, ὡς 


Συρακοσίων τὰς ὁδοὺς φυλασσόντων, ἀλλὰ καθ᾽ ἡσυχίαν 


80 τῆς ἡμέρας παρασκευασάμενον ἀποχωρεῖν. 


Ne We \ 
KQL OL μεν 


ΟΝ ἘΡΡΤΣ \ Ἐς eo , ΄ a 
E€LTOVTES ἀπῆλθον, και OL AKOVOGVTES διήγγειλαν τοις 


ἸΔ στρατηγοῖς τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, οἱ δὲ πρὸς τὸ άγγελμα ἐπέσχον 


6; Kr. Spr. 48, 7, 8. Kr. compares 
Eur. 7. A. 726, πείθεσθαι yap εἴθισμαι 
σέθεν. The gen. is common in Hat. 
Cf. i. 59. 18, and Stein’s note. The 
gen. σφῶν is here partly induced by 
the preceding πάντα: “anything else 
from them they would be more ready 
to listen to than an order to take up 
arms,” etc. 

19. οὐκέτι ἔπειθεν αὐτούς : 1.6. when 
his arguments no longer produced 
any effect. — 20. ἐπὶ τούτοις: under 
these circumstances. See on 6. 62. 14. 
-- τάδε μηχανᾶται: fe contrived the 
following plan, which is set forth with- 
out connective (γάρ) after τάδε, as 
often after τοιόνδε. See oni. 89. 2.— 
24. ξυνεσκόταζεν : as in i. 51. 7.— 25. 
ἐξ ὅσου: 1.6. és τοσοῦτον ἐξ ὅσου. Kr. 
* Spr. 51, 13, 9. ---τις : 1.6. in the camp 
of the Athenians, for ἀκούσεσθαι is 
act.— ἀνακαλεσάμενοι : (mid.) calling 
forth by name (to themselves). See 
on 6. 69.10; 70.49. By this very act 


they made themselves appear to be,. 


as they claimed, ἐπιτήδειοι. --- 27. διάγ- 
yedou τῶν ἔνδοθεν : Schol. μηνυταὶ καὶ 
ἐξαγγέλλοντες τὰ Συρακοσίων. διάγγε- 
Aos is found elsewhere only in the 
later writers (e.g. Dio C. xl. 8), but 
corresponds to the verb διαγγέλλειν 
in 31. Since it was known on both 
sides that Nicias had spies in Syra- 
cuse (cf. c. 48. ὃ 2), Hermocrates 
was able without difficulty to get 
access to the Athenians. But these 
messengers, of course, did not belong 
to the spies of Nicias. —31. καὶ ot 
ἀκούσαντες : Kr.’s proposal καὶ οἵ, opp. 
to oi μέν, would be admissible after 
the analogy of iv. 33.11; 68.25. But 
the correlative of of μέν is rather of δέ 
in c. 74.1, and καὶ of ἀκούσαντες... 
᾿Αθηναίων is logically subord. to the 
preceding clause, as if the sent. ran, 
καὶ of μὲν ἀπῆλθον εἰπόντες ταῦτα, ἃ οἱ 
ἀκούσαντες KTE. 

74. The commanders of the Atheni- 
ans, deceived into remaining during the 
coming night, spend also the following 


THUCYDIDES VII. 74. 141 


Ν , ,ὔ > 
THY νύκτα, νομίσαντες οὐκ ἀπάτην εἶναι. καὶ ἐπειδὴ καὶ 
a’ 5 »2λΧ “ oy] > A \ \ > A 
ὥς οὐκ εὐθὺς ὥρμησαν, ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς καὶ THY ἐπιοῦσαν 
4 » nr ΄ wn 
ἡμέραν περιμεῖναι, ὅπως ξυσκευάσαιντο ws ἐκ τῶν δυνα- 

A e an 9 3, 
5 τῶν οἱ στρατιῶται OTL χρησιμώτατα, καὶ τὰ μὲν ἄλλα 
᾿ , Lal 5 / Ν » Ν ν Ν Ν 
πάντα καταλιπεῖν, ἀναλαβόντας δὲ αὐτὰ ὅσα περὶ τὸ 
nA 5 δί Ε ~ 5 Ἅ 5 ~ 
σῶμα ἐς δίαιταν ὑπῆρχεν ἐπιτήδεια ἀφορμᾶσθαι. Συρα- 2 
’ δὲ Ν ͵ A \ “ ΄ὕ ΄,ὔ 
κόσιοι ὃὲ καὶ Τύλιππος τῷ μὲν πεζῴ προεξελθόντες τάς 
50 A AN Ν Ν 4 a 5 ‘\ > \ > 74 
_ TE ὁδοὺς TAS κατὰ THY χώραν ἡ εἰκὸς ἣν τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους 
5 5 4 Ν nw wn 
10 ἰέναι ἀπεφράγνυσαν καὶ τῶν ῥείθρων. Kal ποταμῶν Tas 
ὃ , 5 , VS ε Ν an vA 
ιαβάσεις ἐφύλασσον καὶ ἐς ὑποδοχὴν τοῦ στρατεύματος 
ὡς κωλύσοντες ἡ ἐδόκει ἐτάσσοντο. ταῖς δὲ ναυσὶ προσ- 
ἐξ Ν an A 3 , > Ν lot > A 
πλεύσαντες τὰς ναῦς τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἀπὸ τοῦ αἰγιαλοῦ 

5 ~ 5 , , > » ν ’ 

ἀφεῖλκον, (ἐνέπρησαν δέ τινας ὀλίγας, ὥσπερ διενοήθη- 


15 σαν, αὐτοὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι), τὰς δ᾽ ἄλλας καθ᾽ ἡσυχίαν οὐ- 


day in preparations for the departure. 


The Syracusans, however, make use of 


the time to shut off the roads, and to 
place guards at the crossings of the 
rivers. ‘At the same time they draw 


from the shore und bring to their har- 


bour the ships which had been abandoned 
and left unburnt by the Athenians. 

1. πρὸς τὸ dyyeApa: in view of the 
message. πρός as in 11]. 43. 12; iv. 126. 
4. — ἐπέσχον: with acc. of time, as 
in i. 137. 82; iv. 31. 1, etc.—2. οὐκ: 
belongs to ἀπάτην only, opp. to an 
implied contrast, ἀλλ᾽ ἀλήθειαν. --- καὶ 
as: even thus, i.e. after the fatal delay 
of the first night. Bm. explains, 
“even thus, notwithstanding the neces- 
sity for immediate departure.” — 4. 
ξυσκευάσαιντο: convasare, in Thue. 
only here.—ds ἐκ τῶν δυνατῶν : nearly 
equiv. to ὡς ἐκ τῶν παρόντων (vi. 70. 
18), as well as they could. On ὡς with 
such phrases, see Kr. Spr. 69, 65, 4. 
— 5. ὅτι χρησιμώτατα: has the em- 
phasis of the sent., “in the most con- 


venient form” (Jow.).—6. dvada- 
Bevras: ( Vat.) preferable to the nom. 
of the vulgate, ἀναλαβόντες, as it re- 
moves the anacoluthon. Cf. 1. 31. 10; 
53. 1; 72. 5, where after ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς 
a pred. ace. with inf. follows. But in 
ill. 36. 8 we have the nom. as in the 
vulgate.— αὐτὰ doa: only that which. 
Kr. Spr. 51, 5, 5.— περὶ τὸ σῶμα és 
δίαυταν : for support of life. 

10. ἀπεφράγνυσαν : the unusual 
form φραγνύναι, for φράσσειν, found 
also in Soph. Ant. 241.—11. ἐς ὑπο- 
δοχήν : unusual in hostile sense; for 
its use in a friendly sense, see on 1. 

39. 11.—18. τὰς vats τῶν ᾿Αθη- 
ναίων : which, ace. to ὁ. 71. 31, had 
been run ashore. —14. ἐνέπρησαν .. . 
᾿Αθηναῖοι : a parenthetical clause 
stating what had already been done 
by the Athenians. The aor. has the 
force of the plpf. between the impfs. 
ἀφεῖλκον, ἐκόμιζον, which indicate the 
continued activity of the Syracusans. 
ὥσπερ διενοήθησαν refers to ὁ. 60, 18. 


142 


THUCYDIDES VIL. 74, 75. 


devds κωλύοντος ὡς ἑκάστην ποι ἐκπεπτωκυῖαν ἀναδη- 


’ 5 , 3 \ , 
σάμενοι ἐκόμιζον ἐς τὴν πόλιν. 
»-“" Ν A ἈΝ -“ 
Μετὰ δὲ τοῦτο, ἐπειδὴ ἐδόκει τῷ Νικίᾳ καὶ τῷ 


΄“- ἈΝ 3, 
Δημοσθένει ἱκανῶς παρεσκευάσθαι, καὶ ἡ ἀνάστασις ἠδ 
Ἂμ ἢ 


A , A , 
τοῦ στρατεύματος τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ ἀπὸ τῆς ναυμαχίας ἐγί. 


γνέτο. 


΄ , ~ 5 , 
5 OTL τάς TE ναῦς ἀπολωλεκότες 
5 Ν , 5 ’ὔ A 5» \ 
ἀντὶ μεγάλης ἐλπίδος καὶ αὐτοὶ 
τες, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐν τῇ ἀπολείψει 


Ν <> > > a A 
δεινὸν ουν ἣν OU καθ εν 


μόνον τῶν πραγμάτων, 
πάσας ἀπεχώρουν καὶ 
\ ε / 4 
Kal ἡ πόλις κινδυνεύον- 
τοῦ στρατοπέδου ἕυνέ- 


“ » ε Ψ 3 ᾿ς \ ΄Ὁ ’ > , 
Bawe τῇ τε ὄψει ἑκάστῳ ἀλγεινὰ καὶ TH γνώμῃ αἰσθέ 


σθαι. 


lal Ν »“ 3 , 3», ε ’ 
των TE yep VEKP@V ἀτάφων OVT@WV, OTTOTE τις ἴδοι 


Ν “ 5 » 7 > 4 Ν ’, 
10 τινὰ τῶν ἐπιτηδείων κείμενον, ἐς λύπην μετὰ φόβου 


—16. ὡς ἑκάστην ποι ἐκπεπτωκυῖαν : 
“as they severally had run aground 
anywhere.” The clause is really 
elliptical, the leading verb being un- 
derstood. See oni. 3. 19. 

7a. Under such sad circumstances 
the Athenian army sets out on the third 
day after the battle. Everything com- 
bines to render the situation desperate : 
the leaving behind of the dead, as weil 
as the wounded and the sick, who break 
forth into the bitterest complaints ; the 
despondency and helplessness with which 
about 40,000 men face a perfectly dark 
future; the lack of servants, most of 
whom had recently run away ; the remem- 
brance of the brilliant hopes with which 
they had set out, and which had now 
been utterly destroyed. 

2. παρεσκευάσθαι : impers. inf. 
from the impers. indic. Cf i. 46.1; 
iii. 107.21; iv.67.2.— «at: introduc- 
ing the immediate performance of the 
resolution taken, as in ii. 93. 18; iv. 8. 
40; viii. 27. 24, ὡς ἔπεισε. kal ἔδρασε 
ταῦτα. --- ἀνάστασις: departure, as in 
LESS PEC: TAT 

4. δεινὸν ἦν: with general subj. 


Cf. ii. 51. 11; v. 64. 17.— οὐ καθ᾽ ἕν 
μόνον τῶν πραγμάτων: explained by 
ὅτι τάς τε ναῦς... κινδυνεύοντες, and 
opp. to ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐν τῇ ἀπολείψει... 
αἴσθεσθαι (7), i.e. the general result is 
contrasted with the personal experi- 
ences of the individual. The general 
sense of the whole sent. is: “it was 
terrible not only with regard to the 
one chief aspect of their situation 
(the loss of the fleet and consequent 
danger for themselves and the state), 
but also in that each one on leaving 
the camp had the most- painful im- 
pressions.” ἀλλὰ... . αἴσθεσθαι, though 
grammatically independent, is logi- 
cally subord. to δεινὸν ἦν. See App. — 
6. ἀντὶ μεγάλης ἐλπίδος : short for “in- 
stead of accomplishing the great 
things for which they had hoped.” — 
8. αἰσθέσθαι: Cl. prefers the accentu- 
ation of the pres., with the good Mss. 
here and in y. 26. 29. But it is bet- 
ter, with the other editors, to accent 
as aor. See Steup App. on ii. 93. 17; 
St. Qu. Gr.2 p. 66. 

10. κείμενον : i.e. lying dead. Cf. 
iv. 38. 8; Xen. An. i. 8. 27.— pera 


15 


20 


THUCYDIDES VII. 75. 


Ἁ ε A 
καθίστατο, Kat ot ζῶντες καταλειπόμενοι τραυματίαι τε 
καὶ ἀσθενεῖς πολὺ τῶν τεθνεώτων τοῖς ζῶσι λυπηρό- 
Ν Ν 
πρὸς γὰρ 
5 ra Ν > Ν / 5 > ’΄ 4 
ἀντιβολίαν καὶ ὀλοφυρμὸν τραπόμενοι ἐς ἀπορίαν καθί- 
ΕΣ ΄ an Y 9 
στασαν, ἄγειν τε σφᾶς ἀξιοῦντες Kal ἕνα ἕκαστον ἐπι- 


> QA ἴω = , 5 ᾽ὔ 
τεροι ἦσαν καὶ τῶν ἀπολωλότων ἀθλιώτεροι. 


td πα ΄ 4 ΣᾺ Xx ε ’, x 3 , lal 
Bodpevor, εἴ τινά πού τις ἴδοι ἢ ἑταίρων ἢ οἰκείων, TOV 
ΕἾ / 
τε ξυσκήνων ἤδη ἀπιόντων ἐκκρεμαννύμενοι Kal ἐπακο- 
wn 5 ν Μ 

λουθοῦντες ἐς ὅσον δύναιντο, εἴ τῳ δὲ προλίποι ἡ ῥώμη 
« 

Ν Ν A > » a F 5 χω ἈΝ 5 al 

καὶ TO σῶμα, οὐκ ἄνευ [ὀλίγων] ἐπιθειασμῶν Kal οἰμωγῆς 
ν id lal 

ὑπολειπόμενοι: ὥστε δάκρυσι πᾶν TO στράτευμα πλη- 


Ν Ν 2) ie , Ν ε ’ 5 “ ’ 
σθὲν και απόοριᾳ TOLQAUTY) μὴ ῥᾳδίως ἀφορμᾶσθαι, καυπέερ 


148 


φόβου: thinking of the sacred duty 
of the burial of the dead.— 11. ζῶντες 
καταλειπόμενοι : closely connected 
with and attrib. to τραυματίαι τε καὶ 
ἀσθενεῖς : the wounded and sick (c. 
60. 10) who were left behind alive. — 
12. τοῖς ζῶσι: Cl. thinks the epi- 
thet ζῶντες, applied to the departing 
Athenians, out of place, esp. as the 
same expression has just been used 
very appropriately for the καταλειπό- 
μενοι. τοῖς ζῶσι, he explains, must 
have been written by a glossator to 
make the ‘meaning of λυπηρότεροι 
(painful, act.) clear, or perhaps τοῖς 
ὁρῶσι must be substituted. The latter 
is more probable since καθίστασαν (sc. 
αὐτούς) seems to require some preced- 
ing noun. But it may be questioned 
whether τοῖς ζῶσι, although not neces- 
sary to the sense, does not after all 
make the contrast even stronger : 
“and the wounded and sick who were 
left behind alive were far more griev- 
ous to the living than the dead, and 
more wretched than those who ‘had 
perished.” 

14. ἀντιβολίαν : Schol. δέησις, ἱκε- 


σία. --- καθίστασαν: sc. αὐτούς, τοὺς 


ὑποχωροῦντας. --- 1ὅ. ἕνα ἕκαστον: cf. 
c. 69. 9; γο. 57. -- ἐπιβοώμενοι : call- 
ing aloud. Cf. c. 69. 20; ill. 59. 11; 
67.9; viii. 92. 80. --- 17. ἤδη ἀπιόντων : 
ἦ.6. when they were just on the point 
of starting. —18. és ὅσον: Vat. and 
Valla (quousque) for écov.— προ- 
λίποι: Vat. for προλείποι, aor. of the 
single case. It is intr., like ἐλλείπειν, 
and rare. Cf. Eur. Or. 817, φόνος... 
ov προλείπει δισσοῖσιν ᾿Ατρείδαις. -- ἢ 
ῥώμη καὶ τὸ σῶμα : not equiv. to ῥώμη 
τοῦ σώματος (Pp.), but “their (last) 
powers of spirit and body.” See App. 
to vi. 31. 3.—19. οὐκ ἄνευ [ὀλίγων] 
ἐπιθειασμῶν : the sense required here 
is evidently not without many impre- 
cations, and Valla translates, non 
sine multis obtestationibus 
ac ploratibus. See App. — 20. 
ὑπολειπόμενοι: dropping behind. Vat. 
for ἀπολειπόμενοι. It is intr. rather 
than pass. For the pl. after τῳ, see 
Kr. Spr. 58, 4, 5. — δάκρυσι : rare dat. 
with πλησθέν for δακρύων. Cf. Eur. 
Or. 1568, δακρύοισιν... Ἑλλάδα... 
ἔπλησε; Aesch. Pers. 133, πίμπλαται 
δακρύμασιν. --- 21. ἀπορίᾳ : co-ord. with 
πλησθέν.--- καίπερ ἐκ πολεμίας : SC. ἀφορ- 


144 


25 πολλὴ ἦν. 


THUCYDIDES VII. 75. 


> ’ ἈΝ ’, “ἡ Ν ’ ‘ ἈΝ 

ἐκ πολεμίας τε καὶ μείζω ἢ κατὰ δάκρυα τὰ μὲν πεπον- 
, ¥ Ν Ν \ a > 5 a , Ν ΄ 

θότας ἤδη, τὰ δὲ περὶ τῶν ἐν ἀφανεῖ δεδιότας μὴ πά- 


θωσι. 


’ ’ , ν ‘\ ’ lal 5» A 
κατήφειά TE TLS ἅμα καὶ κατάμεμψις σφῶν αὐτῶν 5 


οὐδὲν γὰρ ἄλλο ἢ πόλει ἐκπεπολιορκημένῃ 


»»,ἵ᾿ ε ’ Ν 4 5 ~ ’ 
ἐῴκεσαν ὑποφευγούσῃ, καὶ ταύτῃ οὐ σμικρᾷ: μυριάδες 
γὰρ τοῦ ξύμπαντος ὄχλου οὐκ ἐλάσσους τεσσάρων ἅμα 


ἐπορεύοντο. 


ἣν ὔ [2 3,» »᾿, , 9 
καὶ τούτων οἵ TE ἄλλοι ἔφερον πάντες O TL 


"Ὁ 7 . , \ ee A \ elie 
TLS ἐδύνατο εκαστος χρήσιμον, και οι ὁπλῖται και Ol ιπ- 


a Ν Ν 3 Ν > Ν Ν ΄ + Bes. , Sa™ 
30 7S παρα TO εἰωθὸς αυτοι Τα σφέτερα αὐυτῶν σίιτια επι 


A 97 ε A 5 ’ 5 ,ὕ ε ἣν > ’ 
τοῖς ὅπλοις, οἱ μὲν ἀπορίᾳ ἀκολούθων, οἱ δὲ ἀπιστίᾳ: 
ἀπηνυτομολήκεσαν yap πάλαι τε καὶ οἱ πλεῖστοι παρα- 


χρῆμα. 


ἦν ἐν τῷ στρατοπέδῳ. 
c 


μωμένους. Though καίπερ belongs 
also to the following partics., πεπονθό- 
τας, δεδιότας (connected κατὰ σύνεσιν 
with στράτευμα), the restrictive signi- 
fication is not prominent. — 22. μείζω 
ἢ κατά: quam pro. Kiihn. 543, 8; 
Kr. Spr. 49,4. Cf. ii. 50. 2. — 23. τὰ 
δέ: connected by prolepsis with δεδιό- 
τας, but in sense belonging to πάθωσι. 
— περὶ τῶν ἐν ἀφανεῖ : Schol. περὶ τῶν 
μελλόντων. 

24. κατήφεια: dejection: in Thue. 
only here. It means originally a 
looking down (from modesty or shame). 
-- κατάμεμψις σφῶν αὐτῶν: sel/-con- 
demnation. — 25. οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἤ: really 
elliptical; some general word like 
ἐγίγνετο or ἐποίει must be supplied 
from the following verb, as with Lat. 
nihil aliud quam. See on ii. 16. 
10. Κύμη. 597,20; Kr. Spr. 62, 3, 7. 
— πόλει ἐκπεπολιορκημένῃ: 1.4. the 
inhabitants of a city captured after 
a siege. —26. οὐ σμικρᾷ: this form 
occurs also in iv. 13. 19; viii. δὲ. 11. 
--- μυριάδες κτέ. : Boeckh (P. E. p. 367) 


3» Ν 5 a =m ε / = δ > ’ 
ἔφερον δὲ οὐδὲ ταῦτα ἱκανά. σῖτος γὰρ οὐκέτι 


Ν Ν ε ἊΨ, - Ν \ ε > 
καὶ μὴν ἢ adn alkia καὶ ἢ ἰσο- 6 


estimates that over 60,000 men had 
come to Sicily. To these must be 
added the Sicilian allies. By loss in 
battle and esp. by desertion (below, 
52, and c. 13. 12) they had been re- 
duced to this number. — 29. τις éka- 
otros: cf. vi. 31. 31.— 30. παρὰ τὸ 
εἰωθὸς αὐτοί: as a rule every hoplite 
and cavalryman was attended by a 
servant. — ἐπὶ τοῖς ὅπλοις : in addition 
to their arms, Pluygers’s emendation’ 
(Mnem. 11, p. 96) for ὑπὸ τοῖς ὅπλοις. 
Cf. c. 86. 8, ἐπὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις, in addition 
to everything else. — 31. ἀκολούθων: 
elsewhere called θεράποντες (6. 13-9; 
iv. 16.9) or ὑπηρέται (iii. 17. 10; vi. 
102. 10). --- ἀπιστίᾳ: ze. fearing that 
those who were still present would 
follow the example of those who had 
run away. — 32. παραχρῆμα: lately, 
z.e. since the sea-fight. Schol. ἐν τῷ 
τότε παρόντι. — 33. οὐδὲ ταῦτα: 7.€. 
τὰ σιτία. 

34. ἡ ἄλλη αἰκία καὶ ἰσομοιρία τῶν 
κακῶν: we should have expected 
“nor, moreover, was the rest of their 


THUCYDIDES VII. 75. 


35 μοιρία τῶν κακῶν, ἔχουσά τινα ὅμως TO μετὰ πολλῶν 


40 


κούφισιν, οὐδ᾽ ὡς ῥᾳδία ἐν τῷ παρόντι ἐδοξάζετο, ἄλλως 


Y \ an 
TE καὶ ἀπὸ οἵας λαμπρότητος καὶ αὐχήματος τοῦ πρώτου 


> ν Ν ‘ , 5 A 
ἐς olay τελευτὴν καὶ ταπεινότητα ἀφῖκτο. 


μέγιστον γὰρ 


δὲ Ν ὃ ΄ a PRAY A ΄, SLE, Co 
Ἢ TO Labo pov TOUTO νικω στρατεύματι ἐγένετο, OLS 


5 Ν ἣν la 5» , ν ΕἸ Ἀ na 
ἀντὶ μὲν τοῦ αλλους δουλωσομένους QKEW αὐτοὺς τοῦτο 


μᾶλλον δεδιότας μὴ πάθωσι ξυνέβη ἀπιέναι, ἀντὶ δ᾽ εὐ- 


Lal Ἂς , θ᾽ - 5 4, tA 4 
XNS TE καὶ παιάνων, με ὧν ἐξέπλεον, πάλιν τούτων 


Liam 5 ἐς 5 Ῥ) 5 A , 
τοῖς ἐναντίοις ἐπιφημίσμασιν ἀφορμᾶσθαι, πεζούς τε 


XN “ Ν lal 
ἀντὶ ναυβατῶν πορευομένους και ὁπλιτικῷ προσέχοντας 


misery and sufferings easy to bear” 
(αἰκία referring to their inward wretch- 
edness, τὰ κακά to the outward ills 
that came upon them). But by the 
addition of icouowia a shift in the 
thought is effected; for this idea, — 
not simply the evils, but the equal 
sharing of them, — dominates all the 
rest of the sent. And so we have: 
‘“‘and, moreover, the rest of their 
misery, and the equal sharing of their 
sufferings, although having in this 
very ‘along with the many’ some 
alleviation,” etc. τό introduces the 
proverbial μετὰ πολλῶν. Cf. τὸ κρατί- 
στους εἶναι κτέ., C. 67.3. Kr. Spr. 50, 
5,12. τὸ μετὰ πολλῶν is Obj. of ἔχου- 
σα, and twa κούφισιν is pred. See 
App. — 386. οὐδ᾽ as: refers to ἔχουσα... 
κούφισιν, but resumes esp. the idea of 
ὅμως, which though joined to the par- 
tic. belongs in sense to the main verb. 
-- ἄλλως τε kal: supply ἐνθυμουμένοις 
from ἐδοξάζετο. Kiihn. 551, 9 does 
not supply ἐνθυμουμένοις, but explains 
= ὅτι ἀπὸ τοιαύτης KTE.— 37. ἀπὸ οἵας 
λαμπρότητος. .. ἐς οἵαν τελευτήν : the 
same emphatic connexion of two rel. 
clauses with strong effect as in v. 7. 
4.— ραὐχήματος : self-confidence. Cf. 
c. 66, 15; 11. 62. 28.— τοῦ πρώτου: 


placed after its noun for emphasis, 
“as it was at first,” and opp to τελευ- 
τήν, AS λαμπρότητος Kal αὐχήματος is 
to rarewdtnTa.— 38. ἀφῖκτο: it had 
come, without expressed subj. as παρε- 
σκευάαθαι in 2 above andi. 46.1. St. 
has adopted Badham’s conjecture, 
ἀφίκατο. 

μέγιστον γὰρ κτέ.: for the form of 
the sent., see on 6. 29. 29; i. 1. 8.— 
39. τὸ διάφορον : reverse, ἴ.6. change 
in circumstances. See on 6. 55. 9, --- 
λληνικῷ : the art. τῷ which the 
Mss. have is not appropriate, since 
there is an implied contrast with βάρ- 
Bapos, as in v. 60. 14; vi. 31. 7. Of 
the Persians at Marathon and Sala- 
mis the like could perhaps be said. 
—ois: referring to στράτευμα, as in 
22, πεπονθότας. See on c.1.9. For 
the acc. following, see on ὁ. 74. 6.— 
40. ἀντὶ tov... ἥκειν Kré.: cf. 1. 69. 
24.— τοῦτο: proleptic, as τὰ δέ in 29. 
— 42. μεθ᾽ ὧν ἐξέπλεον : cf. vi. 32.— 
πάλιν τούτων: the first belongs to 
ἀφορμᾶσθαι; the second to ἐναντίοις. 
For position of τούτων, cf. vi. 64. 24, 
ταῦτα τοὺς ξυνδράσοντας. --- 48. πεζούς 
τε: τε (Vat.; the rest of the Mss. δέ) 
is co-ord. with καί before ὁπλιτικῷ. -ττ 
44. vavBarov: this rather unusual 


145 


146 THUCYDIDES VII. 75-77. 


arr a A 9 δὲ ε Ν ‘A A > 
45 μᾶλλον ἢ ναυτικῷ. ὅμως δὲ ὑπὸ μεγέθους τοῦ ἐπικρε- 
, “ A 
μαμένου ἔτι κινδύνου πάντα ταῦτα αὐτοῖς οἰστὰ ἐφαίνετο. 
76 Ὁρῶν δὲ ὁ Νικίας τὸ στράτευμα ἀθυμοῦν καὶ ἐν 
’ Dn ¥ > Ν ε > “A «ε ’ 
μεγάλῃ μεταβολῇ ov, ἐπιπαριὼν ὡς ἐκ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων 
ἐθάρσυνέ τε καὶ παρεμυθεῖτο, βοῇ τε χρώμενος ἔτι μᾶλ- 
λον ἑκάστοις καθ᾽ ovs γίγνοιτο ὑπὸ προθυμίας, καὶ βου- 
5 λόμενος ὡς ἐπὶ πλεῖστον γεγωνίσκων ὠφελεῖν τι" 
“Καὶ ἐκ τῶν παρόντων, ὦ ᾿Αθηναῖοι καὶ ξύμμαχοι, 
> ΄ Ν 3, 3, Ν Ν 3 ΄ x» 
ἐλπίδα χρὴ ἔχειν (ἤδη τινὲς καὶ ἐκ δεινοτέρων ἢ τοι- 


~ 
~) 


word includes, as the Schol. correctly SpeEcH oF Nicras TO THE ATHENI- 


observes, the ναῦται and ἐπιβάται. --- ANS ON LEAVING SYRACUSE. 

προσέχοντας: Vat. for vulgate προσ- 

σχόντας, ‘‘turning their minds to, 77. However difficult our situation is, 

trusting.” —45. ὑπὸ μεγέθους: cfc. we need not give up hope. In the con- 

72. 5.—46. olora: as in i. 122. 9. sciousness of having done my duty to- 
76. Λείας tries by an address to ward gods and men, I shall set you a 

raise the sinking courage of his troops. good example. Should the anger of the 


1. ἐν μεγάλῃ μεταβολῇ ov: in con- gods be the cause of our misfortune, we 
sequence of the μέγιστον διάφορον of c. may hope that this will change and a bet- 
75-38.—2. ἐπιπαριών : 7.e.coming up ter future be granted us. We are still 
to and going along the ranks, which numerous and strong enough to establish 
were already setting off. Cf. iv. 94. for ourselves a new commonwealth. Our 
11; vi. 67. 19.— ὡς ἐκ τῶν ὑπαρχόν- whole effort must be directed to keeping 
των: as well as possible under the cir- good order on our march, and we must, 
cumstances. See on 6. 74. 4, ὡς ἐκ τῶν if necessary, even by hard fighting, cut 
δυνατῶν. ---ὃ. ἔτι μᾶλλον: ve. than our way through to the territory of the 
before the last battle, c. 69. 9ff.—4. (friendly Sicels. If we succeed in that, 
ἑκάστοις: dat. governed by βοῇ xpé- the others of you may hope to see your 
μενος = ἐπιβοῶν, c. 70.44.—5. ὡς ἐπὶ homes again; we Athenians, however, to 
πλεῖστον γεγωνίσκων : “raising his raise up our city again from its great 
voice so as to be heard as far as pos- (fall. For men make the state, not walls 
sible.” γεγωνίσκειν only herein Thuc., nor ships. 


otherwise poetic. Cf Aesch. Prom. 1. καὶ ἐκ τῶν παρόντων : this read- 
627; Eur. El. 809. Cf ii. 34. 34, ὅπως ing of Vat. (without ἔτι) has, prop. 
ἀκούοιτο ὡς ἐπὶ πλεῖστον. -- ὠφελεῖν TL: emphasized, the strongest effect. For 


so Vat., the rest of the Mss. simply «ai with similar emphasis at the be- 
ὠφελεῖν, beginning thefollowingchap. ginning of a speech, cf. vi. 16. 1.—2. 
with ἔτι. ὠφελεῖν τι is Very appropri- ἤδη τινὲς... ἐσώθησαν : some have 
ate here where the utmost effort fo been rescued from even worse straits than 
effect some good is described. The these. ἤδη with the aor. refers to well 
const. is the same as in ὠφελεῖν μέγα, known experiences. Cf. 15 below, 
πλεῖστα, οὐδέν. ἦλθον... καὶ ἄλλοι τινὲς ἤδη; also iL 


THUCYDIDES VII. 77. 


14 


ὥνδε ἐσώθησαν), μηδὲ καταμέμφεσθαι ὑμᾶς ἄγαν av- 


τοὺς μήτε ταῖς ξυμφοραῖς 
5 νῦν κακοπαθείαις. 


΄, A \ Ν 9 {7 
PTE ταις παρα ΤῊΝ ἀξίαν 


> ’ > XN ε A Ξ ef. 
Kayo TOL οὐδενὸς υμωὼν OUTE PRY 


προφέρων (ἀλλ᾽ ὁρᾶτε δὴ ὡς διάκειμαι ὑπὸ τῆς νόσου) 
οὔτ᾽ εὐτυχίᾳ δοκῶν που ὕστερός του εἶναι κατά τε τὸν 
y+ , ‘ 5 5 A 5 “ ΕῚ “ , “ 
ἴδιον βίον καὶ ἐς τἄλλα, νῦν ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ κινδύνῳ τοῖς 


5 9 an , \ \ > \ , 
φαυλοτάτοις αἰωροῦμαι: καίτοι πολλὰ μὲν ἐς θεοὺς νό- 
10 μιμα δεδιήτημαι, πολλὰ δὲ ἐς ἀνθρώπους δίκαια καὶ 


ἀνεπίφθονα. 
μέλλοντος, at δὲ ξυμφοραὶ 
τάχα δ᾽ ἂν καὶ λωφήσειαν 


77.15; iv.62.13. On the asyndeton, | 


which is somewhat softened by the 
emphatic position of ἤδη, see Kr. Spr. 
59, 1, 5. — ἢ τοιῶνδε: Cl. explains as 
= ἢ ἐκ τοιῶνδε, the prep. not being 
repeated, as in c. 47. 16; vi. 78.4. It 
might equally well be considered an 
attraction of case (from ἢ τοιάδε). So 
Kiihn. 548, 2 b.— 3. μηδὲ καταμέμ.- 
φεσθαι κτέ.: the pres., from Vat., is 
more comprehensive than the vulgate 
καταμέψασθαι: “and not to reproach 
yourselves too heavily, either for the 
misfortunes which have befallen you 
(esp. in the last battles) or for your 
present unmerited sufferings.” With 
καταμέμφεσθαι ὑμᾶς, cf. κατάμεμψις 
σφῶν αὐτῶν of c. 75. 24. ξυμφοραί are 
the single occurrences; κακοπάθειαι, 
the enduring conditions. For the 
causal dat., see H. 778; Kr. Spr. 48, 
15, 6. 

6. προφέρων : intr. as in c. 64. 15; 
ii. 89. 11.— ὡς διάκειμαι ὑπὸ τῆς 
νόσου: how I am afflicted by my dis- 
ease. Cf. c. 15. 93 vi. 102. 8.—7. 
εὐτυχίᾳ: cf. v. 16. 12; vi. 17.5.—8. 
kal és τάλλα : 1.6. in official and public 
life. — τοῖς φαυλοτάτοις : not in a 
moral, but political sense, with the 


e/a ε ᾿ 3 \ Y - a 
ἀνθ ων ἢ μὲν ἐλπὶς ομως θρασεῖα του 


οὐ Kat ἀξίαν δὴ φοβοῦσι. 
ἱκανὰ γὰρ τοῖς τε πολεμίοις 


humblest (in the army).—9. αἰωροῦ- 
μαι: suspensus sum. Cf. Hat. 
Vili. 100. 9, τὸν βίον ὑπὲρ μεγάλων 
αἰωρηθέντα. --- καίτοι... ἀνεπίφθονα: 
“yet my days have been passed in 
the performance of many a religious 
duty, and of many a just and blame- 
less action” (Jow.). δεδιΐτημαι has 
the cognate acc..as in i. 6. 25, πολλὰ 
τὸ... Ἑλληνικὸν ὁμοιότροπα διαιτώ- 
μενον. ἃ. 1051; H. 715. ἀνεπίφθονα 
has reference to the timidity of Nicias 
about giving offence in any way. Cf. 
Plut. Nic. 2.—11. ὅμως : 1.6. in spite 
of our desperate situation. —12. αἱ 
δὲ ξυμφοραὶ ... φοβοῦσι: Cl. under- 
stands ἡμᾶς as obj. of φοβοῦσι, but it 
is more natural to take ἐμέ (Nicias) 
as the obj. Our calamities frighten me 
not so much as they might otherwise well 
do. The argument of the sent. is: “in 
consequence of my good conscience I 
have hope, and so dangers do not 
frighten me as much as they might 
otherwise properly do. If I feel so, 
why may not you all?” See App. 
13. τάχα δ᾽ dv κτέ. : quite in accord. 
ance with the religious manner of 
thinking of Nicias (ἦν τι καὶ ἄγαν θει- 
ασμῷ τε καὶ τῷ τοιούτῳ προσκείμενᾳς, 


148 


15 


20 


25 


THUCYDIDES VII. 77. 


5 ΄ Ν » “A 5 ’, 5 ’ 
ηὐτύχηται, καὶ εἴ τῳ θεῶν ἐπίφθονοι ἐστρατεύσαμεν, 
> ΄ τὸ , Ke ΄ Ne 
ἀποχρώντως ἤδη τετιμωρήμεθα. ἦλθον yap που καὶ ἀλ- 
λοι τινὲὲ ἤδη ἐφ᾽ ἑτέρους, καὶ ἀνθρώπεια δράσαντες 
ἀνεκτὰ ἔπαθον. καὶ ἡμᾶς εἰκὸς νῦν τά τε ἀπὸ τοῦ θείου 
> ΄ὔ 5 ΄ ν πα Ν 3) 9 Ola > , 
ἐλπίζειν ἠπιώτερα ἕξειν (οἴκτου yap am αὐτῶν ἀξιώτε- 

» 5 Ν ED / Ν ε aA ε la) > Ν - 
ροι ἤδη ἐσμὲν ἢ φθόνου), καὶ ὁρῶντες ὑμᾶς αὐτοὺς οἷοι 
ὁπλῖται ἅμα καὶ ὅσοι ξυντεταγμένοι χωρεῖτε μὴ κατα- 
πέπληχθε ἄγαν, λογίζεσθε δὲ ὅτι αὐτοί τε πόλις εὐθύς 

5 ν “Δ / \ Ξ, 5 id ε lal n > 
ἐστε ὅποι ἂν καθέζησθε, καὶ ἄλλη οὐδεμία ὑμᾶς τῶν ἐν 
-' , ¥ > KX 2 4 δέ ε δί yo «ἃ ε 
Σικελίᾳ οὔτ᾽ ἂν ἐπιόντας δέξαιτο ῥᾳδίως οὐτ᾽ ἂν ἱδρυ- 

, 3 , Ἂν, \ / 7 3, δαί Cal 
θέντας που ἐξαναστήσειεν. τὴν δὲ πορείαν ὥστ᾽ ἀσφαλῆ 

tee dc > 9 \ v Vy ε , 
καὶ εὔτακτον εἶναι αὐτοὶ φυλἄξατε, μὴ ἄλλο TL ἡγησάμε- 
νος ἕκαστος ἢ ἐν ᾧ ἂν ἀναγκασθῇ χωρίῳ μάχεσθαι, τοῦ- 


Ν Ν io) i, 
To Kal πατρίδα Kal τεῖχος κρατήσας ἕξειν. 
Ν SS ial “ 
ὁμοίως καὶ νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν ἔσται τῆς ὁδοῦ" 


c. 50.30). The sense is that even if 
the jealousy of the gods has hitherto 
been roused against the Athenians, 
this has been appeased by the good 
fortune of the enemy and their own 
ill fortune, and they may now look 
for a change. — 14. ηὐτύχηται: pass., 
the cognate acc. of the act. becoming 
subj. Kr. Spr. 52, ὃ, 4; Kiihn. 378, 


10. —e τῳ θεῶν ἐπίφθονοι ἐστρατεύ- 
σαμεν: = εἰ τῇ ἐς Σικελίαν στρατείᾳ 


τὸν φθόνον τῶν θεῶν τινος ἐκινήσαμεν. 
Nicias expressed his sense of the 
arrogance of the expedition in his 
first speech, vi. 9 ff.—15. τετιμωρή- 
μεθα: pass. as in vi. 60.28. Kr. Spr. 
52, 10, 11. 

16. ἀνθρώπεια : 1.6. what belongs to 
human nature, here referring to war- 
like hostility. Cf ν. 68. 6; viii. 24. 
29.—17. ἀπὸ τοῦ θείου : Kr.’s emen- 
dation for θεοῦ of the Mss., which 
is necessary in order to bring the 
passage into accord with the usage of 


σπουδὴ δὲ 
τὰ γὰρ 
Thue. See Introd. to Book 1., p. 29. 
6 θεός refers everywhere in Thue. to 
some special god, e.g. Apollo; the 
numen divinum is τὸ θεῖον. Cf. 
v. 70.4; 104.4; τοῦ πον noes 
—18. am αὐτῶν : sc. τῶν θεῶν, refer- 
ring κατὰ σύνεσιν to the collective 
θείου, which includes all the gods, — 
19. καὶ ὁρῶντες : καί co-ord. with τε 
in 17, as if we had ὁρῶντας .. 
πλῆχθαι Aepending on εἰκός. --- οἷοι: 
Vat., the rest of the Mss. of. — 20. 
καταπέπληχθε: Vat. καταπεπλῆχθαι, 
vitio itacismi. The context 
makes the imv. necessary. — 21. 
εὐθύς : already, 1.6. by reason of your 
number and importance. — 23. οὔτ᾽ 
ἂν ἐπιόντας δέξαιτο: could neither re- 
sist your attack. Cf. ec. 40.15; 44. 20. 
25. μὴ ἄλλο τι ἡγησάμενος ἢ : Com- 
mon introduction to hyperbolical ex 
pressions. Cf. i. 70.29; ili. 30.12; 56. 


+ Κατατπε- 


25.—27. κρατήσας: if he conquer. 


28. ἔσται: the fut. with the force 


THUCYDIDES VII. 77, 78. 149 
ἐπιτήδεια βραχέα ἔχομεν, καὶ ἣν ἀντιλαβώμεθά του φι- 
80 λίου χωρίου τῶν Σικελῶν (οὗτοι γὰρ ἡμῖν διὰ τὸ Συρά- 
κοσίων δέος ἔτι βέβαιοί εἰσιν), ἤδη νομίζετε ἐν τῷ ἐχυρῷ 
ἥ yy Ul μ t X Ps 
> , ᾽ = 
eat. προπέπεμπται δ᾽ ὡς αὐτοὺς Kal ἀπαντᾶν εἰρη- 


> 


/ NN Ld ν / / a > 
μένον Kal σιτία ἅμα κομίζειν. τό τε ξύμπαν γνῶτε, ὦ 


~I 


ἄνδρες στρατιῶται, ἀναγκαῖόν τε ὃν ὑμῖν ἀνδράσιν ἀγα- 
ey 2 ΄- Ν Ξ, ,ὔ 5» Ν 9 “ἡ 
35 θοῖς γίγνεσθαι (ὡς μὴ OVTOS χωριου εγγυς οποι ἂν μαλα- 
,ὕ “ \ a la 4, \ 
κισθέντες σωθειτεὶ, καὶ ἣν νῦν διαφύγητε τοὺς πολε- 
’ὔ ν » / - » “ “. > ae 
μίους, οἱ τε ἄλλοι τευξόμενοι ὧν ἐπιθυμεῖτέ που ἐπιδεῖν, 
A ἜΝ lal Ἂς / ͵ὕ “ ,ὔ 4 
καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι τὴν μεγάλην δύναμιν τῆς πόλεως Kal- 
περ πεπτωκυῖαν ἐπανορθώσοντες " ἄνδρες γὰρ πόλις, 
Ν > , .} Ν ἴω 5 Ψα yA ke | 
40 καὶ οὐ τείχη οὐδὲ νῆες ἀνδρῶν κεναί. 
ε ΝΥ ’ὕ , , ν > 4 
78 O μὲν Νικίας τοιάδε παρακελευόμενος αμα ἐπῇει 1 


Ν ’ / » Ν 
τὸ στράτευμα καί, εἴ πῃ ὁρῴη διεσπασμένον καὶ μὴ ἐν 


of the imy. “You will not lag day 
or night,” 1.6. you dare not. Kiihn. 
387, 5. — 29. ἀντιλαβώμεθα: cf c. 
60. 17.— 31. ἤδη: then only. — 82. 
προπέπεμπται. . . κομίζειν : we have 
sent to them, directing them to meet us, 
and at the.same time to bring food. 
For the ace. abs., see on 6. 18. 
14. καί, καί correlative. ἅμα, Reiske’s 
emendation for ἄλλα, is necessary 
since no subst. precedes. Valla trans- 
lates pariter et commeatum. 
33. τό Te ξύμπαν : so Vat. for τὸ δέ. 
Gren 19: 18... 1{| 92: 17; iv. 63: 8; vi. 
37. 18.—36. σωθεῖτε: on the form, 
see App.— 37. οἵ τε ἄλλοι τευξόμενοι 
... καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι... ἐπανορθώ- 
covres: dependent on γνῶτε. For 
the co-ordination of neut. acc. (vy, 
34) and nom., see Kr. Spr. 56, 14, 
2.— 37. ὧν: neut., fatherland, etc. 
- ἐπιδεῖν : see again, cf. 61. 5.— 39. 
ἄνδρες γὰρ... kevai: a sentiment 
occurring in manifold forms in Greek. 
Cf. Soph. O. T. 56, ὡς οὐδέν ἐστιν οὔτε 


πύργος οὔτε ναῦς ἔρημος ἀνδρῶν μὴ ξυνοι- 
κούντων ἔσω; Aesch. Pers. 349; Al- 
686. frg. 23; Eur. frg. 825 (Nauck) ; 
Dio Calvi. 5. ὃ; elute ycurqa to 
Demad. frg. § 2; Dem. xvimr. 299; 
Lue. Anach. 20; Appian, Pun. viii. 
29; Cic. ad Att. vil. 11. See Classi- 
cal Journal, ii, pp. 299 ff. 

78. Thereupon the Athenian army 


sets off into the interior of the island,. 


marching in a double hollow square with 
They cross 
the Anapus after putting the Syracusans 
stationed there to flight, and make on the 
Jirst day 40, on the second, 20 stades. 
On the third, however, being hard pressed 


the baggage in the middle. 


by the cavalry and light troops of the 
enemy, they are forced to turn back and 
pass the night at their former camping- 
place. 

With the account of the retreat 
of the Athenians, compare map, and 
Holm II. p. 397-401; also the App. 
to c. 78. 14. 

1. ἐπήει τὸ στράτευμα : “went along 


150 


10 


20 


THUCYDIDES VI. 78. 


, 7 , Ἀ , ἈΝ ε ,’ 
τάξει χωροῦν, ξυνάγων καὶ καθιστάς, καὶ ὁ Δημοσθένης 
οὐδὲν ἧσσον τοῖς καθ᾽ ἑαυτὸν τοιαῦτά TE καὶ παραπλή- 

,ὕ A A 5 ,’ 5 ,ὔ΄ ,’΄ὕ »-“ 
σια λέγων. τὸ δὲ ἐχώρει ἐν πλαισίῳ τεταγμένον, πρῶτον 

Ν ε ,ὕ Ν > / 5 , δὲ Ν θέ 
μέν Ἡγούμενον τὸ Νικίου, ἐφεπόμενον ε τὸ δΔημοσθε. 
vous: τοὺς δὲ σκευοφόρους καὶ τὸν πλεῖστον ὄχλον ἐν- 

Ν > ε ε “ Ν 3 Ν ΕῚ ,ὕ ἈΝ" “A 
τὸς εἶχον οἱ ὁπλῖται. καὶ ἐπειδὴ [τε] ἐγένοντο ἐπὶ τῇ 
διαβάσει τοῦ ᾿Ανάπου ποταμοῦ, εὗρον ἐπ᾽ αὐτῷ παρα- 
τεταγμένους τῶν Συρακοσίων καὶ ξυμμάχων, καὶ τρεψά- 
μενοι αὐτοὺς καὶ κρατήσαντες τοῦ πόρου ἐχώρουν ἐς τὸ 
πρόσθεν οἱ δὲ Συρακόσιοι παριππεύοντές τε προσέκειντο 

\ , ἈΝ ~ 4 4 
καὶ ταύτῃ μὲν TH ἡμέρᾳ 

, ,’ ε , > 7 ὁ 
προελθόντες σταδίους ws τεσσαράκοντα ηὐλίσαντο πρὸς 


καὶ ἐσακοντίζοντες οἱ ψιλοί. 


λόφῳ τινὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι - τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ πρῷ ἐπορεύοντο 
\ a A ε ¥ ou Ν , > 
καὶ προῆλθον ws εἴκοσι σταδίους, καὶ κατέβησαν ἐς 
, 3» / \ 5 “ > ’ ’ 
χωρίον ἀπεδόν τι καὶ αὐτοῦ ἐστρατοπεδεύσαντο, βουλό- 
» A 5 io =~ 5 ,ὔ 3 “ Ν 
μενοι ἔκ τε τῶν οἰκιῶν λαβεῖν τι ἐδώδιμον (φὠκεῖτο γὰρ 
ε io ed x an 5 »“ὦ , 5 ’ 
ὁ χῶρος) καὶ ὕδωρ μετὰ σφῶν αὐτῶν φέρεσθαι αὐτόθεν - 


ἐν γὰρ τῷ πρόσθεν ἐπὶ πολλὰ στάδια, n ἔμελλον ἰέναι, 
the ranks.” 76. 2, 


Cf. ἐπιπαριών, Cc. found only in Vat., are indispensable 


which implies approaching in order to 


speak to. Gua belongs to παρακελευό- 


μενος. --- 8. καθιστάς : 1.ε. putting them 


in 11π6.---4. οὐδὲν ἧσσον: sc. ἐπήει. 
- τοῖς καθ᾽ ἑαυτόν : to the troops under 
his command. 

5. ἐν πλαισίῳ: Schol. (on vi. 67. 
6) ἐν σχήματι τετραγώνῳ. A hollow 
square called τετράγωνος τάξις in iv. 
125. 16. Cl. is doubtless right in 
adopting πλαισίῳ from Vat., instead 
of διπλασίῳ of the other Mss., but his 
view that the two divisions of the 
army formed together a hollow square 
seems not to agree so well with the 
context, as Kr.’s and St.’s, that each 
division formed 
πρῶτον μὲν ἡγούμενον : these words, 


its OWN πλαίσιον. ---- 


to the sense. There is the same re- 
dundancy of expression as in ᾿πρῶτον 
ἤρξατο, i. 103. 17; ii. 53. 1.---. τοὺς 
δὲ σκευοφόρους. . . ἐντὸς εἶχον : cf. Vi. 
67.9; Xen. An. iii. 2. 36. 

8. [re]: rightly omitted by Bm. as 
having no prop. connexion. — 10. 
τῶν Συρακοσίων καὶ ξυμμάχων : part. 
gens. Cf. c. 26. 14; iv. 80. 7.— 
13. ἐσακοντίζοντες οἱ ψιλοί : part. 
appos. to οἱ Συρακόσιοι. Cf. ο. 71.1, 4. 

14. σταδίους ws τεσσαράκοντα: see 
App.—15. mpw: see on ec. 19. 1.— 
17. ἄπεδον: Jevel, a rare word. Cf. 
Hat. ix. 102. 3, ἄπεδος χῶρος. Scholl. 
ὅμαλον, ὁμόπεδον, ὡς καὶ ἄλοχος ἢ ὅμό- 
λοχος. --- 20. στάδια: the neut. form 
in Thue. only ΠΘΓΘ. --- τ ἔμελλον ἰέναι : 


THUCYDIDES VIL 78, 79. 


οὐκ ἄφθονον ἦν. 


Ν ΄, \ 5 A , > ΄' “5 \ 
TES ΤῊΝ δίοδον ΤῊΝ εν τῳ πρόσθεν ἀπετείχιζον * HY δὲ 


λόφος καρτερὸς καὶ ἑκατέρωθεν αὐτοῦ χαράδρα κρημνώ- 


δης, ἐκαλεῖτο δὲ ᾿Ακραῖον λέπας. 


a > ε ΄ ε "ἢ 
ΤΊ) VOTEPALa οι AUN- 


A \ aA 
25 ναῖοι προήεσαν, καὶ οἱ τῶν Συρακοσίων καὶ ξυμμάχων 


> x τ΄. nw x 5 \ yy \ ε ’ὔ 
αὑτοὺς ἱππῆς καὶ ἀκοντισταὶ οντες πολλοὶ ἑκατέρωθεν 


5 ᾿ς SVR | , 4 Ν , 
ἐκώλυον και ἐσηκόντιζόν Τε και TOPLTTEVOV. 


καὶ χρόνον 


\ / 3 lal 
μὲν πολὺν ἐμάχοντο ot ᾿Αθηναῖοι, ἔπειτα ἀνεχώρησαν 


΄ὔ 3 Ν ea , \ Ν 5 ye 5 , 
πάλιν ες TO AUTO στρατόπεδον" και τὰ ἐπιτήδεια OUKETL 


30 ὁμοίως εἶχον. 


οὐ γὰρ ἔτι ἀποχωρεῖν οἷόν τ᾽ ἣν ὑπὸ τῶν 


Winméov. πρῷ δὲ ἄραντες ἐπορεύοντο αὖθις, καὶ ἐβιά. 
Ξ Ἧἵ ® 


Ν Ν / 3 Cov) Ν 5» , 4 Ν 
σαντο πρὸς τὸν λόφον [ἐλθεῖν] τὸν ἀποτετειχισμένον, καὶ 


a la \ ἘΣ 
εὗρον πρὸ ἑαυτῶν ὑπὲρ TOU ἀποτειχίσματος τὴν πεζὴν 


στρατιὰν παρατεταγμένην οὐκ ἐπ᾽ ὀλίγων ἀσπίδων - στε- 


ἴ.6. westward to the high plateau, 
which, however, they did not reach. 

22. ἀπετείχιζον : were walling off 
(impf.). — 24. ᾿Ακραῖον λέπας : the 
situation of this bare cliff, which 
‘marks the beginning of the plateau, 
can still be determined by means of 
the ravine leading thither, now called 
Cava di Culatrello. See Holm, II. 
p- 64 and 399, and Karlsr. Philol. 
Wochenschr. 1882. 

26. αὐτούς : emphatic position, as 
ὑμᾶς ini. 68.15; σφᾶς, v. 82. 23.— ἑκα- 
τέρωθεν : this reading of Vat. for éxd- 
τεροι best suits the context. Cf Valla, 
utrimque. 

29. ἐς TO αὐτὸ στρατόπεδον : 1.6. in 
which they had passed the night be- 
fore.— οὐκέτι opotws: 1.6. as before, 
when real want had not yet been felt. 
— 30. ἀποχωρεῖν: Schol. ἀποσκίδνα- 
σθαι ἀπὸ τοῦ στρατεύματος, 1.6. for 
foraging.—vro τῶν ἱππέων: cf. Vi. 
37. 18. 

79. The two following days also pass 


in vain attempts to force their way through 
the narrow pass up to the plateau. They 
are frightened, moreover, by a storm 
which breaks upon them, and suffer heavy 
losses in their constant fighting with the 
enemy, who attack them on all sides. 

1. πρῴ: on the fourth day of the 
march, — 2, [ἐλθεῖν : St. is prob. right, 
following Valla’s translation, vi per- 
vadunt ad tumulum, in consid- 
ering this an interpolation. It seems 
clear from the context (esp. 6, 7), 
that they forced their way to the hill, 
but were not able to carry it. No- 
where else in Thuc. does βιάζεσθαι 
take an inf., but always a prep. (ἐς, 
c. 69. 29; i. 63.5; κατά, iv. 48. 8; διά, 
c. 83.19). See Holm, II. p. 399. ΟἹ. 
defends ἐλθεῖν, rendering “they did 
their best to reach the fortified hill.” 
- τὸν ἀποτετειχισμένον: cf. ο. 78. 22. 
— 4. οὐκ ἐπ᾽ ὀλίγων ἀσπίδων : refer- 
ring to the depth of the line. Cf iv. 
93. 22, ἐπ᾽ ἀσπίδα: πέντε καὶ εἴκοσι; 
Xen. Hell. ii. 4. 11, ἐπὶ πεντήκοντα 


151 


οἱ δὲ Συρακόσιοι ἐν τούτῳ προελθόν- 5 


“I 


152 THUCYDIDES VII. 79. * Ol. 91. 4; B.c. 413, Sept. 
5 νὸν yap ἦν τὸ χωρίον. καὶ προσβαλόντες ot ᾿Αθηναῖοι 


10 


15 


20 


ἐτειχομάχουν καὶ βαλλόμενοι ὑπὸ πολλῶν ἀπὸ τοῦ λόφου 
ἐπάντους ὄντος (διικνοῦντο γὰρ ῥᾷον οἱ ἀνωθενῚ καὶ οὐ. 
δυνάμενοι βιάσασθαι ἀπεχώρουν πάλιν καὶ ἀνεπαύοντο. 
» \ \ ΄ Y , \ ¢ 
ἔτυχον δὲ καὶ βρονταί τινες ἅμα γενόμεναι Kal ὕδωρ, 
- Qn 3, * Ν : , no > _A , 
οἷα τοῦ ἔτους ἡ πρὸς μετόπωρον NON OVTOS φιλεῖ γίγνε- 
σθαι: ἀφ᾽ ὧν οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι μᾶλλον ἔτι ἠθύμουν καὶ ἐνό- 
~ ot = , 5» 4 Ν la 4 Zz 
μιζον ἐπὶ τῷ σφετέρῳ ὀλέθρῳ καὶ ταῦτα πάντα γίννε- 
5 ’ A 5 ~ ε ‘4 Ἁ ε 
σθαι. ἀναπαυομένων δὲ αὐτῶν ὁ Τύλιππος καὶ οἱ Συ- 
ρακόσιοι πέμπουσι μέρος τι τῆς στρατιᾶς ἀποτειχιοῦντας 
αὖ ἐκ τοῦ ὄπισθεν αὐτοὺς 7 προεληλύθεσαν- ἀντιπέμ.- 
ψαντες δὲ κἀκεῖνοι σφῶν αὐτῶν τινας διεκώλυσαν. καὶ 
μετὰ τοῦτο πάσῃ τῇ στρατιᾷ ἀναχωρήσαντες πρὸς τὸ 
,ὔὕ »"» ε zy -“ 5 , Las 5 ε 4 
πεδίον μᾶλλον ot ᾿Αθηναῖοι ηὐλίσαντο. τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ 
ἈΝ ,ὔ , , nw 
προυχώρουν, καὶ οἱ Συρακόσιοι προσέβαλλόν τε πανταχῇ 
αὐτοῖς κύκλῳ καὶ πολλοὺς κατετραυμάτιζον, καὶ εἰ μὲν 
7, rs: “ ε ΄ > arts A αν 
ἐπίοιεν ot ᾿Αθηναῖοι, ὑπεχώρουν, εἰ δ᾽ ἀναχωροῖεν, ἐπέ- 
κειντο, καὶ μάλιστα τοῖς ὑστάτοις προσπίπτοντες, εἴ 


ἀσπίδων; An. iv. 8. 11. The order 108. 9.—12. καὶ ταῦτα πάντα γίγνε- 
οὐκ ἐπ’ ὀλίγων as οὐκ ἐν πολλῷ, c.- σθαι: ze. that all this was happening 


36. 17. 

6. ἐτειχομάχουν : they tried to storm 
the wall.—T. διικνοῦντο ῥᾷον: they 
reached them more easily, i.e. hit them 
better. Schol. ἐξικνοῦντο βάλλοντες. 
Found only here in Thuc.— 8. βιά- 
σασθαι : to break through. — ἀπεχώ- 
ρουν: (Vat.) not less used of retreat 
than ἀναχωρεῖν, esp. with πάλιν. Cf. i. 
107. 11. 

9. Bpovrai: in Thuc. always in pl. 


Cf. ii. 77. 25; vi. 70. 2.— yevopevar: 


often used of such phenomena of 
nature, ὕδωρ, βρονταὶ kal ἀστραπαί, 
See on i. 54. θ6.---10. πρὸς 
Cf. viii. 


σεισμός. 
μετόπωρον: toward autumn. 


acc. to the divine will. 

14. ἀποτειχιοῦντας: with the col- 
lective μέρος τι. G. 920; Kr. Spr. 
58, 4,1. Cf iii. 2.2.—15. αὖ ἐκ τοῦ 
ὄπισθεν: 1.6. as they had already done 
in front. 

17. peta τοῦτο: so Vat., more defi- 
nite than μετὰ ταῦτα. --- πρὸς τὸ πεδίον 
μᾶλλον : more toward the plain. Cf. ¢. 
52. 8; vi. 88. 20.—18. τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ: 
on the fifth day. — 20. εἰ μὲν ἐπίοιεν 
. . . ἐπέκειντο: for similar tactics 
(and const.), cf. ii. 79. 23; iii. 97. 16. 
—22. εἴ πως... φοβήσειαν : the ellip- 
tical cond. expresses purpose. GMT. 
489. The same const. occurs also 


THUCYDIDES VII. 79, 8ο. 


Ν ‘ 7 la Ν ’ , 
πως κατὰ βραχὺ τρεψάμενοι πᾶν τὸ στράτευμα φοβή- 


VSS Ν \ 4 / 5 “ a) 
σειαν. και επι πολὺ μεν τοιουτῳ τρόπῳ αντευχον ου Αθη- 


a » , ΄ὕ ἋΔὰ ΄ 3 ΄ 
25 VQALOL, ἐεἐπειτα προελθόντες TEVTE Ἢ ἐξ σταδίους QAVETTAV- 


80 


5 


3 3 lay δί 3 ’ὔ δὲ Ν ε / = > 
OVTO EV TM πεοιῳ * ανεχωρήῆσαν € και OL Συρακόσιοι QT 


wr ἴα 7 
αὐτῶν ἐς τὸ ἑαυτῶν στρατόπεδον. 


lal ἣν ας , \ 
Τῆς δὲ νυκτὸς τῴ Νικίᾳ καὶ Δημοσθένει ἐδόκει, 


lal / Ν > lal 
ἐπειδὴ κακῶς σφίσι τὸ στράτευμα εἶχε τῶν τε ἐπιτη- 


’, fe 5 ΄ νῷ XN > 
δείων πάντων ἀπορίᾳ Oy Kal κατατετραυματισμένοι ἦσαν 


πολλοὶ ἐν πολλαῖς προσβολαῖς τῶν πολεμίων γεγνενημέ- 
Ι μ γέεγέενημ 


Ν 4 ε A > / » / 
‘VQLs, TUPa KQAVOOQVTEAS WS πλεῖστα ATAVYELY TY)V στρατιαν, 


, Ν ΟΡ ΔΝ SOC 2 ὃ 40 ἰλλὰ > ΄ 
μῆκετι TYHV αὐτὴν OQOOV n LEVOY) σαν, α Q TOVVQAVTLOV 


my et , τος Ν \ ΄ 3, Se 
Ἢ Ob Συρακόσιοι ἙτΉρβουν, προς TYHV θάλασσαν DP δὲ 7) 


Maeno. 2) 11. 67. 53 ii. 4. 14% iv. rr. 
12.—23. κατὰ βραχύ: «a few at a time. 
Of. iv. 96. 19. — 25. πέντε ἢ ἕξ στα- 
Stovs: their strength, exhausted in 
resisting ceaseless pressure from all 
sides, did not allow them to get 
further. 

80. Finally they break up in the mid- 
dle of the night, in order to escape the 
pursuit of the enemy, and take their jour- 
ney in the opposite direction, first to the 
coast and then toward Camarina and 
Gela, But the army, driven by fear, 
pushes hastily on and falls into confusion. 
The division of Nicias goes before and 
keeps together; the greater part under 
Demosthenes follows in disorder. In 
the morning, however, Nicias reaches the 
coast, drives away a Syracusan guard 
at the river Cacyparis, crosses, and gets 
as far as the Erineus. 

1. τῆς νυκτός: during the night 
preceding the sixth day after depart- 
ure. — 2. te: wanting in Vat. and 
omitted by Cl. on the ground that it 
has no correlative, kal... γεγενημέ- 
vas being merely parenthetical ; but 


it would seem better with the other 
editt. to take re as co-ord. with καί, 
the two clauses giving the grounds of 


κακῶς εἶχε. For the omission of ὅτι 


' before καὶ κατατετραυματισμένοι ἦσαν, 


cf. ν. 61. 17, βουλόμενοι ἄλλως τε προσ- 
γενέσθαι σφίσι, καὶ ὕμηροι... ἦσαν αὐ- 
7601.— 5. πυρὰ καύσαντας : the read- 
ing of Vat. for καύσαντες is preferable 
after τῷ Νικίᾳ καὶ Δημοσθένει ἐδόκει. 
See onc. 74. 6. πυρά, the pl. of the 
second decl., watch-fires. The object 
was to deceive the enemy with regard 
to their departure. —6. τοὐναντίον 7: 
as in vi. 68. 14. 

7. nv δὲ ἡ ξύμπασα ὁδὸς αὕτη κτέ.: 
this parenthetical remark, introduced 
by the epexegetical δέ, refers, as the 
expression 7 ξύμπασα ὅδός clearly 
shows, to the goal of the whole march 
after the departure from Syracuse, not 
simply to the direction taken in the 
night after the fifth day. Thuc. says 
expressly, and prob. in contradiction 
of varying reports about it: “from 
the beginning the plan of the march 
was not toward Catana (northward), 


153 


154 


THUCYDIDES 


Vil. 80. 


, ε Ἂ, ν 5 > Ν r , oO , 
ξύμπασα ὁδὸς αὐτὴ ουὐυκ επὶι Κατάνης TW OTPATEVMATL, 


ἀλλὰ κατὰ TO ἕτερον μέρος τῆς Σικελίας τὸ πρὸς Καμά- 


10 ριναν καὶ Τέλαν καὶ τὰς ταύτῃ πόλεις καὶ “Ἑλληνίδας καὶ 


β Ἵ . καύσαντες οὖν πυρὰ πολλὰ ἐχώρουν ἐν TH 
αρβάρους ρ Xp Η) 


’ὔ 
νυκτι. 


Ν 5» aA ea A Ἂν “ , 
καὶ QUTOLS, OLOV φιλεῖ και πασι στρατοπέδοις, 


μάλιστα δὲ τοῖς μεγίστοις, φόβοι καὶ δείματα ἐγγίγνεσθαι, 


ἄλλως τε καὶ ἐν νυκτί τε καὶ διὰ πολεμίας καὶ [ἀπὸ] πολε- 


δ᾿ 5 , 5 “ / a Ἀ 
15 μίων οὐ πολὺ ἀπεχόντων ἰουσιν, ἐμπίπτει ταραχή: καὶ 


Ν Ν Τ le ’ ἊΝ ε δι , ’ Ν 
τὸ μὲν Νικίου στράτευμα, WOTEP Ἤγειτο, ξυνέμενέ τε καὶ 


προύλαβε πολλῷ, τὸ δὲ Δημοσθένους, τὸ ἥμισυ μάλιστα 


Ν ᾽ὔ 5 / \ 3 ’, > id 
και πλέον, ἀπεσπάσθη TE Και ATAKTOTEPOV EX WPEL. 


Ψ 
αμα 


\ no 5 “ [2 μ᾿ Ν , Ν 5 
δὲ ™ EW ἀφικνουνται ομως προς THY θάλασσαν, και εσ- 


/ > \ eQan ἊΝ oe al / ’ > , 
20 βάντες ες ΤῊΝ ὁδὸν ΤῊΝ EXwpivyv καλουμένην €TOPEVOVTO, 


9 > Ἂς , ΒΩ 

οτως, ἐπειδὴ γένοιντο επι 
Ν Ν Ν » +” 

παρα TOV TOT O[LOV LOLEVY AVW 


but in the direction of Camarina and 
Gela (south-westward).” When, there- 
fore, Diod. xiii. 18 says, προήεσαν ἐπὶ 
Κατάνης, he has either misunderstood 
Thuc., or he follows another account 
not appreved by Thue. See App. 
11. καύσαντες οὖν : resumptive 
after the digression. See on ὁ. 6. 7; 
42. 24.—12. οἷον φιλεῖ: quod solet. 
Of. iv. 125. 7, ὅπερ φιλεῖ μεγάλα στρα- 
τόπεδα ἀσαφῶς ἐκπλήγνυσθαι. --- 13. 
φόβοι καὶ δείματα: in explanatory 
appos. to οἷον. Bloomf. compares Eur. 
Hel. 312, φόβος εἰς τὸ δεῖμα μ᾽ ἄγει, to 
prove that δεῖμα is stronger than φό- 
Bos, the former referring esp. to panic 
terrors. φόβος and δέος are distin- 
guished by Prodicus, Plat. Prot. 358 4. 
For the pl. of words expressing emo- 
tion or passion, see Kr. Spr. 44, 9, 4. 
- 14. [ἀπό] : bracketed by Cl., with 
the majority of the editt., as ad- 
mitting no intelligible explanation. 
Ullrich (Beitr. III. p. 28) explains, 


“ lal Lal , 
τῷ ποτάμῳ τῳ Κακύυπαρει, 


διὰ μεσογείας - ἤλπιζον γὰρ 


“ooing away from enemies not far dis- 
‘tant.’ So Kr., Arn., Bm. — 15. ἰοῦσι: 
belongs to αὐτοῖς, not to στρατοπέδοις. 
16. ὥσπερ ἡγεῖτο: referring to the 
advantage which Nicias had, and giv- 
ing the ground of προὔλαβε, rather 
than of ξυνέμενε. --- 17. σπρούλαβε 
πολλῴ: sc. ὁδοῦ. Cf. iv. 33. 
12, προλαμβάνοντες ῥᾳδίως τῆς φυγῆς; 
Hat. iii. 105. 6, προλαμβάνειν τῆς ὁδοῦ ; 
Liv. xxxvi. 19, aliquantum viae 
praeceperat., (Arn.) πολλῷ is dat. 
of degree of difference. Kr. Spr. 48, 
15, 9.—18. καὶ πλέον: cf. c. 48. 24. 
dpa δὲ τῇ ἕῳ: sixth day. From 
here to the end of the chap. the 
events related refer to the division of 
Nicias alone, as Holm (II. p. 401) has 
shown by the most careful investiga- 
tion, coming to the same result that 
Grote had reached by another way. 
— 20. ὁδὸν τὴν ᾿Εἰλωρίνην : cf. vi. 66. 
17.— 21. ἐπὶ Κακυπάρει : now Fiume 
di Cassibile. For the usual order of 


THS 


THUCYDIDES , VII. 80, 81. 1 


Ν Ν x ra ἃ ’ὔ > 4 
και TOUS Σικελοὺς TQAUTY) OUS μετεπέμψαντο ATAVTYO€- 


σθαι. 


> Si ὌΝ 35 Ww Ἄν. ἃ las a a L's 
επει 7) EVEVOVTO επὶι τῳ ποτάμῳ, ευρον και €V- 


“ ’, La) νι / > / 7 
25 ταῦθα φυλακήν τινα τῶν Συρακοσιων ἀποτειχίζουσάν ΤΕ 


\ 5 ”™ XN / 
και ATOOTAVPOVOAV TOV πορον. 


Ν 4 5...» ὶὴς 
καὶ βιασάμενοι αὐτὴν 


΄ ’ὔ \ Ν Ν 5 ἌἍ > ἣν 5» 
διέβησάν τε τὸν ποταμὸν καὶ ἐχώρουν αὖθις πρὸς ἄλλον 
ποταμόν, τὸν Epweov: ταύτῃ γὰρ οἱ ἡγεμόνες ἐκέλευον. 

τὶ # 5 ε / Ν ε , ε 7 
81ἐν τούτῳ δ᾽ οἱ Συρακόσιοι καὶ ot ξύμμαχοι, ws 7 τε 
ε , 3 4 Ν A Χ > ’ 5 
ἡμέρα ἐγένετο καὶ ἔγνωσαν τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους ἀπεληλυ.- 


΄ὔ > a Τὰ ε Ν \ , > Se ὦ 
θότας, ἐν αἰτίᾳ τε οἱ πολλοὶ τὸν Γύλιππον εἶχον ἑκόντα 


5 lal Ν > / Ν Ν ’ὔ ᾿ὕ a 

ἀφεῖναι τους Αθηναίους, και κατα τάχος διώκοντες, 1) 
ἊΣ ΄, i tg 

5 οὐ χαλεπῶς ἠσθάνοντο κεχωρηκότας, καταλαμβάνουσι 


περὶ ἀρίστου ὥραν. 


\ - A Ν ἴω 
καὶ ὡς προσέμιξαν τοῖς μετὰ τοῦ 


Δημοσθένους, ὑστέροις τε οὖσι καὶ σχολαίτερον καὶ 
ἀτακτότερον χωροῦσιν, ὡς τῆς νυκτὸς τότε ξυνεταρά. 
χθησαν, εὐθὺς προσπεσόντες ἐμάχοντο, καὶ οἱ ἱππῆς τῶν 
10 Συρακοσίων ἐκυκλοῦντό τε ῥᾷον αὐτούς, δίχα δὴ ὄντας, 


\ a 5 Se 
και ξυνῆγον ες Ταῦτο. 


words, see Kr. Spr. 50, 7, 1; WKiihn. 
462, note 1. Cf. c. 82. 15.—23. ods 
μετεπέμψαντο : for the facts, ef ὁ. 77. 
32, and on the mid. (Vat.), see App. 
to 1. 112. 6. For aor. indic. instead of 
opt. after secondary tense, see GMT. 
689, 3. 

27. ἐχώρουν πρὸς... τὸν “Hpiveov: 
advanced towards the Erineus. In ὁ. 
82. 15 they are said to have arrived 
there. The Erineus cannot be identi- 
fied with certainty. Leake considers 
it the present Falconara; Holm (II. 
p. 401), the Cavallata. — 28. ταύτῃ: 

sc. χωρεῖν. Why the guides directed 
_ them to take this course can only be 
conjectured. . 

81. In the meantime the Syracusans, 
learning that the Athenians had with- 
drawn during the night, pursue them 
eagerly. They overtake Demosthenes 


Jirst, who had been left considerably 


behind with his division, and compel him 
to halt. He takes. shelter in a walled 
enclosure, where he resists their continual 
attacks until his men are completely 
exhausted. 

1. ἡ ἡμέρα : 1.6. that following the 
nocturnal occurrences just described 
and referred to ο. 80. 15, ἅμα τῇ ἕῳ; 
hence the art. — 3. ἐν αἰτίᾳ... εἶχον : = 
ἐπητιῶντο. See oni. 35.10. With follow- 
ing inf. also in νυ. 65. 24. 
6, 6. — 5. οὐ χαλεπῶς : with ἡ σθάνοντο. 

8. τῆς νυκτὸς τότε: refers back to 
ce. 80. 18. See on 6. 31. 12.—10. 
δίχα δὴ ὄντας : Schol. κεχωρισμένους 
ἀπὸ τῶν μετὰ τοῦ Νικίου. δή referring 
to ῥᾷον and giving with the partic. 
the reason. Cf. iv. 59. 14; vi. So. 14. 
—11. ξυνῆγον ἐς ταὐτό: they drove 
them together. See on ec, 36. 91. 


or 
Or 


Ἂν Ν / , 5 lanl 
τὸ δὲ Νικίου στράτευμα ἀπειχεν 3 


Kr. Spr. 50, : 


156 


15 


20 


THUCYDIDES VII. 81. 


5 nw 


, θ \ ΄ δί Α͂ Aa , Ν 
εν TW προσ εν και πεντΉ κοντα σταοιους ασσον τε γὰρ 


« 
ε 


΄ > ΄ 3 \ ε ΄ > a , 
ὁ Νικίας ἦγε, νομίζων ov τὸ ὑπομένειν ἐν τῷ τοιούτῳ 
ἑκόντας εἶναι καὶ μάχεσθαι σωτηρίαν, ἀλλὰ τὸ ὡς τάχι- 
lanl nw ο ͵ὔ 

στα ὑποχωρεῖν, τοσαῦτα μαχομένους ὅσα ἀναγκάζονται " 
ε Ν ’, 5 , ’ὔ Ν , 5 ,ὔ 

ὁ δὲ Δημοσθένης ἐτύγχανέ τε τὰ πλείω ἐν πόνῳ ξυνεχε- 

στέρῳ ὧν διὰ τὸ ὑστέρῳ ἀναχωροῦντι αὐτῷ πρώτῳ ἐτπι- 

κεῖσθαι τοὺς πολεμίους, καὶ τότε γνοὺς τοὺς Συρακο- 
΄ ΄ > , a x > , 

σίους διώκοντας οὐ προυχώρει μᾶλλον ἢ ἐς μάχην ξυνε- 

τάσσεϊο, ἕως ἐνδιατρίβων κυκλοῦταί τε UT αὐτῶν καὶ 
΄Ν la > 

ἐν πολλῷ θορύβῳ αὐτός τε καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ [᾿Αθηναῖοι] 

ἦσαν - ἀνειληθέντες γὰρ ἔς τι χωρίον ᾧ κύκλῳ μὲν τει- 

4 “A εν \ » θ Ν » 0 aN / δὲ 5 

χίον περιῆν, ὁδὸς δὲ ἔνθεν τε καὶ ἔνθεν, ἐλάας δὲ οὐκ 


12. καὶ πεντήκοντα σταδίους : Vat. 
has ἑκατὸν καὶ πεντήκοντα, and so Val- 
la read, centum quinquaginta. 
But such a gain in so short a time is 
impossible. St. proposes rpels καὶ πεν- 
τήκοντα (γ΄ for p’), but so exact a state- 
ment is hardly admissible under the 
circumstances. vel. The 
Schol. says, περιττὸς 6 καὶ σύνδεσμος. 
- θᾶσσον τε yap: τε correlative to δέ 
before Δημοσθένης, as in ili. 52.13; v. 
9. 35; viii. 16. 12. τε γάρ = καὶ yap 
(etenim) does not occur before 
Aristotle. Kiihn. 544, note 3.—14. 
ἑκόντας εἶναι: this seemingly pleo- 
nastic expression occurs generally 
only in neg. sents. GMT. 780; H. 
956a. Cf. ii. 89. 29; iv. οὗ. 14; vi. 
14. 8. ---- σωτηρίαν : cf. vi. 60. 17.— 15. 
τοσαῦτα ὅσα: in restrictive significa- 
tion (see on ii. 12. 1; Kr. Spr. 46, 5, 
4), only so much as. Cf.c. 49.1. The 
acc. is cognate. 

16. τὰ πλείω ἐν πόνῳ ξυνεχεστέρῳ 
ὧν: for the most part under more con- 
tinual pressure, i.e. than Nicias. — 18. 


/ 
και = 


, Ν 
καὶ τότε: and now also, opp. to τὰ 


πλείω. ---, 19. οὐ προυχώρει . €s 


μάχην ξυνετάσσετο.: “he was trying 
to keep his troops ready for battle, 
rather than to press forward.” — 21. 
[᾿Αθηναῖοι]: considered a gloss by 
Kr., St., and Cl., as not all were Athe- 
nians. Cf. c. 82. 6, τινες πόλεις ov 
πολλαί. But in c. 86. 17 Συρακοσίων 
includes also the allies; why may not 
᾿Αθηναῖοι here? — 22. ἀνειληθέντες : 
Schol. συστραφέντες. “Driven back 
into a small space.” Lobeck pro- 
posed ξυνειληθέντες ; but later writers 
have ἀνειλεῖν in the same sense. Cf 
Arr. An. iv. 5. 8, of δὲ τοὺς διαβαί- 
νοντας ἀντιμέτωποι ταχθέντες avelAouy 
ἐς τὸν ποταμόν. --- 29. ἔνθεν τε καὶ 
ἔνθεν : on both sides. Supply ἦν from 
περιῆν. Kr. Spr. 62,4,1. Grote ex- 
plains (VII. c. 60, p. 180, note), “a 
road which passed through the walled 
ground, entering at one side and 
coming out at the other.” But the 
Greek does not mean this. —éAdas δὲ 
εἶχεν : free continuation of the rel. 
sent. without repetition of the pron. 
See on ὁ. 29.27. Plut. Wie. 27 calls 
this place Ππολυζήλειον αὐλήν. He 
adds from Philistus, that Demosthe- 


THUCYDIDES VII. 81, 82. 


ὀλίγας εἶχεν, ἐβάλλοντο περισταδόν. 


1ὅ 


25 βολαῖς καὶ οὐ ξυσταδὸν μάχαις οἱ Συρακόσιοι εἰκότως 


> A Ν x 5 , . 5 / 5 
EX PwWVTO* TO γὰρ ἀποκινδυνεύειν προς ἀνθρώπους απο - 


΄ ᾿ > Ν 5 ΄ la) > »¥ Xd Ν “ 
νενοημένους οὐ πρὸς ἐκείνων μᾶλλον ἦν ἐτι ἢ πρὸς τῶν 


5 , mY ν f 2 , 5 , Ca τ 
Αθηναίων, και aa φειδώ TE τις ἐγίγνετο ἐπ εὑπρα- 


γίᾳ ἤδη σαφεῖ μὴ προαναλωθῆναί τῳ καὶ ἐνόμιζον καὶ 


ἃ ww 
80 Ws ταύτῃ τῇ ἰδέᾳ καταδαμασάμενοι λήψεσθαι αὐτούς. 


89 ἐπειδὴ δ᾽ οὖν δι’ ἡμέρας βάλλοντες πανταχόθεν τοὺς 


᾿Αθηναίους καὶ ξυμμάχους ἑώρων ἤδη τεταλαιπωρημέ- 


νους τοῖς τε τραύμασι καὶ τῇ ἄλλῃ κακώσει, κήρυγμα 


ἴων ’ὕ \ , δε «ε ’ 
ποιοῦνται Γύλιππος καὶ Συρακόσιοι καὶ Ov ξύμμαχοι 


A Ν la A » β aN 2 θ ΄ 
TT P@TOV μεν τῶν νησιώτων ει τις Ουλέται ΕΠ EAEV εριᾳ 


nes had before this made an attempt 
to take his own life; so too Paus. 
i. 29.12. — 24. περισταδόν, ξυσταδόν : 
both ady. forms found only here in 
Thue. The latter is connected, even 
without the art., with μάχαις, = στα- 
Stars μάχαις. Kr. Spr. 50, 8,19. Cf. 
iv. 38. 30, ἡ μάχη ov σταδία ἦν. 

26. ἀποκινδυνεύειν πρὸς ἀνθρώπους 
ἀπονενοημένους : “to risk their lives 
against despairing men.” Cf. Xen. 
Hell. vii. 5. 12, rots ἀπονενοημένοις 
οὐδεὶς ἂν ὑποσταίη; Zon. Ann. vii. 25, 
μὴ διακινδυνεύειν πρὸς ἀνθρώπους ἄπο- 
νοίᾳ χρωμένους“. --- 28. φειδώ τις ἐγί- 
" -yvero: = φειδώ τινα (σφῶν αὐτῶν) ἐποι- 
οὔντο, ΟΥ̓ ἐφείδοντο σφῶν αὐτῶν. --- ἐπ᾽ 
εὐπραγίᾳ ἤδη σαφεῖ: on the ground 
that success was now assured. Cf. ο: 
59. 2; 62. 1.--- 29. μὴ προαναλωθῆναί 
τῳ : dependent on φειδὼ ἐγίγνετο, with 
which τῳ (1.6. τινι Συρακοσίῳ) is to be 
construed. The inf. with μή comes 
under the const. after verbs of hin- 
drance or freedom. GMT. 815,1; H. 
1029. The Schol. gives in free con- 
nexion the proper sense, ἐφείδετο αὐ- 
τός Tis ἑαυτοῦ, ὥστε μὴ προαναλωθῆνχαι. 


- καὶ ws: Schol. χωρὶς τοῦ αὐτοὶ προα- 
ναλωθῆναι καὶ κινδυνεῦσαι. --- 30. ταύτῃ 
τῇ ἰδέᾳ: Schol. ἤγουν τούτῳ τῷ τρόπῳ 
τῆς μάχης, i.e. by surrounding and 
shooting them down from a distance, 
not engaging in a ξυσταδὸν μάχη. 

82. In answer to the first summons 
of the Syracusans, in which freedom is 
promised to any allies of the Athenians 
who will come over to them, those from 
a few cities surrender. A capitulation 
is then concluded also with the others, 
about 6000 in number, on condition that 
their lives shall be spared. All then sur- 
render, and give up their arms and prop- 
erty, and are led away to Syracuse. 
Nicias, however, crosses with his divis- 
ion the Erineus, and encamps on a high 
place. 

1. δ᾽ οὖν: for γοῦν of the Mss., 
seems necessary, in order to resume, 
after the digression, the account 
broken off at c. 81. 24. See on 6. 59. 
1; i. 3.19. For οὖν resumptive, see 
on ὁ. 6. 7.—8v ἡμέρας : all day long. 
— 5. τῶν νησιωτῶν : reference is made 
esp. to those enumerated in c. 57. ὃ 4 
(ὑπήκοοι ὄντες καὶ ἀνάγκῃ ὅμως ἠκολού» 


fod 


d 


τοιαύταις δὲ προσ- 5 


108 THUCYDIDES VIL 82, 83. 


ε » 5 - Ν 5 ’ ’ ’ 5 
ὡς σφᾶς ἀπιέναι: Kal ἀπεχώρησάν τινες πόλεις οὐ πολ- 
λαί. 


Ν Ν ’ ε ’ὔ , ν 9 
τοὺς μετὰ Δημοσθένους ὁμολογία γίγνεται ὥστε ὅπλα τε 


3» > 9 Ν Ν Ἀ ¥ 7 
επειτα ὃ υστερον καὶ προς TOUS ἄλλους απαντας ἃ 


»“» Ν Ν 9 “ δέ ΄, ,ὔ ͵ὔ 
παραδοῦναι καὶ μὴ ἀποθανεῖν μηδένα μήτε βιαίως μήτε 
A , lal 5 , 5 , / Ν , 
10 δεσμοῖς μὴτε TNS αναγκαιοτατὴς ἐνδείᾳ διαίτης. και παρε- 3 
, “ , 
δοσαν ol πάντες σφᾶς αὐτοὺς ἑξακισχίλιοι, καὶ TO ap- 
, a > 9 6 > / > > (ὃ 
γύριον ὃ εἶχον ἅπαν κατέθεσαν ἐσβαλόντες ἐς ἀσπίδας 
ὑπτίας, καὶ ἐνέπλησαν ἀσπίδας τέσσαρας. καὶ τούτους 
Ἀ 5 Ν 5 ’ 5 A , > , Ν Ν ε 
μὲν εὐθὺς ἀπεκόμιζον ἐς τὴν πόλιν: Νικίας δὲ καὶ οἱ 
5 » Lal 4 “~ ε , 5 Ὁ“ 5 4, Ν Ἀ 

15 μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ ταύτῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἀφικνοῦνται ἐπὶ τὸν ποταμὸν 
ἧς 5» fs A Ν Ν ’ , ~ Ἀ 
τὸν Ἐρινεόν, καὶ διαβὰς πρὸς μετέωρόν τι καθῖσε τὴν 
στρατιάν. 

83 Oi δὲ Συρακόσιοι τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ καταλαβόντες αὐτὸν 1 
ἔλεγον, ὅτι οἱ μετὰ Δημοσθένους παραδεδώκοιεν σφᾶς 
αὐτούς, κελεύοντες κἀκεῖνον τὸ αὐτὸ δρᾶν. 6 δ᾽ ἀπιστῶν 

4 ε ys ’ / ε 5 5 ἮΝ, 
σπένδεται ἱππέα πέμψαι σκεψόμενον. ὡς δ᾽ οἰχόμενος 3 
5 4 7 4, 5 4 
5 ἀπήγγειλε πάλιν παραδεδωκότας, ἐπικηρυκεύεται Tov- 


@ovy), and whose desertion was first to 
be expected. The gen. depends on εἴ 
Tis. —ém ἐλευθερίᾳ : on condition of per- 
sonal liberty, i.e. that they should not 
be made slaves. For ἐπί with dat. 
of condition or determining circum- 
stances, see Kr. Spr. 68, 41,7. Cf. i. 
13. 4, ete. — 6. ὡς σφᾶς ἀπιέναι: be- 
longing both to κήρυγμα ποιοῦνται and 
εἴ τις βούλεται. 

7. ἔπειτα ὕστερον : as in ii. 9. 7, 
and often. The sent. is independent, 
where we should expect ἔπειτα εἰ κτέ. 
answering to πρῶτον μὲν εἰ κτέ. --- 8. 
ὥστε: oncondition that. GMT. 587.2; 
Η. 953 b.—11. ot πάντες: with éfa- 
κισχίλιοι, 6000 in all. See onc. i. 31. 
—12. κατέθεσαν: deposited, vs in i. 
27. 6.—13. τούτους μέν: se. 
ταύτῃ τῇ 


τοὺς 
μετὰ Δημοσθένους. --- 15. 


ἡμέρᾳ: the sixth day.—16. καθῖσε: 
cf. vi. 66. 2. 

83. Nicias is overtaken by the Syra- 
cusans ; and learning the fate of Demos- 
thenes, he offers a large indemnity in 
money with the hope of getting more fa- 
vourable conditions. But the proposal is 
rejected, and a last attempt to steal 
away during the night fails, only 300 
succeeding in breaking through the 
guards. 

1. τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ : the seventh day. — 
4. σπένδεται... πέμψαι : rare const. 
Cf. iii. 109. 12, orévéovrm . . . ἀποχω- 
petv. The verb has generally the acc., 
11. 73.5; il. 24. 18> τοῦ. 105 ἘΠῚ ἘΝ 

oixopevos : indicates the immediate 
departure of the messenger. See on 
c. 7.6.— 5. ἀπήγγειλε παραδεδωκότας : 
sc. τοὺς μετὰ Δημοσθένους σφᾶς αὐτούς. 


THUCYDIDES VII. 83, 84. 


, Ν ἫΝ “Ὁ ΄ 
λίππῳ καὶ Συρακοσίοις εἶναι ἑτοῖμος ὑπὲρ ᾿Αθηναίων 


an ν -) ὋΝ 4 ει , » Ἂν ψΨ, 

ξυμβῆναι ὅσα ἀνήλωσαν χρήματα Συρακόσιοι ἐς τὸν πό- 
ἴω CY ἴω, Lyd an 

λεμον, ταῦτα ἀποδοῦναι, ὥστε τὴν μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ στρατιὰν 


> La 5 , 4 δ᾽ Se “Δ Ν ’ 5 “ 

ἀφεῖναι αὐτούς - μέχρι οὗ ἂν τὰ χρήματα ἀποδοθῇ, 
ΕΣ ΄ὕ > ΄ c ΄ Ψ Ν , 

10 ἄνδρας δώσειν ᾿Αθηναίων ὁμήρους, ἕνα κατὰ τάλαντον. 


/ Ν 
οἱ δὲ Συρακόσιοι καὶ Γύλιππος οὐ προσεδέχοντο τοὺς 


λόγους, ἀλλὰ προσπεσόντες καὶ περιστάντες πανταχόθεν 


ἔβαλλον καὶ τούτους μέχρι ὀψέ. 

ρως σίτου τε καὶ τῶν ἐπιτηδείων ἀπορίᾳ. 
QA ΄,ὕ X. ue la 

15 νυκτὸς φυλάξαντες TO ἡσυχάζον 

> td ’ὔ΄ Ἂς 4 \ 

ἀναλαμβάανουσί τε TA ὅπλα, καὶ 

ται καὶ ἐπαιάνισαν - γνόντες δὲ 


θάνουσι, κατέθεντο πάλιν πλὴν 


εἶχον δὲ καὶ οὗτοι πονή- 
ὅμως δὲ τῆς 
ἔμελλον πορεύεσθαι. καὶ 
«ε Ss / > / 

οἱ Συρακόσιοι αἰσθάνον.- 
οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ὅτι οὐ λαν- 


τριακοσίων μάλιστα ἀν- 


δρῶν" οὗτοι δὲ διὰ τῶν φυλάκων βιασάμενοι ἐχώρουν 


8477s νυκτὸς ἡ ἐδύναντο. 


— 6. ὑπὲρ ᾿Αθηναίων : 1.6. in the name 
of the people of Athens.—8. ὥστε: 
on condition that. See on ὁ. 82. 8.— 
9. μέχρι 8 οὗ av: Vat. for μέχρι οὗ δ᾽ 
ἄν of the rest of the Mss. The closer 
connexion of the rel. pron. with ἄν is 
more forcible. — 10. ἕνα κατὰ τάλαν- 
τον: “because about a talent was the 
ransom of a free man.” (Kr.) — 12. 
περιστάντες ἔβαλλον καὶ τούτους : Tre- 
ferring to c. 81. 34, ἐβάλλοντο περιστα- 
δόν (of the soldiers of Demosthenes). 
13. μέχρι ὀψέ : for connexion of prep. 
with ady., see Kiihn. 446, Ὁ; Kr. Spr. 
66, 1, 4. 

13. πονήρως : for accent and mean- 
ing, see App. on c. 48. 2. Cf. Xen. 
Cyr. vii. 5. 75, πονήρως... ἔχει. -- 
14. σίτου τε kal τῶν ἐπιτηδείων : the 
part co-ord. with the whole. Kr. Spr. 
69, 32,2. See one. 62. 6. 

τῆς νυκτὸς TO ἡσυχαΐον : Schol. καθ᾽ 
ὃ μάλιστα τῆς νυκτὸς ἔμελλον οἱ πολέ- 
μιοι ἡσυχάζειν. Cf. Liv. xxv. 9,nox 


Νικίας δὲ ἐπειδὴ ἡμέρα 


ἐγένετο 


concubia; Tac. Ann. i. 39. The 
use of the neut. sing. of the pres. 
partic. as an abstract noun is esp. 
freq. in Thue. GMT. 829; Kr Spr 
43, 4, 28.— 16. καὶ ot Συρακόσιοι 
. ἐπαιάνισαν : see on c. 44. 32. 
καί is not strictly co-ord. with the 
preceding τε, but introduces the main 
clause vividly in paratactic const. “as 
soon as the Athenians take up their 
arms, the Syracusans observe it and 
raise the battle-cry.” Kiihn. 518, 8.— 
17. γνόντες δέ : after the irregularity 
just mentioned, the sent. is continued 
not by καί, but by the stronger δέ (see 
on 6. 81. 12); though both principal 
verbs, ἀναλαμβάνουσι and κατέθεντο, 
are so closely connected that one obj. 
(ὅπλα) suffices for both. —19. διὰ 
τῶν φυλάκων βιασάμενοι: see on ὁ. 
79. ὃ. The fate of these 500 is re- 
lated in c. 85. 11. 
84. Nevertheless, on the following 


morning Nicias sets out with his ex- 


159 


σι 


160 


10 


THUCYDIDES VII. 84. 


ἦγε τὴν στρατιάν * οἱ δὲ Συρακόσιοι καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι προσ- 
έκειντο τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον πανταχόθεν βάλλοντές τε καὶ 
κατακοντίζοντες. καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἠπείγοντο πρὸς τὸν 
᾿Ασσίναρον ποταμόν, ἅμα μέν, βιαζόμενοι ὑπὸ τῆς παν- 
ταχόθεν προσβολῆς ἱππέων» τε πολλῶν καὶ τοῦ ἄλλου 
» 7 ens ΄ ¥ EN A \ 
ὄχλου, οἰόμενοι ῥᾷόν τι σφίσιν ἔσεσθαι, ἢν διαβῶσι τὸν 
ποταμόν, ἅμα δὲ ὑπὸ τῆς ταλαιπωρίας καὶ τοῦ πιεῖν ἐπι- 
θυμίᾳ. ὡς δὲ γίγνονται ἐπ᾿ αὐτῷ, ἐσπίπτουσιν οὐδενὶ 
, »Ὦ τᾷ Ν nw 4 ww 5 4A nw 
κόσμῳ ἔτι, ἀλλὰ πᾶς TE τις διαβῆναι αὐτὸς πρῶτος Bov- 
, ᾿ς ε , 5 ’ὔ Ν » \ 
hopevos καὶ οἱ πολέμιοι ἐπικείμενοι χαλεπὴν ἤδη τὴν 
διάβασιν ἐποίουν - ἀθρόοι γὰρ ἀναγκαζόμενοι χωρεῖν ἐπέ- 
πιπτόν τε ἀλλήλοις καὶ κατεπάτουν, περί τε τοῖς δορα- 


’, Ν » 
τίοις καὶ σκεύεσιν οἱ μὲν 


hausted army, and reaches, under con- 
stant attacks of the enenviyy the river 
Assinarus. In their attempt to cross, 
and while slaking their thirst in the 
river, a large number perish, partly by 
the weapons of the enemy, partly by 
drowning. 

1. ἡμέρα: the eighth day.— 2. ἤγε 
τὴν στρατιάν: 1.6. continued his 
march, 

5. ᾿Ασσίναρον : now Falconara, acc. 
to Holm, II. p. 401 (or Fiume di Noto, 
Holm, Karlsr. Vortr., which see for 
particulars). — dpa μέν, βιαζόμενοι 
κτέ.: the Athenians press on to the 
river for two reasons: (1) because 
they hoped, when they should have 
crossed the river, to suffer less from 
the enemy; (2) on account of their 
thirst. Hence ἅμα μέν, which intro- 
duces the first ground, is to be taken 
with οἰόμενοι, and the partic. Bra é- 
μενοι is explanatory of this: “being 
hard pressed on all sides, they hoped 
to get some relief by crossing the 
river.” The second reason is added 
without a partic. by means of the gen. 


εὐθὺς διεφθείροντο, ot δὲ 


with ὑπό and the simple dat. ἐπιθυμίᾳ. 
Kr. Spr. 59, 2, 3. 

9. οὐδενὶ κόσμῳ ἔτι : no longer in any 
order. Cf. ἔτι νυκτός, iv. 26.20. οὐδενὶ 
κόσμῳ, as in c. 23. 16; 40. 10; ii. 52. 
5; iii. 108. 16.—10. πᾶς τέ τις: see 
on 6. 60.15. τε connects πᾶς with καὶ 
οἱ πολέμιοι, both of which are subjs. 
of χαλεπὴν . . . ἐποίουν. ---- 19. περὶ τοῖς 
δορατίοις καὶ σκεύεσιν κτέ. : “some 
perished at once, pierced by their 
own spears; others, becoming entan- 
gled (ἐμπαλασσόμενοι = ἐμπλεκόμενοι, 
Schol.) in their trappings, were car- 
ried away by the current.” As there 
had been rain four days before (cf. e. 
79. 9), we may suppose that the 
stream was not at its lowest point. 
of wey... διεφθείροντο goes with περὶ 
τοῖς δορατίοις and of δὲ... κατέρρεον 
Cf. Plut. Sull. 18, κατὰ 
πρανοῦς φερόμενοι τοῖς. δόρασι περιέ- 
πιπτον αὐτοὶ τοῖς ἑαυτῶν. The σκεύη 
are, as in vi. 31. 29, to be understood 
of the military equipment outside of 
the real arms (breastplate, helmet, 
etc.). On ἐμπαλασσόμενοι, cf. Hdt. 


with σκεύεσι. 


THUCYDIDES VII. 84, 85. 


15 ἐμπαλασσόμενοι κατέρρεον. 


101 


> Saf S828 , , a 
ες TQ, δι θάτερά TE TOV 4 


ποταμοῦ παραστάντες οἱ Συρακόσιοι (ἢν δὲ κρημνῶδες) 


ἔβαλλον ἄνωθεν τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους, πίνοντάς τε τοὺς πολ- 


Ν > v2 X > 4 ΕΣ “ “ > , 
λοὺς ἀσμένους καὶ ἐν κοίλῳ οντι τῷ ποταμῷ ἐν σφίσιν 


- ΄ 
αὖτο ι'ις ταρασσομεένους. 


ν 4, 5» 
οι TE Πελοποννήσιοι επικατα- : 


20 βάν ὺς ἐν τῷ αμῷ μάλιστα ἔσφαζ L TO ὕδω: 
QVTES TOUS EV τῳ TOTAL μαλι σφαζον, καὶ TO VOW) 


εὐθὺς 
πηλῷ 
δῦ τέλος 


εν τῳ 


διέφθαρτο, ἀλλ᾽ οὐδὲν ἧσσον ἐπίνετό τε ὁμοῦ τῷ 
ζ Ἢ Ν 4 > “ la 
ἡματωμένον καὶ περιμάχητον ἢν τοῖς πολλοῖς. 
\ rn aA Sia: 5 / a , 
δὲ νεκρῶν τε πολλῶν ἐπ᾽ ἀλλήλοις ἤδη κειμένων 


ποταμῷ καὶ διεφθαρμένου τοῦ στρατεύματος τοῦ 


ἴω \ » 
μὲν κατὰ τὸν ποταμόν, τοῦ δὲ Kai, εἴ TL διαφύγοι, ὑπὸ 


vii. 85. 11, ἐν ἕρκεσι ἐμπαλασσόμενοι 
διαφθείρονται. 

15. ἐς τὰ ἐπὶ θάτερα te: the parti- 
cle isso placed because the preceding 
phrase is regarded as one word. On 
the use of such phrases, see Kr. Spr. 
43, 4, 3.— 16. ἦν κρημνῶδες : without 
def. subj., τὰ ἐπὶ θάτερα, perhaps, be- 
ing understood. Cf. i. 63. 10, ἔστι 
καταφανές; vi. 101. 15, πηλῶδες ἦν. --- 
18. ἀσμένους : “greedily.” Vat. has 
ἀσμένως, but the ady. is not used by 
Thue. See Herbst, Gegen Cobet, p. 22. 
- ἐν κοίλῳ ὄντι τῴ ποταμῷ : 1.6. with 
a deep bed. The reference is to a 
river which has cut a deep channel, 
and hence, when the water is low, 
flows between high and steep banks. 
So is to be explained Polyb. xxii. 
20. 4, ἐγεφύρωσε τὸν Sayydpiov ποτα- 
pov τελέως κοῖλον ὄντα καὶ δύσβατον. 
Cf. also Plut. Cam. 3, οἱ δὲ ποταμοὶ 
πάντες ὥσπερ ἀεὶ κοῖλοι καὶ ταπεινοὶ 
διὰ θέρους ἐρρύησαν. --- ἐν σφίσιν αὐτοῖς 
Tapaccopevous: cf. c. 67. 14. 

19. ἐπικαταβάντες : 1.6. going down 
to the very edge of the water. C7. c. 
23. 2; 35. 9; iv. 11. 2.—21. εὐθὺς 
διέφθαρτο : on the plpf. with εὐθύς to 


express instantaneous effect, see Kr. 
Spr. 55, 4, 2.— ὁμοῦ τῷ πηλῷ ἡμα- 
τωμένον : «although, in addition to the 
mud, it was bloody. ὁμοῦ with the dat. 
as in ὁ. 19. 25.—22. περιμάχητον : 
λέγεται TO περιτίμιον, περὶ οὗ τινες ἀλ- 
λήλοις διαμάχονται, ἵνα τούτου κρατῶσι 
καὶ τοῦτο κτῶνται. Schol. on Ar. 
Thesm. 326. Cf. Plat. Legg. 678 e, 
περιμάχητος ἣν αὐτοῖς ἢ τροφή. 

85. Finally Nicias surrenders to 
better 
Jrom him than from the Syracusans. 
Gylippus now orders the slaughter to be 
stopped. Of the survivors, however, the 
smaller part only become state prisoners, 
for very many are hidden away secretly 
and scattered as slaves over all Sicily. 


Gylippus, expecting treatment 


A very large number, too, had been 
killed, partly in the fighting on the 
march, partly in the last struggle. Of 
those who are sold into slavery, many 
escape later to Catana. 

1. νεκρῶν τε πολλῶν : Diod. xiii. 19 
puts the loss at the river at 18,000, 
and the captured at 7,000; but it is 
evident that he includes the army of 
Demosthenes. — 2. τοῦ στρατεύματος 
τοῦ μὲν... τοῦ δέ: part. appos. See 


ay 


102 


THUCYDIDES VII. 85. 


A ΄ , / ε Ν ’ 
τῶν ἱππέων, Νικίας Γυλίππῳ €QUTOV παραδίδωσι, πι- 


, as 5 A x A ΄ ‘ ε “A 
5 στεύσας μᾶλλον αὐτῷ ἢ τοῖς Συρακοσίοις" και εαὐυτῳ 


Ν ΄ 5 / > aA SAS \ / 
μεν χρήσασθαι ἐκέλευεν €KELVOV TE και Λακεδαιμονίους 


ὅ τι βούλονται, τοὺς δὲ ἄλλους στρατιώτας παύσασθαι 


φονεύοντας. 


καὶ ὁ Τύλιππος μετὰ τοῦτο ζωγρεῖν ἤδη 


af ee, \ 7, , 9 Ν 5 ὕ 
ἐκέλευε: καὶ τούς τε λοιπούς, ὁσους μὴ ἀπεκρύψαντο 


10 (πολλοὶ δὲ οὗτοι ἐγένοντο), ξυνεκόμισαν ζῶντας, καὶ ἐπὶ 


τοὺς τριακοσίους, ot τὴν φυλακὴν διεξῆλθον τῆς νυκτός, 


πέμψαντες τοὺς διωξομένους ξυνέλαβον. 


5 Ἂν, lal , 5 ἊΝ Ν 5 Ἂν 3 4 
ἀθροισθὲν τοῦ στρατεύματος ἐς τὸ κοινὸν οὐ πολὺ ἐγέ- 


veto, τὸ δὲ διακλαπὲν πολύ, καὶ διεπλήσθη πᾶσα Σικε- 


΄ὔ Ἄγε, τὰς Y 5 ya ὡς ΄ὕ Y lal \ 
15 Ma αὐτῶν, ἅτε οὐκ ἀπὸ ξυμβάσεως ὥσπερ τῶν μετὰ An- 


μοσθένους ληφθέντων. 


on ὁ. 31. 4.—4. πιστεύσας μᾶλλον : 
more fully explained, c. 86. § 4.—6. 
χρήσασθαι: the same formula also in 
li. 4. 32; iv. 69. 22. 

8. ζωγρεῖν : (from (@os and ἄγρα, 
ἀγρεύειν) the opposite of φονεύειν, 
meaning not so much take captive as 
give quarter. —9. τούς τελοιπούς : an- 
swers to καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς τριακοσίους (10). 
— ὅσους μὴ ἀπεκρύψαντο: sc. of Supa- 
κόσιοι, 1.6. 580 many as had not been 
hidden away by the Syracusan sol- 
diers, to be kept or sold as slaves. — 
10. ἐπὶ τοὺς τριακοσίους : cf. c. 83. ὃ 
ὃ.--- 11. διεξῆλθον : const., like δια- 
φυγεῖν, with the ace. Cf. Xen. Mem. 
lil. 9. 7, τὰς πύλας τοῦ τείχους διεξιών. 
—12. τοὺς διωξομένους : the art. with 
the fut. partic. equiv. to rel. with in- 
def. antec. (Lat. qui with subjv.). 
καὶ ὅγε 00; 4, 8: Of i: δας 90} ῖν: 
93. 13; vi. 20. 15. 

τὸ ἀθροισθὲν τοῦ στρατεύματος, TO 
... διακλαπέν : as to the collective 
use of the neut. partic., see on 6. 43. 
44.- 13. 
prisoners. 


> ‘ ’ ἐν 
€S TO KOLVOV: 1.06. as state 
The passage is imitated 


μέρος δέ τι οὐκ ὀλίγον καὶ ἀπέ. 


by Plut. Timol. 29: τῶν αἰχμαλώτων 
of μὲν πολλοὶ διεκλάπησαν ὑπὸ τῶν 
στρατιωτῶν, εἰς δὲ κοινὸν ἀπεδείχθη- 
σαν πεντακισχίλιοι. --- οὐ πολύ: “only 
about 1000; for the sum total of the 
captives was about 7000 (c. 87. 19), 
and of these about 6000 had belonged 
to the division of Demosthenes (ce. 82. 
11). Bm. But the full magnitude 
of the catastrophe is seen in the fact 
that eight days before there were still 
40,000 men (ce. 75. 26). 

16. μέρος δέ τι οὐκ ὀλίγον : still to 
be connected with τοῦ στρατεύματος, 
the three parts of which are τὸ a6por- 
σθὲν és Td κοινόν, τὸ διακλαπέν, anil 
μέρος τι οὐκ ὀλίγον ἀπέθανε. This 
last refers, therefore, to those of the 
division of Nicias who perished on 
the eighth day at and in the Assina- 
rus. The losses of the preceding days 
are expressly distinguished from this 
in 18: καὶ ἐν ταῖς ἄλλαις προσβολαῖς 

. οὐκ ὀλίγοι ἐτεθνήκεσαν (the plpf. 
indicating the events lying further 
back, opp. to ἀπέθανε in 16). With 
this view, the expression τῶν ἐν τῷ 


Φ 


Ν Ν 5 
TO μεν ovr 3 


THUCYDIDES VII. 85 86. 


θ ἘΞ ἘΝ 5> ΄ a \ "ἢ Ν De 
QVE* WAELOTOS yap 7) φόνος OUTOS και OUVOEVOS ἐλάσσων 


las 2 ™ = λ Lae λέ , 5 4 
των εν τῳ Ζικε ὑκῳ το εμῳ τουτῳ EVEVETO. 


4 nw 
καὶ ἐν ταῖς 


» An “ Ν Ν ΄ Oe 
ἄλλαις προσβολαῖς ταῖς κατὰ τὴν πορειαν συχναῖς γενο- 


20 μέναις οὐκ ὀλίγοι ἐτεθνήκεσαν. 


πολλοὶ δὲ ὅμως καὶ διέ. 


ε Ν ‘\ / ε Ν Ν ΄ \ 
φυγον, οι μεν και παραυτικα, οι δὲ και δουλεύσαντες και 


διαδιδράσκοντες ὕστερον - τούτοις δ᾽ ἦν ἀναχώρησις ἐς 


Κατάνην. 


Ξυναθροισθέντες δὲ οἱ Συρακόσιοι καὶ οἱ Edppa- 


“ > μή 
χοι, τῶν τε αἰχμαλώτων ὅσους ἐδύναντο πλείστους καὶ 


x la) 5 ΄ 5 , 5 Ν , 
τὰ σκῦλα ἀναλαβόντες, ἀνεχώρησαν ἐς τὴν πόλιν. 


\ 
και 


Ν Ν » > 4 \ lal ie ε fd 
τοὺς μὲν ἄλλους ᾿Αθηναίων καὶ τῶν ξυμμάχων ὁπόσους 
" ΄ > 
ἔλαβον κατεβίβασαν és τὰς λιθοτομίας, ἀσφαλεστάτην 


Σικελικῷ πολέμῳ τούτῳ (18) appears in 
the prop. light. Thuc. here compares 
only the horrible butchery at the 
Assinarus (φόνος οὗτος.) with the va- 
rious battles in this Sicilian campaign, 
including, besides those of the last 
seven days, the battle about Plem- 
myrium, Ο. 22ff., the night battle on 
Epipolae, ὁ. 43, the repeated sea- 
fights, c. 52, 69 ff. Certainly he had 
a right to emphasize this as_ the 
bloodiest of all (φόνος οὐδενὸς ἐλάσ- 
σων). We must, therefore, neither 
read with the Schol. Ἑλληνικῷ for 
Σικελικῷ, nor with Dobree and St. 
omit it. It is also to be observed in 
connexion with this passage that 
Thue. only very seldom uses 6 πόλε- 
μος οὗτος Of the Peloponnesian War, 
but far oftener ὅδε (as the subject of 
his own history). Cf. ec. 87. 20.— 21. 
δουλεύσαντες : after they had become 
slaves.(aor.). Kr. πε oy = 
καὶ διαδιδράσκοντες ὕστερον : running 
away afterwards (pres.). — 22. ἐς 
Κατάνην : to this refers Lys. xx. 24, 
where Polystratus says ἀνεσώθην és 
Κατάνην. 


Spr. 58 


86. The Syracusans bring into the 
city all captives that fall into their 
hands, together with the booty taken from 
them, and place them in the neighbouring 
But Nicias and Demos- 
thenes are immediately executed, against 


stone-quarries. 


the wish of Gylippus, who would have 
liked to carry them captive to Sparta. 

3. ἀναλαβόντες : see on ¢. 33. 29. 
Elsewhere used of levying troops or 
calling them to arms (ce. I. 27; 4.7; 
43. 18); here, of the captives and the 
booty which were brought along with 
them in triumphal procession. 

5. ἐς τὰς λιθοτομίας: cf. Cic. in 
Verr. 11. v. 27, latomias Syracu- 


sanas omnes audistis: pleri- 
que nostis. Opus est ingens, 


magnificum, regum et tyran- 
norum: totum est ex saxo in 
mirandam altitudinem de- 
presso et multorum operis 
penitus exciso: nihil tam 
clausum ad exitum, nihil tam 
saeptum nihil tam 
tutum ad custodiam nec fieri 
nec cogitari potest. In has 
latomias, si qui publice cus- 


undique, 


163 


164 


THUCYDIDES VII. 86. 


> , , + ΄, Ν Ν , 
εἶναι νομίσαντες τήρησιν, Νικίαν δὲ καὶ Δημοσθένην 


» lal ΝΙΝ 
ἄκοντος τοῦ Γυλίππου ἀπέσφαξαν. 


ὁ γὰρ Γύλιππος κα- 


’ὔ > ἈΝ A »¥ 
ov τὸ ἀγώνισμα ἐνόμιζέν οἱ εἶναι ἐπὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις Kal 


τοὺς ἀντιστρατήγους κομίσαι Λακεδαιμονίοις. 


ξυνέβαινε : 


10 δὲ τὸν μὲν πολεμιώτατον αὐτοῖς εἶναι, Δημοσθένην, διὰ 


Ν 5 “~ ’ 2" 4 ἊΝ Ν Ν ‘\ 5 Ν 5 , 
TA ἐν TH νήσῳ και Πύλῳ, τὸν δὲ διὰ τὰ αὐτὰ ἐπιτηδειό- 


τατον" τοὺς γὰρ ἐκ τῆς νήσου ἄνδρας τῶν Λακεδαιμο- 


νίων ὁ Νικίας προυθυμήθη, σπονδὰς πείσας τοὺς ᾿Αθη- 


7 4, ν 5 »- 
ναίους ποιήσασθαι, ὥστε ἀφεθῆναι. 
15 κεδαιμόνιοι ἦσαν αὐτῷ προσφιλεῖς κἀκεῖνος 
διὰ τοῦτο πιστεύσας ἑαυτὸν τῷ Τυλίππῳ 


» Ν Ὁ“ - 4 , ε 5 , ε 
ἀλλα τῶν Συρακοσίων τινές, ὡς ἐλέγετο, οἱ 


ἀνθ᾽ ὧν οἵ τε Λα- 
οὐχ ἥκιστα 
παρέδωκεν. 
A / 
μὲν δείσαν- 


9 ἧς > Ἂς Ψ᾿ ’ Ν /, 
TES, OTL πρὸς αὐτὸν ἐκεκοινολόγηντο, μὴ βασανιζόμενος 
lal Ν 
διὰ τὸ τοιοῦτο ταραχὴν σφίσιν ἐν εὐπραγίᾳ ποιήσῃ, ἀλ- 


20 λοι δέ, καὶ οὐχ ἥκιστα οἵ Κορίνθιοι, μὴ χρήμασι δὴ πεί- 


΄ ῳ ΄ > 5 vas \ > ΄ 
σας τινας, οτι πλούσιος NY; ἀποδρᾷ και αὖθις σφίσι 


todiendi sunt, etiam ex caete- 
ris oppidis Siciliae deduci 
imperantur. For their situation 
on the southern slope of the plateau 
of Achradina, and for their present 
condition, see Holm, I. p. 127, and 
Karlsr. Vortr. (fin.). — ἀσφαλεστάτην 
εἶναι νομίσαντες τήρησιν: sc. τὸ κατα- 
βιβάσαι αὐτοὺς ἐς τὰς λιθοτομίας. For 
const., see App. to ο. 42. 33.—7. 
καλὸν To ἀγώνισμα: cf. c. 56.9; 59. 2. 
—8. ἐπὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις : from τὰ ἄλλα, 
besides his other (successes). ἐπὶ with 
the dat. as in ce. 75. 90. 

9. ξυνέβαινε : it happened. Cf. ec. 
10. 55.— Δημοσθένην : the 
name added in explanation, as in ec. 
57-28. Κύμη. 527, 5, note 3; Kr. Spr. 
50, 1, 11.—11. ta ἐν τῇ νήσῳ Kal 
Πύλῳ: cf. iv. 3 ff.—12. tots... ἄν- 
Spas: subj. of ἀφεθῆναι. --- 18. πείσας 
τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους: cf v. τό ff.—14. 


ph A A 


ὥστε ἀφεθῆναι: dependent on πρου- 
θυμήθη. GMT. 588. Jow. puts a 
comma before πείσας and after ᾿Αθη- 
vatovs, making ποιήσασθαι depend on 
προυθυμήθη, ὥστε ἀφεθῆναι denoting 
the result. 

16. διὰ τοῦτο πιστεύσας: cf. c. ὃς. 
4. All Mss. except Vat. omit the in- 
dispensable διὰ τοῦτο. --- 17. ὡς ἐλέ- 
yero: with reference to the different 
reports current about it in Syra- 
cuse, concerning which Thue. had in- 
formed himself. —18. ὅτι... ἐκεκοι- 
vodoynvro: cf. c. 48. 138; 73. 27.— 
βασανιζόμενος: of examination by 
torture also in viii. 92. 10; with ace. 
of the thing, vi. 53. 12.—20. καὶ 
οὐχ ἥκιστα οἱ Κορίνθιοι: from this it 
would appear that τῶν Συρακοσίων 
above is meant to include also the 
allies. —§y: in partic. subord. clause; 
as inc. 18.5; 81. 10.—21. πλούσιος 


THUCYDIDES ΠΣ 86, 87. 


/ 


9. 9 lal ΙΖ 
νεώτερόν τι ἀπ᾿ αὐτοῦ γέγηται, πείσαντες τοὺς Evp- 


, 
μάχους ἀπέκτειναν αὐτόν. 


Nie ve \ , a 9 2 
Kal O MEV TOLAUTY) ἢ OTL EY- 


, , SES 3 θ , ν δὴ 3» x “ 
YvTaTa TOUT@V QUT LO ετεύνηκει, NKLOTA O7) ἄξιος ων τῶν 


25 γε ἐπ᾿ ἐμοῦ Ἑλλήνων ἐς τοῦτο δυστυχίας ἀφικέσθαι 


Ν Ν an 3 Ἁ 
διὰ τὴν πᾶσαν ἐς ἀρετὴν νενομισμένην ἐπιτήδευσιν. 


δϑηήτοὺς δ᾽ ἐν ταῖς λιθοτομίαις ot Συρακόσιοι χαλεπῶς 


τοὺς πρώτους χρόνους μετεχείρισαν. 


5 Ν ᾽ὕὔ 
ἐν γὰρ κοίλῳ χω- 


΄, » \ Se ἈΝ \ Y τοῦ Ν A \ 
βιῳ ovTas και OALY@ πολλοὺς OL TE YALOL TO TT PWTOV και 


Lal »» 2). 4, ὃ ἣν Ἂς 5 4 ΝΥ ε ’ὔ 3 
TVLYOS €TL EAVUTTEL OLA TO αστεέγαστον, και αι VUKTES επι- 


ὅ γιγνόμεναι τοὐναντίον μετοπωριναὶ καὶ ψυχραὶ τῇ μετα- 


ἦν: he was worth 100 talents, acc. to 
Lys. x1x. 47. — σφίσι : with reference 
to the whole Syracusan alliance, not 
the Corinthians alone. — 22. νεώτε- 
pov τι: “some further mischief.” C/. 
iv. 55.73 viii. 92. 14.— dar αὐτοῦ : see 
on 6. 70. 16. 

23. ὅτι ἐγγύτατα : used as adj. with 
αἰτίᾳ as in c. 81. 25, ξυσταδόν with 
paxas.— 24. ἥκιστα... ἐπιτήδευσιν : 
in this closing remark about Nicias, 
the historian expresses unmistakably 
both his warm sympathy for him in 
his untoward fate and his high per- 
sonal esteem. It is, it is true, not 
admiration of the intellectual great- 
ness and far-reaching activity of the 
‘man, as in the case of Pericles, ii. 65, 
but rather respect for honest effort 
always made cautiously, but with a 
consciousness of noble purposes. — 
26. διὰ τὴν πᾶσαν .. . ἐπιτήδευσιν : 
= διὰ τὴν ἐπιτήδευσιν ἣ πᾶσα ἐς ἀρετὴν 
ἐνενόμιστο, “on account of his course 
of life which had been wholly directed 
toward what was worthy.” See App. 

87. Of the captives shut up in the 
stone-quarries, about 7000 in number, a 
great part perish from cruel treatment 
amid fearful torments ; of the survivors, 


those who are not Athenians are sold 
into slavery. Thus ends the expedition 
against Sicily. 

2. τοὺς πρώτους χρόνους : explained 
by ἡμέρας ἑβδομήκοντά τινας in 15. 
After these 70 days there was some 
relief at least, from the removal of a 
part of the captives. — μετεχείρισαν : 
in Thue. used only in act. See on i. 
13.7; found only here with pers. obj.; 
with acc. of the thing in vi. 12. 17; 
16. 91. --ο-κοίλῳ χωρίῳ: signifies a 
deep place with steep walls, as in ec. 
84. 18, κοῖλος ποταμός. ---ὃ. οἱ ἥλιοι: 
the pl. (as θάλπη, ψύχη, μεγέθη) with 
intensive force. Kiihn. 348, note 2; 
Kr. Spr. 44, 3, 6.—4. πνῖγος : the 
smothering heat resulting from the 
crowded mass of human beings. — 
διὰ τὸ ἀστέγαστον: “because there 
was no shelter.” The neut. of the 
adj. instead of an abstract noun, as 
in i. 69. 14; 11. 51. 12, and freq. — 
ἐπιγιγνόμεναι τοὐναντίον μετοπωριναὶ 
καὶ ψυχραί: “and the nights, on the 
contrary, following autumnal and 
cold.” —5. τῇ μεταβολῇ : cf Hdt. ii. 
77. 10, ἐν yap τῇσι μεταβολῇσι τοῖσι 
ἀνθρώποισι αἱ νοῦσοι μάλιστα γίνονται 
τῶν τε ἄλλων πάντων καὶ δὴ καὶ τῶν 


165 


166 THUCYDIDES VII. 87. 


A“ 3 » ’ὔ 5 ’ὔὕ / rd 5 
Body ἐ: ἀσθένειαν ἐνεωτέριζον, πάντα TE ποιούντων av- 2 
»- x nw nr QA wr 
τῶν διὰ στενοχωρίαν ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ καὶ προσέτι τῶν νεκρῶν 
τ: lal a = LAX aN Ἔ ͵΄] ἃ 3» “ 
ὁμοῦ ἐπ᾽ ἀλλήλοις ξυννενημένων, οὗ ἔκ TE τῶν Tpav- 
, ἈΝ ὃ Ν A A Ἂς ἣν nw > , 
μάτων Kal διὰ τὴν μεταβολὴν καὶ τὸ τοιοῦτον ἀπέθνη- 
A ἈΝ 3 A “~ 
10 σκον, καὶ ὀσμαὶ ἦσαν οὐκ ἀνεκτοί, καὶ λιμῷ ἅμα καὶ 
4 5 , 5 / \ > ~ ε ,ὔ 5 Ἂς . ἂν 
δίψει ἐπιέζοντο: ἐδίδοσαν γὰρ αὐτῶν ἑκάστῳ ἐπὶ ὀκτὼ 
¥ 
ἄλλα τε 


ν Ν “ ““ 
οσα εἰκὸς ἐν τῷ τοιούτῳ χωρίῳ ἐμπεπτωκότας κακοπαθῆ-. 


»"» ΄, ΄ ἈΝ / , rd 
μῆνας κοτύλην ὕδατος Kal δύο κοτύλας σίτου. 
5 Ν ν 5 > ’ 5 “ XN J ΄ Ν 
σαι, οὐδὲν ὅ τι οὐκ ἐπεγένετο αὐτοῖς. καὶ ἡμέρας μὲν 3 
ε ’, ’, ν , 5 , ΕΝ \ 
15 ἑβδομήκοντά τινας οὕτω διῃτήθησαν ἀθρόοι: ἔπειτα πλὴν 
Ἂν » Ρ “ -“ 
᾿Αθηναίων καὶ εἴ τινες Σικελιωτῶν ἢ ᾿Ιταλιωτῶν Evve- 
ΕἾ 
στράτευσαν, τοὺς ἄλλους ἀπέδοντο. ἐλήφθησαν δὲ οἱ ξύμ- 4 


ὡρέων μάλιστα. --- ΘΟ. ἐς ἀσθένειαν ἐνεω- 
τέριζον : “engendered violent dis- 
orders.” Cf. Arr. An. iv. 8.2, és τὸ 
βαρβαρικώτερον νενεωτέριστο; id. Vii. 
13. 9, μή τι νεωτερισθείη ἐς ὕβριν. ἐς 
ἀσθένειαν indicates the consequence. 
νεωτερίζειν is used of every departure 
from the general order, esp. of hard 
and violent changes. See on i. 58. 3. 

πάντα ποιούντων... EV τῷ AUTH: 
Schol. διὰ τὸ δύσφημον ἀπεσιώπησεν 
See on iv. 97. 
13, καὶ dca ἄνθρωποι ἐν βεβήλῳ δρῶσι 


αὐτὰ ὀνομαστὶ εἰπεῖν. 


πάντα γίγνεσθαι αὐτόθι. --- 8. ἐπ᾽ ἀλλή- 
λοις ξυννενημένων : cf. 11. 52. 6.—9. 
καὶ τὸ τοιοῦτον: cf. c. 50. 90. --- 10. 
ἀνεκτοί: as adj. of two terminations; 
so ἐσβατόν in il. 41. 16.—11. δίψει: 
third decl., as in iv. 35.18 δίψους ; but 
in ii. 49. 25 δίψῃ, acc. to most of the 
Mss. St. has adopted everywhere the 
forms of the first decl.— 12. κοτύλην 
ὕδατος xré.: the scantiness of this 
measure, which was only half of the 
food given to slaves, is best seen by 
a comparison with that which was al- 
lowed to the Lacedaemonians taken on 
Sphacteria: δύο χοίνικας ἑκάστῳ ᾿Αττι- 


κὰς ἀλφίτων καὶ δύο κοτύλας οἴνου καὶ 
κρέας, iv. 16. 8. The κοτύλη is the 
fourth part of the χοῖνιξ. See Boeckh, 
P. E. p.125.— ἄλλα ὅσα: as in ii. 96. 
15, for ὅσα ἄλλα. Kr. Spr. 51, 10, 10.. 
With it Cl. connects οὐδὲν ὅ τι οὐκ, 
τούτων being understood; rather, it 
seems, ἄλλα has been attracted from 
the gen. into the case of the rel. Kr. 
Spr. 51, 10, 9.—13. ἐν τῷ τοιούτῳ: 
the art., added from Vat., refers 
back expressly to the description of 
2ff. For ἐν after verbs of motion, 
esp. the pf., see on ec. 71. 40. --- 14. 
οὐδὲν 6 τι ov: on this formula sce 
Kr. Spr. 51, 10, 11. — ἐπεγένετο : uscd 
esp. of sicknesses and great 1115. C/. 
ii. 49.9; 58. 8. 

15. τινας : with anumeral. See on 
C. 33. 17.— διῃτήθησαν : complexive 
aor., which recapitulates the fore- 
going. 67.1.6. 8... ΟΜ 56. 
ἀπέδοντο : Schol. ἐπώλησαν. 

18. ἀκριβείᾳ μὲν... ἐξειπεῖν, ὅμως 
δέ: the parenthetical subord. clause 
is treated as if co-ord. with the lead- 
ing clause.— οὐκ ἐλάσσους ἑἕπτακισ- 
χιλίων : see on 6. 85. 19. 


20 


25 


THUCYDIDES VIL. 87. 


5 , Ἀ Ἂς 5 A 9 A 5 
παντες, ἀκριβείᾳ μὲν χαλεπὸν ἐξειπεῖν, ὄμως δὲ οὐκ 


5 , ε 4 
ἐλάσσους ἑπτακισχιλίων. 


X\ ~ Ν Ν / , ΄ , 
vukov | τῶν Κατα TOV πόλεμον τόνδε μέγιστον γενέσθαι, 


A = » \ 4A 3 ne A " \ A 
δοκεῖν ἔμοιγε καὶ ὧν akon Ἑλληνικῶν ἴσμεν, καὶ τοῖς 


, , \ A lal 
τε κρατήσασι λαμπρότατον καὶ τοῖς διαφθαρεῖσι δυστυ- 


, X\ , ’ὔὕ 
χέστατον" κατὰ πάντα γὰρ πάντως νικηθέντες καὶ οὐδὲν 


ὀλίγον ἐς οὐδὲν κακοπαθήσαντες, πανωλεθρίᾳ δὴ τὸ λε- 


, Ν x ~ A ¢ 
γόμενον Kal πεζὸς καὶ νῆες καὶ οὐδὲν ὅ TL οὐκ ἀπώλετο, 


ἈΝ 5 , 5 Ν la a 2 > ,ὕ 
καὶ ὀλίγοι απὸ πολλῶν ἐπ οἰκου ἀπενόστησαν. 


ταῦτα 


Ν Ν ἊΝ ’ὔ i 
μὲν τὰ περὶ Σικελίαν γενόμενα. 


19. ξυνέβη τε: and so it happened. 
For the inferential re, see on ὁ. 71. 
21.—€pyov τοῦτο... μέγιστον : the 
same manner of expression and order 
of words as in i. 1. 8. The form of 
the sent., which is often used by 
Thuc., does not admit of an explana- 
tory adj. with the simple dem. The 
restrictive Ἑλληνικόν is inconsistent 
also with the general idea of the 
sent., which emphasizes, out of the 
whole course of the Peloponnesian 
War (κατὰ τὸν πόλεμον τόνδε), the 
greatest and most important event 
(ἔργον here =a completed occur- 
rence, not a single fact). In the 
next clause Ἑλληνικῶν is prop., since 
the view is extended beyond this war, 
and the historian naturally limits 
himself to the events of Greek his- 
tory. Kr., Pluygers, and St. also omit 
Ἑλληνικόν. --- 21. δοκεῖν δ᾽ ἔμοιγε: the 
elliptical inf. without ὡς. See on ec. 
49. 18; i. 138. 17. 

23. κατὰ πάντα: 1.6. on sea and on 
land, in their fortifications and in the 
open field. The paronomasia in πάντα 
πάντως as in viii. 1. 9, πάντα πανταχό- 


dev. — οὐδὲν ὀλίγον és οὐδέν : See ON Cc. 
50. 9.— 24. πανωλεθρίᾳ: cf. Hdt.ii.120. 
Elsewhere only in late writers, but 
the adj. πανώλεθρον is much used in 
tragedy with ἀπόλλυσθαι (Aesch. Sept. 
71; Ag. 518; Eum. 522; Pers. 563; 
Soph. £/. 1009). On τὸ λεγόμενον, 
“as the saying is,” see Kr. Spr. 57, 
10, 12.—8y: emphasizes esp. the παν-, 
as it does sups. and similar consts. 
Cf. ii. 77. 7, πᾶσαν δὴ ἰδέαν ἐπενόουν. 
— 25. οὐδὲν 6 τι ov: see on 14.— 26. 
ὀλίγοι ἀπὸ πολλῶν: as in i. ττο. 2; 
iii. 112. 30.— ἀπενόστησαν: acc. to 
Plut. Nic. 29, many of the Athenians 
obtained their freedom, others, who 
had already escaped, got food and 
shelter, by repeating verses from 
Euripides, who was more popular 
with the Sicilians than any other for- 
eign author. The thanks of these 
survivors, many of whom on their re- 
turn expressed their gratitude to him, 
were no doubt the sweetest praise the 
poet ever heard. — Tatra μέν : co-ord. 
with és δὲ τὰς ᾿Αθήνας of viii. 1. 1. — 
27. τὰ γενόμενα: sc. ἦν. For other 
forms of conclusion, see on 6. 30. 19. 


I 


16 


ξυνέβη τε ἔργον τοῦτο [Ἑλλη- 5 


6 


lod 


108 APPENDIX. 


A-PPEN DEX: 


1. 2. rots’ Emiedupiovs. Omitted by v. H. without sufficient grounds. 

1. 15 ff. τούς τε Ἱμεραίους. Vat. has τοὺς ‘Ipepaious, the other Mss. τούς 
τε Ἱμεραίους. Cl. thinks that the position of the Himeraeans is so different 
from that of the Selinuntians, that there is no reason for a close connexion 
between them. St., however, rightly finds the point of connexion in ἐκεῖ 
ὄντες, Which refers to both clauses. Similarly, the τε of Vat. with τοῦ ’Apxo- 
νίδου in 23 is very effective in emphasizing the union of both reasons (τοῦ τε 
᾿Αρχωνίδου τεθνηκότος... καὶ τοῦ Γυλίππου δοκοῦντος ἥκειν). --- Vat. gives 
also correctly yap for μέν in 18. In 20 St. writes στρατιᾷ, because it is not 
likely that the Selinuntians, who were at war with the Egestaeans, would join 
Gylippus with their whole force, and in fact furnished only a few light troops 
and cavalry. But Cl. prefers the reading of Vat. πανστρατιᾷ, since the fact 
that the execution (30) does not correspond to the demand proves nothing 
with regard to the demand itself. 

Cl. thinks it questionable also whether ὅσα instead of ὅσοι (17) should not 
be adopted from Vat.; for although all ναῦται were no doubt without arms 
suitable for service in the field, they might still have been furnished with 
spears and light shields. The sense would be then that the Himeraeans sup- 
plied what was lacking in their armour. The only doubt with him is whether 
such light pieces of armour can be reckoned under the ὅπλα, as ὅσα would 
require. On the armour of the oarsmen, see Boeckh, P. £. p. 385. 

2. 2. Toyyvdos. All the Mss. seem to accent the name thus, agreeing 
with the rule of Arcad. de acc. p. 56, 9, τὰ διὰ TOU VAOS τρισύλλαβα προσηγο- 
ρικὰ ἢ κύρια, εἰ ἄρχοιτο ἀπὸ φύσει μακρᾶς, παροξύνεται, --- Αἰσχύλος, ἹΡωμύλος. 
Gittling (de Acc. p. 185) gives, it is true, several exceptions; and Dindorf in 
Xen. Hell. iii. 1. 6 and An. vii. 8. 17, and Schaefer in Plut. Nic. 19, write Toy- 
γύλος. So St. here. Vat. has TeyyvAdos. 

2, 12. "Ierds. The Mss. have Γέτας, Γέγας, yera (Vat.), ye. - Ἱετας is 
Goeller’s emendation. Cf. Steph. Byz., Ἴεταί, φρούριον Σικελίας, θηλυκώς. 
Φίλιστος ἕκτῃ. 

2. 18. καί. Rejected by v. H. and St., “quod ἑλών et ξυνταξάμενος 
non eiusdem temporis sunt.” 

2. 16. ἔτυχε ἐλθών. ἐτύγχανε, which Vat. offers, does not agree with the 
usage of Thuc. See App. to iii. 111. 6. 

2. 17. ἑπτὰ μὲν ἢ ὀκτὼ σταδίων. Cl.’s note on this passage is as follows: 
“ἑπτὰ μὲν κτέ. could be connected only with διπλοῦν τεῖχος, as measure of 
proposed extension; this measure must, however, though it is not anywhere 


APPENDIX. ~ : 169 


so expressed, be restricted to the distance from the abrupt cliff of Epipolae 
(τοῦ κρημνώδους, vi. 103. 6). May not the words have been added by a 
reader acquainted with the place (not by a copyist, as St. understands me to 
mean)? ‘Their position is quite unnatural, and it would be strange, too, to 
give the measure of the wall just there where emphasis is laid upon the fact 
that a part was wanting to its completion. Finally, μέν, which must stand 
opposed to τῷ δὲ ἄλλῳ τοῦ κύκλου, has a very awkward position when attached 
to the measure of the distance. It belongs more properly to the statement 
of direction, ἐς τὸν μέγαν λιμένα. There is force in Cl.’s objection to the 
position of the words as a whole, but not of μέν in particular, for μέν contrasts 

the one part of the wall of circumvallation, the length of seven or eight stadia, 
with the rest of the wall (τῷ δὲ ἄλλῳ). We might have had the direction 
ἐς τὸν μέγαν λιμένα esp. contrasted with ἐπὶ τὴν ἑτέραν θάλασσαν, but the 
contrast made is equally as important. Since then the only objection is to the 
general position of ἑπτὰ μὲν ἢ ὀκτὼ σταδίων, it seems best, with St. and others, 
to follow the Ms. reading. 

2, 18. ἀπετετέλεστο. The reading of Vat., as in iv. 69. 15; 90.17; the 
remaining Mss. have ἐπετετέλεστο, which is found also in viii. 55. 12. 

2. 20 [τοῦ κύκλου πρὸς τὸν ΤΙρώγιλον)]. Jow. takes κύκλος here and in vi. 
98. 9; 102. 5, to refer to the wall of circumvallation. But in vi. 98. 8, the 
aor. ἐτείχισαν is plainly used to indicate the completion of the κύκλος, whereas 
the wall of circumvallation never was finished. The aor. cannot mean, as 
Jow. renders, “commenced building round the city”; that would require 
ἐτείχιζον. In vi. 102. 5 the context (ἔτυχε yap ἐν αὐτῷ δι᾿ ἀσθένειαν ὑπολε- 
λειμμένος) shows that a fort is meant. Everywhere else in Thuc., then, 
κύκλος refers to the round fort on Epipolae, “which was intended as a centre 
from whence the projected wall of circumyallation was to start northward 
towards the sea at Trogilus, southward towards the great harbour.” But here 
it could refer only to the whole wall of circumyallation, and so Arn. takes it, 
though in this way κύκλος, as applied to the Athenian fortifications, would 
have two meanings in Thue. Grote (VII. c. 59, p. 89, note 1) will not agree 
to this, and explains τῴ ἄλλῳ τοῦ κύκλου as equiv. to ἑτέρωθι τοῦ κύκλου. 
This is equiv. to interpreting τῷ ἄλλῳ τοῦ κύκλου (opp. to ἐς τὸν μέγαν λιμένα 
διπλοῦν τεῖχος) as the other wing (or arm) of the circular fort towards Trogilus. 
Holm, II. p. 387, prefers Wolfflin’s conjecture, rw δὲ ἀπὸ τοῦ κύκλου πρὸς τὸν 
Tpwyrov. See Holm, II. p. 387, 388. 

5. 13. τῇ τάξει κτέ. To connect τῇ τάξει with ἀφελέσθαι, as Pp. and Bm., 
or with opediav, as Kr., is incompatible with the usage of Thuc. If one 
should strike out τῇ τάξει (which Heilmann does not translate), nothing would 
be missed. Possibly it was written as an explanatory addition to τῇ παρα- 
σκευῇ (15) and got by mistake into the text. Philippi’s conjecture (Jahrb. 
1881, p. 96), τὴν ὠφελίαν, τὴν τάξιν ἐντὸς... ποιήσας ἀφελέσθαι, gives the 
correct sense, but the change seems unnecessary. 

7. 4. ξυνετείχισαν τὸ λοιπὸν τοῖς Συρακοσίοις [μέχρι] τοῦ ἐγκαρσίου 


170 - APPENDIX. 


τείχους. Great confusion has arisen in regard to the position and direction of 
the third Syracusan counter-wall in consequence of the misinterpretation of 
the clause ἄνω πρὸς τὸ ἐγκάρσιον τεῖχος ἁπλοῦν in c. 4.3. The passage has 
been construed as if τεῖχος were to be understood a second time, and as if two 
walls were spoken of: first, a single wall about to be constructed (τεῖχος 
ἁπλοῦν) ; and second, a cross-wall already existing (πρὸς τὸ ἐγκάρσιον 
τεῖχος). The latter is generally assumed to be the first cross-wall built by the 
Syracusans (vi. 99. 16). To this explanation there are two fatal objections : 
first, that the Athenians had destroyed this cross-wall (vi. 100. 25); secondly, 
that it passed south of the κύκλος (vi. 99. 15) and could not have been met 
by the third cross-wall, which lay to the north (c. 4. 3). This erroneous 
interpretation of πρὸς τὸ ἐγκάρσιον is now universally rejected, but it has an 
important bearing on the explanation of the passage under consideration. 
Any copyist who understood πρὸς τὸ ἐγκάρσιον in c. 4. 5 to refer to a counter- 
wall already existing would have been apt to write μέχρι τοῦ ἐγκαρσίου Tei- 
χους in c. 7.5. There is, then, reasonable ground for the assumption that 
μέχρι may be due to interpolation. 

Many attempts, however, have been made to retain the word even by those 
who interpret πρὸς τὸ ἐγκάρσιον in c. 4. 3 adv. By far the most noteworthy 
of these is Grote’s (VIII. p. 88 ff.). To ascertain what is meant by τὸ λοιπόν, 
that remainder which the Syracusans fortified with the help of the Corinthians 
and others, he compares the fortifications as they stood when Gylippus entered 
Syracuse with the fortifications as they stood a few months afterwards when 
Demosthenes arrived from Athens. Three distinct constructions are men- 
tioned as existing at this later period which had not been in existence at the 
earlier. 1. A fort (τείχισμα, c. 43. 23) on the higher ground of Epipolae, 
guarding the entrance to Epipolae from Euryelus. 2. A cross-wall (waparet- 
Xtopa, c. 42. 28; 43. 7,55) which joined this fort at one extremity, and was 
carried down the slope of Epipolae until it joined the counter-wall or ἐγκάρσιον 
τεῖχος (μέχρι τοῦ ἐγκαρσίου τείχους). 3. Three strong encampments (προτει- 
χίσματα) placed at different points up the slope of Epipolae, along this cross- 
wall and on the north side of it. In these three works Grote finds the remain- 
der (τὸ λοιπὸν Evvetetxtcav) which the Corinthians and Syracusans are now 
stated to have jointly constructed. Before the arrival of the twelve Corinthian 
ships, Gylippus had carried the ἐγκάρσιον τεῖχος in a north-westerly direction, 
past the Athenian wall of circumyallation; on their arrival, commencing at 
the τείχισμα, he carried the παρατείχισμα continuously down the slope of 
Epipolae until it met the ἐγκάρσιον τεῖχος, at some distance from the northern 
slope of Epipolae, at an angle. Grote, therefore, in fact assumes two walls, — 
a cross-wall and a counter-wall, — though he notes that practically they were 
one continuous wall and are so spoken of by Thuc. The identification, e.g. 
by Nicias, in c. 11. ὃ 3, of the παρατείχισμα with the τεῖχος ἁπλοῦν, is complete 
and certain. 

Holm’s objections to this interpretation, which lead him to reject μέχρι and 


OE ΝΟ 


APPENDIX. 171 


construe τὸ λοιπὸν τοῦ ἐγκαρσίου τείχους, taken together, as the obj. of ξυνε- 
τείχισαν, are substantially the following: It is difficult to believe, he says, 
looking first to the language of Thuc., that in ec. 7. § 1 the historian is speak- 
ing of a wall whose construction began at the extreme western part of Epipo- 
lae. In ο. 6. § 4 the wall is built from east to west. How can the words 
ξυνετείχισαν τὸ λοιπόν without hint or warning suddenly signify the continua- 
tion of the same wall in an opposite direction? The natural inference from 
τὸ λοιπόν is that the wall was continued in the original direction. If the direc- 
tion had changed, we should have had in the text some such additional phrase 
as ἀρξάμενοι ἄνω. There is, then, no intimation in the language of Thue. of a 
change of direction in the construction of the wall. Again, looking at the facts, 
what possible reasons had the Syracusans, instead of continuing the wall in the 
original direction, for breaking it off suddenly and beginning at the other end 1 
Their cross-wall had indeed passed the Athenian wall of circumvallation; but 
the Athenians might have enlarged their wall and in turn enclosed the Syracu- 
san cross-wall. If the intention of the Syracusans was to carry their wall clear 
across the northern part of Epipolae, they would naturally not have ceased 
operations at the point of danger and shifted to a place a mile and a half distant 
(ace. to Grote’s map). Common sense would have dictated the contrary course. 
With every foot of wall that they added to their cross-wall, building westward, 
they made the task of the Athenians increasingly difficult. 

On the map of Syracuse added to the edition of the Sixth Book of Thue. 
in this Series, the direction of the third cross-wall and the position of the 
τείχισμα and mpotetxiopara are conformed to the plan given in the monu- 
mental work of the two Cavallaris and Holm, TYopografia Archeologica di 
Syracusa (with atlas), Palermo, 1883. 

7. 11. τρόπῳ ᾧ av, ἐν ὁλκάσιν ἢ πλοίοις ἢ ἄλλως ὅπως ἄν, προχωρῇ. The 
interpretation given in the notes is that of Cl., except that he considers ὅπως 
ἄν = ὅπως δή Or ὅπως οὖν, and explanatory of ἢ ἄλλως, giving it the greatest 
possible expansion, or in any other way ; and does not think that προχωρῇ is 
understood with ὅπως av, as Bm. suggests. But St. seems clearly right in 
saying that ὅπως ἄν without a verb has not this meaning. Bk., followed by 
St. strikes out ἐν ὁλκάσιν... ὅπως dv. It does not seem possible that τρόπῳ 
ᾧ dv and ὅπως av can both be right. 

8. 15. οὖς ἀπέστειλε. Pluygers (JJnem. 11, p.94) conjectured ἃ ἐπέστειλε; St. 
ὡς ἐπέστειλε. If any change is to be made, Cl. prefers ots ἐπέστειλε, though he 
does not think it necessary. y. H. strikes out φέροντες . . . εἰπεῖν. 

8. 16. ὁ δὲ ta kata τὸ στρατόπεδον... ἐπεμέλετο. This passage has 
become intelligible only by the adoption of μᾶλλον and ἢ δι᾽, instead of ἤδη, 
from Vat. The Schol. recognizes both μάλλον and ἢ SU: ἡ διάνοια ᾿ ἐπιμέλειαν 
εἶχε τοῦ φυλάττεσθαι μᾶλλον ἢ τοῦ κινδυνεύεσθαι (scr. κινδυνεύειν) ἑκουσίως, 
i.e. “he kept from this time more on the defensive and avoided all offensive 
operations.” Cf. Dio C. xlvii. 36. 2, GAN αὐτοί τε διὰ φυλακῆς μᾶλλον ἢ 
διὰ κινδύνων τὸ στρατόπεδον érovodvro. Thuc. expresses the contrast by 


172 APPENDIX. 


means of φυλακή and ἑκούσιοι κίνδυνοι, and having chosen for the first (διὰ 
φυλακῆς) the appropriate ἔχων, he leaves this by a kind of zeugma in the unu- 
sual connexion with διὰ κινδύνων. Since, however, for both an object is 
indispensable, ta kata τὸ στρατόπεδον must be retained, even against Vat., 
which omits ta, and the expression must be taken in a comprehensive sense 
to refer to the troops whom Nicias had heretofore employed in offensive 
operations, but would henceforth keep more carefully on the defensive. 
Moreover, διὰ φυλακῆς ἔχειν is rather to be compared with διὰ χειρὸς ἔχειν 
(ii. 13. 19) than with δι᾽ αἰτίας (ii. 60. 16), or δι’ ὀργῆς ἔχειν (11. 37. 12). St. 
construes Ta κατὰ τὸ στρατόπεδον with both Sia φυλακῆς ἔχων and ἐπεμέλετο, 
considering διὰ φυλακῆς ἔχων = φυλάσσων, ἔχων belonging only to διὰ φυλα- 
κῆς, and δι᾽ ἑκουσίων κινδύνων being equiv. to an instrumental dat. He trans- 
lates: ille (Nicias) autem rebus exercitus magis custodiendo 
quam ultra adeundo periculo prospiciebat. 

13. 15. ἐπ᾽ αὐτομολίας προφάσει. The passage is one of great difficulty, 
for while there are plenty of examples in Thuc. of πρόφασις in the sense of 
real cause or occasion, Viz. i. 23. 23; 118.3; 133.7; 141. 4; ii. 49.4; vi. 6.3 (to 
which may be added Hdt. ii. 161. 8; iv. 79. 2, and Dem. xvimt. 156, τὴν ἀληθῆ 
προφασιν), the context seems to require some word meaning opportunity. Cl. 
seems to mean that the opportunity was the occasion (cause) for desertion ; for 
he explains (in his critical note) πρόφασις -- “eine sich darbietende Veranlas- 
sung,’ and explains that by “opportunities when the deserters thought 
themselves unobserved by the Athenians, or found themselves unexpectedly 
in the neighbourhood of Syracusan troops.” The most various emenda- 
tions have been proposed: Dukas λιθολογίας, Kr. αὐτομαχίας or avro- 
τολμίας, Pluygers σιτολογίας, Meineke ἀσχολίας, v. H. dpyvpoAoylas, Mad- 
vig alxpadwrias, A. Passow (and others) αὐτονομίας, which St. has adopted 
in his text. But Cl. thinks that in Thuc. αὐτονομία is used always of political 
communities, never of individuals. Goeller explained avropodtas as acc. pl. 
depending on ἐπί. But though we find avropodias connected with καταδρο- 
pats, i. 142. 10, it would be very strange here, since the natural const. is 
clearly to take avropoAlas as gen. Grote ( VII.c.59, p. 117, note) defends the tra- 
ditional reading, but he understands πρόφασις = open declaration, not occasion, 
and translates: Some of them depart under pretence (or profession) of being desert- 
ers to the enemy. He explains further: “It does not denote what a man said 
before he quitted the Athenian camp (he would of course say nothing of his 
intention te any one), but the colour which he would put upon his conduct 
after he got within the Syracusan lines. He would present himself to them as 
a deserter to their cause: he would pretend to be tired of the oppressive 
Athenian dominion —for it is to be recollected, that all or most of these 
deserters were men belonging to the subject-allies of Athens.” Cl. holds that 
this meaning of the word cannot be established, and besides that the connex- 
ion ἐπὶ προφάσει is incompatible with Grote’s explanation. St.’s explanation 
of Passow’s conjecture, αὐτονομίας, “giving as a reason that they are from 


APPENDIX. 118 


free states and therefore independent, and hence not obliged to endure 
Athenian military service longer than is agreeable to them,” seems to be 
wrong if we compare c. 48. 38, where Nicias says distinctly that the Athe- 
nian military service is compulsory (δι ἀνάγκης). Besides, ἐπ᾿ αὐτονομίας 
προφάσει ἀπέρχονται would not imply necessarily that they went over to the 
enemy, and thus there would be no proper contrast between this clause and 
οἱ δὲ ὡς ἕκαστοι δύνανται, πολλὴ δ᾽ τ Σικελία. In the contrast evidently 
intended between these two clauses seems to lie one of the strongest argu- 
ments for αὐτομολίας. While therefore Cl.’s explanation does not fully clear 
up the difficulty, nothing better seems to have been offered. 

14, 13. διαπεπολεμήσεται αὐτοῖς ἀμαχεὶ ἐκπολιορκηθέντων ἡμῶν ὁ πόλεμος. 
Though the Mss. all read ὁ πόλεμος, Kr. and St. are not without grounds for 
omitting it. Valla seems not to have had it, nor the Schol., who says διαπολε- 
μήσεται avrois’ ἀντὶ τοῦ κατεργασθήσεται αὐτοῖς, διαπολεμήσεται ὁ πόλεμος. 
St. thinks, not without reason, that if the Schol. had read 6 πόλεμος, he would 
hardly have interpreted it by itself. He is therefore of the opinion that it 
has crept into the text from the Schol. Cf c. 25. 46, where διαπεπολεμησό- 
μενον occurs without subj. expressed. It would seem also that the Schol. read 
διαπολεμήσεται, not fut. pf., though Valla must have read the latter, as he 
translates debellatum est, just as he read the fut. pf. also in ec. 25. 40. 
See Kr. Spr. 61, 5, 6. 

17. 7. αὐτοῖς οἱ πρέσβεις ἧκον. So Vat.; the rest of the Mss. οἵ τε πρέ- 
σβεις αὐτοῖς ἧκον. But in this case τε would have no correlative, and αὐτοῖς 
the wrong position. 

19. 1. τοῦ δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου ἦρος εὐθὺς ἀρχομένου κτέ. Unger, Zur Zeitrech- 
nung des Thukydides, p. 34 (Sitzungsber. der philos. philol. u. hist. Klasse der 
Miinchener Akademie, 1875, p. 28-73) calls attention to the fact that only 
in this place does the beginning of spring follow the close of winter without 
mention of the summer, and that only here is the partic. ἐπιγιγνομένου, which at 
every commencement of a year is joined with θέρους, added to ἦρος. “This 
exception,” he continues, “cannot be ascribed to the historian himself, who 
declares expressly, ii. 1. 4, that all his years are divided into winters and 
summers. Hence we must write τοῦ δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου θέρους εὐθὺς ἀρχομένου. 
But although Thuc. might of course have written thus, acc. to his usual 
custom, still there is no need of a change, since the present reading offers no 
difficulty. ἐπιγίγνεσθαι is the word esp. used to designate temporal succes- 
sion, of shorter as well as of longer periods (ἡμέρα, χειμών, most frequently 
θέρος, in describing the events of the war). Quite in the same sense it is 
used here of the following spring, and to mark its very beginning the pred. 
ἀρχομένου is added to the attrib. ἐπιγιγνομένου, for which we have more freq. 
ἅμα ἤρι ἀρχομένῳ (ii. 2.7), or simply ἅμα wpe (ii. 103. 2; iv. 117. 1) and dpa 
τῷ pt εὐθύς (v. 40. 1), and, more definite still, ἅμα τῷ tpt εὐθὺς ἀρχομένῳ τοῦ 
ἐπιγιγνομένου θέρους (vi. 94. 1), and similar expressions. + 

πρῴτατα. So (not πρῳαίτατα or πρωίτατα) acc. to St. (Quacstiones 


114 APPENDIX. 


Gramm. p. 20), as also πρῴτερον, c. 39. 1; viii. ror. 15, and πρῷ (not πρωί) 
ce. 78: 15; 79) 1; iv. 6: ἘΣ 

19. 21. ἀφῆκαν. St. writes here ἀφεῖσαν, and iv. 38. 1 παρεῖσαν. See Qu. 
Gr. p. 18. But Att. usage certainly wavered long between the two forms. 

21. 8. ξυνανέπειθε οὐχ ἥκιστα τοῦ ταῖς ναυσὶ μὴ ἀθυμεῖν [ἐπιχειρήσειν 
πρὸς τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους. Cl. explains that it seems to be a peculiarity of Thue. 
in the case of compounds with ξυν- to express the object of a common activity 
by means of the gen. That is the case not only with ξυναίρεσθαι (iv. το. 1; 
y. 28. 15), as Bm. shows — προσξυμβάλλεσθαι in iii. 36. 10 is not to be counted 
here, because the gen. τῆς ὁρμῆς depends on οὐκ ἐλάχιστον --- θυΐ also with 
ξυνεπιλαμβάνεσθαι (vi. 70. 5; viii. 26.5). Just as we have in the last case, 
‘“Eppokparous μάλιστα ἐνάγοντος ξυνεπιλαβέσθαι καὶ τῆς ὑπολοίπου ᾿Αθηναίων 
καταλύσεως, “he urged that they should have a share in the complete destruc- 
tion of the Athenians”; so the present passage is to be understood, “ Hermo- 
crates sought especially to help in effecting this, that they should have 
confidence against the Athenians at sea.” 

But St. rightly objects that the cases cited are not parallel, for while ξυναί- 
ρεσθαί τινος is prop. of those who participate in a thing, Hermocrates has no 
part in the τοῦ μὴ ἀθυμεῖν; and that ἐπιλαμβάνεσθαι takes the gen. as well 
as ξυνεπιλαμβάνεσθαι. 

22. 7. περιέπλεον. καί before περιέπλεον, which is grammatically impos- 
sible, is omitted with Valla and one Ms. 

25. 25. ἔκ τε τῶν ἀκάτων ὥνευον ἀναδούμενοι τοὺς σταυροὺς Kal ἀνέκλων. 
ΟἹ., who interprets ἀνέκλων, break off; not pull out, says: “The windlasses (ὄνοι, 
cf. Hdt. vii. 36. 16) must have been so placed, as to draw the ropes horizon- 
tally and to break off the pales if they stuck fast. Madvig, who thinks that the 
whole operation of throwing the ropes around the pales and winding up is 
carried on from the vats μυριοφόρος, proposes (νυ. I. p. 329), ἐκ τῶν κεράτων 
instead of ἐκ τῶν ἀκάτων, observing, cum funes vallis iniectos alli- 
gassent ad navis partem ei rei aptam: ea erant capita an- 
tennarum: ἐκ τῶν κεράτων ἀναδούμενοι. But since Thuc. evidently looks 
upon the ναῦς (or ὁλκάς) μυριοφόρος as the protected position only for the 
troops intended for fighting (28, ot 8 ἐκ τῆς ὁλκάδος ἀντέβαλλον), not for 
those occupied in destroying the palisade, ἐκ τῶν ἀκάτων signifies very prop. 
the smaller flat-boats, with windlasses on them, from which the men threw 
ropes around the pales and rendered them useless. It is difficult, it is true, to 
see how they broke off the pales in this operation; for that ἀνακλάν here, just 
as in ii. 76. 22, can have only this meaning (with the additional sense there 
noted, ‘by rapidly winding up’) seems beyond doubt. But what in ii. 76. § 4 
is easy to be understood of thé warding off of the battering-rams seems 
hardly applicable to these operations on the flat-boats.” 

But St. quotes from Duker: “ὥνευον Aelius Dionysius apud Eustath. 
in Hom. J//. xi. p. 862 exponit ἐκίνουν καὶ περιῆγον (twisted out), Et sic 
Suidas et Thomas.... Sed ἀνακλᾶν hic non est, quod idem 


APPENDIX. 175 


[Acacius] et Portus putarunt, frangere, verum'sursum attollendo 
convellere et educere. Suidas et Schol. [ὄνος ἐστὶ μηχανὴ ἐπ᾽ ἄκρων 
τῶν ἀκατίων πηγνυμένη ἀφ᾽ ἧς περιβάλλοντες βρόχοις τοὺς σταυροὺς ῥᾳδίως ἐκ 
τοῦ βυθοῦ ἀνέσπων] exponunt 6 fundo evellere. Sic Thue. ii. 76. 22, 
et alii apud Lipsium Poliorcet. v. 8, ἀνακλᾶν machinam muro 
imcussam dicunt eos qui laqueis iniectis eam attollunt et 
avertunt. Et in aliis generibus loquendi non frangendi, sed 
inflectendi et in altum tollendi significationem habet.” Of. 
Eur. Or. 1471, ὦμοις ἀριστεροῖσιν ἀνακλάσας δέρην. Most of the editt. take 
ἀνακλάν = draw out: Bloomf. “pulled up”; Heilmann “twisted out or broke off”’; 
Bm. “wound them up and pulled them out”; Didot and Betant “drew them 
out”; Frost “wrenched up”; Grote “fastened ropes round them and thus 
unfixed or plucked them out.” St. is right in insisting that ἀνέκλων 
in ii. 76. 22 does not mean to break off;. and his objection to Cl.’s 
proposal to restore ἀνέσπων from the Schol., that it is more prob. that the 
Schol. interpreted ἀνέκλων by ἀνέσπων, seems to be.well taken. 

27. 8. Cl. suggests, since the harsh anacoluthon in the connexion of ἐπειδὴ 
... τειχισθεῖσα and ὕστερον δὲ... ἐπῳκεῖτο must always give offence, to 
strike out δέ after ὕστερον and make ἐπῳκεῖτο following the pred. partic. 
τειχισθεῖσα immediately dependent on ἐπειδή, preferring the irregularity in τὸ 
μὲν πρῶτον, without correlative, to the anacoluthon. Kr, proposes to remedy 
the difficulty by a comma after στρατιᾶς. It might be removed by placing a 
comma after ἐπιούσαις and construing φρουραῖς, as well as ὑπὸ... στρατιᾶς, 
with τειχισθεῖσα. 

27. 17. ἐξ ἀνάγκης τῆς ἴσης φρουρᾶς. St. explains that the necessity 
here mentioned is that of procuring provisions, and the force which goes forth 
is one equal to or proportioned to this necessity, 1.6. no greater than is suffi- 
cient to procure necessary supplies. He therefore takes φρουρά to mean not 
the whole garrison, but simply a foree (manus), here of course part of the 
garrison. He cites the use of φρουρά in this sense among the Lacedaemoni- 
ans (Xen. Hell. ii. 4.29; iv. 7. 2; v. 2. 8; de Rep. Lac. 13. 1, 11), and the 
phrase φρουρὰν φαίνειν = manum evocare (Xen. Hell. iii. 2. 23, and 
often). So in viii. 71. 9 he understands φρουρᾷ to mean, not the whole garri- 
son of Decelea, but the part of it which set out with Agis. For ἴσος in the 
sense proportioned to, cf. i. 132. 7, ἴσος εἶναι τοῖς παροῦσι (ad praesentem 
rerum condicionem se accommodare). With this view, πλειόνων, 
as well as τῆς tons φρουρᾶς, refers to the garrison at Decelea, and the sense is, 
“of this garrison sometimes more, sometimes fewer, overran the country.” 

28. 11. ἐς φιλονικίαν καθέστασαν τοιαύτην ἣν πρὶν γενέσθαι ἠπίστησεν ἄν 
τις ἀκούσας. τὸ γὰρ αὐτοὺς πολιορκουμένους κτέ. (].᾽5 critical note is as fol- 
lows: “The difficulty of this passage is recognized by all editt., and various 
remedies have been proposed. The Schol. adopts the easiest method, when 
On τῷ αὐτῷ τρόπῳ ἀντιπολιορκεῖν (including also, of course, μηδ᾽ ὡς ἀποστῆναι 
and kal τὸν παράλογον τοσοῦτον ποιῆσαι) he remarks, ἠπίστησεν ἄν τις ἀκού- 


116 APPENDIX. 


σας ἀπὸ κοινοῦ. But he leaves unexplained how the particle γάρ is to be 
reconciled with the dependence of the infs. on ἠπίστησεν av. Still Pp. and 
Bm. do not object to this explanation, while Kr. says, ‘there seems to be 
something wanting to complete the sent., a fault which we must perhaps 
ascribe to the author himself.’ St., who has discussed the passage in the 
Symbol. Phil: Bonn. p. 388 ff., considers such carelessness (that Thue. had for- 
gotten the finite verb which he had in mind at the beginning of the sent.) 
inconceivable, and seeks to effect the grammatical connexion of the infs. 
ἀντιπολιορκεῖν, ἀποστῆναι, and ποιῆσαι, with the foregoing ἠπίστησεν ἄν τις, 
which is interrupted by γάρ, by the conjecture τὸ παρ᾽ αὑτοῖς πολιορκουμένους 

οὖς μηδ᾽ ὡς ἀποστῆναι κτέ. ‘The infs. μηδ᾽ ὡς ἀποστῆναι, ἀντιπολιορκεῖν, 
ποιῆσαι, are in explanatory appos. to the preceding ἥν, which refers to 
φιλονικίαν. But the strong expression τὸ (γὰρ) αὐτοὺς πολιορκουμένους 
ἐπιτειχισμῷῴ ὑπὸ Πελοποννησίων μηδ᾽ ὡς ἀποστῆναι ἐκ Σικελίας, ἀλλὰ 
ἐκεῖ Συρακούσας τῷ αὐτῷ τρόπῳ ἀντιπολιορκεῖν, Which corresponds 
well with the usage of Thue., is much weakened in παρ᾽ αὑτοῖς (in their 
own land) πολιορκουμένους. The difficulty of the passage lies not alone 
in the connexion of τὸ γὰρ αὐτοὺς κτέ. with the preceding, but quite as 
much in the obscure manner in which tov παράλογον τοσοῦτον is carried 
out; for both ὅσον and ὥστε seem to be correlative to τοσοῦτον. Most 
editt. understand ὅσον = quatenus, in so far as, and refer only ὥστε to 
τοσοῦτον. But how is it conceivable that ὅσον after τοσοῦτον should not 
stand in close connexion with it? Madvig.(Advv. I. p. 3829) recognizes 
this; but his change of ὅσον into ὅσοι is quite unsatisfactory, since there 
is no reason for the comprehensive ὅσοι after τοῖς “EAAnor. If one 
observes more closely, however, on what the παράλογος of the Greeks 
depends, it is clear that this is shown only by the great difference between Ὁ 
the universal expectation at the beginning of the’war and the very different 
result. But this is effected without doubt by the paratactiec contrast 
between ὅσον... ἐνόμιζον in the first clause and ἦλθον ἐς Σικελίαν in the 
second; only this is obscured by the inappropriate ὥστε, for which Thue. 
wrote probably ὅμως δὲ ἔτει é€mrakadexdtw... ἦλθον ἐς Σικελίαν. This 
clause, too, as the ὅσον clause, depends on τὸν παράλογον τοσοῦτον ποιῆσαι, 
and the two are paratactically contrasted: ‘the Athenians deceived the 
Greeks in their opinion of their power and enterprise to such a degree, that at 
the beginning of the war some believed that they would be able to carry it on 
one year, others two, some few perhaps three, but no one longer; but that they 
nevertheless (ὅμως δέ) in the 17th year after the first inroad of the Pelopon- 
nesians undertook the expedition against Sicily, at a time when they were 
already to a great extent exhausted by the first war, and thus burdened them- 
selves with a second war not inferior to the first, which was waged against 
them from the Peloponnese.’ Even if the correctness of this view is admitted, 
nothing is gained, it is true, for the grammatical connexion of the period 
beginning with τὸ yap αὐτοὺς πολιορκουμένους ; but the more the sent. in its 


APPENDIX. τι 


further course appears to be artificially constructed, the more likely it seems 
that the subj. in form of the inf. may have been left without its verb. The 
anacoluthon, which must here be recognized, seems not more striking than 
similar ones in i. 25. ὃ 4; ili. 34. ὃ 3; iv. 73. ὃ 4; v. 70. Pluygers, who pro- 
poses (Mnem. 9, p. 94) to read in 16, τὸν παράλογον (without καί) τοσοῦτον 
ἐποίησε, and puts a period before ὥστε, is influenced by a proper desire to 
give the period a grammatical const.; but he takes away from παράλογον its 
real explanation as shown above. If one would unite his proposal, ἐποίησε, 
with the conjecture made above, ὅμως δέ, there would certainly be a proper 
connexion and a satisfactory idea.” 

The pred. understood, whether forgotten or purposely omitted by Thuc., is 
no doubt ἄπιστον ἦν, referring to ἠπίστησεν av. 

29, 29. καὶ ξυμφορὰ τῇ πόλει πάσῃ οὐδεμιᾶς ἥσσων μᾶλλον ἑτέρας ἀδόκητος 
τε ἐπέπεσεν αὕτη καὶ δεινή. The explanation and translation given in the notes 
seek to retain the traditional reading. Dobree objected to the repetition 
of the kindred expressions οὐδεμιᾶς ἥσσων and μᾶλλον ἑτέρας, and, after mak- 
ing them exactly alike by the change of ἥσσων into ἧσσον, struck out the 
latter (μᾶλλον ἑτέρας) as a gloss, and St. has adopted his conjecture in his 
text. But wrongly; for the peculiarity of the passage consists in the fact that 
the greatness of the misfortune and the unexpectedness of the horror are to 
be expressed together; therefore οὐδεμιᾶς ἥσσων, ‘‘ greater than any other,”’ 
certainly cannot be changed. It is to be observed, also, that the striking 
coincidence of the kindred expressions οὐδεμιᾶς ἥσσων, μᾶλλον ἑτέρας, is soft- 
ened by the chiastic arrangement. The only doubt is whether it is possible 
that the two closely connected qualities of greatness and unexpectedness 
should occur in different grammatical relation (as has been allowed in the 
translation) —yoowy attrib. and immediately connected with ξυμφορά, adoxn- 
Tos τε Kal δεινή pred. with ἐπέπεσεν --- ; if this be considered inadmissible, it 
will be necessary to insert kat between ἥσσων and μᾶλλον, by which also 
ἥσσων would be connected with ἐπέπεσεν. 

But secondly, one feels great hesitation with regard to the position of the 
pron. αὕτη. In all the examples collected at i. 1. 8 of the same sup. form of 
expression, the dem. pron. follows the noun immediately, except in ii. 31. 8, 
where it does not occur till after the sup. Therefore the transposition καὶ 
ξυμφορὰ αὕτη τῇ πόλει macy... ἀδόκητος Te ἐπέπεσε Kal δεινή may perhaps 
commend itself. If the conjecture καί before μᾶλλον be accepted, the trans- 
position is prob. necessary. But on the other hand, the attrib. relation of 
οὐδεμιᾶς ἥσσων to ξυμφορά (if allowed to be admissible) helps to explain 
the remote position of αὕτη. 

30. 7. ἔξω τοξεύματος. The vulgate is ζεύγματος, which evidently means 
beyond the bridge, but Diod. xiii. 47 states that the bridge to Euboea was not 
built till after the Sicilian expedition, and Strab. ix. 2. 8 locates it near Aui - 
not in the Mycalessian country, and Valla and one or two Mss. read τοξεύμ:- 
tos. Besides, it is hardly likely that Thuc. would describe the situation by a 


118 APPENDIX. 


term so entirely local in signification. As to the question which St. raises, 
whether the Thebans used bows and arrows, it makes no difference here, 
since ἔξω τοξεύματος is evidently only a measure of distance. Cf. Xen. An. 
i. 8. 19, πρὶν δὲ τόξευμα ἐξικνεῖσθαι. == 

30. 13. The question has been raised, not without reason, whether the 
leader Diitrephes was among the dead of the Thracian mercenary corps. 
This has been conjectured because Paus. (i. 23. 3) mentions by the side of 
the ascent to the Acropolis a bronze statue of this Diitrephes, ὀϊστοῖς BeBAnpe- 
vos, and takes occasion to mention his leading the Thracian troops, and their 
misdeeds in Mycalessus. But he says nothing of his death, and Thuc. would 
hardly have failed to allude to it, esp. as he mentioned the death of the 
Boeotarch Scirphondas on the other side. It is prob., moreover, that the 
Diitrephes mentioned in viii. 64. 7 is the same as this one. 

31. 10. ᾿Αλύζειαν. The form acc. to Herod. i. p. 277 and Steph. Byz. s.v., 
for ᾿Αλυζίαν of the Mss. 

31. 17. οὔτε καταλύουσι τὸν πόλεμον. Madvig (Advv. I. p. 329) rejects 
τὸν πόλεμον as a gloss, and explains: “Conon nuntiavit naves sibi 
oppositas non, quod speraverat, statione decedere; id est 
καταλύειν τὴν φρουράν, τὴν φυλακήν aut simpliciter καταλύειν (portu 
repetito).” But Cl. thinks such an abs. use of καταλύειν possible only 
when ὁδόν is to be supplied. St. also has struck out tov πόλεμον, but under- 
stands αὐτό (sc. ἀνθορμεῖν) with καταλύειν, comparing iii. 11. ὃ 1. 

36. 24. διεκπλεῖν, ὥστε μὴ περιπλεῖν. St. following Cobet (on Hyp., p. 
61) rejects, as also v. H., these words as a gloss, saying that when to avoid 
ambiguity an explanation is added to ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ, it is added usually to one 
of the two, not to both. (See Matthiae, Gr. 288, note 5.) But since τὸ μέν 
and τὸ δέ by no means refer, like our this and that, to a definite succession,.- 
and esp. in this passage the chiastic arrangement involves the possibility of a 
misunderstanding, it seems more prob. that Thuc. himself added the easy and 
natural explanations. As far as the fact itself is concerned, it is easy to 
understand that the διεκπλεῖνς the breaking through the hostile line, would 
be hindered by strengthening the line, the περιπλεῖν, by the limited space. 
Cf. i. 49. § 3; ii. 84. § 1. 

36. 25 ff. τῇ πρότερον ἀμαθίᾳ τῶν κυβερνητῶν δοκούσῃ εἶναι, τῷ ἀντίπρῳρον 
ξυγκροῦσαι, μάλιστ᾽ ἂν αὐτοὶ χρήσασθαι. τὸ ἀντίπρῳρον ξυγκροῦσαι is the read- 
ing of Vat.; the rest have τό or τόν or τῇ ἀντίπρωρον ξυγκρούσει or συγκρού- 
oe. The explanation is to be found in a comparison with two other passages, 
in which a preceding subst. is explained by the inf. with the art.: i. 32. 15, 
ἡ δοκοῦσα ἡμῶν πρότερον σωφροσύνη, τὸ μὴ ἐν ἀλλοτρίᾳ ξυμμαχίᾳ τῇ τοῦ πέλας 
γνώμῃ ξυγκινδυνεύειν ; and i. 41. 7, ἡ εὐεργεσία αὕτη τε καὶ ἡ ἐς Σαμίους, τὸ δι 
ἡμᾶς Πελοποννησίους αὐτοῖς μὴ βοηθῆσαι. Only in these cases the substs. to 
be explained, and therefore also the infs., are in the nom. But since in the 
present case the subst. is in the dat., the inf. should also be in the same Case; 
for an acc. abs., as Bm. explains it, comparing ¢. 67. 3, is hardly admissible in 


APPENDIX. 179 


such close connexion with the preceding noun. Arn. follows Bk. in retaining 
To... ξυγκροῦσαι, on the ground that “the nom. instead of the case required 
by grammatical const. is not uncommon when the idea expressed by the nom. 
is added in explanation of what had gone before.” He compares ec. 67. 8 
(Ms. reading) ; 71. 20-25. Kr. wishes the dat., but with ἀντίπρῳροι ξυγκροῦσαι, 
which hardly accords with what goes before. Madvig (Advv. I. p. 330) pro- 
poses ἐς τὸ ἀντίπρῳρον ξυγκρούσει; St. writes ἀντιπρῴρῳ ξυγκρούσει. But 
the dat. of the inf. seems more in accord with the usage of Thue.: “and just 
that which before was blamed as want of skill on the part of the pilots 
(so δοκούσῃ εἶναι), --- namely, that they struck prow to prow (the aor. inf., as 
in i. 41. 9, μὴ βοηθῆσαι, refers to the definite occurrences), (this) they would 
now avail themselves of.” 

36. 38. ἀνάκρουσιν. Cl. conjectures ἀναχώρησιν, retreat, on the ground 
that the context demands this more general idea, and not ἀνάκρουσιν, backing, 
i.e. retiring with prow turned toward the enemy. He cites in support of his 
conjecture, c. 49. 16, ἀναχωρήσεις kal ἐπίπλους . . . ἕξουσι, while ὁ. 38.1, rpoc- 
πλέοντες καὶ dvakpovopevor seems to be against the Ms. reading τὴν ἐπίπλευσιν 
...7€ καὶ ἀνάκρουσιν. But St. more prop. explains that Thuc. here has no 
reference to flight, but means that the ships withdrew with their prows toward 
the enemy so as to ward off attacks and to move forward again to the onset if 
opportunity offered; and for this ἀνάκρουσις is the proper term. 

42, 15. οὐδὲ παθεῖν ὅπερ ὁ Νικίας ἔπαθεν. In the notes the explanation of 
‘St. and Kr. is adopted. But Cl. thinks that it is hardly admissible to supply 
otov τε εἶναι with παθεῖν on account of the οὐδέ, and holds, too, that this does 
not give the correct meaning. He proposes to read: οὐδὲ παθεῖν δεῖν ὅπερ ὁ 
Νικίας ἔπαθεν acc. to the const. (rare, it is true, in Thuce., but later very com- 
mon) of νομίζειν δεῖν τι ποιεῖν, aliquid faciendum esse putare: “ De- 
mosthenes was of the opinion that there was no time to lose, and that they 
must not let the fate of Nicias overtake them.” 

42, 33. καί οἱ ξυντομωτάτην ἡγεῖτο διαπολέμησιν. Madvig (Advv. I. p. 
330) rightly compares with this passage c. 86. 5, ἀσφαλεστάτην εἶναι νομίσαντες 
τήρησιν. But he proposes to add in both passages with the pred. aces. ξυντο- 
potarnv ... διαπολέμησιν and ἀσφαλεστάτην .. . τήρησιν, after the sups., rav- 
τὴν, which might easily have been lost by reason of the ending -τατην. 
Thue. undoubtedly could have written this, but surely ταύτην is not neces- 
sary in either place. If ταύτην is not added, the connexion of the pred. ace. 
with what goes before must be of course as close as possible. This is 
effected in c. 86.6 by the partic. νομίσαντες itself; and it is easy to supply 
τὸ καταβιβάσαι ἐς τὰς λιθοτομίας, so easy that ταύτην would seem rather in the 
way than otherwise. In the present passage this close connexion is effected 
by the pregnant kai ot: “he wished to hasten this attack as much as possible, 
and recognized (therein) his shortest way to end the war.” Besides, with 
ταύτην either εἶναι or ἔσεσθαι would be almost indispensable. But there is 
still another consideration; by the insertion of ταύτην the course just 


180 APPENDIX. 


described (viz., the storming of Epipolae and the capture of the camp) 
would be indicated as ξυντομωτάτην διαπολέμησιν. But that is not the object 
of the historian. He means to say that this course in one way or another will 
bring about the end of the war; even the failure of the attempt and the con- 
sequently necessary retreat are taken into consideration. But that would not 
accord with ταύτην. The form διαπολεμήσειν of Vat. is a slip of the pen. 

43. 7 ff. ὡς δὲ αὐτῷ προσαγαγοόντι κατεκαύθησάν τε ὑπὸ τῶν ἐναντίων ἀπὸ 
τοῦ τείχους ἀμυνομένων αἱ μηχαναὶ καὶ τῇ ἄλλῃ στρατιᾷ πολλαχῇ προσβάλλον- 
τες ἀπεκρούοντο. Since an accurate judgment about a locality can be given 
only by one who has actually seen it, a description of the occurrences here 
related is added from Holm, who thoroughly knows the place (II. p. 52): De- 
mosthenes recognized, “that an attack must be made witnout delay. This 
could, of course, be made with prospect of success only from the land side, 
and indeed from Epipolae. Here, however, the condition οὐ things was as fol- 
lows: Gylippus had completed the cross-wall, which ran from the city westward 
up through Epipolae. The Athenians were south of this place, and so could not 
prevent the constant communication of the Syracusans with the interior of the 
island. If the city was to be taken by a complete circumyallation, it was neces- 
sary that the Athenians should get possession of this wall as quickly as possible. 
If they succeeded, the siege could be prosecuted, and would end without doubt 
with the capture of the city ; but if they failed, the retreat must begin without 
delay. This proposal met the approval of the other generals, and after they 
had taken possession of the open country about the Anapus, only the garrison 
at the Olympieium opposing them, Demosthenes began to try the strength of 
his siege-engines on the Syracusan wall. But with these nothing was effected. 
So he determined to go around the wall. This, however, since the wall 
extended to the edge of the steep cliff, was possible only if one went up the 
valley of the Anapus, then turned off to the north, passed around the high 
west point of Epipolae, and made the ascent at a point quite near to this last, 
that is at the very same place where the Athenians first, and Gylippus after- 
wards, had ascended. If they succeeded in driving the Syracusans back 
into the city, they could easily get possession of the wall. But it would 
never be possible to storm the steep cliffs guarded by the Syracusans. 
Demosthenes conceived therefore the idea of a nocturnal attack, and his 
fellow-generals approved his plan. He himself, with Eurymedon and Menan- 
der, undertook the conduct of the assaulting division, while Nicias remained 
with the rest of the army in his old position between the walls. The storming 
party took with them five days’ provisions and all that was necessary to 
erect a wall, the building of which was to commence immediately after the 
capture of Epipolae. All the masons and carpenters accompanied them. So 
they broke camp in the first hours of the night, arrived unobserved at the 
foot of Euryelus, ascended the cliff, and came upon a fortification on the 
heights, which they took.” 

44, 39. καθίστασαν. St. (followed by Cl.) restores from καθίστησαν of 


APPENDIX. 181 


Vat. the impf. καθίστασαν, for καθέστασαν of the rest of the Mss. Cf. Schol. 
els φόβον καθίστασαν. 

44, 41. ῥιπτοῦντες. This form is adopted from Vat. for ῥίπτοντες, just as 
ῥιπτεῖν is read in ii. 49. 22. 

45. 3. ἢ οἱ Βοιωτοὶ ἀντέστησαν. Cl. follows Vat. in omitting πρῶτον or 
πρῶτοι of the Mss., thinking that the addition is owing to πρῶτοι in c. 43. 46. 
The rest of the editt. write ἡ οἱ Βοιωτοὶ πρῶτον ἀντέστησαν, which seems 
preferable, since the important fact to be recorded in connexion with the set- 
ting up of the trophy was where the j/irst resistance was made. 

45. 7. [ἄνευ τῶν ἀσπίδων]. Pluygers (Mnem. 11, p. 95) is prob. right in 
rejecting these words, for they are not necessary, and seem not even to be ace. 
to Greek usage. The const. ψιλός twos occurs in Xen. Cyrop. v. 3. 57; Plat. 
Legg. 834 ¢; 899 a; Polit. 258 d. 

48. 3. πόνηρα. On the varying accentuation of this word there have been 
preserved, in addition to casual notices of the Schols., several concordant 
statements of grammarians: in the Etymol. Magn. p. 682. 25, εἰ μὲν κατὰ 
ψυχήν, πονηρός, ὀξύνεται εἰ δὲ κατὰ σῶμα, πόνηρος, βαρύνεται; and in Herod. 
i. p. 197 (substantially agreeing with Arcad. d. acc. p. 71, 16), ἰστέον, ὅτι τὸ 
πόνηρος καὶ pox Onpos ἀεὶ οἱ ᾿Αττικοὶ ἀντὶ τοῦ ὀξύνειν προπαροξύνουσιν, ὅταν τὸ 
ἐπίπονον καὶ ἐπίμοχθον σημαίνῃ, ἐπὶ δὲ τῶν κατὰ ψυχὴν φαύλων ὀξύνουσιν. 
We see, it is true, from Gottling, Accent-lehre, p. 304 f., that this doctrine of the 
grammarians has not been everywhere uniformly followed. In Thue. four 
passages come under consideration in this respect: the present one, viii. 24. 
28; 97.13 for the adj., and vii. 83. 13 for the adv. Bk. writes in the first 
place πονηρά, in the second πόνηρα, in the third πονηρῶν, and in the fourth 
πονήρως. The Mss. vary. Vat. has acc. to Bk. in the present passage and 
viii. 24. 28 πόνηρα, viii. 97. 13 πονηρῶν, and vii. 83. 13 πονήρως (the two last 
to be inferred only ex silentio); but on the other hand ace. to the later 
collation of E. Petersen vii. 48. 2 πόνηρα and viii. 24. 28 πονηρά, viii. 97. 19 
πονήρων, and vii. 83. 13 πονήρως. Since, then, the accentuation in Vat. agrees 
in most cases with the rule of the grammarians, it has been considered advis- 
able to follow that everywhere. 

48, 35. ἀνηλωκέναι. This form of the aug. is, acc. to Wecklein (Cur. 
Epigr. p. 38 ff.), to be adopted everywhere in Thuc. (even ii. 70. 11) in spite of 
the variation of the Mss. 

48, 39. καὶ μὴ χρήμασιν, ὡς πολὺ κρείσσους εἰσί, νικηθέντας ἀπιέναι. Cl. 
brackets χρήμασιν. His critical note is as follows : 

“The Mss. read as above, except that Vat. has ov for ὡς. Instead of this 
Korais proposes ois, Madvig ᾧ, and St. ἕως. Most editt. (those esp. who read 
ὡς, ὦν, OF ἕως) Connect χρήμασιν with the following κρείσσους εἰσί. Bm., who 
reads ὧν, translates, ‘and not to go away conquered by those to whom they 
are far superior in point of money.’ St., who reads ἕως, renders: ‘and not, 
while they are still far superior in money, to go away conquered.’ How 
Madyvig, who (Advv. crit. I. p. 331) puts a comma after χρήμασιν and thinks 


182 | APPENDIX. 
ᾧ de genere scribendum esse, connects χρήμασιν both with κρείσ- 
σους εἰσί and with νικηθέντας, he has not stated. 

“ But apart from the doubts to which all these attempts at explanation give 
rise, exception must be taken not merely to the relation of χρήμασι, but also 
to the word itself. Nicias gave as the last reason against the departure, τὰ 
Συρακοσίων ὅμως ἔτι ἥσσω τῶν σφετέρων εἶναι, and based this on the difficulty 
which the Syracusans had in providing money for any length of time for 
their extraordinary armament; with τρίβειν οὖν ἔφη χρῆναι κτέ. the conclu- 
sion is drawn from the proposition ta Συρακοσίων ὅμως ἔτι ἥσσω τῶν σφετέρων 
εἶναι: ‘the Athenians must still wait and not depart after one lost battle’ 
(this is the meaning of the aor. νικηθέντας). And in connexion with this the 
reason, which had just been given in full, is repeated in few words, ὡς πολὺ 
κρείσσους εἰσί — τὰ Συρακοσίων ἥσσω τῶν σφετέρων εἶναι, spoken of the other 
side. χρήμασιν was prob. written on the margin from 31 by ἃ glossator who 
considered πολὺ κρείσσους too strong. Nicias inferred the superiority of the 
Athenians not only from their greater resources in money, but also from the 
poor military organization of the Syracusans (ἐπικουρικὰ μάλλον ἢ Sv ἀνάγκης 
ὄντα, 57). ὡς is preferable not only to ὧν of Vat., which is hard to construe, 
but also to ἕως of St., because the temporal conj. is less effective here than 
the causal.” 

Herbst, Pii/ol. 1884, p. 765 ff., omits πολὺ κρείσσους εἰσί as an interpolation 
and reads καὶ μὴ ὡς χρήμασι νικηθέντας ἀπιέναι. He says that πολὺ κρείσσους 
εἰσί means either to be superior (victorious), or to be far better off (in some 
respect). The first is out of the question here of course. But if Thue. had 
meant that the Athenians were far better off in point of money, he would have 
written πολλῴ κρείσσους εἰσί, for this is his invariable usage (c. 55. 10; v. 101. 
4; cf. also i. 136. 14, πολλῷ ἀσθενεστέρου: ii. 89. 22, ἐκ πολλῴ ὑποδεεστέρων; 
vi. 1.6, 8; vii. 80. 17; viii. 83.5); whereas πολὺ κρείσσους εἰσί in Thue. is 
always equiv. to νικᾶν (c. 41. 14; vi. 37. 5; of. c. 60. 27, πολὺ... κρατηθήναι:; 
C. 34. 35, πολὺ ἐκρατοῦντο... οὐ πολὺ ἐνίκων; also i. 25. 20; 49. 24; vil. 56. 
7; viii. 17.12; 89. 25; 105.3). The words πολὺ κρείσσους εἰσί being omitted, 
then, we have in kal μὴ ὡς χρήμασι νικηθέντας ἀπιέναι merely a repetition of 
the idea of 26 above, ὡς ὑπὸ χρημάτων καταπροδόντες οἱ στρατηγοὶ ἀπῆλθον. 

It has been suggested to take χρήμασι with νικηθέντας, in the sense overpow- 
ered by (want of) money. 

49. 5. καὶ ἅμα ταῖς γοῦν ναυσίν, ἡ πρότερον, ἐθάρσησε᾽ κρατηθείς. Only 
Vat. has ἐθάρσησε; all the other Mss. have θαρσήσει, which as dat. of the 
subst. θάρσησις (not found elsewhere) is connected with κρατηθείς in the sense 
maiore fiducia captus (Pp.), overcome by confidence, i.e. animated with 
too much confidence (Bm.), with which then tats ναυσίν is to be construed, as 
if with θαρρεῖν. Kr. despairs of a satisfactory explanation of the words. 
This is got, however, by adopting the reading of Vat., ἐθάρσησε, and the 
emendation of St., ἡ πρότερον for ἢ πρότερον : “Nicias depended, after he 
was conquered, just as before, on his ships.” The καί before κρατηθείς 


APPENDIX. 183 


(“even after he was conquered”) which Cl. proposes, St. rightly considers 
unnecessary. 

50. 3. ἡ τοῖς Συρακοσίοις στάσις φιλία. Most Mss. read és φιλίαν or és φίλια 
(Vat. ἐς φιλία), which admit of no satisfactory explanation (see Ullrich, Beitr. 
z. Erkl. d. Thuk. p. 176 £.). Bauer, with the approval of Madvig, end followed 
by St. and Cl., reads as above. 

50. 23. ἀλλ᾽ q. Almost all the Mss. (even Vat.) read ἄλλο εἰ μὴ φανερῶς 
ye ἀξιών μὴ ψηφίζεσθαι. But, as Pp. correctly observes, εἰ μή is only explana- 
tory of ἀλλ᾽ ἤ, and ἄλλο would not accord with οὐδ᾽ ἔτι ὁμοίως ἠναντιοῦτο. 

50. 24. προεῖπον ὡς ἐδύναντο ἀδηλότητα ἔκπλουν ἐκ τοῦ στρατοπέδου πᾶσι 
καὶ παρεσκευάσθαι, ὅταν τις σημήνῃ. Cl. retains παρασκευάσασθαι of the Mss., 
but omits the preceding καί. His critical note is as follows: 

“é«They gave orders to prepare as secretly as possible in every respect for 
sailing out of camp (to make themselves ready in all respects for departure), 
so soon as the signal for it should be given.’ All the Mss. read: ἔκπλουν ἐκ 
τοῦ στρατοπέδου πᾶσι καὶ παρασκευάσασθαι. Abresch, who rightly found it 
strange that the preparation should not take place till the command should 
be given to break up, proposed παρεσκευάσθαι for παρασκευάσασθαι : ‘they 
were to be ready whenever the command should be given’ But a far greater 
objection to the vulgate lies in the fact that acc. to it ὡς ἠδύναντο ἀδηλότατα 
must be connected with προεῖπον, although it is clear that it was important 
not that the command should be given as secretly as possible, but that the 
preparations should not be observed by the enemy. And πάσι (τοῖς τριηράρ- 
χοις or στρατιώταις 7), which in the vulgate must likewise depend on προεῖπον, 
would be a very useless addition. ‘The fault lies, as often (see on ὁ. 38. 2), in 
the καί inserted before παρασκευάσασθαι. Even if there is no objection to be 
made to governing both ἔκπλουν and παρασκευάσασθαι by προεῖπον, still to 
govern ἔκπλουν by παρασκευάσασθαι is far more natural. But above all the 
adv. phrase ὡς ἠδύναντο ἀδηλότατα is brought by the omission of "καί into 
prop. connexion with παρασκευάσασθαι. πᾶσι is to be joined as neut. with the 
same verb. It is true that tots πᾶσι would be in accordance with the usage 
of Thue. (ii. 11. 25, πόλιν... τοῖς πᾶσιν ἄριστα παρεσκευασμένην, and 20 
above), but the simple πᾶσι has the same meaning. And, finally, ὅταν τις 
σημήνῃ gets its proper effect only by the connexion with ἔκπλουν παρασκευά- 
σασθαι, so that with σημήνῃ; not παρασκευάσασθαι, but ἔκπλουν or ἐκπλεῦσαι 
is to be understood. St.’s objection that with this view we should have either 
ὡς ἂν δύνωνται or ws ἂν δύναιντο is not conclusive, since though the opt. is 
more usual, the impf. in indir. disc. is not without parallel. The short 
expression ὅταν τις σημήνῃ, Which when referred only to ἔκπλουν St. con- 
siders obscure, is quite prop. in military language.” 

If the vulgate be retained, the interpretation is doubtless: ‘as secretly 
as possible they gave to all notice of the ἔκπλους, and (notice) to prepare 
themselves (to sail) whenever the signal should be given (sc. ἐκπλεῦσαι). 

δῦ. 1. γεγενημένης δὲ τῆς νίκης τοῖς Συρακοσίοις λαμπρᾶς ἤδη. Cl. writes Aap- 


184 APPENDIX. 


πρῶς for λαμπρᾶς, against all the Mss. He claims, that the meaning of γεγενημέ- 
νης τῆς νίκης τοῖς Συρακοσίοις is, “ since the victory had fallen to the lot of the 
Syracusans,” with which the pred. adj. in the sense of “ brilliant” is inadmis- 
sible; on the other hand Thue. is fond of the adv. λαμπρῶς in the signification 
“in an indubitable, indisputable manner,” e.g. i. 49. 28, ἐπεὶ δὲ ἡ τροπὴ ἐγί- 
yvero λαμπρώς:: ii. 7. 1, λελυμένων λαμπρῶς τῶν σπονδών; Vili. 75. 6, λαμπρῶς 
ἤδη ἐς δημοκρατίαν βουλόμενοι μεταστῆσαι τὰ ἐν Σάμῳ. This, Cl. contends, 
is the sense of the pres. passage, “since victory on the sea had now also 
declared indisputably for the Syracusans”’; the const. here being the same as 
in i. 63. 15, ἐπειδὴ δὲ διὰ τάχους ἡ νίκη τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἐγίγνετο. But the passages 
cited do not prove that Thue. could not have written here the pred. adj. Cf. 
Arr. An. ii. 11. 3, τότε δὲ ἤδη λαμπρά Te καὶ ἐκ πάντων ἡ φυγὴ ἐγίγνετο; ibid. 
iv. 4. 8. 

δῦ. 8. ov δυνάμενοι ἐπενεγκεῖν οὔτε ἐκ πολιτείας τι μεταβολῆς τὸ διάφορον 
αὐτοῖς ᾧ προσήγοντο ἄν, οὔτ᾽ ἐκ παρασκευῆς πολλῴ κρείσσονος. St. (Symbol. 
Philol. Bonn. p. 390 ff.) rightly objecting to the connexion of τι with τὸ διάφορον, 
proposes to change the punctuation so as to read petaBoArs, τὸ διάφορον αὐτοῖς 
ᾧ προσήγοντο ἄν, οὔτε ἐκ παρασκευῆς KTE., Making τὸ διάφορον obj. of προστ- 
γοντο. He translates: “since they could neither by change of constitution force 
upon them anything by means of which they could have won over the oppo- 
site party, nor as the result of a far superior military force.” But even if it 
be ot a to take var agaed τί τινι = alicui aliquid inferre (St. cites 

. 42. 17; 56. 14; vi. 82. 21), it is doubtful whether τὸ διάφορον without 

any explanation at ‘all can mean the opposite party. St. supports his 
view by the explanation of the Schol., τῷ μεταβαλεῖν τὴν πολιτείαν προσή- 
yovro av οἱ διάφοροι αὐτοῖς. But this is only one, and indeed the least 
defensible, of several explanations of the Schol., who observes in conclusion: 
τὸ ἑξῆς ov δυνάμενοι ἐπενεγκεῖν τὸ διάφορον αὐτοῖς. But as it is clearly 
stated that neither of the two ways, ἴ.6. neither ἐκ πολιτείας τι μεταβολῆς nor 
ἐκ παρασκευῆς πολλῷ κρείσσονος, could effect the ἐπενέγκειν τὸ διάφορον 
αὐτοῖς, ᾧ προσήγοντο ἄν; so διάφορον means neither, as St. says, opposite 
party, nor as Kr. and others, internal dissensions, but, as similarly in ¢c. 75. 39, 
a substantial change of disposition and attitude on the part of the citizens, 
which could be brought about either by party faction or by force of arms. 
As stated in the notes, tris not to be connected with τὸ διάφορον, but with 
the neg. to strengthen it (not in the least, not at all). 

δῦ. 10. κρείσσονος. The Mss. have κρείσσους, Vat. adding ὄντες. That 
ὄντες was originally only a marginal reading is shown by the Schol., πολλῴ 
κρείσσους ᾿ λείπει TO ὄντες. κρείσσους = κρείσσονες, as is shown by the added 
ὄντες, and is due doubtless to an error of a copyist for κρείσσονος, which the 
Schol. Lugd. has, explaining as follows, od δυνάμενοι δὲ οὔτ᾽ ἐκ μεταβολῆς, 
ἐπεὶ ἡ αὐτὴ ἦν ἑκατέρων πολιτεία, οὔτ᾽ ἐκ παρασκευῆς ToAAW μείζονος ὅτι καὶ 
ἵππους καὶ ναῦς εἶχον ἐκεῖνοι ὁμοίως τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις. Valla also translates 
maioribus quam illa haberet copiis. 


APPENDIX. 185 


56. 17. μόνον, μόνον. The reading of the Mss., μόνον in both places, 
gives a good sense: “because they were proving superior not only to the 
Athenians but also to their numerous allies besides, and again not only did 
they themselves do it, but (they did it) also with those who had come to aid 
them, both becoming leaders with Corinthians and Lacedaemonians, etc.” 
The idea of winning or not winning the victory alone is not thought of, but 
the sense is, not only did they themselves win, but also (they won) in good 
company (with renowned comrades). As there is no suggestion of winning 
alone, or not winning alone, so there is none that their glory will be diminished 
by their not winning alone. The emphasis is on the fact that the Syracusans 
were proud of their allies. 

57. 16. τούτων Χῖοι φόρου οὐχ ὑποτελεῖς ὄντες... αὐτόνομοι ξυνέσποντο. 
The explanation given in the notes relieves Madvig’s objection (Advv. I. 
p- 331) to mentioning the Χῖοι as αὐτόνομοι. The αὐτονομία of a part of the 
Att. ξύμμαχοι, or the ξυμμαχία αὐτόνομος, consisted in the fact that they 
did not pay the φόρος, but furnished their own ships under their own 
leaders. The παραλαβεῖν tas vats τῶν πόλεων (i. 19. 5; iii. 50. 5) on the 
part of the Athenians was the act by which they destroyed the autonomy 
of the allies, who then contributed, instead of ships, their proportion of 
the expense (ἀντὶ τῶν νεῶν τὸ ikvovpevov ἀνάλωμα φέρειν, i. 99. 11). How 
little, however, this autonomy established political independence, the Lesbians 
esp. express in the bitterest terms, iii. 10. 18, ἡμεῖς αὐτόνομοι δὴ ὄντες καὶ ἐλεύ- 
θεροι TH ὀνόματι ξυνεστρατεύσαμεν. In the present passage, therefore, αὐτόνομοι 
does not contradict history (historiae testimonio redarguitur, Mad- 
vig); for Thue. says expressly in ii. 9. 20, ναυτικὸν παρείχοντο Χῖοι, Λέσβιοι, 
Κερκυραῖοι, and thereby admits their autonomy in the sense claimed. But 
still more definitely, and in complete agreement with the present passage, the 
Athenian ambassador EKuphemus in Camarina, vi. ὃς. 7, says, Χίους μὲν καὶ 
Μηθυμναίους νεῶν παροκωχῇ αὐτονόμους. The sent. τούτων Xio.. . Evve- 
σποντο, however, is itself intended to correct the inaccuracy which has arisen 
from placing the Chians among those ἐξ ᾿Ιωνίας (et manifesto ceteris 
quae Thucydides dicit. repugnat). 

57. 40. καὶ οἱ Μεσσήνιοι viv καλούμενοι ἐκ Ναυπάκτου kal ἐκ Πύλου... 
παρελήφθησαν. Vat. reads ἐκ Ναυπάκτου, all the other Mss., ἐν Ναυπάκτῳ; 
the later editt. since Bk. have decided for ἐκ Ναυπάκτου. Cl. thinks both 
should be read, and explains “ἐν Ναυπάκτῳ is indispensable to καλούμενοι 
and ἐκ Ναυπάκτου to παρελήφϑησαν. The standing, formula in which Thue. 
introduces the Messenians who were transplanted 462 B.c. to Naupactus is ot 
Μεσσήνιοι ἐν Ναυπάκτῳ or Μεσσήνιοι οἱ ἐν Ναυπάκτῳ (ii. 9.15). Cf Paus. 
iv. 26.1. Itis used here too in the phrase ot Μεσσήνιοι νῦν καλούμενοι ἐν 
Ναυπάκτῳ. But a comparison with c. 31. 8 (ὁ Δημοσθένης... ἐκ τῆς Nav- 
πάκτου τῶν Μεσσηνίων μετεπέμψατο), shows that ἐκ Ναυπάκτου is also re- 
quired. It is easy to see how either of the similar expressions might have 
dropped out.” 


188 APPENDIX. 


But ἐν Ναυπάκτῳ, which Thuc. would prob. have written if ἐκ Ναυπάκτου 
had not been expressed, seems to be unnecessary when this is used; for the 
sent., “the Messenians, as they are now called, were taken from Naupactus,” 
is only a shorter way of saying, “the Messenians, as they are now called, 
in Naupactus were taken from Naupactus.” Bloomfield renders the sense 
exactly : “thus also the Messenians (as they were now called) at Naupactus 
were taken from thence and from Pylus (then in the possession of the 
Athenians) to the war.” 

59. 1. οἱ δ᾽ οὖν Συρακόσιοι kal ξύμμαχοι εἰκότως ἐνόμισαν καλὸν ἀγώνισμα 
σφίσιν εἶναι. L. Herbst objects (Philol. 24, p. 628 ff.) to Kr.’s conjecture δ᾽ 
οὖν, for τε οὖν. He remarks (p. 628) that “when δέ and οὖν come together, 
οὖν is resumptive,” and “where δέ is used in connexion with οὖν, it makes a 
contrast, and marks the progress of the narrative.” That Herbst by his 
use of terms here (Gegensatz) does not mean contradiction, but contrast, 
the transition to another subject or to another phase of the matter in 
question, two passages, among others, which he cites show: ii. 34. 21, 
where the transition is made from the universal custom to its application 
in the particular case, and iv. 82. 1, where the effect of the popularity 
of Brasidas in the way of greater prudence on the part of the Athenians is 
mentioned. Quite similar is the use of δ᾽ οὖν in the present passage: 
οὖν refers without doubt to the almost literally repeated passage of c. 56. 9 
(καλὸν σφίσιν... τὸ ἀγώνισμα φανεῖσθαι) ; δέ, however, marks the transition 
from the representation given in the two preceding chaps. of the military 
resources at the disposal of the leading states, Athens and Syracuse, to the 
use which they make of these in the present case. From the ἐπικουρίαι 
ἑκατέρων which then were present on both sides (τότε ἀμφοτέροις παρή- 
σαν) the transition would, without reference to the previous remark (6. 56. 9), 
have been ot δὲ Συρακόσιοι καὶ ot ξύμμαχοι. δέ, however, effects not only this 
transition, but also the advance of the discourse. For the general hope 
expressed in ο. 56.9 of a καλὸν ἀγώνισμα, εἰ δύναιντο κρατῆσαι ᾿Αθηναίων τε 
καὶ τῶν ξυμμάχων takes definite form in the present passage: ἐλεῖν Te τὸ στρα- 
τόπεδον ἅπαν τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων τοσοῦτον ὃν kal μηδὲ καθ᾽ ἕτερα αὐτοὺς διαφυγεῖν. 
This advance from the still distant φανεῖσθαι to the firmly grounded expecta- 
tion is indicated with esp. emphasis by εἰκότως ἐνόμισαν with the aor. infs. 
ἑλεῖν, διαφυγεῖν. For surely the view which Herbst (p. 631) takes of the 
relation of εἰκότως is altogether wrong: “For their (the Syracusan) allies, 
the Corinthians and Lacedaemonians, efc., the καλὸν ἀγώνισμα was a matter 
of course. And that is what the historian has said in this passage. εἰκότως 
is to be closely connected with καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι, not with οἵ τε οὖν Συρακσσιοι. 
We must translate then: ‘the Syracusans, and naturally also their allies, con- 
sidered it a glorious object of their struggle, etc.’” Herbst recognizes quite " 
rightly that the traditional re would indicate some special force in kat ot 
ξύμμαχοι. But that this cannot be sought in the connexion of εἰκότως with 
καὶ of ξύμμαχοι appears from c. 58. 18, πρὸς τοὺς ἐπελθόντας τούτους (1.6. the 


APPENDIX. 187 


Lacedaemonians, Corinthians, cfc.) οἱ Σικελιῶται αὐτοὶ πλῆθος πλέον κατὰ 
πάντα παρέσχοντο. What ground can there be to say of these, that they 
naturally considered it a glorious object of their struggle? ‘The very fact that 
οἱ Συρακόσιοι καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι, after their complete enumeration just given, are 
represented throughout as belonging together and thinking and acting harmo- 
niously speaks most decisively against te, the position of which besides would 
be quite unsuitable. A clear example of the correct use of τε οὖν is found in 
ii. 18. 8, where Herbst rightly defends it against Kr. On the other hand, in 
ii. 16. 1, re οὖν must be changed to δ᾽ οὖν for reasons similar to those given for 
the present passage, and with this view St. agrees. 

60. 26. ὁρῶν τοὺς στρατιώτας. καί before τούς, which all the other Mss. 
have, is not in Vat. Cl. thinks there is good ground for it, since the whole 
foregoing consultation had been held only with the strategi and taxiarchs 
(3 ff.), while here is to be described the state of mind of the whole body of 
troops, which induced Nicias ξυγκαλέσαι ἅπαντας. 

But the motive of the speech was not that he now saw that the soldiers also 
(as well as the leaders) were despondent. The condition and disposition of 
the troops must have been in large measure the cause of the consultation. 
The state of mind of the soldiers after the preparations induced Nicias to 
address them. Hence it is better, with Kr., Arn., St., and Bm., to omit καί. 

ΟἹ. 3. [ἑκάστοις οὐχ ἧσσον ἢ Tots πολεμίοις]. Cl. and St. omit these 
words as a gloss to ὁμοίως ἅπασιν. Their reasons are, that it is incredible 
that Nicias should have said, in exhorting his men in such a crisis, that 
“to each of them not less than to the enemy the struggle was for life and 
country.” The condition of the two armies was very different at that time. 
For the Syracusans, as victors in the naval battle, were no longer in doubt 
about their safety. By the Athenians, however, the hope of victory had been 
lost, and every effort was to be made to force their way out of the harbour 
and to return home. 

But it does not seem impossible that Nicias should have reminded his 
troops under these circumstances that for each of them still more (οὐχ ἧσσον) 
than for the enemy life and country were at stake. That seems indeed just 
on a par with the exhortations of c. 64. See, however, Cl. in Frankf. Progr., 
1859, p. 8; St. in Symbol. Philol. Bonn. p. 392. 

63. 14. τῆς ἀρχῆς τῆς ἡμετέρας οὐκ ἔλασσον... πολὺ πλεῖον μετείχετε. 
Various attempts have been made to remove the difficulty, referred to in the 
exegetical note, of the substantial repetition of οὐκ ἔλασσον in πολὺ πλεῖον. 
Pp. and Bm. refer πολὺ πλεῖον to the comparison between the metoeci and 
the Athenians themselves: “you had from our rule more advantage than we 
ourselves”; Didot translates: “who shared our empire, enjoying advantages 
equal to ours; nay, greater, since you, feared by our subjects, are still more 
than we protected from injuries.” Others contrast κατὰ τὸ ὠφελεῖσθαι with 
ἔς Te TO φοβερὸν καὶ τὸ μὴ ἀδικεῖσθαι (and Reiske proposes in order to make 
this connexion clearer és δὲ τὸ φοβερον): “you shared equally with ourselves 


188 APPENDIX. 


in the advantages of our empire, while you gained even more than we by the 
dread which you inspired in subject-states and in your security against injus- 
tice.” This makes good sense, but the real difficulty remains, that in Thuc. 
οὐκ ἔλασσον = πολὺ πλεῖον. 

63. 17. ὥστε κοινωνοὶ μόνοι ἐλευθέρως ἡμῖν τῆς ἀρχῆς ὄντες δικαίως [ἂν] αὐτὴν 
μὴ καταπροδίδοτε. That the traditional reading cannot have come from Thue. 
has been doubted by no edit. The first thing to be recognized was that av was 
not possible with the imy.; therefore many have thought that it is sufficient to 
strike out av; so e.g. Bk., Kr., Pp., Arn., Bm., understanding the passage in the 
sense, “ justly you cannot betray it.” Against this St. remarks (Symbol. Philol. 
Bonn. p. 892) that the Greek words mean “do not betray it justly,” while the 
context requires just the opposite, “do not betray it unjustly.” But Arn.’s 
interpretation is supported by iv. 62. 17, τιμωρία γὰρ οὐκ εὐτυχεῖ δικαίως (as of 
right it should be), ὅτι καὶ ἀδικεῖται. To meet his objection to δικαίως, St. emends 
to δικαιοῦσαν, and translates, “since then you alone shared in a free manner 
in our empire, do not betray it now, when it demands this of you as a right.” 
But aside from the fact that δικαιοῦν without any intimation of the 
object of the claim (which is clearly indicated in the passages cited by 
St., i. 140. 7; iv. 64. 7, by infs.) would be hard to understand, the relation of 
δικαιοῦσαν to ἀρχήν is quite inadmissible; for not her endangered empire, 
but Athens herself for her empire, would have to beg the assistance of her 
allies. Bm.’s conjecture κινδυνεύουσαν would suit the context much better, if 
it did not depart too much from the vulgate. Madvig’s view is even less 
tenable (Advv. I. p. 332, note 2): “non ahiiciendum puto quod 
codices meliores tenent, δικαίως ἂν αὐτὴν νῦν μὴ καταπροδιδοῖτε, de μή 
in sententia potentiali posito veritus neglegere (1) simili- 
tudinem eorum, quae ad Euripidis Iph. Aul. 373 commemo- 
ravi.’ In the first place, a closer investigation would have convinced 
Madvyig that not even a single good Ms. has the opt., which is found only in 
older editt. In the second place, even Madvig’s authority cannot persuade 
us to believe that Thuc. could have written μή for od in a potential sent. 
(δικαίως ἂν καταπροδίδοιτε). 

Cl. agrees with St. in regarding δικαίως in the sense attached to it by Arn. 
and others impossible, and therefore brackets both words, thinking that, 
though a suitable pred. modifier, whether partic. or ady., must have preceded 
αὐτήν, this has not been found. 

64. 11. ἐνθυμεῖσθε καθ᾽ ἑκάστους Te kal ξύμπαντες... καὶ TO μέγα ὄνομα τῶν 
᾿Αθηνῶν. In order to leave no doubt of his understanding of this important 
passage, Cl. renders it: “and bear well in mind, all together as well as each 
of you singly, that those of you who will presently be on board the ships ” 
(only the sick, the invalids, and garrison remain in the fortification, διατεί- 
Xtopa) “ will constitute not only the whole land force of the Athenians, but 
also their sea force ” (καὶ νῆες, which St. would omit), “all that still remains 
of your mother-city, as well as the great name of Athens.” Heilmann trans- 


APPENDIX. 189 


lates correspondingly: “that you who will now be on the ships constitute the 
whole strength of the Athenians in land forces and in ships, aye, the whole 
remaining city and the great name of Athens.” Grote too renders it sub- 
stantially so (VII. c. 60, p. 161): “ Recollect, every man of you, that you now 
going aboard here are the a// of Athens, — her hoplites, her ships, her entire 
remaining city, and her splendid name.” 

67. 3. τὸ κρατίστους εἶναι. Cl. compares c. 33. 11 and ii. 81.19; but these 
are not parallel. Not very unlike is Soph. Ant. 255, τῆς ἐλπίδος yap ἔρχομαι 
δεδραγμένος τὸ μὴ παθεῖν ἂν ἄλλο πλὴν TO μόρσιμον, if τῆς δοκήσεως προσγεγε- 
νημένης will allow the same const. as τῆς ἐλπίδος δεδραγμένος (-- ἐλπίζων). 
Arn. and Bm. compare c. 36. 26 (where they preserve the traditional reading 
τὸ avtimpwpov ξυγκροῦσαι). Arn. explains (c. 36. 26) that “the use of the 
nom. [acc. | instead of the case required by grammatical const. is not uncom- 
mon, when the idea expressed by the nom. is added in explanation of what 
has gone before.” See Kiihn. 406, note 1. 

70. 49. μὴ Sv ἀνάγκην. So Vat., which Cl. adopts. But St. shows that 
δι’ ἀνάγκην is used nowhere else by Thuc., who has kar ἀνάγκην (ὁ. 57. 24; 
70. 39; iii. 58. 10; iv. 19. 10; 63. 14; vi. 10.9; viii. 2.17; 38.11), ἐξ ἀνάγκης 
(c. 27. 17; iii. 40. 9; vi. 44. 5), ὑπὸ ἀνάγκης (111. 32. 7), ξὺν ἀνάγκῃ (iii. go. 90), 
δι ἀνάγκης (ὁ. 48. 38). 

11. 7. καὶ διὰ τὸ (ἀνώμαλον τῆς τάξεως) ἀνώμαλον καὶ τὴν ἔποψιν τῆς ναυ- 
μαχίας ἐκ τῆς γῆς ἠναγκαΐζοντο ἔχειν. So Cl. proposes to emend the text 
His critical note is as follows: “ Every attempt to explain the traditional read- 
ing (without the added words) has been in vain. Even if ἀνώμαλον could be 
supplied in mind a second time, ace. to analogy of the elliptical usage observed 
αὖ c. 69. 4; i. 78. 10, still ἀνώμαλον kal τὴν ἔποψιν requires necessarily a pre- 
veding noun to which ἔποψιυς would correspond, as in 15 ὄψις is contrasted by 
means of καί with γνώμη. What. this is, must, however, be determined by 
the following explanation: δι ὀλίγου γὰρ οὔσης τῆς θέας Kal od πάντων ἅμα és 
τὸ αὐτὸ σκοπούντων, εἰ μέν τινες ἴδοιεν... ἀνεθάρσησαν .. ., οἱ δὲ... ἐδου- 
λοῦντο, 1.6. ‘because the spectators had from their different points of view 
different occurrences of the combat before their eyes, so they received differ- 
ent impressions from these.’ With this explanation, the addition which Arn. 
proposes and St. substantially approves cannot be considered correct, viz. 
διὰ TO ἀνώμαλον τῶν ξυμβαινόντων ; for not from the unlikeness of the occur- 
rences themselves comes the difference of impressions, but from the specta- 
tors seeing different occurrences at the same time. Therefore διὰ τὸ ἀνώμα- 
λον τῆς τάξεως is proposed (it might also be τῆς στάσεως or τοῦ χωρίου), so 
that the ἀνώμαλον of the point of view brings with it the ἀνώμαλον of the view.” 
Cl. considers his proposed emendation, though not necessarily the only one 
possible, still admissible, notwithstanding St.’s objections. 

Cl.’s explanation is not entirely satisfactory. It would be more natural to 
suppose that simply ἀνώμαλον had dropped out of the text, and read, καὶ διὰ 
TO ἀνώμαλον (ἀνώμαλονδ kal τὴν ἔποψιν κτέ., and because of the inequality (of 


190 APPENDIX. 


the ground, or of their position) so, (kal) they were compelled to have unequal 
views of the battle from the shore. 

Bk.’s emendation, confirmed by one Ms., is καὶ 80 αὐτὸ ἀνώμαλον καὶ τὴν 
ἔποψιν τῆς ναυμαχίας ἐκ τῆς γῆς ἠναγκάζοντο ἔχειν. If we take αὐτό to refer 
either to the idea that their fear was unparalleled or that the stake was so great, 
the ideas of the preceding clauses (cf. διὰ αὐτό, c. 6. 14), and further ἀνώμαλον 
καὶ τὴν ἔποψιν τῆς ναυμαχίας ἠναγκαΐοντο ἔχειν as equiv. to ἐφεώρων avay- 
καίως τὴν ναυμαχίαν ἀνωμάλως (variously, unequally), we get good sense and 
one consistent with the following amplification. “For since now the all of 
the Athenians was staked on their ships, there was both fear for the future 
like to none, and on account of it they necessarily viewed also the sea-fight 
with various feelings (unequally),” 1.6. the greatness of the stake caused 
them greatly to fear, and caused them to look with varied feelings on the sea- 
fight; those who happened to be looking at any place where their friends 
were victorious, would, on account of the greatness of the stake, be corre- 
spondingly elated and call upon the gods to help; those who looked upon any 
part that was getting worsted, the greatness of the stake led to give way to 
loud lamentation. 

73. 9. τὰ στενόπορα τῶν χωρίων διαλαβόντας φυλάσσειν. Manifestly this 
reading of Vat. is not so much a variant as a correction of προφθάσαντας, 
which all the other Mss. read, and which Vat. has on the margin. Though 
the relation of Vat. to the text of Thuc., esp. in the last two books, needs a 
thorough and complete investigation, still it is everywhere, Cl. thinks, to be 
preferred, if it gives a good meaning, and above all where it gives a better 
meaning than the vulgate. This is the case here, where διαλαβεῖν quite prop. 
expresses the occupation of a pass. A copyist might write the common 
προφθάσαντας (cf. 21; iii. 69. 13; viii. 51. 3) for the rare διαλαβόντας, not 
vice versa; the latter comes from a better source. 

75. 4. δεινὸν οὖν ἦν οὐ καθ᾽ ἕν μόνον τῶν πραγμάτων κτέ. The explana- 
tion in the notes is perhaps not entirely satisfactory; but no other attempt 
gives a better result. The phrase καθ᾽ ἕν τῶν πραγμάτων (taken together) has 
either been considered the subj. of the sent.: ‘the whole result (sum- 
total) of things” (Jacobs, Kr., Bm.) ; or it has been taken ady.: “si in 
unum contracta calamitatum summa spectetur,” and the subj. 
sought for either in an ellipsis or in the following ὅτι τάς τε vats . . . 
κινδυνεύοντες (Haase and Pp. with some hesitation). But the examples cited 
in support of the latter explanation, iii. 10. 16; viii. 46. 8, where καθ᾽ ἕν ylyve- 
σθαι means “to unite themselves,” are of quite a different nature. The oppo- 
sition assumed to exist between οὐ καθ᾽ ἕν μόνον and ἀλλὰ καὶ ξυνέβαινε kre. is 
supported by a comparison with Hat. ν. 78. 1, δηλοῖ οὐ Kat’ ἕν μοῦνον ἀλλὰ 
πανταχῇ. Cl. thinks that the real difficulty lies in τῶν πραγμάτων, the relation 
of which to καθ᾽ ἕν is not clear, and conjectures, therefore, πεπραγμένων for 
πραγμάτων, so that the thought would be: “terrible was the situation, not in 
one respect only of the things that had happened, namely, that they had 


APPENDIX. 191 


begun the retreat after the loss of the whole fleet and in the most threatening 
danger to themselves and to Athens, but there was added, that every single 
one, on leaving the camp, experienced the most painful impressions for eye 
and heart.” Esp. opp. to the past idea in τῶν πεπραγμένων is that of the 
present moment in the words ἐν τῇ ἀπολείψει τοῦ στρατοπέδου. Even with 
this explanation Cl. is not satisfied, and it may be doubted whether the pro- 
posed emendation τῶν πεπραγμένων is either prob. correct or really better 
than τῶν πραγμάτων. 

75. 19. οὐκ ἄνευ [ὀλίγων] ἐπιθειασμῶν. The vulgate has been objected to 
by all editt. Among the conjectures for ὀλίγων are: λυγρῶν, Heilmann ; 
συχνῶν, Pp.; olkrpav, v. H.; ἀλόγων, Madvig. Arn. says that the neg. must 
be repeated, as if it were οὐκ ἄνευ οὐκ ὀλίγων, and Valla translates, non 
sine multis obtestationibus ac ploratibus. Kr. and St. strike 
out ὀλίγων, the latter as arising from a gloss, ὀλολυγῶν. Cl. understands 
ὀλίγων of the weak, scarcely audible voice of the dying, in their last com- 
plaints and appeals to the gods. It has this meaning in Hom. ξ 492, φθεγξάμενος 
ὀλίγῃ ὀπί, and in c. 44. 19, κραυγῇ οὐκ ὀλίγῃ χρώμενοι evidently means not 
much, but loud crying. So Eur. Or. 155, βραχὺ ἀναστένει refers to low sighing 
and groaning. On the other hand, péyas is freq. used in poets and prose 
writers of a Joud shout. But Cl.’s explanation will hardly be accepted ; and 
if Arn.’s view be not admissible, it is perhaps best to reject the word. 

75. 34. ἡ ἄλλη αἰκία καὶ ἡ ἰσομοιρία κτέ. Dobree (Advv. I. p. 97) observes 
on this passage, “Malim αἰκία, ἰσομοιρίᾳ τών κακῶν ἔχουσά τινα ὅμως, TO μετὰ 
πολλῶν, κούφισιν. Verte: quamvis 6 communitate traheret ali- 
quid solatii, illud scilicet pervulgatum hoc sibi cum multis 
aliis accidere.” And accordingly St. formerly read in his text, ἡ ἄλλη 
αἰκία, καὶ ἰσομοιρίᾳ τῶν κακῶν ἔχουσά τινα ὅμως TO μετὰ πολλῶν κούφισιν. But 
he has changed his opinion, and now follows ν. H. in believing that the pred. 
to ἡ ἄλλη αἰκία (which could be οὐχ ἧσσον αὐτοὺς ἐλύπει) has dropped out. 
Cl. thinks that the ground of objection to the traditional reading lies in the 
fact that ἡ ἄλλη αἰκία, which certainly contains no κούφισις, is in this respect 
placed on the same line with icopopia, and that instead of ἡ ἄλλη alka, which 
does not suit the context, some word kindred in sense to ἰσομοιρία must be 
sought, though he has no satisfactory emendation to propose. The simplest 
remedy, he thinks, would be to omit ἡ ἄλλη αἰκία, as it is possible that these 
words had their origin in a marginal observation ἡ ἄλλη αἰτία, sc. τῆς κατη- 
φείας (24). The first ground was οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἢ... ἐῴκεσαν (25); the second, 
the lack of all servants (28 ff.) ; and now the third, that the community of 
misfortune lacked its alleviating power. 

77. 12. ai δὲ ξυμφοραὶ οὐ Kar ἀξίαν δὴ φοβοῦσι. St., rejecting all 
other explanations of this passage, has adopted in his text the conjecture of 
Schiitz (Zeitschr. f. d. Gymnasialw. 1879, p. 121): at δὲ ξυμφοραὶ ot κατ᾽ ἀξίαν δὴ 
φοβοῦσαι τάχ᾽ ἂν Kal λωφήσειαν, and translates, calamitates autem, 
quoniam praeter meritum (mos) terrent, facile videntur 
remissurae esse. 


192 APPENDIX. 


77. 36. σωθεῖτε. So we must read for σωθείητε of the Mss. (as also in ii. 
45, 4, κριθεῖτε) acc. to Heraclides apud Eustath. in Od. @ 195, ἡ ἀρχαία ᾿Ατθὶς 
τὰ εὐκτικὰ ξυγκόπτει Kat ἐξαίρεσιν μιᾶς συλλαβῆς. See St. Qu. Gr. p. 18. 

78. 14. σταδίους ὡς τεσσαράκοντα. The following chief results of Holm’s 
latest observations, made with the two Cavallaris, are taken from his paper, 
Zum Riickzug der Athener von Syrakus, 413, read at the meeting of the 
Philological Association in Karlsruhe. 

Holm holds, against Grote and Unger, to his view that the retreat covered 
eight days. 

lst day. The Athenians leave their camp before Syracuse, cross the river 
Anapus, and, going 40 stadia, encamp on a hill, ο. 78. ὃ 1-4. 

2d day. They march forward 20 stadia, pressed always by the enemy, and 
encamp on a level place where water is still to be had, c. 78. ὃ 4, ὃ. 

3d day. They proceed in the direction of the Acraeum Lepas, but are 
forced to turn back without reaching it and encamp at about the same place 
as at the end of the second day, c. 78. ὃ 6, 7. 

4th day. Again pressing forward, they reach the Acraeum Lepas, but are 
driven back, and are obliged on the retreat to storm some breastworks which 
had been thrown up by the Syracusans in their rear with the purpose of 
hemming them in. They cut their way through, and finally encamp again in 
the plain, c. 79. ὃ 1-8. 

5th day. They try to press forward again, but are able to make only five 
or six stadia. In the following night they change the course of their march 
and proceed toward the sea, c. 79. ὃ 5—8o. ὃ 2. 

6th day. After reaching the sea they proceed southward along the 
Elorine Way, and cross the river Cacyparis. Nicias is in advance; Demos- 
thenes is overtaken by the Syracusans and captured, ο. 80. § 4-82. ὃ 3. 

7th day. Nicias is overtaken between the Erineus and the Assinarus, and 
negotiations, followed by fighting, take place, c. $3. ὃ 1-84. § 1. 

8th day. Nicias reaches the Assinarus. Destruction and capture of the 
remnant of the Athenian army, c. 84. ὃ 2-c. 85. 

Holm adds to this short summary the following remark: “ Whither did 
the Athenians wish to go? Not toward Catana, as Diod. says, but southwest- 
ward. The details of the narrative of Thuc. leave no doubt about this. 
During my last visit to Syracuse, however, I reconsidered another question on 
the spot, and have come to a different conclusion. The general direction of 
the march remains the same as before determined, but there is still a question 
as to how far the Athenians marched each day. Thuc. sometimes states the 
number of stadia which they made. The question is then, what shall we 
determine to have been the length of the stade used by him for the retreat of 
the Athenians. I have estimated it heretofore at about 187 meters (10 stadia 
= 1 Eng. geographical mile). But in the case of another measure of distance, 
which refers to Syracuse and can be determined, namely the width of 
the harbour of the Syracusans (c. 59. 6), the number in Thue. agrees with the 


A tp hee 


APPENDIX. 193 


reality only if we adopt a shorter itinerary stade of about 150 meters. Hence 
it seems proper to apply this measure also to the retreat of the Athenians, as 
Thuc. describes it; thereby several statements of the historian are better 
explained than on the basis of a stade of 187 meters.” 

80. 7 ff. ἦν δὲ ἡ ξύμπασα ὁδὸς αὕτη οὐκ ἐπὶ Karavns ... καὶ “EAAnvidas 
καὶ βαρβάρους. Grote (VII. ο. 00, ». 178) attempts to reconcile the account of 
Thue. with the remark of Diod. (προσήεσαν ἐπὶ Κατάνης) : Nicias and De- 
mosthenes, he says, “saw plainly that the route which they had originally 
projected, over the Akraean cliff into the Sikel regions of the interior and from 
thence to Katana, had become impracticable; ... accordingly they resolved 
completely to alter the direction, and to turn down towards the southern 
coast on which lay Kamarina and Gela.”’ On the contrary, Holm has shown 
(II. p. 398, 599) that Thuc. nowhere ascribes to the Athenian generals the 
intention to march to Catana; but “that at the time when they took their 
way to the ᾿Ακραῖον λέπας they were already marching not toward Catana but 
toward Camarina, etc., and now when they had to turn back from the ’Axpaiov 
λέπας were striving for the same goal, only by another way.” Besides the 
fact that the expression ἡ ξύμπασα ὁδὸς αὕτη cannot possibly refer to any- 
thing else than the whole five days’ march, Holm’s conclusion is reached on 
the two following grounds: (1) that Nicias in his speech of encouragement 
refers not to Catana as the goal of safety, but in c. 77. 29 says expressly ἣν 
ἀντιλαβώμεθά του φιλίου χωρίου τῶν Σικελῶν, ... ἤδη νομίζετε ἐν τῷ 
éxupw εἶναι; and (2) that Nicias reckoned on meeting the help requested from 
the Sicels (c. 77. 82) not on the road to Catana, but, as is expressly stated in 
c. 80. 22 (ἤλπιζον τοὺς Σικελοὺς ταύτῃ ovs μετεπέμψαντο ἀπαντήσεσθαι), in the 
upper part of the valley of the Cacyparis River. In this direction then, ze. 
south-west, it had been their intention to march from the beginning. They 
hoped first to find a reception and a safe sojourn in one of the large Sicel 
cities. KE. Curtius (Griech. Gesch. II. p. 834, note 155) in holding to Catana 
as the object of the march seems to consider the difficulties which ace. to 
Holm were opp. to this undertaking not so great as the latter thinks them. 

86. 26. διὰ τὴν πᾶσαν és ἀρετὴν νενομισμένην ἐπιτήδευσιν. In determin- 
ing the reading of this passage, we must bear in mind that the words πᾶσαν 
ἐς ἀρετήν, which the inferior Mss. omit, rest on the authority of Vat., while 
on the contrary the interpolation ἐς τὸ θεῖον, which the older editt. have after 
νενομισμένην, has not the support of a single one of the better Mss. For the 
explanation, however, of the expression, chosen by Thuc. evidently with great 
care, we must above all compare the words which he puts into the mouth of 
Nicias himself in the same sense in 6. 77. 9, καίτοι πολλὰ μὲν ἐς θεοὺς νόμιμα 
δεδιήτημαι, πολλὰ δὲ ἐς ἀνθρώπους δίκαια καὶ ἀνεπίφθονα. In these words he 
claims to have kept his whole course of life, toward the gods, within the 
limits of the ordinances handed down as sacred, and toward men, avoiding 
everything that might give offence (ἀνεπίφθονα), within the limits of legal 
right. These two sides of a course of life pursued with anxious caution 


194 APPENDIX. 


Thue. here includes in the phrase τὴν πᾶσαν ἐς ἀρετὴν νενομισμένην ἐπιτήδευ- 
σιν, i.e. the whole effort of Nicias was directed on principle, under strict 
observance of law and custom, to the development of everything humanly 
noble. ἀρετή signifies in Thuc. esp. (see Introd. to Book I. p. 86) the senti- 
ments of humanity and generosity, then, in general, good conduct in a moral 
and religious sense. (The pl. dperat which must be assumed, if we connect és 
πᾶσαν ἀρετήν, aS some propose, Thuc. uses only in the sense of excellent 
deeds and services, i. 123. 4; ti. 35.7; 42. 6; 111, 53. 20; 67. 4; iv. 92. 36. 
This pl. is found, too, only in speeches.) The pass. νομίζεσθαι Thuc. uses 
always of that which is ordered by law and custom (i. 25. 15; ii. 15. 382; vi. 
32.4; 69.17). So also Nicias’s ἐπιτήδευσις ἐς ἀρετήν is termed νενομισμένη, 
for the reason that it was guided always by law and precedent, and avoided 
giving offence, i.e. practised τὰ νόμιμα és θεούς, τὰ δίκαια Kal ἀνεπίφθονα 
ἐς ἀνθρώπους. (With ἐπιτήδευσις ἐς ἀρετήν, cf. vi. 54. 20, referring to the 
Pisistratidae, ἐπετήδευσαν ἐπὶ πλεῖστον δὴ τύραννοι οὗτοι ἀρετὴν Kal ξύνεσιν. 
Therefore in the present passage we might have had ἀρετῆς for ἐς ἀρετήν; but 
the prep. emphasizes more strongly the idea of purpose.) In this charac- 
terization of Nicias the recognition of the purest and most upright sentiment is 
very strikingly connected with the intimation of an anxiety and timidity 
about giving offence in any direction (here in νενομισμένη ἐπιτήδευσις, as in 
ἀνεπίφθονα inc. 77.11). In the sharpest contrast with the character of Nicias 
stands ἡ ἄλλη αὐτοῦ és τὰ ἐπιτηδεύματα οὐ δημοτικὴ παρανομία affirmed of 
Alcibiades in vi. 28. 12, and βίαιος of Cleon in iii. 36. 206. That the character 
of Nicias here briefly sketched fully agrees with all the details of his conduct 
from his first appearance in iii. 91. 5 to his death, no unprejudiced reader will 
fail to recognize. 

Miiller-Striibing (Aristoph. u. d. hist. Krit. p. 636 ff.), asserting that the words 
πᾶσαν ἐς ἀρετήν are wanting in all good Mss., and that ἀρετή in Thuc. means 
nothing else than manliness, energetic, heedless pursuit of a definite object, rejects 
these words with the greatest vehemence against those who decide otherwise, 
and explains διὰ τὴν νενομισμένην ἐπιτήδευσιν, “because he had ordered his 
life in accordance with custom.” But since both premises on which his 
explanation rests are wrong, we may, perhaps, venture to content ourselves 
with the above explanation of πᾶσαν és ἀρετὴν νενομισμένην ἐπιτήδευσιν, the 
reading of the best Ms., which in numberless passages in Books VII. and VIII. 
alone gives the right reading. 


΄ 


GREEK INDEX. 


[The references to the Greek text are by chapters and thirds of chapters; to the notes, by 
chapter and line of text annotated: e.g., 31 ἃ refers to the Greek text at the first third of c. 
31; and 67. 8 refers to the note on line 8 of 6. 67.] 


ἀ-: ἀνάρμοστος, 67. 8; 
ἀδυνασία, 8.9; ἀδύ- 
νατος (τοῖς χρήμα- 
σι), 28. 26; ἀνεπί- 
τακτος, 69. 14: ἀνε- 
πίφθονα, 77. 11; 
ἀίδιον, 21. 11; ἀνώ- 
padov, 71. 8; ἄπε- 
Sov, 78. 17; ἄπλους, 
34. 20; ἀπροσδόκη- 
τος, 29. 14; ἀπροσ- 
δοκήτως, 21. 19; 
ἀσθενοῦντες, 60. 10. 

ἄγειν, of ships, 30. 5; 
with acc. 37. 19; 
with dat. 52. 4. 

ἀγχώμαλα, 71. 21. 

αἴσθεσθαι, 75. ὃ. 

ἀκμὴ βραχεῖα, 14. 2. 

ἀκοντίζειν ἐς, 40. 29. 

ἀκρίβεια, 13. 18. 

ἁλίσκεσθαι, 40. 14. 

ἄλλος (besides), 4. 12. 

ἀνα-: ἀνειλεῖν, 81. 22; 

ἀνελέσθαι, ς. 9; 

ἀνεπιστήμων, 67. 1; 

ἀνέχειν, 48. 16; 

ἀνεῖναι, 18.7; ἀνα- 

καλεῖν, 69. 10; ava- 
κεῖσθαι, 71.6; ava- 
κρουσις, 36. 28; ava- 

λαμβάνειν, 1. 27; 

43. 18; 86. 3; ἀνα- 

παύεσθαι, 73. 12; 


ἀνα-: 
ἀναπειρᾶσθαι, 7. 14; 
12. 16; ἀναρρηγνύ- 
vat, 34. 20. 

ἄνδρες: = τινες, 66. 12. 

ἀντι- : ἀντηρίδες, 36. 9; 
ἀντιλαμβάνειν, 60. 
17; 70. 45; ἀνθι- 
στάναι, 45.3; ἀντι- 
ναυπηγεῖν, 62. 11; 
ἀντίπαλα, 13. 9; 
38. 9. 

ἁπλώς, 34. 19. 

ἀπό: (= ἐπί) with gen. 
63. 9; amr αὐτῶν 
βλάψαι, 29. 6; 67. 
19; ἀπὸ γλώσσης, 
10. 2; ἀφ᾽ ἑσπέρας, 
29. ὃ; ἀπὸ ξυμμα- 
χίας αὐτόνομοι, 57. 
12; ἀπὸ τῶν πολε- 
μίων, 13. 14. 

ἀπο-: ἀπαντᾶν, 2. 10; 
ἀποδέχεσθαι, 48. 
18; ἀφέλκειν, 53. 
4; ἀφιέναι τὰς ναῦς, 
19. 21; ἀποκινδυ- 
νεύειν, 67. 23; 81. 
26; ἀπολείπειν, 70. 
24: ἀπολύεσθαι, 44. 
40; ἀπολλύειν, 51. 
16; ἀπόπειραν λαμ- 
βάνειν, 21.6; ἀπο- 
πιμπλάναι, 68. 5; 


ἀπο-: 
ἀποτολμάν, 67. 2; 
ἀποτρέπεσθαι, 31. 
28; ἀποφέρεσθαι, 
50. 8; ἀποφραγνύ- 
vat, 74. 10; ἀπο- 
χρῆσθαι, 42. 27; 
ἀποχωρεῖν, 79. 8. 

ἀρχαιολογεῖν, 69. 17. 

ἀρωγά, 62. 1. 

αὖθις, 36. 2. 

αὐτά, 55. 11. 

αὐτοῦ ἐκεῖ, 16. 4. 


βόσκειν, 48. 33. 
βουλομένοις εἶναι, 35. 8. 
βροντή; 79. 9. 


γεγωνίσκειν, 76. 5. 
γραμματεύς, 10. 4. 
γυμνητεία, 37. 8. 


Sds, 53. 19. 

δέ (position of), 12. 4; 
epexegetical, 15. 
16; 28. 4; 56. 16. 

δή, 18. 5. 

δηλοῦν, το. 5. 

Sia: δι’ ἀνάγκην, 70. 49; 
δι ἀνάγκης, 48. 38; 
δι ἐλάσσονος, 4. 19; 
SU ὀλίγου, 36. 29; 
71.9; δι’ ὅπερ, 34. 
33; διὰ παντός, 6. 


6. 


196 


δια-: διάγγελος, 73.27; | 


διάβροχος, 12. 11; 
διέκπλους, 69. 29; 
70. 26; διελέσθαι 
κατὰ πόλεις, 19. 5; 
διελθεῖν, 43. 45; 
διικνεῖσθαι, 79. 7; 
διακινδυνεύειν, 47. 
11; διακρίνεσθαι, 
34. 26; διαλαμβά- 
νειν, 73. 9; διαλεί- 
mew, 38. 14; δια- 
μάχεσθαι, 63. 1; 
διαπολέμησις, 42. 
954; διατείχισμα, 
60. 9; διάφορον, 55. 
9; διαφρεῖν, 32. 6; 
διαφυγγάνειν, 44. 
45; διαψύξαι, 12. 
13. 


δίψος, $7. 11. 
δυνάστης, 33. 19. 
Suvarai, of ships, 60. 12. 


δυσανασχετεῖν, 71. 99. 


ε , - > 
ἑαυτούς, for σφᾶς at- 


τούς, 44. 41. 


εἶναι = ὑπάρχειν, 5. 8; 


> 
εκ: 


36. 21, 28; γο. 28. 
ἐξ ἀναγκαίου, 60. 
24; ἐξ ἐναντίας, 44. 
99. 


22 ; ἐξ ὅσου, 73.25; 
ἐκ περιπλοῦ. 36.15; 
ἐκ τοῦ εἰκότος, 66. 
11; 68.14: ἐκ τοῦ ἐπὶ 
θάτερα. 37.9; ἐκ τοῦ 
σφαλῆναι, 68. 18. 
ἐξανίστασθαι, 40. 
19; ἐκγίγνεσθαι, 68. 
6; ἐξηγεῖσθαι, το. 
52 : ἐξορμάν, τ4. 5. 


ἐλπὶς tov φόβου, 61. 8. 


ἐλπίζειν, with aor. inf. 


21: ἧς 


GREEK INDEX. 


εν: 


> 
επι-: 


ἐν δεξιᾷ λαβών, 1. | 


6; ἐν ἐλπίσι ὦν, 
25. 4; ἐν ἐπιστο- 
λαῖς ἴστε, II. 1; 
ἐν πλαισίῳ, 78. 5; 


ἐν τῷ ἀγγέλῳ, 8. | 


15; ἐν τῷ ἐπ᾽ ἐκεῖνα, 
58. 5; ἐν τοῖς πρῶ- 
τοι, 19. 19. 


: ἐμβάλλειν, 34. 20; 


70. 54; ἐμβολή, 70. 
25 ; ἔμβολον, 40. 17; 
ἐγγίγνεσθαι, 50. 54; 


ἐνδιδόναι, 66. 16; | 


ἐνθύμιον, το. 


29 | 


ἐνορᾶν, 36.6; ép- | 
παρασχεῖν, 56.21; | 


ἔμψυχος, 29. 23. 


48. 16; ἐπ᾽ αὐτὸ 
τοῦτο, 36. 3; ἐπ᾽ 


en ae 
αὐτῴ τούτῳ, 34.21; 
> ‘ ' , 

ἐπὶ μίαν πόλιν, 56. 
23; ἐφ᾽ ὅσον, 66. 
4; ἐπὶ πολύ, 11. 
19; ἐπὶ στρατιάν, 
η. 6; ἐπὶ τὸ βέλ- 
τιον χωρεῖν, 50. 19; 
ἐπὶ τῷ πεδίῳ. 10. 
9; (besides) 


τοῖς ὅπλοις, 75. 30. 


ἐπὶ 


ἐπαγγέλλειν, 17. 
2; ἐπάγειν. 5. 14; 
46.4; 60. 6; ἐπακ- 
Tos, 28. 
yoy, 4. 
μένοι, 51. 
βαίνειν, 62. 6; 70. 
2 


ae 


δ; ἐπανα- 
. 5 > 

21; ἐπηρ- 
2; ém- 


9 ἐπιβολή. 
12; ἐπεξάγειν, 
8; 
10 ; ἐπέχειν, 62. 18; 
(with acc. of time), 


74. 1; ἐπέσχον τὸ 


ἐπεκπλεῖν, 


ee U »“ 
: ἐπ᾿ ἀμφότερα ἔχων, 


> 
€o-: 


ἐπιχειρεῖν, 33. 11; 
ἐπιέναι, 78.1; ém- 
Bevacpos, 75.19; ἐπι- 
καταβαίνειν, 23. 2; 
ἐπικηρυκεύειν, 48. 
14; ἐπικρατεῖν, 42. 
90; ἐπίλοιπος, 22. 
13; ἐπιμέλεσθαι, 8. 
18; ἐπιμεταπέμ- 
πεσθαι, 7. 13; ἐποι- 
κεῖν, 27. 11; ἐποι- 
κοδομεῖν, 4. 11; 
ἐπονομάζειν, 69. 
10; ἐφοράν, 61. 5; 
ἐφορμεῖν, 3. 21; 4. 
20 ; ἐπιπαριέναι, 76. 
2; ἐπιπέμπειν, 15. 
7; ἐπιπληροῦν, 14. 
6; ἐπιρρωννύναι, 7. 
15; ἐπισκευαζειν, 
1.2; ἐπιστήμη, 63. 
22; ἐπιτρέπειν, 18. 
24; ἐπιτυγχάνειν, 
25. 8; ἐπίφθονος, 
77. 14; ἐπιχώριος, 
30. 11; ἐπιψηφί- 
fev, 16. 6; ἐπωτί- 
Ses, 34. 22. 

és ἀναβολάς, 15. 
12; ἐς ὀλίγον, 36. 
50. 

ἐσβολή, 27. 15; 
ἐσηγεῖσθαι, 73. 5. 


ἔχειν (retain), 27. 6; 


(=Kwdvew), 62. 15 ; 
- πλέον, 36. 6; 
-- πλεῖστον, 36. 27 ; 
— ἔλασσον, 36. 16; 
σχεῖν with dat. 1. 
14. 


εὖ ποιεῖν, 15. 11. 
εὐπραγία, 46. 2. 
εὑρών, 31. 8. 


ζεῦγμα, 69. 28. 
ζεύγη, 27. 24. 


ἡλικία, 60. 20. 
ἡλίου τροπή, 16. 10. 
ἣν μή τις, 11. 15. 


θειασμός, 50. 30. 
(τὸ) θεῖον, 77. 17. 
θεράπων, 13. 9. 


ἵπποι, 51. 15. 

ἰσόρροπος, 71. 2. 

ἴσος; 27. 17. 

ἴσον Kal παραπλήσιον, 
42. 10. 

ἴσχειν, 50. 20. 

Ἰταλία, 25. 6; 33. 21. 


καί (and so), 60. 21; 
64.7; (introducing 
immediate  fulfil- 
ment of a resolu- 
tion), 75. 2; (act- 
ually), 73. 6. 

κατά: κατ᾽ ἀνάγκην, 57. 
24; (οὐ) κατ᾽ ἀξίαν, 
γ7. 12; κατὰ βραχύ, 
79. 23; κατὰ γῆν, 
28.2; καθ ἕκαστα, 
8. 5; καθ᾽ ἕν τῶν 
πραγμάτων, 75. 4; 
καθ᾽ ὅσον, 37. 6. 

κατα-: καταράσσειν, 6. 
15; καταβυρσοῦν, 
65. 7; κατήφεια, 
75. 24; καθέζεσθαι, 
67. 13; κατέχειν, 
66. 11; καθιστάναι, 
28. 6; καταλαμβά- 


vey, 30. 1; κατα- | 


λείπεσθαι, 2. 23; 
75. 11; κατάλογος. 
16. 7; καταλύειν 


GREEK INDEX. 


KaTa-: 


(τὸν πόλεμον), 31. | 


17; καταμέμφε- 
σθαι, 77. 3; κατα- 
'προδιδόναι, 48. 26; 
κατατραυματίζειν, 
41. 10; “καταφέρε- 
σθαι, 53. 9; κατά- 
φενξις, 38. 16. 
κείμενος, 75. 10. 
κεραῖαι, 11. ὅ. 
κρούεσθαι πρύμναν, 40. 
9: 
(6) κύκλος, 2. 20. 


λαμπρός, 55. 1. 
(τὸ) λεγόμενον, 68. 6. 
λιθοτομίαι, δ6. 5. 


μαχαιροφόρος, 27. 1. 

μακρᾶν, 13. 8. 

μεγέθη, 55. 8. 

μέν, without correla- 
tive, 55. 2. 

μετά: μετ᾽ ἀλλήλων στή- 
ναι, 57.4; per av- 
τούς, 58. 2. 

peta-: μεταβολή, 55. 9; 
76.1; μετανιστάναι, 
39-10; μετέωρος, 71. 
30 ; μεταπέμπειν, 8. 
7; μεταχειρίζειν, 
87. 2. 

μνήμη, 8. 10. 

μόριον, 58. 6. 

μυριοφόρος, 25. 29. 

μυχός, 4. 21; 52. 10. 


ναυβάτης, 75. 44. 
ναυλοχεῖν, 4. 98. 


| ψεοδαμώδεις,19.10; ς 8.12, 


νεώριον, 22. 7. 
νεωτερίζειν, 87. 6. 
νόσος vedpitis, 15. 9. 


ξηρότης, 12. 10, 


| 


197 


Euv-: ξυναναπείθειν, 21. 
8 ; ξυναπονεύειν, 71. 
18; ξυγγιγνώσκειν, 
73. 10; ξύνθημα, 
44. 23; ξυγκρούειν, 
36. 20; ξύλλογος, 
31.24; ξυσκευαΐειν, 


74. 4; ξύστασις, 
71. 35; ξυσταδον, 
81. 24; ξυντειχί- 
tev, 7. 4; ξυντέ. 


pve, 36. 7; ξυντυγ- 
Xaver, 70. 92. 


οἰκεῖος, 44. 10. 

ὄλεθρος, 27. 13. 

ὀλίγον οὐδὲν ἐς οὐδέν, 
59. 9; 87. 28. 

ὁμοῖα τοῖς μάλιστα, 29. 
24, 

ὅμως, 1.12; 44.4; 48.31. 

ὅπλα (watch-posts) 28.8. 

ὅπως, after verba cu- 
ran di, 56.6;—dayv 
with opt. 65. 8; 
with indic. pres. 
67. 12. 

ὀργή, 68. 2. 

ὅσα ye, 11. 18. 

ὁτὲ μέν, ὁτὲ δέ, 27. 16. 

6 τι τάχος, 42. 27. 

οὖν, resumptive, 6. 7. 

ὄχλος, 56. 28; 62. 2, 6. 

οὐδεμιᾶς ἥσσων μᾶλλον 
ἑτέρας, 29. 29. 


παιανισμός, 44. 82. 

πάλιν, 44. 42. 

πάλιν, αὖ, 46. 2. 

πανωλεθρία, 8γ. 24. 

παρά: παρὰ βραχύ τι, 
2.19; παρ᾽ ἐλπίδα, 
66.15; παρὰ λόγον, 
71. 42; παρὰ το- 
σοῦτον, 2. 29. 


198 


παρα-: παραβοηθεῖν, 70. 
δ᾽ παρελθεῖν,6.8,10; 
παρεξειρεσία,34.21; 
παρακαλεῖν, 20. ὃ; 
παρακομιδή, 28. 1; 
παραλαμβάνειν. 58. 
8; παράλογος, 28. 
17; 55. 4; wapa- 
λύειν (τῆς ἀρχῆς), 
16. 2; παροικοδο- 
petv, 6. 16; τι. 14; 
παραπλεῖν, 26. 14; 
40. 22; 56.2; παρα- 
πλήσιον, 19.8; πα- 
ρασκευάζεσθαι, 17. 
1; 325. 2; πᾶρα- 
σκευή, 36. 9; παρα- 
τείχισμα, 42. 28; 
παράφραγμα,25.24. 

πείθεσθαι, with gen. 73. 
ΠΣ 

πειρᾶν, 12. 7. 

πέμψις, 17. 9. 

περαίνεσθαι, 43. 84. 

περί: (ὄντι) περὶ ταῦτα, 
31. 11; (τὰ) περὶ 
τὸ πεδίον, το. 4. 


περι-: περιαγγέλλειν, 
18. 28; περιορᾶν 


(with partic.), 6. 
3; (with inf.), 73. 
6; περιιστάναι, 18. 
26; περιμάχητος, 
84. 22; περιμένειν, 
20. 16; περιπόλια, 
48. 32; περιφέρειν, 
28. 20; περιστα- 
Sov, 81. 24. 
πλὴν ὅσον, 23. 20. 
πληρώματα, 4. 27. 
πλοῦς (as measure of 
distance), 50, 13. 
ποιεῖν (= valere),6.5. 
πονεῖν (of ships), 38.11. 


GREEK INDEX. 


πόνηρα, 48. 3. 
πρὶν δή, 39. ὃ. 
προ-: προεξανάγειν,70.1; 
προκόπτειν, 56. 22; 
προλαμβάνειν, 80. 
17; προλιπεῖν, 75.18; 
προορμίζειν, 38. 12 ; 
προπυνθάνεσθαι, 32. 
4; προτείχισμα, 43. 
26 ;arpodacts, 13.15. 
πρός (in consequence of ), 
47-2; 74. 1; πρὸς ὅ 
τι χωρῆσαι, 44. 15; 
πρὸς ἑαυτών, 36.18. 
προσ- : προσάγεσθαι, 7. 
"8; 55- 10; προσα- 
ναγκαΐζειν, 18. 31; 
πρόσβασις, 45. 2; 
προσβολή, 4. 51; 
γο. 20; προσέχειν, 
4. 22; προσκαθη- 
σθαι, 47. 18, προσ- 
οφείλειν, 48. 95; 
προσπέμπειν, 3. 4; 
προστάσσειν (ἄρ- 
χοντα), 19. 29. 
πρότερος, 51. 10; πρό- 
τερον ἡ With subjv. 
without ἄν, 63. 3. 
πρῴ, 19. 1. 
πωλεῖσθαι, 39. 9. 
ῥώμη, 18. 8. 


σβεστήρια, 53. 29. 

σημαίνειν, 44. 20; 50. 
24. 

σμικρός, 75. 26. 

σπένδεσθαι (with inf.), 
83. 4. 

σφέτερος, 1. 27; 4. 10; 
8: 150. 

σφίσι, referring to 
nearest subj. 5. 2. 


ταρσός, 40. 21. 


τε, position of, 36. 38; 
84.15; introducing 
the third of a series, 
15. 8; 2% 183) Go. 
15; 70. 19; resump- 
tive, 70.21; 71. 21; 
τε yap, 81. 12. 

τετρυχωμένος, 28. 28. 

τις (with numerals), 
33. 1 

τὸ δέ τι καί, 48. 7. 

τὸ κρατίστους elvat,67.3. 

τόξευμα, 30.7; 43. 16. 

τοσοῦτον, ὅσον, ὥστε, 
28. 18. 

τότε, 31. 12; καὶ τότε, 
29. 25. 

τροφή, 48. 37. 

ἔτυχεν ἐλθών, 2. 16. 

ὑπο-: τὸ ὑπάρχον, 67. 
1; ὑποδοχή, 74. 11; 
ὑποκρίνεσθαι, 44. 
31; ὑπολείπεσθαι, 
20. 15: ΖΞ ΑΝ; 45: 
19; ὑπομιμνήσκειν 
(with ace.), 64. 1; 
ὑποπίπτειν, 40. 21; 
ὑποχωρεῖν, 70. 52. 

φαίνεσθαι ἐς, 56. 9. 

φαῦλος, 77. 8. 

φόβος καὶ δεῖμα, 80. 13. 


χειροτέχναι, 27. 29. 

χερσαῖος, 67. 11. 

χηλή, 53. ὅ. 

χρήματα, 24. 7. 

ὡς : -- ὥστε, 34. 23; 
ὡς εἰπεῖν, 58. 22; 
ὡς εἶχον τάχους, 2. 
2 (of. 57. 5); ὡς ἐκ 
κακῶν, 42. 13 (cf. 
74. 4; 76. 2); ὡς 
ἐπί (with dat.), 30. 
20; 34. 4. 


INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 


Acarnanians, 31 a, C; 
57¢; 60c; 67b. 
Accusative (abs.), 5.17; 
18. 14; (cognate), 
24.12; (adv.), 55.9; 
(with pass.), 34, 21. 
Achaia, 34 ἃ, c. 
Acraeum Lepas, 78. 24. 
Adjective (articular 
neut. = abstract 
noun), 68. 5; 87. 4; 
(meut. pl.), 43. 13; 
60. 8; (pred. of 
effect), 4. 11; (pred. 
in attrib. position), 
25 he 
Adverb (for adj.), 4. 18; 
28. 3; (with prep.), 
83. 18. 
Aeginetans, 20 c; 264; 
57. 9. 
Aenians, 57. 23. 
Aeolians, 57 b. 
Aetolians, 57. 51. 
Agatharcus, 25 a; 70 a. 
TAGISH1O 15 27 C. 
Agrigentines, 32 b; 33 
a; 46.3; 50a; 58a. 
Alcibiades, 18 a. 
Alexarchus, 19 ¢. 
Alicyae, 32. 6. 
Allies, of Athens, 57; of 
Syracuse, 58. 
Alyzea, 31. 10. 
Ambraciots, 7 a; 25 α; 
58 b. 
Amphipolis, 9 a. 


Anacoluthon, 13.6; 15. 
133) 28: 125 42: 9; 
47. 5; 49. 6; 56. 21; 
75. 94. 

Anactorium, 31 a. 

Anapus, 43a; 78a. 

Andrians, 57 a. 

Aorist, inf. after ἀξιοῦν, 
5. 19; epistolary, 
14. 21; ingressive, 
57.6; iterative, 71. 
12. 

Apollo, temple of, 26. 8. 

Apposition, 27. 8; 36. 
26 ; 69. 18; part., 2. 
Wile 22. Ὁ; yh, 9, δ, 
46; 45. 8; 50. 28; 
62.6; 71. 4, 33; 78. 
13} 80. 2: 

Arcadians, 19 6; 576; 
58 Ὁ. 

Archonidas, I. 20. 
Argives, 18b; 20a; 26 
C3; 440; 570. 

Aristo, 39. 5. 

Artas, 33. 19. 

Article (any), 62. 14; 
65. 17 ; omitted with 
second noun, 7. 1; 
14.9; 36. 38. 

Assimilation, of gender, 
3. UB Re 25... 90.) (ui 
pron. 21. 24; of 
MOMs Owe LOS οἷ 
inf. in rel. clause 
47. 16. 

Asyndeton, 71.22; 77.2. 


Athenians, camp of, 4. 
24; 23.8; audacity, 
21 Ὁ; character of, 
14¢; 48 Ὁ; c; de- 
sire for and extent 
of sway, 66b; imi- 
tated, 63 b; reduced 
to straits, 27; 28; 
number of army, 
75. 26; losses, 85. 
15; captives, how 
treated, 87. 12. 

Attica, invasion of, 19. 
Ἄν 270 ΤᾺΣ 

Attraction, of number, 
62. 12, 18; of case, 


Boeotarch, 30. 17. 

Boeotia, 19a; 292. 

Boeotians, 19 b; 43. 46; 
57. 24; 58 Ὁ. 


Cacyparis, 8ο. 21. 

Camarinaeans, 33. 2; 58 
a; 80a. 

Carystians, 57a. 

Catana, 14 Ὁ; 42 Ὁ; 49. 
10; 5γ6; 60a,b; 80. 
8; 85. 23. 

Caulonia, 25. 9. 

Ceans, 57a. 

Centuripa, 32. 5. 

Cephallenians, 31 a; 57 
b. 

Chalcis, 29 a. 

Chalcidians, 57 a. 


200 


Charicles, 20. 3; 26. 4. 
Chians, 20b; 57. 16. 
Chiasmus, 5. 17; 49. 16; 
Biya: 
Choerades, 33. 16. 
Conon, 31. 15. 
Construction, change of, 
60. δ: 70. 440877. 
19; --- κατὰ σύνεσιν, 
79. 14. 
Co-ordination of differ- 
ent constructions, 4. 
205 013: ere: 
Wo 2s) 275 10 7:30: 
63 9: se aor M0: 
FE. Os 70. ACs 75: 
ZA τ ΟΥ̓ 
Corcyra, 26 c; 31 a, Ὁ; 
33; 446. 
Cretans, 57 c. 
Cross-wall, 4.5; 5. 3; 6. 
Oey. ΑΞ τὰ Loss: 
7, 59. 
Crotonia, 35 a. 
Cyrenaeans, 50 a. 
Cythera, 26 Ὁ; 57b. 


Dative, of advantage, 
56. ie 2o heels) Yor 
possession, 49. 3; 
in loose connection, 
34. 7; of agent, 4. 
32; of interest, 10. 
29; instrumental, 5. 
13; causal, 77. 4; 
with ἐν, after verbs 
of motion, 71. 40; 
with πλησθέν, 75. 
20; with ἐλθεῖν, 73. 
5; with ἥκειν, 17. 7. 

Demosthenes, 16. 8; 17 
ἃ ΘΙ ΟΣ 26, ΩΣ: 
33 Ὁ, 6; 353 42-44; 
47 b, ο; 49; 69ς; 


INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 


! 


Demosthenes, 
72 b; 755; 
86a, b. 

Din 2720 

Diitrephes, 29. 4; 30. 13. 

Diphilus, 34. 15. 

Dorians, 5. 18; 574, 6. 

Double-wall, 2. 17. 

Dryopians, 57. 20. 


78-82; 


Eccritus, 19 b. 

Eclipse, 50. 27. 

Egestaeans, 57 Ὁ. 

Eleans, 31 a. 

Ellipsis, 38. 4; 74. 16; 
75-25; 79. 22. 

Epanalepsis, 48. 25. 

Epanaphora, 18. 1. 

Epidaurus, 18 Ὁ. 

Epidaurus Limera, 26. 7. 


2; 54; 420; 430; 
44 c; 45a; 466; 
47 b. 

Erasinides, 7 a. 

Erineus, in Achaia, 34. 
6, 39; river in 
Sicily, 80.28; 82 c. 

Etruscans, 53-6; 546; 
57 Ὁ: 

Euboea, 28a; 574. 

Euesperitae, 50. 10. 

Euetion, 9. 1. 

Euripus, 29a; 30a. 

Euryelus, 2b; 43b. 

Eurymedon, 16. 9; 31. 
11; 42a; 49 6; 52. 
8. 

Euthydemus, 16.5; 69¢. 


Fate, 68. 1. 


| Geloans, 1c; 33. 4; 50 
a; 58a; 80a. 


Epipolae, 1. 5; 2 Ὁ; 4. | 


Genitive, abs., 14. 12; 
15. 5, 135 25.Π5. 
51.3; appositional, 
42. 9; Ἀδεξ" 5. 18. 
Il. 15: τὴ 0 
12; 47. 18; with 
comp. in formulas 
for ἤ, 71. 37; posi- 
tion of, 24.5; 31.24; 
pers. gen. with ἠσ- 
σᾶσθαι, 40. 5. 

Gongylus, 2. 2. 

Gylippus, αἰ 8; 
48; 5a; Dy 6; 10; 
11:8} ΥΖΣ ΘΕ hee 
228; 238; 378; 43. 
38; 46b; 50 a; 53 
a; 65 a; 66-68; 74 
b; 79b; 82a; 83 b; 
85 a; 86a. 


Hegesander, 19 Ὁ. 
Helots, 19. 15; 26 b; 
58 b. 
Hercules, 
73. 
Hermaeum, 29 b. 
Hermocrates, 21 a, C; 
73: ἢ 
Hestiaea, 57. 9. 
Himera, 1 ἃ, b. 
Himeraeans, 58. a. 
Himeraeum, 9. 5. 
Hoplites, pay of, 27. 7. 
Hyccara, 13. 17. 
Hylias, 35. 7. 


festival of, 


Iapygians, 33. 16; 57 ¢. 

Tetae, 2. 12. 

Imbros, 57. 8. 

Imperfect, 8. 4; 20. 7; 
45. 8; inchoative, 
1. 81; 43eiseae 
anticipation, 56, 17; 
= plpf., 36. 4. 


Infinitive, abs., 4c. 18; 
by assimilation, 47. 
16; pres. as fut., 
56. 11; appos. to 
verbal noun, 67. 3; 
with μή after verbs 
of hindering, 6.19; 
17.5; 29. 14; 53.28; 
60. 6; in indir. disc. 
after εἶπον, 35. 8. 

Ionian Sea, 33. 14; 57. 
57. 

Tonians, 5 c; 57 ἃ. 

Ionic forms, 4. 34. 


Labdalum, 3. 19. 

Lacedaemonians, 7 b; 
19 a. ΄ 

Laconia, 26a; 31a. 

Lemnians, 57. 8. 

Leucadians, 7a; 58b. 

Leucas, 2 ἃ. 

Libya, 5ο. 8. 

Litotes, 25. 41. 

Locri Epizephyrii, 1a; 
mes 25a 5 35: 12. 

Lysimelea, 53. 10. 


Mantinaeans, 57 c. 
Medes, 26b. 
’ Megara Hyblaea, 25. 15. 
Megarians, 57 b. 
Menander, 16a; 69¢. 
Messapians, 33 b. 
Messene, 1 b. 
Messenians, 31 a; 57.40. 
Metapontians, 33¢; 57. 
58. 
Methymnaeans, 57. 22. 
Milesians, 57 a. 
Mood shifted, 17. 14; 


39. 14. 
Mycalessus, 29; 30 c. 


Naxos, 14b; 576. 


INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 


Naupactus, 17. ΟΠ αν ἢ Plemmyrium, As Oiees 


28; 31 a, b; 34 a; 
57. 40. 

Neapolis, 50. 12. 

Nicias, 1. 12; 4b, c; 6 
a; 8; 10-15; 16a; 
328; 38b; 43. 11, 
19's δ». ποι Ὁ; 66 
€; 61-64; 69; 72 
b, ¢3 73. ΟΣ 75 a; 
76; 773 78a; 80a, 
b; 81b; 82c; 84; 
85a; 86. 

Nicon, 19 Ὁ. 


Olympieum, 4c; 37b; 
43 a. 

Order of words, 23. 7; 
ΖΔ ΕΝ 34.53 30. 
17; 55. 6; 57. 46; 
66. 8. 

Oropus, 28 a. 


Palisade, 38. 12. 

Parataxis, 4. 5; 22. 2; 
AB. 015 48. 12, 10; 
Bop ABA 62. IOS ey 
16. 

Participle, attrib. placed 

after noun, 23. 15; 
with ἄν = aor. opt. 
"67. 26; pres. of 
purpose, 3..4; 25. 
40; fut. pf., 25. 46; 
articular neut., 43. 
44; 68.5; 83. 15; 
verbal subst., 28.25; 
42.10. 

Perdiccas, 9. 2. 

Personal construction, 
48; G63; 11; 67. 
8) 70. 22. 

Petra, 35. 13: 

Phea, 31. 3. 

Plataeans, 18 Ὁ; 57. 25. 


201 
as ΠΑΝ Cea ae 
25. 3 ιν, 56:6; 


Polyanthes, 34 a. 

Prasiae, 18 b. 

Proverbial sentiments, 
68: 63 ες 5; Ti. 
39 ; 87. 24. 

Pronoun, pers. for re- 
flexive, 17. 16; re- 
flexive after comp., 
66. 14; reflexive for 
pers., 70. 12; rel. not 
repeated, 29. 27; pl. 
rel. referring to 
collective noun, 1. 
9; 75. 39; pers. rel. 
referring to neut. 
adj., 68. 3. 

Pylus, 18b; 26. 12; 57: 
40; 86b. 

Pythen, 1a; 70a. 


Rhegium, 1b; 4c; 35e. 
Rhodians, 57 Ὁ. 
Rhypice, 34 ἃ. 


Samians, 57 a. 

Sargeus, 19 6. 

Scirphondas, 30 ec. 

Sea-fights, 22; 34; 38a; 
40; 41; 52; 53; 69 
CH ΤΟΙ; 71} 75.1.5. 

Selinuntians, 1 b,c; 50. 
14; 58a. 

Ship-houses, 25. 20. 


Sicanus, 46. 4; το ἃ; 
70 a. 

Sicels; Te: 2 be sya: 
58. 10. ; 


Siceliotes, 18a; 58 6. 
Sicyonians, 19. 25; 58b. 
Signal for battle, 34. 15. 
“Six-Hundred,” 43. 29. 
Slaves, 27. 22. 


202 


Stade (itinerary), 59.6; | 
| Text emended, 2. 20; 6. 


78. 14. 
Strymon, 9c. 
Styrians, 57 a. 
Subject-allies, 57. 18. 
Subjunctive (delibera- 
tive), 1.7; 14.6. 
Sunium, 28 a. 
Supplies (for Athenian 
army), 16.12; 28.1. 
Sybaris, 35. 5. 


Taenarum, 19 b. 

Talent (as unit of meas- 
ure), 25. 23. 

Tanagra, 20. 6. 

Tarentum, I a. 

Taxes (twentieth), 28. 
27; to impose 
(ποιεῖν), 28. 29. 

Temenitis, 3. 14. 

Tenedians, 57 b. 


INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 


Tenians, 57: 16. Text restored, 
1; 56. 17; 57. 405 
72.93; 75. 12 Ὁ 85. Ὁ 
Thapsus, 49. 10. 
Thebans, 18 b; 
30. 
Thespians, 19 b; 25a. 
Thracians, 9. 3; 27.1; 
29; 30; mode of 
fighting, 30. 11. 
Thucydides, 18 ο. ¢ 
Thuria, 33. 24; 35 b. 
Thurians, 33 Ὁ 35 a3 
57. 58. 
Tmesis, 33. 7; 43. 4. 
Transport-vessels, 
10; 19. 13. 
Trogilus, 2. 21. 


ἜΠΕΑ tie tog to ad Hs 
1A eae 2600; 
92.165 ἘΠῚ 92: 99. 
36.187 38. 2; 30. 
12; 40.17; 43. 35; 
ΠΡ ἄν 7); 46. 
4; 48. 20; 49. 8, 6, 
9,19; 50. 8, 25; 53. 
215 55- 10; 56. 238; 
57- 3, 5, 59; 58. 9, 
ISSO OT. 8: 
63. 18, 16, 18; 64. 
1. Ὅν. 25. 68. 65 
7ῸΣ ΕΣ, LSS); 78: 
19, 30, 39; 77.17; 
78.8; 79. 2; 80.14; 
81. 21; 87. 19. 
Text restored, 1. 16; 2. 
ἘΠ: e235 51. 30. 1 
48. 39; 53. 4; 55. | Zacynthus, 31a; 57 Ὁ. 


19 Ὁ; 


τῆ. 


Xenon, 19 Ὁ. 


Lig? ὃν G.Wioyntom 


Honton:Ginn & Company 


εἰν ἡ, ra 
we yA 
ἡ ὦ co ” 


ne 
DA 


f2. 
TUN 


0122. 
Un 


κ᾽) ΕΣ 9. 300) % ἘΞ. ae “ey 


ἣν 


ὶ) ἣν 
‘i νὰ 


ie ἢ 


τοῦ HUM 


NY 
peta 


wy oa 


: 


Sasi 


nf 


SMa 


Sj ate ih \ 
ῳ ἥ i» 


Aik iit os 


Νὰ i) Hy, 


‘Ei or 5 δ ‘eg 
10, ic Stadia. 


a 


sit eae a 4 


. ?oympic Stadia. 


"Boston: Gian & Compimy. 
‘ 


ἰ 


ὙΠ 


λιν 
vy 
j 


᾿ ne a 
iy Π ΕΙΣ \ Π 

ae Um a u fp 
i . 7 ᾿ ἢ ΄ Π 

᾿ ᾿ 

> 
7 ὥ =. 
ΓΔ, 
" ν ᾿ 
᾿ . 
᾿ 
f 


᾿ 
τ ᾿ 
. 
͵ ᾿ 
᾿ ᾿ 
τ 
i 
ἢ 
, i 
> ᾿ 
ὃ i 


UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA AT LOS ANGELES 
THE UNIVERSITY LIBRARY 
This book is DUE on the last date stamped below 


SEP 2.2 194 
DEC5 1950 


NOV 23 1951, 


dec 1.2 1952 


JAN 2 . RECD 
JAN2 1 RECD 


nec 28 1964 


Ὁ 
ΓΝ pet 2 868 4. 
wor o 


Form L-9 
20m -1,’42(8519) 


UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACIL! 


ae 
Ot 
rus 
Ae 


᾿ς 
τ 


“oy ‘ ve a ys< 
Tet tat 


ν᾿ 
ub 
te 


